This is calc.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.7 from calc.texi.

This file documents Calc, the GNU Emacs calculator.

   Copyright © 1990–1991, 2001–2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being just “GNU GENERAL
     PUBLIC LICENSE”, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,”
     and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.  A copy of the
     license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation
     License.”

     (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.”
INFO-DIR-SECTION Emacs misc features
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
* Calc: (calc).                 Advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool.
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY


File: calc.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Getting Started,  Prev: (dir),  Up: (dir)

The GNU Emacs Calculator
************************

“Calc” is an advanced desk calculator and mathematical tool written by
Dave Gillespie that runs as part of the GNU Emacs environment.

   This manual, also written (mostly) by Dave Gillespie, is divided into
three major parts: “Getting Started,” the “Calc Tutorial,” and the “Calc
Reference.” The Tutorial introduces all the major aspects of Calculator
use in an easy, hands-on way.  The remainder of the manual is a complete
reference to the features of the Calculator.

   For help in the Emacs Info system (which you are using to read this
file), type ‘?’.  (You can also type ‘h’ to run through a longer Info
tutorial.)

   This file documents Calc, the GNU Emacs calculator.

   Copyright © 1990–1991, 2001–2021 Free Software Foundation, Inc.

     Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this
     document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License,
     Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software
     Foundation; with the Invariant Sections being just “GNU GENERAL
     PUBLIC LICENSE”, with the Front-Cover Texts being “A GNU Manual,”
     and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below.  A copy of the
     license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation
     License.”

     (a) The FSF’s Back-Cover Text is: “You have the freedom to copy and
     modify this GNU manual.”

* Menu:

* Getting Started::       General description and overview.
* Interactive Tutorial::
* Tutorial::              A step-by-step introduction for beginners.

* Introduction::          Introduction to the Calc reference manual.
* Data Types::            Types of objects manipulated by Calc.
* Stack and Trail::       Manipulating the stack and trail buffers.
* Mode Settings::         Adjusting display format and other modes.
* Arithmetic::            Basic arithmetic functions.
* Scientific Functions::  Transcendentals and other scientific functions.
* Matrix Functions::      Operations on vectors and matrices.
* Algebra::               Manipulating expressions algebraically.
* Units::                 Operations on numbers with units.
* Store and Recall::      Storing and recalling variables.
* Graphics::              Commands for making graphs of data.
* Kill and Yank::         Moving data into and out of Calc.
* Keypad Mode::           Operating Calc from a keypad.
* Embedded Mode::         Working with formulas embedded in a file.
* Programming::           Calc as a programmable calculator.

* Copying::               How you can copy and share Calc.
* GNU Free Documentation License:: The license for this documentation.
* Customizing Calc::      Customizing Calc.
* Reporting Bugs::        How to report bugs and make suggestions.

* Summary::               Summary of Calc commands and functions.

* Key Index::             The standard Calc key sequences.
* Command Index::         The interactive Calc commands.
* Function Index::        Functions (in algebraic formulas).
* Concept Index::         General concepts.
* Variable Index::        Variables used by Calc (both user and internal).
* Lisp Function Index::   Internal Lisp math functions.


File: calc.info,  Node: Getting Started,  Next: Interactive Tutorial,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top

1 Getting Started
*****************

This chapter provides a general overview of Calc, the GNU Emacs
Calculator: What it is, how to start it and how to exit from it, and
what are the various ways that it can be used.

* Menu:

* What is Calc::
* About This Manual::
* Notations Used in This Manual::
* Demonstration of Calc::
* Using Calc::
* History and Acknowledgments::


File: calc.info,  Node: What is Calc,  Next: About This Manual,  Prev: Getting Started,  Up: Getting Started

1.1 What is Calc?
=================

“Calc” is an advanced calculator and mathematical tool that runs as part
of the GNU Emacs environment.  Very roughly based on the HP-28/48 series
of calculators, its many features include:

   • Choice of algebraic or RPN (stack-based) entry of calculations.

   • Arbitrary precision integers and floating-point numbers.

   • Arithmetic on rational numbers, complex numbers (rectangular and
     polar), error forms with standard deviations, open and closed
     intervals, vectors and matrices, dates and times, infinities, sets,
     quantities with units, and algebraic formulas.

   • Mathematical operations such as logarithms and trigonometric
     functions.

   • Programmer’s features (bitwise operations, non-decimal numbers).

   • Financial functions such as future value and internal rate of
     return.

   • Number theoretical features such as prime factorization and
     arithmetic modulo M for any M.

   • Algebraic manipulation features, including symbolic calculus.

   • Moving data to and from regular editing buffers.

   • Embedded mode for manipulating Calc formulas and data directly
     inside any editing buffer.

   • Graphics using GNUPLOT, a versatile (and free) plotting program.

   • Easy programming using keyboard macros, algebraic formulas,
     algebraic rewrite rules, or extended Emacs Lisp.

   Calc tries to include a little something for everyone; as a result it
is large and might be intimidating to the first-time user.  If you plan
to use Calc only as a traditional desk calculator, all you really need
to read is the “Getting Started” chapter of this manual and possibly the
first few sections of the tutorial.  As you become more comfortable with
the program you can learn its additional features.  Calc does not have
the scope and depth of a fully-functional symbolic math package, but
Calc has the advantages of convenience, portability, and freedom.


File: calc.info,  Node: About This Manual,  Next: Notations Used in This Manual,  Prev: What is Calc,  Up: Getting Started

1.2 About This Manual
=====================

This document serves as a complete description of the GNU Emacs
Calculator.  It works both as an introduction for novices and as a
reference for experienced users.  While it helps to have some experience
with GNU Emacs in order to get the most out of Calc, this manual ought
to be readable even if you don’t know or use Emacs regularly.

   This manual is divided into three major parts: the “Getting Started”
chapter you are reading now, the Calc tutorial, and the Calc reference
manual.

   If you are in a hurry to use Calc, there is a brief “demonstration”
below which illustrates the major features of Calc in just a couple of
pages.  If you don’t have time to go through the full tutorial, this
will show you everything you need to know to begin.  *Note Demonstration
of Calc::.

   The tutorial chapter walks you through the various parts of Calc with
lots of hands-on examples and explanations.  If you are new to Calc and
you have some time, try going through at least the beginning of the
tutorial.  The tutorial includes about 70 exercises with answers.  These
exercises give you some guided practice with Calc, as well as pointing
out some interesting and unusual ways to use its features.

   The reference section discusses Calc in complete depth.  You can read
the reference from start to finish if you want to learn every aspect of
Calc.  Or, you can look in the table of contents or the Concept Index to
find the parts of the manual that discuss the things you need to know.

   Every Calc keyboard command is listed in the Calc Summary, and also
in the Key Index.  Algebraic functions, ‘M-x’ commands, and variables
also have their own indices.

   You can access this manual on-line at any time within Calc by
pressing the ‘h i’ key sequence.  Outside of the Calc window, you can
press ‘C-x * i’ to read the manual on-line.  From within Calc the
command ‘h t’ will jump directly to the Tutorial; from outside of Calc
the command ‘C-x * t’ will jump to the Tutorial and start Calc if
necessary.  Pressing ‘h s’ or ‘C-x * s’ will take you directly to the
Calc Summary.  Within Calc, you can also go to the part of the manual
describing any Calc key, function, or variable using ‘h k’, ‘h f’, or ‘h
v’, respectively.  *Note Help Commands::.

   The Calc manual can be printed, but because the manual is so large,
you should only make a printed copy if you really need it.  To print the
manual, you will need the TeX typesetting program (this is a free
program by Donald Knuth at Stanford University) as well as the
‘texindex’ program and ‘texinfo.tex’ file, both of which can be obtained
from the FSF as part of the ‘texinfo’ package.  To print the Calc manual
in one huge tome, you will need the Emacs source, which contains the
source code to this manual, ‘calc.texi’.  Change to the ‘doc/misc’
subdirectory of the Emacs source distribution, which contains source
code for this manual, and type ‘make calc.pdf’.  (Don’t worry if you get
some “overfull box” warnings while TeX runs.)  The result will be this
entire manual as a pdf file.


File: calc.info,  Node: Notations Used in This Manual,  Next: Demonstration of Calc,  Prev: About This Manual,  Up: Getting Started

1.3 Notations Used in This Manual
=================================

This section describes the various notations that are used throughout
the Calc manual.

   In keystroke sequences, uppercase letters mean you must hold down the
shift key while typing the letter.  Keys pressed with Control held down
are shown as ‘C-x’.  Keys pressed with Meta held down are shown as
‘M-x’.  Other notations are <RET> for the Return key, <SPC> for the
space bar, <TAB> for the Tab key, <DEL> for the Delete key, and <LFD>
for the Line-Feed key.  The <DEL> key is called Backspace on some
keyboards, it is whatever key you would use to correct a simple typing
error when regularly using Emacs.

   (If you don’t have the <LFD> or <TAB> keys on your keyboard, the
‘C-j’ and ‘C-i’ keys are equivalent to them, respectively.  If you don’t
have a Meta key, look for Alt or Extend Char.  You can also press <ESC>
or ‘C-[’ first to get the same effect, so that ‘M-x’, ‘<ESC> x’, and
‘C-[ x’ are all equivalent.)

   Sometimes the <RET> key is not shown when it is “obvious” that you
must press <RET> to proceed.  For example, the <RET> is usually omitted
in key sequences like ‘M-x calc-keypad <RET>’.

   Commands are generally shown like this: ‘p’ (‘calc-precision’) or
‘C-x * k’ (‘calc-keypad’).  This means that the command is normally used
by pressing the ‘p’ key or ‘C-x * k’ key sequence, but it also has the
full-name equivalent shown, e.g., ‘M-x calc-precision’.

   Commands that correspond to functions in algebraic notation are
written: ‘C’ (‘calc-cos’) [‘cos’].  This means the ‘C’ key is equivalent
to ‘M-x calc-cos’, and that the corresponding function in an
algebraic-style formula would be ‘cos(X)’.

   A few commands don’t have key equivalents: ‘calc-sincos’ [‘sincos’].


File: calc.info,  Node: Demonstration of Calc,  Next: Using Calc,  Prev: Notations Used in This Manual,  Up: Getting Started

1.4 A Demonstration of Calc
===========================

This section will show some typical small problems being solved with
Calc.  The focus is more on demonstration than explanation, but
everything you see here will be covered more thoroughly in the Tutorial.

   To begin, start Emacs if necessary (usually the command ‘emacs’ does
this), and type ‘C-x * c’ to start the Calculator.  (You can also use
‘M-x calc’ if this doesn’t work.  *Note Starting Calc::, for various
ways of starting the Calculator.)

   Be sure to type all the sample input exactly, especially noting the
difference between lower-case and upper-case letters.  Remember, <RET>,
<TAB>, <DEL>, and <SPC> are the Return, Tab, Delete, and Space keys.

   *RPN calculation.*  In RPN, you type the input number(s) first, then
the command to operate on the numbers.

Type ‘2 <RET> 3 + Q’ to compute the square root of 2+3, which is
2.2360679775.

Type ‘P 2 ^’ to compute the value of ‘pi’ squared, 9.86960440109.

Type <TAB> to exchange the order of these two results.

Type ‘- I H S’ to subtract these results and compute the Inverse
Hyperbolic sine of the difference, 2.72996136574.

Type <DEL> to erase this result.

   *Algebraic calculation.*  You can also enter calculations using
conventional “algebraic” notation.  To enter an algebraic formula, use
the apostrophe key.

Type ‘' sqrt(2+3) <RET>’ to compute the square root of 2+3.

Type ‘' pi^2 <RET>’ to enter ‘pi’ squared.  To evaluate this symbolic
formula as a number, type ‘=’.

Type ‘' arcsinh($ - $$) <RET>’ to subtract the second-most-recent result
from the most-recent and compute the Inverse Hyperbolic sine.

   *Keypad mode.*  If you are using the X window system, press ‘C-x * k’
to get Keypad mode.  (If you don’t use X, skip to the next section.)

Click on the <2>, <ENTER>, <3>, <+>, and <SQRT> “buttons” using your
left mouse button.

Click on <PI>, <2>, and y^x.

Click on <INV>, then <ENTER> to swap the two results.

Click on <->, <INV>, <HYP>, and <SIN>.

Click on <<-> to erase the result, then click <OFF> to turn the Keypad
Calculator off.

   *Grabbing data.*  Type ‘C-x * x’ if necessary to exit Calc.  Now
select the following numbers as an Emacs region: “Mark” the front of the
list by typing ‘C-<SPC>’ or ‘C-@’ there, then move to the other end of
the list.  (Either get this list from the on-line copy of this manual,
accessed by ‘C-x * i’, or just type these numbers into a scratch file.)
Now type ‘C-x * g’ to “grab” these numbers into Calc.

     1.23  1.97
     1.6   2
     1.19  1.08

The result ‘[1.23, 1.97, 1.6, 2, 1.19, 1.08]’ is a Calc “vector.” Type
‘V R +’ to compute the sum of these numbers.

Type ‘U’ to Undo this command, then type ‘V R *’ to compute the product
of the numbers.

You can also grab data as a rectangular matrix.  Place the cursor on the
upper-leftmost ‘1’ and set the mark, then move to just after the
lower-right ‘8’ and press ‘C-x * r’.

Type ‘v t’ to transpose this 3x2 matrix into a 2x3 matrix.  Type ‘v u’
to unpack the rows into two separate vectors.  Now type
‘V R + <TAB> V R +’ to compute the sums of the two original columns.
(There is also a special grab-and-sum-columns command, ‘C-x * :’.)

   *Units conversion.*  Units are entered algebraically.  Type
‘' 43 mi/hr <RET>’ to enter the quantity 43 miles-per-hour.  Type
‘u c km/hr <RET>’.  Type ‘u c m/s <RET>’.

   *Date arithmetic.*  Type ‘t N’ to get the current date and time.
Type ‘90 +’ to find the date 90 days from now.  Type ‘' <25 dec 87>
<RET>’ to enter a date, then ‘- 7 /’ to see how many weeks have passed
since then.

   *Algebra.*  Algebraic entries can also include formulas or equations
involving variables.  Type ‘' [x + y = a, x y = 1] <RET>’ to enter a
pair of equations involving three variables.  (Note the leading
apostrophe in this example; also, note that the space in ‘x y’ is
required.)  Type ‘a S x,y <RET>’ to solve these equations for the
variables ‘x’ and ‘y’.

Type ‘d B’ to view the solutions in more readable notation.  Type ‘d C’
to view them in C language notation, ‘d T’ to view them in the notation
for the TeX typesetting system, and ‘d L’ to view them in the notation
for the LaTeX typesetting system.  Type ‘d N’ to return to normal
notation.

Type ‘7.5’, then ‘s l a <RET>’ to let ‘a = 7.5’ in these formulas.
(That’s the letter ‘l’, not the numeral ‘1’.)

   *Help functions.*  You can read about any command in the on-line
manual.  Remember to type the letter ‘l’, then ‘C-x * c’, to return here
after each of these commands: ‘h k t N’ to read about the ‘t N’ command,
‘h f sqrt <RET>’ to read about the ‘sqrt’ function, and ‘h s’ to read
the Calc summary.

   Press <DEL> repeatedly to remove any leftover results from the stack.
To exit from Calc, press ‘q’ or ‘C-x * c’ again.


File: calc.info,  Node: Using Calc,  Next: History and Acknowledgments,  Prev: Demonstration of Calc,  Up: Getting Started

1.5 Using Calc
==============

Calc has several user interfaces that are specialized for different
kinds of tasks.  As well as Calc’s standard interface, there are Quick
mode, Keypad mode, and Embedded mode.

* Menu:

* Starting Calc::
* The Standard Interface::
* Quick Mode Overview::
* Keypad Mode Overview::
* Standalone Operation::
* Embedded Mode Overview::
* Other C-x * Commands::


File: calc.info,  Node: Starting Calc,  Next: The Standard Interface,  Prev: Using Calc,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.1 Starting Calc
-------------------

On most systems, you can type ‘C-x *’ to start the Calculator.  The key
sequence ‘C-x *’ is bound to the command ‘calc-dispatch’, which can be
rebound if convenient (*note Customizing Calc::).

   When you press ‘C-x *’, Emacs waits for you to press a second key to
complete the command.  In this case, you will follow ‘C-x *’ with a
letter (upper- or lower-case, it doesn’t matter for ‘C-x *’) that says
which Calc interface you want to use.

   To get Calc’s standard interface, type ‘C-x * c’.  To get Keypad
mode, type ‘C-x * k’.  Type ‘C-x * ?’ to get a brief list of the
available options, and type a second ‘?’ to get a complete list.

   To ease typing, ‘C-x * *’ also works to start Calc.  It starts the
same interface (either ‘C-x * c’ or ‘C-x * k’) that you last used,
selecting the ‘C-x * c’ interface by default.

   If ‘C-x *’ doesn’t work for you, you can always type explicit
commands like ‘M-x calc’ (for the standard user interface) or
‘M-x calc-keypad’ (for Keypad mode).  First type ‘M-x’ (that’s Meta with
the letter ‘x’), then, at the prompt, type the full command (like
‘calc-keypad’) and press Return.

   The same commands (like ‘C-x * c’ or ‘C-x * *’) that start the
Calculator also turn it off if it is already on.


File: calc.info,  Node: The Standard Interface,  Next: Quick Mode Overview,  Prev: Starting Calc,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.2 The Standard Calc Interface
---------------------------------

Calc’s standard interface acts like a traditional RPN calculator,
operated by the normal Emacs keyboard.  When you type ‘C-x * c’ to start
the Calculator, the Emacs screen splits into two windows with the file
you were editing on top and Calc on the bottom.


     ...
     --**-Emacs: myfile             (Fundamental)----All----------------------
     --- Emacs Calculator Mode ---                   |Emacs Calculator Trail
     2:  17.3                                        |    17.3
     1:  -5                                          |    3
         .                                           |    2
                                                     |    4
                                                     |  * 8
                                                     |  ->-5
                                                     |
     --%*-Calc: 12 Deg       (Calculator)----All----- --%*- *Calc Trail*

   In this figure, the mode-line for ‘myfile’ has moved up and the
“Calculator” window has appeared below it.  As you can see, Calc
actually makes two windows side-by-side.  The lefthand one is called the
“stack window” and the righthand one is called the “trail window.”  The
stack holds the numbers involved in the calculation you are currently
performing.  The trail holds a complete record of all calculations you
have done.  In a desk calculator with a printer, the trail corresponds
to the paper tape that records what you do.

   In this case, the trail shows that four numbers (17.3, 3, 2, and 4)
were first entered into the Calculator, then the 2 and 4 were multiplied
to get 8, then the 3 and 8 were subtracted to get -5.  (The ‘>’ symbol
shows that this was the most recent calculation.)  The net result is the
two numbers 17.3 and -5 sitting on the stack.

   Most Calculator commands deal explicitly with the stack only, but
there is a set of commands that allow you to search back through the
trail and retrieve any previous result.

   Calc commands use the digits, letters, and punctuation keys.  Shifted
(i.e., upper-case) letters are different from lowercase letters.  Some
letters are “prefix” keys that begin two-letter commands.  For example,
‘e’ means “enter exponent” and shifted ‘E’ means ‘e^x’.  With the ‘d’
(“display modes”) prefix the letter “e” takes on very different
meanings: ‘d e’ means “engineering notation” and ‘d E’ means ““eqn”
language mode.”

   There is nothing stopping you from switching out of the Calc window
and back into your editing window, say by using the Emacs ‘C-x o’
(‘other-window’) command.  When the cursor is inside a regular window,
Emacs acts just like normal.  When the cursor is in the Calc stack or
trail windows, keys are interpreted as Calc commands.

   When you quit by pressing ‘C-x * c’ a second time, the Calculator
windows go away but the actual Stack and Trail are not gone, just
hidden.  When you press ‘C-x * c’ once again you will get the same stack
and trail contents you had when you last used the Calculator.

   The Calculator does not remember its state between Emacs sessions.
Thus if you quit Emacs and start it again, ‘C-x * c’ will give you a
fresh stack and trail.  There is a command (‘m m’) that lets you save
your favorite mode settings between sessions, though.  One of the things
it saves is which user interface (standard or Keypad) you last used;
otherwise, a freshly started Emacs will always treat ‘C-x * *’ the same
as ‘C-x * c’.

   The ‘q’ key is another equivalent way to turn the Calculator off.

   If you type ‘C-x * b’ first and then ‘C-x * c’, you get a full-screen
version of Calc (‘full-calc’) in which the stack and trail windows are
still side-by-side but are now as tall as the whole Emacs screen.  When
you press ‘q’ or ‘C-x * c’ again to quit, the file you were editing
before reappears.  The ‘C-x * b’ key switches back and forth between
“big” full-screen mode and the normal partial-screen mode.

   Finally, ‘C-x * o’ (‘calc-other-window’) is like ‘C-x * c’ except
that the Calc window is not selected.  The buffer you were editing
before remains selected instead.  If you are in a Calc window, then ‘C-x
* o’ will switch you out of it, being careful not to switch you to the
Calc Trail window.  So ‘C-x * o’ is a handy way to switch out of Calc
momentarily to edit your file; you can then type ‘C-x * c’ to switch
back into Calc when you are done.


File: calc.info,  Node: Quick Mode Overview,  Next: Keypad Mode Overview,  Prev: The Standard Interface,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.3 Quick Mode (Overview)
---------------------------

“Quick mode” is a quick way to use Calc when you don’t need the full
complexity of the stack and trail.  To use it, type ‘C-x * q’
(‘quick-calc’) in any regular editing buffer.

   Quick mode is very simple: It prompts you to type any formula in
standard algebraic notation (like ‘4 - 2/3’) and then displays the
result at the bottom of the Emacs screen (3.33333333333 in this case).
You are then back in the same editing buffer you were in before, ready
to continue editing or to type ‘C-x * q’ again to do another quick
calculation.  The result of the calculation will also be in the Emacs
“kill ring” so that a ‘C-y’ command at this point will yank the result
into your editing buffer.

   Calc mode settings affect Quick mode, too, though you will have to go
into regular Calc (with ‘C-x * c’) to change the mode settings.

   *Note Quick Calculator::, for further information.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Mode Overview,  Next: Standalone Operation,  Prev: Quick Mode Overview,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.4 Keypad Mode (Overview)
----------------------------

“Keypad mode” is a mouse-based interface to the Calculator.  It is
designed for use with terminals that support a mouse.  If you don’t have
a mouse, you will have to operate Keypad mode with your arrow keys
(which is probably more trouble than it’s worth).

   Type ‘C-x * k’ to turn Keypad mode on or off.  Once again you get two
new windows, this time on the righthand side of the screen instead of at
the bottom.  The upper window is the familiar Calc Stack; the lower
window is a picture of a typical calculator keypad.

     |--- Emacs Calculator Mode ---
     |2:  17.3
     |1:  -5
     |    .
     |--%*-Calc: 12 Deg       (Calcul
     |----+----+--Calc---+----+----1
     |FLR |CEIL|RND |TRNC|CLN2|FLT |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     | LN |EXP |    |ABS |IDIV|MOD |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |SIN |COS |TAN |SQRT|y^x |1/x |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |  ENTER  |+/- |EEX |UNDO| <- |
     |-----+---+-+--+--+-+---++----|
     | INV |  7  |  8  |  9  |  /  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     | HYP |  4  |  5  |  6  |  *  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     |EXEC |  1  |  2  |  3  |  -  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     | OFF |  0  |  .  | PI  |  +  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

   Keypad mode is much easier for beginners to learn, because there is
no need to memorize lots of obscure key sequences.  But not all commands
in regular Calc are available on the Keypad.  You can always switch the
cursor into the Calc stack window to use standard Calc commands if you
need.  Serious Calc users, though, often find they prefer the standard
interface over Keypad mode.

   To operate the Calculator, just click on the “buttons” of the keypad
using your left mouse button.  To enter the two numbers shown here you
would click ‘1 7 . 3 ENTER 5 +/- ENTER’; to add them together you would
then click ‘+’ (to get 12.3 on the stack).

   If you click the right mouse button, the top three rows of the keypad
change to show other sets of commands, such as advanced math functions,
vector operations, and operations on binary numbers.

   Because Keypad mode doesn’t use the regular keyboard, Calc leaves the
cursor in your original editing buffer.  You can type in this buffer in
the usual way while also clicking on the Calculator keypad.  One
advantage of Keypad mode is that you don’t need an explicit command to
switch between editing and calculating.

   If you press ‘C-x * b’ first, you get a full-screen Keypad mode
(‘full-calc-keypad’) with three windows: The keypad in the lower left,
the stack in the lower right, and the trail on top.

   *Note Keypad Mode::, for further information.


File: calc.info,  Node: Standalone Operation,  Next: Embedded Mode Overview,  Prev: Keypad Mode Overview,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.5 Standalone Operation
--------------------------

If you are not in Emacs at the moment but you wish to use Calc, you must
start Emacs first.  If all you want is to run Calc, you can give the
commands:

     emacs -f full-calc

or

     emacs -f full-calc-keypad

which run a full-screen Calculator (as if by ‘C-x * b C-x * c’) or a
full-screen X-based Calculator (as if by ‘C-x * b C-x * k’).  In
standalone operation, quitting the Calculator (by pressing ‘q’ or
clicking on the keypad <EXIT> button) quits Emacs itself.


File: calc.info,  Node: Embedded Mode Overview,  Next: Other C-x * Commands,  Prev: Standalone Operation,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.6 Embedded Mode (Overview)
------------------------------

“Embedded mode” is a way to use Calc directly from inside an editing
buffer.  Suppose you have a formula written as part of a document like
this:

     The derivative of

                                        ln(ln(x))

     is

and you wish to have Calc compute and format the derivative for you and
store this derivative in the buffer automatically.  To do this with
Embedded mode, first copy the formula down to where you want the result
to be, leaving a blank line before and after the formula:

     The derivative of

                                        ln(ln(x))

     is

                                        ln(ln(x))

   Now, move the cursor onto this new formula and press ‘C-x * e’.  Calc
will read the formula (using the surrounding blank lines to tell how
much text to read), then push this formula (invisibly) onto the Calc
stack.  The cursor will stay on the formula in the editing buffer, but
the line with the formula will now appear as it would on the Calc stack
(in this case, it will be left-aligned) and the buffer’s mode line will
change to look like the Calc mode line (with mode indicators like ‘12
Deg’ and so on).  Even though you are still in your editing buffer, the
keyboard now acts like the Calc keyboard, and any new result you get is
copied from the stack back into the buffer.  To take the derivative, you
would type ‘a d x <RET>’.

     The derivative of

                                        ln(ln(x))

     is

     1 / x ln(x)

   (Note that by default, Calc gives division lower precedence than
multiplication, so that ‘1 / x ln(x)’ is equivalent to ‘1 / (x ln(x))’.)

   To make this look nicer, you might want to press ‘d =’ to center the
formula, and even ‘d B’ to use Big display mode.

     The derivative of

                                        ln(ln(x))

     is
     % [calc-mode: justify: center]
     % [calc-mode: language: big]

                                            1
                                         -------
                                         x ln(x)

   Calc has added annotations to the file to help it remember the modes
that were used for this formula.  They are formatted like comments in
the TeX typesetting language, just in case you are using TeX or LaTeX.
(In this example TeX is not being used, so you might want to move these
comments up to the top of the file or otherwise put them out of the
way.)

   As an extra flourish, we can add an equation number using a righthand
label: Type ‘d } (1) <RET>’.

     % [calc-mode: justify: center]
     % [calc-mode: language: big]
     % [calc-mode: right-label: " (1)"]

                                            1
                                         -------                      (1)
                                         ln(x) x

   To leave Embedded mode, type ‘C-x * e’ again.  The mode line and
keyboard will revert to the way they were before.

   The related command ‘C-x * w’ operates on a single word, which
generally means a single number, inside text.  It searches for an
expression which “looks” like a number containing the point.  Here’s an
example of its use (before you try this, remove the Calc annotations or
use a new buffer so that the extra settings in the annotations don’t
take effect):

     A slope of one-third corresponds to an angle of 1 degrees.

   Place the cursor on the ‘1’, then type ‘C-x * w’ to enable Embedded
mode on that number.  Now type ‘3 /’ (to get one-third), and ‘I T’ (the
Inverse Tangent converts a slope into an angle), then ‘C-x * w’ again to
exit Embedded mode.

     A slope of one-third corresponds to an angle of 18.4349488229 degrees.

   *Note Embedded Mode::, for full details.


File: calc.info,  Node: Other C-x * Commands,  Prev: Embedded Mode Overview,  Up: Using Calc

1.5.7 Other ‘C-x *’ Commands
----------------------------

Two more Calc-related commands are ‘C-x * g’ and ‘C-x * r’, which “grab”
data from a selected region of a buffer into the Calculator.  The region
is defined in the usual Emacs way, by a “mark” placed at one end of the
region, and the Emacs cursor or “point” placed at the other.

   The ‘C-x * g’ command reads the region in the usual left-to-right,
top-to-bottom order.  The result is packaged into a Calc vector of
numbers and placed on the stack.  Calc (in its standard user interface)
is then started.  Type ‘v u’ if you want to unpack this vector into
separate numbers on the stack.  Also, ‘C-u C-x * g’ interprets the
region as a single number or formula.

   The ‘C-x * r’ command reads a rectangle, with the point and mark
defining opposite corners of the rectangle.  The result is a matrix of
numbers on the Calculator stack.

   Complementary to these is ‘C-x * y’, which “yanks” the value at the
top of the Calc stack back into an editing buffer.  If you type
‘C-x * y’ while in such a buffer, the value is yanked at the current
position.  If you type ‘C-x * y’ while in the Calc buffer, Calc makes an
educated guess as to which editing buffer you want to use.  The Calc
window does not have to be visible in order to use this command, as long
as there is something on the Calc stack.

   Here, for reference, is the complete list of ‘C-x *’ commands.  The
shift, control, and meta keys are ignored for the keystroke following
‘C-x *’.

Commands for turning Calc on and off:

‘*’
     Turn Calc on or off, employing the same user interface as last
     time.

‘=, +, -, /, \, &, #’
     Alternatives for ‘*’.

‘C’
     Turn Calc on or off using its standard bottom-of-the-screen
     interface.  If Calc is already turned on but the cursor is not in
     the Calc window, move the cursor into the window.

‘O’
     Same as ‘C’, but don’t select the new Calc window.  If Calc is
     already turned on and the cursor is in the Calc window, move it out
     of that window.

‘B’
     Control whether ‘C-x * c’ and ‘C-x * k’ use the full screen.

‘Q’
     Use Quick mode for a single short calculation.

‘K’
     Turn Calc Keypad mode on or off.

‘E’
     Turn Calc Embedded mode on or off at the current formula.

‘J’
     Turn Calc Embedded mode on or off, select the interesting part.

‘W’
     Turn Calc Embedded mode on or off at the current word (number).

‘Z’
     Turn Calc on in a user-defined way, as defined by a ‘Z I’ command.

‘X’
     Quit Calc; turn off standard, Keypad, or Embedded mode if on.
     (This is like ‘q’ or <OFF> inside of Calc.)

Commands for moving data into and out of the Calculator:

‘G’
     Grab the region into the Calculator as a vector.

‘R’
     Grab the rectangular region into the Calculator as a matrix.

‘:’
     Grab the rectangular region and compute the sums of its columns.

‘_’
     Grab the rectangular region and compute the sums of its rows.

‘Y’
     Yank a value from the Calculator into the current editing buffer.

Commands for use with Embedded mode:

‘A’
     “Activate” the current buffer.  Locate all formulas that contain
     ‘:=’ or ‘=>’ symbols and record their locations so that they can be
     updated automatically as variables are changed.

‘D’
     Duplicate the current formula immediately below and select the
     duplicate.

‘F’
     Insert a new formula at the current point.

‘N’
     Move the cursor to the next active formula in the buffer.

‘P’
     Move the cursor to the previous active formula in the buffer.

‘U’
     Update (i.e., as if by the ‘=’ key) the formula at the current
     point.

‘`’
     Edit (as if by ‘calc-edit’) the formula at the current point.

Miscellaneous commands:

‘I’
     Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc manual.  (This is the
     same as ‘h i’ inside of Calc.)

‘T’
     Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc Tutorial.

‘S’
     Run the Emacs Info system to read the Calc Summary.

‘L’
     Load Calc entirely into memory.  (Normally the various parts are
     loaded only as they are needed.)

‘M’
     Read a region of written keystroke names (like ‘C-n a b c <RET>’)
     and record them as the current keyboard macro.

‘0’
     (This is the “zero” digit key.)  Reset the Calculator to its
     initial state: Empty stack, and initial mode settings.


File: calc.info,  Node: History and Acknowledgments,  Prev: Using Calc,  Up: Getting Started

1.6 History and Acknowledgments
===============================

Calc was originally started as a two-week project to occupy a lull in
the author’s schedule.  Basically, a friend asked if I remembered the
value of ‘2^32’.  I didn’t offhand, but I said, “that’s easy, just call
up an ‘xcalc’.” ‘Xcalc’ duly reported that the answer to our question
was ‘4.294967e+09’—with no way to see the full ten digits even though we
knew they were there in the program’s memory!  I was so annoyed, I vowed
to write a calculator of my own, once and for all.

   I chose Emacs Lisp, a) because I had always been curious about it and
b) because, being only a text editor extension language after all, Emacs
Lisp would surely reach its limits long before the project got too far
out of hand.

   To make a long story short, Emacs Lisp turned out to be a
distressingly solid implementation of Lisp, and the humble task of
calculating turned out to be more open-ended than one might have
expected.

   Emacs Lisp didn’t have built-in floating point math (now it does), so
this had to be simulated in software.  In fact, Emacs integers would
only comfortably fit six decimal digits or so (at the time)—not enough
for a decent calculator.  So I had to write my own high-precision
integer code as well, and once I had this I figured that arbitrary-size
integers were just as easy as large integers.  Arbitrary floating-point
precision was the logical next step.  Also, since the large integer
arithmetic was there anyway it seemed only fair to give the user direct
access to it, which in turn made it practical to support fractions as
well as floats.  All these features inspired me to look around for other
data types that might be worth having.

   Around this time, my friend Rick Koshi showed me his nifty new HP-28
calculator.  It allowed the user to manipulate formulas as well as
numerical quantities, and it could also operate on matrices.  I decided
that these would be good for Calc to have, too.  And once things had
gone this far, I figured I might as well take a look at serious algebra
systems for further ideas.  Since these systems did far more than I
could ever hope to implement, I decided to focus on rewrite rules and
other programming features so that users could implement what they
needed for themselves.

   Rick complained that matrices were hard to read, so I put in code to
format them in a 2D style.  Once these routines were in place, Big mode
was obligatory.  Gee, what other language modes would be useful?

   Scott Hemphill and Allen Knutson, two friends with a strong
mathematical bent, contributed ideas and algorithms for a number of Calc
features including modulo forms, primality testing, and
float-to-fraction conversion.

   Units were added at the eager insistence of Mass Sivilotti.  Later,
Ulrich Mueller at CERN and Przemek Klosowski at NIST provided invaluable
expert assistance with the units table.  As far as I can remember, the
idea of using algebraic formulas and variables to represent units dates
back to an ancient article in Byte magazine about muMath, an early
algebra system for microcomputers.

   Many people have contributed to Calc by reporting bugs and suggesting
features, large and small.  A few deserve special mention: Tim Peters,
who helped develop the ideas that led to the selection commands, rewrite
rules, and many other algebra features; François Pinard, who contributed
an early prototype of the Calc Summary appendix as well as providing
valuable suggestions in many other areas of Calc; Carl Witty, whose
eagle eyes discovered many typographical and factual errors in the Calc
manual; Tim Kay, who drove the development of Embedded mode; Ove
Ewerlid, who made many suggestions relating to the algebra commands and
contributed some code for polynomial operations; Randal Schwartz, who
suggested the ‘calc-eval’ function; Juha Sarlin, who first worked out
how to split Calc into quickly-loading parts; Bob Weiner, who helped
immensely with the Lucid Emacs port; and Robert J. Chassell, who
suggested the Calc Tutorial and exercises as well as many other things.

   Among the books used in the development of Calc were Knuth’s _Art of
Computer Programming_ (especially volume II, _Seminumerical
Algorithms_); _Numerical Recipes_ by Press, Flannery, Teukolsky, and
Vetterling; Bevington’s _Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the
Physical Sciences_; _Concrete Mathematics_ by Graham, Knuth, and
Patashnik; Steele’s _Common Lisp, the Language_; the _CRC Standard Math
Tables_ (William H. Beyer, ed.); and Abramowitz and Stegun’s venerable
_Handbook of Mathematical Functions_.  Also, of course, Calc could not
have been written without the excellent _GNU Emacs Lisp Reference
Manual_, by Bil Lewis and Dan LaLiberte.

   Final thanks go to Richard Stallman, without whose fine
implementations of the Emacs editor, language, and environment, Calc
would have been finished in two weeks.


File: calc.info,  Node: Interactive Tutorial,  Next: Tutorial,  Prev: Getting Started,  Up: Top

2 Tutorial
**********

Some brief instructions on using the Emacs Info system for this
tutorial:

   Press the space bar and Delete keys to go forward and backward in a
section by screenfuls (or use the regular Emacs scrolling commands for
this).

   Press ‘n’ or ‘p’ to go to the Next or Previous section.  If the
section has a “menu”, press a digit key like ‘1’ or ‘2’ to go to a
sub-section from the menu.  Press ‘u’ to go back up from a sub-section
to the menu it is part of.

   Exercises in the tutorial all have cross-references to the
appropriate page of the “answers” section.  Press ‘f’, then the exercise
number, to see the answer to an exercise.  After you have followed a
cross-reference, you can press the letter ‘l’ to return to where you
were before.

   You can press ‘?’ at any time for a brief summary of Info commands.

   Press the number ‘1’ now to enter the first section of the Tutorial.

* Menu:

* Tutorial::


File: calc.info,  Node: Tutorial,  Next: Introduction,  Prev: Interactive Tutorial,  Up: Top

3 Tutorial
**********

This chapter explains how to use Calc and its many features, in a
step-by-step, tutorial way.  You are encouraged to run Calc and work
along with the examples as you read (*note Starting Calc::).  If you are
already familiar with advanced calculators, you may wish to skip on to
the rest of this manual.

   This tutorial describes the standard user interface of Calc only.
The Quick mode and Keypad mode interfaces are fairly self-explanatory.
*Note Embedded Mode::, for a description of the Embedded mode interface.

   The easiest way to read this tutorial on-line is to have two windows
on your Emacs screen, one with Calc and one with the Info system.  Press
‘C-x * t’ to set this up; the on-line tutorial will be opened in the
current window and Calc will be started in another window.  From the
Info window, the command ‘C-x * c’ can be used to switch to the Calc
window and ‘C-x * o’ can be used to switch back to the Info window.  (If
you have a printed copy of the manual you can use that instead; in that
case you only need to press ‘C-x * c’ to start Calc.)

   This tutorial is designed to be done in sequence.  But the rest of
this manual does not assume you have gone through the tutorial.  The
tutorial does not cover everything in the Calculator, but it touches on
most general areas.

   You may wish to print out a copy of the Calc Summary and keep notes
on it as you learn Calc.  *Note About This Manual::, to see how to make
a printed summary.  *Note Summary::.

* Menu:

* Basic Tutorial::
* Arithmetic Tutorial::
* Vector/Matrix Tutorial::
* Types Tutorial::
* Algebra Tutorial::
* Programming Tutorial::

* Answers to Exercises::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Tutorial,  Next: Arithmetic Tutorial,  Prev: Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.1 Basic Tutorial
==================

In this section, we learn how RPN and algebraic-style calculations work,
how to undo and redo an operation done by mistake, and how to control
various modes of the Calculator.

* Menu:

* RPN Tutorial::            Basic operations with the stack.
* Algebraic Tutorial::      Algebraic entry; variables.
* Undo Tutorial::           If you make a mistake: Undo and the trail.
* Modes Tutorial::          Common mode-setting commands.


File: calc.info,  Node: RPN Tutorial,  Next: Algebraic Tutorial,  Prev: Basic Tutorial,  Up: Basic Tutorial

3.1.1 RPN Calculations and the Stack
------------------------------------

Calc normally uses RPN notation.  You may be familiar with the RPN
system from Hewlett-Packard calculators, FORTH, or PostScript.  (Reverse
Polish Notation, RPN, is named after the Polish mathematician Jan
Lukasiewicz.)

   The central component of an RPN calculator is the “stack”.  A
calculator stack is like a stack of dishes.  New dishes (numbers) are
added at the top of the stack, and numbers are normally only removed
from the top of the stack.

   In an operation like ‘2+3’, the 2 and 3 are called the “operands” and
the ‘+’ is the “operator”.  In an RPN calculator you always enter the
operands first, then the operator.  Each time you type a number, Calc
adds or “pushes” it onto the top of the Stack.  When you press an
operator key like ‘+’, Calc “pops” the appropriate number of operands
from the stack and pushes back the result.

   Thus we could add the numbers 2 and 3 in an RPN calculator by typing:
‘2 <RET> 3 <RET> +’.  (The <RET> key, Return, corresponds to the <ENTER>
key on traditional RPN calculators.)  Try this now if you wish; type
‘C-x * c’ to switch into the Calc window (you can type ‘C-x * c’ again
or ‘C-x * o’ to switch back to the Tutorial window).  The first four
keystrokes “push” the numbers 2 and 3 onto the stack.  The ‘+’ key
“pops” the top two numbers from the stack, adds them, and pushes the
result (5) back onto the stack.  Here’s how the stack will look at
various points throughout the calculation:

         .          1:  2          2:  2          1:  5              .
                        .          1:  3              .
                                       .

       C-x * c          2 <RET>          3 <RET>            +             <DEL>

   The ‘.’ symbol is a marker that represents the top of the stack.
Note that the “top” of the stack is really shown at the bottom of the
Stack window.  This may seem backwards, but it turns out to be less
distracting in regular use.

   The numbers ‘1:’ and ‘2:’ on the left are “stack level numbers”.  Old
RPN calculators always had four stack levels called ‘x’, ‘y’, ‘z’, and
‘t’.  Calc’s stack can grow as large as you like, so it uses numbers
instead of letters.  Some stack-manipulation commands accept a numeric
argument that says which stack level to work on.  Normal commands like
‘+’ always work on the top few levels of the stack.

   The Stack buffer is just an Emacs buffer, and you can move around in
it using the regular Emacs motion commands.  But no matter where the
cursor is, even if you have scrolled the ‘.’ marker out of view, most
Calc commands always move the cursor back down to level 1 before doing
anything.  It is possible to move the ‘.’ marker upwards through the
stack, temporarily “hiding” some numbers from commands like ‘+’.  This
is called “stack truncation” and we will not cover it in this tutorial;
*note Truncating the Stack::, if you are interested.

   You don’t really need the second <RET> in ‘2 <RET> 3 <RET> +’.
That’s because if you type any operator name or other non-numeric key
when you are entering a number, the Calculator automatically enters that
number and then does the requested command.  Thus ‘2 <RET> 3 +’ will
work just as well.

   Examples in this tutorial will often omit <RET> even when the stack
displays shown would only happen if you did press <RET>:

     1:  2          2:  2          1:  5
         .          1:  3              .
                        .

       2 <RET>            3              +

Here, after pressing ‘3’ the stack would really show ‘1: 2’ with ‘Calc:
3’ in the minibuffer.  In these situations, you can press the optional
<RET> to see the stack as the figure shows.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  (This tutorial will include exercises at various
points.  Try them if you wish.  Answers to all the exercises are located
at the end of the Tutorial chapter.  Each exercise will include a
cross-reference to its particular answer.  If you are reading with the
Emacs Info system, press ‘f’ and the exercise number to go to the
answer, then the letter ‘l’ to return to where you were.)

Here’s the first exercise: What will the keystrokes ‘1 <RET> 2 <RET> 3
<RET> 4 + * -’ compute?  (‘*’ is the symbol for multiplication.)  Figure
it out by hand, then try it with Calc to see if you’re right.  *Note 1:
RPN Answer 1.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Compute ‘2*4 + 7*9.5 + 5/4’ using the stack.
*Note 2: RPN Answer 2.  (•)

   The <DEL> key is called Backspace on some keyboards.  It is whatever
key you would use to correct a simple typing error when regularly using
Emacs.  The <DEL> key pops and throws away the top value on the stack.
(You can still get that value back from the Trail if you should need it
later on.)  There are many places in this tutorial where we assume you
have used <DEL> to erase the results of the previous example at the
beginning of a new example.  In the few places where it is really
important to use <DEL> to clear away old results, the text will remind
you to do so.

   (It won’t hurt to let things accumulate on the stack, except that
whenever you give a display-mode-changing command Calc will have to
spend a long time reformatting such a large stack.)

   Since the ‘-’ key is also an operator (it subtracts the top two stack
elements), how does one enter a negative number?  Calc uses the ‘_’
(underscore) key to act like the minus sign in a number.  So, typing ‘-5
<RET>’ won’t work because the ‘-’ key will try to do a subtraction, but
‘_5 <RET>’ works just fine.

   You can also press ‘n’, which means “change sign.” It changes the
number at the top of the stack (or the number being entered) from
positive to negative or vice-versa: ‘5 n <RET>’.

   If you press <RET> when you’re not entering a number, the effect is
to duplicate the top number on the stack.  Consider this calculation:

     1:  3          2:  3          1:  9          2:  9          1:  81
         .          1:  3              .          1:  9              .
                        .                             .

       3 <RET>           <RET>             *             <RET>             *

(Of course, an easier way to do this would be ‘3 <RET> 4 ^’, to raise 3
to the fourth power.)

   The space-bar key (denoted <SPC> here) performs the same function as
<RET>; you could replace all three occurrences of <RET> in the above
example with <SPC> and the effect would be the same.

   Another stack manipulation key is <TAB>.  This exchanges the top two
stack entries.  Suppose you have computed ‘2 <RET> 3 +’ to get 5, and
then you realize what you really wanted to compute was ‘20 / (2+3)’.

     1:  5          2:  5          2:  20         1:  4
         .          1:  20         1:  5              .
                        .              .

      2 <RET> 3 +         20            <TAB>             /

Planning ahead, the calculation would have gone like this:

     1:  20         2:  20         3:  20         2:  20         1:  4
         .          1:  2          2:  2          1:  5              .
                        .          1:  3              .
                                       .

       20 <RET>         2 <RET>            3              +              /

   A related stack command is ‘M-<TAB>’ (hold <META> and type <TAB>).
It rotates the top three elements of the stack upward, bringing the
object in level 3 to the top.

     1:  10         2:  10         3:  10         3:  20         3:  30
         .          1:  20         2:  20         2:  30         2:  10
                        .          1:  30         1:  10         1:  20
                                       .              .              .

       10 <RET>         20 <RET>         30 <RET>         M-<TAB>          M-<TAB>

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  Suppose the numbers 10, 20, and 30 are on the
stack.  Figure out how to add one to the number in level 2 without
affecting the rest of the stack.  Also figure out how to add one to the
number in level 3.  *Note 3: RPN Answer 3.  (•)

   Operations like ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’ pop two arguments from
the stack and push a result.  Operations like ‘n’ and ‘Q’ (square root)
pop a single number and push the result.  You can think of them as
simply operating on the top element of the stack.

     1:  3          1:  9          2:  9          1:  25         1:  5
         .              .          1:  16             .              .
                                       .

       3 <RET>          <RET> *        4 <RET> <RET> *        +              Q

(Note that capital ‘Q’ means to hold down the Shift key while typing
‘q’.  Remember, plain unshifted ‘q’ is the Quit command.)

   Here we’ve used the Pythagorean Theorem to determine the hypotenuse
of a right triangle.  Calc actually has a built-in command for that
called ‘f h’, but let’s suppose we can’t remember the necessary
keystrokes.  We can still enter it by its full name using ‘M-x’
notation:

     1:  3          2:  3          1:  5
         .          1:  4              .
                        .

       3 <RET>          4 <RET>      M-x calc-hypot

   All Calculator commands begin with the word ‘calc-’.  Since it gets
tiring to type this, Calc provides an ‘x’ key which is just like the
regular Emacs ‘M-x’ key except that it types the ‘calc-’ prefix for you:

     1:  3          2:  3          1:  5
         .          1:  4              .
                        .

       3 <RET>          4 <RET>         x hypot

   What happens if you take the square root of a negative number?

     1:  4          1:  -4         1:  (0, 2)
         .              .              .

       4 <RET>            n              Q

The notation ‘(a, b)’ represents a complex number.  Complex numbers are
more traditionally written ‘a + b i’; Calc can display in this format,
too, but for now we’ll stick to the ‘(a, b)’ notation.

   If you don’t know how complex numbers work, you can safely ignore
this feature.  Complex numbers only arise from operations that would be
errors in a calculator that didn’t have complex numbers.  (For example,
taking the square root or logarithm of a negative number produces a
complex result.)

   Complex numbers are entered in the notation shown.  The ‘(’ and ‘,’
and ‘)’ keys manipulate “incomplete complex numbers.”

     1:  ( ...      2:  ( ...      1:  (2, ...    1:  (2, ...    1:  (2, 3)
         .          1:  2              .              3              .
                        .                             .

         (              2              ,              3              )

   You can perform calculations while entering parts of incomplete
objects.  However, an incomplete object cannot actually participate in a
calculation:

     1:  ( ...      2:  ( ...      3:  ( ...      1:  ( ...      1:  ( ...
         .          1:  2          2:  2              5              5
                        .          1:  3              .              .
                                       .
                                                                  (error)
         (             2 <RET>           3              +              +

Adding 5 to an incomplete object makes no sense, so the last command
produces an error message and leaves the stack the same.

   Incomplete objects can’t participate in arithmetic, but they can be
moved around by the regular stack commands.

     2:  2          3:  2          3:  3          1:  ( ...      1:  (2, 3)
     1:  3          2:  3          2:  ( ...          2              .
         .          1:  ( ...      1:  2              3
                        .              .              .

     2 <RET> 3 <RET>        (            M-<TAB>          M-<TAB>            )

Note that the ‘,’ (comma) key did not have to be used here.  When you
press ‘)’ all the stack entries between the incomplete entry and the top
are collected, so there’s never really a reason to use the comma.  It’s
up to you.

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  To enter the complex number ‘(2, 3)’, your friend
Joe typed ‘( 2 , <SPC> 3 )’.  What happened?  (Joe thought of a clever
way to correct his mistake in only two keystrokes, but it didn’t quite
work.  Try it to find out why.)  *Note 4: RPN Answer 4.  (•)

   Vectors are entered the same way as complex numbers, but with square
brackets in place of parentheses.  We’ll meet vectors again later in the
tutorial.

   Any Emacs command can be given a “numeric prefix argument” by typing
a series of <META>-digits beforehand.  If <META> is awkward for you, you
can instead type ‘C-u’ followed by the necessary digits.  Numeric prefix
arguments can be negative, as in ‘M-- M-3 M-5’ or ‘C-u - 3 5’.  Calc
commands use numeric prefix arguments in a variety of ways.  For
example, a numeric prefix on the ‘+’ operator adds any number of stack
entries at once:

     1:  10         2:  10         3:  10         3:  10         1:  60
         .          1:  20         2:  20         2:  20             .
                        .          1:  30         1:  30
                                       .              .

       10 <RET>         20 <RET>         30 <RET>         C-u 3            +

   For stack manipulation commands like <RET>, a positive numeric prefix
argument operates on the top N stack entries at once.  A negative
argument operates on the entry in level N only.  An argument of zero
operates on the entire stack.  In this example, we copy the
second-to-top element of the stack:

     1:  10         2:  10         3:  10         3:  10         4:  10
         .          1:  20         2:  20         2:  20         3:  20
                        .          1:  30         1:  30         2:  30
                                       .              .          1:  20
                                                                     .

       10 <RET>         20 <RET>         30 <RET>         C-u -2          <RET>

   Another common idiom is ‘M-0 <DEL>’, which clears the stack.  (The
‘M-0’ numeric prefix tells <DEL> to operate on the entire stack.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Tutorial,  Next: Undo Tutorial,  Prev: RPN Tutorial,  Up: Basic Tutorial

3.1.2 Algebraic-Style Calculations
----------------------------------

If you are not used to RPN notation, you may prefer to operate the
Calculator in Algebraic mode, which is closer to the way non-RPN
calculators work.  In Algebraic mode, you enter formulas in traditional
‘2+3’ notation.

   *Notice:* Calc gives ‘/’ lower precedence than ‘*’, so that ‘a/b*c’
is interpreted as ‘a/(b*c)’; this is not standard across all computer
languages.  See below for details.

   You don’t really need any special “mode” to enter algebraic formulas.
You can enter a formula at any time by pressing the apostrophe (‘'’)
key.  Answer the prompt with the desired formula, then press <RET>.  The
formula is evaluated and the result is pushed onto the RPN stack.  If
you don’t want to think in RPN at all, you can enter your whole
computation as a formula, read the result from the stack, then press
<DEL> to delete it from the stack.

   Try pressing the apostrophe key, then ‘2+3+4’, then <RET>.  The
result should be the number 9.

   Algebraic formulas use the operators ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’.
You can use parentheses to make the order of evaluation clear.  In the
absence of parentheses, ‘^’ is evaluated first, then ‘*’, then ‘/’, then
finally ‘+’ and ‘-’.  For example, the expression

     2 + 3*4*5 / 6*7^8 - 9

is equivalent to

     2 + ((3*4*5) / (6*(7^8))) - 9

or, in large mathematical notation,

         3 * 4 * 5
     2 + --------- - 9
               8
          6 * 7

The result of this expression will be the number -6.99999826533.

   Calc’s order of evaluation is the same as for most computer
languages, except that ‘*’ binds more strongly than ‘/’, as the above
example shows.  As in normal mathematical notation, the ‘*’ symbol can
often be omitted: ‘2 a’ is the same as ‘2*a’.

   Operators at the same level are evaluated from left to right, except
that ‘^’ is evaluated from right to left.  Thus, ‘2-3-4’ is equivalent
to ‘(2-3)-4’ or -5, whereas ‘2^3^4’ is equivalent to ‘2^(3^4)’ (a very
large integer; try it!).

   If you tire of typing the apostrophe all the time, there is Algebraic
mode, where Calc automatically senses when you are about to type an
algebraic expression.  To enter this mode, press the two letters ‘m a’.
(An ‘Alg’ indicator should appear in the Calc window’s mode line.)

   Press ‘m a’, then ‘2+3+4’ with no apostrophe, then <RET>.

   In Algebraic mode, when you press any key that would normally begin
entering a number (such as a digit, a decimal point, or the ‘_’ key), or
if you press ‘(’ or ‘[’, Calc automatically begins an algebraic entry.

   Functions which do not have operator symbols like ‘+’ and ‘*’ must be
entered in formulas using function-call notation.  For example, the
function name corresponding to the square-root key ‘Q’ is ‘sqrt’.  To
compute a square root in a formula, you would use the notation
‘sqrt(X)’.

   Press the apostrophe, then type ‘sqrt(5*2) - 3’.  The result should
be ‘0.16227766017’.

   Note that if the formula begins with a function name, you need to use
the apostrophe even if you are in Algebraic mode.  If you type ‘arcsin’
out of the blue, the ‘a r’ will be taken as an Algebraic Rewrite
command, and the ‘csin’ will be taken as the name of the rewrite rule to
use!

   Some people prefer to enter complex numbers and vectors in algebraic
form because they find RPN entry with incomplete objects to be too
distracting, even though they otherwise use Calc as an RPN calculator.

   Still in Algebraic mode, type:

     1:  (2, 3)     2:  (2, 3)     1:  (8, -1)    2:  (8, -1)    1:  (9, -1)
         .          1:  (1, -2)        .          1:  1              .
                        .                             .

      (2,3) <RET>      (1,-2) <RET>        *              1 <RET>          +

   Algebraic mode allows us to enter complex numbers without pressing an
apostrophe first, but it also means we need to press <RET> after every
entry, even for a simple number like ‘1’.

   (You can type ‘C-u m a’ to enable a special Incomplete Algebraic mode
in which the ‘(’ and ‘[’ keys use algebraic entry even though regular
numeric keys still use RPN numeric entry.  There is also Total Algebraic
mode, started by typing ‘m t’, in which all normal keys begin algebraic
entry.  You must then use the <META> key to type Calc commands: ‘M-m t’
to get back out of Total Algebraic mode, ‘M-q’ to quit, etc.)

   If you’re still in Algebraic mode, press ‘m a’ again to turn it off.

   Actual non-RPN calculators use a mixture of algebraic and RPN styles.
In general, operators of two numbers (like ‘+’ and ‘*’) use algebraic
form, but operators of one number (like ‘n’ and ‘Q’) use RPN form.
Also, a non-RPN calculator allows you to see the intermediate results of
a calculation as you go along.  You can accomplish this in Calc by
performing your calculation as a series of algebraic entries, using the
‘$’ sign to tie them together.  In an algebraic formula, ‘$’ represents
the number on the top of the stack.  Here, we perform the calculation
‘sqrt(2*4+1)’, which on a traditional calculator would be done by
pressing ‘2 * 4 + 1 =’ and then the square-root key.

     1:  8          1:  9          1:  3
         .              .              .

       ' 2*4 <RET>        $+1 <RET>        Q

Notice that we didn’t need to press an apostrophe for the ‘$+1’, because
the dollar sign always begins an algebraic entry.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  How could you get the same effect as pressing ‘Q’
but using an algebraic entry instead?  How about if the ‘Q’ key on your
keyboard were broken?  *Note 1: Algebraic Answer 1.  (•)

   The notations ‘$$’, ‘$$$’, and so on stand for higher stack entries.
For example, ‘' $$+$ <RET>’ is just like typing ‘+’.

   Algebraic formulas can include “variables”.  To store in a variable,
press ‘s s’, then type the variable name, then press <RET>.  (There are
actually two flavors of store command: ‘s s’ stores a number in a
variable but also leaves the number on the stack, while ‘s t’ removes a
number from the stack and stores it in the variable.)  A variable name
should consist of one or more letters or digits, beginning with a
letter.

     1:  17             .          1:  a + a^2    1:  306
         .                             .              .

         17          s t a <RET>      ' a+a^2 <RET>       =

The ‘=’ key “evaluates” a formula by replacing all its variables by the
values that were stored in them.

   For RPN calculations, you can recall a variable’s value on the stack
either by entering its name as a formula and pressing ‘=’, or by using
the ‘s r’ command.

     1:  17         2:  17         3:  17         2:  17         1:  306
         .          1:  17         2:  17         1:  289            .
                        .          1:  2              .
                                       .

       s r a <RET>     ' a <RET> =         2              ^              +

   If you press a single digit for a variable name (as in ‘s t 3’, you
get one of ten “quick variables” ‘q0’ through ‘q9’.  They are “quick”
simply because you don’t have to type the letter ‘q’ or the <RET> after
their names.  In fact, you can type simply ‘s 3’ as a shorthand for ‘s s
3’, and likewise for ‘t 3’ and ‘r 3’.

   Any variables in an algebraic formula for which you have not stored
values are left alone, even when you evaluate the formula.

     1:  2 a + 2 b     1:  2 b + 34
         .                 .

      ' 2a+2b <RET>          =

   Calls to function names which are undefined in Calc are also left
alone, as are calls for which the value is undefined.

     1:  log10(0) + log10(x) + log10(5, 6) + foo(3) + 2
         .

      ' log10(100) + log10(0) + log10(x) + log10(5,6) + foo(3) <RET>

In this example, the first call to ‘log10’ works, but the other calls
are not evaluated.  In the second call, the logarithm is undefined for
that value of the argument; in the third, the argument is symbolic, and
in the fourth, there are too many arguments.  In the fifth case, there
is no function called ‘foo’.  You will see a “Wrong number of arguments”
message referring to ‘log10(5,6)’.  Press the ‘w’ (“why”) key to see any
other messages that may have arisen from the last calculation.  In this
case you will get “logarithm of zero,” then “number expected: ‘x’”.
Calc automatically displays the first message only if the message is
sufficiently important; for example, Calc considers “wrong number of
arguments” and “logarithm of zero” to be important enough to report
automatically, while a message like “number expected: ‘x’” will only
show up if you explicitly press the ‘w’ key.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Joe entered the formula ‘2 x y’, stored 5 in ‘x’,
pressed ‘=’, and got the expected result, ‘10 y’.  He then tried the
same for the formula ‘2 x (1+y)’, expecting ‘10 (1+y)’, but it didn’t
work.  Why not?  *Note 2: Algebraic Answer 2.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  What result would you expect ‘1 <RET> 0 /’ to
give?  What if you then type ‘0 *’?  *Note 3: Algebraic Answer 3.  (•)

   One interesting way to work with variables is to use the
“evaluates-to” (‘=>’) operator.  It works like this: Enter a formula
algebraically in the usual way, but follow the formula with an ‘=>’
symbol.  (There is also an ‘s =’ command which builds an ‘=>’ formula
using the stack.)  On the stack, you will see two copies of the formula
with an ‘=>’ between them.  The lefthand formula is exactly like you
typed it; the righthand formula has been evaluated as if by typing ‘=’.

     2:  2 + 3 => 5                     2:  2 + 3 => 5
     1:  2 a + 2 b => 34 + 2 b          1:  2 a + 2 b => 20 + 2 b
         .                                  .

     ' 2+3 => <RET>  ' 2a+2b <RET> s =          10 s t a <RET>

Notice that the instant we stored a new value in ‘a’, all ‘=>’ operators
already on the stack that referred to ‘a’ were updated to use the new
value.  With ‘=>’, you can push a set of formulas on the stack, then
change the variables experimentally to see the effects on the formulas’
values.

   You can also “unstore” a variable when you are through with it:

     2:  2 + 3 => 5
     1:  2 a + 2 b => 2 a + 2 b
         .

         s u a <RET>

   We will encounter formulas involving variables and functions again
when we discuss the algebra and calculus features of the Calculator.


File: calc.info,  Node: Undo Tutorial,  Next: Modes Tutorial,  Prev: Algebraic Tutorial,  Up: Basic Tutorial

3.1.3 Undo and Redo
-------------------

If you make a mistake, you can usually correct it by pressing shift-‘U’,
the “undo” command.  First, clear the stack (‘M-0 <DEL>’) and exit and
restart Calc (‘C-x * * C-x * *’) to make sure things start off with a
clean slate.  Now:

     1:  2          2:  2          1:  8          2:  2          1:  6
         .          1:  3              .          1:  3              .
                        .                             .

        2 <RET>           3              ^              U              *

   You can undo any number of times.  Calc keeps a complete record of
all you have done since you last opened the Calc window.  After the
above example, you could type:

     1:  6          2:  2          1:  2              .              .
         .          1:  3              .
                        .
                                                                  (error)
                        U              U              U              U

   You can also type ‘D’ to “redo” a command that you have undone
mistakenly.

         .          1:  2          2:  2          1:  6          1:  6
                        .          1:  3              .              .
                                       .
                                                                  (error)
                        D              D              D              D

It was not possible to redo past the ‘6’, since that was placed there by
something other than an undo command.

   You can think of undo and redo as a sort of “time machine.” Press ‘U’
to go backward in time, ‘D’ to go forward.  If you go backward and do
something (like ‘*’) then, as any science fiction reader knows, you have
changed your future and you cannot go forward again.  Thus, the
inability to redo past the ‘6’ even though there was an earlier undo
command.

   You can always recall an earlier result using the Trail.  We’ve
ignored the trail so far, but it has been faithfully recording
everything we did since we loaded the Calculator.  If the Trail is not
displayed, press ‘t d’ now to turn it on.

   Let’s try grabbing an earlier result.  The ‘8’ we computed was undone
by a ‘U’ command, and was lost even to Redo when we pressed ‘*’, but
it’s still there in the trail.  There should be a little ‘>’ arrow (the
“trail pointer”) resting on the last trail entry.  If there isn’t, press
‘t ]’ to reset the trail pointer.  Now, press ‘t p’ to move the arrow
onto the line containing ‘8’, and press ‘t y’ to “yank” that number back
onto the stack.

   If you press ‘t ]’ again, you will see that even our Yank command
went into the trail.

   Let’s go further back in time.  Earlier in the tutorial we computed a
huge integer using the formula ‘2^3^4’.  We don’t remember what it was,
but the first digits were “241”.  Press ‘t r’ (which stands for
trail-search-reverse), then type ‘241’.  The trail cursor will jump back
to the next previous occurrence of the string “241” in the trail.  This
is just a regular Emacs incremental search; you can now press ‘C-s’ or
‘C-r’ to continue the search forwards or backwards as you like.

   To finish the search, press <RET>.  This halts the incremental search
and leaves the trail pointer at the thing we found.  Now we can type ‘t
y’ to yank that number onto the stack.  If we hadn’t remembered the
“241”, we could simply have searched for ‘2^3^4’, then pressed ‘<RET> t
n’ to halt and then move to the next item.

   You may have noticed that all the trail-related commands begin with
the letter ‘t’.  (The store-and-recall commands, on the other hand, all
began with ‘s’.)  Calc has so many commands that there aren’t enough
keys for all of them, so various commands are grouped into two-letter
sequences where the first letter is called the “prefix” key.  If you
type a prefix key by accident, you can press ‘C-g’ to cancel it.  (In
fact, you can press ‘C-g’ to cancel almost anything in Emacs.)  To get
help on a prefix key, press that key followed by ‘?’.  Some prefixes
have several lines of help, so you need to press ‘?’ repeatedly to see
them all.  You can also type ‘h h’ to see all the help at once.

   Try pressing ‘t ?’ now.  You will see a line of the form,

     trail/time: Display; Fwd, Back; Next, Prev, Here, [, ]; Yank:  [MORE]  t-

The word “trail” indicates that the ‘t’ prefix key contains
trail-related commands.  Each entry on the line shows one command, with
a single capital letter showing which letter you press to get that
command.  We have used ‘t n’, ‘t p’, ‘t ]’, and ‘t y’ so far.  The
‘[MORE]’ means you can press ‘?’ again to see more ‘t’-prefix commands.
Notice that the commands are roughly divided (by semicolons) into
related groups.

   When you are in the help display for a prefix key, the prefix is
still active.  If you press another key, like ‘y’ for example, it will
be interpreted as a ‘t y’ command.  If all you wanted was to look at the
help messages, press ‘C-g’ afterwards to cancel the prefix.

   One more way to correct an error is by editing the stack entries.
The actual Stack buffer is marked read-only and must not be edited
directly, but you can press ‘`’ (grave accent) to edit a stack entry.

   Try entering ‘3.141439’ now.  If this is supposed to represent ‘pi’,
it’s got several errors.  Press ‘`’ to edit this number.  Now use the
normal Emacs cursor motion and editing keys to change the second 4 to a
5, and to transpose the 3 and the 9.  When you press <RET>, the number
on the stack will be replaced by your new number.  This works for
formulas, vectors, and all other types of values you can put on the
stack.  The ‘`’ key also works during entry of a number or algebraic
formula.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Tutorial,  Prev: Undo Tutorial,  Up: Basic Tutorial

3.1.4 Mode-Setting Commands
---------------------------

Calc has many types of “modes” that affect the way it interprets your
commands or the way it displays data.  We have already seen one mode,
namely Algebraic mode.  There are many others, too; we’ll try some of
the most common ones here.

   Perhaps the most fundamental mode in Calc is the current “precision”.
Notice the ‘12’ on the Calc window’s mode line:

     --%*-Calc: 12 Deg       (Calculator)----All------

Most of the symbols there are Emacs things you don’t need to worry
about, but the ‘12’ and the ‘Deg’ are mode indicators.  The ‘12’ means
that calculations should always be carried to 12 significant figures.
That is why, when we type ‘1 <RET> 7 /’, we get ‘0.142857142857’ with
exactly 12 digits, not counting leading and trailing zeros.

   You can set the precision to anything you like by pressing ‘p’, then
entering a suitable number.  Try pressing ‘p 30 <RET>’, then doing ‘1
<RET> 7 /’ again:

     1:  0.142857142857
     2:  0.142857142857142857142857142857
         .

   Although the precision can be set arbitrarily high, Calc always has
to have _some_ value for the current precision.  After all, the true
value ‘1/7’ is an infinitely repeating decimal; Calc has to stop
somewhere.

   Of course, calculations are slower the more digits you request.
Press ‘p 12’ now to set the precision back down to the default.

   Calculations always use the current precision.  For example, even
though we have a 30-digit value for ‘1/7’ on the stack, if we use it in
a calculation in 12-digit mode it will be rounded down to 12 digits
before it is used.  Try it; press <RET> to duplicate the number, then
‘1 +’.  Notice that the <RET> key didn’t round the number, because it
doesn’t do any calculation.  But the instant we pressed ‘+’, the number
was rounded down.

     1:  0.142857142857
     2:  0.142857142857142857142857142857
     3:  1.14285714286
         .

In fact, since we added a digit on the left, we had to lose one digit on
the right from even the 12-digit value of ‘1/7’.

   How did we get more than 12 digits when we computed ‘2^3^4’?  The
answer is that Calc makes a distinction between “integers” and
“floating-point” numbers, or “floats”.  An integer is a number that does
not contain a decimal point.  There is no such thing as an “infinitely
repeating fraction integer,” so Calc doesn’t have to limit itself.  If
you asked for ‘2^10000’ (don’t try this!), you would have to wait a long
time but you would eventually get an exact answer.  If you ask for
‘2.^10000’, you will quickly get an answer which is correct only to 12
places.  The decimal point tells Calc that it should use floating-point
arithmetic to get the answer, not exact integer arithmetic.

   You can use the ‘F’ (‘calc-floor’) command to convert a
floating-point value to an integer, and ‘c f’ (‘calc-float’) to convert
an integer to floating-point form.

   Let’s try entering that last calculation:

     1:  2.         2:  2.         1:  1.99506311689e3010
         .          1:  10000          .
                        .

       2.0 <RET>          10000 <RET>      ^

Notice the letter ‘e’ in there.  It represents “times ten to the power
of,” and is used by Calc automatically whenever writing the number out
fully would introduce more extra zeros than you probably want to see.
You can enter numbers in this notation, too.

     1:  2.         2:  2.         1:  1.99506311678e3010
         .          1:  10000.         .
                        .

       2.0 <RET>          1e4 <RET>        ^

Hey, the answer is different!  Look closely at the middle columns of the
two examples.  In the first, the stack contained the exact integer
‘10000’, but in the second it contained a floating-point value with a
decimal point.  When you raise a number to an integer power, Calc uses
repeated squaring and multiplication to get the answer.  When you use a
floating-point power, Calc uses logarithms and exponentials.  As you can
see, a slight error crept in during one of these methods.  Which one
should we trust?  Let’s raise the precision a bit and find out:

         .          1:  2.         2:  2.         1:  1.995063116880828e3010
                        .          1:  10000.         .
                                       .

      p 16 <RET>        2. <RET>           1e4            ^    p 12 <RET>

Presumably, it doesn’t matter whether we do this higher-precision
calculation using an integer or floating-point power, since we have
added enough “guard digits” to trust the first 12 digits no matter what.
And the verdict is... Integer powers were more accurate; in fact, the
result was only off by one unit in the last place.

   Calc does many of its internal calculations to a slightly higher
precision, but it doesn’t always bump the precision up enough.  In each
case, Calc added about two digits of precision during its calculation
and then rounded back down to 12 digits afterward.  In one case, it was
enough; in the other, it wasn’t.  If you really need X digits of
precision, it never hurts to do the calculation with a few extra guard
digits.

   What if we want guard digits but don’t want to look at them?  We can
set the “float format”.  Calc supports four major formats for
floating-point numbers, called “normal”, “fixed-point”, “scientific
notation”, and “engineering notation”.  You get them by pressing ‘d n’,
‘d f’, ‘d s’, and ‘d e’, respectively.  In each case, you can supply a
numeric prefix argument which says how many digits should be displayed.
As an example, let’s put a few numbers onto the stack and try some
different display modes.  First, use ‘M-0 <DEL>’ to clear the stack,
then enter the four numbers shown here:

     4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345
     3:  12345.     3:  12300.     3:  1.2345e4   3:  1.23e4     3:  12345.000
     2:  123.45     2:  123.       2:  1.2345e2   2:  1.23e2     2:  123.450
     1:  12.345     1:  12.3       1:  1.2345e1   1:  1.23e1     1:  12.345
         .              .              .              .              .

        d n          M-3 d n          d s          M-3 d s        M-3 d f

Notice that when we typed ‘M-3 d n’, the numbers were rounded down to
three significant digits, but then when we typed ‘d s’ all five
significant figures reappeared.  The float format does not affect how
numbers are stored, it only affects how they are displayed.  Only the
current precision governs the actual rounding of numbers in the
Calculator’s memory.

   Engineering notation, not shown here, is like scientific notation
except the exponent (the power-of-ten part) is always adjusted to be a
multiple of three (as in “kilo,” “micro,” etc.).  As a result there will
be one, two, or three digits before the decimal point.

   Whenever you change a display-related mode, Calc redraws everything
in the stack.  This may be slow if there are many things on the stack,
so Calc allows you to type shift-‘H’ before any mode command to prevent
it from updating the stack.  Anything Calc displays after the
mode-changing command will appear in the new format.

     4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345      4:  12345
     3:  12345.000  3:  12345.000  3:  12345.000  3:  1.2345e4   3:  12345.
     2:  123.450    2:  123.450    2:  1.2345e1   2:  1.2345e1   2:  123.45
     1:  12.345     1:  1.2345e1   1:  1.2345e2   1:  1.2345e2   1:  12.345
         .              .              .              .              .

         H d s          <DEL> U          <TAB>            d <SPC>          d n

Here the ‘H d s’ command changes to scientific notation but without
updating the screen.  Deleting the top stack entry and undoing it back
causes it to show up in the new format; swapping the top two stack
entries reformats both entries.  The ‘d <SPC>’ command refreshes the
whole stack.  The ‘d n’ command changes back to the normal float format;
since it doesn’t have an ‘H’ prefix, it also updates all the stack
entries to be in ‘d n’ format.

   Notice that the integer ‘12345’ was not affected by any of the float
formats.  Integers are integers, and are always displayed exactly.

   Large integers have their own problems.  Let’s look back at the
result of ‘2^3^4’.

     2417851639229258349412352

Quick—how many digits does this have?  Try typing ‘d g’:

     2,417,851,639,229,258,349,412,352

Now how many digits does this have?  It’s much easier to tell!  We can
actually group digits into clumps of any size.  Some people prefer ‘M-5
d g’:

     24178,51639,22925,83494,12352

   Let’s see what happens to floating-point numbers when they are
grouped.  First, type ‘p 25 <RET>’ to make sure we have enough precision
to get ourselves into trouble.  Now, type ‘1e13 /’:

     24,17851,63922.9258349412352

The integer part is grouped but the fractional part isn’t.  Now try ‘M--
M-5 d g’ (that’s meta-minus-sign, meta-five):

     24,17851,63922.92583,49412,352

   If you find it hard to tell the decimal point from the commas, try
changing the grouping character to a space with ‘d , <SPC>’:

     24 17851 63922.92583 49412 352

   Type ‘d , ,’ to restore the normal grouping character, then ‘d g’
again to turn grouping off.  Also, press ‘p 12’ to restore the default
precision.

   Press ‘U’ enough times to get the original big integer back.  (Notice
that ‘U’ does not undo each mode-setting command; if you want to undo a
mode-setting command, you have to do it yourself.)  Now, type ‘d r 16
<RET>’:

     16#200000000000000000000

The number is now displayed in “hexadecimal”, or “base-16” form.
Suddenly it looks pretty simple; this should be no surprise, since we
got this number by computing a power of two, and 16 is a power of 2.  In
fact, we can use ‘d r 2 <RET>’ to see it in actual binary form:

     2#1000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 ...

We don’t have enough space here to show all the zeros!  They won’t fit
on a typical screen, either, so you will have to use horizontal
scrolling to see them all.  Press ‘<’ and ‘>’ to scroll the stack window
left and right by half its width.  Another way to view something large
is to press ‘`’ (grave accent) to edit the top of stack in a separate
window.  (Press ‘C-c C-c’ when you are done.)

   You can enter non-decimal numbers using the ‘#’ symbol, too.  Let’s
see what the hexadecimal number ‘5FE’ looks like in binary.  Type
‘16#5FE’ (the letters can be typed in upper or lower case; they will
always appear in upper case).  It will also help to turn grouping on
with ‘d g’:

     2#101,1111,1110

   Notice that ‘d g’ groups by fours by default if the display radix is
binary or hexadecimal, but by threes if it is decimal, octal, or any
other radix.

   Now let’s see that number in decimal; type ‘d r 10’:

     1,534

   Numbers are not _stored_ with any particular radix attached.  They’re
just numbers; they can be entered in any radix, and are always displayed
in whatever radix you’ve chosen with ‘d r’.  The current radix applies
to integers, fractions, and floats.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Your friend Joe tried to enter one-third as
‘3#0.1’ in ‘d r 3’ mode with a precision of 12.  He got ‘3#0.0222222...’
(with 25 2’s) in the display.  When he multiplied that by three, he got
‘3#0.222222...’ instead of the expected ‘3#1’.  Next, Joe entered
‘3#0.2’ and, to his great relief, saw ‘3#0.2’ on the screen.  But when
he typed ‘2 /’, he got ‘3#0.10000001’ (some zeros omitted).  What’s
going on here?  *Note 1: Modes Answer 1.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Scientific notation works in non-decimal modes in
the natural way (the exponent is a power of the radix instead of a power
of ten, although the exponent itself is always written in decimal).
Thus ‘8#1.23e3 = 8#1230.0’.  Suppose we have the hexadecimal number
‘f.e8f’ times 16 to the 15th power: We write ‘16#f.e8fe15’.  What is
wrong with this picture?  What could we write instead that would work
better?  *Note 2: Modes Answer 2.  (•)

   The ‘m’ prefix key has another set of modes, relating to the way Calc
interprets your inputs and does computations.  Whereas ‘d’-prefix modes
generally affect the way things look, ‘m’-prefix modes affect the way
they are actually computed.

   The most popular ‘m’-prefix mode is the “angular mode”.  Notice the
‘Deg’ indicator in the mode line.  This means that if you use a command
that interprets a number as an angle, it will assume the angle is
measured in degrees.  For example,

     1:  45         1:  0.707106781187   1:  0.500000000001    1:  0.5
         .              .                    .                     .

         45             S                    2 ^                   c 1

The shift-‘S’ command computes the sine of an angle.  The sine of 45
degrees is ‘sqrt(2)/2’; squaring this yields ‘2/4 = 0.5’.  However,
there has been a slight roundoff error because the representation of
‘sqrt(2)/2’ wasn’t exact.  The ‘c 1’ command is a handy way to clean up
numbers in this case; it temporarily reduces the precision by one digit
while it re-rounds the number on the top of the stack.

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  Your friend Joe computed the sine of 45 degrees as
shown above, then, hoping to avoid an inexact result, he increased the
precision to 16 digits before squaring.  What happened?  *Note 3: Modes
Answer 3.  (•)

   To do this calculation in radians, we would type ‘m r’ first.  (The
indicator changes to ‘Rad’.)  45 degrees corresponds to ‘pi/4’ radians.
To get ‘pi’, press the ‘P’ key.  (Once again, this is a shifted capital
‘P’.  Remember, unshifted ‘p’ sets the precision.)

     1:  3.14159265359   1:  0.785398163398   1:  0.707106781187
         .                   .                .

         P                   4 /       m r    S

   Likewise, inverse trigonometric functions generate results in either
radians or degrees, depending on the current angular mode.

     1:  0.707106781187   1:  0.785398163398   1:  45.
         .                    .                    .

         .5 Q        m r      I S        m d       U I S

Here we compute the Inverse Sine of ‘sqrt(0.5)’, first in radians, then
in degrees.

   Use ‘c d’ and ‘c r’ to convert a number from radians to degrees and
vice-versa.

     1:  45         1:  0.785398163397     1:  45.
         .              .                      .

         45             c r                    c d

   Another interesting mode is “Fraction mode”.  Normally, dividing two
integers produces a floating-point result if the quotient can’t be
expressed as an exact integer.  Fraction mode causes integer division to
produce a fraction, i.e., a rational number, instead.

     2:  12         1:  1.33333333333    1:  4:3
     1:  9              .                    .
         .

      12 <RET> 9          /          m f       U /      m f

In the first case, we get an approximate floating-point result.  In the
second case, we get an exact fractional result (four-thirds).

   You can enter a fraction at any time using ‘:’ notation.  (Calc uses
‘:’ instead of ‘/’ as the fraction separator because ‘/’ is already used
to divide the top two stack elements.)  Calculations involving fractions
will always produce exact fractional results; Fraction mode only says
what to do when dividing two integers.

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  If fractional arithmetic is exact, why would you
ever use floating-point numbers instead?  *Note 4: Modes Answer 4.  (•)

   Typing ‘m f’ doesn’t change any existing values in the stack.  In the
above example, we had to Undo the division and do it over again when we
changed to Fraction mode.  But if you use the evaluates-to operator you
can get commands like ‘m f’ to recompute for you.

     1:  12 / 9 => 1.33333333333    1:  12 / 9 => 1.333    1:  12 / 9 => 4:3
         .                              .                      .

        ' 12/9 => <RET>                   p 4 <RET>                m f

In this example, the righthand side of the ‘=>’ operator on the stack is
recomputed when we change the precision, then again when we change to
Fraction mode.  All ‘=>’ expressions on the stack are recomputed every
time you change any mode that might affect their values.


File: calc.info,  Node: Arithmetic Tutorial,  Next: Vector/Matrix Tutorial,  Prev: Basic Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.2 Arithmetic Tutorial
=======================

In this section, we explore the arithmetic and scientific functions
available in the Calculator.

   The standard arithmetic commands are ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’.
Each normally takes two numbers from the top of the stack and pushes
back a result.  The ‘n’ and ‘&’ keys perform change-sign and reciprocal
operations, respectively.

     1:  5          1:  0.2        1:  5.         1:  -5.        1:  5.
         .              .              .              .              .

         5              &              &              n              n

   You can apply a “binary operator” like ‘+’ across any number of stack
entries by giving it a numeric prefix.  You can also apply it pairwise
to several stack elements along with the top one if you use a negative
prefix.

     3:  2          1:  9          3:  2          4:  2          3:  12
     2:  3              .          2:  3          3:  3          2:  13
     1:  4                         1:  4          2:  4          1:  14
         .                             .          1:  10             .
                                                      .

     2 <RET> 3 <RET> 4     M-3 +           U              10          M-- M-3 +

   You can apply a “unary operator” like ‘&’ to the top N stack entries
with a numeric prefix, too.

     3:  2          3:  0.5                3:  0.5
     2:  3          2:  0.333333333333     2:  3.
     1:  4          1:  0.25               1:  4.
         .              .                      .

     2 <RET> 3 <RET> 4      M-3 &                  M-2 &

   Notice that the results here are left in floating-point form.  We can
convert them back to integers by pressing ‘F’, the “floor” function.
This function rounds down to the next lower integer.  There is also ‘R’,
which rounds to the nearest integer.

     7:  2.         7:  2          7:  2
     6:  2.4        6:  2          6:  2
     5:  2.5        5:  2          5:  3
     4:  2.6        4:  2          4:  3
     3:  -2.        3:  -2         3:  -2
     2:  -2.4       2:  -3         2:  -2
     1:  -2.6       1:  -3         1:  -3
         .              .              .

                       M-7 F        U M-7 R

   Since dividing-and-flooring (i.e., “integer quotient”) is such a
common operation, Calc provides a special command for that purpose, the
backslash ‘\’.  Another common arithmetic operator is ‘%’, which
computes the remainder that would arise from a ‘\’ operation, i.e., the
“modulo” of two numbers.  For example,

     2:  1234       1:  12         2:  1234       1:  34
     1:  100            .          1:  100            .
         .                             .

     1234 <RET> 100       \              U              %

   These commands actually work for any real numbers, not just integers.

     2:  3.1415     1:  3          2:  3.1415     1:  0.1415
     1:  1              .          1:  1              .
         .                             .

     3.1415 <RET> 1       \              U              %

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  The ‘\’ command would appear to be a frill, since
you could always do the same thing with ‘/ F’.  Think of a situation
where this is not true—‘/ F’ would be inadequate.  Now think of a way
you could get around the problem if Calc didn’t provide a ‘\’ command.
*Note 1: Arithmetic Answer 1.  (•)

   We’ve already seen the ‘Q’ (square root) and ‘S’ (sine) commands.
Other commands along those lines are ‘C’ (cosine), ‘T’ (tangent), ‘E’
(‘e^x’) and ‘L’ (natural logarithm).  These can be modified by the ‘I’
(inverse) and ‘H’ (hyperbolic) prefix keys.

   Let’s compute the sine and cosine of an angle, and verify the
identity ‘sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2 = 1’.  We’ll arbitrarily pick -64 degrees
as a good value for ‘x’.  With the angular mode set to degrees (type
‘m d’), do:

     2:  -64        2:  -64        2:  -0.89879   2:  -0.89879   1:  1.
     1:  -64        1:  -0.89879   1:  -64        1:  0.43837        .
         .              .              .              .

      64 n <RET> <RET>      S              <TAB>            C              f h

(For brevity, we’re showing only five digits of the results here.  You
can of course do these calculations to any precision you like.)

   Remember, ‘f h’ is the ‘calc-hypot’, or square-root of sum of
squares, command.

   Another identity is ‘tan(x) = sin(x) / cos(x)’.

     2:  -0.89879   1:  -2.0503    1:  -64.
     1:  0.43837        .              .
         .

         U              /              I T

   A physical interpretation of this calculation is that if you move
‘0.89879’ units downward and ‘0.43837’ units to the right, your
direction of motion is -64 degrees from horizontal.  Suppose we move in
the opposite direction, up and to the left:

     2:  -0.89879   2:  0.89879    1:  -2.0503    1:  -64.
     1:  0.43837    1:  -0.43837       .              .
         .              .

         U U            M-2 n          /              I T

How can the angle be the same?  The answer is that the ‘/’ operation
loses information about the signs of its inputs.  Because the quotient
is negative, we know exactly one of the inputs was negative, but we
can’t tell which one.  There is an ‘f T’ [‘arctan2’] function which
computes the inverse tangent of the quotient of a pair of numbers.
Since you feed it the two original numbers, it has enough information to
give you a full 360-degree answer.

     2:  0.89879    1:  116.       3:  116.       2:  116.       1:  180.
     1:  -0.43837       .          2:  -0.89879   1:  -64.           .
         .                         1:  0.43837        .
                                       .

         U U            f T         M-<RET> M-2 n       f T            -

The resulting angles differ by 180 degrees; in other words, they point
in opposite directions, just as we would expect.

   The <META>-<RET> we used in the third step is the “last-arguments”
command.  It is sort of like Undo, except that it restores the arguments
of the last command to the stack without removing the command’s result.
It is useful in situations like this one, where we need to do several
operations on the same inputs.  We could have accomplished the same
thing by using ‘M-2 <RET>’ to duplicate the top two stack elements right
after the ‘U U’, then a pair of ‘M-<TAB>’ commands to cycle the 116 up
around the duplicates.

   A similar identity is supposed to hold for hyperbolic sines and
cosines, except that it is the _difference_ ‘cosh(x)^2 - sinh(x)^2’ that
always equals one.  Let’s try to verify this identity.

     2:  -64        2:  -64        2:  -64        2:  9.7192e54  2:  9.7192e54
     1:  -64        1:  -3.1175e27 1:  9.7192e54  1:  -64        1:  9.7192e54
         .              .              .              .              .

      64 n <RET> <RET>      H C            2 ^            <TAB>            H S 2 ^

Something’s obviously wrong, because when we subtract these numbers the
answer will clearly be zero!  But if you think about it, if these
numbers _did_ differ by one, it would be in the 55th decimal place.  The
difference we seek has been lost entirely to roundoff error.

   We could verify this hypothesis by doing the actual calculation with,
say, 60 decimal places of precision.  This will be slow, but not
enormously so.  Try it if you wish; sure enough, the answer is 0.99999,
reasonably close to 1.

   Of course, a more reasonable way to verify the identity is to use a
more reasonable value for ‘x’!

   Some Calculator commands use the Hyperbolic prefix for other
purposes.  The logarithm and exponential functions, for example, work to
the base ‘e’ normally but use base-10 instead if you use the Hyperbolic
prefix.

     1:  1000       1:  6.9077     1:  1000       1:  3
         .              .              .              .

         1000           L              U              H L

First, we mistakenly compute a natural logarithm.  Then we undo and
compute a common logarithm instead.

   The ‘B’ key computes a general base-B logarithm for any value of B.

     2:  1000       1:  3          1:  1000.      2:  1000.      1:  6.9077
     1:  10             .              .          1:  2.71828        .
         .                                            .

      1000 <RET> 10       B              H E            H P            B

Here we first use ‘B’ to compute the base-10 logarithm, then use the
“hyperbolic” exponential as a cheap hack to recover the number 1000,
then use ‘B’ again to compute the natural logarithm.  Note that ‘P’ with
the hyperbolic prefix pushes the constant ‘e’ onto the stack.

   You may have noticed that both times we took the base-10 logarithm of
1000, we got an exact integer result.  Calc always tries to give an
exact rational result for calculations involving rational numbers where
possible.  But when we used ‘H E’, the result was a floating-point
number for no apparent reason.  In fact, if we had computed ‘10 <RET> 3
^’ we _would_ have gotten an exact integer 1000.  But the ‘H E’ command
is rigged to generate a floating-point result all of the time so that
‘1000 H E’ will not waste time computing a thousand-digit integer when
all you probably wanted was ‘1e1000’.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Find a pair of integer inputs to the ‘B’ command
for which Calc could find an exact rational result but doesn’t.  *Note
2: Arithmetic Answer 2.  (•)

   The Calculator also has a set of functions relating to combinatorics
and statistics.  You may be familiar with the “factorial” function,
which computes the product of all the integers up to a given number.

     1:  100        1:  93326215443...    1:  100.       1:  9.3326e157
         .              .                     .              .

         100            !                     U c f          !

Recall, the ‘c f’ command converts the integer or fraction at the top of
the stack to floating-point format.  If you take the factorial of a
floating-point number, you get a floating-point result accurate to the
current precision.  But if you give ‘!’ an exact integer, you get an
exact integer result (158 digits long in this case).

   If you take the factorial of a non-integer, Calc uses a generalized
factorial function defined in terms of Euler’s Gamma function ‘gamma(n)’
(which is itself available as the ‘f g’ command).

     3:  4.         3:  24.               1:  5.5        1:  52.342777847
     2:  4.5        2:  52.3427777847         .              .
     1:  5.         1:  120.
         .              .

                        M-3 !              M-0 <DEL> 5.5       f g

Here we verify the identity ‘N! = gamma(N+1)’.

   The binomial coefficient N-choose-M is defined by ‘n! / m! (n-m)!’
for all reals ‘n’ and ‘m’.  The intermediate results in this formula can
become quite large even if the final result is small; the ‘k c’ command
computes a binomial coefficient in a way that avoids large intermediate
values.

   The ‘k’ prefix key defines several common functions out of
combinatorics and number theory.  Here we compute the binomial
coefficient 30-choose-20, then determine its prime factorization.

     2:  30         1:  30045015   1:  [3, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13, 23, 29]
     1:  20             .              .
         .

      30 <RET> 20         k c            k f

You can verify these prime factors by using ‘V R *’ to multiply together
the elements of this vector.  The result is the original number,
30045015.

   Suppose a program you are writing needs a hash table with at least
10000 entries.  It’s best to use a prime number as the actual size of a
hash table.  Calc can compute the next prime number after 10000:

     1:  10000      1:  10007      1:  9973
         .              .              .

         10000          k n            I k n

Just for kicks we’ve also computed the next prime _less_ than 10000.

   *Note Financial Functions::, for a description of the Calculator
commands that deal with business and financial calculations (functions
like ‘pv’, ‘rate’, and ‘sln’).

   *Note Binary Functions::, to read about the commands for operating on
binary numbers (like ‘and’, ‘xor’, and ‘lsh’).


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector/Matrix Tutorial,  Next: Types Tutorial,  Prev: Arithmetic Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.3 Vector/Matrix Tutorial
==========================

A “vector” is a list of numbers or other Calc data objects.  Calc
provides a large set of commands that operate on vectors.  Some are
familiar operations from vector analysis.  Others simply treat a vector
as a list of objects.

* Menu:

* Vector Analysis Tutorial::
* Matrix Tutorial::
* List Tutorial::


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector Analysis Tutorial,  Next: Matrix Tutorial,  Prev: Vector/Matrix Tutorial,  Up: Vector/Matrix Tutorial

3.3.1 Vector Analysis
---------------------

If you add two vectors, the result is a vector of the sums of the
elements, taken pairwise.

     1:  [1, 2, 3]     2:  [1, 2, 3]     1:  [8, 8, 3]
         .             1:  [7, 6, 0]         .
                           .

         [1,2,3]  s 1      [7 6 0]  s 2      +

Note that we can separate the vector elements with either commas or
spaces.  This is true whether we are using incomplete vectors or
algebraic entry.  The ‘s 1’ and ‘s 2’ commands save these vectors so we
can easily reuse them later.

   If you multiply two vectors, the result is the sum of the products of
the elements taken pairwise.  This is called the “dot product” of the
vectors.

     2:  [1, 2, 3]     1:  19
     1:  [7, 6, 0]         .
         .

         r 1 r 2           *

   The dot product of two vectors is equal to the product of their
lengths times the cosine of the angle between them.  (Here the vector is
interpreted as a line from the origin ‘(0,0,0)’ to the specified point
in three-dimensional space.)  The ‘A’ (absolute value) command can be
used to compute the length of a vector.

     3:  19            3:  19          1:  0.550782    1:  56.579
     2:  [1, 2, 3]     2:  3.741657        .               .
     1:  [7, 6, 0]     1:  9.219544
         .                 .

         M-<RET>             M-2 A          * /             I C

First we recall the arguments to the dot product command, then we
compute the absolute values of the top two stack entries to obtain the
lengths of the vectors, then we divide the dot product by the product of
the lengths to get the cosine of the angle.  The inverse cosine finds
that the angle between the vectors is about 56 degrees.

   The “cross product” of two vectors is a vector whose length is the
product of the lengths of the inputs times the sine of the angle between
them, and whose direction is perpendicular to both input vectors.
Unlike the dot product, the cross product is defined only for
three-dimensional vectors.  Let’s double-check our computation of the
angle using the cross product.

     2:  [1, 2, 3]  3:  [-18, 21, -8]  1:  [-0.52, 0.61, -0.23]  1:  56.579
     1:  [7, 6, 0]  2:  [1, 2, 3]          .                         .
         .          1:  [7, 6, 0]
                        .

         r 1 r 2        V C  s 3  M-<RET>    M-2 A * /                 A I S

First we recall the original vectors and compute their cross product,
which we also store for later reference.  Now we divide the vector by
the product of the lengths of the original vectors.  The length of this
vector should be the sine of the angle; sure enough, it is!

   Vector-related commands generally begin with the ‘v’ prefix key.
Some are uppercase letters and some are lowercase.  To make it easier to
type these commands, the shift-‘V’ prefix key acts the same as the ‘v’
key.  (*Note General Mode Commands::, for a way to make all prefix keys
have this property.)

   If we take the dot product of two perpendicular vectors we expect to
get zero, since the cosine of 90 degrees is zero.  Let’s check that the
cross product is indeed perpendicular to both inputs:

     2:  [1, 2, 3]      1:  0          2:  [7, 6, 0]      1:  0
     1:  [-18, 21, -8]      .          1:  [-18, 21, -8]      .
         .                                 .

         r 1 r 3            *          <DEL> r 2 r 3            *

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Given a vector on the top of the stack, what
keystrokes would you use to “normalize” the vector, i.e., to reduce its
length to one without changing its direction?  *Note 1: Vector Answer 1.
(•)

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Suppose a certain particle can be at any of
several positions along a ruler.  You have a list of those positions in
the form of a vector, and another list of the probabilities for the
particle to be at the corresponding positions.  Find the average
position of the particle.  *Note 2: Vector Answer 2.  (•)


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Tutorial,  Next: List Tutorial,  Prev: Vector Analysis Tutorial,  Up: Vector/Matrix Tutorial

3.3.2 Matrices
--------------

A “matrix” is just a vector of vectors, all the same length.  This means
you can enter a matrix using nested brackets.  You can also use the
semicolon character to enter a matrix.  We’ll show both methods here:

     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]             1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]                 [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]
         .                             .

       [[1 2 3] [4 5 6]]             ' [1 2 3; 4 5 6] <RET>

We’ll be using this matrix again, so type ‘s 4’ to save it now.

   Note that semicolons work with incomplete vectors, but they work
better in algebraic entry.  That’s why we use the apostrophe in the
second example.

   When two matrices are multiplied, the lefthand matrix must have the
same number of columns as the righthand matrix has rows.  Row ‘i’,
column ‘j’ of the result is effectively the dot product of row ‘i’ of
the left matrix by column ‘j’ of the right matrix.

   If we try to duplicate this matrix and multiply it by itself, the
dimensions are wrong and the multiplication cannot take place:

     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]   * [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]     [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]
         .

         <RET> *

Though rather hard to read, this is a formula which shows the product of
two matrices.  The ‘*’ function, having invalid arguments, has been left
in symbolic form.

   We can multiply the matrices if we “transpose” one of them first.

     2:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]       1:  [ [ 14, 32 ]      1:  [ [ 17, 22, 27 ]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]           [ 32, 77 ] ]          [ 22, 29, 36 ]
     1:  [ [ 1, 4 ]              .                       [ 27, 36, 45 ] ]
           [ 2, 5 ]                                    .
           [ 3, 6 ] ]
         .

         U v t                   *                     U <TAB> *

   Matrix multiplication is not commutative; indeed, switching the order
of the operands can even change the dimensions of the result matrix, as
happened here!

   If you multiply a plain vector by a matrix, it is treated as a single
row or column depending on which side of the matrix it is on.  The
result is a plain vector which should also be interpreted as a row or
column as appropriate.

     2:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]      1:  [14, 32]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]        .
     1:  [1, 2, 3]
         .

         r 4 r 1                *

   Multiplying in the other order wouldn’t work because the number of
rows in the matrix is different from the number of elements in the
vector.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Use ‘*’ to sum along the rows of the above 2x3
matrix to get ‘[6, 15]’.  Now use ‘*’ to sum along the columns to get
‘[5, 7, 9]’.  *Note 1: Matrix Answer 1.  (•)

   An “identity matrix” is a square matrix with ones along the diagonal
and zeros elsewhere.  It has the property that multiplication by an
identity matrix, on the left or on the right, always produces the
original matrix.

     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]      2:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]      1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]          [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]          [ 4, 5, 6 ] ]
         .                  1:  [ [ 1, 0, 0 ]          .
                                  [ 0, 1, 0 ]
                                  [ 0, 0, 1 ] ]
                                .

         r 4                    v i 3 <RET>              *

   If a matrix is square, it is often possible to find its “inverse”,
that is, a matrix which, when multiplied by the original matrix, yields
an identity matrix.  The ‘&’ (reciprocal) key also computes the inverse
of a matrix.

     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]      1:  [ [   -2.4,     1.2,   -0.2 ]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ]            [    2.8,    -1.4,    0.4 ]
           [ 7, 6, 0 ] ]          [ -0.73333, 0.53333, -0.2 ] ]
         .                      .

         r 4 r 2 |  s 5         &

The vertical bar ‘|’ “concatenates” numbers, vectors, and matrices
together.  Here we have used it to add a new row onto our matrix to make
it square.

   We can multiply these two matrices in either order to get an
identity.

     1:  [ [ 1., 0., 0. ]      1:  [ [ 1., 0., 0. ]
           [ 0., 1., 0. ]            [ 0., 1., 0. ]
           [ 0., 0., 1. ] ]          [ 0., 0., 1. ] ]
         .                         .

         M-<RET>  *                  U <TAB> *

   Matrix inverses are related to systems of linear equations in
algebra.  Suppose we had the following set of equations:

         a + 2b + 3c = 6
        4a + 5b + 6c = 2
        7a + 6b      = 3

This can be cast into the matrix equation,

        [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]     [ [ a ]     [ [ 6 ]
          [ 4, 5, 6 ]   *   [ b ]   =   [ 2 ]
          [ 7, 6, 0 ] ]     [ c ] ]     [ 3 ] ]

   We can solve this system of equations by multiplying both sides by
the inverse of the matrix.  Calc can do this all in one step:

     2:  [6, 2, 3]          1:  [-12.6, 15.2, -3.93333]
     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]          .
           [ 4, 5, 6 ]
           [ 7, 6, 0 ] ]
         .

         [6,2,3] r 5            /

The result is the ‘[a, b, c]’ vector that solves the equations.
(Dividing by a square matrix is equivalent to multiplying by its
inverse.)

   Let’s verify this solution:

     2:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]                1:  [6., 2., 3.]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ]                    .
           [ 7, 6, 0 ] ]
     1:  [-12.6, 15.2, -3.93333]
         .

         r 5  <TAB>                         *

Note that we had to be careful about the order in which we multiplied
the matrix and vector.  If we multiplied in the other order, Calc would
assume the vector was a row vector in order to make the dimensions come
out right, and the answer would be incorrect.  If you don’t feel safe
letting Calc take either interpretation of your vectors, use explicit
Nx1 or 1xN matrices instead.  In this case, you would enter the original
column vector as ‘[[6], [2], [3]]’ or ‘[6; 2; 3]’.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Algebraic entry allows you to make vectors and
matrices that include variables.  Solve the following system of
equations to get expressions for ‘x’ and ‘y’ in terms of ‘a’ and ‘b’.

        x + a y = 6
        x + b y = 10

*Note 2: Matrix Answer 2.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  A system of equations is “over-determined” if it
has more equations than variables.  It is often the case that there are
no values for the variables that will satisfy all the equations at once,
but it is still useful to find a set of values which “nearly” satisfy
all the equations.  In terms of matrix equations, you can’t solve ‘A X =
B’ directly because the matrix ‘A’ is not square for an over-determined
system.  Matrix inversion works only for square matrices.  One common
trick is to multiply both sides on the left by the transpose of ‘A’:
‘trn(A)*A*X = trn(A)*B’.  Now ‘trn(A)*A’ is a square matrix so a
solution is possible.  It turns out that the ‘X’ vector you compute in
this way will be a “least-squares” solution, which can be regarded as
the “closest” solution to the set of equations.  Use Calc to solve the
following over-determined system:

         a + 2b + 3c = 6
        4a + 5b + 6c = 2
        7a + 6b      = 3
        2a + 4b + 6c = 11

*Note 3: Matrix Answer 3.  (•)


File: calc.info,  Node: List Tutorial,  Prev: Matrix Tutorial,  Up: Vector/Matrix Tutorial

3.3.3 Vectors as Lists
----------------------

Although Calc has a number of features for manipulating vectors and
matrices as mathematical objects, you can also treat vectors as simple
lists of values.  For example, we saw that the ‘k f’ command returns a
vector which is a list of the prime factors of a number.

   You can pack and unpack stack entries into vectors:

     3:  10         1:  [10, 20, 30]     3:  10
     2:  20             .                2:  20
     1:  30                              1:  30
         .                                   .

                        M-3 v p              v u

   You can also build vectors out of consecutive integers, or out of
many copies of a given value:

     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4]    2:  [1, 2, 3, 4]    2:  [1, 2, 3, 4]
         .               1:  17              1:  [17, 17, 17, 17]
                             .                   .

         v x 4 <RET>           17                  v b 4 <RET>

   You can apply an operator to every element of a vector using the
“map” command.

     1:  [17, 34, 51, 68]   1:  [289, 1156, 2601, 4624]  1:  [17, 34, 51, 68]
         .                      .                            .

         V M *                  2 V M ^                      V M Q

In the first step, we multiply the vector of integers by the vector of
17’s elementwise.  In the second step, we raise each element to the
power two.  (The general rule is that both operands must be vectors of
the same length, or else one must be a vector and the other a plain
number.)  In the final step, we take the square root of each element.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Compute a vector of powers of two from ‘2^-4’ to
‘2^4’.  *Note 1: List Answer 1.  (•)

   You can also “reduce” a binary operator across a vector.  For
example, reducing ‘*’ computes the product of all the elements in the
vector:

     1:  123123     1:  [3, 7, 11, 13, 41]      1:  123123
         .              .                           .

         123123         k f                         V R *

In this example, we decompose 123123 into its prime factors, then
multiply those factors together again to yield the original number.

   We could compute a dot product “by hand” using mapping and reduction:

     2:  [1, 2, 3]     1:  [7, 12, 0]     1:  19
     1:  [7, 6, 0]         .                  .
         .

         r 1 r 2           V M *              V R +

Recalling two vectors from the previous section, we compute the sum of
pairwise products of the elements to get the same answer for the dot
product as before.

   A slight variant of vector reduction is the “accumulate” operation,
‘V U’.  This produces a vector of the intermediate results from a
corresponding reduction.  Here we compute a table of factorials:

     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6]    1:  [1, 2, 6, 24, 120, 720]
         .                         .

         v x 6 <RET>                 V U *

   Calc allows vectors to grow as large as you like, although it gets
rather slow if vectors have more than about a hundred elements.
Actually, most of the time is spent formatting these large vectors for
display, not calculating on them.  Try the following experiment (if your
computer is very fast you may need to substitute a larger vector size).

     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, ...      1:  [2, 3, 4, 5, ...
         .                         .

         v x 500 <RET>               1 V M +

   Now press ‘v .’ (the letter ‘v’, then a period) and try the
experiment again.  In ‘v .’ mode, long vectors are displayed
“abbreviated” like this:

     1:  [1, 2, 3, ..., 500]   1:  [2, 3, 4, ..., 501]
         .                         .

         v x 500 <RET>               1 V M +

(where now the ‘...’ is actually part of the Calc display).  You will
find both operations are now much faster.  But notice that even in ‘v .’
mode, the full vectors are still shown in the Trail.  Type ‘t .’ to
cause the trail to abbreviate as well, and try the experiment one more
time.  Operations on long vectors are now quite fast!  (But of course if
you use ‘t .’ you will lose the ability to get old vectors back using
the ‘t y’ command.)

   An easy way to view a full vector when ‘v .’ mode is active is to
press ‘`’ (grave accent) to edit the vector; editing always works with
the full, unabbreviated value.

   As a larger example, let’s try to fit a straight line to some data,
using the method of least squares.  (Calc has a built-in command for
least-squares curve fitting, but we’ll do it by hand here just to
practice working with vectors.)  Suppose we have the following list of
values in a file we have loaded into Emacs:

       x        y
      ---      ---
      1.34    0.234
      1.41    0.298
      1.49    0.402
      1.56    0.412
      1.64    0.466
      1.73    0.473
      1.82    0.601
      1.91    0.519
      2.01    0.603
      2.11    0.637
      2.22    0.645
      2.33    0.705
      2.45    0.917
      2.58    1.009
      2.71    0.971
      2.85    1.062
      3.00    1.148
      3.15    1.157
      3.32    1.354

If you are reading this tutorial in printed form, you will find it
easiest to press ‘C-x * i’ to enter the on-line Info version of the
manual and find this table there.  (Press ‘g’, then type ‘List
Tutorial’, to jump straight to this section.)

   Position the cursor at the upper-left corner of this table, just to
the left of the ‘1.34’.  Press ‘C-@’ to set the mark.  (On your system
this may be ‘C-2’, ‘C-<SPC>’, or ‘NUL’.)  Now position the cursor to the
lower-right, just after the ‘1.354’.  You have now defined this region
as an Emacs “rectangle.” Still in the Info buffer, type ‘C-x * r’.  This
command (‘calc-grab-rectangle’) will pop you back into the Calculator,
with the contents of the rectangle you specified in the form of a
matrix.

     1:  [ [ 1.34, 0.234 ]
           [ 1.41, 0.298 ]
           ...

(You may wish to use ‘v .’ mode to abbreviate the display of this large
matrix.)

   We want to treat this as a pair of lists.  The first step is to
transpose this matrix into a pair of rows.  Remember, a matrix is just a
vector of vectors.  So we can unpack the matrix into a pair of row
vectors on the stack.

     1:  [ [ 1.34,  1.41,  1.49,  ... ]     2:  [1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ]
           [ 0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ] ]   1:  [0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ]
         .                                      .

         v t                                    v u

Let’s store these in quick variables 1 and 2, respectively.

     1:  [1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ]        .
         .

         t 2                             t 1

(Recall that ‘t 2’ is a variant of ‘s 2’ that removes the stored value
from the stack.)

   In a least squares fit, the slope ‘m’ is given by the formula

     m = (N sum(x y) - sum(x) sum(y)) / (N sum(x^2) - sum(x)^2)

where ‘sum(x)’ represents the sum of all the values of ‘x’.  While there
is an actual ‘sum’ function in Calc, it’s easier to sum a vector using a
simple reduction.  First, let’s compute the four different sums that
this formula uses.

     1:  41.63                 1:  98.0003
         .                         .

      r 1 V R +   t 3           r 1 2 V M ^ V R +   t 4

     1:  13.613                1:  33.36554
         .                         .

      r 2 V R +   t 5           r 1 r 2 V M * V R +   t 6

These are ‘sum(x)’, ‘sum(x^2)’, ‘sum(y)’, and ‘sum(x y)’, respectively.
(We could have used ‘*’ to compute ‘sum(x^2)’ and ‘sum(x y)’.)

   Finally, we also need ‘N’, the number of data points.  This is just
the length of either of our lists.

     1:  19
         .

      r 1 v l   t 7

(That’s ‘v’ followed by a lower-case ‘l’.)

   Now we grind through the formula:

     1:  633.94526  2:  633.94526  1:  67.23607
         .          1:  566.70919      .
                        .

      r 7 r 6 *      r 3 r 5 *         -

     2:  67.23607   3:  67.23607   2:  67.23607   1:  0.52141679
     1:  1862.0057  2:  1862.0057  1:  128.9488       .
         .          1:  1733.0569      .
                        .

      r 7 r 4 *      r 3 2 ^           -              /   t 8

   That gives us the slope ‘m’.  The y-intercept ‘b’ can now be found
with the simple formula,

     b = (sum(y) - m sum(x)) / N

     1:  13.613     2:  13.613     1:  -8.09358   1:  -0.425978
         .          1:  21.70658       .              .
                        .

        r 5            r 8 r 3 *       -              r 7 /   t 9

   Let’s “plot” this straight line approximation, ‘m x + b’, and compare
it with the original data.

     1:  [0.699, 0.735, ... ]    1:  [0.273, 0.309, ... ]
         .                           .

         r 1 r 8 *                   r 9 +    s 0

Notice that multiplying a vector by a constant, and adding a constant to
a vector, can be done without mapping commands since these are common
operations from vector algebra.  As far as Calc is concerned, we’ve just
been doing geometry in 19-dimensional space!

   We can subtract this vector from our original ‘y’ vector to get a
feel for the error of our fit.  Let’s find the maximum error:

     1:  [0.0387, 0.0112, ... ]   1:  [0.0387, 0.0112, ... ]   1:  0.0897
         .                            .                            .

         r 2 -                        V M A                        V R X

First we compute a vector of differences, then we take the absolute
values of these differences, then we reduce the ‘max’ function across
the vector.  (The ‘max’ function is on the two-key sequence ‘f x’;
because it is so common to use ‘max’ in a vector operation, the letters
‘X’ and ‘N’ are also accepted for ‘max’ and ‘min’ in this context.  In
general, you answer the ‘V M’ or ‘V R’ prompt with the actual key
sequence that invokes the function you want.  You could have typed ‘V R
f x’ or even ‘V R x max <RET>’ if you had preferred.)

   If your system has the GNUPLOT program, you can see graphs of your
data and your straight line to see how well they match.  (If you have
GNUPLOT 3.0 or higher, the following instructions will work regardless
of the kind of display you have.  Some GNUPLOT 2.0, non-X-windows
systems may require additional steps to view the graphs.)

   Let’s start by plotting the original data.  Recall the “X” and “Y”
vectors onto the stack and press ‘g f’.  This “fast” graphing command
does everything you need to do for simple, straightforward plotting of
data.

     2:  [1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ]
     1:  [0.234, 0.298, 0.402, ... ]
         .

         r 1 r 2    g f

   If all goes well, you will shortly get a new window containing a
graph of the data.  (If not, contact your GNUPLOT or Calc installer to
find out what went wrong.)  In the X window system, this will be a
separate graphics window.  For other kinds of displays, the default is
to display the graph in Emacs itself using rough character graphics.
Press ‘q’ when you are done viewing the character graphics.

   Next, let’s add the line we got from our least-squares fit.  (If you
are reading this tutorial on-line while running Calc, typing ‘g a’ may
cause the tutorial to disappear from its window and be replaced by a
buffer named ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’.  The tutorial will reappear when you
terminate GNUPLOT by typing ‘g q’.)

     2:  [1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ]
     1:  [0.273, 0.309, 0.351, ... ]
         .

         <DEL> r 0    g a  g p

   It’s not very useful to get symbols to mark the data points on this
second curve; you can type ‘g S g p’ to remove them.  Type ‘g q’ when
you are done to remove the X graphics window and terminate GNUPLOT.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  An earlier exercise showed how to do least squares
fitting to a general system of equations.  Our 19 data points are really
19 equations of the form ‘y_i = m x_i + b’ for different pairs of
‘(x_i,y_i)’.  Use the matrix-transpose method to solve for ‘m’ and ‘b’,
duplicating the above result.  *Note 2: List Answer 2.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  If the input data do not form a rectangle, you can
use ‘C-x * g’ (‘calc-grab-region’) to grab the data the way Emacs
normally works with regions—it reads left-to-right, top-to-bottom,
treating line breaks the same as spaces.  Use this command to find the
geometric mean of the following numbers.  (The geometric mean is the Nth
root of the product of N numbers.)

     2.3  6  22  15.1  7
       15  14  7.5
       2.5

The ‘C-x * g’ command accepts numbers separated by spaces or commas,
with or without surrounding vector brackets.  *Note 3: List Answer 3.
(•)

   As another example, a theorem about binomial coefficients tells us
that the alternating sum of binomial coefficients N-choose-0 minus
N-choose-1 plus N-choose-2, and so on up to N-choose-N, always comes out
to zero.  Let’s verify this for ‘n=6’.

     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7]     1:  [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6]
         .                             .

         v x 7 <RET>                     1 -

     1:  [1, -6, 15, -20, 15, -6, 1]          1:  0
         .                                        .

         V M ' (-1)^$ choose(6,$) <RET>             V R +

   The ‘V M '’ command prompts you to enter any algebraic expression to
define the function to map over the vector.  The symbol ‘$’ inside this
expression represents the argument to the function.  The Calculator
applies this formula to each element of the vector, substituting each
element’s value for the ‘$’ sign(s) in turn.

   To define a two-argument function, use ‘$$’ for the first argument
and ‘$’ for the second: ‘V M ' $$-$ <RET>’ is equivalent to ‘V M -’.
This is analogous to regular algebraic entry, where ‘$$’ would refer to
the next-to-top stack entry and ‘$’ would refer to the top stack entry,
and ‘' $$-$ <RET>’ would act exactly like ‘-’.

   Notice that the ‘V M '’ command has recorded two things in the trail:
The result, as usual, and also a funny-looking thing marked ‘oper’ that
represents the operator function you typed in.  The function is enclosed
in ‘< >’ brackets, and the argument is denoted by a ‘#’ sign.  If there
were several arguments, they would be shown as ‘#1’, ‘#2’, and so on.
(For example, ‘V M ' $$-$’ will put the function ‘<#1 - #2>’ on the
trail.)  This object is a “nameless function”; you can use nameless
‘< >’ notation to answer the ‘V M '’ prompt if you like.  Nameless
function notation has the interesting, occasionally useful property that
a nameless function is not actually evaluated until it is used.  For
example, ‘V M ' $+random(2.0)’ evaluates ‘random(2.0)’ once and adds
that random number to all elements of the vector, but ‘V M '
<#+random(2.0)>’ evaluates the ‘random(2.0)’ separately for each vector
element.

   Another group of operators that are often useful with ‘V M’ are the
relational operators: ‘a =’, for example, compares two numbers and gives
the result 1 if they are equal, or 0 if not.  Similarly, ‘a <’ checks
for one number being less than another.

   Other useful vector operations include ‘v v’, to reverse a vector
end-for-end; ‘V S’, to sort the elements of a vector into increasing
order; and ‘v r’ and ‘v c’, to extract one row or column of a matrix, or
(in both cases) to extract one element of a plain vector.  With a
negative argument, ‘v r’ and ‘v c’ instead delete one row, column, or
vector element.

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  The ‘k’th “divisor function” is the sum of the
‘k’th powers of all the divisors of an integer ‘n’.  Figure out a method
for computing the divisor function for reasonably small values of ‘n’.
As a test, the 0th and 1st divisor functions of 30 are 8 and 72,
respectively.  *Note 4: List Answer 4.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 5.*  The ‘k f’ command produces a list of prime factors
for a number.  Sometimes it is important to know that a number is
“square-free”, i.e., that no prime occurs more than once in its list of
prime factors.  Find a sequence of keystrokes to tell if a number is
square-free; your method should leave 1 on the stack if it is, or 0 if
it isn’t.  *Note 5: List Answer 5.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 6.*  Build a list of lists that looks like the
following diagram.  (You may wish to use the ‘v /’ command to enable
multi-line display of vectors.)

     1:  [ [1],
           [1, 2],
           [1, 2, 3],
           [1, 2, 3, 4],
           [1, 2, 3, 4, 5],
           [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6] ]

*Note 6: List Answer 6.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 7.*  Build the following list of lists.

     1:  [ [0],
           [1, 2],
           [3, 4, 5],
           [6, 7, 8, 9],
           [10, 11, 12, 13, 14],
           [15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20] ]

*Note 7: List Answer 7.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 8.*  Compute a list of values of Bessel’s ‘J1’ function
‘besJ(1,x)’ for ‘x’ from 0 to 5 in steps of 0.25.  Find the value of ‘x’
(from among the above set of values) for which ‘besJ(1,x)’ is a maximum.
Use an “automatic” method, i.e., just reading along the list by hand to
find the largest value is not allowed!  (There is an ‘a X’ command which
does this kind of thing automatically; *note Numerical Solutions::.)
*Note 8: List Answer 8.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 9.*  You are given an integer in the range ‘0 <= N <
10^m’ for ‘m=12’ (i.e., an integer of less than twelve digits).  Convert
this integer into a vector of ‘m’ digits, each in the range from 0 to 9.
In vector-of-digits notation, add one to this integer to produce a
vector of ‘m+1’ digits (since there could be a carry out of the most
significant digit).  Convert this vector back into a regular integer.  A
good integer to try is 25129925999.  *Note 9: List Answer 9.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 10.*  Your friend Joe tried to use ‘V R a =’ to test if
all numbers in a list were equal.  What happened?  How would you do this
test?  *Note 10: List Answer 10.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 11.*  The area of a circle of radius one is ‘pi’.  The
area of the 2x2 square that encloses that circle is 4.  So if we throw N
darts at random points in the square, about ‘pi/4’ of them will land
inside the circle.  This gives us an entertaining way to estimate the
value of ‘pi’.  The ‘k r’ command picks a random number between zero and
the value on the stack.  We could get a random floating-point number
between -1 and 1 by typing ‘2.0 k r 1 -’.  Build a vector of 100 random
‘(x,y)’ points in this square, then use vector mapping and reduction to
count how many points lie inside the unit circle.  Hint: Use the ‘v b’
command.  *Note 11: List Answer 11.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 12.*  The “matchstick problem” provides another way to
calculate ‘pi’.  Say you have an infinite field of vertical lines with a
spacing of one inch.  Toss a one-inch matchstick onto the field.  The
probability that the matchstick will land crossing a line turns out to
be ‘2/pi’.  Toss 100 matchsticks to estimate ‘pi’.  (If you want still
more fun, the probability that the GCD (‘k g’) of two large integers is
one turns out to be ‘6/pi^2’.  That provides yet another way to estimate
‘pi’.)  *Note 12: List Answer 12.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 13.*  An algebraic entry of a string in double-quote
marks, ‘"hello"’, creates a vector of the numerical (ASCII) codes of the
characters (here, ‘[104, 101, 108, 108, 111]’).  Sometimes it is
convenient to compute a “hash code” of a string, which is just an
integer that represents the value of that string.  Two equal strings
have the same hash code; two different strings “probably” have different
hash codes.  (For example, Calc has over 400 function names, but Emacs
can quickly find the definition for any given name because it has sorted
the functions into “buckets” by their hash codes.  Sometimes a few names
will hash into the same bucket, but it is easier to search among a few
names than among all the names.)  One popular hash function is computed
as follows: First set ‘h = 0’.  Then, for each character from the string
in turn, set ‘h = 3h + c_i’ where ‘c_i’ is the character’s ASCII code.
If we have 511 buckets, we then take the hash code modulo 511 to get the
bucket number.  Develop a simple command or commands for converting
string vectors into hash codes.  The hash code for ‘"Testing, 1, 2, 3"’
is 1960915098, which modulo 511 is 121.  *Note 13: List Answer 13.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 14.*  The ‘H V R’ and ‘H V U’ commands do nested
function evaluations.  ‘H V U’ takes a starting value and a number of
steps N from the stack; it then applies the function you give to the
starting value 0, 1, 2, up to N times and returns a vector of the
results.  Use this command to create a “random walk” of 50 steps.  Start
with the two-dimensional point ‘(0,0)’; then take one step a random
distance between -1 and 1 in both ‘x’ and ‘y’; then take another step,
and so on.  Use the ‘g f’ command to display this random walk.  Now
modify your random walk to walk a unit distance, but in a random
direction, at each step.  (Hint: The ‘sincos’ function returns a vector
of the cosine and sine of an angle.)  *Note 14: List Answer 14.  (•)


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Tutorial,  Next: Algebra Tutorial,  Prev: Vector/Matrix Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.4 Types Tutorial
==================

Calc understands a variety of data types as well as simple numbers.  In
this section, we’ll experiment with each of these types in turn.

   The numbers we’ve been using so far have mainly been either
“integers” or “floats”.  We saw that floats are usually a good
approximation to the mathematical concept of real numbers, but they are
only approximations and are susceptible to roundoff error.  Calc also
supports “fractions”, which can exactly represent any rational number.

     1:  3628800    2:  3628800    1:  518400:7   1:  518414:7   1:  7:518414
         .          1:  49             .              .              .
                        .

         10 !           49 <RET>         :              2 +            &

The ‘:’ command divides two integers to get a fraction; ‘/’ would
normally divide integers to get a floating-point result.  Notice we had
to type <RET> between the ‘49’ and the ‘:’ since the ‘:’ would otherwise
be interpreted as part of a fraction beginning with 49.

   You can convert between floating-point and fractional format using ‘c
f’ and ‘c F’:

     1:  1.35027217629e-5    1:  7:518414
         .                       .

         c f                     c F

   The ‘c F’ command replaces a floating-point number with the
“simplest” fraction whose floating-point representation is the same, to
within the current precision.

     1:  3.14159265359   1:  1146408:364913   1:  3.1416   1:  355:113
         .                   .                    .            .

         P                   c F      <DEL>       p 5 <RET> P      c F

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  A calculation has produced the result
1.26508260337.  You suspect it is the square root of the product of ‘pi’
and some rational number.  Is it?  (Be sure to allow for roundoff
error!)  *Note 1: Types Answer 1.  (•)

   “Complex numbers” can be stored in both rectangular and polar form.

     1:  -9     1:  (0, 3)    1:  (3; 90.)   1:  (6; 90.)   1:  (2.4495; 45.)
         .          .             .              .              .

         9 n        Q             c p            2 *            Q

The square root of -9 is by default rendered in rectangular form
(‘0 + 3i’), but we can convert it to polar form (3 with a phase angle of
90 degrees).  All the usual arithmetic and scientific operations are
defined on both types of complex numbers.

   Another generalized kind of number is “infinity”.  Infinity isn’t
really a number, but it can sometimes be treated like one.  Calc uses
the symbol ‘inf’ to represent positive infinity, i.e., a value greater
than any real number.  Naturally, you can also write ‘-inf’ for minus
infinity, a value less than any real number.  The word ‘inf’ can only be
input using algebraic entry.

     2:  inf        2:  -inf       2:  -inf       2:  -inf       1:  nan
     1:  -17        1:  -inf       1:  -inf       1:  inf            .
         .              .              .              .

     ' inf <RET> 17 n     *  <RET>         72 +           A              +

Since infinity is infinitely large, multiplying it by any finite number
(like -17) has no effect, except that since -17 is negative, it changes
a plus infinity to a minus infinity.  (“A huge positive number,
multiplied by -17, yields a huge negative number.”) Adding any finite
number to infinity also leaves it unchanged.  Taking an absolute value
gives us plus infinity again.  Finally, we add this plus infinity to the
minus infinity we had earlier.  If you work it out, you might expect the
answer to be -72 for this.  But the 72 has been completely lost next to
the infinities; by the time we compute ‘inf - inf’ the finite difference
between them, if any, is undetectable.  So we say the result is
“indeterminate”, which Calc writes with the symbol ‘nan’ (for Not A
Number).

   Dividing by zero is normally treated as an error, but you can get
Calc to write an answer in terms of infinity by pressing ‘m i’ to turn
on Infinite mode.

     3:  nan        2:  nan        2:  nan        2:  nan        1:  nan
     2:  1          1:  1 / 0      1:  uinf       1:  uinf           .
     1:  0              .              .              .
         .

       1 <RET> 0          /       m i    U /            17 n *         +

Dividing by zero normally is left unevaluated, but after ‘m i’ it
instead gives an infinite result.  The answer is actually ‘uinf’,
“undirected infinity.” If you look at a graph of ‘1 / x’ around ‘x = 0’,
you’ll see that it goes toward plus infinity as you approach zero from
above, but toward minus infinity as you approach from below.  Since we
said only ‘1 / 0’, Calc knows that the answer is infinite but not in
which direction.  That’s what ‘uinf’ means.  Notice that multiplying
‘uinf’ by a negative number still leaves plain ‘uinf’; there’s no point
in saying ‘-uinf’ because the sign of ‘uinf’ is unknown anyway.
Finally, we add ‘uinf’ to our ‘nan’, yielding ‘nan’ again.  It’s easy to
see that, because ‘nan’ means “totally unknown” while ‘uinf’ means
“unknown sign but known to be infinite,” the more mysterious ‘nan’ wins
out when it is combined with ‘uinf’, or, for that matter, with anything
else.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Predict what Calc will answer for each of these
formulas: ‘inf / inf’, ‘exp(inf)’, ‘exp(-inf)’, ‘sqrt(-inf)’,
‘sqrt(uinf)’, ‘abs(uinf)’, ‘ln(0)’.  *Note 2: Types Answer 2.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  We saw that ‘inf - inf = nan’, which stands for an
unknown value.  Can ‘nan’ stand for a complex number?  Can it stand for
infinity?  *Note 3: Types Answer 3.  (•)

   “HMS forms” represent a value in terms of hours, minutes, and
seconds.

     1:  2@ 30' 0"     1:  3@ 30' 0"     2:  3@ 30' 0"     1:  2.
         .                 .             1:  1@ 45' 0."        .
                                             .

       2@ 30' <RET>          1 +               <RET> 2 /           /

   HMS forms can also be used to hold angles in degrees, minutes, and
seconds.

     1:  0.5        1:  26.56505   1:  26@ 33' 54.18"    1:  0.44721
         .              .              .                     .

         0.5            I T            c h                   S

First we convert the inverse tangent of 0.5 to degrees-minutes-seconds
form, then we take the sine of that angle.  Note that the trigonometric
functions will accept HMS forms directly as input.

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  The Beatles’ _Abbey Road_ is 47 minutes and 26
seconds long, and contains 17 songs.  What is the average length of a
song on _Abbey Road_?  If the Extended Disco Version of _Abbey Road_
added 20 seconds to the length of each song, how long would the album
be?  *Note 4: Types Answer 4.  (•)

   A “date form” represents a date, or a date and time.  Dates must be
entered using algebraic entry.  Date forms are surrounded by ‘< >’
symbols; most standard formats for dates are recognized.

     2:  <Sun Jan 13, 1991>                    1:  2.25
     1:  <6:00pm Thu Jan 10, 1991>                 .
         .

     ' <13 Jan 1991>, <1/10/91, 6pm> <RET>           -

In this example, we enter two dates, then subtract to find the number of
days between them.  It is also possible to add an HMS form or a number
(of days) to a date form to get another date form.

     1:  <4:45:59pm Mon Jan 14, 1991>     1:  <2:50:59am Thu Jan 17, 1991>
         .                                    .

         t N                                  2 + 10@ 5' +

The ‘t N’ (“now”) command pushes the current date and time on the stack;
then we add two days, ten hours and five minutes to the date and time.
Other date-and-time related commands include ‘t J’, which does Julian
day conversions, ‘t W’, which finds the beginning of the week in which a
date form lies, and ‘t I’, which increments a date by one or several
months.  *Note Date Arithmetic::, for more.

   (•) *Exercise 5.*  How many days until the next Friday the 13th?
*Note 5: Types Answer 5.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 6.*  How many leap years will there be between now and
the year 10001 AD?  *Note 6: Types Answer 6.  (•)

   An “error form” represents a mean value with an attached standard
deviation, or error estimate.  Suppose our measurements indicate that a
certain telephone pole is about 30 meters away, with an estimated error
of 1 meter, and 8 meters tall, with an estimated error of 0.2 meters.
What is the slope of a line from here to the top of the pole, and what
is the equivalent angle in degrees?

     1:  8 +/- 0.2    2:  8 +/- 0.2   1:  0.266 +/- 0.011   1:  14.93 +/- 0.594
         .            1:  30 +/- 1        .                     .
                          .

         8 p .2 <RET>       30 p 1          /                     I T

This means that the angle is about 15 degrees, and, assuming our
original error estimates were valid standard deviations, there is about
a 60% chance that the result is correct within 0.59 degrees.

   (•) *Exercise 7.*  The volume of a torus (a donut shape) is
‘2 pi^2 R r^2’ where ‘R’ is the radius of the circle that defines the
center of the tube and ‘r’ is the radius of the tube itself.  Suppose
‘R’ is 20 cm and ‘r’ is 4 cm, each known to within 5 percent.  What is
the volume and the relative uncertainty of the volume?  *Note 7: Types
Answer 7.  (•)

   An “interval form” represents a range of values.  While an error form
is best for making statistical estimates, intervals give you exact
bounds on an answer.  Suppose we additionally know that our telephone
pole is definitely between 28 and 31 meters away, and that it is between
7.7 and 8.1 meters tall.

     1:  [7.7 .. 8.1]  2:  [7.7 .. 8.1]  1:  [0.24 .. 0.28]  1:  [13.9 .. 16.1]
         .             1:  [28 .. 31]        .                   .
                           .

       [ 7.7 .. 8.1 ]    [ 28 .. 31 ]        /                   I T

If our bounds were correct, then the angle to the top of the pole is
sure to lie in the range shown.

   The square brackets around these intervals indicate that the
endpoints themselves are allowable values.  In other words, the distance
to the telephone pole is between 28 and 31, _inclusive_.  You can also
make an interval that is exclusive of its endpoints by writing
parentheses instead of square brackets.  You can even make an interval
which is inclusive (“closed”) on one end and exclusive (“open”) on the
other.

     1:  [1 .. 10)    1:  (0.1 .. 1]   2:  (0.1 .. 1]   1:  (0.2 .. 3)
         .                .            1:  [2 .. 3)         .
                                           .

       [ 1 .. 10 )        &              [ 2 .. 3 )         *

The Calculator automatically keeps track of which end values should be
open and which should be closed.  You can also make infinite or
semi-infinite intervals by using ‘-inf’ or ‘inf’ for one or both
endpoints.

   (•) *Exercise 8.*  What answer would you expect from ‘1 / (0 .. 10)’?
What about ‘1 / (-10 .. 0)’?  What about ‘1 / [0 .. 10]’ (where the
interval actually includes zero)?  What about ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’?  *Note
8: Types Answer 8.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 9.*  Two easy ways of squaring a number are ‘<RET> *’
and ‘2 ^’.  Normally these produce the same answer.  Would you expect
this still to hold true for interval forms?  If not, which of these will
result in a larger interval?  *Note 9: Types Answer 9.  (•)

   A “modulo form” is used for performing arithmetic modulo M.  For
example, arithmetic involving time is generally done modulo 12 or 24
hours.

     1:  17 mod 24    1:  3 mod 24     1:  21 mod 24    1:  9 mod 24
         .                .                .                .

         17 M 24 <RET>      10 +             n                5 /

In this last step, Calc has divided by 5 modulo 24; i.e., it has found a
new number which, when multiplied by 5 modulo 24, produces the original
number, 21.  If M is prime and the divisor is not a multiple of M, it is
always possible to find such a number.  For non-prime M like 24, it is
only sometimes possible.

     1:  10 mod 24    1:  16 mod 24    1:  1000000...   1:  16
         .                .                .                .

         10 M 24 <RET>      100 ^            10 <RET> 100 ^     24 %

These two calculations get the same answer, but the first one is much
more efficient because it avoids the huge intermediate value that arises
in the second one.

   (•) *Exercise 10.*  A theorem of Pierre de Fermat says that ‘x^(n-1)
mod n = 1’ if ‘n’ is a prime number and ‘x’ is an integer less than ‘n’.
If ‘n’ is _not_ a prime number, this will _not_ be true for most values
of ‘x’.  Thus we can test informally if a number is prime by trying this
formula for several values of ‘x’.  Use this test to tell whether the
following numbers are prime: 811749613, 15485863.  *Note 10: Types
Answer 10.  (•)

   It is possible to use HMS forms as parts of error forms, intervals,
modulo forms, or as the phase part of a polar complex number.  For
example, the ‘calc-time’ command pushes the current time of day on the
stack as an HMS/modulo form.

     1:  17@ 34' 45" mod 24@ 0' 0"     1:  6@ 22' 15" mod 24@ 0' 0"
         .                                 .

         x time <RET>                        n

This calculation tells me it is six hours and 22 minutes until midnight.

   (•) *Exercise 11.*  A rule of thumb is that one year is about
‘pi * 10^7’ seconds.  What time will it be that many seconds from right
now?  *Note 11: Types Answer 11.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 12.*  You are preparing to order packaging for the CD
release of the Extended Disco Version of _Abbey Road_.  You are told
that the songs will actually be anywhere from 20 to 60 seconds longer
than the originals.  One CD can hold about 75 minutes of music.  Should
you order single or double packages?  *Note 12: Types Answer 12.  (•)

   Another kind of data the Calculator can manipulate is numbers with
“units”.  This isn’t strictly a new data type; it’s simply an
application of algebraic expressions, where we use variables with
suggestive names like ‘cm’ and ‘in’ to represent units like centimeters
and inches.

     1:  2 in        1:  5.08 cm      1:  0.027778 fath   1:  0.0508 m
         .               .                .                   .

         ' 2in <RET>       u c cm <RET>       u c fath <RET>        u b

We enter the quantity “2 inches” (actually an algebraic expression which
means two times the variable ‘in’), then we convert it first to
centimeters, then to fathoms, then finally to “base” units, which in
this case means meters.

     1:  9 acre     1:  3 sqrt(acre)   1:  190.84 m   1:  190.84 m + 30 cm
         .              .                  .              .

      ' 9 acre <RET>      Q                  u s            ' $+30 cm <RET>

     1:  191.14 m     1:  36536.3046 m^2    1:  365363046 cm^2
         .                .                     .

         u s              2 ^                   u c cgs

Since units expressions are really just formulas, taking the square root
of ‘acre’ is undefined.  After all, ‘acre’ might be an algebraic
variable that you will someday assign a value.  We use the
“units-simplify” command to simplify the expression with variables being
interpreted as unit names.

   In the final step, we have converted not to a particular unit, but to
a units system.  The “cgs” system uses centimeters instead of meters as
its standard unit of length.

   There is a wide variety of units defined in the Calculator.

     1:  55 mph     1:  88.5139 kph   1:   88.5139 km / hr   1:  8.201407e-8 c
         .              .                  .                     .

      ' 55 mph <RET>      u c kph <RET>        u c km/hr <RET>         u c c <RET>

We express a speed first in miles per hour, then in kilometers per hour,
then again using a slightly more explicit notation, then finally in
terms of fractions of the speed of light.

   Temperature conversions are a bit more tricky.  There are two ways to
interpret “20 degrees Fahrenheit”—it could mean an actual temperature,
or it could mean a change in temperature.  For normal units there is no
difference, but temperature units have an offset as well as a scale
factor and so there must be two explicit commands for them.

     1:  20 degF       1:  11.1111 degC     1:  -6.666 degC
         .                 .                    .                 .

       ' 20 degF <RET>       u c degC <RET>         U u t degC <RET>

First we convert a change of 20 degrees Fahrenheit into an equivalent
change in degrees Celsius (or Centigrade).  Then, we convert the
absolute temperature 20 degrees Fahrenheit into Celsius.

   For simple unit conversions, you can put a plain number on the stack.
Then ‘u c’ and ‘u t’ will prompt for both old and new units.  When you
use this method, you’re responsible for remembering which numbers are in
which units:

     1:  55         1:  88.5139              1:  8.201407e-8
         .              .                        .

         55             u c mph <RET> kph <RET>      u c km/hr <RET> c <RET>

   To see a complete list of built-in units, type ‘u v’.  Press
‘C-x * c’ again to re-enter the Calculator when you’re done looking at
the units table.

   (•) *Exercise 13.*  How many seconds are there really in a year?
*Note 13: Types Answer 13.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 14.*  Supercomputer designs are limited by the speed of
light (and of electricity, which is nearly as fast).  Suppose a computer
has a 4.1 ns (nanosecond) clock cycle, and its cabinet is one meter
across.  Is speed of light going to be a significant factor in its
design?  *Note 14: Types Answer 14.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 15.*  Sam the Slug normally travels about five yards in
an hour.  He has obtained a supply of Power Pills; each Power Pill he
eats doubles his speed.  How many Power Pills can he swallow and still
travel legally on most US highways?  *Note 15: Types Answer 15.  (•)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra Tutorial,  Next: Programming Tutorial,  Prev: Types Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.5 Algebra and Calculus Tutorial
=================================

This section shows how to use Calc’s algebra facilities to solve
equations, do simple calculus problems, and manipulate algebraic
formulas.

* Menu:

* Basic Algebra Tutorial::
* Rewrites Tutorial::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Algebra Tutorial,  Next: Rewrites Tutorial,  Prev: Algebra Tutorial,  Up: Algebra Tutorial

3.5.1 Basic Algebra
-------------------

If you enter a formula in Algebraic mode that refers to variables, the
formula itself is pushed onto the stack.  You can manipulate formulas as
regular data objects.

     1:  2 x^2 - 6       1:  6 - 2 x^2       1:  (3 x^2 + y) (6 - 2 x^2)
         .                   .                   .

         ' 2x^2-6 <RET>        n                   ' 3x^2+y <RET> *

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Do ‘' x <RET> Q 2 ^’ and ‘' x <RET> 2 ^ Q’ both
wind up with the same result (‘x’)?  Why or why not?  *Note 1: Algebra
Answer 1.  (•)

   There are also commands for doing common algebraic operations on
formulas.  Continuing with the formula from the last example,

     1:  18 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 6 y - 2 y x^2    1:  (18 - 2 y) x^2 - 6 x^4 + 6 y
         .                                     .

         a x                                   a c x <RET>

First we “expand” using the distributive law, then we “collect” terms
involving like powers of ‘x’.

   Let’s find the value of this expression when ‘x’ is 2 and ‘y’ is
one-half.

     1:  17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3      1:  -25
         .                           .

         1:2 s l y <RET>               2 s l x <RET>

The ‘s l’ command means “let”; it takes a number from the top of the
stack and temporarily assigns it as the value of the variable you
specify.  It then evaluates (as if by the ‘=’ key) the next expression
on the stack.  After this command, the variable goes back to its
original value, if any.

   (An earlier exercise in this tutorial involved storing a value in the
variable ‘x’; if this value is still there, you will have to unstore it
with ‘s u x <RET>’ before the above example will work properly.)

   Let’s find the maximum value of our original expression when ‘y’ is
one-half and ‘x’ ranges over all possible values.  We can do this by
taking the derivative with respect to ‘x’ and examining values of ‘x’
for which the derivative is zero.  If the second derivative of the
function at that value of ‘x’ is negative, the function has a local
maximum there.

     1:  17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3      1:  34 x - 24 x^3
         .                           .

         U <DEL>  s 1                  a d x <RET>   s 2

Well, the derivative is clearly zero when ‘x’ is zero.  To find the
other root(s), let’s divide through by ‘x’ and then solve:

     1:  (34 x - 24 x^3) / x    1:  34 - 24 x^2
         .                          .

         ' x <RET> /                  a x

     1:  0.70588 x^2 = 1        1:  x = 1.19023
         .                          .

         0 a =  s 3                 a S x <RET>

Now we compute the second derivative and plug in our values of ‘x’:

     1:  1.19023        2:  1.19023         2:  1.19023
         .              1:  34 x - 24 x^3   1:  34 - 72 x^2
                            .                   .

         a .                r 2                 a d x <RET> s 4

(The ‘a .’ command extracts just the righthand side of an equation.
Another method would have been to use ‘v u’ to unpack the equation
‘x = 1.19’ to ‘x’ and ‘1.19’, then use ‘M-- M-2 <DEL>’ to delete the
‘x’.)

     2:  34 - 72 x^2   1:  -68.         2:  34 - 72 x^2     1:  34
     1:  1.19023           .            1:  0                   .
         .                                  .

         <TAB>               s l x <RET>        U <DEL> 0             s l x <RET>

The first of these second derivatives is negative, so we know the
function has a maximum value at ‘x = 1.19023’.  (The function also has a
local _minimum_ at ‘x = 0’.)

   When we solved for ‘x’, we got only one value even though ‘0.70588
x^2 = 1’ is a quadratic equation that ought to have two solutions.  The
reason is that ‘a S’ normally returns a single “principal” solution.  If
it needs to come up with an arbitrary sign (as occurs in the quadratic
formula) it picks ‘+’.  If it needs an arbitrary integer, it picks zero.
We can get a full solution by pressing ‘H’ (the Hyperbolic flag) before
‘a S’.

     1:  0.70588 x^2 = 1    1:  x = 1.19023 s1      1:  x = -1.19023
         .                      .                       .

         r 3                    H a S x <RET>  s 5        1 n  s l s1 <RET>

Calc has invented the variable ‘s1’ to represent an unknown sign; it is
supposed to be either +1 or -1.  Here we have used the “let” command to
evaluate the expression when the sign is negative.  If we plugged this
into our second derivative we would get the same, negative, answer, so
‘x = -1.19023’ is also a maximum.

   To find the actual maximum value, we must plug our two values of ‘x’
into the original formula.

     2:  17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3    1:  24.08333 s1^2 - 12.04166 s1^4 + 3
     1:  x = 1.19023 s1            .
         .

         r 1 r 5                   s l <RET>

(Here we see another way to use ‘s l’; if its input is an equation with
a variable on the lefthand side, then ‘s l’ treats the equation like an
assignment to that variable if you don’t give a variable name.)

   It’s clear that this will have the same value for either sign of
‘s1’, but let’s work it out anyway, just for the exercise:

     2:  [-1, 1]              1:  [15.04166, 15.04166]
     1:  24.08333 s1^2 ...        .
         .

       [ 1 n , 1 ] <TAB>            V M $ <RET>

Here we have used a vector mapping operation to evaluate the function at
several values of ‘s1’ at once.  ‘V M $’ is like ‘V M '’ except that it
takes the formula from the top of the stack.  The formula is interpreted
as a function to apply across the vector at the next-to-top stack level.
Since a formula on the stack can’t contain ‘$’ signs, Calc assumes the
variables in the formula stand for different arguments.  It prompts you
for an “argument list”, giving the list of all variables in the formula
in alphabetical order as the default list.  In this case the default is
‘(s1)’, which is just what we want so we simply press <RET> at the
prompt.

   If there had been several different values, we could have used
‘V R X’ to find the global maximum.

   Calc has a built-in ‘a P’ command that solves an equation using
‘H a S’ and returns a vector of all the solutions.  It simply automates
the job we just did by hand.  Applied to our original cubic polynomial,
it would produce the vector of solutions ‘[1.19023, -1.19023, 0]’.
(There is also an ‘a X’ command which finds a local maximum of a
function.  It uses a numerical search method rather than examining the
derivatives, and thus requires you to provide some kind of initial guess
to show it where to look.)

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Given a vector of the roots of a polynomial (such
as the output of an ‘a P’ command), what sequence of commands would you
use to reconstruct the original polynomial?  (The answer will be unique
to within a constant multiple; choose the solution where the leading
coefficient is one.)  *Note 2: Algebra Answer 2.  (•)

   The ‘m s’ command enables Symbolic mode, in which formulas like
‘sqrt(5)’ that can’t be evaluated exactly are left in symbolic form
rather than giving a floating-point approximate answer.  Fraction mode
(‘m f’) is also useful when doing algebra.

     2:  34 x - 24 x^3        2:  34 x - 24 x^3
     1:  34 x - 24 x^3        1:  [sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0]
         .                        .

         r 2  <RET>     m s  m f    a P x <RET>

   One more mode that makes reading formulas easier is Big mode.

                    3
     2:  34 x - 24 x

           ____   ____
          V 51   V 51
     1:  [-----, -----, 0]
            6     -6

         .

         d B

   Here things like powers, square roots, and quotients and fractions
are displayed in a two-dimensional pictorial form.  Calc has other
language modes as well, such as C mode, FORTRAN mode, TeX mode and LaTeX
mode.

     2:  34*x - 24*pow(x, 3)               2:  34*x - 24*x**3
     1:  {sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0}  1:  /sqrt(51) / 6, sqrt(51) / -6, 0/
         .                                     .

         d C                                   d F

     3:  34 x - 24 x^3
     2:  [{\sqrt{51} \over 6}, {\sqrt{51} \over -6}, 0]
     1:  {2 \over 3} \sqrt{5}
         .

         d T   ' 2 \sqrt{5} \over 3 <RET>

As you can see, language modes affect both entry and display of
formulas.  They affect such things as the names used for built-in
functions, the set of arithmetic operators and their precedences, and
notations for vectors and matrices.

   Notice that ‘sqrt(51)’ may cause problems with older implementations
of C and FORTRAN, which would require something more like ‘sqrt(51.0)’.
It is always wise to check over the formulas produced by the various
language modes to make sure they are fully correct.

   Type ‘m s’, ‘m f’, and ‘d N’ to reset these modes.  (You may prefer
to remain in Big mode, but all the examples in the tutorial are shown in
normal mode.)

   What is the area under the portion of this curve from ‘x = 1’ to ‘2’?
This is simply the integral of the function:

     1:  17 x^2 - 6 x^4 + 3     1:  5.6666 x^3 - 1.2 x^5 + 3 x
         .                          .

         r 1                        a i x

We want to evaluate this at our two values for ‘x’ and subtract.  One
way to do it is again with vector mapping and reduction:

     2:  [2, 1]            1:  [12.93333, 7.46666]    1:  5.46666
     1:  5.6666 x^3 ...        .                          .

        [ 2 , 1 ] <TAB>          V M $ <RET>                  V R -

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  Find the integral from 1 to ‘y’ of ‘x sin(pi x)’
(where the sine is calculated in radians).  Find the values of the
integral for integers ‘y’ from 1 to 5.  *Note 3: Algebra Answer 3.  (•)

   Calc’s integrator can do many simple integrals symbolically, but many
others are beyond its capabilities.  Suppose we wish to find the area
under the curve ‘sin(x) ln(x)’ over the same range of ‘x’.  If you
entered this formula and typed ‘a i x <RET>’ (don’t bother to try this),
Calc would work for a long time but would be unable to find a solution.
In fact, there is no closed-form solution to this integral.  Now what do
we do?

   One approach would be to do the integral numerically.  It is not hard
to do this by hand using vector mapping and reduction.  It is rather
slow, though, since the sine and logarithm functions take a long time.
We can save some time by reducing the working precision.

     3:  10                  1:  [1, 1.1, 1.2,  ...  , 1.8, 1.9]
     2:  1                       .
     1:  0.1
         .

      10 <RET> 1 <RET> .1 <RET>        C-u v x

(Note that we have used the extended version of ‘v x’; we could also
have used plain ‘v x’ as follows: ‘v x 10 <RET> 9 + .1 *’.)

     2:  [1, 1.1, ... ]              1:  [0., 0.084941, 0.16993, ... ]
     1:  ln(x) sin(x)                    .
         .

         ' sin(x) ln(x) <RET>  s 1    m r  p 5 <RET>   V M $ <RET>

     1:  3.4195     0.34195
         .          .

         V R +      0.1 *

(If you got wildly different results, did you remember to switch to
Radians mode?)

   Here we have divided the curve into ten segments of equal width;
approximating these segments as rectangular boxes (i.e., assuming the
curve is nearly flat at that resolution), we compute the areas of the
boxes (height times width), then sum the areas.  (It is faster to sum
first, then multiply by the width, since the width is the same for every
box.)

   The true value of this integral turns out to be about 0.374, so we’re
not doing too well.  Let’s try another approach.

     1:  ln(x) sin(x)    1:  0.84147 x + 0.11957 (x - 1)^2 - ...
         .                   .

         r 1                 a t x=1 <RET> 4 <RET>

Here we have computed the Taylor series expansion of the function about
the point ‘x=1’.  We can now integrate this polynomial approximation,
since polynomials are easy to integrate.

     1:  0.42074 x^2 + ...    1:  [-0.0446, -0.42073]      1:  0.3761
         .                        .                            .

         a i x <RET>            [ 2 , 1 ] <TAB>  V M $ <RET>         V R -

Better!  By increasing the precision and/or asking for more terms in the
Taylor series, we can get a result as accurate as we like.  (Taylor
series converge better away from singularities in the function such as
the one at ‘ln(0)’, so it would also help to expand the series about the
points ‘x=2’ or ‘x=1.5’ instead of ‘x=1’.)

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  Our first method approximated the curve by
stairsteps of width 0.1; the total area was then the sum of the areas of
the rectangles under these stairsteps.  Our second method approximated
the function by a polynomial, which turned out to be a better
approximation than stairsteps.  A third method is “Simpson’s rule”,
which is like the stairstep method except that the steps are not
required to be flat.  Simpson’s rule boils down to the formula,

     (h/3) * (f(a) + 4 f(a+h) + 2 f(a+2h) + 4 f(a+3h) + ...
                   + 2 f(a+(n-2)*h) + 4 f(a+(n-1)*h) + f(a+n*h))

where ‘n’ (which must be even) is the number of slices and ‘h’ is the
width of each slice.  These are 10 and 0.1 in our example.  For
reference, here is the corresponding formula for the stairstep method:

     h * (f(a) + f(a+h) + f(a+2h) + f(a+3h) + ...
               + f(a+(n-2)*h) + f(a+(n-1)*h))

   Compute the integral from 1 to 2 of ‘sin(x) ln(x)’ using Simpson’s
rule with 10 slices.  *Note 4: Algebra Answer 4.  (•)

   Calc has a built-in ‘a I’ command for doing numerical integration.
It uses “Romberg’s method”, which is a more sophisticated cousin of
Simpson’s rule.  In particular, it knows how to keep refining the result
until the current precision is satisfied.

   Aside from the commands we’ve seen so far, Calc also provides a large
set of commands for operating on parts of formulas.  You indicate the
desired sub-formula by placing the cursor on any part of the formula
before giving a “selection” command.  Selections won’t be covered in the
tutorial; *note Selecting Subformulas::, for details and examples.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Tutorial,  Prev: Basic Algebra Tutorial,  Up: Algebra Tutorial

3.5.2 Rewrite Rules
-------------------

No matter how many built-in commands Calc provided for doing algebra,
there would always be something you wanted to do that Calc didn’t have
in its repertoire.  So Calc also provides a “rewrite rule” system that
you can use to define your own algebraic manipulations.

   Suppose we want to simplify this trigonometric formula:

     1:  2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2
         .

         ' 2sec(x)^2/tan(x)^2 - 2/tan(x)^2 <RET>   s 1

If we were simplifying this by hand, we’d probably combine over the
common denominator.  The ‘a n’ algebra command will do this, but we’ll
do it with a rewrite rule just for practice.

   Rewrite rules are written with the ‘:=’ symbol.

     1:  (2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2
         .

         a r a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x <RET>

(The “assignment operator” ‘:=’ has several uses in Calc.  All by itself
the formula ‘a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x’ doesn’t do anything, but when it is
given to the ‘a r’ command, that command interprets it as a rewrite
rule.)

   The lefthand side, ‘a/x + b/x’, is called the “pattern” of the
rewrite rule.  Calc searches the formula on the stack for parts that
match the pattern.  Variables in a rewrite pattern are called
“meta-variables”, and when matching the pattern each meta-variable can
match any sub-formula.  Here, the meta-variable ‘a’ matched the
expression ‘2 sec(x)^2’, the meta-variable ‘b’ matched the constant ‘-2’
and the meta-variable ‘x’ matched the expression ‘tan(x)^2’.

   This rule points out several interesting features of rewrite
patterns.  First, if a meta-variable appears several times in a pattern,
it must match the same thing everywhere.  This rule detects common
denominators because the same meta-variable ‘x’ is used in both of the
denominators.

   Second, meta-variable names are independent from variables in the
target formula.  Notice that the meta-variable ‘x’ here matches the
subformula ‘tan(x)^2’; Calc never confuses the two meanings of ‘x’.

   And third, rewrite patterns know a little bit about the algebraic
properties of formulas.  The pattern called for a sum of two quotients;
Calc was able to match a difference of two quotients by matching ‘a = 2
sec(x)^2’, ‘b = -2’, and ‘x = tan(x)^2’.

   When the pattern part of a rewrite rule matches a part of the
formula, that part is replaced by the righthand side with all the
meta-variables substituted with the things they matched.  So the result
is ‘(2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2’.

   We could just as easily have written ‘a/x - b/x := (a-b)/x’ for the
rule.  It would have worked just the same in all cases.  (If we really
wanted the rule to apply only to ‘+’ or only to ‘-’, we could have used
the ‘plain’ symbol.  *Note Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules::, for
some examples of this.)

   One more rewrite will complete the job.  We want to use the identity
‘tan(x)^2 + 1 = sec(x)^2’, but of course we must first rearrange the
identity in a way that matches our formula.  The obvious rule would be
‘2 sec(x)^2 - 2 := 2 tan(x)^2’, but a little thought shows that the rule
‘sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2’ will also work.  The latter rule has a more
general pattern so it will work in many other situations, too.

     1:  2
         .

         a r sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2 <RET>

   You may ask, what’s the point of using the most general rule if you
have to type it in every time anyway?  The answer is that Calc allows
you to store a rewrite rule in a variable, then give the variable name
in the ‘a r’ command.  In fact, this is the preferred way to use
rewrites.  For one, if you need a rule once you’ll most likely need it
again later.  Also, if the rule doesn’t work quite right you can simply
Undo, edit the variable, and run the rule again without having to retype
it.

     ' a/x + b/x := (a+b)/x <RET>          s t merge <RET>
     ' sec(x)^2 := 1 + tan(x)^2 <RET>      s t secsqr <RET>

     1:  2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2    1:  2
         .                                  .

         r 1                  a r merge <RET>  a r secsqr <RET>

   To edit a variable, type ‘s e’ and the variable name, use regular
Emacs editing commands as necessary, then type ‘C-c C-c’ to store the
edited value back into the variable.  You can also use ‘s e’ to create a
new variable if you wish.

   Notice that the first time you use each rule, Calc puts up a
“compiling” message briefly.  The pattern matcher converts rules into a
special optimized pattern-matching language rather than using them
directly.  This allows ‘a r’ to apply even rather complicated rules very
efficiently.  If the rule is stored in a variable, Calc compiles it only
once and stores the compiled form along with the variable.  That’s
another good reason to store your rules in variables rather than
entering them on the fly.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  Type ‘m s’ to get Symbolic mode, then enter the
formula ‘(2 + sqrt(2)) / (1 + sqrt(2))’.  Using a rewrite rule, simplify
this formula by multiplying the top and bottom by the conjugate
‘1 - sqrt(2)’.  The result will have to be expanded by the distributive
law; do this with another rewrite.  *Note 1: Rewrites Answer 1.  (•)

   The ‘a r’ command can also accept a vector of rewrite rules, or a
variable containing a vector of rules.

     1:  [merge, secsqr]          1:  [a/x + b/x := (a + b)/x, ... ]
         .                                 .

         ' [merge,sinsqr] <RET>          =

     1:  2 sec(x)^2 / tan(x)^2 - 2 / tan(x)^2     1:  2
         .                                 .

         s t trig <RET>  r 1                  a r trig <RET>

   Calc tries all the rules you give against all parts of the formula,
repeating until no further change is possible.  (The exact order in
which things are tried is rather complex, but for simple rules like the
ones we’ve used here the order doesn’t really matter.  *Note Nested
Formulas with Rewrite Rules::.)

   Calc actually repeats only up to 100 times, just in case your rule
set has gotten into an infinite loop.  You can give a numeric prefix
argument to ‘a r’ to specify any limit.  In particular, ‘M-1 a r’ does
only one rewrite at a time.

     1:  (2 sec(x)^2 - 2) / tan(x)^2         1:  2
         .                                       .

         r 1  M-1 a r trig <RET>                   M-1 a r trig <RET>

   You can type ‘M-0 a r’ if you want no limit at all on the number of
rewrites that occur.

   Rewrite rules can also be “conditional”.  Simply follow the rule with
a ‘::’ symbol and the desired condition.  For example,

     1:  sin(x + 2 pi) + sin(x + 3 pi) + sin(x + 4 pi)
         .

         ' sin(x+2pi) + sin(x+3pi) + sin(x+4pi) <RET>

     1:  sin(x + 3 pi) + 2 sin(x)
         .

         a r sin(a + k pi) := sin(a) :: k % 2 = 0 <RET>

(Recall, ‘k % 2’ is the remainder from dividing ‘k’ by 2, which will be
zero only when ‘k’ is an even integer.)

   An interesting point is that the variable ‘pi’ was matched literally
rather than acting as a meta-variable.  This is because it is a
special-constant variable.  The special constants ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and
so on also match literally.  A common error with rewrite rules is to
write, say, ‘f(a,b,c,d,e) := g(a+b+c+d+e)’, expecting to match any ‘f’
with five arguments but in fact matching only when the fifth argument is
literally ‘e’!

   Rewrite rules provide an interesting way to define your own
functions.  Suppose we want to define ‘fib(n)’ to produce the Nth
Fibonacci number.  The first two Fibonacci numbers are each 1; later
numbers are formed by summing the two preceding numbers in the sequence.
This is easy to express in a set of three rules:

     ' [fib(1) := 1, fib(2) := 1, fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2)] <RET>  s t fib

     1:  fib(7)               1:  13
         .                        .

         ' fib(7) <RET>             a r fib <RET>

   One thing that is guaranteed about the order that rewrites are tried
is that, for any given subformula, earlier rules in the rule set will be
tried for that subformula before later ones.  So even though the first
and third rules both match ‘fib(1)’, we know the first will be used
preferentially.

   This rule set has one dangerous bug: Suppose we apply it to the
formula ‘fib(x)’?  (Don’t actually try this.)  The third rule will match
‘fib(x)’ and replace it with ‘fib(x-1) + fib(x-2)’.  Each of these will
then be replaced to get ‘fib(x-2) + 2 fib(x-3) + fib(x-4)’, and so on,
expanding forever.  What we really want is to apply the third rule only
when ‘n’ is an integer greater than two.  Type ‘s e fib <RET>’, then
edit the third rule to:

     fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2) :: integer(n) :: n > 2

Now:

     1:  fib(6) + fib(x) + fib(0)      1:  fib(x) + fib(0) + 8
         .                                 .

         ' fib(6)+fib(x)+fib(0) <RET>        a r fib <RET>

We’ve created a new function, ‘fib’, and a new command, ‘a r fib <RET>’,
which means “evaluate all ‘fib’ calls in this formula.” To make things
easier still, we can tell Calc to apply these rules automatically by
storing them in the special variable ‘EvalRules’.

     1:  [fib(1) := ...]    .                1:  [8, 13]
         .                                       .

         s r fib <RET>        s t EvalRules <RET>    ' [fib(6), fib(7)] <RET>

   It turns out that this rule set has the problem that it does far more
work than it needs to when ‘n’ is large.  Consider the first few steps
of the computation of ‘fib(6)’:

     fib(6) =
     fib(5)              +               fib(4) =
     fib(4)     +      fib(3)     +      fib(3)     +      fib(2) =
     fib(3) + fib(2) + fib(2) + fib(1) + fib(2) + fib(1) + 1 = ...

Note that ‘fib(3)’ appears three times here.  Unless Calc’s algebraic
simplifier notices the multiple ‘fib(3)’s and combines them (and, as it
happens, it doesn’t), this rule set does lots of needless recomputation.
To cure the problem, type ‘s e EvalRules’ to edit the rules (or just ‘s
E’, a shorthand command for editing ‘EvalRules’) and add another
condition:

     fib(n) := fib(n-1) + fib(n-2) :: integer(n) :: n > 2 :: remember

If a ‘:: remember’ condition appears anywhere in a rule, then if that
rule succeeds Calc will add another rule that describes that match to
the front of the rule set.  (Remembering works in any rule set, but for
technical reasons it is most effective in ‘EvalRules’.)  For example, if
the rule rewrites ‘fib(7)’ to something that evaluates to 13, then the
rule ‘fib(7) := 13’ will be added to the rule set.

   Type ‘' fib(8) <RET>’ to compute the eighth Fibonacci number, then
type ‘s E’ again to see what has happened to the rule set.

   With the ‘remember’ feature, our rule set can now compute ‘fib(N)’ in
just N steps.  In the process it builds up a table of all Fibonacci
numbers up to N.  After we have computed the result for a particular N,
we can get it back (and the results for all smaller N) later in just one
step.

   All Calc operations will run somewhat slower whenever ‘EvalRules’
contains any rules.  You should type ‘s u EvalRules <RET>’ now to
un-store the variable.

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Sometimes it is possible to reformulate a problem
to reduce the amount of recursion necessary to solve it.  Create a rule
that, in about N simple steps and without recourse to the ‘remember’
option, replaces ‘fib(N, 1, 1)’ with ‘fib(1, X, Y)’ where X and Y are
the Nth and N+1st Fibonacci numbers, respectively.  This rule is rather
clunky to use, so add a couple more rules to make the “user interface”
the same as for our first version: enter ‘fib(N)’, get back a plain
number.  *Note 2: Rewrites Answer 2.  (•)

   There are many more things that rewrites can do.  For example, there
are ‘&&&’ and ‘|||’ pattern operators that create “and” and “or”
combinations of rules.  As one really simple example, we could combine
our first two Fibonacci rules thusly:

     [fib(1 ||| 2) := 1, fib(n) := ... ]

That means “‘fib’ of something matching either 1 or 2 rewrites to 1.”

   You can also make meta-variables optional by enclosing them in ‘opt’.
For example, the pattern ‘a + b x’ matches ‘2 + 3 x’ but not ‘2 + x’ or
‘3 x’ or ‘x’.  The pattern ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x’ matches all of these
forms, filling in a default of zero for ‘a’ and one for ‘b’.

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  Your friend Joe had ‘2 + 3 x’ on the stack and
tried to use the rule ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x := f(a, b, x)’.  What happened?
*Note 3: Rewrites Answer 3.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  Starting with a positive integer ‘a’, divide ‘a’
by two if it is even, otherwise compute ‘3 a + 1’.  Now repeat this step
over and over.  A famous unproved conjecture is that for any starting
‘a’, the sequence always eventually reaches 1.  Given the formula
‘seq(A, 0)’, write a set of rules that convert this into ‘seq(1, N)’
where N is the number of steps it took the sequence to reach the value
1.  Now enhance the rules to accept ‘seq(A)’ as a starting
configuration, and to stop with just the number N by itself.  Now make
the result be a vector of values in the sequence, from A to 1.  (The
formula ‘X|Y’ appends the vectors X and Y.)  For example, rewriting
‘seq(6)’ should yield the vector ‘[6, 3, 10, 5, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1]’.  *Note
4: Rewrites Answer 4.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 5.*  Define, using rewrite rules, a function
‘nterms(X)’ that returns the number of terms in the sum X, or 1 if X is
not a sum.  (A “sum” for our purposes is one or more non-sum terms
separated by ‘+’ or ‘-’ signs, so that ‘2 - 3 (x + y) + x y’ is a sum of
three terms.)  *Note 5: Rewrites Answer 5.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 6.*  A Taylor series for a function is an infinite
series that exactly equals the value of that function at values of ‘x’
near zero.

     cos(x) = 1 - x^2 / 2! + x^4 / 4! - x^6 / 6! + ...

   The ‘a t’ command produces a “truncated Taylor series” which is
obtained by dropping all the terms higher than, say, ‘x^2’.  Calc
represents the truncated Taylor series as a polynomial in ‘x’.
Mathematicians often write a truncated series using a “big-O” notation
that records what was the lowest term that was truncated.

     cos(x) = 1 - x^2 / 2! + O(x^3)

The meaning of ‘O(x^3)’ is “a quantity which is negligibly small if
‘x^3’ is considered negligibly small as ‘x’ goes to zero.”

   The exercise is to create rewrite rules that simplify sums and
products of power series represented as ‘POLYNOMIAL + O(VAR^N)’.  For
example, given ‘1 - x^2 / 2 + O(x^3)’ and ‘x - x^3 / 6 + O(x^4)’ on the
stack, we want to be able to type ‘*’ and get the result ‘x - 2:3 x^3 +
O(x^4)’.  Don’t worry if the terms of the sum are rearranged.  (This one
is rather tricky; the solution at the end of this chapter uses 6 rewrite
rules.  Hint: The ‘constant(x)’ condition tests whether ‘x’ is a
number.)  *Note 6: Rewrites Answer 6.  (•)

   Just for kicks, try adding the rule ‘2+3 := 6’ to ‘EvalRules’.  What
happens?  (Be sure to remove this rule afterward, or you might get a
nasty surprise when you use Calc to balance your checkbook!)

   *Note Rewrite Rules::, for the whole story on rewrite rules.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Tutorial,  Next: Answers to Exercises,  Prev: Algebra Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.6 Programming Tutorial
========================

The Calculator is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, a highly extensible
language.  If you know Lisp, you can program the Calculator to do
anything you like.  Rewrite rules also work as a powerful programming
system.  But Lisp and rewrite rules take a while to master, and often
all you want to do is define a new function or repeat a command a few
times.  Calc has features that allow you to do these things easily.

   One very limited form of programming is defining your own functions.
Calc’s ‘Z F’ command allows you to define a function name and key
sequence to correspond to any formula.  Programming commands use the
shift-‘Z’ prefix; the user commands they create use the lower case ‘z’
prefix.

     1:  x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 + 1         1:  x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 + 1
         .                                     .

         ' 1 + x + x^2/2! + x^3/3! <RET>         Z F e myexp <RET> <RET> <RET> y

   This polynomial is a Taylor series approximation to ‘exp(x)’.  The ‘Z
F’ command asks a number of questions.  The above answers say that the
key sequence for our function should be ‘z e’; the ‘M-x’ equivalent
should be ‘calc-myexp’; the name of the function in algebraic formulas
should also be ‘myexp’; the default argument list ‘(x)’ is acceptable;
and finally ‘y’ answers the question “leave it in symbolic form for
non-constant arguments?”

     1:  1.3495     2:  1.3495     3:  1.3495
         .          1:  1.34986    2:  1.34986
                        .          1:  myexp(a + 1)
                                       .

         .3 z e         .3 E           ' a+1 <RET> z e

First we call our new ‘exp’ approximation with 0.3 as an argument, and
compare it with the true ‘exp’ function.  Then we note that, as
requested, if we try to give ‘z e’ an argument that isn’t a plain
number, it leaves the ‘myexp’ function call in symbolic form.  If we had
answered ‘n’ to the final question, ‘myexp(a + 1)’ would have evaluated
by plugging in ‘a + 1’ for ‘x’ in the defining formula.

   (•) *Exercise 1.*  The “sine integral” function ‘Si(x)’ is defined as
the integral of ‘sin(t)/t’ for ‘t = 0’ to ‘x’ in radians.  (It was
invented because this integral has no solution in terms of basic
functions; if you give it to Calc’s ‘a i’ command, it will ponder it for
a long time and then give up.)  We can use the numerical integration
command, however, which in algebraic notation is written like
‘ninteg(f(t), t, 0, x)’ with any integrand ‘f(t)’.  Define a ‘z s’
command and ‘Si’ function that implement this.  You will need to edit
the default argument list a bit.  As a test, ‘Si(1)’ should return
0.946083.  (If you don’t get this answer, you might want to check that
Calc is in Radians mode.  Also, ‘ninteg’ will run a lot faster if you
reduce the precision to, say, six digits beforehand.)  *Note 1:
Programming Answer 1.  (•)

   The simplest way to do real “programming” of Emacs is to define a
“keyboard macro”.  A keyboard macro is simply a sequence of keystrokes
which Emacs has stored away and can play back on demand.  For example,
if you find yourself typing ‘H a S x <RET>’ often, you may wish to
program a keyboard macro to type this for you.

     1:  y = sqrt(x)          1:  x = y^2
         .                        .

         ' y=sqrt(x) <RET>       C-x ( H a S x <RET> C-x )

     1:  y = cos(x)           1:  x = s1 arccos(y) + 2 n1 pi
         .                        .

         ' y=cos(x) <RET>           X

When you type ‘C-x (’, Emacs begins recording.  But it is also still
ready to execute your keystrokes, so you’re really “training” Emacs by
walking it through the procedure once.  When you type ‘C-x )’, the macro
is recorded.  You can now type ‘X’ to re-execute the same keystrokes.

   You can give a name to your macro by typing ‘Z K’.

     1:  .              1:  y = x^4         1:  x = s2 sqrt(s1 sqrt(y))
                            .                   .

       Z K x <RET>            ' y=x^4 <RET>         z x

Notice that we use shift-‘Z’ to define the command, and lower-case ‘z’
to call it up.

   Keyboard macros can call other macros.

     1:  abs(x)        1:  x = s1 y                1:  2 / x    1:  x = 2 / y
         .                 .                           .            .

      ' abs(x) <RET>   C-x ( ' y <RET> a = z x C-x )    ' 2/x <RET>       X

   (•) *Exercise 2.*  Define a keyboard macro to negate the item in
level 3 of the stack, without disturbing the rest of the stack.  *Note
2: Programming Answer 2.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 3.*  Define keyboard macros to compute the following
functions:

  1. Compute ‘sin(x) / x’, where ‘x’ is the number on the top of the
     stack.

  2. Compute the base-‘b’ logarithm, just like the ‘B’ key except the
     arguments are taken in the opposite order.

  3. Produce a vector of integers from 1 to the integer on the top of
     the stack.
*Note 3: Programming Answer 3.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 4.*  Define a keyboard macro to compute the average
(mean) value of a list of numbers.  *Note 4: Programming Answer 4.  (•)

   In many programs, some of the steps must execute several times.  Calc
has “looping” commands that allow this.  Loops are useful inside
keyboard macros, but actually work at any time.

     1:  x^6          2:  x^6        1: 360 x^2
         .            1:  4             .
                          .

       ' x^6 <RET>          4         Z < a d x <RET> Z >

Here we have computed the fourth derivative of ‘x^6’ by enclosing a
derivative command in a “repeat loop” structure.  This structure pops a
repeat count from the stack, then executes the body of the loop that
many times.

   If you make a mistake while entering the body of the loop, type
‘Z C-g’ to cancel the loop command.

   Here’s another example:

     3:  1               2:  10946
     2:  1               1:  17711
     1:  20                  .
         .

     1 <RET> <RET> 20       Z < <TAB> C-j + Z >

The numbers in levels 2 and 1 should be the 21st and 22nd Fibonacci
numbers, respectively.  (To see what’s going on, try a few repetitions
of the loop body by hand; ‘C-j’, also on the Line-Feed or <LFD> key if
you have one, makes a copy of the number in level 2.)

   A fascinating property of the Fibonacci numbers is that the ‘n’th
Fibonacci number can be found directly by computing ‘phi^n / sqrt(5)’
and then rounding to the nearest integer, where ‘phi’, the “golden
ratio,” is ‘(1 + sqrt(5)) / 2’.  (For convenience, this constant is
available from the ‘phi’ variable, or the ‘I H P’ command.)

     1:  1.61803         1:  24476.0000409    1:  10945.9999817    1:  10946
         .                   .                    .                    .

         I H P               21 ^                 5 Q /                R

   (•) *Exercise 5.*  The “continued fraction” representation of ‘phi’
is ‘1 + 1/(1 + 1/(1 + 1/( ... )))’.  We can compute an approximate value
by carrying this however far and then replacing the innermost ‘1/( ...
)’ by 1.  Approximate ‘phi’ using a twenty-term continued fraction.
*Note 5: Programming Answer 5.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 6.*  Linear recurrences like the one for Fibonacci
numbers can be expressed in terms of matrices.  Given a vector ‘[a, b]’
determine a matrix which, when multiplied by this vector, produces the
vector ‘[b, c]’, where ‘a’, ‘b’ and ‘c’ are three successive Fibonacci
numbers.  Now write a program that, given an integer ‘n’, computes the
‘n’th Fibonacci number using matrix arithmetic.  *Note 6: Programming
Answer 6.  (•)

   A more sophisticated kind of loop is the “for” loop.  Suppose we wish
to compute the 20th “harmonic” number, which is equal to the sum of the
reciprocals of the integers from 1 to 20.

     3:  0               1:  3.597739
     2:  1                   .
     1:  20
         .

     0 <RET> 1 <RET> 20         Z ( & + 1 Z )

The “for” loop pops two numbers, the lower and upper limits, then
repeats the body of the loop as an internal counter increases from the
lower limit to the upper one.  Just before executing the loop body, it
pushes the current loop counter.  When the loop body finishes, it pops
the “step,” i.e., the amount by which to increment the loop counter.  As
you can see, our loop always uses a step of one.

   This harmonic number function uses the stack to hold the running
total as well as for the various loop housekeeping functions.  If you
find this disorienting, you can sum in a variable instead:

     1:  0         2:  1                  .            1:  3.597739
         .         1:  20                                  .
                       .

         0 t 7       1 <RET> 20      Z ( & s + 7 1 Z )       r 7

The ‘s +’ command adds the top-of-stack into the value in a variable
(and removes that value from the stack).

   It’s worth noting that many jobs that call for a “for” loop can also
be done more easily by Calc’s high-level operations.  Two other ways to
compute harmonic numbers are to use vector mapping and reduction (‘v x
20’, then ‘V M &’, then ‘V R +’), or to use the summation command ‘a +’.
Both of these are probably easier than using loops.  However, there are
some situations where loops really are the way to go:

   (•) *Exercise 7.*  Use a “for” loop to find the first harmonic number
which is greater than 4.0.  *Note 7: Programming Answer 7.  (•)

   Of course, if we’re going to be using variables in our programs, we
have to worry about the programs clobbering values that the caller was
keeping in those same variables.  This is easy to fix, though:

         .        1:  0.6667       1:  0.6667     3:  0.6667
                      .                .          2:  3.597739
                                                  1:  0.6667
                                                      .

        Z `    p 4 <RET> 2 <RET> 3 /   s 7 s s a <RET>    Z '  r 7 s r a <RET>

When we type ‘Z `’ (that’s a grave accent), Calc saves its mode settings
and the contents of the ten “quick variables” for later reference.  When
we type ‘Z '’ (that’s an apostrophe now), Calc restores those saved
values.  Thus the ‘p 4’ and ‘s 7’ commands have no effect outside this
sequence.  Wrapping this around the body of a keyboard macro ensures
that it doesn’t interfere with what the user of the macro was doing.
Notice that the contents of the stack, and the values of named
variables, survive past the ‘Z '’ command.

   The “Bernoulli numbers” are a sequence with the interesting property
that all of the odd Bernoulli numbers are zero, and the even ones, while
difficult to compute, can be roughly approximated by the formula ‘2 n! /
(2 pi)^n’.  Let’s write a keyboard macro to compute (approximate)
Bernoulli numbers.  (Calc has a command, ‘k b’, to compute exact
Bernoulli numbers, but this command is very slow for large ‘n’ since the
higher Bernoulli numbers are very large fractions.)

     1:  10               1:  0.0756823
         .                    .

         10     C-x ( <RET> 2 % Z [ <DEL> 0 Z : ' 2 $! / (2 pi)^$ <RET> = Z ] C-x )

You can read ‘Z [’ as “then,” ‘Z :’ as “else,” and ‘Z ]’ as “end-if.”
There is no need for an explicit “if” command.  For the purposes of
‘Z [’, the condition is “true” if the value it pops from the stack is a
nonzero number, or “false” if it pops zero or something that is not a
number (like a formula).  Here we take our integer argument modulo 2;
this will be nonzero if we’re asking for an odd Bernoulli number.

   The actual tenth Bernoulli number is ‘5/66’.

     3:  0.0756823    1:  0          1:  0.25305    1:  0          1:  1.16659
     2:  5:66             .              .              .              .
     1:  0.0757575
         .

     10 k b <RET> c f   M-0 <DEL> 11 X   <DEL> 12 X       <DEL> 13 X       <DEL> 14 X

   Just to exercise loops a bit more, let’s compute a table of even
Bernoulli numbers.

     3:  []             1:  [0.10132, 0.03079, 0.02340, 0.033197, ...]
     2:  2                  .
     1:  30
         .

      [ ] 2 <RET> 30          Z ( X | 2 Z )

The vertical-bar ‘|’ is the vector-concatenation command.  When we
execute it, the list we are building will be in stack level 2 (initially
this is an empty list), and the next Bernoulli number will be in level
1.  The effect is to append the Bernoulli number onto the end of the
list.  (To create a table of exact fractional Bernoulli numbers, just
replace ‘X’ with ‘k b’ in the above sequence of keystrokes.)

   With loops and conditionals, you can program essentially anything in
Calc.  One other command that makes looping easier is ‘Z /’, which takes
a condition from the stack and breaks out of the enclosing loop if the
condition is true (non-zero).  You can use this to make “while” and
“until” style loops.

   If you make a mistake when entering a keyboard macro, you can edit it
using ‘Z E’.  First, you must attach it to a key with ‘Z K’.  One
technique is to enter a throwaway dummy definition for the macro, then
enter the real one in the edit command.

     1:  3                   1:  3           Calc Macro Edit Mode.
         .                       .           Original keys: 1 <return> 2 +

                                             1                          ;; calc digits
                                             RET                        ;; calc-enter
                                             2                          ;; calc digits
                                             +                          ;; calc-plus

     C-x ( 1 <RET> 2 + C-x )    Z K h <RET>      Z E h

A keyboard macro is stored as a pure keystroke sequence.  The ‘edmacro’
package (invoked by ‘Z E’) scans along the macro and tries to decode it
back into human-readable steps.  Descriptions of the keystrokes are
given as comments, which begin with ‘;;’, and which are ignored when the
edited macro is saved.  Spaces and line breaks are also ignored when the
edited macro is saved.  To enter a space into the macro, type ‘SPC’.
All the special characters ‘RET’, ‘LFD’, ‘TAB’, ‘SPC’, ‘DEL’, and ‘NUL’
must be written in all uppercase, as must the prefixes ‘C-’ and ‘M-’.

   Let’s edit in a new definition, for computing harmonic numbers.
First, erase the four lines of the old definition.  Then, type in the
new definition (or use Emacs ‘M-w’ and ‘C-y’ commands to copy it from
this page of the Info file; you can of course skip typing the comments,
which begin with ‘;;’).

     Z`                      ;; calc-kbd-push     (Save local values)
     0                       ;; calc digits       (Push a zero onto the stack)
     st                      ;; calc-store-into   (Store it in the following variable)
     1                       ;; calc quick variable  (Quick variable q1)
     1                       ;; calc digits       (Initial value for the loop)
     TAB                     ;; calc-roll-down    (Swap initial and final)
     Z(                      ;; calc-kbd-for      (Begin the "for" loop)
     &                       ;; calc-inv          (Take the reciprocal)
     s+                      ;; calc-store-plus   (Add to the following variable)
     1                       ;; calc quick variable  (Quick variable q1)
     1                       ;; calc digits       (The loop step is 1)
     Z)                      ;; calc-kbd-end-for  (End the "for" loop)
     sr                      ;; calc-recall       (Recall the final accumulated value)
     1                       ;; calc quick variable (Quick variable q1)
     Z'                      ;; calc-kbd-pop      (Restore values)

Press ‘C-c C-c’ to finish editing and return to the Calculator.

     1:  20         1:  3.597739
         .              .

         20             z h

   The ‘edmacro’ package defines a handy ‘read-kbd-macro’ command which
reads the current region of the current buffer as a sequence of
keystroke names, and defines that sequence on the ‘X’ (and ‘C-x e’) key.
Because this is so useful, Calc puts this command on the ‘C-x * m’ key.
Try reading in this macro in the following form: Press ‘C-@’ (or
‘C-<SPC>’) at one end of the text below, then type ‘C-x * m’ at the
other.

     Z ` 0 t 1
         1 TAB
         Z (  & s + 1  1 Z )
         r 1
     Z '

   (•) *Exercise 8.*  A general algorithm for solving equations
numerically is “Newton’s Method”.  Given the equation ‘f(x) = 0’ for any
function ‘f’, and an initial guess ‘x_0’ which is reasonably close to
the desired solution, apply this formula over and over:

     new_x = x - f(x)/f'(x)

where ‘f'(x)’ is the derivative of ‘f’.  The ‘x’ values will quickly
converge to a solution, i.e., eventually ‘new_x’ and ‘x’ will be equal
to within the limits of the current precision.  Write a program which
takes a formula involving the variable ‘x’, and an initial guess ‘x_0’,
on the stack, and produces a value of ‘x’ for which the formula is zero.
Use it to find a solution of ‘sin(cos(x)) = 0.5’ near ‘x = 4.5’.  (Use
angles measured in radians.)  Note that the built-in ‘a R’
(‘calc-find-root’) command uses Newton’s method when it is able.  *Note
8: Programming Answer 8.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 9.*  The “digamma” function ‘psi(z)’ is defined as the
derivative of ‘ln(gamma(z))’.  For large values of ‘z’, it can be
approximated by the infinite sum

     psi(z) ~= ln(z) - 1/2z - sum(bern(2 n) / 2 n z^(2 n), n, 1, inf)

where ‘sum’ represents the sum over ‘n’ from 1 to infinity (or to some
limit high enough to give the desired accuracy), and the ‘bern’ function
produces (exact) Bernoulli numbers.  While this sum is not guaranteed to
converge, in practice it is safe.  An interesting mathematical constant
is Euler’s gamma, which is equal to about 0.5772.  One way to compute it
is by the formula, ‘gamma = -psi(1)’.  Unfortunately, 1 isn’t a large
enough argument for the above formula to work (5 is a much safer value
for ‘z’).  Fortunately, we can compute ‘psi(1)’ from ‘psi(5)’ using the
recurrence ‘psi(z+1) = psi(z) + 1/z’.  Your task: Develop a program to
compute ‘psi(z)’; it should “pump up” ‘z’ if necessary to be greater
than 5, then use the above summation formula.  Use looping commands to
compute the sum.  Use your function to compute ‘gamma’ to twelve decimal
places.  (Calc has a built-in command for Euler’s constant, ‘I P’, which
you can use to check your answer.)  *Note 9: Programming Answer 9.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 10.*  Given a polynomial in ‘x’ and a number ‘m’ on the
stack, where the polynomial is of degree ‘m’ or less (i.e., does not
have any terms higher than ‘x^m’), write a program to convert the
polynomial into a list-of-coefficients notation.  For example, ‘5 x^4 +
(x + 1)^2’ with ‘m = 6’ should produce the list ‘[1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]’.
Also develop a way to convert from this form back to the standard
algebraic form.  *Note 10: Programming Answer 10.  (•)

   (•) *Exercise 11.*  The “Stirling numbers of the first kind” are
defined by the recurrences,

     s(n,n) = 1   for n >= 0,
     s(n,0) = 0   for n > 0,
     s(n+1,m) = s(n,m-1) - n s(n,m)   for n >= m >= 1.

   This can be implemented using a “recursive” program in Calc; the
program must invoke itself in order to calculate the two righthand terms
in the general formula.  Since it always invokes itself with “simpler”
arguments, it’s easy to see that it must eventually finish the
computation.  Recursion is a little difficult with Emacs keyboard macros
since the macro is executed before its definition is complete.  So
here’s the recommended strategy: Create a “dummy macro” and assign it to
a key with, e.g., ‘Z K s’.  Now enter the true definition, using the ‘z
s’ command to call itself recursively, then assign it to the same key
with ‘Z K s’.  Now the ‘z s’ command will run the complete recursive
program.  (Another way is to use ‘Z E’ or ‘C-x * m’ (‘read-kbd-macro’)
to read the whole macro at once, thus avoiding the “training” phase.)
The task: Write a program that computes Stirling numbers of the first
kind, given ‘n’ and ‘m’ on the stack.  Test it with _small_ inputs like
‘s(4,2)’.  (There is a built-in command for Stirling numbers, ‘k s’,
which you can use to check your answers.)  *Note 11: Programming Answer
11.  (•)

   The programming commands we’ve seen in this part of the tutorial are
low-level, general-purpose operations.  Often you will find that a
higher-level function, such as vector mapping or rewrite rules, will do
the job much more easily than a detailed, step-by-step program can:

   (•) *Exercise 12.*  Write another program for computing Stirling
numbers of the first kind, this time using rewrite rules.  Once again,
‘n’ and ‘m’ should be taken from the stack.  *Note 12: Programming
Answer 12.  (•)


   This ends the tutorial section of the Calc manual.  Now you know
enough about Calc to use it effectively for many kinds of calculations.
But Calc has many features that were not even touched upon in this
tutorial.  The rest of this manual tells the whole story.


File: calc.info,  Node: Answers to Exercises,  Prev: Programming Tutorial,  Up: Tutorial

3.7 Answers to Exercises
========================

This section includes answers to all the exercises in the Calc tutorial.

* Menu:

* RPN Answer 1::           1 <RET> 2 <RET> 3 <RET> 4 + * -
* RPN Answer 2::           2*4 + 7*9.5 + 5/4
* RPN Answer 3::           Operating on levels 2 and 3
* RPN Answer 4::           Joe’s complex problems
* Algebraic Answer 1::     Simulating Q command
* Algebraic Answer 2::     Joe’s algebraic woes
* Algebraic Answer 3::     1 / 0
* Modes Answer 1::         3#0.1 = 3#0.0222222?
* Modes Answer 2::         16#f.e8fe15
* Modes Answer 3::         Joe’s rounding bug
* Modes Answer 4::         Why floating point?
* Arithmetic Answer 1::    Why the \ command?
* Arithmetic Answer 2::    Tripping up the B command
* Vector Answer 1::        Normalizing a vector
* Vector Answer 2::        Average position
* Matrix Answer 1::        Row and column sums
* Matrix Answer 2::        Symbolic system of equations
* Matrix Answer 3::        Over-determined system
* List Answer 1::          Powers of two
* List Answer 2::          Least-squares fit with matrices
* List Answer 3::          Geometric mean
* List Answer 4::          Divisor function
* List Answer 5::          Duplicate factors
* List Answer 6::          Triangular list
* List Answer 7::          Another triangular list
* List Answer 8::          Maximum of Bessel function
* List Answer 9::          Integers the hard way
* List Answer 10::         All elements equal
* List Answer 11::         Estimating pi with darts
* List Answer 12::         Estimating pi with matchsticks
* List Answer 13::         Hash codes
* List Answer 14::         Random walk
* Types Answer 1::         Square root of pi times rational
* Types Answer 2::         Infinities
* Types Answer 3::         What can "nan" be?
* Types Answer 4::         Abbey Road
* Types Answer 5::         Friday the 13th
* Types Answer 6::         Leap years
* Types Answer 7::         Erroneous donut
* Types Answer 8::         Dividing intervals
* Types Answer 9::         Squaring intervals
* Types Answer 10::        Fermat’s primality test
* Types Answer 11::        pi * 10^7 seconds
* Types Answer 12::        Abbey Road on CD
* Types Answer 13::        Not quite pi * 10^7 seconds
* Types Answer 14::        Supercomputers and c
* Types Answer 15::        Sam the Slug
* Algebra Answer 1::       Squares and square roots
* Algebra Answer 2::       Building polynomial from roots
* Algebra Answer 3::       Integral of x sin(pi x)
* Algebra Answer 4::       Simpson’s rule
* Rewrites Answer 1::      Multiplying by conjugate
* Rewrites Answer 2::      Alternative fib rule
* Rewrites Answer 3::      Rewriting opt(a) + opt(b) x
* Rewrites Answer 4::      Sequence of integers
* Rewrites Answer 5::      Number of terms in sum
* Rewrites Answer 6::      Truncated Taylor series
* Programming Answer 1::   Fresnel’s C(x)
* Programming Answer 2::   Negate third stack element
* Programming Answer 3::   Compute sin(x) / x, etc.
* Programming Answer 4::   Average value of a list
* Programming Answer 5::   Continued fraction phi
* Programming Answer 6::   Matrix Fibonacci numbers
* Programming Answer 7::   Harmonic number greater than 4
* Programming Answer 8::   Newton’s method
* Programming Answer 9::   Digamma function
* Programming Answer 10::  Unpacking a polynomial
* Programming Answer 11::  Recursive Stirling numbers
* Programming Answer 12::  Stirling numbers with rewrites


File: calc.info,  Node: RPN Answer 1,  Next: RPN Answer 2,  Prev: Answers to Exercises,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.1 RPN Tutorial Exercise 1
-----------------------------

‘1 <RET> 2 <RET> 3 <RET> 4 + * -’

   The result is ‘1 - (2 * (3 + 4)) = -13’.


File: calc.info,  Node: RPN Answer 2,  Next: RPN Answer 3,  Prev: RPN Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.2 RPN Tutorial Exercise 2
-----------------------------

‘2*4 + 7*9.5 + 5/4 = 75.75’

   After computing the intermediate term ‘2*4 = 8’, you can leave that
result on the stack while you compute the second term.  With both of
these results waiting on the stack you can then compute the final term,
then press ‘+ +’ to add everything up.

     2:  2          1:  8          3:  8          2:  8
     1:  4              .          2:  7          1:  66.5
         .                         1:  9.5            .
                                       .

       2 <RET> 4          *          7 <RET> 9.5          *

     4:  8          3:  8          2:  8          1:  75.75
     3:  66.5       2:  66.5       1:  67.75          .
     2:  5          1:  1.25           .
     1:  4              .
         .

       5 <RET> 4          /              +              +

   Alternatively, you could add the first two terms before going on with
the third term.

     2:  8          1:  74.5       3:  74.5       2:  74.5       1:  75.75
     1:  66.5           .          2:  5          1:  1.25           .
         .                         1:  4              .
                                       .

        ...             +            5 <RET> 4          /              +

   On an old-style RPN calculator this second method would have the
advantage of using only three stack levels.  But since Calc’s stack can
grow arbitrarily large this isn’t really an issue.  Which method you
choose is purely a matter of taste.


File: calc.info,  Node: RPN Answer 3,  Next: RPN Answer 4,  Prev: RPN Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.3 RPN Tutorial Exercise 3
-----------------------------

The <TAB> key provides a way to operate on the number in level 2.

     3:  10         3:  10         4:  10         3:  10         3:  10
     2:  20         2:  30         3:  30         2:  30         2:  21
     1:  30         1:  20         2:  20         1:  21         1:  30
         .              .          1:  1              .              .
                                       .

                       <TAB>             1              +             <TAB>

   Similarly, ‘M-<TAB>’ gives you access to the number in level 3.

     3:  10         3:  21         3:  21         3:  30         3:  11
     2:  21         2:  30         2:  30         2:  11         2:  21
     1:  30         1:  10         1:  11         1:  21         1:  30
         .              .              .              .              .

                       M-<TAB>           1 +           M-<TAB>          M-<TAB>


File: calc.info,  Node: RPN Answer 4,  Next: Algebraic Answer 1,  Prev: RPN Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.4 RPN Tutorial Exercise 4
-----------------------------

Either ‘( 2 , 3 )’ or ‘( 2 <SPC> 3 )’ would have worked, but using both
the comma and the space at once yields:

     1:  ( ...      2:  ( ...      1:  (2, ...    2:  (2, ...    2:  (2, ...
         .          1:  2              .          1:  (2, ...    1:  (2, 3)
                        .                             .              .

         (              2              ,             <SPC>            3 )

   Joe probably tried to type ‘<TAB> <DEL>’ to swap the extra incomplete
object to the top of the stack and delete it.  But a feature of Calc is
that <DEL> on an incomplete object deletes just one component out of
that object, so he had to press <DEL> twice to finish the job.

     2:  (2, ...    2:  (2, 3)     2:  (2, 3)     1:  (2, 3)
     1:  (2, 3)     1:  (2, ...    1:  ( ...          .
         .              .              .

                       <TAB>            <DEL>            <DEL>

   (As it turns out, deleting the second-to-top stack entry happens
often enough that Calc provides a special key, ‘M-<DEL>’, to do just
that.  ‘M-<DEL>’ is just like ‘<TAB> <DEL>’, except that it doesn’t
exhibit the “feature” that tripped poor Joe.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Answer 1,  Next: Algebraic Answer 2,  Prev: RPN Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.5 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 1
-----------------------------------------

Type ‘' sqrt($) <RET>’.

   If the ‘Q’ key is broken, you could use ‘' $^0.5 <RET>’.  Or, RPN
style, ‘0.5 ^’.

   (Actually, ‘$^1:2’, using the fraction one-half as the power, is a
closer equivalent, since ‘9^0.5’ yields ‘3.0’ whereas ‘sqrt(9)’ and
‘9^1:2’ yield the exact integer ‘3’.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Answer 2,  Next: Algebraic Answer 3,  Prev: Algebraic Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.6 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 2
-----------------------------------------

In the formula ‘2 x (1+y)’, ‘x’ was interpreted as a function name with
‘1+y’ as its argument.  Assigning a value to a variable has no relation
to a function by the same name.  Joe needed to use an explicit ‘*’
symbol here: ‘2 x*(1+y)’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Answer 3,  Next: Modes Answer 1,  Prev: Algebraic Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.7 Algebraic Entry Tutorial Exercise 3
-----------------------------------------

The result from ‘1 <RET> 0 /’ will be the formula ‘1 / 0’.  The
“function” ‘/’ cannot be evaluated when its second argument is zero, so
it is left in symbolic form.  When you now type ‘0 *’, the result will
be zero because Calc uses the general rule that “zero times anything is
zero.”

   The ‘m i’ command enables an “Infinite mode” in which ‘1 / 0’ results
in a special symbol that represents “infinity.” If you multiply infinity
by zero, Calc uses another special new symbol to show that the answer is
“indeterminate.” *Note Infinities::, for further discussion of infinite
and indeterminate values.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Answer 1,  Next: Modes Answer 2,  Prev: Algebraic Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.8 Modes Tutorial Exercise 1
-------------------------------

Calc always stores its numbers in decimal, so even though one-third has
an exact base-3 representation (‘3#0.1’), it is still stored as
0.3333333 (chopped off after 12 or however many decimal digits) inside
the calculator’s memory.  When this inexact number is converted back to
base 3 for display, it may still be slightly inexact.  When we multiply
this number by 3, we get 0.999999, also an inexact value.

   When Calc displays a number in base 3, it has to decide how many
digits to show.  If the current precision is 12 (decimal) digits, that
corresponds to ‘12 / log10(3) = 25.15’ base-3 digits.  Because 25.15 is
not an exact integer, Calc shows only 25 digits, with the result that
stored numbers carry a little bit of extra information that may not show
up on the screen.  When Joe entered ‘3#0.2’, the stored number 0.666666
happened to round to a pleasing value when it lost that last 0.15 of a
digit, but it was still inexact in Calc’s memory.  When he divided by 2,
he still got the dreaded inexact value 0.333333.  (Actually, he divided
0.666667 by 2 to get 0.333334, which is why he got something a little
higher than ‘3#0.1’ instead of a little lower.)

   If Joe didn’t want to be bothered with all this, he could have typed
‘M-24 d n’ to display with one less digit than the default.  (If you
give ‘d n’ a negative argument, it uses default-minus-that, so ‘M-- d n’
would be an easier way to get the same effect.)  Those inexact results
would still be lurking there, but they would now be rounded to nice,
natural-looking values for display purposes.  (Remember, ‘0.022222’ in
base 3 is like ‘0.099999’ in base 10; rounding off one digit will round
the number up to ‘0.1’.)  Depending on the nature of your work, this
hiding of the inexactness may be a benefit or a danger.  With the ‘d n’
command, Calc gives you the choice.

   Incidentally, another consequence of all this is that if you type
‘M-30 d n’ to display more digits than are “really there,” you’ll see
garbage digits at the end of the number.  (In decimal display mode, with
decimally-stored numbers, these garbage digits are always zero so they
vanish and you don’t notice them.)  Because Calc rounds off that 0.15
digit, there is the danger that two numbers could be slightly different
internally but still look the same.  If you feel uneasy about this, set
the ‘d n’ precision to be a little higher than normal; you’ll get ugly
garbage digits, but you’ll always be able to tell two distinct numbers
apart.

   An interesting side note is that most computers store their
floating-point numbers in binary, and convert to decimal for display.
Thus everyday programs have the same problem: Decimal 0.1 cannot be
represented exactly in binary (try it: ‘0.1 d 2’), so ‘0.1 * 10’ comes
out as an inexact approximation to 1 on some machines (though they
generally arrange to hide it from you by rounding off one digit as we
did above).  Because Calc works in decimal instead of binary, you can be
sure that numbers that look exact _are_ exact as long as you stay in
decimal display mode.

   It’s not hard to show that any number that can be represented exactly
in binary, octal, or hexadecimal is also exact in decimal, so the kinds
of problems we saw in this exercise are likely to be severe only when
you use a relatively unusual radix like 3.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Answer 2,  Next: Modes Answer 3,  Prev: Modes Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.9 Modes Tutorial Exercise 2
-------------------------------

If the radix is 15 or higher, we can’t use the letter ‘e’ to mark the
exponent because ‘e’ is interpreted as a digit.  When Calc needs to
display scientific notation in a high radix, it writes
‘16#F.E8F*16.^15’.  You can enter a number like this as an algebraic
entry.  Also, pressing ‘e’ without any digits before it normally types
‘1e’, but in a high radix it types ‘16.^’ and puts you in algebraic
entry: ‘16#f.e8f <RET> e 15 <RET> *’ is another way to enter this
number.

   The reason Calc puts a decimal point in the ‘16.^’ is to prevent huge
integers from being generated if the exponent is large (consider
‘16#1.23*16^1000’, where we compute ‘16^1000’ as a giant exact integer
and then throw away most of the digits when we multiply it by the
floating-point ‘16#1.23’).  While this wouldn’t normally matter for
display purposes, it could give you a nasty surprise if you copied that
number into a file and later moved it back into Calc.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Answer 3,  Next: Modes Answer 4,  Prev: Modes Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.10 Modes Tutorial Exercise 3
--------------------------------

The answer he got was ‘0.5000000000006399’.

   The problem is not that the square operation is inexact, but that the
sine of 45 that was already on the stack was accurate to only 12 places.
Arbitrary-precision calculations still only give answers as good as
their inputs.

   The real problem is that there is no 12-digit number which, when
squared, comes out to 0.5 exactly.  The ‘f [’ and ‘f ]’ commands
decrease or increase a number by one unit in the last place (according
to the current precision).  They are useful for determining facts like
this.

     1:  0.707106781187      1:  0.500000000001
         .                       .

         45 S                    2 ^

     1:  0.707106781187      1:  0.707106781186      1:  0.499999999999
         .                       .                       .

         U  <DEL>                  f [                     2 ^

   A high-precision calculation must be carried out in high precision
all the way.  The only number in the original problem which was known
exactly was the quantity 45 degrees, so the precision must be raised
before anything is done after the number 45 has been entered in order
for the higher precision to be meaningful.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Answer 4,  Next: Arithmetic Answer 1,  Prev: Modes Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.11 Modes Tutorial Exercise 4
--------------------------------

Many calculations involve real-world quantities, like the width and
height of a piece of wood or the volume of a jar.  Such quantities can’t
be measured exactly anyway, and if the data that is input to a
calculation is inexact, doing exact arithmetic on it is a waste of time.

   Fractions become unwieldy after too many calculations have been done
with them.  For example, the sum of the reciprocals of the integers from
1 to 10 is 7381:2520.  The sum from 1 to 30 is
9304682830147:2329089562800.  After a point it will take a long time to
add even one more term to this sum, but a floating-point calculation of
the sum will not have this problem.

   Also, rational numbers cannot express the results of all
calculations.  There is no fractional form for the square root of two,
so if you type ‘2 Q’, Calc has no choice but to give you a
floating-point answer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Arithmetic Answer 1,  Next: Arithmetic Answer 2,  Prev: Modes Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.12 Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 1
-------------------------------------

Dividing two integers that are larger than the current precision may
give a floating-point result that is inaccurate even when rounded down
to an integer.  Consider ‘123456789 / 2’ when the current precision is 6
digits.  The true answer is ‘61728394.5’, but with a precision of 6 this
will be rounded to ‘12345700. / 2. = 61728500.’.  The result, when
converted to an integer, will be off by 106.

   Here are two solutions: Raise the precision enough that the
floating-point round-off error is strictly to the right of the decimal
point.  Or, convert to Fraction mode so that ‘123456789 / 2’ produces
the exact fraction ‘123456789:2’, which can be rounded down by the ‘F’
command without ever switching to floating-point format.


File: calc.info,  Node: Arithmetic Answer 2,  Next: Vector Answer 1,  Prev: Arithmetic Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.13 Arithmetic Tutorial Exercise 2
-------------------------------------

‘27 <RET> 9 B’ could give the exact result ‘3:2’, but it does a
floating-point calculation instead and produces ‘1.5’.

   Calc will find an exact result for a logarithm if the result is an
integer or (when in Fraction mode) the reciprocal of an integer.  But
there is no efficient way to search the space of all possible rational
numbers for an exact answer, so Calc doesn’t try.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector Answer 1,  Next: Vector Answer 2,  Prev: Arithmetic Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.14 Vector Tutorial Exercise 1
---------------------------------

Duplicate the vector, compute its length, then divide the vector by its
length: ‘<RET> A /’.

     1:  [1, 2, 3]  2:  [1, 2, 3]      1:  [0.27, 0.53, 0.80]  1:  1.
         .          1:  3.74165738677      .                       .
                        .

         r 1            <RET> A              /                       A

   The final ‘A’ command shows that the normalized vector does indeed
have unit length.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector Answer 2,  Next: Matrix Answer 1,  Prev: Vector Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.15 Vector Tutorial Exercise 2
---------------------------------

The average position is equal to the sum of the products of the
positions times their corresponding probabilities.  This is the
definition of the dot product operation.  So all you need to do is to
put the two vectors on the stack and press ‘*’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Answer 1,  Next: Matrix Answer 2,  Prev: Vector Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.16 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 1
---------------------------------

The trick is to multiply by a vector of ones.  Use ‘r 4 [1 1 1] *’ to
get the row sum.  Similarly, use ‘[1 1] r 4 *’ to get the column sum.


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Answer 2,  Next: Matrix Answer 3,  Prev: Matrix Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.17 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 2
---------------------------------

        x + a y = 6
        x + b y = 10

   Just enter the righthand side vector, then divide by the lefthand
side matrix as usual.

     1:  [6, 10]    2:  [6, 10]         1:  [4 a / (a - b) + 6, 4 / (b - a) ]
         .          1:  [ [ 1, a ]          .
                          [ 1, b ] ]
                        .

     ' [6 10] <RET>     ' [1 a; 1 b] <RET>      /

   This can be made more readable using ‘d B’ to enable Big display
mode:

           4 a         4
     1:  [----- + 6, -----]
          a - b      b - a

   Type ‘d N’ to return to Normal display mode afterwards.


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Answer 3,  Next: List Answer 1,  Prev: Matrix Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.18 Matrix Tutorial Exercise 3
---------------------------------

To solve ‘trn(A) * A * X = trn(A) * B’, first we compute ‘A2 = trn(A) *
A’ and ‘B2 = trn(A) * B’; now, we have a system ‘A2 * X = B2’ which we
can solve using Calc’s ‘/’ command.

         a + 2b + 3c = 6
        4a + 5b + 6c = 2
        7a + 6b      = 3
        2a + 4b + 6c = 11

   The first step is to enter the coefficient matrix.  We’ll store it in
quick variable number 7 for later reference.  Next, we compute the ‘B2’
vector.

     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]             2:  [ [ 1, 4, 7, 2 ]     1:  [57, 84, 96]
           [ 4, 5, 6 ]                   [ 2, 5, 6, 4 ]         .
           [ 7, 6, 0 ]                   [ 3, 6, 0, 6 ] ]
           [ 2, 4, 6 ] ]           1:  [6, 2, 3, 11]
         .                             .

     ' [1 2 3; 4 5 6; 7 6 0; 2 4 6] <RET>  s 7  v t  [6 2 3 11]   *

Now we compute the matrix ‘A2’ and divide.

     2:  [57, 84, 96]          1:  [-11.64, 14.08, -3.64]
     1:  [ [ 70, 72, 39 ]          .
           [ 72, 81, 60 ]
           [ 39, 60, 81 ] ]
         .

         r 7 v t r 7 *             /

(The actual computed answer will be slightly inexact due to round-off
error.)

   Notice that the answers are similar to those for the 3x3 system
solved in the text.  That’s because the fourth equation that was added
to the system is almost identical to the first one multiplied by two.
(If it were identical, we would have gotten the exact same answer since
the 4x3 system would be equivalent to the original 3x3 system.)

   Since the first and fourth equations aren’t quite equivalent, they
can’t both be satisfied at once.  Let’s plug our answers back into the
original system of equations to see how well they match.

     2:  [-11.64, 14.08, -3.64]     1:  [5.6, 2., 3., 11.2]
     1:  [ [ 1, 2, 3 ]                  .
           [ 4, 5, 6 ]
           [ 7, 6, 0 ]
           [ 2, 4, 6 ] ]
         .

         r 7                            <TAB> *

This is reasonably close to our original ‘B’ vector, ‘[6, 2, 3, 11]’.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 1,  Next: List Answer 2,  Prev: Matrix Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.19 List Tutorial Exercise 1
-------------------------------

We can use ‘v x’ to build a vector of integers.  This needs to be
adjusted to get the range of integers we desire.  Mapping ‘-’ across the
vector will accomplish this, although it turns out the plain ‘-’ key
will work just as well.

     2:  2                              2:  2
     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9]    1:  [-4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4]
         .                                  .

         2  v x 9 <RET>                       5 V M -   or   5 -

Now we use ‘V M ^’ to map the exponentiation operator across the vector.

     1:  [0.0625, 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16]
         .

         V M ^


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 2,  Next: List Answer 3,  Prev: List Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.20 List Tutorial Exercise 2
-------------------------------

Given ‘x’ and ‘y’ vectors in quick variables 1 and 2 as before, the
first job is to form the matrix that describes the problem.

        m*x + b*1 = y

   Thus we want a 19x2 matrix with our ‘x’ vector as one column and ones
as the other column.  So, first we build the column of ones, then we
combine the two columns to form our ‘A’ matrix.

     2:  [1.34, 1.41, 1.49, ... ]    1:  [ [ 1.34, 1 ]
     1:  [1, 1, 1, ...]                    [ 1.41, 1 ]
         .                                 [ 1.49, 1 ]
                                           ...

         r 1 1 v b 19 <RET>                M-2 v p v t   s 3

Now we compute ‘trn(A) * y’ and ‘trn(A) * A’ and divide.

     1:  [33.36554, 13.613]    2:  [33.36554, 13.613]
         .                     1:  [ [ 98.0003, 41.63 ]
                                     [  41.63,   19   ] ]
                                   .

      v t r 2 *                    r 3 v t r 3 *

(Hey, those numbers look familiar!)

     1:  [0.52141679, -0.425978]
         .

         /

   Since we were solving equations of the form ‘m*x + b*1 = y’, these
numbers should be ‘m’ and ‘b’, respectively.  Sure enough, they agree
exactly with the result computed using ‘V M’ and ‘V R’!

   The moral of this story: ‘V M’ and ‘V R’ will probably solve your
problem, but there is often an easier way using the higher-level
arithmetic functions!

   In fact, there is a built-in ‘a F’ command that does least-squares
fits.  *Note Curve Fitting::.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 3,  Next: List Answer 4,  Prev: List Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.21 List Tutorial Exercise 3
-------------------------------

Move to one end of the list and press ‘C-@’ (or ‘C-<SPC>’ or whatever)
to set the mark, then move to the other end of the list and type
‘C-x * g’.

     1:  [2.3, 6, 22, 15.1, 7, 15, 14, 7.5, 2.5]
         .

   To make things interesting, let’s assume we don’t know at a glance
how many numbers are in this list.  Then we could type:

     2:  [2.3, 6, 22, ... ]     2:  [2.3, 6, 22, ... ]
     1:  [2.3, 6, 22, ... ]     1:  126356422.5
         .                          .

         <RET>                        V R *

     2:  126356422.5            2:  126356422.5     1:  7.94652913734
     1:  [2.3, 6, 22, ... ]     1:  9                   .
         .                          .

         <TAB>                        v l                 I ^

(The ‘I ^’ command computes the Nth root of a number.  You could also
type ‘& ^’ to take the reciprocal of 9 and then raise the number to that
power.)


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 4,  Next: List Answer 5,  Prev: List Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.22 List Tutorial Exercise 4
-------------------------------

A number ‘j’ is a divisor of ‘n’ if ‘n % j = 0’.  The first step is to
get a vector that identifies the divisors.

     2:  30                  2:  [0, 0, 0, 2, ...]    1:  [1, 1, 1, 0, ...]
     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, ...]   1:  0                        .
         .                       .

      30 <RET> v x 30 <RET>   s 1    V M %  0                 V M a =  s 2

This vector has 1’s marking divisors of 30 and 0’s marking non-divisors.

   The zeroth divisor function is just the total number of divisors.
The first divisor function is the sum of the divisors.

     1:  8      3:  8                    2:  8                    2:  8
                2:  [1, 2, 3, 4, ...]    1:  [1, 2, 3, 0, ...]    1:  72
                1:  [1, 1, 1, 0, ...]        .                        .
                    .

        V R +       r 1 r 2                  V M *                  V R +

Once again, the last two steps just compute a dot product for which a
simple ‘*’ would have worked equally well.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 5,  Next: List Answer 6,  Prev: List Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.23 List Tutorial Exercise 5
-------------------------------

The obvious first step is to obtain the list of factors with ‘k f’.
This list will always be in sorted order, so if there are duplicates
they will be right next to each other.  A suitable method is to compare
the list with a copy of itself shifted over by one.

     1:  [3, 7, 7, 7, 19]   2:  [3, 7, 7, 7, 19]     2:  [3, 7, 7, 7, 19, 0]
         .                  1:  [3, 7, 7, 7, 19, 0]  1:  [0, 3, 7, 7, 7, 19]
                                .                        .

         19551 k f              <RET> 0 |                  <TAB> 0 <TAB> |

     1:  [0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0]   1:  2          1:  0
         .                        .              .

         V M a =                  V R +          0 a =

Note that we have to arrange for both vectors to have the same length so
that the mapping operation works; no prime factor will ever be zero, so
adding zeros on the left and right is safe.  From then on the job is
pretty straightforward.

   Incidentally, Calc provides the “Möbius μ” function which is zero if
and only if its argument is square-free.  It would be a much more
convenient way to do the above test in practice.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 6,  Next: List Answer 7,  Prev: List Answer 5,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.24 List Tutorial Exercise 6
-------------------------------

First use ‘v x 6 <RET>’ to get a list of integers, then ‘V M v x’ to get
a list of lists of integers!


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 7,  Next: List Answer 8,  Prev: List Answer 6,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.25 List Tutorial Exercise 7
-------------------------------

Here’s one solution.  First, compute the triangular list from the
previous exercise and type ‘1 -’ to subtract one from all the elements.

     1:  [ [0],
           [0, 1],
           [0, 1, 2],
           ...

         1 -

   The numbers down the lefthand edge of the list we desire are called
the “triangular numbers” (now you know why!).  The ‘n’th triangular
number is the sum of the integers from 1 to ‘n’, and can be computed
directly by the formula ‘n * (n+1) / 2’.

     2:  [ [0], [0, 1], ... ]    2:  [ [0], [0, 1], ... ]
     1:  [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5]      1:  [0, 1, 3, 6, 10, 15]
         .                           .

         v x 6 <RET> 1 -               V M ' $ ($+1)/2 <RET>

Adding this list to the above list of lists produces the desired result:

     1:  [ [0],
           [1, 2],
           [3, 4, 5],
           [6, 7, 8, 9],
           [10, 11, 12, 13, 14],
           [15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20] ]
           .

           V M +

   If we did not know the formula for triangular numbers, we could have
computed them using a ‘V U +’ command.  We could also have gotten them
the hard way by mapping a reduction across the original triangular list.

     2:  [ [0], [0, 1], ... ]    2:  [ [0], [0, 1], ... ]
     1:  [ [0], [0, 1], ... ]    1:  [0, 1, 3, 6, 10, 15]
         .                           .

         <RET>                         V M V R +

(This means “map a ‘V R +’ command across the vector,” and since each
element of the main vector is itself a small vector, ‘V R +’ computes
the sum of its elements.)


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 8,  Next: List Answer 9,  Prev: List Answer 7,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.26 List Tutorial Exercise 8
-------------------------------

The first step is to build a list of values of ‘x’.

     1:  [1, 2, 3, ..., 21]  1:  [0, 1, 2, ..., 20]  1:  [0, 0.25, 0.5, ..., 5]
         .                       .                       .

         v x 21 <RET>              1 -                     4 /  s 1

   Next, we compute the Bessel function values.

     1:  [0., 0.124, 0.242, ..., -0.328]
         .

         V M ' besJ(1,$) <RET>

(Another way to do this would be ‘1 <TAB> V M f j’.)

   A way to isolate the maximum value is to compute the maximum using ‘V
R X’, then compare all the Bessel values with that maximum.

     2:  [0., 0.124, 0.242, ... ]   1:  [0, 0, 0, ... ]    2:  [0, 0, 0, ... ]
     1:  0.5801562                      .                  1:  1
         .                                                     .

         <RET> V R X                      V M a =                <RET> V R +    <DEL>

It’s a good idea to verify, as in the last step above, that only one
value is equal to the maximum.  (After all, a plot of ‘sin(x)’ might
have many points all equal to the maximum value, 1.)

   The vector we have now has a single 1 in the position that indicates
the maximum value of ‘x’.  Now it is a simple matter to convert this
back into the corresponding value itself.

     2:  [0, 0, 0, ... ]         1:  [0, 0., 0., ... ]    1:  1.75
     1:  [0, 0.25, 0.5, ... ]        .                        .
         .

         r 1                         V M *                    V R +

   If ‘a =’ had produced more than one ‘1’ value, this method would have
given the sum of all maximum ‘x’ values; not very useful!  In this case
we could have used ‘v m’ (‘calc-mask-vector’) instead.  This command
deletes all elements of a “data” vector that correspond to zeros in a
“mask” vector, leaving us with, in this example, a vector of maximum ‘x’
values.

   The built-in ‘a X’ command maximizes a function using more efficient
methods.  Just for illustration, let’s use ‘a X’ to maximize ‘besJ(1,x)’
over this same interval.

     2:  besJ(1, x)                 1:  [1.84115, 0.581865]
     1:  [0 .. 5]                       .
         .

     ' besJ(1,x), [0..5] <RET>            a X x <RET>

The output from ‘a X’ is a vector containing the value of ‘x’ that
maximizes the function, and the function’s value at that maximum.  As
you can see, our simple search got quite close to the right answer.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 9,  Next: List Answer 10,  Prev: List Answer 8,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.27 List Tutorial Exercise 9
-------------------------------

Step one is to convert our integer into vector notation.

     1:  25129925999           3:  25129925999
         .                     2:  10
                               1:  [11, 10, 9, ..., 1, 0]
                                   .

         25129925999 <RET>           10 <RET> 12 <RET> v x 12 <RET> -

     1:  25129925999              1:  [0, 2, 25, 251, 2512, ... ]
     2:  [100000000000, ... ]         .
         .

         V M ^   s 1                  V M \

(Recall, the ‘\’ command computes an integer quotient.)

     1:  [0, 2, 5, 1, 2, 9, 9, 2, 5, 9, 9, 9]
         .

         10 V M %   s 2

   Next we must increment this number.  This involves adding one to the
last digit, plus handling carries.  There is a carry to the left out of
a digit if that digit is a nine and all the digits to the right of it
are nines.

     1:  [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1]   1:  [1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, ... ]
         .                                          .

         9 V M a =                                  v v

     1:  [1, 1, 1, 0, 0, 0, ... ]   1:  [0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 1, 1]
         .                              .

         V U *                          v v 1 |

Accumulating ‘*’ across a vector of ones and zeros will preserve only
the initial run of ones.  These are the carries into all digits except
the rightmost digit.  Concatenating a one on the right takes care of
aligning the carries properly, and also adding one to the rightmost
digit.

     2:  [0, 0, 0, 0, ... ]     1:  [0, 0, 2, 5, 1, 2, 9, 9, 2, 6, 0, 0, 0]
     1:  [0, 0, 2, 5, ... ]         .
         .

         0 r 2 |                    V M +  10 V M %

Here we have concatenated 0 to the _left_ of the original number; this
takes care of shifting the carries by one with respect to the digits
that generated them.

   Finally, we must convert this list back into an integer.

     3:  [0, 0, 2, 5, ... ]        2:  [0, 0, 2, 5, ... ]
     2:  1000000000000             1:  [1000000000000, 100000000000, ... ]
     1:  [100000000000, ... ]          .
         .

         10 <RET> 12 ^  r 1              |

     1:  [0, 0, 20000000000, 5000000000, ... ]    1:  25129926000
         .                                            .

         V M *                                        V R +

Another way to do this final step would be to reduce the formula
‘10 $$ + $’ across the vector of digits.

     1:  [0, 0, 2, 5, ... ]        1:  25129926000
         .                             .

                                       V R ' 10 $$ + $ <RET>


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 10,  Next: List Answer 11,  Prev: List Answer 9,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.28 List Tutorial Exercise 10
--------------------------------

For the list ‘[a, b, c, d]’, the result is ‘((a = b) = c) = d’, which
will compare ‘a’ and ‘b’ to produce a 1 or 0, which is then compared
with ‘c’ to produce another 1 or 0, which is then compared with ‘d’.
This is not at all what Joe wanted.

   Here’s a more correct method:

     1:  [7, 7, 7, 8, 7]      2:  [7, 7, 7, 8, 7]
         .                    1:  7
                                  .

       ' [7,7,7,8,7] <RET>          <RET> v r 1 <RET>

     1:  [1, 1, 1, 0, 1]      1:  0
         .                        .

         V M a =                  V R *


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 11,  Next: List Answer 12,  Prev: List Answer 10,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.29 List Tutorial Exercise 11
--------------------------------

The circle of unit radius consists of those points ‘(x,y)’ for which
‘x^2 + y^2 < 1’.  We start by generating a vector of ‘x^2’ and a vector
of ‘y^2’.

   We can make this go a bit faster by using the ‘v .’ and ‘t .’
commands.

     2:  [2., 2., ..., 2.]          2:  [2., 2., ..., 2.]
     1:  [2., 2., ..., 2.]          1:  [1.16, 1.98, ..., 0.81]
         .                              .

      v . t .  2. v b 100 <RET> <RET>       V M k r

     2:  [2., 2., ..., 2.]          1:  [0.026, 0.96, ..., 0.036]
     1:  [0.026, 0.96, ..., 0.036]  2:  [0.53, 0.81, ..., 0.094]
         .                              .

         1 -  2 V M ^                   <TAB>  V M k r  1 -  2 V M ^

   Now we sum the ‘x^2’ and ‘y^2’ values, compare with 1 to get a vector
of 1/0 truth values, then sum the truth values.

     1:  [0.56, 1.78, ..., 0.13]    1:  [1, 0, ..., 1]    1:  84
         .                              .                     .

         +                              1 V M a <             V R +

The ratio ‘84/100’ should approximate the ratio ‘pi/4’.

     1:  0.84       1:  3.36       2:  3.36       1:  1.0695
         .              .          1:  3.14159        .

         100 /          4 *            P              /

Our estimate, 3.36, is off by about 7%.  We could get a better estimate
by taking more points (say, 1000), but it’s clear that this method is
not very efficient!

   (Naturally, since this example uses random numbers your own answer
will be slightly different from the one shown here!)

   If you typed ‘v .’ and ‘t .’ before, type them again to return to
full-sized display of vectors.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 12,  Next: List Answer 13,  Prev: List Answer 11,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.30 List Tutorial Exercise 12
--------------------------------

This problem can be made a lot easier by taking advantage of some
symmetries.  First of all, after some thought it’s clear that the ‘y’
axis can be ignored altogether.  Just pick a random ‘x’ component for
one end of the match, pick a random direction ‘theta’, and see if ‘x’
and ‘x + cos(theta)’ (which is the ‘x’ coordinate of the other endpoint)
cross a line.  The lines are at integer coordinates, so this happens
when the two numbers surround an integer.

   Since the two endpoints are equivalent, we may as well choose the
leftmost of the two endpoints as ‘x’.  Then ‘theta’ is an angle pointing
to the right, in the range -90 to 90 degrees.  (We could use radians,
but it would feel like cheating to refer to ‘pi/2’ radians while trying
to estimate ‘pi’!)

   In fact, since the field of lines is infinite we can choose the
coordinates 0 and 1 for the lines on either side of the leftmost
endpoint.  The rightmost endpoint will be between 0 and 1 if the match
does not cross a line, or between 1 and 2 if it does.  So: Pick random
‘x’ and ‘theta’, compute ‘x + cos(theta)’, and count how many of the
results are greater than one.  Simple!

   We can make this go a bit faster by using the ‘v .’ and ‘t .’
commands.

     1:  [0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72]    2:  [0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72]
         .                          1:  [78.4, 64.5, ..., -42.9]
                                        .

     v . t . 1. v b 100 <RET>  V M k r    180. v b 100 <RET>  V M k r  90 -

(The next step may be slow, depending on the speed of your computer.)

     2:  [0.52, 0.71, ..., 0.72]    1:  [0.72, 1.14, ..., 1.45]
     1:  [0.20, 0.43, ..., 0.73]        .
         .

         m d  V M C                     +

     1:  [0, 1, ..., 1]       1:  0.64            1:  3.125
         .                        .                   .

         1 V M a >                V R + 100 /         2 <TAB> /

   Let’s try the third method, too.  We’ll use random integers up to one
million.  The ‘k r’ command with an integer argument picks a random
integer.

     2:  [1000000, 1000000, ..., 1000000]   2:  [78489, 527587, ..., 814975]
     1:  [1000000, 1000000, ..., 1000000]   1:  [324014, 358783, ..., 955450]
         .                                      .

         1000000 v b 100 <RET> <RET>                V M k r  <TAB>  V M k r

     1:  [1, 1, ..., 25]      1:  [1, 1, ..., 0]     1:  0.56
         .                        .                      .

         V M k g                  1 V M a =              V R + 100 /

     1:  10.714        1:  3.273
         .                 .

         6 <TAB> /           Q

   For a proof of this property of the GCD function, see section 4.5.2,
exercise 10, of Knuth’s _Art of Computer Programming_, volume II.

   If you typed ‘v .’ and ‘t .’ before, type them again to return to
full-sized display of vectors.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 13,  Next: List Answer 14,  Prev: List Answer 12,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.31 List Tutorial Exercise 13
--------------------------------

First, we put the string on the stack as a vector of ASCII codes.

     1:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]
         .

         "Testing, 1, 2, 3 <RET>

Note that the ‘"’ key, like ‘$’, initiates algebraic entry so there was
no need to type an apostrophe.  Also, Calc didn’t mind that we omitted
the closing ‘"’.  (The same goes for all closing delimiters like ‘)’ and
‘]’ at the end of a formula.

   We’ll show two different approaches here.  In the first, we note that
if the input vector is ‘[a, b, c, d]’, then the hash code is ‘3 (3 (3a +
b) + c) + d = 27a + 9b + 3c + d’.  In other words, it’s a sum of
descending powers of three times the ASCII codes.

     2:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]    2:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]
     1:  16                         1:  [15, 14, 13, ..., 0]
         .                              .

         <RET> v l                        v x 16 <RET> -

     2:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]    1:  1960915098    1:  121
     1:  [14348907, ..., 1]             .                 .
         .

         3 <TAB> V M ^                    *                 511 %

Once again, ‘*’ elegantly summarizes most of the computation.  But
there’s an even more elegant approach: Reduce the formula ‘3 $$ + $’
across the vector.  Recall that this represents a function of two
arguments that computes its first argument times three plus its second
argument.

     1:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]    1:  1960915098
         .                              .

         "Testing, 1, 2, 3 <RET>          V R ' 3$$+$ <RET>

If you did the decimal arithmetic exercise, this will be familiar.
Basically, we’re turning a base-3 vector of digits into an integer,
except that our “digits” are much larger than real digits.

   Instead of typing ‘511 %’ again to reduce the result, we can be
cleverer still and notice that rather than computing a huge integer and
taking the modulo at the end, we can take the modulo at each step
without affecting the result.  While this means there are more
arithmetic operations, the numbers we operate on remain small so the
operations are faster.

     1:  [84, 101, 115, ..., 51]    1:  121
         .                              .

         "Testing, 1, 2, 3 <RET>          V R ' (3$$+$)%511 <RET>

   Why does this work?  Think about a two-step computation:
‘3 (3a + b) + c’.  Taking a result modulo 511 basically means
subtracting off enough 511’s to put the result in the desired range.  So
the result when we take the modulo after every step is,

     3 (3 a + b - 511 m) + c - 511 n

for some suitable integers ‘m’ and ‘n’.  Expanding out by the
distributive law yields

     9 a + 3 b + c - 511*3 m - 511 n

The ‘m’ term in the latter formula is redundant because any contribution
it makes could just as easily be made by the ‘n’ term.  So we can take
it out to get an equivalent formula with ‘n' = 3m + n’,

     9 a + 3 b + c - 511 n'

which is just the formula for taking the modulo only at the end of the
calculation.  Therefore the two methods are essentially the same.

   Later in the tutorial we will encounter “modulo forms”, which
basically automate the idea of reducing every intermediate result modulo
some value M.


File: calc.info,  Node: List Answer 14,  Next: Types Answer 1,  Prev: List Answer 13,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.32 List Tutorial Exercise 14
--------------------------------

We want to use ‘H V U’ to nest a function which adds a random step to an
‘(x,y)’ coordinate.  The function is a bit long, but otherwise the
problem is quite straightforward.

     2:  [0, 0]     1:  [ [    0,       0    ]
     1:  50               [  0.4288, -0.1695 ]
         .                [ -0.4787, -0.9027 ]
                          ...

         [0,0] 50       H V U ' <# + [random(2.0)-1, random(2.0)-1]> <RET>

   Just as the text recommended, we used ‘< >’ nameless function
notation to keep the two ‘random’ calls from being evaluated before
nesting even begins.

   We now have a vector of ‘[x, y]’ sub-vectors, which by Calc’s rules
acts like a matrix.  We can transpose this matrix and unpack to get a
pair of vectors, ‘x’ and ‘y’, suitable for graphing.

     2:  [ 0, 0.4288, -0.4787, ... ]
     1:  [ 0, -0.1696, -0.9027, ... ]
         .

         v t  v u  g f

   Incidentally, because the ‘x’ and ‘y’ are completely independent in
this case, we could have done two separate commands to create our ‘x’
and ‘y’ vectors of numbers directly.

   To make a random walk of unit steps, we note that ‘sincos’ of a
random direction exactly gives us an ‘[x, y]’ step of unit length; in
fact, the new nesting function is even briefer, though we might want to
lower the precision a bit for it.

     2:  [0, 0]     1:  [ [    0,      0    ]
     1:  50               [  0.1318, 0.9912 ]
         .                [ -0.5965, 0.3061 ]
                          ...

         [0,0] 50   m d  p 6 <RET>   H V U ' <# + sincos(random(360.0))> <RET>

   Another ‘v t v u g f’ sequence will graph this new random walk.

   An interesting twist on these random walk functions would be to use
complex numbers instead of 2-vectors to represent points on the plane.
In the first example, we’d use something like ‘random + random*(0,1)’,
and in the second we could use polar complex numbers with random phase
angles.  (This exercise was first suggested in this form by Randal
Schwartz.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 1,  Next: Types Answer 2,  Prev: List Answer 14,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.33 Types Tutorial Exercise 1
--------------------------------

If the number is the square root of ‘pi’ times a rational number, then
its square, divided by ‘pi’, should be a rational number.

     1:  1.26508260337    1:  0.509433962268   1:  2486645810:4881193627
         .                    .                    .

                              2 ^ P /              c F

Technically speaking this is a rational number, but not one that is
likely to have arisen in the original problem.  More likely, it just
happens to be the fraction which most closely represents some irrational
number to within 12 digits.

   But perhaps our result was not quite exact.  Let’s reduce the
precision slightly and try again:

     1:  0.509433962268     1:  27:53
         .                      .

         U p 10 <RET>             c F

Aha!  It’s unlikely that an irrational number would equal a fraction
this simple to within ten digits, so our original number was probably
‘sqrt(27 pi / 53)’.

   Notice that we didn’t need to re-round the number when we reduced the
precision.  Remember, arithmetic operations always round their inputs to
the current precision before they begin.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 2,  Next: Types Answer 3,  Prev: Types Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.34 Types Tutorial Exercise 2
--------------------------------

‘inf / inf = nan’.  Perhaps ‘1’ is the “obvious” answer.  But if
‘17 inf = inf’, then ‘17 inf / inf = inf / inf = 17’, too.

   ‘exp(inf) = inf’.  It’s tempting to say that the exponential of
infinity must be “bigger” than “regular” infinity, but as far as Calc is
concerned all infinities are the same size.  In other words, as ‘x’ goes
to infinity, ‘e^x’ also goes to infinity, but the fact the ‘e^x’ grows
much faster than ‘x’ is not relevant here.

   ‘exp(-inf) = 0’.  Here we have a finite answer even though the input
is infinite.

   ‘sqrt(-inf) = (0, 1) inf’.  Remember that ‘(0, 1)’ represents the
imaginary number ‘i’.  Here’s a derivation: ‘sqrt(-inf) =
sqrt((-1) * inf) = sqrt(-1) * sqrt(inf)’.  The first part is, by
definition, ‘i’; the second is ‘inf’ because, once again, all infinities
are the same size.

   ‘sqrt(uinf) = uinf’.  In fact, we do know something about the
direction because ‘sqrt’ is defined to return a value in the right half
of the complex plane.  But Calc has no notation for this, so it settles
for the conservative answer ‘uinf’.

   ‘abs(uinf) = inf’.  No matter which direction ‘x’ points, ‘abs(x)’
always points along the positive real axis.

   ‘ln(0) = -inf’.  Here we have an infinite answer to a finite input.
As in the ‘1 / 0’ case, Calc will only use infinities here if you have
turned on Infinite mode.  Otherwise, it will treat ‘ln(0)’ as an error.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 3,  Next: Types Answer 4,  Prev: Types Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.35 Types Tutorial Exercise 3
--------------------------------

We can make ‘inf - inf’ be any real number we like, say, ‘a’, just by
claiming that we added ‘a’ to the first infinity but not to the second.
This is just as true for complex values of ‘a’, so ‘nan’ can stand for a
complex number.  (And, similarly, ‘uinf’ can stand for an infinity that
points in any direction in the complex plane, such as ‘(0, 1) inf’).

   In fact, we can multiply the first ‘inf’ by two.  Surely
‘2 inf - inf = inf’, but also ‘2 inf - inf = inf - inf = nan’.  So ‘nan’
can even stand for infinity.  Obviously it’s just as easy to make it
stand for minus infinity as for plus infinity.

   The moral of this story is that “infinity” is a slippery fish indeed,
and Calc tries to handle it by having a very simple model for infinities
(only the direction counts, not the “size”); but Calc is careful to
write ‘nan’ any time this simple model is unable to tell what the true
answer is.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 4,  Next: Types Answer 5,  Prev: Types Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.36 Types Tutorial Exercise 4
--------------------------------

     2:  0@ 47' 26"              1:  0@ 2' 47.411765"
     1:  17                          .
         .

         0@ 47' 26" <RET> 17           /

The average song length is two minutes and 47.4 seconds.

     2:  0@ 2' 47.411765"     1:  0@ 3' 7.411765"    1:  0@ 53' 6.000005"
     1:  0@ 0' 20"                .                      .
         .

         20"                      +                      17 *

The album would be 53 minutes and 6 seconds long.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 5,  Next: Types Answer 6,  Prev: Types Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.37 Types Tutorial Exercise 5
--------------------------------

Let’s suppose it’s January 14, 1991.  The easiest thing to do is to keep
trying 13ths of months until Calc reports a Friday.  We can do this by
manually entering dates, or by using ‘t I’:

     1:  <Wed Feb 13, 1991>    1:  <Wed Mar 13, 1991>   1:  <Sat Apr 13, 1991>
         .                         .                        .

         ' <2/13> <RET>       <DEL>    ' <3/13> <RET>             t I

(Calc assumes the current year if you don’t say otherwise.)

   This is getting tedious—we can keep advancing the date by typing ‘t
I’ over and over again, but let’s automate the job by using vector
mapping.  The ‘t I’ command actually takes a second “how-many-months”
argument, which defaults to one.  This argument is exactly what we want
to map over:

     2:  <Sat Apr 13, 1991>     1:  [<Mon May 13, 1991>, <Thu Jun 13, 1991>,
     1:  [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6]          <Sat Jul 13, 1991>, <Tue Aug 13, 1991>,
         .                           <Fri Sep 13, 1991>, <Sun Oct 13, 1991>]
                                    .

         v x 6 <RET>                  V M t I

Et voilà, September 13, 1991 is a Friday.

     1:  242
         .

     ' <sep 13> - <jan 14> <RET>

And the answer to our original question: 242 days to go.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 6,  Next: Types Answer 7,  Prev: Types Answer 5,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.38 Types Tutorial Exercise 6
--------------------------------

The full rule for leap years is that they occur in every year divisible
by four, except that they don’t occur in years divisible by 100, except
that they _do_ in years divisible by 400.  We could work out the answer
by carefully counting the years divisible by four and the exceptions,
but there is a much simpler way that works even if we don’t know the
leap year rule.

   Let’s assume the present year is 1991.  Years have 365 days, except
that leap years (whenever they occur) have 366 days.  So let’s count the
number of days between now and then, and compare that to the number of
years times 365.  The number of extra days we find must be equal to the
number of leap years there were.

     1:  <Mon Jan 1, 10001>     2:  <Mon Jan 1, 10001>     1:  2925593
         .                      1:  <Tue Jan 1, 1991>          .
                                    .

       ' <jan 1 10001> <RET>         ' <jan 1 1991> <RET>          -

     3:  2925593       2:  2925593     2:  2925593     1:  1943
     2:  10001         1:  8010        1:  2923650         .
     1:  1991              .               .
         .

       10001 <RET> 1991      -               365 *           -

There will be 1943 leap years before the year 10001.  (Assuming, of
course, that the algorithm for computing leap years remains unchanged
for that long.  *Note Date Forms::, for some interesting background
information in that regard.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 7,  Next: Types Answer 8,  Prev: Types Answer 6,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.39 Types Tutorial Exercise 7
--------------------------------

The relative errors must be converted to absolute errors so that ‘+/-’
notation may be used.

     1:  1.              2:  1.
         .               1:  0.2
                             .

         20 <RET> .05 *        4 <RET> .05 *

   Now we simply chug through the formula.

     1:  19.7392088022    1:  394.78 +/- 19.739    1:  6316.5 +/- 706.21
         .                    .                        .

         2 P 2 ^ *            20 p 1 *                 4 p .2 <RET> 2 ^ *

   It turns out the ‘v u’ command will unpack an error form as well as a
vector.  This saves us some retyping of numbers.

     3:  6316.5 +/- 706.21     2:  6316.5 +/- 706.21
     2:  6316.5                1:  0.1118
     1:  706.21                    .
         .

         <RET> v u                   <TAB> /

Thus the volume is 6316 cubic centimeters, within about 11 percent.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 8,  Next: Types Answer 9,  Prev: Types Answer 7,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.40 Types Tutorial Exercise 8
--------------------------------

The first answer is pretty simple: ‘1 / (0 .. 10) = (0.1 .. inf)’.
Since a number in the interval ‘(0 .. 10)’ can get arbitrarily close to
zero, its reciprocal can get arbitrarily large, so the answer is an
interval that effectively means, “any number greater than 0.1” but with
no upper bound.

   The second answer, similarly, is ‘1 / (-10 .. 0) = (-inf .. -0.1)’.

   Calc normally treats division by zero as an error, so that the
formula ‘1 / 0’ is left unsimplified.  Our third problem,
‘1 / [0 .. 10]’, also (potentially) divides by zero because zero is now
a member of the interval.  So Calc leaves this one unevaluated, too.

   If you turn on Infinite mode by pressing ‘m i’, you will instead get
the answer ‘[0.1 .. inf]’, which includes infinity as a possible value.

   The fourth calculation, ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’, has the same problem.
Zero is buried inside the interval, but it’s still a possible value.
It’s not hard to see that the actual result of ‘1 / (-10 .. 10)’ will be
either greater than 0.1, or less than -0.1.  Thus the interval goes from
minus infinity to plus infinity, with a “hole” in it from -0.1 to 0.1.
Calc doesn’t have any way to represent this, so it just reports ‘[-inf
.. inf]’ as the answer.  It may be disappointing to hear “the answer
lies somewhere between minus infinity and plus infinity, inclusive,” but
that’s the best that interval arithmetic can do in this case.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 9,  Next: Types Answer 10,  Prev: Types Answer 8,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.41 Types Tutorial Exercise 9
--------------------------------

     1:  [-3 .. 3]       2:  [-3 .. 3]     2:  [0 .. 9]
         .               1:  [0 .. 9]      1:  [-9 .. 9]
                             .                 .

         [ 3 n .. 3 ]        <RET> 2 ^           <TAB> <RET> *

In the first case the result says, “if a number is between -3 and 3, its
square is between 0 and 9.” The second case says, “the product of two
numbers each between -3 and 3 is between -9 and 9.”

   An interval form is not a number; it is a symbol that can stand for
many different numbers.  Two identical-looking interval forms can stand
for different numbers.

   The same issue arises when you try to square an error form.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 10,  Next: Types Answer 11,  Prev: Types Answer 9,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.42 Types Tutorial Exercise 10
---------------------------------

Testing the first number, we might arbitrarily choose 17 for ‘x’.

     1:  17 mod 811749613   2:  17 mod 811749613   1:  533694123 mod 811749613
         .                      811749612              .
                                .

         17 M 811749613 <RET>     811749612              ^

Since 533694123 is (considerably) different from 1, the number 811749613
must not be prime.

   It’s awkward to type the number in twice as we did above.  There are
various ways to avoid this, and algebraic entry is one.  In fact, using
a vector mapping operation we can perform several tests at once.  Let’s
use this method to test the second number.

     2:  [17, 42, 100000]               1:  [1 mod 15485863, 1 mod ... ]
     1:  15485863                           .
         .

      [17 42 100000] 15485863 <RET>           V M ' ($$ mod $)^($-1) <RET>

The result is three ones (modulo ‘n’), so it’s very probable that
15485863 is prime.  (In fact, this number is the millionth prime.)

   Note that the functions ‘($$^($-1)) mod $’ or ‘$$^($-1) % $’ would
have been hopelessly inefficient, since they would have calculated the
power using full integer arithmetic.

   Calc has a ‘k p’ command that does primality testing.  For small
numbers it does an exact test; for large numbers it uses a variant of
the Fermat test we used here.  You can use ‘k p’ repeatedly to prove
that a large integer is prime with any desired probability.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 11,  Next: Types Answer 12,  Prev: Types Answer 10,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.43 Types Tutorial Exercise 11
---------------------------------

There are several ways to insert a calculated number into an HMS form.
One way to convert a number of seconds to an HMS form is simply to
multiply the number by an HMS form representing one second:

     1:  31415926.5359     2:  31415926.5359     1:  8726@ 38' 46.5359"
         .                 1:  0@ 0' 1"              .
                               .

         P 1e7 *               0@ 0' 1"              *

     2:  8726@ 38' 46.5359"             1:  6@ 6' 2.5359" mod 24@ 0' 0"
     1:  15@ 27' 16" mod 24@ 0' 0"          .
         .

         x time <RET>                         +

It will be just after six in the morning.

   The algebraic ‘hms’ function can also be used to build an HMS form:

     1:  hms(0, 0, 10000000. pi)       1:  8726@ 38' 46.5359"
         .                                 .

       ' hms(0, 0, 1e7 pi) <RET>             =

The ‘=’ key is necessary to evaluate the symbol ‘pi’ to the actual
number 3.14159...


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 12,  Next: Types Answer 13,  Prev: Types Answer 11,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.44 Types Tutorial Exercise 12
---------------------------------

As we recall, there are 17 songs of about 2 minutes and 47 seconds each.

     2:  0@ 2' 47"                    1:  [0@ 3' 7" .. 0@ 3' 47"]
     1:  [0@ 0' 20" .. 0@ 1' 0"]          .
         .

         [ 0@ 20" .. 0@ 1' ]              +

     1:  [0@ 52' 59." .. 1@ 4' 19."]
         .

         17 *

No matter how long it is, the album will fit nicely on one CD.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 13,  Next: Types Answer 14,  Prev: Types Answer 12,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.45 Types Tutorial Exercise 13
---------------------------------

Type ‘' 1 yr <RET> u c s <RET>’.  The answer is 31557600 seconds.


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 14,  Next: Types Answer 15,  Prev: Types Answer 13,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.46 Types Tutorial Exercise 14
---------------------------------

How long will it take for a signal to get from one end of the computer
to the other?

     1:  m / c         1:  3.3356 ns
         .                 .

      ' 1 m / c <RET>        u c ns <RET>

(Recall, ‘c’ is a “unit” corresponding to the speed of light.)

     1:  3.3356 ns     1:  0.81356
     2:  4.1 ns            .
         .

       ' 4.1 ns <RET>        /

Thus a signal could take up to 81 percent of a clock cycle just to go
from one place to another inside the computer, assuming the signal could
actually attain the full speed of light.  Pretty tight!


File: calc.info,  Node: Types Answer 15,  Next: Algebra Answer 1,  Prev: Types Answer 14,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.47 Types Tutorial Exercise 15
---------------------------------

The speed limit is 55 miles per hour on most highways.  We want to find
the ratio of Sam’s speed to the US speed limit.

     1:  55 mph         2:  55 mph           3:  11 hr mph / yd
         .              1:  5 yd / hr            .
                            .

       ' 55 mph <RET>       ' 5 yd/hr <RET>          /

   The ‘u s’ command cancels out these units to get a plain number.  Now
we take the logarithm base two to find the final answer, assuming that
each successive pill doubles his speed.

     1:  19360.       2:  19360.       1:  14.24
         .            1:  2                .
                          .

         u s              2                B

Thus Sam can take up to 14 pills without a worry.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra Answer 1,  Next: Algebra Answer 2,  Prev: Types Answer 15,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.48 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 1
----------------------------------

The result ‘sqrt(x)^2’ is simplified back to ‘x’ by the Calculator, but
‘sqrt(x^2)’ is not.  (Consider what happens if ‘x = -4’.)  If ‘x’ is
real, this formula could be simplified to ‘abs(x)’, but for general
complex arguments even that is not safe.  (*Note Declarations::, for a
way to tell Calc that ‘x’ is known to be real.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra Answer 2,  Next: Algebra Answer 3,  Prev: Algebra Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.49 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 2
----------------------------------

Suppose our roots are ‘[a, b, c]’.  We want a polynomial which is zero
when ‘x’ is any of these values.  The trivial polynomial ‘x-a’ is zero
when ‘x=a’, so the product ‘(x-a)(x-b)(x-c)’ will do the job.  We can
use ‘a c x’ to write this in a more familiar form.

     1:  34 x - 24 x^3          1:  [1.19023, -1.19023, 0]
         .                          .

         r 2                        a P x <RET>

     1:  [x - 1.19023, x + 1.19023, x]     1:  x*(x + 1.19023) (x - 1.19023)
         .                                     .

         V M ' x-$ <RET>                         V R *

     1:  x^3 - 1.41666 x        1:  34 x - 24 x^3
         .                          .

         a c x <RET>                  24 n *  a x

Sure enough, our answer (multiplied by a suitable constant) is the same
as the original polynomial.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra Answer 3,  Next: Algebra Answer 4,  Prev: Algebra Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.50 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 3
----------------------------------

     1:  x sin(pi x)         1:  sin(pi x) / pi^2 - x cos(pi x) / pi
         .                       .

       ' x sin(pi x) <RET>   m r   a i x <RET>

     1:  [y, 1]
     2:  sin(pi x) / pi^2 - x cos(pi x) / pi
         .

       ' [y,1] <RET> <TAB>

     1:  [sin(pi y) / pi^2 - y cos(pi y) / pi, 1 / pi]
         .

         V M $ <RET>

     1:  sin(pi y) / pi^2 - y cos(pi y) / pi - 1 / pi
         .

         V R -

     1:  sin(3.14159 y) / 9.8696 - y cos(3.14159 y) / 3.14159 - 0.3183
         .

         =

     1:  [0., -0.95493, 0.63662, -1.5915, 1.2732]
         .

         v x 5 <RET>  <TAB>  V M $ <RET>


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra Answer 4,  Next: Rewrites Answer 1,  Prev: Algebra Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.51 Algebra Tutorial Exercise 4
----------------------------------

The hard part is that ‘V R +’ is no longer sufficient to add up all the
contributions from the slices, since the slices have varying
coefficients.  So first we must come up with a vector of these
coefficients.  Here’s one way:

     2:  -1                 2:  3                    1:  [4, 2, ..., 4]
     1:  [1, 2, ..., 9]     1:  [-1, 1, ..., -1]         .
         .                      .

         1 n v x 9 <RET>          V M ^  3 <TAB>             -

     1:  [4, 2, ..., 4, 1]      1:  [1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1]
         .                          .

         1 |                        1 <TAB> |

Now we compute the function values.  Note that for this method we need
eleven values, including both endpoints of the desired interval.

     2:  [1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1]
     1:  [1, 1.1, 1.2,  ...  , 1.8, 1.9, 2.]
         .

      11 <RET> 1 <RET> .1 <RET>  C-u v x

     2:  [1, 4, 2, ..., 4, 1]
     1:  [0., 0.084941, 0.16993, ... ]
         .

         ' sin(x) ln(x) <RET>   m r  p 5 <RET>   V M $ <RET>

Once again this calls for ‘V M * V R +’; a simple ‘*’ does the same
thing.

     1:  11.22      1:  1.122      1:  0.374
         .              .              .

         *              .1 *           3 /

Wow!  That’s even better than the result from the Taylor series method.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 1,  Next: Rewrites Answer 2,  Prev: Algebra Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.52 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 1
-----------------------------------

We’ll use Big mode to make the formulas more readable.

                                                ___
                                               V 2  + 2
     1:  (2 + sqrt(2)) / (1 + sqrt(2))     1:  ---------
         .                                      ___
                                               V 2  + 1

                                               .

       ' (2+sqrt(2)) / (1+sqrt(2)) <RET>         d B

Multiplying by the conjugate helps because ‘(a+b) (a-b) = a^2 - b^2’.

               ___    ___
     1:  (2 + V 2 ) (V 2  - 1)
         .

       a r a/(b+c) := a*(b-c) / (b^2-c^2) <RET>

          ___
     1:  V 2
         .

       a r a*(b+c) := a*b + a*c

(We could have used ‘a x’ instead of a rewrite rule for the second
step.)

   The multiply-by-conjugate rule turns out to be useful in many
different circumstances, such as when the denominator involves sines and
cosines or the imaginary constant ‘i’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 2,  Next: Rewrites Answer 3,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.53 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 2
-----------------------------------

Here is the rule set:

     [ fib(n) := fib(n, 1, 1) :: integer(n) :: n >= 1,
       fib(1, x, y) := x,
       fib(n, x, y) := fib(n-1, y, x+y) ]

The first rule turns a one-argument ‘fib’ that people like to write into
a three-argument ‘fib’ that makes computation easier.  The second rule
converts back from three-argument form once the computation is done.
The third rule does the computation itself.  It basically says that if
‘x’ and ‘y’ are two consecutive Fibonacci numbers, then ‘y’ and ‘x+y’
are the next (overlapping) pair of Fibonacci numbers.

   Notice that because the number ‘n’ was “validated” by the conditions
on the first rule, there is no need to put conditions on the other rules
because the rule set would never get that far unless the input were
valid.  That further speeds computation, since no extra conditions need
to be checked at every step.

   Actually, a user with a nasty sense of humor could enter a bad
three-argument ‘fib’ call directly, say, ‘fib(0, 1, 1)’, which would get
the rules into an infinite loop.  One thing that would help keep this
from happening by accident would be to use something like ‘ZzFib’
instead of ‘fib’ as the name of the three-argument function.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 3,  Next: Rewrites Answer 4,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.54 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 3
-----------------------------------

He got an infinite loop.  First, Calc did as expected and rewrote
‘2 + 3 x’ to ‘f(2, 3, x)’.  Then it looked for ways to apply the rule
again, and found that ‘f(2, 3, x)’ looks like ‘a + b x’ with ‘a = 0’ and
‘b = 1’, so it rewrote to ‘f(0, 1, f(2, 3, x))’.  It then wrapped
another ‘f(0, 1, ...)’ around that, and so on, ad infinitum.  Joe should
have used ‘M-1 a r’ to make sure the rule applied only once.

   (Actually, even the first step didn’t work as he expected.  What Calc
really gives for ‘M-1 a r’ in this situation is ‘f(3 x, 1, 2)’, treating
2 as the “variable,” and ‘3 x’ as a constant being added to it.  While
this may seem odd, it’s just as valid a solution as the “obvious” one.
One way to fix this would be to add the condition ‘:: variable(x)’ to
the rule, to make sure the thing that matches ‘x’ is indeed a variable,
or to change ‘x’ to ‘quote(x)’ on the lefthand side, so that the rule
matches the actual variable ‘x’ rather than letting ‘x’ stand for
something else.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 4,  Next: Rewrites Answer 5,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.55 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 4
-----------------------------------

Here is a suitable set of rules to solve the first part of the problem:

     [ seq(n, c) := seq(n/2,  c+1) :: n%2 = 0,
       seq(n, c) := seq(3n+1, c+1) :: n%2 = 1 :: n > 1 ]

   Given the initial formula ‘seq(6, 0)’, application of these rules
produces the following sequence of formulas:

     seq( 3, 1)
     seq(10, 2)
     seq( 5, 3)
     seq(16, 4)
     seq( 8, 5)
     seq( 4, 6)
     seq( 2, 7)
     seq( 1, 8)

whereupon neither of the rules match, and rewriting stops.

   We can pretty this up a bit with a couple more rules:

     [ seq(n) := seq(n, 0),
       seq(1, c) := c,
       ... ]

Now, given ‘seq(6)’ as the starting configuration, we get 8 as the
result.

   The change to return a vector is quite simple:

     [ seq(n) := seq(n, []) :: integer(n) :: n > 0,
       seq(1, v) := v | 1,
       seq(n, v) := seq(n/2,  v | n) :: n%2 = 0,
       seq(n, v) := seq(3n+1, v | n) :: n%2 = 1 ]

Given ‘seq(6)’, the result is ‘[6, 3, 10, 5, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1]’.

   Notice that the ‘n > 1’ guard is no longer necessary on the last rule
since the ‘n = 1’ case is now detected by another rule.  But a guard has
been added to the initial rule to make sure the initial value is
suitable before the computation begins.

   While still a good idea, this guard is not as vitally important as it
was for the ‘fib’ function, since calling, say, ‘seq(x, [])’ will not
get into an infinite loop.  Calc will not be able to prove the symbol
‘x’ is either even or odd, so none of the rules will apply and the
rewrites will stop right away.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 5,  Next: Rewrites Answer 6,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.56 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 5
-----------------------------------

If ‘x’ is the sum ‘a + b’, then ‘nterms(X)’ must be ‘nterms(A)’ plus
‘nterms(B)’.  If ‘x’ is not a sum, then ‘nterms(X)’ = 1.

     [ nterms(a + b) := nterms(a) + nterms(b),
       nterms(x)     := 1 ]

Here we have taken advantage of the fact that earlier rules always match
before later rules; ‘nterms(x)’ will only be tried if we already know
that ‘x’ is not a sum.


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrites Answer 6,  Next: Programming Answer 1,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 5,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.57 Rewrites Tutorial Exercise 6
-----------------------------------

Here is a rule set that will do the job:

     [ a*(b + c) := a*b + a*c,
       opt(a) O(x^n) + opt(b) O(x^m) := O(x^n) :: n <= m
          :: constant(a) :: constant(b),
       opt(a) O(x^n) + opt(b) x^m := O(x^n) :: n <= m
          :: constant(a) :: constant(b),
       a O(x^n) := O(x^n) :: constant(a),
       x^opt(m) O(x^n) := O(x^(n+m)),
       O(x^n) O(x^m) := O(x^(n+m)) ]

   If we really want the ‘+’ and ‘*’ keys to operate naturally on power
series, we should put these rules in ‘EvalRules’.  For testing purposes,
it is better to put them in a different variable, say, ‘O’, first.

   The first rule just expands products of sums so that the rest of the
rules can assume they have an expanded-out polynomial to work with.
Note that this rule does not mention ‘O’ at all, so it will apply to any
product-of-sum it encounters—this rule may surprise you if you put it
into ‘EvalRules’!

   In the second rule, the sum of two O’s is changed to the smaller O.
The optional constant coefficients are there mostly so that ‘O(x^2) -
O(x^3)’ and ‘O(x^3) - O(x^2)’ are handled as well as ‘O(x^2) + O(x^3)’.

   The third rule absorbs higher powers of ‘x’ into O’s.

   The fourth rule says that a constant times a negligible quantity is
still negligible.  (This rule will also match ‘O(x^3) / 4’, with ‘a =
1/4’.)

   The fifth rule rewrites, for example, ‘x^2 O(x^3)’ to ‘O(x^5)’.  (It
is easy to see that if one of these forms is negligible, the other is,
too.)  Notice the ‘x^opt(m)’ to pick up terms like ‘x O(x^3)’.  Optional
powers will match ‘x’ as ‘x^1’ but not 1 as ‘x^0’.  This turns out to be
exactly what we want here.

   The sixth rule is the corresponding rule for products of two O’s.

   Another way to solve this problem would be to create a new “data
type” that represents truncated power series.  We might represent these
as function calls ‘series(COEFS, X)’ where COEFS is a vector of
coefficients for ‘x^0’, ‘x^1’, ‘x^2’, and so on.  Rules would exist for
sums and products of such ‘series’ objects, and as an optional
convenience could also know how to combine a ‘series’ object with a
normal polynomial.  (With this, and with a rule that rewrites ‘O(x^n)’
to the equivalent ‘series’ form, you could still enter power series in
exactly the same notation as before.)  Operations on such objects would
probably be more efficient, although the objects would be a bit harder
to read.

   Some other symbolic math programs provide a power series data type
similar to this.  Mathematica, for example, has an object that looks
like ‘PowerSeries[X, X0, COEFS, NMIN, NMAX, DEN]’, where X0 is the point
about which the power series is taken (we’ve been assuming this was
always zero), and NMIN, NMAX, and DEN allow pseudo-power-series with
fractional or negative powers.  Also, the ‘PowerSeries’ objects have a
special display format that makes them look like ‘2 x^2 + O(x^4)’ when
they are printed out.  (*Note Compositions::, for a way to do this in
Calc, although for something as involved as this it would probably be
better to write the formatting routine in Lisp.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 1,  Next: Programming Answer 2,  Prev: Rewrites Answer 6,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.58 Programming Tutorial Exercise 1
--------------------------------------

Just enter the formula ‘ninteg(sin(t)/t, t, 0, x)’, type ‘Z F’, and
answer the questions.  Since this formula contains two variables, the
default argument list will be ‘(t x)’.  We want to change this to ‘(x)’
since ‘t’ is really a dummy variable to be used within ‘ninteg’.

   The exact keystrokes are ‘Z F s Si <RET> <RET> C-b C-b <DEL> <DEL>
<RET> y’.  (The ‘C-b C-b <DEL> <DEL>’ are what fix the argument list.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 2,  Next: Programming Answer 3,  Prev: Programming Answer 1,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.59 Programming Tutorial Exercise 2
--------------------------------------

One way is to move the number to the top of the stack, operate on it,
then move it back: ‘C-x ( M-<TAB> n M-<TAB> M-<TAB> C-x )’.

   Another way is to negate the top three stack entries, then negate
again the top two stack entries: ‘C-x ( M-3 n M-2 n C-x )’.

   Finally, it turns out that a negative prefix argument causes a
command like ‘n’ to operate on the specified stack entry only, which is
just what we want: ‘C-x ( M-- 3 n C-x )’.

   Just for kicks, let’s also do it algebraically:
‘C-x ( ' -$$$, $$, $ <RET> C-x )’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 3,  Next: Programming Answer 4,  Prev: Programming Answer 2,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.60 Programming Tutorial Exercise 3
--------------------------------------

Each of these functions can be computed using the stack, or using
algebraic entry, whichever way you prefer:

Computing ‘sin(x) / x’:

   Using the stack: ‘C-x ( <RET> S <TAB> / C-x )’.

   Using algebraic entry: ‘C-x ( ' sin($)/$ <RET> C-x )’.

Computing the logarithm:

   Using the stack: ‘C-x ( <TAB> B C-x )’

   Using algebraic entry: ‘C-x ( ' log($,$$) <RET> C-x )’.

Computing the vector of integers:

   Using the stack: ‘C-x ( 1 <RET> 1 C-u v x C-x )’.  (Recall that ‘C-u
v x’ takes the vector size, starting value, and increment from the
stack.)

   Alternatively: ‘C-x ( ~ v x C-x )’.  (The ‘~’ key pops a number from
the stack and uses it as the prefix argument for the next command.)

   Using algebraic entry: ‘C-x ( ' index($) <RET> C-x )’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 4,  Next: Programming Answer 5,  Prev: Programming Answer 3,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.61 Programming Tutorial Exercise 4
--------------------------------------

Here’s one way: ‘C-x ( <RET> V R + <TAB> v l / C-x )’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 5,  Next: Programming Answer 6,  Prev: Programming Answer 4,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.62 Programming Tutorial Exercise 5
--------------------------------------

     2:  1              1:  1.61803398502         2:  1.61803398502
     1:  20                 .                     1:  1.61803398875
         .                                            .

        1 <RET> 20         Z < & 1 + Z >                I H P

This answer is quite accurate.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 6,  Next: Programming Answer 7,  Prev: Programming Answer 5,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.63 Programming Tutorial Exercise 6
--------------------------------------

Here is the matrix:

     [ [ 0, 1 ]   * [a, b] = [b, a + b]
       [ 1, 1 ] ]

Thus ‘[0, 1; 1, 1]^n * [1, 1]’ computes Fibonacci numbers ‘n+1’ and
‘n+2’.  Here’s one program that does the job:

     C-x ( ' [0, 1; 1, 1] ^ ($-1) * [1, 1] <RET> v u <DEL> C-x )

This program is quite efficient because Calc knows how to raise a matrix
(or other value) to the power ‘n’ in only ‘log(n,2)’ steps.  For
example, this program can compute the 1000th Fibonacci number (a
209-digit integer!) in about 10 steps; even though the ‘Z < ... Z >’
solution had much simpler steps, it would have required so many steps
that it would not have been practical.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 7,  Next: Programming Answer 8,  Prev: Programming Answer 6,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.64 Programming Tutorial Exercise 7
--------------------------------------

The trick here is to compute the harmonic numbers differently, so that
the loop counter itself accumulates the sum of reciprocals.  We use a
separate variable to hold the integer counter.

     1:  1          2:  1       1:  .
         .          1:  4
                        .

         1 t 1       1 <RET> 4      Z ( t 2 r 1 1 + s 1 & Z )

The body of the loop goes as follows: First save the harmonic sum so far
in variable 2.  Then delete it from the stack; the for loop itself will
take care of remembering it for us.  Next, recall the count from
variable 1, add one to it, and feed its reciprocal to the for loop to
use as the step value.  The for loop will increase the “loop counter” by
that amount and keep going until the loop counter exceeds 4.

     2:  31                  3:  31
     1:  3.99498713092       2:  3.99498713092
         .                   1:  4.02724519544
                                 .

         r 1 r 2                 <RET> 31 & +

   Thus we find that the 30th harmonic number is 3.99, and the 31st
harmonic number is 4.02.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 8,  Next: Programming Answer 9,  Prev: Programming Answer 7,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.65 Programming Tutorial Exercise 8
--------------------------------------

The first step is to compute the derivative ‘f'(x)’ and thus the formula
‘x - f(x)/f'(x)’.

   (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form
below.  You can use ‘C-x * m’ to load it from there.  While you are
entering a ‘Z ` Z '’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes
without executing them.  In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc
actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of
illustration.)

     2:  sin(cos(x)) - 0.5            3:  4.5
     1:  4.5                          2:  sin(cos(x)) - 0.5
         .                            1:  -(sin(x) cos(cos(x)))
                                          .

     ' sin(cos(x))-0.5 <RET> 4.5  m r  C-x ( Z `  <TAB> <RET> a d x <RET>

     2:  4.5
     1:  x + (sin(cos(x)) - 0.5) / sin(x) cos(cos(x))
         .

         /  ' x <RET> <TAB> -   t 1

   Now, we enter the loop.  We’ll use a repeat loop with a 20-repetition
limit just in case the method fails to converge for some reason.
(Normally, the ‘Z /’ command will stop the loop before all 20
repetitions are done.)

     1:  4.5         3:  4.5                     2:  4.5
         .           2:  x + (sin(cos(x)) ...    1:  5.24196456928
                     1:  4.5                         .
                         .

       20 Z <          <RET> r 1 <TAB>                 s l x <RET>

   This is the new guess for ‘x’.  Now we compare it with the old one to
see if we’ve converged.

     3:  5.24196     2:  5.24196     1:  5.24196     1:  5.26345856348
     2:  5.24196     1:  0               .               .
     1:  4.5             .
         .

       <RET> M-<TAB>         a =             Z /             Z > Z ' C-x )

   The loop converges in just a few steps to this value.  To check the
result, we can simply substitute it back into the equation.

     2:  5.26345856348
     1:  0.499999999997
         .

      <RET> ' sin(cos($)) <RET>

   Let’s test the new definition again:

     2:  x^2 - 9           1:  3.
     1:  1                     .
         .

       ' x^2-9 <RET> 1           X

   Once again, here’s the full Newton’s Method definition:

     C-x ( Z `  <TAB> <RET> a d x <RET>  /  ' x <RET> <TAB> -  t 1
                20 Z <  <RET> r 1 <TAB>  s l x <RET>
                        <RET> M-<TAB>  a =  Z /
                   Z >
           Z '
     C-x )

   It turns out that Calc has a built-in command for applying a formula
repeatedly until it converges to a number.  *Note Nesting and Fixed
Points::, to see how to use it.

   Also, of course, ‘a R’ is a built-in command that uses Newton’s
method (among others) to look for numerical solutions to any equation.
*Note Root Finding::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 9,  Next: Programming Answer 10,  Prev: Programming Answer 8,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.66 Programming Tutorial Exercise 9
--------------------------------------

The first step is to adjust ‘z’ to be greater than 5.  A simple “for”
loop will do the job here.  If ‘z’ is less than 5, we reduce the problem
using ‘psi(z) = psi(z+1) - 1/z’.  We go on to compute ‘psi(z+1)’, and
remember to add back a factor of ‘-1/z’ when we’re done.  This step is
repeated until ‘z > 5’.

   (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form
below.  You can use ‘C-x * m’ to load it from there.  While you are
entering a ‘Z ` Z '’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes
without executing them.  In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc
actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of
illustration.)

     1:  1.             1:  1.
         .                  .

      1.0 <RET>       C-x ( Z `  s 1  0 t 2

   Here, variable 1 holds ‘z’ and variable 2 holds the adjustment
factor.  If ‘z < 5’, we use a loop to increase it.

   (By the way, we started with ‘1.0’ instead of the integer 1 because
otherwise the calculation below will try to do exact fractional
arithmetic, and will never converge because fractions compare equal only
if they are exactly equal, not just equal to within the current
precision.)

     3:  1.      2:  1.       1:  6.
     2:  1.      1:  1            .
     1:  5           .
         .

       <RET> 5        a <    Z [  5 Z (  & s + 2  1 s + 1  1 Z ) r 1  Z ]

   Now we compute the initial part of the sum: ‘ln(z) - 1/2z’ minus the
adjustment factor.

     2:  1.79175946923      2:  1.7084261359      1:  -0.57490719743
     1:  0.0833333333333    1:  2.28333333333         .
         .                      .

         L  r 1 2 * &           -  r 2                -

   Now we evaluate the series.  We’ll use another “for” loop counting up
the value of ‘2 n’.  (Calc does have a summation command, ‘a +’, but
we’ll use loops just to get more practice with them.)

     3:  -0.5749       3:  -0.5749        4:  -0.5749      2:  -0.5749
     2:  2             2:  1:6            3:  1:6          1:  2.3148e-3
     1:  40            1:  2              2:  2                .
         .                 .              1:  36.
                                              .

        2 <RET> 40        Z ( <RET> k b <TAB>     <RET> r 1 <TAB> ^      * /

     3:  -0.5749       3:  -0.5772      2:  -0.5772     1:  -0.577215664892
     2:  -0.5749       2:  -0.5772      1:  0               .
     1:  2.3148e-3     1:  -0.5749          .
         .                 .

       <TAB> <RET> M-<TAB>       - <RET> M-<TAB>      a =     Z /    2  Z )  Z ' C-x )

   This is the value of ‘- gamma’, with a slight bit of roundoff error.
To get a full 12 digits, let’s use a higher precision:

     2:  -0.577215664892      2:  -0.577215664892
     1:  1.                   1:  -0.577215664901532

         1. <RET>                   p 16 <RET> X

   Here’s the complete sequence of keystrokes:

     C-x ( Z `  s 1  0 t 2
                <RET> 5 a <  Z [  5 Z (  & s + 2  1 s + 1  1 Z ) r 1  Z ]
                L r 1 2 * & - r 2 -
                2 <RET> 40  Z (  <RET> k b <TAB> <RET> r 1 <TAB> ^ * /
                               <TAB> <RET> M-<TAB> - <RET> M-<TAB> a = Z /
                       2  Z )
           Z '
     C-x )


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 10,  Next: Programming Answer 11,  Prev: Programming Answer 9,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.67 Programming Tutorial Exercise 10
---------------------------------------

Taking the derivative of a term of the form ‘x^n’ will produce a term
like ‘n x^(n-1)’.  Taking the derivative of a constant produces zero.
From this it is easy to see that the ‘n’th derivative of a polynomial,
evaluated at ‘x = 0’, will equal the coefficient on the ‘x^n’ term times
‘n!’.

   (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form
below.  You can use ‘C-x * m’ to load it from there.  While you are
entering a ‘Z ` Z '’ body in a macro, Calc simply collects keystrokes
without executing them.  In the following diagrams we’ll pretend Calc
actually executed the keystrokes as you typed them, just for purposes of
illustration.)

     2:  5 x^4 + (x + 1)^2          3:  5 x^4 + (x + 1)^2
     1:  6                          2:  0
         .                          1:  6
                                        .

       ' 5 x^4 + (x+1)^2 <RET> 6        C-x ( Z `  [ ] t 1  0 <TAB>

Variable 1 will accumulate the vector of coefficients.

     2:  0              3:  0                  2:  5 x^4 + ...
     1:  5 x^4 + ...    2:  5 x^4 + ...        1:  1
         .              1:  1                      .
                            .

        Z ( <TAB>         <RET> 0 s l x <RET>            M-<TAB> ! /  s | 1

Note that ‘s | 1’ appends the top-of-stack value to the vector in a
variable; it is completely analogous to ‘s + 1’.  We could have written
instead, ‘r 1 <TAB> | t 1’.

     1:  20 x^3 + 2 x + 2      1:  0         1:  [1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]
         .                         .             .

         a d x <RET>                 1 Z )         <DEL> r 1  Z ' C-x )

   To convert back, a simple method is just to map the coefficients
against a table of powers of ‘x’.

     2:  [1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]    2:  [1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]
     1:  6                        1:  [0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6]
         .                            .

         6 <RET>                        1 + 0 <RET> 1 C-u v x

     2:  [1, 2, 1, 0, 5, 0, 0]    2:  1 + 2 x + x^2 + 5 x^4
     1:  [1, x, x^2, x^3, ... ]       .
         .

         ' x <RET> <TAB> V M ^            *

   Once again, here are the whole polynomial to/from vector programs:

     C-x ( Z `  [ ] t 1  0 <TAB>
                Z (  <TAB> <RET> 0 s l x <RET> M-<TAB> ! /  s | 1
                     a d x <RET>
              1 Z ) r 1
           Z '
     C-x )

     C-x (  1 + 0 <RET> 1 C-u v x ' x <RET> <TAB> V M ^ *  C-x )


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 11,  Next: Programming Answer 12,  Prev: Programming Answer 10,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.68 Programming Tutorial Exercise 11
---------------------------------------

First we define a dummy program to go on the ‘z s’ key.  The true ‘z s’
key is supposed to take two numbers from the stack and return one
number, so <DEL> as a dummy definition will make sure the stack comes
out right.

     2:  4          1:  4                         2:  4
     1:  2              .                         1:  2
         .                                            .

       4 <RET> 2       C-x ( <DEL> C-x )  Z K s <RET>       2

   The last step replaces the 2 that was eaten during the creation of
the dummy ‘z s’ command.  Now we move on to the real definition.  The
recurrence needs to be rewritten slightly, to the form ‘s(n,m) =
s(n-1,m-1) - (n-1) s(n-1,m)’.

   (Because this definition is long, it will be repeated in concise form
below.  You can use ‘C-x * m’ to load it from there.)

     2:  4        4:  4       3:  4       2:  4
     1:  2        3:  2       2:  2       1:  2
         .        2:  4       1:  0           .
                  1:  2           .
                      .

       C-x (       M-2 <RET>        a =         Z [  <DEL> <DEL> 1  Z :

     4:  4       2:  4                     2:  3      4:  3    4:  3    3:  3
     3:  2       1:  2                     1:  2      3:  2    3:  2    2:  2
     2:  2           .                         .      2:  3    2:  3    1:  3
     1:  0                                            1:  2    1:  1        .
         .                                                .        .

       <RET> 0   a = Z [  <DEL> <DEL> 0  Z :  <TAB> 1 - <TAB>   M-2 <RET>     1 -      z s

(Note that the value 3 that our dummy ‘z s’ produces is not correct; it
is merely a placeholder that will do just as well for now.)

     3:  3               4:  3           3:  3       2:  3      1:  -6
     2:  3               3:  3           2:  3       1:  9          .
     1:  2               2:  3           1:  3           .
         .               1:  2               .
                             .

      M-<TAB> M-<TAB>     <TAB> <RET> M-<TAB>         z s          *          -

     1:  -6                          2:  4          1:  11      2:  11
         .                           1:  2              .       1:  11
                                         .                          .

       Z ] Z ] C-x )   Z K s <RET>      <DEL> 4 <RET> 2       z s      M-<RET> k s

   Even though the result that we got during the definition was highly
bogus, once the definition is complete the ‘z s’ command gets the right
answers.

   Here’s the full program once again:

     C-x (  M-2 <RET> a =
            Z [  <DEL> <DEL> 1
            Z :  <RET> 0 a =
                 Z [  <DEL> <DEL> 0
                 Z :  <TAB> 1 - <TAB> M-2 <RET> 1 - z s
                      M-<TAB> M-<TAB> <TAB> <RET> M-<TAB> z s * -
                 Z ]
            Z ]
     C-x )

   You can read this definition using ‘C-x * m’ (‘read-kbd-macro’)
followed by ‘Z K s’, without having to make a dummy definition first,
because ‘read-kbd-macro’ doesn’t need to execute the definition as it
reads it in.  For this reason, ‘C-x * m’ is often the easiest way to
create recursive programs in Calc.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming Answer 12,  Prev: Programming Answer 11,  Up: Answers to Exercises

3.7.69 Programming Tutorial Exercise 12
---------------------------------------

This turns out to be a much easier way to solve the problem.  Let’s
denote Stirling numbers as calls of the function ‘s’.

   First, we store the rewrite rules corresponding to the definition of
Stirling numbers in a convenient variable:

     s e StirlingRules <RET>
     [ s(n,n) := 1  :: n >= 0,
       s(n,0) := 0  :: n > 0,
       s(n,m) := s(n-1,m-1) - (n-1) s(n-1,m) :: n >= m :: m >= 1 ]
     C-c C-c

   Now, it’s just a matter of applying the rules:

     2:  4          1:  s(4, 2)              1:  11
     1:  2              .                        .
         .

       4 <RET> 2       C-x (  ' s($$,$) <RET>     a r StirlingRules <RET>  C-x )

   As in the case of the ‘fib’ rules, it would be useful to put these
rules in ‘EvalRules’ and to add a ‘:: remember’ condition to the last
rule.


File: calc.info,  Node: Introduction,  Next: Data Types,  Prev: Tutorial,  Up: Top

4 Introduction
**************

This chapter is the beginning of the Calc reference manual.  It covers
basic concepts such as the stack, algebraic and numeric entry, undo,
numeric prefix arguments, etc.

* Menu:

* Basic Commands::
* Help Commands::
* Stack Basics::
* Numeric Entry::
* Algebraic Entry::
* Quick Calculator::
* Prefix Arguments::
* Undo::
* Error Messages::
* Multiple Calculators::
* Troubleshooting Commands::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Commands,  Next: Help Commands,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Introduction

4.1 Basic Commands
==================

To start the Calculator in its standard interface, type ‘M-x calc’.  By
default this creates a pair of small windows, ‘*Calculator*’ and ‘*Calc
Trail*’.  The former displays the contents of the Calculator stack and
is manipulated exclusively through Calc commands.  It is possible
(though not usually necessary) to create several Calc mode buffers each
of which has an independent stack, undo list, and mode settings.  There
is exactly one Calc Trail buffer; it records a list of the results of
all calculations that have been done.  The Calc Trail buffer uses a
variant of Calc mode, so Calculator commands still work when the trail
buffer’s window is selected.  It is possible to turn the trail window
off, but the ‘*Calc Trail*’ buffer itself still exists and is updated
silently.  *Note Trail Commands::.

   In most installations, the ‘C-x * c’ key sequence is a more
convenient way to start the Calculator.  Also, ‘C-x * *’ is a synonym
for ‘C-x * c’ unless you last used Calc in its Keypad mode.

   Most Calc commands use one or two keystrokes.  Lower- and upper-case
letters are distinct.  Commands may also be entered in full ‘M-x’ form;
for some commands this is the only form.  As a convenience, the ‘x’ key
(‘calc-execute-extended-command’) is like ‘M-x’ except that it enters
the initial string ‘calc-’ for you.  For example, the following key
sequences are equivalent: ‘S’, ‘M-x calc-sin <RET>’, ‘x sin <RET>’.

   Although Calc is designed to be used from the keyboard, some of
Calc’s more common commands are available from a menu.  In the menu, the
arguments to the functions are given by referring to their stack level
numbers.

   The Calculator exists in many parts.  When you type ‘C-x * c’, the
Emacs “auto-load” mechanism will bring in only the first part, which
contains the basic arithmetic functions.  The other parts will be
auto-loaded the first time you use the more advanced commands like trig
functions or matrix operations.  This is done to improve the response
time of the Calculator in the common case when all you need to do is a
little arithmetic.  If for some reason the Calculator fails to load an
extension module automatically, you can force it to load all the
extensions by using the ‘C-x * L’ (‘calc-load-everything’) command.
*Note Mode Settings::.

   If you type ‘M-x calc’ or ‘C-x * c’ with any numeric prefix argument,
the Calculator is loaded if necessary, but it is not actually started.
If the argument is positive, the ‘calc-ext’ extensions are also loaded
if necessary.  User-written Lisp code that wishes to make use of Calc’s
arithmetic routines can use ‘(calc 0)’ or ‘(calc 1)’ to auto-load the
Calculator.

   If you type ‘C-x * b’, then next time you use ‘C-x * c’ you will get
a Calculator that uses the full height of the Emacs screen.  When
full-screen mode is on, ‘C-x * c’ runs the ‘full-calc’ command instead
of ‘calc’.  From the Unix shell you can type ‘emacs -f full-calc’ to
start a new Emacs specifically for use as a calculator.  When Calc is
started from the Emacs command line like this, Calc’s normal “quit”
commands actually quit Emacs itself.

   The ‘C-x * o’ command is like ‘C-x * c’ except that the Calc window
is not actually selected.  If you are already in the Calc window, ‘C-x *
o’ switches you out of it.  (The regular Emacs ‘C-x o’ command would
also work for this, but it has a tendency to drop you into the Calc
Trail window instead, which ‘C-x * o’ takes care not to do.)

   For one quick calculation, you can type ‘C-x * q’ (‘quick-calc’)
which prompts you for a formula (like ‘2+3/4’).  The result is displayed
at the bottom of the Emacs screen without ever creating any special
Calculator windows.  *Note Quick Calculator::.

   Finally, if you are using the X window system you may want to try
‘C-x * k’ (‘calc-keypad’) which runs Calc with a “calculator keypad”
picture as well as a stack display.  Click on the keys with the mouse to
operate the calculator.  *Note Keypad Mode::.

   The ‘q’ key (‘calc-quit’) exits Calc mode and closes the Calculator’s
window(s).  It does not delete the Calculator buffers.  If you type ‘M-x
calc’ again, the Calculator will reappear with the contents of the stack
intact.  Typing ‘C-x * c’ or ‘C-x * *’ again from inside the Calculator
buffer is equivalent to executing ‘calc-quit’; you can think of ‘C-x *
*’ as toggling the Calculator on and off.

   The ‘C-x * x’ command also turns the Calculator off, no matter which
user interface (standard, Keypad, or Embedded) is currently active.  It
also cancels ‘calc-edit’ mode if used from there.

   The ‘d <SPC>’ key sequence (‘calc-refresh’) redraws the contents of
the Calculator buffer from memory.  Use this if the contents of the
buffer have been damaged somehow.

   The ‘o’ key (‘calc-realign’) moves the cursor back to its “home”
position at the bottom of the Calculator buffer.

   The ‘<’ and ‘>’ keys are bound to ‘calc-scroll-left’ and
‘calc-scroll-right’.  These are just like the normal horizontal
scrolling commands except that they scroll one half-screen at a time by
default.  (Calc formats its output to fit within the bounds of the
window whenever it can.)

   The ‘{’ and ‘}’ keys are bound to ‘calc-scroll-down’ and
‘calc-scroll-up’.  They scroll up or down by one-half the height of the
Calc window.

   The ‘C-x * 0’ command (‘calc-reset’; that’s ‘C-x *’ followed by a
zero) resets the Calculator to its initial state.  This clears the
stack, resets all the modes to their initial values (the values that
were saved with ‘m m’ (‘calc-save-modes’)), clears the caches (*note
Caches::), and so on.  (It does _not_ erase the values of any
variables.)  With an argument of 0, Calc will be reset to its default
state; namely, the modes will be given their default values.  With a
positive prefix argument, ‘C-x * 0’ preserves the contents of the stack
but resets everything else to its initial state; with a negative prefix
argument, ‘C-x * 0’ preserves the contents of the stack but resets
everything else to its default state.


File: calc.info,  Node: Help Commands,  Next: Stack Basics,  Prev: Basic Commands,  Up: Introduction

4.2 Help Commands
=================

The ‘?’ key (‘calc-help’) displays a series of brief help messages.
Some keys (such as ‘b’ and ‘d’) are prefix keys, like Emacs’s <ESC> and
‘C-x’ prefixes.  You can type ‘?’ after a prefix to see a list of
commands beginning with that prefix.  (If the message includes ‘[MORE]’,
press ‘?’ again to see additional commands for that prefix.)

   The ‘h h’ (‘calc-full-help’) command displays all the ‘?’ responses
at once.  When printed, this makes a nice, compact (three pages) summary
of Calc keystrokes.

   In general, the ‘h’ key prefix introduces various commands that
provide help within Calc.  Many of the ‘h’ key functions are
Calc-specific analogues to the ‘C-h’ functions for Emacs help.

   The ‘h i’ (‘calc-info’) command runs the Emacs Info system to read
this manual on-line.  This is basically the same as typing ‘C-h i’ (the
regular way to run the Info system), then, if Info is not already in the
Calc manual, selecting the beginning of the manual.  The ‘C-x * i’
command is another way to read the Calc manual; it is different from ‘h
i’ in that it works any time, not just inside Calc.  The plain ‘i’ key
is also equivalent to ‘h i’, though this key is obsolete and may be
replaced with a different command in a future version of Calc.

   The ‘h t’ (‘calc-tutorial’) command runs the Info system on the
Tutorial section of the Calc manual.  It is like ‘h i’, except that it
selects the starting node of the tutorial rather than the beginning of
the whole manual.  (It actually selects the node “Interactive Tutorial”
which tells a few things about using the Info system before going on to
the actual tutorial.)  The ‘C-x * t’ key is equivalent to ‘h t’ (but it
works at all times).

   The ‘h s’ (‘calc-info-summary’) command runs the Info system on the
Summary node of the Calc manual.  *Note Summary::.  The ‘C-x * s’ key is
equivalent to ‘h s’.

   The ‘h k’ (‘calc-describe-key’) command looks up a key sequence in
the Calc manual.  For example, ‘h k H a S’ looks up the documentation on
the ‘H a S’ (‘calc-solve-for’) command.  This works by looking up the
textual description of the key(s) in the Key Index of the manual, then
jumping to the node indicated by the index.

   Most Calc commands do not have traditional Emacs documentation
strings, since the ‘h k’ command is both more convenient and more
instructive.  This means the regular Emacs ‘C-h k’ (‘describe-key’)
command will not be useful for Calc keystrokes.

   The ‘h c’ (‘calc-describe-key-briefly’) command reads a key sequence
and displays a brief one-line description of it at the bottom of the
screen.  It looks for the key sequence in the Summary node of the Calc
manual; if it doesn’t find the sequence there, it acts just like its
regular Emacs counterpart ‘C-h c’ (‘describe-key-briefly’).  For
example, ‘h c H a S’ gives the description:

     H a S runs calc-solve-for:  a `H a S' v  => fsolve(a,v)  (?=notes)

which means the command ‘H a S’ or ‘H M-x calc-solve-for’ takes a value
‘a’ from the stack, prompts for a value ‘v’, then applies the algebraic
function ‘fsolve’ to these values.  The ‘?=notes’ message means you can
now type ‘?’ to see additional notes from the summary that apply to this
command.

   The ‘h f’ (‘calc-describe-function’) command looks up an algebraic
function or a command name in the Calc manual.  Enter an algebraic
function name to look up that function in the Function Index or enter a
command name beginning with ‘calc-’ to look it up in the Command Index.
This command will also look up operator symbols that can appear in
algebraic formulas, like ‘%’ and ‘=>’.

   The ‘h v’ (‘calc-describe-variable’) command looks up a variable in
the Calc manual.  Enter a variable name like ‘pi’ or ‘PlotRejects’.

   The ‘h b’ (‘calc-describe-bindings’) command is just like ‘C-h b’,
except that only local (Calc-related) key bindings are listed.

   The ‘h n’ or ‘h C-n’ (‘calc-view-news’) command displays the “news”
or change history of Emacs, and jumps to the most recent portion
concerning Calc (if present).  For older history, see the file
‘etc/CALC-NEWS’ in the Emacs distribution.

   The ‘h C-c’, ‘h C-d’, and ‘h C-w’ keys display copying, distribution,
and warranty information about Calc.  These work by pulling up the
appropriate parts of the “Copying” or “Reporting Bugs” sections of the
manual.


File: calc.info,  Node: Stack Basics,  Next: Numeric Entry,  Prev: Help Commands,  Up: Introduction

4.3 Stack Basics
================

Calc uses RPN notation.  If you are not familiar with RPN, *note RPN
Tutorial::.

   To add the numbers 1 and 2 in Calc you would type the keys: ‘1 <RET>
2 +’.  (<RET> corresponds to the <ENTER> key on most calculators.)  The
first three keystrokes “push” the numbers 1 and 2 onto the stack.  The
‘+’ key always “pops” the top two numbers from the stack, adds them, and
pushes the result (3) back onto the stack.  This number is ready for
further calculations: ‘5 -’ pushes 5 onto the stack, then pops the 3 and
5, subtracts them, and pushes the result (-2).

   Note that the “top” of the stack actually appears at the _bottom_ of
the buffer.  A line containing a single ‘.’ character signifies the end
of the buffer; Calculator commands operate on the number(s) directly
above this line.  The ‘d t’ (‘calc-truncate-stack’) command allows you
to move the ‘.’ marker up and down in the stack; *note Truncating the
Stack::.

   Stack elements are numbered consecutively, with number 1 being the
top of the stack.  These line numbers are ordinarily displayed on the
lefthand side of the window.  The ‘d l’ (‘calc-line-numbering’) command
controls whether these numbers appear.  (Line numbers may be turned off
since they slow the Calculator down a bit and also clutter the display.)

   The unshifted letter ‘o’ (‘calc-realign’) command repositions the
cursor to its top-of-stack “home” position.  It also undoes any
horizontal scrolling in the window.  If you give it a numeric prefix
argument, it instead moves the cursor to the specified stack element.

   The <RET> (or equivalent <SPC>) key is only required to separate two
consecutive numbers.  (After all, if you typed ‘1 2’ by themselves the
Calculator would enter the number 12.)  If you press <RET> or <SPC>
_not_ right after typing a number, the key duplicates the number on the
top of the stack.  ‘<RET> *’ is thus a handy way to square a number.

   The <DEL> key pops and throws away the top number on the stack.  The
<TAB> key swaps the top two objects on the stack.  *Note Stack and
Trail::, for descriptions of these and other stack-related commands.


File: calc.info,  Node: Numeric Entry,  Next: Algebraic Entry,  Prev: Stack Basics,  Up: Introduction

4.4 Numeric Entry
=================

Pressing a digit or other numeric key begins numeric entry using the
minibuffer.  The number is pushed on the stack when you press the <RET>
or <SPC> keys.  If you press any other non-numeric key, the number is
pushed onto the stack and the appropriate operation is performed.  If
you press a numeric key which is not valid, the key is ignored.

   There are three different concepts corresponding to the word “minus,”
typified by ‘a-b’ (subtraction), ‘-x’ (change-sign), and ‘-5’ (negative
number).  Calc uses three different keys for these operations,
respectively: ‘-’, ‘n’, and ‘_’ (the underscore).  The ‘-’ key subtracts
the two numbers on the top of the stack.  The ‘n’ key changes the sign
of the number on the top of the stack or the number currently being
entered.  The ‘_’ key begins entry of a negative number or changes the
sign of the number currently being entered.  The following sequences all
enter the number -5 onto the stack: ‘0 <RET> 5 -’, ‘5 n <RET>’, ‘5 <RET>
n’, ‘_ 5 <RET>’, ‘5 _ <RET>’.

   Some other keys are active during numeric entry, such as ‘#’ for
non-decimal numbers, ‘:’ for fractions, and ‘@’ for HMS forms.  These
notations are described later in this manual with the corresponding data
types.  *Note Data Types::.

   During numeric entry, the only editing key available is <DEL>.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Entry,  Next: Quick Calculator,  Prev: Numeric Entry,  Up: Introduction

4.5 Algebraic Entry
===================

The ‘'’ (‘calc-algebraic-entry’) command can be used to enter
calculations in algebraic form.  This is accomplished by typing the
apostrophe key, ’, followed by the expression in standard format:

     ' 2+3*4 <RET>.

This will compute ‘2+(3*4) = 14’ and push it on the stack.  If you wish
you can ignore the RPN aspect of Calc altogether and simply enter
algebraic expressions in this way.  You may want to use <DEL> every so
often to clear previous results off the stack.

   You can press the apostrophe key during normal numeric entry to
switch the half-entered number into Algebraic entry mode.  One reason to
do this would be to fix a typo, as the full Emacs cursor motion and
editing keys are available during algebraic entry but not during numeric
entry.

   In the same vein, during either numeric or algebraic entry you can
press ‘`’ (grave accent) to switch to ‘calc-edit’ mode, where you
complete your half-finished entry in a separate buffer.  *Note Editing
Stack Entries::.

   If you prefer algebraic entry, you can use the command ‘m a’
(‘calc-algebraic-mode’) to set Algebraic mode.  In this mode, digits and
other keys that would normally start numeric entry instead start full
algebraic entry; as long as your formula begins with a digit you can
omit the apostrophe.  Open parentheses and square brackets also begin
algebraic entry.  You can still do RPN calculations in this mode, but
you will have to press <RET> to terminate every number: ‘2 <RET> 3 <RET>
* 4 <RET> +’ would accomplish the same thing as ‘2*3+4 <RET>’.

   If you give a numeric prefix argument like ‘C-u’ to the ‘m a’
command, it enables Incomplete Algebraic mode; this is like regular
Algebraic mode except that it applies to the ‘(’ and ‘[’ keys only.
Numeric keys still begin a numeric entry in this mode.

   The ‘m t’ (‘calc-total-algebraic-mode’) gives you an even stronger
algebraic-entry mode, in which _all_ regular letter and punctuation keys
begin algebraic entry.  Use this if you prefer typing ‘sqrt( )’ instead
of ‘Q’, ‘factor( )’ instead of ‘a f’, and so on.  To type regular Calc
commands when you are in Total Algebraic mode, hold down the <META> key.
Thus ‘M-q’ is the command to quit Calc, ‘M-p’ sets the precision, and
‘M-m t’ (or ‘M-m M-t’, if you prefer) turns Total Algebraic mode back
off again.  Meta keys also terminate algebraic entry, so that ‘2+3 M-S’
is equivalent to ‘2+3 <RET> M-S’.  The symbol ‘Alg*’ will appear in the
mode line whenever you are in this mode.

   Pressing ‘'’ (the apostrophe) a second time re-enters the previous
algebraic formula.  You can then use the normal Emacs editing keys to
modify this formula to your liking before pressing <RET>.

   Within a formula entered from the keyboard, the symbol ‘$’ represents
the number on the top of the stack.  If an entered formula contains any
‘$’ characters, the Calculator replaces the top of stack with that
formula rather than simply pushing the formula onto the stack.  Thus, ‘'
1+2 <RET>’ pushes 3 on the stack, and ‘$*2 <RET>’ replaces it with 6.
Note that the ‘$’ key always initiates algebraic entry; the ‘'’ is
unnecessary if ‘$’ is the first character in the new formula.

   Higher stack elements can be accessed from an entered formula with
the symbols ‘$$’, ‘$$$’, and so on.  The number of stack elements
removed (to be replaced by the entered values) equals the number of
dollar signs in the longest such symbol in the formula.  For example,
‘$$+$$$’ adds the second and third stack elements, replacing the top
three elements with the answer.  (All information about the top stack
element is thus lost since no single ‘$’ appears in this formula.)

   A slightly different way to refer to stack elements is with a dollar
sign followed by a number: ‘$1’, ‘$2’, and so on are much like ‘$’,
‘$$’, etc., except that stack entries referred to numerically are not
replaced by the algebraic entry.  That is, while ‘$+1’ replaces 5 on the
stack with 6, ‘$1+1’ leaves the 5 on the stack and pushes an additional
6.

   If a sequence of formulas are entered separated by commas, each
formula is pushed onto the stack in turn.  For example, ‘1,2,3’ pushes
those three numbers onto the stack (leaving the 3 at the top), and
‘$+1,$-1’ replaces a 5 on the stack with 4 followed by 6.  Also, ‘$,$$’
exchanges the top two elements of the stack, just like the <TAB> key.

   You can finish an algebraic entry with ‘M-=’ or ‘M-<RET>’ instead of
<RET>.  This uses ‘=’ to evaluate the variables in each formula that
goes onto the stack.  (Thus ‘' pi <RET>’ pushes the variable ‘pi’, but
‘' pi M-<RET>’ pushes 3.1415.)

   If you finish your algebraic entry by pressing <LFD> (or ‘C-j’)
instead of <RET>, Calc disables simplification (as if by ‘m O’; *note
Simplification Modes::) while the entry is being pushed on the stack.
Thus ‘' 1+2 <RET>’ pushes 3 on the stack, but ‘' 1+2 <LFD>’ pushes the
formula ‘1+2’; you might then press ‘=’ when it is time to evaluate this
formula.


File: calc.info,  Node: Quick Calculator,  Next: Prefix Arguments,  Prev: Algebraic Entry,  Up: Introduction

4.6 “Quick Calculator” Mode
===========================

There is another way to invoke the Calculator if all you need to do is
make one or two quick calculations.  Type ‘C-x * q’ (or ‘M-x
quick-calc’), then type any formula as an algebraic entry.  The
Calculator will compute the result and display it in the echo area,
without ever actually putting up a Calc window.

   You can use the ‘$’ character in a Quick Calculator formula to refer
to the previous Quick Calculator result.  Older results are not
retained; the Quick Calculator has no effect on the full Calculator’s
stack or trail.  If you compute a result and then forget what it was,
just run ‘C-x * q’ again and enter ‘$’ as the formula.

   If this is the first time you have used the Calculator in this Emacs
session, the ‘C-x * q’ command will create the ‘*Calculator*’ buffer and
perform all the usual initializations; it simply will refrain from
putting that buffer up in a new window.  The Quick Calculator refers to
the ‘*Calculator*’ buffer for all mode settings.  Thus, for example, to
set the precision that the Quick Calculator uses, simply run the full
Calculator momentarily and use the regular ‘p’ command.

   If you use ‘C-x * q’ from inside the Calculator buffer, the effect is
the same as pressing the apostrophe key (algebraic entry).

   The result of a Quick calculation is placed in the Emacs “kill ring”
as well as being displayed.  A subsequent ‘C-y’ command will yank the
result into the editing buffer.  You can also use this to yank the
result into the next ‘C-x * q’ input line as a more explicit alternative
to ‘$’ notation, or to yank the result into the Calculator stack after
typing ‘C-x * c’.

   If you give a prefix argument to ‘C-x * q’ or finish your formula by
typing <LFD> (or ‘C-j’) instead of <RET>, the result is inserted
immediately into the current buffer rather than going into the kill
ring.

   Quick Calculator results are actually evaluated as if by the ‘=’ key
(which replaces variable names by their stored values, if any).  If the
formula you enter is an assignment to a variable using the ‘:=’
operator, say, ‘foo := 2 + 3’ or ‘foo := foo + 1’, then the result of
the evaluation is stored in that Calc variable.  *Note Store and
Recall::.

   If the result is an integer and the current display radix is decimal,
the number will also be displayed in hex, octal and binary formats.  If
the integer is in the range from 1 to 126, it will also be displayed as
an ASCII character.

   For example, the quoted character ‘"x"’ produces the vector result
‘[120]’ (because 120 is the ASCII code of the lower-case “x”; *note
Strings::).  Since this is a vector, not an integer, it is displayed
only according to the current mode settings.  But running Quick Calc
again and entering ‘120’ will produce the result ‘120 (16#78, 8#170, x)’
which shows the number in its decimal, hexadecimal, octal, and ASCII
forms.

   Please note that the Quick Calculator is not any faster at loading or
computing the answer than the full Calculator; the name “quick” merely
refers to the fact that it’s much less hassle to use for small
calculations.


File: calc.info,  Node: Prefix Arguments,  Next: Undo,  Prev: Quick Calculator,  Up: Introduction

4.7 Numeric Prefix Arguments
============================

Many Calculator commands use numeric prefix arguments.  Some, such as ‘d
s’ (‘calc-sci-notation’), set a parameter to the value of the prefix
argument or use a default if you don’t use a prefix.  Others (like ‘d f’
(‘calc-fix-notation’)) require an argument and prompt for a number if
you don’t give one as a prefix.

   As a rule, stack-manipulation commands accept a numeric prefix
argument which is interpreted as an index into the stack.  A positive
argument operates on the top N stack entries; a negative argument
operates on the Nth stack entry in isolation; and a zero argument
operates on the entire stack.

   Most commands that perform computations (such as the arithmetic and
scientific functions) accept a numeric prefix argument that allows the
operation to be applied across many stack elements.  For unary
operations (that is, functions of one argument like absolute value or
complex conjugate), a positive prefix argument applies that function to
the top N stack entries simultaneously, and a negative argument applies
it to the Nth stack entry only.  For binary operations (functions of two
arguments like addition, GCD, and vector concatenation), a positive
prefix argument “reduces” the function across the top N stack elements
(for example, ‘C-u 5 +’ sums the top 5 stack entries; *note Reducing and
Mapping::), and a negative argument maps the next-to-top N stack
elements with the top stack element as a second argument (for example,
‘7 c-u -5 +’ adds 7 to the top 5 stack elements).  This feature is not
available for operations which use the numeric prefix argument for some
other purpose.

   Numeric prefixes are specified the same way as always in Emacs: Press
a sequence of <META>-digits, or press <ESC> followed by digits, or press
‘C-u’ followed by digits.  Some commands treat plain ‘C-u’ (without any
actual digits) specially.

   You can type ‘~’ (‘calc-num-prefix’) to pop an integer from the top
of the stack and enter it as the numeric prefix for the next command.
For example, ‘C-u 16 p’ sets the precision to 16 digits; an alternate
(silly) way to do this would be ‘2 <RET> 4 ^ ~ p’, i.e., compute 2 to
the fourth power and set the precision to that value.

   Conversely, if you have typed a numeric prefix argument the ‘~’ key
pushes it onto the stack in the form of an integer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Undo,  Next: Error Messages,  Prev: Prefix Arguments,  Up: Introduction

4.8 Undoing Mistakes
====================

The shift-‘U’ key (‘calc-undo’) undoes the most recent operation.  If
that operation added or dropped objects from the stack, those objects
are removed or restored.  If it was a “store” operation, you are queried
whether or not to restore the variable to its original value.  The ‘U’
key may be pressed any number of times to undo successively farther back
in time; with a numeric prefix argument it undoes a specified number of
operations.  When the Calculator is quit, as with the ‘q’ (‘calc-quit’)
command, the undo history will be truncated to the length of the
customizable variable ‘calc-undo-length’ (*note Customizing Calc::),
which by default is ‘100’.  (Recall that ‘C-x * c’ is synonymous with
‘calc-quit’ while inside the Calculator; this also truncates the undo
history.)

   Currently the mode-setting commands (like ‘calc-precision’) are not
undoable.  You can undo past a point where you changed a mode, but you
will need to reset the mode yourself.

   The shift-‘D’ key (‘calc-redo’) redoes an operation that was
mistakenly undone.  Pressing ‘U’ with a negative prefix argument is
equivalent to executing ‘calc-redo’.  You can redo any number of times,
up to the number of recent consecutive undo commands.  Redo information
is cleared whenever you give any command that adds new undo information,
i.e., if you undo, then enter a number on the stack or make any other
change, then it will be too late to redo.

   The ‘M-<RET>’ key (‘calc-last-args’) is like undo in that it restores
the arguments of the most recent command onto the stack; however, it
does not remove the result of that command.  Given a numeric prefix
argument, this command applies to the ‘n’th most recent command which
removed items from the stack; it pushes those items back onto the stack.

   The ‘K’ (‘calc-keep-args’) command provides a related function to
‘M-<RET>’.  *Note Stack and Trail::.

   It is also possible to recall previous results or inputs using the
trail.  *Note Trail Commands::.

   The standard Emacs ‘C-_’ undo key is recognized as a synonym for ‘U’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Error Messages,  Next: Multiple Calculators,  Prev: Undo,  Up: Introduction

4.9 Error Messages
==================

Many situations that would produce an error message in other calculators
simply create unsimplified formulas in the Emacs Calculator.  For
example, ‘1 <RET> 0 /’ pushes the formula ‘1 / 0’; ‘0 L’ pushes the
formula ‘ln(0)’.  Floating-point overflow and underflow are also reasons
for this to happen.

   When a function call must be left in symbolic form, Calc usually
produces a message explaining why.  Messages that are probably
surprising or indicative of user errors are displayed automatically.
Other messages are simply kept in Calc’s memory and are displayed only
if you type ‘w’ (‘calc-why’).  You can also press ‘w’ if the same
computation results in several messages.  (The first message will end
with ‘[w=more]’ in this case.)

   The ‘d w’ (‘calc-auto-why’) command controls when error messages are
displayed automatically.  (Calc effectively presses ‘w’ for you after
your computation finishes.)  By default, this occurs only for
“important” messages.  The other possible modes are to report _all_
messages automatically, or to report none automatically (so that you
must always press ‘w’ yourself to see the messages).


File: calc.info,  Node: Multiple Calculators,  Next: Troubleshooting Commands,  Prev: Error Messages,  Up: Introduction

4.10 Multiple Calculators
=========================

It is possible to have any number of Calc mode buffers at once.  Usually
this is done by executing ‘M-x another-calc’, which is similar to ‘C-x *
c’ except that if a ‘*Calculator*’ buffer already exists, a new,
independent one with a name of the form ‘*Calculator*<N>’ is created.
You can also use the command ‘calc-mode’ to put any buffer into
Calculator mode, but this would ordinarily never be done.

   The ‘q’ (‘calc-quit’) command does not destroy a Calculator buffer;
it only closes its window.  Use ‘M-x kill-buffer’ to destroy a
Calculator buffer.

   Each Calculator buffer keeps its own stack, undo list, and mode
settings such as precision, angular mode, and display formats.  In Emacs
terms, variables such as ‘calc-stack’ are buffer-local variables.  The
global default values of these variables are used only when a new
Calculator buffer is created.  The ‘calc-quit’ command saves the stack
and mode settings of the buffer being quit as the new defaults.

   There is only one trail buffer, ‘*Calc Trail*’, used by all
Calculator buffers.


File: calc.info,  Node: Troubleshooting Commands,  Prev: Multiple Calculators,  Up: Introduction

4.11 Troubleshooting Commands
=============================

This section describes commands you can use in case a computation
incorrectly fails or gives the wrong answer.

   *Note Reporting Bugs::, if you find a problem that appears to be due
to a bug or deficiency in Calc.

* Menu:

* Autoloading Problems::
* Recursion Depth::
* Caches::
* Debugging Calc::


File: calc.info,  Node: Autoloading Problems,  Next: Recursion Depth,  Prev: Troubleshooting Commands,  Up: Troubleshooting Commands

4.11.1 Autoloading Problems
---------------------------

The Calc program is split into many component files; components are
loaded automatically as you use various commands that require them.
Occasionally Calc may lose track of when a certain component is
necessary; typically this means you will type a command and it won’t
work because some function you’ve never heard of was undefined.

   If this happens, the easiest workaround is to type ‘C-x * L’
(‘calc-load-everything’) to force all the parts of Calc to be loaded
right away.  This will cause Emacs to take up a lot more memory than it
would otherwise, but it’s guaranteed to fix the problem.


File: calc.info,  Node: Recursion Depth,  Next: Caches,  Prev: Autoloading Problems,  Up: Troubleshooting Commands

4.11.2 Recursion Depth
----------------------

Calc uses recursion in many of its calculations.  Emacs Lisp keeps a
variable ‘max-lisp-eval-depth’ which limits the amount of recursion
possible in an attempt to recover from program bugs.  If a calculation
ever halts incorrectly with the message “Computation got stuck or ran
too long,” use the ‘M’ command (‘calc-more-recursion-depth’) to increase
this limit.  (Of course, this will not help if the calculation really
did get stuck due to some problem inside Calc.)

   The limit is always increased (multiplied) by a factor of two.  There
is also an ‘I M’ (‘calc-less-recursion-depth’) command which decreases
this limit by a factor of two, down to a minimum value of 200.  The
default value is 1000.

   These commands also double or halve ‘max-specpdl-size’, another
internal Lisp recursion limit.  The minimum value for this limit is 600.


File: calc.info,  Node: Caches,  Next: Debugging Calc,  Prev: Recursion Depth,  Up: Troubleshooting Commands

4.11.3 Caches
-------------

Calc saves certain values after they have been computed once.  For
example, the ‘P’ (‘calc-pi’) command initially “knows” the constant ‘pi’
to about 20 decimal places; if the current precision is greater than
this, it will recompute ‘pi’ using a series approximation.  This value
will not need to be recomputed ever again unless you raise the precision
still further.  Many operations such as logarithms and sines make use of
similarly cached values such as ‘pi/4’ and ‘ln(2)’.  The visible effect
of caching is that high-precision computations may seem to do extra work
the first time.  Other things cached include powers of two (for the
binary arithmetic functions), matrix inverses and determinants, symbolic
integrals, and data points computed by the graphing commands.

   If you suspect a Calculator cache has become corrupt, you can use the
‘calc-flush-caches’ command to reset all caches to the empty state.
(This should only be necessary in the event of bugs in the Calculator.)
The ‘C-x * 0’ (with the zero key) command also resets caches along with
all other aspects of the Calculator’s state.


File: calc.info,  Node: Debugging Calc,  Prev: Caches,  Up: Troubleshooting Commands

4.11.4 Debugging Calc
---------------------

A few commands exist to help in the debugging of Calc commands.  *Note
Programming::, to see the various ways that you can write your own Calc
commands.

   The ‘Z T’ (‘calc-timing’) command turns on and off a mode in which
the timing of slow commands is reported in the Trail.  Any Calc command
that takes two seconds or longer writes a line to the Trail showing how
many seconds it took.  This value is accurate only to within one second.

   All steps of executing a command are included; in particular, time
taken to format the result for display in the stack and trail is
counted.  Some prompts also count time taken waiting for them to be
answered, while others do not; this depends on the exact implementation
of the command.  For best results, if you are timing a sequence that
includes prompts or multiple commands, define a keyboard macro to run
the whole sequence at once.  Calc’s ‘X’ command (*note Keyboard
Macros::) will then report the time taken to execute the whole macro.

   Another advantage of the ‘X’ command is that while it is executing,
the stack and trail are not updated from step to step.  So if you expect
the output of your test sequence to leave a result that may take a long
time to format and you don’t wish to count this formatting time, end
your sequence with a <DEL> keystroke to clear the result from the stack.
When you run the sequence with ‘X’, Calc will never bother to format the
large result.

   Another thing ‘Z T’ does is to increase the Emacs variable
‘gc-cons-threshold’ to a much higher value (two million; the usual
default in Calc is 250,000) for the duration of each command.  This
generally prevents garbage collection during the timing of the command,
though it may cause your Emacs process to grow abnormally large.
(Garbage collection time is a major unpredictable factor in the timing
of Emacs operations.)

   Another command that is useful when debugging your own Lisp
extensions to Calc is ‘M-x calc-pass-errors’, which disables the error
handler that changes the “‘max-lisp-eval-depth’ exceeded” message to the
much more friendly “Computation got stuck or ran too long.” This handler
interferes with the Emacs Lisp debugger’s ‘debug-on-error’ mode.  Errors
are reported in the handler itself rather than at the true location of
the error.  After you have executed ‘calc-pass-errors’, Lisp errors will
be reported correctly but the user-friendly message will be lost.


File: calc.info,  Node: Data Types,  Next: Stack and Trail,  Prev: Introduction,  Up: Top

5 Data Types
************

This chapter discusses the various types of objects that can be placed
on the Calculator stack, how they are displayed, and how they are
entered.  (*Note Data Type Formats::, for information on how these data
types are represented as underlying Lisp objects.)

   Integers, fractions, and floats are various ways of describing real
numbers.  HMS forms also for many purposes act as real numbers.  These
types can be combined to form complex numbers, modulo forms, error
forms, or interval forms.  (But these last four types cannot be combined
arbitrarily: error forms may not contain modulo forms, for example.)
Finally, all these types of numbers may be combined into vectors,
matrices, or algebraic formulas.

* Menu:

* Integers::                The most basic data type.
* Fractions::               This and above are called “rationals”.
* Floats::                  This and above are called “reals”.
* Complex Numbers::         This and above are called “numbers”.
* Infinities::
* Vectors and Matrices::
* Strings::
* HMS Forms::
* Date Forms::
* Modulo Forms::
* Error Forms::
* Interval Forms::
* Incomplete Objects::
* Variables::
* Formulas::


File: calc.info,  Node: Integers,  Next: Fractions,  Prev: Data Types,  Up: Data Types

5.1 Integers
============

The Calculator stores integers to arbitrary precision.  Addition,
subtraction, and multiplication of integers always yields an exact
integer result.  (If the result of a division or exponentiation of
integers is not an integer, it is expressed in fractional or
floating-point form according to the current Fraction mode.  *Note
Fraction Mode::.)

   A decimal integer is represented as an optional sign followed by a
sequence of digits.  Grouping (*note Grouping Digits::) can be used to
insert a comma at every third digit for display purposes, but you must
not type commas during the entry of numbers.

   A non-decimal integer is represented as an optional sign, a radix
between 2 and 36, a ‘#’ symbol, and one or more digits.  For radix 11
and above, the letters A through Z (upper- or lower-case) count as
digits and do not terminate numeric entry mode.  *Note Radix Modes::,
for how to set the default radix for display of integers.  Numbers of
any radix may be entered at any time.  If you press ‘#’ at the beginning
of a number, the current display radix is used.


File: calc.info,  Node: Fractions,  Next: Floats,  Prev: Integers,  Up: Data Types

5.2 Fractions
=============

A “fraction” is a ratio of two integers.  Fractions are traditionally
written “2/3” but Calc uses the notation ‘2:3’.  (The ‘/’ key performs
RPN division; the following two sequences push the number ‘2:3’ on the
stack: ‘2 : 3 <RET>’, or ‘2 <RET> 3 /’ assuming Fraction mode has been
enabled.)  When the Calculator produces a fractional result it always
reduces it to simplest form, which may in fact be an integer.

   Fractions may also be entered in a three-part form, where ‘2:3:4’
represents two-and-three-quarters.  *Note Fraction Formats::, for
fraction display formats.

   Non-decimal fractions are entered and displayed as ‘RADIX#NUM:DENOM’
(or in the analogous three-part form).  The numerator and denominator
always use the same radix.


File: calc.info,  Node: Floats,  Next: Complex Numbers,  Prev: Fractions,  Up: Data Types

5.3 Floats
==========

A floating-point number or “float” is a number stored in scientific
notation.  The number of significant digits in the fractional part is
governed by the current floating precision (*note Precision::).  The
range of acceptable values is from ‘10^-3999999’ (inclusive) to
‘10^4000000’ (exclusive), plus the corresponding negative values and
zero.

   Calculations that would exceed the allowable range of values (such as
‘exp(exp(20))’) are left in symbolic form by Calc.  The messages
“floating-point overflow” or “floating-point underflow” indicate that
during the calculation a number would have been produced that was too
large or too close to zero, respectively, to be represented by Calc.
This does not necessarily mean the final result would have overflowed,
just that an overflow occurred while computing the result.  (In fact, it
could report an underflow even though the final result would have
overflowed!)

   If a rational number and a float are mixed in a calculation, the
result will in general be expressed as a float.  Commands that require
an integer value (such as ‘k g’ [‘gcd’]) will also accept integer-valued
floats, i.e., floating-point numbers with nothing after the decimal
point.

   Floats are identified by the presence of a decimal point and/or an
exponent.  In general a float consists of an optional sign, digits
including an optional decimal point, and an optional exponent consisting
of an ‘e’, an optional sign, and up to seven exponent digits.  For
example, ‘23.5e-2’ is 23.5 times ten to the minus-second power, or
0.235.

   Floating-point numbers are normally displayed in decimal notation
with all significant figures shown.  Exceedingly large or small numbers
are displayed in scientific notation.  Various other display options are
available.  *Note Float Formats::.

   Floating-point numbers are stored in decimal, not binary.  The result
of each operation is rounded to the nearest value representable in the
number of significant digits specified by the current precision,
rounding away from zero in the case of a tie.  Thus (in the default
display mode) what you see is exactly what you get.  Some operations
such as square roots and transcendental functions are performed with
several digits of extra precision and then rounded down, in an effort to
make the final result accurate to the full requested precision.
However, accuracy is not rigorously guaranteed.  If you suspect the
validity of a result, try doing the same calculation in a higher
precision.  The Calculator’s arithmetic is not intended to be
IEEE-conformant in any way.

   While floats are always _stored_ in decimal, they can be entered and
displayed in any radix just like integers and fractions.  Since a float
that is entered in a radix other that 10 will be converted to decimal,
the number that Calc stores may not be exactly the number that was
entered, it will be the closest decimal approximation given the current
precision.  The notation ‘RADIX#DDD.DDD’ is a floating-point number
whose digits are in the specified radix.  Note that the ‘.’ is more
aptly referred to as a “radix point” than as a decimal point in this
case.  The number ‘8#123.4567’ is defined as ‘8#1234567 * 8^-4’.  If the
radix is 14 or less, you can use ‘e’ notation to write a non-decimal
number in scientific notation.  The exponent is written in decimal, and
is considered to be a power of the radix: ‘8#1234567e-4’.  If the radix
is 15 or above, the letter ‘e’ is a digit, so scientific notation must
be written out, e.g., ‘16#123.4567*16^2’.  The first two exercises of
the Modes Tutorial explore some of the properties of non-decimal floats.


File: calc.info,  Node: Complex Numbers,  Next: Infinities,  Prev: Floats,  Up: Data Types

5.4 Complex Numbers
===================

There are two supported formats for complex numbers: rectangular and
polar.  The default format is rectangular, displayed in the form
‘(REAL,IMAG)’ where REAL is the real part and IMAG is the imaginary
part, each of which may be any real number.  Rectangular complex numbers
can also be displayed in ‘A+Bi’ notation; *note Complex Formats::.

   Polar complex numbers are displayed in the form ‘(R;THETA)’ where R
is the nonnegative magnitude and THETA is the argument or phase angle.
The range of THETA depends on the current angular mode (*note Angular
Modes::); it is generally between -180 and +180 degrees or the
equivalent range in radians.

   Complex numbers are entered in stages using incomplete objects.
*Note Incomplete Objects::.

   Operations on rectangular complex numbers yield rectangular complex
results, and similarly for polar complex numbers.  Where the two types
are mixed, or where new complex numbers arise (as for the square root of
a negative real), the current “Polar mode” is used to determine the
type.  *Note Polar Mode::.

   A complex result in which the imaginary part is zero (or the phase
angle is 0 or 180 degrees or ‘pi’ radians) is automatically converted to
a real number.


File: calc.info,  Node: Infinities,  Next: Vectors and Matrices,  Prev: Complex Numbers,  Up: Data Types

5.5 Infinities
==============

The word ‘inf’ represents the mathematical concept of “infinity”.  Calc
actually has three slightly different infinity-like values: ‘inf’,
‘uinf’, and ‘nan’.  These are just regular variable names (*note
Variables::); you should avoid using these names for your own variables
because Calc gives them special treatment.  Infinities, like all
variable names, are normally entered using algebraic entry.

   Mathematically speaking, it is not rigorously correct to treat
“infinity” as if it were a number, but mathematicians often do so
informally.  When they say that ‘1 / inf = 0’, what they really mean is
that ‘1 / x’, as ‘x’ becomes larger and larger, becomes arbitrarily
close to zero.  So you can imagine that if ‘x’ got “all the way to
infinity,” then ‘1 / x’ would go all the way to zero.  Similarly, when
they say that ‘exp(inf) = inf’, they mean that ‘exp(x)’ grows without
bound as ‘x’ grows.  The symbol ‘-inf’ likewise stands for an infinitely
negative real value; for example, we say that ‘exp(-inf) = 0’.  You can
have an infinity pointing in any direction on the complex plane:
‘sqrt(-inf) = i inf’.

   The same concept of limits can be used to define ‘1 / 0’.  We really
want the value that ‘1 / x’ approaches as ‘x’ approaches zero.  But if
all we have is ‘1 / 0’, we can’t tell which direction ‘x’ was coming
from.  If ‘x’ was positive and decreasing toward zero, then we should
say that ‘1 / 0 = inf’.  But if ‘x’ was negative and increasing toward
zero, the answer is ‘1 / 0 = -inf’.  In fact, ‘x’ could be an imaginary
number, giving the answer ‘i inf’ or ‘-i inf’.  Calc uses the special
symbol ‘uinf’ to mean “undirected infinity”, i.e., a value which is
infinitely large but with an unknown sign (or direction on the complex
plane).

   Calc actually has three modes that say how infinities are handled.
Normally, infinities never arise from calculations that didn’t already
have them.  Thus, ‘1 / 0’ is treated simply as an error and left
unevaluated.  The ‘m i’ (‘calc-infinite-mode’) command (*note Infinite
Mode::) enables a mode in which ‘1 / 0’ evaluates to ‘uinf’ instead.
There is also an alternative type of infinite mode which says to treat
zeros as if they were positive, so that ‘1 / 0 = inf’.  While this is
less mathematically correct, it may be the answer you want in some
cases.

   Since all infinities are “as large” as all others, Calc simplifies,
e.g., ‘5 inf’ to ‘inf’.  Another example is ‘5 - inf = -inf’, where the
‘-inf’ is so large that adding a finite number like five to it does not
affect it.  Note that ‘a - inf’ also results in ‘-inf’; Calc assumes
that variables like ‘a’ always stand for finite quantities.  Just to
show that infinities really are all the same size, note that ‘sqrt(inf)
= inf^2 = exp(inf) = inf’ in Calc’s notation.

   It’s not so easy to define certain formulas like ‘0 * inf’ and ‘inf /
inf’.  Depending on where these zeros and infinities came from, the
answer could be literally anything.  The latter formula could be the
limit of ‘x / x’ (giving a result of one), or ‘2 x / x’ (giving two), or
‘x^2 / x’ (giving ‘inf’), or ‘x / x^2’ (giving zero).  Calc uses the
symbol ‘nan’ to represent such an “indeterminate” value.  (The name
“nan” comes from analogy with the “NAN” concept of IEEE standard
arithmetic; it stands for “Not A Number.” This is somewhat of a
misnomer, since ‘nan’ _does_ stand for some number or infinity, it’s
just that _which_ number it stands for cannot be determined.)  In Calc’s
notation, ‘0 * inf = nan’ and ‘inf / inf = nan’.  A few other common
indeterminate expressions are ‘inf - inf’ and ‘inf ^ 0’.  Also, ‘0 / 0 =
nan’ if you have turned on Infinite mode (as described above).

   Infinities are especially useful as parts of “intervals”.  *Note
Interval Forms::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vectors and Matrices,  Next: Strings,  Prev: Infinities,  Up: Data Types

5.6 Vectors and Matrices
========================

The “vector” data type is flexible and general.  A vector is simply a
list of zero or more data objects.  When these objects are numbers, the
whole is a vector in the mathematical sense.  When these objects are
themselves vectors of equal (nonzero) length, the whole is a “matrix”.
A vector which is not a matrix is referred to here as a “plain vector”.

   A vector is displayed as a list of values separated by commas and
enclosed in square brackets: ‘[1, 2, 3]’.  Thus the following is a 2 row
by 3 column matrix: ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4, 5, 6]]’.  Vectors, like complex
numbers, are entered as incomplete objects.  *Note Incomplete Objects::.
During algebraic entry, vectors are entered all at once in the usual
brackets-and-commas form.  Matrices may be entered algebraically as
nested vectors, or using the shortcut notation ‘[1, 2, 3; 4, 5, 6]’,
with rows separated by semicolons.  The commas may usually be omitted
when entering vectors: ‘[1 2 3]’.  Curly braces may be used in place of
brackets: ‘{1, 2, 3}’, but the commas are required in this case.

   Traditional vector and matrix arithmetic is also supported; *note
Basic Arithmetic:: and *note Matrix Functions::.  Many other operations
are applied to vectors element-wise.  For example, the complex conjugate
of a vector is a vector of the complex conjugates of its elements.

   Algebraic functions for building vectors include ‘vec(a, b, c)’ to
build ‘[a, b, c]’, ‘cvec(a, n, m)’ to build an NxM matrix of ‘a’s, and
‘index(n)’ to build a vector of integers from 1 to ‘n’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Strings,  Next: HMS Forms,  Prev: Vectors and Matrices,  Up: Data Types

5.7 Strings
===========

Character strings are not a special data type in the Calculator.
Rather, a string is represented simply as a vector all of whose elements
are integers in the range 0 to 255 (ASCII codes).  You can enter a
string at any time by pressing the ‘"’ key.  Quotation marks and
backslashes are written ‘\"’ and ‘\\’, respectively, inside strings.
Other notations introduced by backslashes are:

     \a     7          \^@    0
     \b     8          \^a-z  1-26
     \e     27         \^[    27
     \f     12         \^\\   28
     \n     10         \^]    29
     \r     13         \^^    30
     \t     9          \^_    31
                       \^?    127

Finally, a backslash followed by three octal digits produces any
character from its ASCII code.

   Strings are normally displayed in vector-of-integers form.  The ‘d "’
(‘calc-display-strings’) command toggles a mode in which any vectors of
small integers are displayed as quoted strings instead.

   The backslash notations shown above are also used for displaying
strings.  Characters 128 and above are not translated by Calc; unless
you have an Emacs modified for 8-bit fonts, these will show up in
backslash-octal-digits notation.  For characters below 32, and for
character 127, Calc uses the backslash-letter combination if there is
one, or otherwise uses a ‘\^’ sequence.

   The only Calc feature that uses strings is “compositions”; *note
Compositions::.  Strings also provide a convenient way to do conversions
between ASCII characters and integers.

   There is a ‘string’ function which provides a different display
format for strings.  Basically, ‘string(S)’, where S is a vector of
integers in the proper range, is displayed as the corresponding string
of characters with no surrounding quotation marks or other
modifications.  Thus ‘string("ABC")’ (or ‘string([65 66 67])’) will look
like ‘ABC’ on the stack.  This happens regardless of whether ‘d "’ has
been used.  The only way to turn it off is to use ‘d U’ (unformatted
language mode) which will display ‘string("ABC")’ instead.

   Control characters are displayed somewhat differently by ‘string’.
Characters below 32, and character 127, are shown using ‘^’ notation
(same as shown above, but without the backslash).  The quote and
backslash characters are left alone, as are characters 128 and above.

   The ‘bstring’ function is just like ‘string’ except that the
resulting string is breakable across multiple lines if it doesn’t fit
all on one line.  Potential break points occur at every space character
in the string.


File: calc.info,  Node: HMS Forms,  Next: Date Forms,  Prev: Strings,  Up: Data Types

5.8 HMS Forms
=============

“HMS” stands for Hours-Minutes-Seconds; when used as an angular
argument, the interpretation is Degrees-Minutes-Seconds.  All functions
that operate on angles accept HMS forms.  These are interpreted as
degrees regardless of the current angular mode.  It is also possible to
use HMS as the angular mode so that calculated angles are expressed in
degrees, minutes, and seconds.

   The default format for HMS values is ‘HOURS@ MINS' SECS"’.  During
entry, the letters ‘h’ (for “hours”) or ‘o’ (approximating the “degrees”
symbol) are accepted as well as ‘@’, ‘m’ is accepted in place of ‘'’,
and ‘s’ is accepted in place of ‘"’.  The HOURS value is an integer (or
integer-valued float).  The MINS value is an integer or integer-valued
float between 0 and 59.  The SECS value is a real number between 0
(inclusive) and 60 (exclusive).  A positive HMS form is interpreted as
HOURS + MINS/60 + SECS/3600.  A negative HMS form is interpreted as -
HOURS - MINS/60 - SECS/3600.  Display format for HMS forms is quite
flexible.  *Note HMS Formats::.

   HMS forms can be added and subtracted.  When they are added to
numbers, the numbers are interpreted according to the current angular
mode.  HMS forms can also be multiplied and divided by real numbers.
Dividing two HMS forms produces a real-valued ratio of the two angles.

   Just for kicks, ‘M-x calc-time’ pushes the current time of day on the
stack as an HMS form.


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Forms,  Next: Modulo Forms,  Prev: HMS Forms,  Up: Data Types

5.9 Date Forms
==============

A “date form” represents a date and possibly an associated time.  Simple
date arithmetic is supported: Adding a number to a date produces a new
date shifted by that many days; adding an HMS form to a date shifts it
by that many hours.  Subtracting two date forms computes the number of
days between them (represented as a simple number).  Many other
operations, such as multiplying two date forms, are nonsensical and are
not allowed by Calc.

   Date forms are entered and displayed enclosed in ‘< >’ brackets.  The
default format is, e.g., ‘<Wed Jan 9, 1991>’ for dates, or ‘<3:32:20pm
Wed Jan 9, 1991>’ for dates with times.  Input is flexible; date forms
can be entered in any of the usual notations for dates and times.  *Note
Date Formats::.

   Date forms are stored internally as numbers, specifically the number
of days since midnight on the morning of December 31 of the year 1 BC.
If the internal number is an integer, the form represents a date only;
if the internal number is a fraction or float, the form represents a
date and time.  For example, ‘<6:00am Thu Jan 10, 1991>’ is represented
by the number 726842.25.  The standard precision of 12 decimal digits is
enough to ensure that a (reasonable) date and time can be stored without
roundoff error.

   If the current precision is greater than 12, date forms will keep
additional digits in the seconds position.  For example, if the
precision is 15, the seconds will keep three digits after the decimal
point.  Decreasing the precision below 12 may cause the time part of a
date form to become inaccurate.  This can also happen if astronomically
high years are used, though this will not be an issue in everyday (or
even everymillennium) use.  Note that date forms without times are
stored as exact integers, so roundoff is never an issue for them.

   You can use the ‘v p’ (‘calc-pack’) and ‘v u’ (‘calc-unpack’)
commands to get at the numerical representation of a date form.  *Note
Packing and Unpacking::.

   Date forms can go arbitrarily far into the future or past.  Negative
year numbers represent years BC.  There is no “year 0”; the day before
‘<Mon Jan 1, +1>’ is ‘<Sun Dec 31, -1>’.  These are days 1 and 0
respectively in Calc’s internal numbering scheme.  The Gregorian
calendar is used for all dates, including dates before the Gregorian
calendar was invented (although that can be configured; see below).
Thus Calc’s use of the day number -10000 to represent August 15, 28 BC
should be taken with a grain of salt.

   Some historical background: The Julian calendar was created by Julius
Caesar in the year 46 BC as an attempt to fix the confusion caused by
the irregular Roman calendar that was used before that time.  The Julian
calendar introduced an extra day in all years divisible by four.  After
some initial confusion, the calendar was adopted around the year we call
8 AD.  Some centuries later it became apparent that the Julian year of
365.25 days was itself not quite right.  In 1582 Pope Gregory XIII
introduced the Gregorian calendar, which added the new rule that years
divisible by 100, but not by 400, were not to be considered leap years
despite being divisible by four.  Many countries delayed adoption of the
Gregorian calendar because of religious differences.  For example, Great
Britain and the British colonies switched to the Gregorian calendar in
September 1752, when the Julian calendar was eleven days behind the
Gregorian calendar.  That year in Britain, the day after September 2 was
September 14.  To take another example, Russia did not adopt the
Gregorian calendar until 1918, and that year in Russia the day after
January 31 was February 14.  Calc’s reckoning therefore matches English
practice starting in 1752 and Russian practice starting in 1918, but
disagrees with earlier dates in both countries.

   When the Julian calendar was introduced, it had January 1 as the
first day of the year.  By the Middle Ages, many European countries had
changed the beginning of a new year to a different date, often to a
religious festival.  Almost all countries reverted to using January 1 as
the beginning of the year by the time they adopted the Gregorian
calendar.

   Some calendars attempt to mimic the historical situation by using the
Gregorian calendar for recent dates and the Julian calendar for older
dates.  The ‘cal’ program in most Unix implementations does this, for
example.  While January 1 wasn’t always the beginning of a calendar
year, these hybrid calendars still use January 1 as the beginning of the
year even for older dates.  The customizable variable
‘calc-gregorian-switch’ (*note Customizing Calc::) can be set to have
Calc’s date forms switch from the Julian to Gregorian calendar at any
specified date.

   Today’s timekeepers introduce an occasional “leap second”.  These do
not occur regularly and Calc does not take these minor effects into
account.  (If it did, it would have to report a non-integer number of
days between, say, ‘<12:00am Mon Jan 1, 1900>’ and ‘<12:00am Sat Jan 1,
2000>’.)

   Another day counting system in common use is, confusingly, also
called “Julian.” Julian days go from noon to noon.  The Julian day
number is the numbers of days since 12:00 noon (GMT) on November 24,
4714 BC in the Gregorian calendar (i.e., January 1, 4713 BC in the
Julian calendar).  In Calc’s scheme (in GMT) the Julian day origin is
-1721424.5, because Calc starts at midnight instead of noon.  Thus to
convert a Calc date code obtained by unpacking a date form into a Julian
day number, simply add 1721424.5 after compensating for the time zone
difference.  The built-in ‘t J’ command performs this conversion for
you.

   The Julian day number is based on the Julian cycle, which was
invented in 1583 by Joseph Justus Scaliger.  Scaliger named it the
Julian cycle since it involves the Julian calendar, but some have
suggested that Scaliger named it in honor of his father, Julius Caesar
Scaliger.  The Julian cycle is based on three other cycles: the
indiction cycle, the Metonic cycle, and the solar cycle.  The indiction
cycle is a 15 year cycle originally used by the Romans for tax purposes
but later used to date medieval documents.  The Metonic cycle is a 19
year cycle; 19 years is close to being a common multiple of a solar year
and a lunar month, and so every 19 years the phases of the moon will
occur on the same days of the year.  The solar cycle is a 28 year cycle;
the Julian calendar repeats itself every 28 years.  The smallest time
period which contains multiples of all three cycles is the least common
multiple of 15 years, 19 years and 28 years, which (since they’re
pairwise relatively prime) is 15*19*28 = 7980 years.  This is the length
of a Julian cycle.  Working backwards, the previous year in which all
three cycles began was 4713 BC, and so Scaliger chose that year as the
beginning of a Julian cycle.  Since at the time there were no historical
records from before 4713 BC, using this year as a starting point had the
advantage of avoiding negative year numbers.  In 1849, the astronomer
John Herschel (son of William Herschel) suggested using the number of
days since the beginning of the Julian cycle as an astronomical dating
system; this idea was taken up by other astronomers.  (At the time, noon
was the start of the astronomical day.  Herschel originally suggested
counting the days since Jan 1, 4713 BC at noon Alexandria time; this was
later amended to noon GMT.)  Julian day numbering is largely used in
astronomy.

   The Unix operating system measures time as an integer number of
seconds since midnight, Jan 1, 1970.  To convert a Calc date value into
a Unix time stamp, first subtract 719163 (the code for ‘<Jan 1, 1970>’),
then multiply by 86400 (the number of seconds in a day) and press ‘R’ to
round to the nearest integer.  If you have a date form, you can simply
subtract the day ‘<Jan 1, 1970>’ instead of unpacking and subtracting
719163.  Likewise, divide by 86400 and add ‘<Jan 1, 1970>’ to convert
from Unix time to a Calc date form.  (Note that Unix normally maintains
the time in the GMT time zone; you may need to subtract five hours to
get New York time, or eight hours for California time.  The same is
usually true of Julian day counts.)  The built-in ‘t U’ command performs
these conversions.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modulo Forms,  Next: Error Forms,  Prev: Date Forms,  Up: Data Types

5.10 Modulo Forms
=================

A “modulo form” is a real number which is taken modulo (i.e., within an
integer multiple of) some value M.  Arithmetic modulo M often arises in
number theory.  Modulo forms are written ‘A mod M’, where A and M are
real numbers or HMS forms, and ‘0 <= a < M’.  In many applications ‘a’
and ‘M’ will be integers but this is not required.

   To create a modulo form during numeric entry, press the shift-‘M’ key
to enter the word ‘mod’.  As a special convenience, pressing shift-‘M’ a
second time automatically enters the value of ‘M’ that was most recently
used before.  During algebraic entry, either type ‘mod’ by hand or press
‘M-m’ (that’s ‘<META>-m’).  Once again, pressing this a second time
enters the current modulo.

   Modulo forms are not to be confused with the modulo operator ‘%’.
The expression ‘27 % 10’ means to compute 27 modulo 10 to produce the
result 7.  Further computations treat this 7 as just a regular integer.
The expression ‘27 mod 10’ produces the result ‘7 mod 10’; further
computations with this value are again reduced modulo 10 so that the
result always lies in the desired range.

   When two modulo forms with identical ‘M’’s are added or multiplied,
the Calculator simply adds or multiplies the values, then reduces modulo
‘M’.  If one argument is a modulo form and the other a plain number, the
plain number is treated like a compatible modulo form.  It is also
possible to raise modulo forms to powers; the result is the value raised
to the power, then reduced modulo ‘M’.  (When all values involved are
integers, this calculation is done much more efficiently than actually
computing the power and then reducing.)

   Two modulo forms ‘A mod M’ and ‘B mod M’ can be divided if ‘a’, ‘b’,
and ‘M’ are all integers.  The result is the modulo form which, when
multiplied by ‘B mod M’, produces ‘A mod M’.  If there is no solution to
this equation (which can happen only when ‘M’ is non-prime), or if any
of the arguments are non-integers, the division is left in symbolic
form.  Other operations, such as square roots, are not yet supported for
modulo forms.  (Note that, although ‘(A mod M)^.5’ will compute a
“modulo square root” in the sense of reducing ‘sqrt(a)’ modulo ‘M’, this
is not a useful definition from the number-theoretical point of view.)

   It is possible to mix HMS forms and modulo forms.  For example, an
HMS form modulo 24 could be used to manipulate clock times; an HMS form
modulo 360 would be suitable for angles.  Making the modulo ‘M’ also be
an HMS form eliminates troubles that would arise if the angular mode
were inadvertently set to Radians, in which case ‘2@ 0' 0" mod 24’ would
be interpreted as two degrees modulo 24 radians!

   Modulo forms cannot have variables or formulas for components.  If
you enter the formula ‘(x + 2) mod 5’, Calc propagates the modulus to
each of the coefficients: ‘(1 mod 5) x + (2 mod 5)’.

   You can use ‘v p’ and ‘%’ to modify modulo forms.  *Note Packing and
Unpacking::.  *Note Basic Arithmetic::.

   The algebraic function ‘makemod(a, m)’ builds the modulo form
‘a mod m’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Error Forms,  Next: Interval Forms,  Prev: Modulo Forms,  Up: Data Types

5.11 Error Forms
================

An “error form” is a number with an associated standard deviation, as in
‘2.3 +/- 0.12’.  The notation ‘X +/- sigma’ stands for an uncertain
value which follows a normal or Gaussian distribution of mean ‘x’ and
standard deviation or “error” ‘sigma’.  Both the mean and the error can
be either numbers or formulas.  Generally these are real numbers but the
mean may also be complex.  If the error is negative or complex, it is
changed to its absolute value.  An error form with zero error is
converted to a regular number by the Calculator.

   All arithmetic and transcendental functions accept error forms as
input.  Operations on the mean-value part work just like operations on
regular numbers.  The error part for any function ‘f(x)’ (such as
‘sin(x)’) is defined by the error of ‘x’ times the derivative of ‘f’
evaluated at the mean value of ‘x’.  For a two-argument function
‘f(x,y)’ (such as addition) the error is the square root of the sum of
the squares of the errors due to ‘x’ and ‘y’.  Note that this definition
assumes the errors in ‘x’ and ‘y’ are uncorrelated.  A side effect of
this definition is that ‘(2 +/- 1) * (2 +/- 1)’ is not the same as ‘(2
+/- 1)^2’; the former represents the product of two independent values
which happen to have the same probability distributions, and the latter
is the product of one random value with itself.  The former will produce
an answer with less error, since on the average the two independent
errors can be expected to cancel out.

   Consult a good text on error analysis for a discussion of the proper
use of standard deviations.  Actual errors often are neither
Gaussian-distributed nor uncorrelated, and the above formulas are valid
only when errors are small.  As an example, the error arising from
‘sin(X +/- SIGMA)’ is ‘SIGMA abs(cos(X))’.  When ‘x’ is close to zero,
‘cos(x)’ is close to one so the error in the sine is close to ‘sigma’;
this makes sense, since ‘sin(x)’ is approximately ‘x’ near zero, so a
given error in ‘x’ will produce about the same error in the sine.
Likewise, near 90 degrees ‘cos(x)’ is nearly zero and so the computed
error is small: The sine curve is nearly flat in that region, so an
error in ‘x’ has relatively little effect on the value of ‘sin(x)’.
However, consider ‘sin(90 +/- 1000)’.  The cosine of 90 is zero, so Calc
will report zero error!  We get an obviously wrong result because we
have violated the small-error approximation underlying the error
analysis.  If the error in ‘x’ had been small, the error in ‘sin(x)’
would indeed have been negligible.

   To enter an error form during regular numeric entry, use the ‘p’
(“plus-or-minus”) key to type the ‘+/-’ symbol.  (If you try actually
typing ‘+/-’ the ‘+’ key will be interpreted as the Calculator’s ‘+’
command!)  Within an algebraic formula, you can press ‘M-+’ to type the
‘+/-’ symbol, or type it out by hand.

   Error forms and complex numbers can be mixed; the formulas shown
above are used for complex numbers, too; note that if the error part
evaluates to a complex number its absolute value (or the square root of
the sum of the squares of the absolute values of the two error
contributions) is used.  Mathematically, this corresponds to a radially
symmetric Gaussian distribution of numbers on the complex plane.
However, note that Calc considers an error form with real components to
represent a real number, not a complex distribution around a real mean.

   Error forms may also be composed of HMS forms.  For best results,
both the mean and the error should be HMS forms if either one is.

   The algebraic function ‘sdev(a, b)’ builds the error form ‘a +/- b’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Interval Forms,  Next: Incomplete Objects,  Prev: Error Forms,  Up: Data Types

5.12 Interval Forms
===================

An “interval” is a subset of consecutive real numbers.  For example, the
interval ‘[2 .. 4]’ represents all the numbers from 2 to 4, inclusive.
If you multiply it by the interval ‘[0.5 .. 2]’ you obtain ‘[1 .. 8]’.
This calculation represents the fact that if you multiply some number in
the range ‘[2 .. 4]’ by some other number in the range ‘[0.5 .. 2]’,
your result will lie in the range from 1 to 8.  Interval arithmetic is
used to get a worst-case estimate of the possible range of values a
computation will produce, given the set of possible values of the input.

   Calc supports several varieties of intervals, including “closed”
intervals of the type shown above, “open” intervals such as ‘(2 .. 4)’,
which represents the range of numbers from 2 to 4 _exclusive_, and
“semi-open” intervals in which one end uses a round parenthesis and the
other a square bracket.  In mathematical terms, ‘[2 .. 4]’ means ‘2 <= x
<= 4’, whereas ‘[2 .. 4)’ represents ‘2 <= x < 4’, ‘(2 .. 4]’ represents
‘2 < x <= 4’, and ‘(2 .. 4)’ represents ‘2 < x < 4’.

   The lower and upper limits of an interval must be either real numbers
(or HMS or date forms), or symbolic expressions which are assumed to be
real-valued, or ‘-inf’ and ‘inf’.  In general the lower limit must be
less than the upper limit.  A closed interval containing only one value,
‘[3 .. 3]’, is converted to a plain number (3) automatically.  An
interval containing no values at all (such as ‘[3 .. 2]’ or ‘[2 .. 2)’)
can be represented but is not guaranteed to behave well when used in
arithmetic.  Note that the interval ‘[3 .. inf)’ represents all real
numbers greater than or equal to 3, and ‘(-inf .. inf)’ represents all
real numbers.  In fact, ‘[-inf .. inf]’ represents all real numbers
including the real infinities.

   Intervals are entered in the notation shown here, either as algebraic
formulas, or using incomplete forms.  (*Note Incomplete Objects::.)  In
algebraic formulas, multiple periods in a row are collected from left to
right, so that ‘1...1e2’ is interpreted as ‘1.0 .. 1e2’ rather than ‘1
.. 0.1e2’.  Add spaces or zeros if you want to get the other
interpretation.  If you omit the lower or upper limit, a default of
‘-inf’ or ‘inf’ (respectively) is furnished.

   Infinite mode also affects operations on intervals (*note
Infinities::).  Calc will always introduce an open infinity, as in ‘1 /
(0 .. 2] = [0.5 .. inf)’.  But closed infinities,
‘1 / [0 .. 2] = [0.5 .. inf]’, arise only in Infinite mode; otherwise
they are left unevaluated.  Note that the “direction” of a zero is not
an issue in this case since the zero is always assumed to be continuous
with the rest of the interval.  For intervals that contain zero inside
them Calc is forced to give the result, ‘1 / (-2 .. 2) = [-inf .. inf]’.

   While it may seem that intervals and error forms are similar, they
are based on entirely different concepts of inexact quantities.  An
error form ‘X +/- SIGMA’ means a variable is random, and its value could
be anything but is “probably” within one SIGMA of the mean value ‘x’.
An interval ‘[A .. B]’ means a variable’s value is unknown, but
guaranteed to lie in the specified range.  Error forms are statistical
or “average case” approximations; interval arithmetic tends to produce
“worst case” bounds on an answer.

   Intervals may not contain complex numbers, but they may contain HMS
forms or date forms.

   *Note Set Operations::, for commands that interpret interval forms as
subsets of the set of real numbers.

   The algebraic function ‘intv(n, a, b)’ builds an interval form from
‘a’ to ‘b’; ‘n’ is an integer code which must be 0 for ‘(..)’, 1 for
‘(..]’, 2 for ‘[..)’, or 3 for ‘[..]’.

   Please note that in fully rigorous interval arithmetic, care would be
taken to make sure that the computation of the lower bound rounds toward
minus infinity, while upper bound computations round toward plus
infinity.  Calc’s arithmetic always uses a round-to-nearest mode, which
means that roundoff errors could creep into an interval calculation to
produce intervals slightly smaller than they ought to be.  For example,
entering ‘[1..2]’ and pressing ‘Q 2 ^’ should yield the interval
‘[1..2]’ again, but in fact it yields the (slightly too small) interval
‘[1..1.9999999]’ due to roundoff error.


File: calc.info,  Node: Incomplete Objects,  Next: Variables,  Prev: Interval Forms,  Up: Data Types

5.13 Incomplete Objects
=======================

When ‘(’ or ‘[’ is typed to begin entering a complex number or vector,
respectively, the effect is to push an “incomplete” complex number or
vector onto the stack.  The ‘,’ key adds the value(s) at the top of the
stack onto the current incomplete object.  The ‘)’ and ‘]’ keys “close”
the incomplete object after adding any values on the top of the stack in
front of the incomplete object.

   As a result, the sequence of keystrokes ‘[ 2 , 3 <RET> 2 * , 9 ]’
pushes the vector ‘[2, 6, 9]’ onto the stack.  Likewise, ‘( 1 , 2 Q )’
pushes the complex number ‘(1, 1.414)’ (approximately).

   If several values lie on the stack in front of the incomplete object,
all are collected and appended to the object.  Thus the ‘,’ key is
redundant: ‘[ 2 <RET> 3 <RET> 2 * 9 ]’.  Some people prefer the
equivalent <SPC> key to <RET>.

   As a special case, typing ‘,’ immediately after ‘(’, ‘[’, or ‘,’ adds
a zero or duplicates the preceding value in the list being formed.
Typing <DEL> during incomplete entry removes the last item from the
list.

   The ‘;’ key is used in the same way as ‘,’ to create polar complex
numbers: ‘( 1 ; 2 )’.  When entering a vector, ‘;’ is useful for
creating a matrix.  In particular, ‘[ [ 1 , 2 ; 3 , 4 ; 5 , 6 ] ]’ is
equivalent to ‘[ [ 1 , 2 ] , [ 3 , 4 ] , [ 5 , 6 ] ]’.

   Incomplete entry is also used to enter intervals.  For example, ‘[ 2
.. 4 )’ enters a semi-open interval.  Note that when you type the first
period, it will be interpreted as a decimal point, but when you type a
second period immediately afterward, it is re-interpreted as part of the
interval symbol.  Typing ‘..’ corresponds to executing the ‘calc-dots’
command.

   If you find incomplete entry distracting, you may wish to enter
vectors and complex numbers as algebraic formulas by pressing the
apostrophe key.


File: calc.info,  Node: Variables,  Next: Formulas,  Prev: Incomplete Objects,  Up: Data Types

5.14 Variables
==============

A “variable” is somewhere between a storage register on a conventional
calculator, and a variable in a programming language.  (In fact, a Calc
variable is really just an Emacs Lisp variable that contains a Calc
number or formula.)  A variable’s name is normally composed of letters
and digits.  Calc also allows apostrophes and ‘#’ signs in variable
names.  (The Calc variable ‘foo’ corresponds to the Emacs Lisp variable
‘var-foo’, but unless you access the variable from within Emacs Lisp,
you don’t need to worry about it.  Variable names in algebraic formulas
implicitly have ‘var-’ prefixed to their names.  The ‘#’ character in
variable names used in algebraic formulas corresponds to a dash ‘-’ in
the Lisp variable name.  If the name contains any dashes, the prefix
‘var-’ is _not_ automatically added.  Thus the two formulas ‘foo + 1’
and ‘var#foo + 1’ both refer to the same variable.)

   In a command that takes a variable name, you can either type the full
name of a variable, or type a single digit to use one of the special
convenience variables ‘q0’ through ‘q9’.  For example, ‘3 s s 2’ stores
the number 3 in variable ‘q2’, and ‘3 s s foo <RET>’ stores that number
in variable ‘foo’.

   To push a variable itself (as opposed to the variable’s value) on the
stack, enter its name as an algebraic expression using the apostrophe
(<'>) key.

   The ‘=’ (‘calc-evaluate’) key “evaluates” a formula by replacing all
variables in the formula which have been given values by a ‘calc-store’
or ‘calc-let’ command by their stored values.  Other variables are left
alone.  Thus a variable that has not been stored acts like an abstract
variable in algebra; a variable that has been stored acts more like a
register in a traditional calculator.  With a positive numeric prefix
argument, ‘=’ evaluates the top N stack entries; with a negative
argument, ‘=’ evaluates the Nth stack entry.

   A few variables are called “special constants”.  Their names are ‘e’,
‘pi’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and ‘gamma’.  (*Note Scientific Functions::.)  When
they are evaluated with ‘=’, their values are calculated if necessary
according to the current precision or complex polar mode.  If you wish
to use these symbols for other purposes, simply undefine or redefine
them using ‘calc-store’.

   The variables ‘inf’, ‘uinf’, and ‘nan’ stand for infinite or
indeterminate values.  It’s best not to use them as regular variables,
since Calc uses special algebraic rules when it manipulates them.  Calc
displays a warning message if you store a value into any of these
special variables.

   *Note Store and Recall::, for a discussion of commands dealing with
variables.


File: calc.info,  Node: Formulas,  Prev: Variables,  Up: Data Types

5.15 Formulas
=============

When you press the apostrophe key you may enter any expression or
formula in algebraic form.  (Calc uses the terms “expression” and
“formula” interchangeably.)  An expression is built up of numbers,
variable names, and function calls, combined with various arithmetic
operators.  Parentheses may be used to indicate grouping.  Spaces are
ignored within formulas, except that spaces are not permitted within
variable names or numbers.  Arithmetic operators, in order from highest
to lowest precedence, and with their equivalent function names, are:

   ‘_’ [‘subscr’] (subscripts);

   postfix ‘%’ [‘percent’] (as in ‘25% = 0.25’);

   prefix ‘!’ [‘lnot’] (logical “not,” as in ‘!x’);

   ‘+/-’ [‘sdev’] (the standard deviation symbol) and ‘mod’ [‘makemod’]
(the symbol for modulo forms);

   postfix ‘!’ [‘fact’] (factorial, as in ‘n!’) and postfix ‘!!’
[‘dfact’] (double factorial);

   ‘^’ [‘pow’] (raised-to-the-power-of);

   prefix ‘+’ and ‘-’ [‘neg’] (as in ‘-x’);

   ‘*’ [‘mul’];

   ‘/’ [‘div’], ‘%’ [‘mod’] (modulo), and ‘\’ [‘idiv’] (integer
division);

   infix ‘+’ [‘add’] and ‘-’ [‘sub’] (as in ‘x-y’);

   ‘|’ [‘vconcat’] (vector concatenation);

   relations ‘=’ [‘eq’], ‘!=’ [‘neq’], ‘<’ [‘lt’], ‘>’ [‘gt’], ‘<=’
[‘leq’], and ‘>=’ [‘geq’];

   ‘&&’ [‘land’] (logical “and”);

   ‘||’ [‘lor’] (logical “or”);

   the C-style “if” operator ‘a?b:c’ [‘if’];

   ‘!!!’ [‘pnot’] (rewrite pattern “not”);

   ‘&&&’ [‘pand’] (rewrite pattern “and”);

   ‘|||’ [‘por’] (rewrite pattern “or”);

   ‘:=’ [‘assign’] (for assignments and rewrite rules);

   ‘::’ [‘condition’] (rewrite pattern condition);

   ‘=>’ [‘evalto’].

   Note that, unlike in usual computer notation, multiplication binds
more strongly than division: ‘a*b/c*d’ is equivalent to ‘(a*b)/(c*d)’.

   The multiplication sign ‘*’ may be omitted in many cases.  In
particular, if the righthand side is a number, variable name, or
parenthesized expression, the ‘*’ may be omitted.  Implicit
multiplication has the same precedence as the explicit ‘*’ operator.
The one exception to the rule is that a variable name followed by a
parenthesized expression, as in ‘f(x)’, is interpreted as a function
call, not an implicit ‘*’.  In many cases you must use a space if you
omit the ‘*’: ‘2a’ is the same as ‘2*a’, and ‘a b’ is the same as ‘a*b’,
but ‘ab’ is a variable called ‘ab’, _not_ the product of ‘a’ and ‘b’!
Also note that ‘f (x)’ is still a function call.

   The rules are slightly different for vectors written with square
brackets.  In vectors, the space character is interpreted (like the
comma) as a separator of elements of the vector.  Thus ‘[ 2a b+c d ]’ is
equivalent to ‘[2*a, b+c, d]’, whereas ‘2a b+c d’ is equivalent to
‘2*a*b + c*d’.  Note that spaces around the brackets, and around
explicit commas, are ignored.  To force spaces to be interpreted as
multiplication you can enclose a formula in parentheses as in ‘[(a b)
2(c d)]’, which is interpreted as ‘[a*b, 2*c*d]’.  An implicit comma is
also inserted between ‘][’, as in the matrix ‘[[1 2][3 4]]’.

   Vectors that contain commas (not embedded within nested parentheses
or brackets) do not treat spaces specially: ‘[a b, 2 c d]’ is a vector
of two elements.  Also, if it would be an error to treat spaces as
separators, but not otherwise, then Calc will ignore spaces: ‘[a - b]’
is a vector of one element, but ‘[a -b]’ is a vector of two elements.
Finally, vectors entered with curly braces instead of square brackets do
not give spaces any special treatment.  When Calc displays a vector that
does not contain any commas, it will insert parentheses if necessary to
make the meaning clear: ‘[(a b)]’.

   The expression ‘5%-2’ is ambiguous; is this five-percent minus two,
or five modulo minus-two?  Calc always interprets the leftmost symbol as
an infix operator preferentially (modulo, in this case), so you would
need to write ‘(5%)-2’ to get the former interpretation.

   A function call is, e.g., ‘sin(1+x)’.  (The Calc algebraic function
‘foo’ corresponds to the Emacs Lisp function ‘calcFunc-foo’, but unless
you access the function from within Emacs Lisp, you don’t need to worry
about it.)  Most mathematical Calculator commands like ‘calc-sin’ have
function equivalents like ‘sin’.  If no Lisp function is defined for a
function called by a formula, the call is left as it is during algebraic
manipulation: ‘f(x+y)’ is left alone.  Beware that many innocent-looking
short names like ‘in’ and ‘re’ have predefined meanings which could
surprise you; however, single letters or single letters followed by
digits are always safe to use for your own function names.  *Note
Function Index::.

   In the documentation for particular commands, the notation ‘H S’
(‘calc-sinh’) [‘sinh’] means that the key sequence ‘H S’, the command
‘M-x calc-sinh’, and the algebraic function ‘sinh(x)’ all represent the
same operation.

   Commands that interpret (“parse”) text as algebraic formulas include
algebraic entry (‘'’), editing commands like ‘`’ which parse the
contents of the editing buffer when you finish, the ‘C-x * g’ and
‘C-x * r’ commands, the ‘C-y’ command, the X window system “paste” mouse
operation, and Embedded mode.  All of these operations use the same
rules for parsing formulas; in particular, language modes (*note
Language Modes::) affect them all in the same way.

   When you read a large amount of text into the Calculator (say a
vector which represents a big set of rewrite rules; *note Rewrite
Rules::), you may wish to include comments in the text.  Calc’s formula
parser ignores the symbol ‘%%’ and anything following it on a line:

     [ a + b,   %% the sum of "a" and "b"
       c + d,
       %% last line is coming up:
       e + f ]

This is parsed exactly the same as ‘[ a + b, c + d, e + f ]’.

   *Note Syntax Tables::, for a way to create your own operators and
other input notations.  *Note Compositions::, for a way to create new
display formats.

   *Note Algebra::, for commands for manipulating formulas symbolically.


File: calc.info,  Node: Stack and Trail,  Next: Mode Settings,  Prev: Data Types,  Up: Top

6 Stack and Trail Commands
**************************

This chapter describes the Calc commands for manipulating objects on the
stack and in the trail buffer.  (These commands operate on objects of
any type, such as numbers, vectors, formulas, and incomplete objects.)

* Menu:

* Stack Manipulation::
* Editing Stack Entries::
* Trail Commands::
* Keep Arguments::


File: calc.info,  Node: Stack Manipulation,  Next: Editing Stack Entries,  Prev: Stack and Trail,  Up: Stack and Trail

6.1 Stack Manipulation Commands
===============================

To duplicate the top object on the stack, press <RET> or <SPC> (two
equivalent keys for the ‘calc-enter’ command).  Given a positive numeric
prefix argument, these commands duplicate several elements at the top of
the stack.  Given a negative argument, these commands duplicate the
specified element of the stack.  Given an argument of zero, they
duplicate the entire stack.  For example, with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack,
<RET> creates ‘10 20 30 30’, ‘C-u 2 <RET>’ creates ‘10 20 30 20 30’,
‘C-u - 2 <RET>’ creates ‘10 20 30 20’, and ‘C-u 0 <RET>’ creates ‘10 20
30 10 20 30’.

   The <LFD> (‘calc-over’) command (on a key marked Line-Feed if you
have it, else on ‘C-j’) is like ‘calc-enter’ except that the sign of the
numeric prefix argument is interpreted oppositely.  Also, with no prefix
argument the default argument is 2.  Thus with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack,
<LFD> and ‘C-u 2 <LFD>’ are both equivalent to ‘C-u - 2 <RET>’,
producing ‘10 20 30 20’.

   To remove the top element from the stack, press <DEL> (‘calc-pop’).
The ‘C-d’ key is a synonym for <DEL>.  (If the top element is an
incomplete object with at least one element, the last element is removed
from it.)  Given a positive numeric prefix argument, several elements
are removed.  Given a negative argument, the specified element of the
stack is deleted.  Given an argument of zero, the entire stack is
emptied.  For example, with ‘10 20 30’ on the stack, <DEL> leaves ‘10
20’, ‘C-u 2 <DEL>’ leaves ‘10’, ‘C-u - 2 <DEL>’ leaves ‘10 30’, and ‘C-u
0 <DEL>’ leaves an empty stack.

   The ‘M-<DEL>’ (‘calc-pop-above’) command is to <DEL> what <LFD> is to
<RET>: It interprets the sign of the numeric prefix argument in the
opposite way, and the default argument is 2.  Thus ‘M-<DEL>’ by itself
removes the second-from-top stack element, leaving the first, third,
fourth, and so on; ‘M-3 M-<DEL>’ deletes the third stack element.

   The above commands do not depend on the location of the cursor.  If
the customizable variable ‘calc-context-sensitive-enter’ is non-‘nil’
(*note Customizing Calc::), these commands will become context
sensitive.  For example, instead of duplicating the top of the stack,
<RET> will copy the element at the cursor to the top of the stack.  With
a positive numeric prefix, a copy of the element at the cursor and the
appropriate number of preceding elements will be placed at the top of
the stack.  A negative prefix will still duplicate the specified element
of the stack regardless of the cursor position.  Similarly, <DEL> will
remove the corresponding elements from the stack.

   To exchange the top two elements of the stack, press <TAB>
(‘calc-roll-down’).  Given a positive numeric prefix argument, the
specified number of elements at the top of the stack are rotated
downward.  Given a negative argument, the entire stack is rotated
downward the specified number of times.  Given an argument of zero, the
entire stack is reversed top-for-bottom.  For example, with ‘10 20 30 40
50’ on the stack, <TAB> creates ‘10 20 30 50 40’, ‘C-u 3 <TAB>’ creates
‘10 20 50 30 40’, ‘C-u - 2 <TAB>’ creates ‘40 50 10 20 30’, and ‘C-u 0
<TAB>’ creates ‘50 40 30 20 10’.

   The command ‘M-<TAB>’ (‘calc-roll-up’) is analogous to <TAB> except
that it rotates upward instead of downward.  Also, the default with no
prefix argument is to rotate the top 3 elements.  For example, with ‘10
20 30 40 50’ on the stack, ‘M-<TAB>’ creates ‘10 20 40 50 30’, ‘C-u 4
M-<TAB>’ creates ‘10 30 40 50 20’, ‘C-u - 2 M-<TAB>’ creates ‘30 40 50
10 20’, and ‘C-u 0 M-<TAB>’ creates ‘50 40 30 20 10’.

   A good way to view the operation of <TAB> and ‘M-<TAB>’ is in terms
of moving a particular element to a new position in the stack.  With a
positive argument N, <TAB> moves the top stack element down to level N,
making room for it by pulling all the intervening stack elements toward
the top.  ‘M-<TAB>’ moves the element at level N up to the top.
(Compare with <LFD>, which copies instead of moving the element in level
N.)

   With a negative argument -N, <TAB> rotates the stack to move the
object in level N to the deepest place in the stack, and the object in
level N+1 to the top.  ‘M-<TAB>’ rotates the deepest stack element to be
in level N, also putting the top stack element in level N+1.

   *Note Selecting Subformulas::, for a way to apply these commands to
any portion of a vector or formula on the stack.

   The command ‘C-x C-t’ (‘calc-transpose-lines’) will transpose the
stack object determined by the point with the stack object at the next
higher level.  For example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack and the
point on the line containing ‘30’, ‘C-x C-t’ creates ‘10 20 40 30 50’.
More generally, ‘C-x C-t’ acts on the stack objects determined by the
current point (and mark) similar to how the text-mode command
‘transpose-lines’ acts on lines.  With argument N, ‘C-x C-t’ will move
the stack object at the level above the current point and move it past N
other objects; for example, with ‘10 20 30 40 50’ on the stack and the
point on the line containing ‘30’, ‘C-u 2 C-x C-t’ creates ‘10 40 20 30
50’.  With an argument of 0, ‘C-x C-t’ will switch the stack objects at
the levels determined by the point and the mark.


File: calc.info,  Node: Editing Stack Entries,  Next: Trail Commands,  Prev: Stack Manipulation,  Up: Stack and Trail

6.2 Editing Stack Entries
=========================

The ‘`’ (‘calc-edit’) command creates a temporary buffer (‘*Calc Edit*’)
for editing the top-of-stack value using regular Emacs commands.  Note
that ‘`’ is a grave accent, not an apostrophe.  With a numeric prefix
argument, it edits the specified number of stack entries at once.  (An
argument of zero edits the entire stack; a negative argument edits one
specific stack entry.)

   When you are done editing, press ‘C-c C-c’ to finish and return to
Calc.  The <RET> and <LFD> keys also work to finish most sorts of
editing, though in some cases Calc leaves <RET> with its usual meaning
(“insert a newline”) if it’s a situation where you might want to insert
new lines into the editing buffer.

   When you finish editing, the Calculator parses the lines of text in
the ‘*Calc Edit*’ buffer as numbers or formulas, replaces the original
stack elements in the original buffer with these new values, then kills
the ‘*Calc Edit*’ buffer.  The original Calculator buffer continues to
exist during editing, but for best results you should be careful not to
change it until you have finished the edit.  You can also cancel the
edit by killing the buffer with ‘C-x k’.

   The formula is normally reevaluated as it is put onto the stack.  For
example, editing ‘a + 2’ to ‘3 + 2’ and pressing ‘C-c C-c’ will push 5
on the stack.  If you use <LFD> to finish, Calc will put the result on
the stack without evaluating it.

   If you give a prefix argument to ‘C-c C-c’, Calc will not kill the
‘*Calc Edit*’ buffer.  You can switch back to that buffer and continue
editing if you wish.  However, you should understand that if you
initiated the edit with ‘`’, the ‘C-c C-c’ operation will be programmed
to replace the top of the stack with the new edited value, and it will
do this even if you have rearranged the stack in the meanwhile.  This is
not so much of a problem with other editing commands, though, such as ‘s
e’ (‘calc-edit-variable’; *note Operations on Variables::).

   If the ‘calc-edit’ command involves more than one stack entry, each
line of the ‘*Calc Edit*’ buffer is interpreted as a separate formula.
Otherwise, the entire buffer is interpreted as one formula, with line
breaks ignored.  (You can use ‘C-o’ or ‘C-q C-j’ to insert a newline in
the buffer without pressing <RET>.)

   The ‘`’ key also works during numeric or algebraic entry.  The text
entered so far is moved to the ‘*Calc Edit*’ buffer for more extensive
editing than is convenient in the minibuffer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Trail Commands,  Next: Keep Arguments,  Prev: Editing Stack Entries,  Up: Stack and Trail

6.3 Trail Commands
==================

The commands for manipulating the Calc Trail buffer are two-key
sequences beginning with the ‘t’ prefix.

   The ‘t d’ (‘calc-trail-display’) command turns display of the trail
on and off.  Normally the trail display is toggled on if it was off, off
if it was on.  With a numeric prefix of zero, this command always turns
the trail off; with a prefix of one, it always turns the trail on.  The
other trail-manipulation commands described here automatically turn the
trail on.  Note that when the trail is off values are still recorded
there; they are simply not displayed.  To set Emacs to turn the trail
off by default, type ‘t d’ and then save the mode settings with ‘m m’
(‘calc-save-modes’).

   The ‘t i’ (‘calc-trail-in’) and ‘t o’ (‘calc-trail-out’) commands
switch the cursor into and out of the Calc Trail window.  In practice
they are rarely used, since the commands shown below are a more
convenient way to move around in the trail, and they work “by remote
control” when the cursor is still in the Calculator window.

   There is a “trail pointer” which selects some entry of the trail at
any given time.  The trail pointer looks like a ‘>’ symbol right before
the selected number.  The following commands operate on the trail
pointer in various ways.

   The ‘t y’ (‘calc-trail-yank’) command reads the selected value in the
trail and pushes it onto the Calculator stack.  It allows you to re-use
any previously computed value without retyping.  With a numeric prefix
argument N, it yanks the value N lines above the current trail pointer.

   The ‘t <’ (‘calc-trail-scroll-left’) and ‘t >’
(‘calc-trail-scroll-right’) commands horizontally scroll the trail
window left or right by one half of its width.

   The ‘t n’ (‘calc-trail-next’) and ‘t p’ (‘calc-trail-previous)’
commands move the trail pointer down or up one line.  The ‘t f’
(‘calc-trail-forward’) and ‘t b’ (‘calc-trail-backward’) commands move
the trail pointer down or up one screenful at a time.  All of these
commands accept numeric prefix arguments to move several lines or
screenfuls at a time.

   The ‘t [’ (‘calc-trail-first’) and ‘t ]’ (‘calc-trail-last’) commands
move the trail pointer to the first or last line of the trail.  The ‘t
h’ (‘calc-trail-here’) command moves the trail pointer to the cursor
position; unlike the other trail commands, ‘t h’ works only when Calc
Trail is the selected window.

   The ‘t s’ (‘calc-trail-isearch-forward’) and ‘t r’
(‘calc-trail-isearch-backward’) commands perform an incremental search
forward or backward through the trail.  You can press <RET> to terminate
the search; the trail pointer moves to the current line.  If you cancel
the search with ‘C-g’, the trail pointer stays where it was when the
search began.

   The ‘t m’ (‘calc-trail-marker’) command allows you to enter a line of
text of your own choosing into the trail.  The text is inserted after
the line containing the trail pointer; this usually means it is added to
the end of the trail.  Trail markers are useful mainly as the targets
for later incremental searches in the trail.

   The ‘t k’ (‘calc-trail-kill’) command removes the selected line from
the trail.  The line is saved in the Emacs kill ring suitable for
yanking into another buffer, but it is not easy to yank the text back
into the trail buffer.  With a numeric prefix argument, this command
kills the N lines below or above the selected one.

   The ‘t .’ (‘calc-full-trail-vectors’) command is described elsewhere;
*note Vector and Matrix Formats::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keep Arguments,  Prev: Trail Commands,  Up: Stack and Trail

6.4 Keep Arguments
==================

The ‘K’ (‘calc-keep-args’) command acts like a prefix for the following
command.  It prevents that command from removing its arguments from the
stack.  For example, after ‘2 <RET> 3 +’, the stack contains the sole
number 5, but after ‘2 <RET> 3 K +’, the stack contains the arguments
and the result: ‘2 3 5’.

   With the exception of keyboard macros, this works for all commands
that take arguments off the stack.  (To avoid potentially unpleasant
behavior, a ‘K’ prefix before a keyboard macro will be ignored.  A ‘K’
prefix called _within_ the keyboard macro will still take effect.)  As
another example, ‘K a s’ simplifies a formula, pushing the simplified
version of the formula onto the stack after the original formula (rather
than replacing the original formula).  Note that you could get the same
effect by typing ‘<RET> a s’, copying the formula and then simplifying
the copy.  One difference is that for a very large formula the time
taken to format the intermediate copy in ‘<RET> a s’ could be
noticeable; ‘K a s’ would avoid this extra work.

   Even stack manipulation commands are affected.  <TAB> works by
popping two values and pushing them back in the opposite order, so ‘2
<RET> 3 K <TAB>’ produces ‘2 3 3 2’.

   A few Calc commands provide other ways of doing the same thing.  For
example, ‘' sin($)’ replaces the number on the stack with its sine using
algebraic entry; to push the sine and keep the original argument you
could use either ‘' sin($1)’ or ‘K ' sin($)’.  *Note Algebraic Entry::.
Also, the ‘s s’ command is effectively the same as ‘K s t’.  *Note
Storing Variables::.

   If you execute a command and then decide you really wanted to keep
the argument, you can press ‘M-<RET>’ (‘calc-last-args’).  This command
pushes the last arguments that were popped by any command onto the
stack.  Note that the order of things on the stack will be different
than with ‘K’: ‘2 <RET> 3 + M-<RET>’ leaves ‘5 2 3’ on the stack instead
of ‘2 3 5’.  *Note Undo::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Mode Settings,  Next: Arithmetic,  Prev: Stack and Trail,  Up: Top

7 Mode Settings
***************

This chapter describes commands that set modes in the Calculator.  They
do not affect the contents of the stack, although they may change the
_appearance_ or _interpretation_ of the stack’s contents.

* Menu:

* General Mode Commands::
* Precision::
* Inverse and Hyperbolic::
* Calculation Modes::
* Simplification Modes::
* Declarations::
* Display Modes::
* Language Modes::
* Modes Variable::
* Calc Mode Line::


File: calc.info,  Node: General Mode Commands,  Next: Precision,  Prev: Mode Settings,  Up: Mode Settings

7.1 General Mode Commands
=========================

You can save all of the current mode settings in your Calc init file
(the file given by the variable ‘calc-settings-file’, typically
‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’) with the ‘m m’ (‘calc-save-modes’) command.  This
will cause Emacs to reestablish these modes each time it starts up.  The
modes saved in the file include everything controlled by the ‘m’ and ‘d’
prefix keys, the current precision and binary word size, whether or not
the trail is displayed, the current height of the Calc window, and more.
The current interface (used when you type ‘C-x * *’) is also saved.  If
there were already saved mode settings in the file, they are replaced.
Otherwise, the new mode information is appended to the end of the file.

   The ‘m R’ (‘calc-mode-record-mode’) command tells Calc to record all
the mode settings (as if by pressing ‘m m’) every time a mode setting
changes.  If the modes are saved this way, then this “automatic mode
recording” mode is also saved.  Type ‘m R’ again to disable this method
of recording the mode settings.  To turn it off permanently, the ‘m m’
command will also be necessary.  (If Embedded mode is enabled, other
options for recording the modes are available; *note Mode Settings in
Embedded Mode::.)

   The ‘m F’ (‘calc-settings-file-name’) command allows you to choose a
different file than the current value of ‘calc-settings-file’ for ‘m m’,
‘Z P’, and similar commands to save permanent information.  You are
prompted for a file name.  All Calc modes are then reset to their
default values, then settings from the file you named are loaded if this
file exists, and this file becomes the one that Calc will use in the
future for commands like ‘m m’.  The default settings file name is
‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’.  You can see the current file name by giving a
blank response to the ‘m F’ prompt.  See also the discussion of the
‘calc-settings-file’ variable; *note Customizing Calc::.

   If the file name you give is your user init file (typically
‘~/.emacs’), ‘m F’ will not automatically load the new file.  This is
because your user init file may contain other things you don’t want to
reread.  You can give a numeric prefix argument of 1 to ‘m F’ to force
it to read the file no matter what.  Conversely, an argument of -1 tells
‘m F’ _not_ to read the new file.  An argument of 2 or -2 tells ‘m F’
not to reset the modes to their defaults beforehand, which is useful if
you intend your new file to have a variant of the modes present in the
file you were using before.

   The ‘m x’ (‘calc-always-load-extensions’) command enables a mode in
which the first use of Calc loads the entire program, including all
extensions modules.  Otherwise, the extensions modules will not be
loaded until the various advanced Calc features are used.  Since this
mode only has effect when Calc is first loaded, ‘m x’ is usually
followed by ‘m m’ to make the mode-setting permanent.  To load all of
Calc just once, rather than always in the future, you can press ‘C-x *
L’.

   The ‘m S’ (‘calc-shift-prefix’) command enables a mode in which all
of Calc’s letter prefix keys may be typed shifted as well as unshifted.
If you are typing, say, ‘a S’ (‘calc-solve-for’) quite often you might
find it easier to turn this mode on so that you can type ‘A S’ instead.
When this mode is enabled, the commands that used to be on those single
shifted letters (e.g., ‘A’ (‘calc-abs’)) can now be invoked by pressing
the shifted letter twice: ‘A A’.  Note that the ‘v’ prefix key always
works both shifted and unshifted, and the ‘z’ and ‘Z’ prefix keys are
always distinct.  Also, the ‘h’ prefix is not affected by this mode.
Press ‘m S’ again to disable shifted-prefix mode.


File: calc.info,  Node: Precision,  Next: Inverse and Hyperbolic,  Prev: General Mode Commands,  Up: Mode Settings

7.2 Precision
=============

The ‘p’ (‘calc-precision’) command controls the precision to which
floating-point calculations are carried.  The precision must be at least
3 digits and may be arbitrarily high, within the limits of memory and
time.  This affects only floats: Integer and rational calculations are
always carried out with as many digits as necessary.

   The ‘p’ key prompts for the current precision.  If you wish you can
instead give the precision as a numeric prefix argument.

   Many internal calculations are carried to one or two digits higher
precision than normal.  Results are rounded down afterward to the
current precision.  Unless a special display mode has been selected,
floats are always displayed with their full stored precision, i.e., what
you see is what you get.  Reducing the current precision does not round
values already on the stack, but those values will be rounded down
before being used in any calculation.  The ‘c 0’ through ‘c 9’ commands
(*note Conversions::) can be used to round an existing value to a new
precision.

   It is important to distinguish the concepts of “precision” and
“accuracy”.  In the normal usage of these words, the number 123.4567 has
a precision of 7 digits but an accuracy of 4 digits.  The precision is
the total number of digits not counting leading or trailing zeros
(regardless of the position of the decimal point).  The accuracy is
simply the number of digits after the decimal point (again not counting
trailing zeros).  In Calc you control the precision, not the accuracy of
computations.  If you were to set the accuracy instead, then
calculations like ‘exp(100)’ would generate many more digits than you
would typically need, while ‘exp(-100)’ would probably round to zero!
In Calc, both these computations give you exactly 12 (or the requested
number of) significant digits.

   The only Calc features that deal with accuracy instead of precision
are fixed-point display mode for floats (‘d f’; *note Float Formats::),
and the rounding functions like ‘floor’ and ‘round’ (*note Integer
Truncation::).  Also, ‘c 0’ through ‘c 9’ deal with both precision and
accuracy depending on the magnitudes of the numbers involved.

   If you need to work with a particular fixed accuracy (say, dollars
and cents with two digits after the decimal point), one solution is to
work with integers and an “implied” decimal point.  For example, $8.99
divided by 6 would be entered ‘899 <RET> 6 /’, yielding 149.833
(actually $1.49833 with our implied decimal point); pressing ‘R’ would
round this to 150 cents, i.e., $1.50.

   *Note Floats::, for still more on floating-point precision and
related issues.


File: calc.info,  Node: Inverse and Hyperbolic,  Next: Calculation Modes,  Prev: Precision,  Up: Mode Settings

7.3 Inverse and Hyperbolic Flags
================================

There is no single-key equivalent to the ‘calc-arcsin’ function.
Instead, you must first press ‘I’ (‘calc-inverse’) to set the “Inverse
Flag”, then press ‘S’ (‘calc-sin’).  The ‘I’ key actually toggles the
Inverse Flag.  When this flag is set, the word ‘Inv’ appears in the mode
line.

   Likewise, the ‘H’ key (‘calc-hyperbolic’) sets or clears the
Hyperbolic Flag, which transforms ‘calc-sin’ into ‘calc-sinh’.  If both
of these flags are set at once, the effect will be ‘calc-arcsinh’.  (The
Hyperbolic flag is also used by some non-trigonometric commands; for
example ‘H L’ computes a base-10, instead of base-e, logarithm.)

   Command names like ‘calc-arcsin’ are provided for completeness, and
may be executed with ‘x’ or ‘M-x’.  Their effect is simply to toggle the
Inverse and/or Hyperbolic flags and then execute the corresponding base
command (‘calc-sin’ in this case).

   The ‘O’ key (‘calc-option’) sets another flag, the “Option Flag”,
which also can alter the subsequent Calc command in various ways.

   The Inverse, Hyperbolic and Option flags apply only to the next
Calculator command, after which they are automatically cleared.  (They
are also cleared if the next keystroke is not a Calc command.)  Digits
you type after ‘I’, ‘H’ or ‘O’ (or ‘K’) are treated as prefix arguments
for the next command, not as numeric entries.  The same is true of
‘C-u’, but not of the minus sign (‘K -’ means to subtract and keep
arguments).

   Another Calc prefix flag, ‘K’ (keep-arguments), is discussed
elsewhere.  *Note Keep Arguments::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Calculation Modes,  Next: Simplification Modes,  Prev: Inverse and Hyperbolic,  Up: Mode Settings

7.4 Calculation Modes
=====================

The commands in this section are two-key sequences beginning with the
‘m’ prefix.  (That’s the letter ‘m’, not the <META> key.)  The ‘m a’
(‘calc-algebraic-mode’) command is described elsewhere (*note Algebraic
Entry::).

* Menu:

* Angular Modes::
* Polar Mode::
* Fraction Mode::
* Infinite Mode::
* Symbolic Mode::
* Matrix Mode::
* Automatic Recomputation::
* Working Message::


File: calc.info,  Node: Angular Modes,  Next: Polar Mode,  Prev: Calculation Modes,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.1 Angular Modes
-------------------

The Calculator supports three notations for angles: radians, degrees,
and degrees-minutes-seconds.  When a number is presented to a function
like ‘sin’ that requires an angle, the current angular mode is used to
interpret the number as either radians or degrees.  If an HMS form is
presented to ‘sin’, it is always interpreted as degrees-minutes-seconds.

   Functions that compute angles produce a number in radians, a number
in degrees, or an HMS form depending on the current angular mode.  If
the result is a complex number and the current mode is HMS, the number
is instead expressed in degrees.  (Complex-number calculations would
normally be done in Radians mode, though.  Complex numbers are converted
to degrees by calculating the complex result in radians and then
multiplying by 180 over ‘pi’.)

   The ‘m r’ (‘calc-radians-mode’), ‘m d’ (‘calc-degrees-mode’), and ‘m
h’ (‘calc-hms-mode’) commands control the angular mode.  The current
angular mode is displayed on the Emacs mode line.  The default angular
mode is Degrees.


File: calc.info,  Node: Polar Mode,  Next: Fraction Mode,  Prev: Angular Modes,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.2 Polar Mode
----------------

The Calculator normally “prefers” rectangular complex numbers in the
sense that rectangular form is used when the proper form can not be
decided from the input.  This might happen by multiplying a rectangular
number by a polar one, by taking the square root of a negative real
number, or by entering ‘( 2 <SPC> 3 )’.

   The ‘m p’ (‘calc-polar-mode’) command toggles complex-number
preference between rectangular and polar forms.  In Polar mode, all of
the above example situations would produce polar complex numbers.


File: calc.info,  Node: Fraction Mode,  Next: Infinite Mode,  Prev: Polar Mode,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.3 Fraction Mode
-------------------

Division of two integers normally yields a floating-point number if the
result cannot be expressed as an integer.  In some cases you would
rather get an exact fractional answer.  One way to accomplish this is to
use the ‘:’ (‘calc-fdiv’) [‘fdiv’] command, which divides the two
integers on the top of the stack to produce a fraction: ‘6 <RET> 4 :’
produces ‘3:2’ even though ‘6 <RET> 4 /’ produces ‘1.5’.

   To set the Calculator to produce fractional results for normal
integer divisions, use the ‘m f’ (‘calc-frac-mode’) command.  For
example, ‘8/4’ produces ‘2’ in either mode, but ‘6/4’ produces ‘3:2’ in
Fraction mode, ‘1.5’ in Float mode.

   At any time you can use ‘c f’ (‘calc-float’) to convert a fraction to
a float, or ‘c F’ (‘calc-fraction’) to convert a float to a fraction.
*Note Conversions::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Infinite Mode,  Next: Symbolic Mode,  Prev: Fraction Mode,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.4 Infinite Mode
-------------------

The Calculator normally treats results like ‘1 / 0’ as errors; formulas
like this are left in unsimplified form.  But Calc can be put into a
mode where such calculations instead produce “infinite” results.

   The ‘m i’ (‘calc-infinite-mode’) command turns this mode on and off.
When the mode is off, infinities do not arise except in calculations
that already had infinities as inputs.  (One exception is that infinite
open intervals like ‘[0 .. inf)’ can be generated; however, intervals
closed at infinity (‘[0 .. inf]’) will not be generated when Infinite
mode is off.)

   With Infinite mode turned on, ‘1 / 0’ will generate ‘uinf’, an
undirected infinity.  *Note Infinities::, for a discussion of the
difference between ‘inf’ and ‘uinf’.  Also, ‘0 / 0’ evaluates to ‘nan’,
the “indeterminate” symbol.  Various other functions can also return
infinities in this mode; for example, ‘ln(0) = -inf’, and ‘gamma(-7) =
uinf’.  Once again, note that ‘exp(inf) = inf’ regardless of Infinite
mode because this calculation has infinity as an input.

   The ‘m i’ command with a numeric prefix argument of zero, i.e., ‘C-u
0 m i’, turns on a Positive Infinite mode in which zero is treated as
positive instead of being directionless.  Thus, ‘1 / 0 = inf’ and ‘-1 /
0 = -inf’ in this mode.  Note that zero never actually has a sign in
Calc; there are no separate representations for +0 and -0.  Positive
Infinite mode merely changes the interpretation given to the single
symbol, ‘0’.  One consequence of this is that, while you might expect ‘1
/ -0 = -inf’, actually ‘1 / -0’ is equivalent to ‘1 / 0’, which is equal
to positive ‘inf’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Symbolic Mode,  Next: Matrix Mode,  Prev: Infinite Mode,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.5 Symbolic Mode
-------------------

Calculations are normally performed numerically wherever possible.  For
example, the ‘calc-sqrt’ command, or ‘sqrt’ function in an algebraic
expression, produces a numeric answer if the argument is a number or a
symbolic expression if the argument is an expression: ‘2 Q’ pushes
1.4142 but ‘' x+1 <RET> Q’ pushes ‘sqrt(x+1)’.

   In “Symbolic mode”, controlled by the ‘m s’ (‘calc-symbolic-mode’)
command, functions which would produce inexact, irrational results are
left in symbolic form.  Thus ‘16 Q’ pushes 4, but ‘2 Q’ pushes
‘sqrt(2)’.

   The shift-‘N’ (‘calc-eval-num’) command evaluates numerically the
expression at the top of the stack, by temporarily disabling
‘calc-symbolic-mode’ and executing ‘=’ (‘calc-evaluate’).  Given a
numeric prefix argument, it also sets the floating-point precision to
the specified value for the duration of the command.

   To evaluate a formula numerically without expanding the variables it
contains, you can use the key sequence ‘m s a v m s’ (this uses
‘calc-alg-evaluate’, which resimplifies but doesn’t evaluate variables.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Mode,  Next: Automatic Recomputation,  Prev: Symbolic Mode,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.6 Matrix and Scalar Modes
-----------------------------

Calc sometimes makes assumptions during algebraic manipulation that are
awkward or incorrect when vectors and matrices are involved.  Calc has
two modes, “Matrix mode” and “Scalar mode”, which modify its behavior
around vectors in useful ways.

   Press ‘m v’ (‘calc-matrix-mode’) once to enter Matrix mode.  In this
mode, all objects are assumed to be matrices unless provably otherwise.
One major effect is that Calc will no longer consider multiplication to
be commutative.  (Recall that in matrix arithmetic, ‘A*B’ is not the
same as ‘B*A’.)  This assumption affects rewrite rules and algebraic
simplification.  Another effect of this mode is that calculations that
would normally produce constants like 0 and 1 (e.g., ‘a - a’ and ‘a /
a’, respectively) will now produce function calls that represent
“generic” zero or identity matrices: ‘idn(0)’, ‘idn(1)’.  The ‘idn’
function ‘idn(A,N)’ returns A times an NxN identity matrix; if N is
omitted, it doesn’t know what dimension to use and so the ‘idn’ call
remains in symbolic form.  However, if this generic identity matrix is
later combined with a matrix whose size is known, it will be converted
into a true identity matrix of the appropriate size.  On the other hand,
if it is combined with a scalar (as in ‘idn(1) + 2’), Calc will assume
it really was a scalar after all and produce, e.g., 3.

   Press ‘m v’ a second time to get Scalar mode.  Here, objects are
assumed _not_ to be vectors or matrices unless provably so.  For
example, normally adding a variable to a vector, as in ‘[x, y, z] + a’,
will leave the sum in symbolic form because as far as Calc knows, ‘a’
could represent either a number or another 3-vector.  In Scalar mode,
‘a’ is assumed to be a non-vector, and the addition is evaluated to
‘[x+a, y+a, z+a]’.

   Press ‘m v’ a third time to return to the normal mode of operation.

   If you press ‘m v’ with a numeric prefix argument N, you get a
special “dimensioned” Matrix mode in which matrices of unknown size are
assumed to be NxN square matrices.  Then, the function call ‘idn(1)’
will expand into an actual matrix rather than representing a “generic”
matrix.  Simply typing ‘C-u m v’ will get you a square Matrix mode, in
which matrices of unknown size are assumed to be square matrices of
unspecified size.

   Of course these modes are approximations to the true state of
affairs, which is probably that some quantities will be matrices and
others will be scalars.  One solution is to “declare” certain variables
or functions to be scalar-valued.  *Note Declarations::, to see how to
make declarations in Calc.

   There is nothing stopping you from declaring a variable to be scalar
and then storing a matrix in it; however, if you do, the results you get
from Calc may not be valid.  Suppose you let Calc get the result ‘[x+a,
y+a, z+a]’ shown above, and then stored ‘[1, 2, 3]’ in ‘a’.  The result
would not be the same as for ‘[x, y, z] + [1, 2, 3]’, but that’s because
you have broken your earlier promise to Calc that ‘a’ would be scalar.

   Another way to mix scalars and matrices is to use selections (*note
Selecting Subformulas::).  Use Matrix mode when operating on your
formula normally; then, to apply Scalar mode to a certain part of the
formula without affecting the rest just select that part, change into
Scalar mode and press ‘=’ to resimplify the part under this mode, then
change back to Matrix mode before deselecting.


File: calc.info,  Node: Automatic Recomputation,  Next: Working Message,  Prev: Matrix Mode,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.7 Automatic Recomputation
-----------------------------

The “evaluates-to” operator, ‘=>’, has the special property that any
‘=>’ formulas on the stack are recomputed whenever variable values or
mode settings that might affect them are changed.  *Note Evaluates-To
Operator::.

   The ‘m C’ (‘calc-auto-recompute’) command turns this automatic
recomputation on and off.  If you turn it off, Calc will not update ‘=>’
operators on the stack (nor those in the attached Embedded mode buffer,
if there is one).  They will not be updated unless you explicitly do so
by pressing ‘=’ or until you press ‘m C’ to turn recomputation back on.
(While automatic recomputation is off, you can think of ‘m C m C’ as a
command to update all ‘=>’ operators while leaving recomputation off.)

   To update ‘=>’ operators in an Embedded buffer while automatic
recomputation is off, use ‘C-x * u’.  *Note Embedded Mode::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Working Message,  Prev: Automatic Recomputation,  Up: Calculation Modes

7.4.8 Working Messages
----------------------

Since the Calculator is written entirely in Emacs Lisp, which is not
designed for heavy numerical work, many operations are quite slow.  The
Calculator normally displays the message ‘Working...’ in the echo area
during any command that may be slow.  In addition, iterative operations
such as square roots and trigonometric functions display the
intermediate result at each step.  Both of these types of messages can
be disabled if you find them distracting.

   Type ‘m w’ (‘calc-working’) with a numeric prefix of 0 to disable all
“working” messages.  Use a numeric prefix of 1 to enable only the plain
‘Working...’ message.  Use a numeric prefix of 2 to see intermediate
results as well.  With no numeric prefix this displays the current mode.

   While it may seem that the “working” messages will slow Calc down
considerably, experiments have shown that their impact is actually quite
small.  But if your terminal is slow you may find that it helps to turn
the messages off.


File: calc.info,  Node: Simplification Modes,  Next: Declarations,  Prev: Calculation Modes,  Up: Mode Settings

7.5 Simplification Modes
========================

The current “simplification mode” controls how numbers and formulas are
“normalized” when being taken from or pushed onto the stack.  Some
normalizations are unavoidable, such as rounding floating-point results
to the current precision, and reducing fractions to simplest form.
Others, such as simplifying a formula like ‘a+a’ (or ‘2+3’), are done
automatically but can be turned off when necessary.

   When you press a key like ‘+’ when ‘2’ and ‘3’ are on the stack, Calc
pops these numbers, normalizes them, creates the formula ‘2+3’,
normalizes it, and pushes the result.  Of course the standard rules for
normalizing ‘2+3’ will produce the result ‘5’.

   Simplification mode commands consist of the lower-case ‘m’ prefix key
followed by a shifted letter.

   The ‘m O’ (‘calc-no-simplify-mode’) command turns off all optional
simplifications.  These would leave a formula like ‘2+3’ alone.  In
fact, nothing except simple numbers are ever affected by normalization
in this mode.  Explicit simplification commands, such as ‘=’ or ‘a s’,
can still be given to simplify any formulas.  *Note Algebraic
Definitions::, for a sample use of No-Simplification mode.

   The ‘m N’ (‘calc-num-simplify-mode’) command turns off simplification
of any formulas except those for which all arguments are constants.  For
example, ‘1+2’ is simplified to ‘3’, and ‘a+(2-2)’ is simplified to
‘a+0’ but no further, since one argument of the sum is not a constant.
Unfortunately, ‘(a+2)-2’ is _not_ simplified because the top-level ‘-’
operator’s arguments are not both constant numbers (one of them is the
formula ‘a+2’).  A constant is a number or other numeric object (such as
a constant error form or modulo form), or a vector all of whose elements
are constant.

   The ‘m I’ (‘calc-basic-simplify-mode’) command does some basic
simplifications for all formulas.  This includes many easy and fast
algebraic simplifications such as ‘a+0’ to ‘a’, and ‘a + 2 a’ to ‘3 a’,
as well as evaluating functions like ‘deriv(x^2, x)’ to ‘2 x’.

   The ‘m B’ (‘calc-bin-simplify-mode’) mode applies the basic
simplifications to a result and then, if the result is an integer, uses
the ‘b c’ (‘calc-clip’) command to clip the integer according to the
current binary word size.  *Note Binary Functions::.  Real numbers are
rounded to the nearest integer and then clipped; other kinds of results
(after the basic simplifications) are left alone.

   The ‘m A’ (‘calc-alg-simplify-mode’) mode does standard algebraic
simplifications.  *Note Algebraic Simplifications::.

   The ‘m E’ (‘calc-ext-simplify-mode’) mode does “extended”, or
“unsafe”, algebraic simplification.  *Note Unsafe Simplifications::.

   The ‘m U’ (‘calc-units-simplify-mode’) mode does units
simplification.  *Note Simplification of Units::.  These include the
algebraic simplifications, plus variable names which are identifiable as
unit names (like ‘mm’ for “millimeters”) are simplified with their unit
definitions in mind.

   A common technique is to set the simplification mode down to the
lowest amount of simplification you will allow to be applied
automatically, then use manual commands like ‘a s’ and ‘c c’
(‘calc-clean’) to perform higher types of simplifications on demand.


File: calc.info,  Node: Declarations,  Next: Display Modes,  Prev: Simplification Modes,  Up: Mode Settings

7.6 Declarations
================

A “declaration” is a statement you make that promises you will use a
certain variable or function in a restricted way.  This may give Calc
the freedom to do things that it couldn’t do if it had to take the fully
general situation into account.

* Menu:

* Declaration Basics::
* Kinds of Declarations::
* Functions for Declarations::


File: calc.info,  Node: Declaration Basics,  Next: Kinds of Declarations,  Prev: Declarations,  Up: Declarations

7.6.1 Declaration Basics
------------------------

The ‘s d’ (‘calc-declare-variable’) command is the easiest way to make a
declaration for a variable.  This command prompts for the variable name,
then prompts for the declaration.  The default at the declaration prompt
is the previous declaration, if any.  You can edit this declaration, or
press ‘C-k’ to erase it and type a new declaration.  (Or, erase it and
press <RET> to clear the declaration, effectively “undeclaring” the
variable.)

   A declaration is in general a vector of “type symbols” and “range”
values.  If there is only one type symbol or range value, you can write
it directly rather than enclosing it in a vector.  For example, ‘s d foo
<RET> real <RET>’ declares ‘foo’ to be a real number, and ‘s d bar <RET>
[int, const, [1..6]] <RET>’ declares ‘bar’ to be a constant integer
between 1 and 6.  (Actually, you can omit the outermost brackets and
Calc will provide them for you: ‘s d bar <RET> int, const, [1..6]
<RET>’.)

   Declarations in Calc are kept in a special variable called ‘Decls’.
This variable encodes the set of all outstanding declarations in the
form of a matrix.  Each row has two elements: A variable or vector of
variables declared by that row, and the declaration specifier as
described above.  You can use the ‘s D’ command to edit this variable if
you wish to see all the declarations at once.  *Note Operations on
Variables::, for a description of this command and the ‘s p’ command
that allows you to save your declarations permanently if you wish.

   Items being declared can also be function calls.  The arguments in
the call are ignored; the effect is to say that this function returns
values of the declared type for any valid arguments.  The ‘s d’ command
declares only variables, so if you wish to make a function declaration
you will have to edit the ‘Decls’ matrix yourself.

   For example, the declaration matrix

     [ [ foo,       real       ]
       [ [j, k, n], int        ]
       [ f(1,2,3),  [0 .. inf) ] ]

declares that ‘foo’ represents a real number, ‘j’, ‘k’ and ‘n’ represent
integers, and the function ‘f’ always returns a real number in the
interval shown.

   If there is a declaration for the variable ‘All’, then that
declaration applies to all variables that are not otherwise declared.
It does not apply to function names.  For example, using the row ‘[All,
real]’ says that all your variables are real unless they are explicitly
declared without ‘real’ in some other row.  The ‘s d’ command declares
‘All’ if you give a blank response to the variable-name prompt.


File: calc.info,  Node: Kinds of Declarations,  Next: Functions for Declarations,  Prev: Declaration Basics,  Up: Declarations

7.6.2 Kinds of Declarations
---------------------------

The type-specifier part of a declaration (that is, the second prompt in
the ‘s d’ command) can be a type symbol, an interval, or a vector
consisting of zero or more type symbols followed by zero or more
intervals or numbers that represent the set of possible values for the
variable.

     [ [ a, [1, 2, 3, 4, 5] ]
       [ b, [1 .. 5]        ]
       [ c, [int, 1 .. 5]   ] ]

   Here ‘a’ is declared to contain one of the five integers shown; ‘b’
is any number in the interval from 1 to 5 (any real number since we
haven’t specified), and ‘c’ is any integer in that interval.  Thus the
declarations for ‘a’ and ‘c’ are nearly equivalent (see below).

   The type-specifier can be the empty vector ‘[]’ to say that nothing
is known about a given variable’s value.  This is the same as not
declaring the variable at all except that it overrides any ‘All’
declaration which would otherwise apply.

   The initial value of ‘Decls’ is the empty vector ‘[]’.  If ‘Decls’
has no stored value or if the value stored in it is not valid, it is
ignored and there are no declarations as far as Calc is concerned.  (The
‘s d’ command will replace such a malformed value with a fresh empty
matrix, ‘[]’, before recording the new declaration.)  Unrecognized type
symbols are ignored.

   The following type symbols describe what sorts of numbers will be
stored in a variable:

‘int’
     Integers.
‘numint’
     Numerical integers.  (Integers or integer-valued floats.)
‘frac’
     Fractions.  (Rational numbers which are not integers.)
‘rat’
     Rational numbers.  (Either integers or fractions.)
‘float’
     Floating-point numbers.
‘real’
     Real numbers.  (Integers, fractions, or floats.  Actually,
     intervals and error forms with real components also count as reals
     here.)
‘pos’
     Positive real numbers.  (Strictly greater than zero.)
‘nonneg’
     Nonnegative real numbers.  (Greater than or equal to zero.)
‘number’
     Numbers.  (Real or complex.)

   Calc uses this information to determine when certain simplifications
of formulas are safe.  For example, ‘(x^y)^z’ cannot be simplified to
‘x^(y z)’ in general; for example, ‘((-3)^2)^1:2’ is 3, but
‘(-3)^(2*1:2) = (-3)^1’ is -3.  However, this simplification _is_ safe
if ‘z’ is known to be an integer, or if ‘x’ is known to be a nonnegative
real number.  If you have given declarations that allow Calc to deduce
either of these facts, Calc will perform this simplification of the
formula.

   Calc can apply a certain amount of logic when using declarations.
For example, ‘(x^y)^(2n+1)’ will be simplified if ‘n’ has been declared
‘int’; Calc knows that an integer times an integer, plus an integer,
must always be an integer.  (In fact, Calc would simplify ‘(-x)^(2n+1)’
to ‘-(x^(2n+1))’ since it is able to determine that ‘2n+1’ must be an
odd integer.)

   Similarly, ‘(abs(x)^y)^z’ will be simplified to ‘abs(x)^(y z)’
because Calc knows that the ‘abs’ function always returns a nonnegative
real.  If you had a ‘myabs’ function that also had this property, you
could get Calc to recognize it by adding the row ‘[myabs(), nonneg]’ to
the ‘Decls’ matrix.

   One instance of this simplification is ‘sqrt(x^2)’ (since the ‘sqrt’
function is effectively a one-half power).  Normally Calc leaves this
formula alone.  After the command ‘s d x <RET> real <RET>’, however, it
can simplify the formula to ‘abs(x)’.  And after ‘s d x <RET> nonneg
<RET>’, Calc can simplify this formula all the way to ‘x’.

   If there are any intervals or real numbers in the type specifier,
they comprise the set of possible values that the variable or function
being declared can have.  In particular, the type symbol ‘real’ is
effectively the same as the range ‘[-inf .. inf]’ (note that infinity is
included in the range of possible values); ‘pos’ is the same as ‘(0 ..
inf]’, and ‘nonneg’ is the same as ‘[0 .. inf]’.  Saying ‘[real, [-5 ..
5]]’ is redundant because the fact that the variable is real can be
deduced just from the interval, but ‘[int, [-5 .. 5]]’ and ‘[rat, [-5 ..
5]]’ are useful combinations.

   Note that the vector of intervals or numbers is in the same format
used by Calc’s set-manipulation commands.  *Note Set Operations::.

   The type specifier ‘[1, 2, 3]’ is equivalent to ‘[numint, 1, 2, 3]’,
_not_ to ‘[int, 1, 2, 3]’.  In other words, the range of possible values
means only that the variable’s value must be numerically equal to a
number in that range, but not that it must be equal in type as well.
Calc’s set operations act the same way; ‘in(2, [1., 2., 3.])’ and
‘in(1.5, [1:2, 3:2, 5:2])’ both report “true.”

   If you use a conflicting combination of type specifiers, the results
are unpredictable.  An example is ‘[pos, [0 .. 5]]’, where the interval
does not lie in the range described by the type symbol.

   “Real” declarations mostly affect simplifications involving powers
like the one described above.  Another case where they are used is in
the ‘a P’ command which returns a list of all roots of a polynomial; if
the variable has been declared real, only the real roots (if any) will
be included in the list.

   “Integer” declarations are used for simplifications which are valid
only when certain values are integers (such as ‘(x^y)^z’ shown above).

   Calc’s algebraic simplifications also make use of declarations when
simplifying equations and inequalities.  They will cancel ‘x’ from both
sides of ‘a x = b x’ only if it is sure ‘x’ is non-zero, say, because it
has a ‘pos’ declaration.  To declare specifically that ‘x’ is real and
non-zero, use ‘[[-inf .. 0), (0 .. inf]]’.  (There is no way in the
current notation to say that ‘x’ is nonzero but not necessarily real.)
The ‘a e’ command does “unsafe” simplifications, including canceling ‘x’
from the equation when ‘x’ is not known to be nonzero.

   Another set of type symbols distinguish between scalars and vectors.

‘scalar’
     The value is not a vector.
‘vector’
     The value is a vector.
‘matrix’
     The value is a matrix (a rectangular vector of vectors).
‘sqmatrix’
     The value is a square matrix.

   These type symbols can be combined with the other type symbols
described above; ‘[int, matrix]’ describes an object which is a matrix
of integers.

   Scalar/vector declarations are used to determine whether certain
algebraic operations are safe.  For example, ‘[a, b, c] + x’ is normally
not simplified to ‘[a + x, b + x, c + x]’, but it will be if ‘x’ has
been declared ‘scalar’.  On the other hand, multiplication is usually
assumed to be commutative, but the terms in ‘x y’ will never be
exchanged if both ‘x’ and ‘y’ are known to be vectors or matrices.
(Calc currently never distinguishes between ‘vector’ and ‘matrix’
declarations.)

   *Note Matrix Mode::, for a discussion of Matrix mode and Scalar mode,
which are similar to declaring ‘[All, matrix]’ or ‘[All, scalar]’ but
much more convenient.

   One more type symbol that is recognized is used with the ‘H a d’
command for taking total derivatives of a formula.  *Note Calculus::.

‘const’
     The value is a constant with respect to other variables.

   Calc does not check the declarations for a variable when you store a
value in it.  However, storing -3.5 in a variable that has been declared
‘pos’, ‘int’, or ‘matrix’ may have unexpected effects; Calc may evaluate
‘sqrt(x^2)’ to ‘3.5’ if it substitutes the value first, or to ‘-3.5’ if
‘x’ was declared ‘pos’ and the formula ‘sqrt(x^2)’ is simplified to ‘x’
before the value is substituted.  Before using a variable for a new
purpose, it is best to use ‘s d’ or ‘s D’ to check to make sure you
don’t still have an old declaration for the variable that will conflict
with its new meaning.


File: calc.info,  Node: Functions for Declarations,  Prev: Kinds of Declarations,  Up: Declarations

7.6.3 Functions for Declarations
--------------------------------

Calc has a set of functions for accessing the current declarations in a
convenient manner.  These functions return 1 if the argument can be
shown to have the specified property, or 0 if the argument can be shown
_not_ to have that property; otherwise they are left unevaluated.  These
functions are suitable for use with rewrite rules (*note Conditional
Rewrite Rules::) or programming constructs (*note Conditionals in
Macros::).  They can be entered only using algebraic notation.  *Note
Logical Operations::, for functions that perform other tests not related
to declarations.

   For example, ‘dint(17)’ returns 1 because 17 is an integer, as do
‘dint(n)’ and ‘dint(2 n - 3)’ if ‘n’ has been declared ‘int’, but
‘dint(2.5)’ and ‘dint(n + 0.5)’ return 0.  Calc consults knowledge of
its own built-in functions as well as your own declarations:
‘dint(floor(x))’ returns 1.

   The ‘dint’ function checks if its argument is an integer.  The
‘dnatnum’ function checks if its argument is a natural number, i.e., a
nonnegative integer.  The ‘dnumint’ function checks if its argument is
numerically an integer, i.e., either an integer or an integer-valued
float.  Note that these and the other data type functions also accept
vectors or matrices composed of suitable elements, and that real
infinities ‘inf’ and ‘-inf’ are considered to be integers for the
purposes of these functions.

   The ‘drat’ function checks if its argument is rational, i.e., an
integer or fraction.  Infinities count as rational, but intervals and
error forms do not.

   The ‘dreal’ function checks if its argument is real.  This includes
integers, fractions, floats, real error forms, and intervals.

   The ‘dimag’ function checks if its argument is imaginary, i.e., is
mathematically equal to a real number times ‘i’.

   The ‘dpos’ function checks for positive (but nonzero) reals.  The
‘dneg’ function checks for negative reals.  The ‘dnonneg’ function
checks for nonnegative reals, i.e., reals greater than or equal to zero.
Note that Calc’s algebraic simplifications, which are effectively
applied to all conditions in rewrite rules, can simplify an expression
like ‘x > 0’ to 1 or 0 using ‘dpos’.  So the actual functions ‘dpos’,
‘dneg’, and ‘dnonneg’ are rarely necessary.

   The ‘dnonzero’ function checks that its argument is nonzero.  This
includes all nonzero real or complex numbers, all intervals that do not
include zero, all nonzero modulo forms, vectors all of whose elements
are nonzero, and variables or formulas whose values can be deduced to be
nonzero.  It does not include error forms, since they represent values
which could be anything including zero.  (This is also the set of
objects considered “true” in conditional contexts.)

   The ‘deven’ function returns 1 if its argument is known to be an even
integer (or integer-valued float); it returns 0 if its argument is known
not to be even (because it is known to be odd or a non-integer).  Calc’s
algebraic simplifications use this to simplify a test of the form ‘x % 2
= 0’.  There is also an analogous ‘dodd’ function.

   The ‘drange’ function returns a set (an interval or a vector of
intervals and/or numbers; *note Set Operations::) that describes the set
of possible values of its argument.  If the argument is a variable or a
function with a declaration, the range is copied from the declaration.
Otherwise, the possible signs of the expression are determined using a
method similar to ‘dpos’, etc., and a suitable set like ‘[0 .. inf]’ is
returned.  If the expression is not provably real, the ‘drange’ function
remains unevaluated.

   The ‘dscalar’ function returns 1 if its argument is provably scalar,
or 0 if its argument is provably non-scalar.  It is left unevaluated if
this cannot be determined.  (If Matrix mode or Scalar mode is in effect,
this function returns 1 or 0, respectively, if it has no other
information.)  When Calc interprets a condition (say, in a rewrite rule)
it considers an unevaluated formula to be “false.” Thus, ‘dscalar(a)’ is
“true” only if ‘a’ is provably scalar, and ‘!dscalar(a)’ is “true” only
if ‘a’ is provably non-scalar; both are “false” if there is insufficient
information to tell.


File: calc.info,  Node: Display Modes,  Next: Language Modes,  Prev: Declarations,  Up: Mode Settings

7.7 Display Modes
=================

The commands in this section are two-key sequences beginning with the
‘d’ prefix.  The ‘d l’ (‘calc-line-numbering’) and ‘d b’
(‘calc-line-breaking’) commands are described elsewhere; *note Stack
Basics:: and *note Normal Language Modes::, respectively.  Display
formats for vectors and matrices are also covered elsewhere; *note
Vector and Matrix Formats::.

   One thing all display modes have in common is their treatment of the
‘H’ prefix.  This prefix causes any mode command that would normally
refresh the stack to leave the stack display alone.  The word “Dirty”
will appear in the mode line when Calc thinks the stack display may not
reflect the latest mode settings.

   The ‘d <RET>’ (‘calc-refresh-top’) command reformats the top stack
entry according to all the current modes.  Positive prefix arguments
reformat the top N entries; negative prefix arguments reformat the
specified entry, and a prefix of zero is equivalent to ‘d <SPC>’
(‘calc-refresh’), which reformats the entire stack.  For example, ‘H d s
M-2 d <RET>’ changes to scientific notation but reformats only the top
two stack entries in the new mode.

   The ‘I’ prefix has another effect on the display modes.  The mode is
set only temporarily; the top stack entry is reformatted according to
that mode, then the original mode setting is restored.  In other words,
‘I d s’ is equivalent to ‘H d s d <RET> H d (OLD MODE)’.

* Menu:

* Radix Modes::
* Grouping Digits::
* Float Formats::
* Complex Formats::
* Fraction Formats::
* HMS Formats::
* Date Formats::
* Truncating the Stack::
* Justification::
* Labels::


File: calc.info,  Node: Radix Modes,  Next: Grouping Digits,  Prev: Display Modes,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.1 Radix Modes
-----------------

Calc normally displays numbers in decimal (“base-10” or “radix-10”)
notation.  Calc can actually display in any radix from two (binary) to
36.  When the radix is above 10, the letters ‘A’ to ‘Z’ are used as
digits.  When entering such a number, letter keys are interpreted as
potential digits rather than terminating numeric entry mode.

   The key sequences ‘d 2’, ‘d 8’, ‘d 6’, and ‘d 0’ select binary,
octal, hexadecimal, and decimal as the current display radix,
respectively.  Numbers can always be entered in any radix, though the
current radix is used as a default if you press ‘#’ without any initial
digits.  A number entered without a ‘#’ is _always_ interpreted as
decimal.

   To set the radix generally, use ‘d r’ (‘calc-radix’) and enter an
integer from 2 to 36.  You can specify the radix as a numeric prefix
argument; otherwise you will be prompted for it.

   Integers normally are displayed with however many digits are
necessary to represent the integer and no more.  The ‘d z’
(‘calc-leading-zeros’) command causes integers to be padded out with
leading zeros according to the current binary word size.  (*Note Binary
Functions::, for a discussion of word size.)  If the absolute value of
the word size is ‘w’, all integers are displayed with at least enough
digits to represent ‘(2^w)-1’ in the current radix.  (Larger integers
will still be displayed in their entirety.)

   Calc can display ‘w’-bit integers using two’s complement notation,
although this is most useful with the binary, octal and hexadecimal
display modes.  This option is selected by using the ‘O’ option prefix
before setting the display radix, and a negative word size might be
appropriate (*note Binary Functions::).  In two’s complement notation,
the integers in the (nearly) symmetric interval from ‘-2^(w-1)’ to
‘2^(w-1)-1’ are represented by the integers from ‘0’ to ‘2^w-1’: the
integers from ‘0’ to ‘2^(w-1)-1’ are represented by themselves and the
integers from ‘-2^(w-1)’ to ‘-1’ are represented by the integers from
‘2^(w-1)’ to ‘2^w-1’ (the integer ‘k’ is represented by ‘k+2^w’).  Calc
will display a two’s complement integer by the radix (either ‘2’, ‘8’ or
‘16’), two ‘#’ symbols, and then its representation (including any
leading zeros necessary to include all ‘w’ bits).  In a two’s complement
display mode, numbers that are not displayed in two’s complement
notation (i.e., that aren’t integers from ‘-2^(w-1)’ to ‘2^(w-1)-1’)
will be represented using Calc’s usual notation (in the appropriate
radix).


File: calc.info,  Node: Grouping Digits,  Next: Float Formats,  Prev: Radix Modes,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.2 Grouping Digits
---------------------

Long numbers can be hard to read if they have too many digits.  For
example, the factorial of 30 is 33 digits long!  Press ‘d g’
(‘calc-group-digits’) to enable “Grouping” mode, in which digits are
displayed in clumps of 3 or 4 (depending on the current radix) separated
by commas.

   The ‘d g’ command toggles grouping on and off.  With a numeric prefix
of 0, this command displays the current state of the grouping flag; with
an argument of minus one it disables grouping; with a positive argument
‘N’ it enables grouping on every ‘N’ digits.  For floating-point
numbers, grouping normally occurs only before the decimal point.  A
negative prefix argument ‘-N’ enables grouping every ‘N’ digits both
before and after the decimal point.

   The ‘d ,’ (‘calc-group-char’) command allows you to choose any
character as the grouping separator.  The default is the comma
character.  If you find it difficult to read vectors of large integers
grouped with commas, you may wish to use spaces or some other character
instead.  This command takes the next character you type, whatever it
is, and uses it as the digit separator.  As a special case, ‘d , \’
selects ‘\,’ (TeX’s thin-space symbol) as the digit separator.

   Please note that grouped numbers will not generally be parsed
correctly if re-read in textual form, say by the use of ‘C-x * y’ and
‘C-x * g’.  (*Note Kill and Yank::, for details on these commands.)  One
exception is the ‘\,’ separator, which doesn’t interfere with parsing
because it is ignored by TeX language mode.


File: calc.info,  Node: Float Formats,  Next: Complex Formats,  Prev: Grouping Digits,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.3 Float Formats
-------------------

Floating-point quantities are normally displayed in standard decimal
form, with scientific notation used if the exponent is especially high
or low.  All significant digits are normally displayed.  The commands in
this section allow you to choose among several alternative display
formats for floats.

   The ‘d n’ (‘calc-normal-notation’) command selects the normal display
format.  All significant figures in a number are displayed.  With a
positive numeric prefix, numbers are rounded if necessary to that number
of significant digits.  With a negative numerix prefix, the specified
number of significant digits less than the current precision is used.
(Thus ‘C-u -2 d n’ displays 10 digits if the current precision is 12.)

   The ‘d f’ (‘calc-fix-notation’) command selects fixed-point notation.
The numeric argument is the number of digits after the decimal point,
zero or more.  This format will relax into scientific notation if a
nonzero number would otherwise have been rounded all the way to zero.
Specifying a negative number of digits is the same as for a positive
number, except that small nonzero numbers will be rounded to zero rather
than switching to scientific notation.

   The ‘d s’ (‘calc-sci-notation’) command selects scientific notation.
A positive argument sets the number of significant figures displayed, of
which one will be before and the rest after the decimal point.  A
negative argument works the same as for ‘d n’ format.  The default is to
display all significant digits.

   The ‘d e’ (‘calc-eng-notation’) command selects engineering notation.
This is similar to scientific notation except that the exponent is
rounded down to a multiple of three, with from one to three digits
before the decimal point.  An optional numeric prefix sets the number of
significant digits to display, as for ‘d s’.

   It is important to distinguish between the current _precision_ and
the current _display format_.  After the commands ‘C-u 10 p’ and ‘C-u 6
d n’ the Calculator computes all results to ten significant figures but
displays only six.  (In fact, intermediate calculations are often
carried to one or two more significant figures, but values placed on the
stack will be rounded down to ten figures.)  Numbers are never actually
rounded to the display precision for storage, except by commands like
‘C-k’ and ‘C-x * y’ which operate on the actual displayed text in the
Calculator buffer.

   The ‘d .’ (‘calc-point-char’) command selects the character used as a
decimal point.  Normally this is a period; users in some countries may
wish to change this to a comma.  Note that this is only a display style;
on entry, periods must always be used to denote floating-point numbers,
and commas to separate elements in a list.


File: calc.info,  Node: Complex Formats,  Next: Fraction Formats,  Prev: Float Formats,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.4 Complex Formats
---------------------

There are three supported notations for complex numbers in rectangular
form.  The default is as a pair of real numbers enclosed in parentheses
and separated by a comma: ‘(a,b)’.  The ‘d c’ (‘calc-complex-notation’)
command selects this style.

   The other notations are ‘d i’ (‘calc-i-notation’), in which numbers
are displayed in ‘a+bi’ form, and ‘d j’ (‘calc-j-notation’) which
displays the form ‘a+bj’ preferred in some disciplines.

   Complex numbers are normally entered in ‘(a,b)’ format.  If you enter
‘2+3i’ as an algebraic formula, it will be stored as the formula ‘2 + 3
* i’.  However, if you use ‘=’ to evaluate this formula and you have not
changed the variable ‘i’, the ‘i’ will be interpreted as ‘(0,1)’ and the
formula will be simplified to ‘(2,3)’.  Other commands (like ‘calc-sin’)
will _not_ interpret the formula ‘2 + 3 * i’ as a complex number.  *Note
Variables::, under “special constants.”


File: calc.info,  Node: Fraction Formats,  Next: HMS Formats,  Prev: Complex Formats,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.5 Fraction Formats
----------------------

Display of fractional numbers is controlled by the ‘d o’
(‘calc-over-notation’) command.  By default, a number like eight thirds
is displayed in the form ‘8:3’.  The ‘d o’ command prompts for a one- or
two-character format.  If you give one character, that character is used
as the fraction separator.  Common separators are ‘:’ and ‘/’.  (During
input of numbers, the ‘:’ key must be used regardless of the display
format; in particular, the ‘/’ is used for RPN-style division, _not_ for
entering fractions.)

   If you give two characters, fractions use
“integer-plus-fractional-part” notation.  For example, the format ‘+/’
would display eight thirds as ‘2+2/3’.  If two colons are present in a
number being entered, the number is interpreted in this form (so that
the entries ‘2:2:3’ and ‘8:3’ are equivalent).

   It is also possible to follow the one- or two-character format with a
number.  For example: ‘:10’ or ‘+/3’.  In this case, Calc adjusts all
fractions that are displayed to have the specified denominator, if
possible.  Otherwise it adjusts the denominator to be a multiple of the
specified value.  For example, in ‘:6’ mode the fraction ‘1:6’ will be
unaffected, but ‘2:3’ will be displayed as ‘4:6’, ‘1:2’ will be
displayed as ‘3:6’, and ‘1:8’ will be displayed as ‘3:24’.  Integers are
also affected by this mode: 3 is displayed as ‘18:6’.  Note that the
format ‘:1’ writes fractions the same as ‘:’, but it writes integers as
‘n:1’.

   The fraction format does not affect the way fractions or integers are
stored, only the way they appear on the screen.  The fraction format
never affects floats.


File: calc.info,  Node: HMS Formats,  Next: Date Formats,  Prev: Fraction Formats,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.6 HMS Formats
-----------------

The ‘d h’ (‘calc-hms-notation’) command controls the display of HMS
(hours-minutes-seconds) forms.  It prompts for a string which consists
basically of an “hours” marker, optional punctuation, a “minutes”
marker, more optional punctuation, and a “seconds” marker.  Punctuation
is zero or more spaces, commas, or semicolons.  The hours marker is one
or more non-punctuation characters.  The minutes and seconds markers
must be single non-punctuation characters.

   The default HMS format is ‘@ ' "’, producing HMS values of the form
‘23@ 30' 15.75"’.  The format ‘deg, ms’ would display this same value as
‘23deg, 30m15.75s’.  During numeric entry, the ‘h’ or ‘o’ keys are
recognized as synonyms for ‘@’ regardless of display format.  The ‘m’
and ‘s’ keys are recognized as synonyms for ‘'’ and ‘"’, respectively,
but only if an ‘@’ (or ‘h’ or ‘o’) has already been typed; otherwise,
they have their usual meanings (‘m-’ prefix and ‘s-’ prefix).  Thus, ‘5
"’, ‘0 @ 5 "’, and ‘0 h 5 s’ are some of the ways to enter the quantity
“five seconds.” The ‘'’ key is recognized as “minutes” only if ‘@’ (or
‘h’ or ‘o’) has already been pressed; otherwise it means to switch to
algebraic entry.


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Formats,  Next: Truncating the Stack,  Prev: HMS Formats,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.7 Date Formats
------------------

The ‘d d’ (‘calc-date-notation’) command controls the display of date
forms (*note Date Forms::).  It prompts for a string which contains
letters that represent the various parts of a date and time.  To show
which parts should be omitted when the form represents a pure date with
no time, parts of the string can be enclosed in ‘< >’ marks.  If you
don’t include ‘< >’ markers in the format, Calc guesses at which parts,
if any, should be omitted when formatting pure dates.

   The default format is: ‘<H:mm:SSpp >Www Mmm D, YYYY’.  An example
string in this format is ‘3:32pm Wed Jan 9, 1991’.  If you enter a blank
format string, this default format is reestablished.

   Calc uses ‘< >’ notation for nameless functions as well as for dates.
*Note Specifying Operators::.  To avoid confusion with nameless
functions, your date formats should avoid using the ‘#’ character.

* Menu:

* ISO 8601::
* Date Formatting Codes::
* Free-Form Dates::
* Standard Date Formats::


File: calc.info,  Node: ISO 8601,  Next: Date Formatting Codes,  Prev: Date Formats,  Up: Date Formats

7.7.7.1 ISO 8601
................

The same date can be written down in different formats and Calc tries to
allow you to choose your preferred format.  Some common formats are
ambiguous, however; for example, 10/11/2012 means October 11, 2012 in
the United States but it means November 10, 2012 in Europe.  To help
avoid such ambiguities, the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) provides the ISO 8601 standard, which provides
three different but easily distinguishable and unambiguous ways to
represent a date.

   The ISO 8601 calendar date representation is

        YYYY-MM-DD

where YYYY is the four digit year, MM is the two-digit month number (01
for January to 12 for December), and DD is the two-digit day of the
month (01 to 31).  (Note that YYYY does not correspond to Calc’s date
formatting code, which will be introduced later.)  The year, which
should be padded with zeros to ensure it has at least four digits, is
the Gregorian year, except that the year before 0001 (1 AD) is the year
0000 (1 BC). The date October 11, 2012 is written 2012-10-11 in this
representation and November 10, 2012 is written 2012-11-10.

   The ISO 8601 ordinal date representation is

       YYYY-DDD

where YYYY is the year, as above, and DDD is the day of the year.  The
date December 31, 2011 is written 2011-365 in this representation and
January 1, 2012 is written 2012-001.

   The ISO 8601 week date representation is

      YYYY-WWW-D

where YYYY is the ISO week-numbering year, WW is the two digit week
number (preceded by a literal “W”), and D is the day of the week (1 for
Monday through 7 for Sunday).  The ISO week-numbering year is based on
the Gregorian year but can differ slightly.  The first week of an ISO
week-numbering year is the week with the Gregorian year’s first Thursday
in it (equivalently, the week containing January 4); any day of that
week (Monday through Sunday) is part of the same ISO week-numbering
year, any day from the previous week is part of the previous year.  For
example, January 4, 2013 is on a Friday, and so the first week for the
ISO week-numbering year 2013 starts on Monday, December 31, 2012.  The
day December 31, 2012 is then part of the Gregorian year 2012 but ISO
week-numbering year 2013.  In the week date representation, this week
goes from 2013-W01-1 (December 31, 2012) to 2013-W01-7 (January 6,
2013).

   All three ISO 8601 representations arrange the numbers from most
significant to least significant; as well as being unambiguous
representations, they are easy to sort since chronological order in this
formats corresponds to lexicographical order.  The hyphens are sometimes
omitted.

   The ISO 8601 standard uses a 24 hour clock; a particular time is
represented by HH:MM:SS where HH is the two-digit hour (from 00 to 24),
MM is the two-digit minute (from 00 to 59) and SS is the two-digit
second.  The seconds or minutes and seconds can be omitted, and decimals
can be added.  If a date with a time is represented, they should be
separated by a literal “T”, so noon on December 13, 2012 can be
represented as 2012-12-13T12:00.


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Formatting Codes,  Next: Free-Form Dates,  Prev: ISO 8601,  Up: Date Formats

7.7.7.2 Date Formatting Codes
.............................

When displaying a date, the current date format is used.  All characters
except for letters and ‘<’ and ‘>’ are copied literally when dates are
formatted.  The portion between ‘< >’ markers is omitted for pure dates,
or included for date/time forms.  Letters are interpreted according to
the table below.

   When dates are read in during algebraic entry, Calc first tries to
match the input string to the current format either with or without the
time part.  The punctuation characters (including spaces) must match
exactly; letter fields must correspond to suitable text in the input.
If this doesn’t work, Calc checks if the input is a simple number; if
so, the number is interpreted as a number of days since Dec 31, 1 BC.
Otherwise, Calc tries a much more relaxed and flexible algorithm which
is described in the next section.

   Weekday names are ignored during reading.

   Two-digit year numbers are interpreted as lying in the range from
1941 to 2039.  Years outside that range are always entered and displayed
in full.  Year numbers with a leading ‘+’ sign are always interpreted
exactly, allowing the entry and display of the years 1 through 99 AD.

   Here is a complete list of the formatting codes for dates:

Y
     Year: “91” for 1991, “7” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.
YY
     Year: “91” for 1991, “07” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.
BY
     Year: “91” for 1991, “ 7” for 2007, “+23” for 23 AD.
YYY
     Year: “1991” for 1991, “23” for 23 AD.
YYYY
     Year: “1991” for 1991, “+23” for 23 AD.
ZYYY
     Year: “1991” for 1991, “0023” for 23 AD, “0000” for 1 BC.
IYYY
     Year: ISO 8601 week-numbering year.
aa
     Year: “ad” or blank.
AA
     Year: “AD” or blank.
aaa
     Year: “ad ” or blank.  (Note trailing space.)
AAA
     Year: “AD ” or blank.
aaaa
     Year: “a.d.” or blank.
AAAA
     Year: “A.D.” or blank.
bb
     Year: “bc” or blank.
BB
     Year: “BC” or blank.
bbb
     Year: “ bc” or blank.  (Note leading space.)
BBB
     Year: “ BC” or blank.
bbbb
     Year: “b.c.” or blank.
BBBB
     Year: “B.C.” or blank.
M
     Month: “8” for August.
MM
     Month: “08” for August.
BM
     Month: “ 8” for August.
MMM
     Month: “AUG” for August.
Mmm
     Month: “Aug” for August.
mmm
     Month: “aug” for August.
MMMM
     Month: “AUGUST” for August.
Mmmm
     Month: “August” for August.
D
     Day: “7” for 7th day of month.
DD
     Day: “07” for 7th day of month.
BD
     Day: “ 7” for 7th day of month.
W
     Weekday: “0” for Sunday, “6” for Saturday.
w
     Weekday: “1” for Monday, “7” for Sunday.
WWW
     Weekday: “SUN” for Sunday.
Www
     Weekday: “Sun” for Sunday.
www
     Weekday: “sun” for Sunday.
WWWW
     Weekday: “SUNDAY” for Sunday.
Wwww
     Weekday: “Sunday” for Sunday.
Iww
     Week number: ISO 8601 week number, “W01” for week 1.
d
     Day of year: “34” for Feb. 3.
ddd
     Day of year: “034” for Feb. 3.
bdd
     Day of year: “ 34” for Feb. 3.
T
     Letter: Literal “T”.
h
     Hour: “5” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.
hh
     Hour: “05” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.
bh
     Hour: “ 5” for 5 AM; “17” for 5 PM.
H
     Hour: “5” for 5 AM and 5 PM.
HH
     Hour: “05” for 5 AM and 5 PM.
BH
     Hour: “ 5” for 5 AM and 5 PM.
p
     AM/PM: “a” or “p”.
P
     AM/PM: “A” or “P”.
pp
     AM/PM: “am” or “pm”.
PP
     AM/PM: “AM” or “PM”.
pppp
     AM/PM: “a.m.” or “p.m.”.
PPPP
     AM/PM: “A.M.” or “P.M.”.
m
     Minutes: “7” for 7.
mm
     Minutes: “07” for 7.
bm
     Minutes: “ 7” for 7.
s
     Seconds: “7” for 7; “7.23” for 7.23.
ss
     Seconds: “07” for 7; “07.23” for 7.23.
bs
     Seconds: “ 7” for 7; “ 7.23” for 7.23.
SS
     Optional seconds: “07” for 7; blank for 0.
BS
     Optional seconds: “ 7” for 7; blank for 0.
N
     Numeric date/time: “726842.25” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.
n
     Numeric date: “726842” for any time on Wed Jan 9, 1991.
J
     Julian date/time: “2448265.75” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.
j
     Julian date: “2448266” for any time on Wed Jan 9, 1991.
U
     Unix time: “663400800” for 6:00am Wed Jan 9, 1991.
X
     Brackets suppression.  An “X” at the front of the format causes the
     surrounding ‘< >’ delimiters to be omitted when formatting dates.
     Note that the brackets are still required for algebraic entry.

   If “SS” or “BS” (optional seconds) is preceded by a colon, the colon
is also omitted if the seconds part is zero.

   If “bb,” “bbb” or “bbbb” or their upper-case equivalents appear in
the format, then negative year numbers are displayed without a minus
sign.  Note that “aa” and “bb” are mutually exclusive.  Some typical
usages would be ‘YYYY AABB’; ‘AAAYYYYBBB’; ‘YYYYBBB’.

   The formats “YY,” “YYYY,” “MM,” “DD,” “ddd,” “hh,” “HH,” “mm,” “ss,”
and “SS” actually match any number of digits during reading unless
several of these codes are strung together with no punctuation in
between, in which case the input must have exactly as many digits as
there are letters in the format.

   The “j,” “J,” and “U” formats do not make any time zone adjustment.
They effectively use ‘julian(x,0)’ and ‘unixtime(x,0)’ to make the
conversion; *note Date Arithmetic::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Free-Form Dates,  Next: Standard Date Formats,  Prev: Date Formatting Codes,  Up: Date Formats

7.7.7.3 Free-Form Dates
.......................

When reading a date form during algebraic entry, Calc falls back on the
algorithm described here if the input does not exactly match the current
date format.  This algorithm generally “does the right thing” and you
don’t have to worry about it, but it is described here in full detail
for the curious.

   Calc does not distinguish between upper- and lower-case letters while
interpreting dates.

   First, the time portion, if present, is located somewhere in the text
and then removed.  The remaining text is then interpreted as the date.

   A time is of the form ‘hh:mm:ss’, possibly with the seconds part
omitted and possibly with an AM/PM indicator added to indicate 12-hour
time.  If the AM/PM is present, the minutes may also be omitted.  The
AM/PM part may be any of the words ‘am’, ‘pm’, ‘noon’, or ‘midnight’;
each of these may be abbreviated to one letter, and the alternate forms
‘a.m.’, ‘p.m.’, and ‘mid’ are also understood.  Obviously ‘noon’ and
‘midnight’ are allowed only on 12:00:00.  The words ‘noon’, ‘mid’, and
‘midnight’ are also recognized with no number attached.  Midnight will
represent the beginning of a day.

   If there is no AM/PM indicator, the time is interpreted in 24-hour
format.

   When reading the date portion, Calc first checks to see if it is an
ISO 8601 week-numbering date; if the string contains an integer
representing the year, a “W” followed by two digits for the week number,
and an integer from 1 to 7 representing the weekday (in that order),
then all other characters are ignored and this information determines
the date.  Otherwise, all words and numbers are isolated from the
string; other characters are ignored.  All words must be either month
names or day-of-week names (the latter of which are ignored).  Names can
be written in full or as three-letter abbreviations.

   Large numbers, or numbers with ‘+’ or ‘-’ signs, are interpreted as
years.  If one of the other numbers is greater than 12, then that must
be the day and the remaining number in the input is therefore the month.
Otherwise, Calc assumes the month, day and year are in the same order
that they appear in the current date format.  If the year is omitted,
the current year is taken from the system clock.

   If there are too many or too few numbers, or any unrecognizable
words, then the input is rejected.

   If there are any large numbers (of five digits or more) other than
the year, they are ignored on the assumption that they are something
like Julian dates that were included along with the traditional date
components when the date was formatted.

   One of the words ‘ad’, ‘a.d.’, ‘bc’, or ‘b.c.’ may optionally be
used; the latter two are equivalent to a minus sign on the year value.

   If you always enter a four-digit year, and use a name instead of a
number for the month, there is no danger of ambiguity.


File: calc.info,  Node: Standard Date Formats,  Prev: Free-Form Dates,  Up: Date Formats

7.7.7.4 Standard Date Formats
.............................

There are actually ten standard date formats, numbered 0 through 9.
Entering a blank line at the ‘d d’ command’s prompt gives you format
number 1, Calc’s usual format.  You can enter any digit to select the
other formats.

   To create your own standard date formats, give a numeric prefix
argument from 0 to 9 to the ‘d d’ command.  The format you enter will be
recorded as the new standard format of that number, as well as becoming
the new current date format.  You can save your formats permanently with
the ‘m m’ command (*note Mode Settings::).

0
     ‘N’ (Numerical format)
1
     ‘<H:mm:SSpp >Www Mmm D, YYYY’ (American format)
2
     ‘D Mmm YYYY<, h:mm:SS>’ (European format)
3
     ‘Www Mmm BD< hh:mm:ss> YYYY’ (Unix written date format)
4
     ‘M/D/Y< H:mm:SSpp>’ (American slashed format)
5
     ‘D.M.Y< h:mm:SS>’ (European dotted format)
6
     ‘M-D-Y< H:mm:SSpp>’ (American dashed format)
7
     ‘D-M-Y< h:mm:SS>’ (European dashed format)
8
     ‘j<, h:mm:ss>’ (Julian day plus time)
9
     ‘YYddd< hh:mm:ss>’ (Year-day format)
10
     ‘ZYYY-MM-DD Www< hh:mm>’ (Org mode format)
11
     ‘IYYY-Iww-w<Thh:mm:ss>’ (ISO 8601 week numbering format)


File: calc.info,  Node: Truncating the Stack,  Next: Justification,  Prev: Date Formats,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.8 Truncating the Stack
--------------------------

The ‘d t’ (‘calc-truncate-stack’) command moves the ‘.’ line that marks
the top-of-stack up or down in the Calculator buffer.  The number right
above that line is considered to the be at the top of the stack.  Any
numbers below that line are “hidden” from all stack operations (although
still visible to the user).  This is similar to the Emacs “narrowing”
feature, except that the values below the ‘.’ are _visible_, just
temporarily frozen.  This feature allows you to keep several independent
calculations running at once in different parts of the stack, or to
apply a certain command to an element buried deep in the stack.

   Pressing ‘d t’ by itself moves the ‘.’ to the line the cursor is on.
Thus, this line and all those below it become hidden.  To un-hide these
lines, move down to the end of the buffer and press ‘d t’.  With a
positive numeric prefix argument ‘n’, ‘d t’ hides the bottom ‘n’ values
in the buffer.  With a negative argument, it hides all but the top ‘n’
values.  With an argument of zero, it hides zero values, i.e., moves the
‘.’ all the way down to the bottom.

   The ‘d [’ (‘calc-truncate-up’) and ‘d ]’ (‘calc-truncate-down’)
commands move the ‘.’ up or down one line at a time (or several lines
with a prefix argument).


File: calc.info,  Node: Justification,  Next: Labels,  Prev: Truncating the Stack,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.9 Justification
-------------------

Values on the stack are normally left-justified in the window.  You can
control this arrangement by typing ‘d <’ (‘calc-left-justify’), ‘d >’
(‘calc-right-justify’), or ‘d =’ (‘calc-center-justify’).  For example,
in Right-Justification mode, stack entries are displayed flush-right
against the right edge of the window.

   If you change the width of the Calculator window you may have to type
‘d <SPC>’ (‘calc-refresh’) to re-align right-justified or centered text.

   Right-justification is especially useful together with fixed-point
notation (see ‘d f’; ‘calc-fix-notation’).  With these modes together,
the decimal points on numbers will always line up.

   With a numeric prefix argument, the justification commands give you a
little extra control over the display.  The argument specifies the
horizontal “origin” of a display line.  It is also possible to specify a
maximum line width using the ‘d b’ command (*note Normal Language
Modes::).  For reference, the precise rules for formatting and breaking
lines are given below.  Notice that the interaction between origin and
line width is slightly different in each justification mode.

   In Left-Justified mode, the line is indented by a number of spaces
given by the origin (default zero).  If the result is longer than the
maximum line width, if given, or too wide to fit in the Calc window
otherwise, then it is broken into lines which will fit; each broken line
is indented to the origin.

   In Right-Justified mode, lines are shifted right so that the
rightmost character is just before the origin, or just before the
current window width if no origin was specified.  If the line is too
long for this, then it is broken; the current line width is used, if
specified, or else the origin is used as a width if that is specified,
or else the line is broken to fit in the window.

   In Centering mode, the origin is the column number of the center of
each stack entry.  If a line width is specified, lines will not be
allowed to go past that width; Calc will either indent less or break the
lines if necessary.  If no origin is specified, half the line width or
Calc window width is used.

   Note that, in each case, if line numbering is enabled the display is
indented an additional four spaces to make room for the line number.
The width of the line number is taken into account when positioning
according to the current Calc window width, but not when positioning by
explicit origins and widths.  In the latter case, the display is
formatted as specified, and then uniformly shifted over four spaces to
fit the line numbers.


File: calc.info,  Node: Labels,  Prev: Justification,  Up: Display Modes

7.7.10 Labels
-------------

The ‘d {’ (‘calc-left-label’) command prompts for a string, then
displays that string to the left of every stack entry.  If the entries
are left-justified (*note Justification::), then they will appear
immediately after the label (unless you specified an origin greater than
the length of the label).  If the entries are centered or
right-justified, the label appears on the far left and does not affect
the horizontal position of the stack entry.

   Give a blank string (with ‘d { <RET>’) to turn the label off.

   The ‘d }’ (‘calc-right-label’) command similarly adds a label on the
righthand side.  It does not affect positioning of the stack entries
unless they are right-justified.  Also, if both a line width and an
origin are given in Right-Justified mode, the stack entry is justified
to the origin and the righthand label is justified to the line width.

   One application of labels would be to add equation numbers to
formulas you are manipulating in Calc and then copying into a document
(possibly using Embedded mode).  The equations would typically be
centered, and the equation numbers would be on the left or right as you
prefer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Language Modes,  Next: Modes Variable,  Prev: Display Modes,  Up: Mode Settings

7.8 Language Modes
==================

The commands in this section change Calc to use a different notation for
entry and display of formulas, corresponding to the conventions of some
other common language such as Pascal or LaTeX.  Objects displayed on the
stack or yanked from the Calculator to an editing buffer will be
formatted in the current language; objects entered in algebraic entry or
yanked from another buffer will be interpreted according to the current
language.

   The current language has no effect on things written to or read from
the trail buffer, nor does it affect numeric entry.  Only algebraic
entry is affected.  You can make even algebraic entry ignore the current
language and use the standard notation by giving a numeric prefix, e.g.,
‘C-u '’.

   For example, suppose the formula ‘2*a[1] + atan(a[2])’ occurs in a C
program; elsewhere in the program you need the derivatives of this
formula with respect to ‘a[1]’ and ‘a[2]’.  First, type ‘d C’ to switch
to C notation.  Now use ‘C-u C-x * g’ to grab the formula into the
Calculator, ‘a d a[1] <RET>’ to differentiate with respect to the first
variable, and ‘C-x * y’ to yank the formula for the derivative back into
your C program.  Press ‘U’ to undo the differentiation and repeat with
‘a d a[2] <RET>’ for the other derivative.

   Without being switched into C mode first, Calc would have
misinterpreted the brackets in ‘a[1]’ and ‘a[2]’, would not have known
that ‘atan’ was equivalent to Calc’s built-in ‘arctan’ function, and
would have written the formula back with notations (like implicit
multiplication) which would not have been valid for a C program.

   As another example, suppose you are maintaining a C program and a
LaTeX document, each of which needs a copy of the same formula.  You can
grab the formula from the program in C mode, switch to LaTeX mode, and
yank the formula into the document in LaTeX math-mode format.

   Language modes are selected by typing the letter ‘d’ followed by a
shifted letter key.

* Menu:

* Normal Language Modes::
* C FORTRAN Pascal::
* TeX and LaTeX Language Modes::
* Eqn Language Mode::
* Yacas Language Mode::
* Maxima Language Mode::
* Giac Language Mode::
* Mathematica Language Mode::
* Maple Language Mode::
* Compositions::
* Syntax Tables::


File: calc.info,  Node: Normal Language Modes,  Next: C FORTRAN Pascal,  Prev: Language Modes,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.1 Normal Language Modes
---------------------------

The ‘d N’ (‘calc-normal-language’) command selects the usual notation
for Calc formulas, as described in the rest of this manual.  Matrices
are displayed in a multi-line tabular format, but all other objects are
written in linear form, as they would be typed from the keyboard.

   The ‘d O’ (‘calc-flat-language’) command selects a language identical
with the normal one, except that matrices are written in one-line form
along with everything else.  In some applications this form may be more
suitable for yanking data into other buffers.

   Even in one-line mode, long formulas or vectors will still be split
across multiple lines if they exceed the width of the Calculator window.
The ‘d b’ (‘calc-line-breaking’) command turns this line-breaking
feature on and off.  (It works independently of the current language.)
If you give a numeric prefix argument of five or greater to the ‘d b’
command, that argument will specify the line width used when breaking
long lines.

   The ‘d B’ (‘calc-big-language’) command selects a language which uses
textual approximations to various mathematical notations, such as
powers, quotients, and square roots:

       ____________
      | a + 1    2
      | ----- + c
     \|   b

in place of ‘sqrt((a+1)/b + c^2)’.

   Subscripts like ‘a_i’ are displayed as actual subscripts in Big mode.
Double subscripts, ‘a_i_j’ (‘subscr(subscr(a, i), j)’) are displayed as
‘a’ with subscripts separated by commas: ‘i, j’.  They must still be
entered in the usual underscore notation.

   One slight ambiguity of Big notation is that

       3
     - -
       4

can represent either the negative rational number ‘-3:4’, or the actual
expression ‘-(3/4)’; but the latter formula would normally never be
displayed because it would immediately be evaluated to ‘-3:4’ or
‘-0.75’, so this ambiguity is not a problem in typical use.

   Non-decimal numbers are displayed with subscripts.  Thus there is no
way to tell the difference between ‘16#C2’ and ‘C2_16’, though generally
you will know which interpretation is correct.  Logarithms ‘log(x,b)’
and ‘log10(x)’ also use subscripts in Big mode.

   In Big mode, stack entries often take up several lines.  To aid
readability, stack entries are separated by a blank line in this mode.
You may find it useful to expand the Calc window’s height using ‘C-x ^’
(‘enlarge-window’) or to make the Calc window the only one on the screen
with ‘C-x 1’ (‘delete-other-windows’).

   Long lines are currently not rearranged to fit the window width in
Big mode, so you may need to use the ‘<’ and ‘>’ keys to scroll across a
wide formula.  For really big formulas, you may even need to use ‘{’ and
‘}’ to scroll up and down.

   The ‘d U’ (‘calc-unformatted-language’) command altogether disables
the use of operator notation in formulas.  In this mode, the formula
shown above would be displayed:

     sqrt(add(div(add(a, 1), b), pow(c, 2)))

   These four modes differ only in display format, not in the format
expected for algebraic entry.  The standard Calc operators work in all
four modes, and unformatted notation works in any language mode (except
that Mathematica mode expects square brackets instead of parentheses).


File: calc.info,  Node: C FORTRAN Pascal,  Next: TeX and LaTeX Language Modes,  Prev: Normal Language Modes,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.2 C, FORTRAN, and Pascal Modes
----------------------------------

The ‘d C’ (‘calc-c-language’) command selects the conventions of the C
language for display and entry of formulas.  This differs from the
normal language mode in a variety of (mostly minor) ways.  In
particular, C language operators and operator precedences are used in
place of Calc’s usual ones.  For example, ‘a^b’ means ‘xor(a,b)’ in C
mode; a value raised to a power is written as a function call,
‘pow(a,b)’.

   In C mode, vectors and matrices use curly braces instead of brackets.
Octal and hexadecimal values are written with leading ‘0’ or ‘0x’ rather
than using the ‘#’ symbol.  Array subscripting is translated into
‘subscr’ calls, so that ‘a[i]’ in C mode is the same as ‘a_i’ in Normal
mode.  Assignments turn into the ‘assign’ function, which Calc normally
displays using the ‘:=’ symbol.

   The variables ‘pi’ and ‘e’ would be displayed ‘pi’ and ‘e’ in Normal
mode, but in C mode they are displayed as ‘M_PI’ and ‘M_E’,
corresponding to the names of constants typically provided in the
‘<math.h>’ header.  Functions whose names are different in C are
translated automatically for entry and display purposes.  For example,
entering ‘asin(x)’ will push the formula ‘arcsin(x)’ onto the stack;
this formula will be displayed as ‘asin(x)’ as long as C mode is in
effect.

   The ‘d P’ (‘calc-pascal-language’) command selects Pascal
conventions.  Like C mode, Pascal mode interprets array brackets and
uses a different table of operators.  Hexadecimal numbers are entered
and displayed with a preceding dollar sign.  (Thus the regular meaning
of ‘$2’ during algebraic entry does not work in Pascal mode, though ‘$’
(and ‘$$’, etc.) not followed by digits works the same as always.)  No
special provisions are made for other non-decimal numbers, vectors, and
so on, since there is no universally accepted standard way of handling
these in Pascal.

   The ‘d F’ (‘calc-fortran-language’) command selects FORTRAN
conventions.  Various function names are transformed into FORTRAN
equivalents.  Vectors are written as ‘/1, 2, 3/’, and may be entered
this way or using square brackets.  Since FORTRAN uses round parentheses
for both function calls and array subscripts, Calc displays both in the
same way; ‘a(i)’ is interpreted as a function call upon reading, and
subscripts must be entered as ‘subscr(a, i)’.  If the variable ‘a’ has
been declared to have type ‘vector’ or ‘matrix’, however, then ‘a(i)’
will be parsed as a subscript.  (*Note Declarations::.)  Usually it
doesn’t matter, though; if you enter the subscript expression ‘a(i)’ and
Calc interprets it as a function call, you’ll never know the difference
unless you switch to another language mode or replace ‘a’ with an actual
vector (or unless ‘a’ happens to be the name of a built-in function!).

   Underscores are allowed in variable and function names in all of
these language modes.  The underscore here is equivalent to the ‘#’ in
Normal mode, or to hyphens in the underlying Emacs Lisp variable names.

   FORTRAN and Pascal modes normally do not adjust the case of letters
in formulas.  Most built-in Calc names use lower-case letters.  If you
use a positive numeric prefix argument with ‘d P’ or ‘d F’, these modes
will use upper-case letters exclusively for display, and will convert to
lower-case on input.  With a negative prefix, these modes convert to
lower-case for display and input.


File: calc.info,  Node: TeX and LaTeX Language Modes,  Next: Eqn Language Mode,  Prev: C FORTRAN Pascal,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.3 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes
----------------------------------

The ‘d T’ (‘calc-tex-language’) command selects the conventions of “math
mode” in Donald Knuth’s TeX typesetting language, and the ‘d L’
(‘calc-latex-language’) command selects the conventions of “math mode”
in LaTeX, a typesetting language that uses TeX as its formatting engine.
Calc’s LaTeX language mode can read any formula that the TeX language
mode can, although LaTeX mode may display it differently.

   Formulas are entered and displayed in the appropriate notation;
‘sin(a/b)’ will appear as ‘\sin\left( {a \over b} \right)’ in TeX mode
and ‘\sin\left(\frac{a}{b}\right)’ in LaTeX mode.  Math formulas are
often enclosed by ‘$ $’ signs in TeX and LaTeX; these should be omitted
when interfacing with Calc.  To Calc, the ‘$’ sign has the same meaning
it always does in algebraic formulas (a reference to an existing entry
on the stack).

   Complex numbers are displayed as in ‘3 + 4i’.  Fractions and
quotients are written using ‘\over’ in TeX mode (as in ‘{a \over b}’)
and ‘\frac’ in LaTeX mode (as in ‘\frac{a}{b}’); binomial coefficients
are written with ‘\choose’ in TeX mode (as in ‘{a \choose b}’) and
‘\binom’ in LaTeX mode (as in ‘\binom{a}{b}’).  Interval forms are
written with ‘\ldots’, and error forms are written with ‘\pm’.  Absolute
values are written as in ‘|x + 1|’, and the floor and ceiling functions
are written with ‘\lfloor’, ‘\rfloor’, etc.  The words ‘\left’ and
‘\right’ are ignored when reading formulas in TeX and LaTeX modes.  Both
‘inf’ and ‘uinf’ are written as ‘\infty’; when read, ‘\infty’ always
translates to ‘inf’.

   Function calls are written the usual way, with the function name
followed by the arguments in parentheses.  However, functions for which
TeX and LaTeX have special names (like ‘\sin’) will use curly braces
instead of parentheses for very simple arguments.  During input, curly
braces and parentheses work equally well for grouping, but when the
document is formatted the curly braces will be invisible.  Thus the
printed result is ‘sin 2x’ but ‘sin(2 + x)’.

   The TeX specific unit names (*note Predefined Units::) will not use
the ‘tex’ prefix; the unit name for a TeX point will be ‘pt’ instead of
‘texpt’, for example.

   Function and variable names not treated specially by TeX and LaTeX
are simply written out as-is, which will cause them to come out in
italic letters in the printed document.  If you invoke ‘d T’ or ‘d L’
with a positive numeric prefix argument, names of more than one
character will instead be enclosed in a protective commands that will
prevent them from being typeset in the math italics; they will be
written ‘\hbox{NAME}’ in TeX mode and ‘\text{NAME}’ in LaTeX mode.  The
‘\hbox{ }’ and ‘\text{ }’ notations are ignored during reading.  If you
use a negative prefix argument, such function names are written ‘\NAME’,
and function names that begin with ‘\’ during reading have the ‘\’
removed.  (Note that in this mode, long variable names are still written
with ‘\hbox’ or ‘\text’.  However, you can always make an actual
variable name like ‘\bar’ in any TeX mode.)

   During reading, text of the form ‘\matrix{ ... }’ is replaced by ‘[
... ]’.  The same also applies to ‘\pmatrix’ and ‘\bmatrix’.  In LaTeX
mode this also applies to ‘\begin{matrix} ... \end{matrix}’,
‘\begin{bmatrix} ... \end{bmatrix}’, ‘\begin{pmatrix} ...
\end{pmatrix}’, as well as ‘\begin{smallmatrix} ... \end{smallmatrix}’.
The symbol ‘&’ is interpreted as a comma, and the symbols ‘\cr’ and ‘\\’
are interpreted as semicolons.  During output, matrices are displayed in
‘\matrix{ a & b \\ c & d}’ format in TeX mode and in ‘\begin{pmatrix} a
& b \\ c & d \end{pmatrix}’ format in LaTeX mode; you may need to edit
this afterwards to change to your preferred matrix form.  If you invoke
‘d T’ or ‘d L’ with an argument of 2 or −2, then matrices will be
displayed in two-dimensional form, such as

     \begin{pmatrix}
     a & b \\
     c & d
     \end{pmatrix}

This may be convenient for isolated matrices, but could lead to
expressions being displayed like

     \begin{pmatrix} \times x
     a & b \\
     c & d
     \end{pmatrix}

While this wouldn’t bother Calc, it is incorrect LaTeX.  (Similarly for
TeX.)

   Accents like ‘\tilde’ and ‘\bar’ translate into function calls
internally (‘tilde(x)’, ‘bar(x)’).  The ‘\underline’ sequence is treated
as an accent.  The ‘\vec’ accent corresponds to the function name ‘Vec’,
because ‘vec’ is the name of a built-in Calc function.  The following
table shows the accents in Calc, TeX, LaTeX and “eqn” (described in the
next section):

     Calc      TeX           LaTeX         eqn
     ----      ---           -----         ---
     acute     \acute        \acute
     Acute                   \Acute
     bar       \bar          \bar          bar
     Bar                     \Bar
     breve     \breve        \breve
     Breve                   \Breve
     check     \check        \check
     Check                   \Check
     dddot                   \dddot
     ddddot                  \ddddot
     dot       \dot          \dot          dot
     Dot                     \Dot
     dotdot    \ddot         \ddot         dotdot
     DotDot                  \Ddot
     dyad                                  dyad
     grave     \grave        \grave
     Grave                   \Grave
     hat       \hat          \hat          hat
     Hat                     \Hat
     Prime                                 prime
     tilde     \tilde        \tilde        tilde
     Tilde                   \Tilde
     under     \underline    \underline    under
     Vec       \vec          \vec          vec
     VEC                     \Vec

   The ‘=>’ (evaluates-to) operator appears as a ‘\to’ symbol: ‘{A \to
B}’.  TeX defines ‘\to’ as an alias for ‘\rightarrow’.  However, if the
‘=>’ is the top-level expression being formatted, a slightly different
notation is used: ‘\evalto A \to B’.  The ‘\evalto’ word is ignored by
Calc’s input routines, and is undefined in TeX.  You will typically want
to include one of the following definitions at the top of a TeX file
that uses ‘\evalto’:

     \def\evalto{}
     \def\evalto#1\to{}

   The first definition formats evaluates-to operators in the usual way.
The second causes only the B part to appear in the printed document; the
A part and the arrow are hidden.  Another definition you may wish to use
is ‘\let\to=\Rightarrow’ which causes ‘\to’ to appear more like Calc’s
‘=>’ symbol.  *Note Evaluates-To Operator::, for a discussion of
‘evalto’.

   The complete set of TeX control sequences that are ignored during
reading is:

     \hbox  \mbox  \text  \left  \right
     \,  \>  \:  \;  \!  \quad  \qquad  \hfil  \hfill
     \displaystyle  \textstyle  \dsize  \tsize
     \scriptstyle  \scriptscriptstyle  \ssize  \ssize
     \rm  \bf  \it  \sl  \roman  \bold  \italic  \slanted
     \cal  \mit  \Cal  \Bbb  \frak  \goth
     \evalto

   Note that, because these symbols are ignored, reading a TeX or LaTeX
formula into Calc and writing it back out may lose spacing and font
information.

   Also, the “discretionary multiplication sign” ‘\*’ is read the same
as ‘*’.

   The TeX version of this manual includes some printed examples at the
end of this section.


File: calc.info,  Node: Eqn Language Mode,  Next: Yacas Language Mode,  Prev: TeX and LaTeX Language Modes,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.4 Eqn Language Mode
-----------------------

“Eqn” is another popular formatter for math formulas.  It is designed
for use with the TROFF text formatter, and comes standard with many
versions of Unix.  The ‘d E’ (‘calc-eqn-language’) command selects “eqn”
notation.

   The “eqn” language’s main idiosyncrasy is that whitespace plays a
significant part in the parsing of the language.  For example, ‘sqrt x+1
+ y’ treats ‘x+1’ as the argument of the ‘sqrt’ operator.  “Eqn” also
understands more conventional grouping using curly braces: ‘sqrt{x+1} +
y’.  Braces are required only when the argument contains spaces.

   In Calc’s “eqn” mode, however, curly braces are required to delimit
arguments of operators like ‘sqrt’.  The first of the above examples
would treat only the ‘x’ as the argument of ‘sqrt’, and in fact ‘sin
x+1’ would be interpreted as ‘sin * x + 1’, because ‘sin’ is not a
special operator in the “eqn” language.  If you always surround the
argument with curly braces, Calc will never misunderstand.

   Calc also understands parentheses as grouping characters.  Another
peculiarity of “eqn”’s syntax makes it advisable to separate words with
spaces from any surrounding characters that aren’t curly braces, so Calc
writes ‘sin ( x + y )’ in “eqn” mode.  (The spaces around ‘sin’ are
important to make “eqn” recognize that ‘sin’ should be typeset in a
roman font, and the spaces around ‘x’ and ‘y’ are a good idea just in
case the “eqn” document has defined special meanings for these names,
too.)

   Powers and subscripts are written with the ‘sub’ and ‘sup’ operators,
respectively.  Note that the caret symbol ‘^’ is treated the same as a
space in “eqn” mode, as is the ‘~’ symbol (these are used to introduce
spaces of various widths into the typeset output of “eqn”).

   As in LaTeX mode, Calc’s formatter omits parentheses around the
arguments of functions like ‘ln’ and ‘sin’ if they are “simple-looking”;
in this case Calc surrounds the argument with braces, separated by a ‘~’
from the function name: ‘sin~{x}’.

   Font change codes (like ‘roman X’) and positioning codes (like ‘~’
and ‘down N X’) are ignored by the “eqn” reader.  Also ignored are the
words ‘left’, ‘right’, ‘mark’, and ‘lineup’.  Quotation marks in “eqn”
mode input are treated the same as curly braces: ‘sqrt "1+x"’ is
equivalent to ‘sqrt {1+x}’; this is only an approximation to the true
meaning of quotes in “eqn”, but it is good enough for most uses.

   Accent codes (‘X dot’) are handled by treating them as function calls
(‘dot(X)’) internally.  *Note TeX and LaTeX Language Modes::, for a
table of these accent functions.  The ‘prime’ accent is treated
specially if it occurs on a variable or function name: ‘f prime prime
( x prime )’ is stored internally as ‘f''(x')’.  For example, taking the
derivative of ‘f(2 x)’ with ‘a d x’ will produce ‘2 f'(2 x)’, which
“eqn” mode will display as ‘2 f prime ( 2 x )’.

   Assignments are written with the ‘<-’ (left-arrow) symbol, and
‘evalto’ operators are written with ‘->’ or ‘evalto ... ->’ (*note TeX
and LaTeX Language Modes::, for a discussion of this).  The regular Calc
symbols ‘:=’ and ‘=>’ are also recognized for these operators during
reading.

   Vectors in “eqn” mode use regular Calc square brackets, but matrices
are formatted as ‘matrix { ccol { a above b } ... }’.  The words ‘lcol’
and ‘rcol’ are recognized as synonyms for ‘ccol’ during input, and are
generated instead of ‘ccol’ if the matrix justification mode so
specifies.


File: calc.info,  Node: Yacas Language Mode,  Next: Maxima Language Mode,  Prev: Eqn Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.5 Yacas Language Mode
-------------------------

The ‘d Y’ (‘calc-yacas-language’) command selects the conventions of
Yacas, a free computer algebra system.  While the operators and
functions in Yacas are similar to those of Calc, the names of built-in
functions in Yacas are capitalized.  The Calc formula ‘sin(2 x)’, for
example, is entered and displayed ‘Sin(2 x)’ in Yacas mode, and
‘arcsin(x^2)’ is ‘ArcSin(x^2)’ in Yacas mode.  Complex numbers are
written are written ‘3 + 4 I’.  The standard special constants are
written ‘Pi’, ‘E’, ‘I’, ‘GoldenRatio’ and ‘Gamma’.  ‘Infinity’
represents both ‘inf’ and ‘uinf’, and ‘Undefined’ represents ‘nan’.

   Certain operators on functions, such as ‘D’ for differentiation and
‘Integrate’ for integration, take a prefix form in Yacas.  For example,
the derivative of ‘e^x sin(x)’ can be computed with
‘D(x) Exp(x)*Sin(x)’.

   Other notable differences between Yacas and standard Calc expressions
are that vectors and matrices use curly braces in Yacas, and subscripts
use square brackets.  If, for example, ‘A’ represents the list
‘{a,2,c,4}’, then ‘A[3]’ would equal ‘c’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Maxima Language Mode,  Next: Giac Language Mode,  Prev: Yacas Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.6 Maxima Language Mode
--------------------------

The ‘d X’ (‘calc-maxima-language’) command selects the conventions of
Maxima, another free computer algebra system.  The function names in
Maxima are similar, but not always identical, to Calc.  For example,
instead of ‘arcsin(x)’, Maxima will use ‘asin(x)’.  Complex numbers are
written ‘3 + 4 %i’.  The standard special constants are written ‘%pi’,
‘%e’, ‘%i’, ‘%phi’ and ‘%gamma’.  In Maxima, ‘inf’ means the same as in
Calc, but ‘infinity’ represents Calc’s ‘uinf’.

   Underscores as well as percent signs are allowed in function and
variable names in Maxima mode.  The underscore again is equivalent to
the ‘#’ in Normal mode, and the percent sign is equivalent to ‘o'o’.

   Maxima uses square brackets for lists and vectors, and matrices are
written as calls to the function ‘matrix’, given the row vectors of the
matrix as arguments.  Square brackets are also used as subscripts.


File: calc.info,  Node: Giac Language Mode,  Next: Mathematica Language Mode,  Prev: Maxima Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.7 Giac Language Mode
------------------------

The ‘d A’ (‘calc-giac-language’) command selects the conventions of
Giac, another free computer algebra system.  The function names in Giac
are similar to Maxima.  Complex numbers are written ‘3 + 4 i’.  The
standard special constants in Giac are the same as in Calc, except that
‘infinity’ represents both Calc’s ‘inf’ and ‘uinf’.

   Underscores are allowed in function and variable names in Giac mode.
Brackets are used for subscripts.  In Giac, indexing of lists begins at
0, instead of 1 as in Calc.  So if ‘A’ represents the list ‘[a,2,c,4]’,
then ‘A[2]’ would equal ‘c’.  In general, ‘A[n]’ in Giac mode
corresponds to ‘A_(n+1)’ in Normal mode.

   The Giac interval notation ‘2 .. 3’ has no surrounding brackets; Calc
reads ‘2 .. 3’ as the closed interval ‘[2 .. 3]’ and writes any kind of
interval as ‘2 .. 3’.  This means you cannot see the difference between
an open and a closed interval while in Giac mode.


File: calc.info,  Node: Mathematica Language Mode,  Next: Maple Language Mode,  Prev: Giac Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.8 Mathematica Language Mode
-------------------------------

The ‘d M’ (‘calc-mathematica-language’) command selects the conventions
of Mathematica.  Notable differences in Mathematica mode are that the
names of built-in functions are capitalized, and function calls use
square brackets instead of parentheses.  Thus the Calc formula ‘sin(2
x)’ is entered and displayed ‘Sin[2 x]’ in Mathematica mode.

   Vectors and matrices use curly braces in Mathematica.  Complex
numbers are written ‘3 + 4 I’.  The standard special constants in Calc
are written ‘Pi’, ‘E’, ‘I’, ‘GoldenRatio’, ‘EulerGamma’, ‘Infinity’,
‘ComplexInfinity’, and ‘Indeterminate’ in Mathematica mode.  Non-decimal
numbers are written, e.g., ‘16^^7fff’.  Floating-point numbers in
scientific notation are written ‘1.23*10.^3’.  Subscripts use double
square brackets: ‘a[[i]]’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Maple Language Mode,  Next: Compositions,  Prev: Mathematica Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.9 Maple Language Mode
-------------------------

The ‘d W’ (‘calc-maple-language’) command selects the conventions of
Maple.

   Maple’s language is much like C.  Underscores are allowed in symbol
names; square brackets are used for subscripts; explicit ‘*’s for
multiplications are required.  Use either ‘^’ or ‘**’ to denote powers.

   Maple uses square brackets for lists and curly braces for sets.  Calc
interprets both notations as vectors, and displays vectors with square
brackets.  This means Maple sets will be converted to lists when they
pass through Calc.  As a special case, matrices are written as calls to
the function ‘matrix’, given a list of lists as the argument, and can be
read in this form or with all-capitals ‘MATRIX’.

   The Maple interval notation ‘2 .. 3’ is like Giac’s interval
notation, and is handled the same by Calc.

   Maple writes complex numbers as ‘3 + 4*I’.  Its special constants are
‘Pi’, ‘E’, ‘I’, and ‘infinity’ (all three of ‘inf’, ‘uinf’, and ‘nan’
display as ‘infinity’).  Floating-point numbers are written
‘1.23*10.^3’.

   Among things not currently handled by Calc’s Maple mode are the
various quote symbols, procedures and functional operators, and inert
(‘&’) operators.


File: calc.info,  Node: Compositions,  Next: Syntax Tables,  Prev: Maple Language Mode,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.10 Compositions
-------------------

There are several “composition functions” which allow you to get
displays in a variety of formats similar to those in Big language mode.
Most of these functions do not evaluate to anything; they are
placeholders which are left in symbolic form by Calc’s evaluator but are
recognized by Calc’s display formatting routines.

   Two of these, ‘string’ and ‘bstring’, are described elsewhere.  *Note
Strings::.  For example, ‘string("ABC")’ is displayed as ‘ABC’.  When
viewed on the stack it will be indistinguishable from the variable
‘ABC’, but internally it will be stored as ‘string([65, 66, 67])’ and
can still be manipulated this way; for example, the selection and vector
commands ‘j 1 v v j u’ would select the vector portion of this object
and reverse the elements, then deselect to reveal a string whose
characters had been reversed.

   The composition functions do the same thing in all language modes
(although their components will of course be formatted in the current
language mode).  The one exception is Unformatted mode (‘d U’), which
does not give the composition functions any special treatment.  The
functions are discussed here because of their relationship to the
language modes.

* Menu:

* Composition Basics::
* Horizontal Compositions::
* Vertical Compositions::
* Other Compositions::
* Information about Compositions::
* User-Defined Compositions::


File: calc.info,  Node: Composition Basics,  Next: Horizontal Compositions,  Prev: Compositions,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.1 Composition Basics
...........................

Compositions are generally formed by stacking formulas together
horizontally or vertically in various ways.  Those formulas are
themselves compositions.  TeX users will find this analogous to TeX’s
“boxes.” Each multi-line composition has a “baseline”; horizontal
compositions use the baselines to decide how formulas should be
positioned relative to one another.  For example, in the Big mode
formula

               2
          a + b
     17 + ------
            c

the second term of the sum is four lines tall and has line three as its
baseline.  Thus when the term is combined with 17, line three is placed
on the same level as the baseline of 17.

   Another important composition concept is “precedence”.  This is an
integer that represents the binding strength of various operators.  For
example, ‘*’ has higher precedence (195) than ‘+’ (180), which means
that ‘(a * b) + c’ will be formatted without the parentheses, but ‘a *
(b + c)’ will keep the parentheses.

   The operator table used by normal and Big language modes has the
following precedences:

     _     1200    (subscripts)
     %     1100    (as in n%)
     !     1000    (as in !n)
     mod    400
     +/-    300
     !!     210    (as in n!!)
     !      210    (as in n!)
     ^      200
     -      197    (as in -n)
     *      195    (or implicit multiplication)
     / % \  190
     + -    180    (as in a+b)
     |      170
     < =    160    (and other relations)
     &&     110
     ||     100
     ? :     90
     !!!     85
     &&&     80
     |||     75
     :=      50
     ::      45
     =>      40

   The general rule is that if an operator with precedence ‘n’ occurs as
an argument to an operator with precedence ‘m’, then the argument is
enclosed in parentheses if ‘n < m’.  Top-level expressions and
expressions which are function arguments, vector components, etc., are
formatted with precedence zero (so that they normally never get
additional parentheses).

   For binary left-associative operators like ‘+’, the righthand
argument is actually formatted with one-higher precedence than shown in
the table.  This makes sure ‘(a + b) + c’ omits the parentheses, but the
unnatural form ‘a + (b + c)’ keeps its parentheses.  Right-associative
operators like ‘^’ format the lefthand argument with one-higher
precedence.

   The ‘cprec’ function formats an expression with an arbitrary
precedence.  For example, ‘cprec(abc, 185)’ will combine into sums and
products as follows: ‘7 + abc’, ‘7 (abc)’ (because this ‘cprec’ form has
higher precedence than addition, but lower precedence than
multiplication).

   A final composition issue is “line breaking”.  Calc uses two
different strategies for “flat” and “non-flat” compositions.  A non-flat
composition is anything that appears on multiple lines (not counting
line breaking).  Examples would be matrices and Big mode powers and
quotients.  Non-flat compositions are displayed exactly as specified.
If they come out wider than the current window, you must use horizontal
scrolling (‘<’ and ‘>’) to view them.

   Flat compositions, on the other hand, will be broken across several
lines if they are too wide to fit the window.  Certain points in a
composition are noted internally as “break points”.  Calc’s general
strategy is to fill each line as much as possible, then to move down to
the next line starting at the first break point that didn’t fit.
However, the line breaker understands the hierarchical structure of
formulas.  It will not break an “inner” formula if it can use an earlier
break point from an “outer” formula instead.  For example, a vector of
sums might be formatted as:

     [ a + b + c, d + e + f,
       g + h + i, j + k + l, m ]

If the ‘m’ can fit, then so, it seems, could the ‘g’.  But Calc prefers
to break at the comma since the comma is part of a “more outer” formula.
Calc would break at a plus sign only if it had to, say, if the very
first sum in the vector had itself been too large to fit.

   Of the composition functions described below, only ‘choriz’ generates
break points.  The ‘bstring’ function (*note Strings::) also generates
breakable items: A break point is added after every space (or group of
spaces) except for spaces at the very beginning or end of the string.

   Composition functions themselves count as levels in the formula
hierarchy, so a ‘choriz’ that is a component of a larger ‘choriz’ will
be less likely to be broken.  As a special case, if a ‘bstring’ occurs
as a component of a ‘choriz’ or ‘choriz’-like object (such as a vector
or a list of arguments in a function call), then the break points in
that ‘bstring’ will be on the same level as the break points of the
surrounding object.


File: calc.info,  Node: Horizontal Compositions,  Next: Vertical Compositions,  Prev: Composition Basics,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.2 Horizontal Compositions
................................

The ‘choriz’ function takes a vector of objects and composes them
horizontally.  For example, ‘choriz([17, a b/c, d])’ formats as
‘17a b / cd’ in Normal language mode, or as

       a b
     17---d
        c

in Big language mode.  This is actually one case of the general function
‘choriz(VEC, SEP, PREC)’, where either or both of SEP and PREC may be
omitted.  PREC gives the “precedence” to use when formatting each of the
components of VEC.  The default precedence is the precedence from the
surrounding environment.

   SEP is a string (i.e., a vector of character codes as might be
entered with ‘" "’ notation) which should separate components of the
composition.  Also, if SEP is given, the line breaker will allow lines
to be broken after each occurrence of SEP.  If SEP is omitted, the
composition will not be breakable (unless any of its component
compositions are breakable).

   For example, ‘2 choriz([a, b c, d = e], " + ", 180)’ is formatted as
‘2 a + b c + (d = e)’.  To get the ‘choriz’ to have precedence 180
“outwards” as well as “inwards,” enclose it in a ‘cprec’ form: ‘2
cprec(choriz(...), 180)’ formats as ‘2 (a + b c + (d = e))’.

   The baseline of a horizontal composition is the same as the baselines
of the component compositions, which are all aligned.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vertical Compositions,  Next: Other Compositions,  Prev: Horizontal Compositions,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.3 Vertical Compositions
..............................

The ‘cvert’ function makes a vertical composition.  Each component of
the vector is centered in a column.  The baseline of the result is by
default the top line of the resulting composition.  For example,
‘f(cvert([a, bb, ccc]), cvert([a^2 + 1, b^2]))’ formats in Big mode as

     f( a ,  2    )
       bb   a  + 1
       ccc     2
              b

   There are several special composition functions that work only as
components of a vertical composition.  The ‘cbase’ function controls the
baseline of the vertical composition; the baseline will be the same as
the baseline of whatever component is enclosed in ‘cbase’.  Thus
‘f(cvert([a, cbase(bb), ccc]), cvert([a^2 + 1, cbase(b^2)]))’ displays
as

             2
            a  + 1
        a      2
     f(bb ,   b   )
       ccc

   There are also ‘ctbase’ and ‘cbbase’ functions which make the
baseline of the vertical composition equal to the top or bottom line
(rather than the baseline) of that component.  Thus ‘cvert([cbase(a /
b)]) + cvert([ctbase(a / b)]) + cvert([cbbase(a / b)])’ gives

             a
     a       -
     - + a + b
     b   -
         b

   There should be only one ‘cbase’, ‘ctbase’, or ‘cbbase’ function in a
given vertical composition.  These functions can also be written with no
arguments: ‘ctbase()’ is a zero-height object which means the baseline
is the top line of the following item, and ‘cbbase()’ means the baseline
is the bottom line of the preceding item.

   The ‘crule’ function builds a “rule,” or horizontal line, across a
vertical composition.  By itself ‘crule()’ uses ‘-’ characters to build
the rule.  You can specify any other character, e.g., ‘crule("=")’.  The
argument must be a character code or vector of exactly one character
code.  It is repeated to match the width of the widest item in the
stack.  For example, a quotient with a thick line is ‘cvert([a + 1,
cbase(crule("=")), b^2])’:

     a + 1
     =====
       2
      b

   Finally, the functions ‘clvert’ and ‘crvert’ act exactly like ‘cvert’
except that the items are left- or right-justified in the stack.  Thus
‘clvert([a, bb, ccc]) + crvert([a, bb, ccc])’ gives:

     a   +   a
     bb     bb
     ccc   ccc

   Like ‘choriz’, the vertical compositions accept a second argument
which gives the precedence to use when formatting the components.
Vertical compositions do not support separator strings.


File: calc.info,  Node: Other Compositions,  Next: Information about Compositions,  Prev: Vertical Compositions,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.4 Other Compositions
...........................

The ‘csup’ function builds a superscripted expression.  For example,
‘csup(a, b)’ looks the same as ‘a^b’ does in Big language mode.  This is
essentially a horizontal composition of ‘a’ and ‘b’, where ‘b’ is
shifted up so that its bottom line is one above the baseline.

   Likewise, the ‘csub’ function builds a subscripted expression.  This
shifts ‘b’ down so that its top line is one below the bottom line of ‘a’
(note that this is not quite analogous to ‘csup’).  Other arrangements
can be obtained by using ‘choriz’ and ‘cvert’ directly.

   The ‘cflat’ function formats its argument in “flat” mode, as obtained
by ‘d O’, if the current language mode is normal or Big.  It has no
effect in other language modes.  For example, ‘a^(b/c)’ is formatted by
Big mode like ‘csup(a, cflat(b/c))’ to improve its readability.

   The ‘cspace’ function creates horizontal space.  For example,
‘cspace(4)’ is effectively the same as ‘string(" ")’.  A second string
(i.e., vector of characters) argument is repeated instead of the space
character.  For example, ‘cspace(4, "ab")’ looks like ‘abababab’.  If
the second argument is not a string, it is formatted in the normal way
and then several copies of that are composed together: ‘cspace(4, a^2)’
yields

      2 2 2 2
     a a a a

If the number argument is zero, this is a zero-width object.

   The ‘cvspace’ function creates vertical space, or a vertical stack of
copies of a certain string or formatted object.  The baseline is the
center line of the resulting stack.  A numerical argument of zero will
produce an object which contributes zero height if used in a vertical
composition.

   There are also ‘ctspace’ and ‘cbspace’ functions which create
vertical space with the baseline the same as the baseline of the top or
bottom copy, respectively, of the second argument.  Thus ‘cvspace(2,
a/b) + ctspace(2, a/b) + cbspace(2, a/b)’ displays as:

             a
             -
     a       b
     -   a   a
     b + - + -
     a   b   b
     -   a
     b   -
         b


File: calc.info,  Node: Information about Compositions,  Next: User-Defined Compositions,  Prev: Other Compositions,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.5 Information about Compositions
.......................................

The functions in this section are actual functions; they compose their
arguments according to the current language and other display modes,
then return a certain measurement of the composition as an integer.

   The ‘cwidth’ function measures the width, in characters, of a
composition.  For example, ‘cwidth(a + b)’ is 5, and ‘cwidth(a / b)’ is
5 in Normal mode, 1 in Big mode, and 11 in TeX mode (for ‘{a \over b}’).
The argument may involve the composition functions described in this
section.

   The ‘cheight’ function measures the height of a composition.  This is
the total number of lines in the argument’s printed form.

   The functions ‘cascent’ and ‘cdescent’ measure the amount of the
height that is above (and including) the baseline, or below the
baseline, respectively.  Thus ‘cascent(X) + cdescent(X)’ always equals
‘cheight(X)’.  For a one-line formula like ‘a + b’, ‘cascent’ returns 1
and ‘cdescent’ returns 0.  For ‘a / b’ in Big mode, ‘cascent’ returns 2
and ‘cdescent’ returns 1.  The only formula for which ‘cascent’ will
return zero is ‘cvspace(0)’ or equivalents.


File: calc.info,  Node: User-Defined Compositions,  Prev: Information about Compositions,  Up: Compositions

7.8.10.6 User-Defined Compositions
..................................

The ‘Z C’ (‘calc-user-define-composition’) command lets you define the
display format for any algebraic function.  You provide a formula
containing a certain number of argument variables on the stack.  Any
time Calc formats a call to the specified function in the current
language mode and with that number of arguments, Calc effectively
replaces the function call with that formula with the arguments
replaced.

   Calc builds the default argument list by sorting all the variable
names that appear in the formula into alphabetical order.  You can edit
this argument list before pressing <RET> if you wish.  Any variables in
the formula that do not appear in the argument list will be displayed
literally; any arguments that do not appear in the formula will not
affect the display at all.

   You can define formats for built-in functions, for functions you have
defined with ‘Z F’ (*note Algebraic Definitions::), or for functions
which have no definitions but are being used as purely syntactic
objects.  You can define different formats for each language mode, and
for each number of arguments, using a succession of ‘Z C’ commands.
When Calc formats a function call, it first searches for a format
defined for the current language mode (and number of arguments); if
there is none, it uses the format defined for the Normal language mode.
If neither format exists, Calc uses its built-in standard format for
that function (usually just ‘FUNC(ARGS)’).

   If you execute ‘Z C’ with the number 0 on the stack instead of a
formula, any defined formats for the function in the current language
mode will be removed.  The function will revert to its standard format.

   For example, the default format for the binomial coefficient function
‘choose(n, m)’ in the Big language mode is

      n
     ( )
      m

You might prefer the notation,

      C
     n m

To define this notation, first make sure you are in Big mode, then put
the formula

     choriz([cvert([cvspace(1), n]), C, cvert([cvspace(1), m])])

on the stack and type ‘Z C’.  Answer the first prompt with ‘choose’.
The second prompt will be the default argument list of ‘(C m n)’.  Edit
this list to be ‘(n m)’ and press <RET>.  Now, try it out: For example,
turn simplification off with ‘m O’ and enter ‘choose(a,b) + choose(7,3)’
as an algebraic entry.

      C  +  C
     a b   7 3

   As another example, let’s define the usual notation for Stirling
numbers of the first kind, ‘stir1(n, m)’.  This is just like the regular
format for binomial coefficients but with square brackets instead of
parentheses.

     choriz([string("["), cvert([n, cbase(cvspace(1)), m]), string("]")])

   Now type ‘Z C stir1 <RET>’, edit the argument list to ‘(n m)’, and
type <RET>.

   The formula provided to ‘Z C’ usually will involve composition
functions, but it doesn’t have to.  Putting the formula ‘a + b + c’ onto
the stack and typing ‘Z C foo <RET> <RET>’ would define the function
‘foo(x,y,z)’ to display like ‘x + y + z’.  This “sum” will act exactly
like a real sum for all formatting purposes (it will be parenthesized
the same, and so on).  However it will be computationally unrelated to a
sum.  For example, the formula ‘2 * foo(1, 2, 3)’ will display as ‘2 (1
+ 2 + 3)’.  Operator precedences have caused the “sum” to be written in
parentheses, but the arguments have not actually been summed.
(Generally a display format like this would be undesirable, since it can
easily be confused with a real sum.)

   The special function ‘eval’ can be used inside a ‘Z C’ composition
formula to cause all or part of the formula to be evaluated at display
time.  For example, if the formula is ‘a + eval(b + c)’, then ‘foo(1, 2,
3)’ will be displayed as ‘1 + 5’.  Evaluation will use the default
simplifications, regardless of the current simplification mode.  There
are also ‘evalsimp’ and ‘evalextsimp’ which simplify as if by ‘a s’ and
‘a e’ (respectively).  Note that these “functions” operate only in the
context of composition formulas (and also in rewrite rules, where they
serve a similar purpose; *note Rewrite Rules::).  On the stack, a call
to ‘eval’ will be left in symbolic form.

   It is not a good idea to use ‘eval’ except as a last resort.  It can
cause the display of formulas to be extremely slow.  For example, while
‘eval(a + b)’ might seem quite fast and simple, there are several
situations where it could be slow.  For example, ‘a’ and/or ‘b’ could be
polar complex numbers, in which case doing the sum requires
trigonometry.  Or, ‘a’ could be the factorial ‘fact(100)’ which is
unevaluated because you have typed ‘m O’; ‘eval’ will evaluate it anyway
to produce a large, unwieldy integer.

   You can save your display formats permanently using the ‘Z P’ command
(*note Creating User Keys::).


File: calc.info,  Node: Syntax Tables,  Prev: Compositions,  Up: Language Modes

7.8.11 Syntax Tables
--------------------

Syntax tables do for input what compositions do for output: They allow
you to teach custom notations to Calc’s formula parser.  Calc keeps a
separate syntax table for each language mode.

   (Note that the Calc “syntax tables” discussed here are completely
unrelated to the syntax tables described in the Emacs manual.)

   The ‘Z S’ (‘calc-edit-user-syntax’) command edits the syntax table
for the current language mode.  If you want your syntax to work in any
language, define it in the Normal language mode.  Type ‘C-c C-c’ to
finish editing the syntax table, or ‘C-x k’ to cancel the edit.  The ‘m
m’ command saves all the syntax tables along with the other mode
settings; *note General Mode Commands::.

* Menu:

* Syntax Table Basics::
* Precedence in Syntax Tables::
* Advanced Syntax Patterns::
* Conditional Syntax Rules::


File: calc.info,  Node: Syntax Table Basics,  Next: Precedence in Syntax Tables,  Prev: Syntax Tables,  Up: Syntax Tables

7.8.11.1 Syntax Table Basics
............................

“Parsing” is the process of converting a raw string of characters, such
as you would type in during algebraic entry, into a Calc formula.
Calc’s parser works in two stages.  First, the input is broken down into
“tokens”, such as words, numbers, and punctuation symbols like ‘+’,
‘:=’, and ‘+/-’.  Space between tokens is ignored (except when it serves
to separate adjacent words).  Next, the parser matches this string of
tokens against various built-in syntactic patterns, such as “an
expression followed by ‘+’ followed by another expression” or “a name
followed by ‘(’, zero or more expressions separated by commas, and ‘)’.”

   A “syntax table” is a list of user-defined “syntax rules”, which
allow you to specify new patterns to define your own favorite input
notations.  Calc’s parser always checks the syntax table for the current
language mode, then the table for the Normal language mode, before it
uses its built-in rules to parse an algebraic formula you have entered.
Each syntax rule should go on its own line; it consists of a “pattern”,
a ‘:=’ symbol, and a Calc formula with an optional “condition”.  (Syntax
rules resemble algebraic rewrite rules, but the notation for patterns is
completely different.)

   A syntax pattern is a list of tokens, separated by spaces.  Except
for a few special symbols, tokens in syntax patterns are matched
literally, from left to right.  For example, the rule,

     foo ( ) := 2+3

would cause Calc to parse the formula ‘4+foo()*5’ as if it were
‘4+(2+3)*5’.  Notice that the parentheses were written as two separate
tokens in the rule.  As a result, the rule works for both ‘foo()’ and
‘foo (  )’.  If we had written the rule as ‘foo () := 2+3’, then Calc
would treat ‘()’ as a single, indivisible token, so that ‘foo( )’ would
not be recognized by the rule.  (It would be parsed as a regular
zero-argument function call instead.)  In fact, this rule would also
make trouble for the rest of Calc’s parser: An unrelated formula like
‘bar()’ would now be tokenized into ‘bar ()’ instead of ‘bar ( )’, so
that the standard parser for function calls would no longer recognize
it!

   While it is possible to make a token with a mixture of letters and
punctuation symbols, this is not recommended.  It is better to break it
into several tokens, as we did with ‘foo()’ above.

   The symbol ‘#’ in a syntax pattern matches any Calc expression.  On
the righthand side, the things that matched the ‘#’s can be referred to
as ‘#1’, ‘#2’, and so on (where ‘#1’ matches the leftmost ‘#’ in the
pattern).  For example, these rules match a user-defined function,
prefix operator, infix operator, and postfix operator, respectively:

     foo ( # ) := myfunc(#1)
     foo # := myprefix(#1)
     # foo # := myinfix(#1,#2)
     # foo := mypostfix(#1)

   Thus ‘foo(3)’ will parse as ‘myfunc(3)’, and ‘2+3 foo’ will parse as
‘mypostfix(2+3)’.

   It is important to write the first two rules in the order shown,
because Calc tries rules in order from first to last.  If the pattern
‘foo #’ came first, it would match anything that could match the ‘foo (
# )’ rule, since an expression in parentheses is itself a valid
expression.  Thus the ‘foo ( # )’ rule would never get to match
anything.  Likewise, the last two rules must be written in the order
shown or else ‘3 foo 4’ will be parsed as ‘mypostfix(3) * 4’.  (Of
course, the best way to avoid these ambiguities is not to use the same
symbol in more than one way at the same time!  In case you’re not
convinced, try the following exercise: How will the above rules parse
the input ‘foo(3,4)’, if at all?  Work it out for yourself, then try it
in Calc and see.)

   Calc is quite flexible about what sorts of patterns are allowed.  The
only rule is that every pattern must begin with a literal token (like
‘foo’ in the first two patterns above), or with a ‘#’ followed by a
literal token (as in the last two patterns).  After that, any mixture is
allowed, although putting two ‘#’s in a row will not be very useful
since two expressions with nothing between them will be parsed as one
expression that uses implicit multiplication.

   As a more practical example, Maple uses the notation ‘sum(a(i),
i=1..10)’ for sums, which Calc’s Maple mode doesn’t recognize at
present.  To handle this syntax, we simply add the rule,

     sum ( # , # = # .. # ) := sum(#1,#2,#3,#4)

to the Maple mode syntax table.  As another example, C mode can’t read
assignment operators like ‘++’ and ‘*=’.  We can define these operators
quite easily:

     # *= # := muleq(#1,#2)
     # ++ := postinc(#1)
     ++ # := preinc(#1)

To complete the job, we would use corresponding composition functions
and ‘Z C’ to cause these functions to display in their respective Maple
and C notations.  (Note that the C example ignores issues of operator
precedence, which are discussed in the next section.)

   You can enclose any token in quotes to prevent its usual
interpretation in syntax patterns:

     # ":=" # := becomes(#1,#2)

   Quotes also allow you to include spaces in a token, although once
again it is generally better to use two tokens than one token with an
embedded space.  To include an actual quotation mark in a quoted token,
precede it with a backslash.  (This also works to include backslashes in
tokens.)

     # "bad token" # "/\"\\" # := silly(#1,#2,#3)

This will parse ‘3 bad token 4 /"\ 5’ to ‘silly(3,4,5)’.

   The token ‘#’ has a predefined meaning in Calc’s formula parser; it
is not valid to use ‘"#"’ in a syntax rule.  However, longer tokens that
include the ‘#’ character are allowed.  Also, while ‘"$"’ and ‘"\""’ are
allowed as tokens, their presence in the syntax table will prevent those
characters from working in their usual ways (referring to stack entries
and quoting strings, respectively).

   Finally, the notation ‘%%’ anywhere in a syntax table causes the rest
of the line to be ignored as a comment.


File: calc.info,  Node: Precedence in Syntax Tables,  Next: Advanced Syntax Patterns,  Prev: Syntax Table Basics,  Up: Syntax Tables

7.8.11.2 Precedence
...................

Different operators are generally assigned different “precedences”.  By
default, an operator defined by a rule like

     # foo # := foo(#1,#2)

will have an extremely low precedence, so that ‘2*3+4 foo 5 == 6’ will
be parsed as ‘(2*3+4) foo (5 == 6)’.  To change the precedence of an
operator, use the notation ‘#/P’ in place of ‘#’, where P is an integer
precedence level.  For example, 185 lies between the precedences for ‘+’
and ‘*’, so if we change this rule to

     #/185 foo #/186 := foo(#1,#2)

then ‘2+3 foo 4*5’ will be parsed as ‘2+(3 foo (4*5))’.  Also, because
we’ve given the righthand expression slightly higher precedence, our new
operator will be left-associative: ‘1 foo 2 foo 3’ will be parsed as ‘(1
foo 2) foo 3’.  By raising the precedence of the lefthand expression
instead, we can create a right-associative operator.

   *Note Composition Basics::, for a table of precedences of the
standard Calc operators.  For the precedences of operators in other
language modes, look in the Calc source file ‘calc-lang.el’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Advanced Syntax Patterns,  Next: Conditional Syntax Rules,  Prev: Precedence in Syntax Tables,  Up: Syntax Tables

7.8.11.3 Advanced Syntax Patterns
.................................

To match a function with a variable number of arguments, you could write

     foo ( # ) := myfunc(#1)
     foo ( # , # ) := myfunc(#1,#2)
     foo ( # , # , # ) := myfunc(#1,#2,#3)

but this isn’t very elegant.  To match variable numbers of items, Calc
uses some notations inspired regular expressions and the “extended BNF”
style used by some language designers.

     foo ( { # }*, ) := apply(myfunc,#1)

   The token ‘{’ introduces a repeated or optional portion.  One of the
three tokens ‘}*’, ‘}+’, or ‘}?’ ends the portion.  These will match
zero or more, one or more, or zero or one copies of the enclosed
pattern, respectively.  In addition, ‘}*’ and ‘}+’ can be followed by a
separator token (with no space in between, as shown above).  Thus ‘{ #
}*,’ matches nothing, or one expression, or several expressions
separated by commas.

   A complete ‘{ ... }’ item matches as a vector of the items that
matched inside it.  For example, the above rule will match ‘foo(1,2,3)’
to get ‘apply(myfunc,[1,2,3])’.  The Calc ‘apply’ function takes a
function name and a vector of arguments and builds a call to the
function with those arguments, so the net result is the formula
‘myfunc(1,2,3)’.

   If the body of a ‘{ ... }’ contains several ‘#’s (or nested ‘{ ... }’
constructs), then the items will be strung together into the resulting
vector.  If the body does not contain anything but literal tokens, the
result will always be an empty vector.

     foo ( { # , # }+, ) := bar(#1)
     foo ( { { # }*, }*; ) := matrix(#1)

will parse ‘foo(1, 2, 3, 4)’ as ‘bar([1, 2, 3, 4])’, and ‘foo(1, 2; 3,
4)’ as ‘matrix([[1, 2], [3, 4]])’.  Also, after some thought it’s easy
to see how this pair of rules will parse ‘foo(1, 2, 3)’ as ‘matrix([[1,
2, 3]])’, since the first rule will only match an even number of
arguments.  The rule

     foo ( # { , # , # }? ) := bar(#1,#2)

will parse ‘foo(2,3,4)’ as ‘bar(2,[3,4])’, and ‘foo(2)’ as ‘bar(2,[])’.

   The notation ‘{ ... }?.’ (note the trailing period) works just the
same as regular ‘{ ... }?’, except that it does not count as an
argument; the following two rules are equivalent:

     foo ( # , { also }? # ) := bar(#1,#3)
     foo ( # , { also }?. # ) := bar(#1,#2)

Note that in the first case the optional text counts as ‘#2’, which will
always be an empty vector, but in the second case no empty vector is
produced.

   Another variant is ‘{ ... }?$’, which means the body is optional only
at the end of the input formula.  All built-in syntax rules in Calc use
this for closing delimiters, so that during algebraic entry you can type
‘[sqrt(2), sqrt(3 <RET>’, omitting the closing parenthesis and bracket.
Calc does this automatically for trailing ‘)’, ‘]’, and ‘>’ tokens in
syntax rules, but you can use ‘{ ... }?$’ explicitly to get this effect
with any token (such as ‘"}"’ or ‘end’).  Like ‘{ ... }?.’, this
notation does not count as an argument.  Conversely, you can use quotes,
as in ‘")"’, to prevent a closing-delimiter token from being
automatically treated as optional.

   Calc’s parser does not have full backtracking, which means some
patterns will not work as you might expect:

     foo ( { # , }? # , # ) := bar(#1,#2,#3)

Here we are trying to make the first argument optional, so that
‘foo(2,3)’ parses as ‘bar([],2,3)’.  Unfortunately, Calc first tries to
match ‘2,’ against the optional part of the pattern, finds a match, and
so goes ahead to match the rest of the pattern.  Later on it will fail
to match the second comma, but it doesn’t know how to go back and try
the other alternative at that point.  One way to get around this would
be to use two rules:

     foo ( # , # , # ) := bar([#1],#2,#3)
     foo ( # , # ) := bar([],#1,#2)

   More precisely, when Calc wants to match an optional or repeated part
of a pattern, it scans forward attempting to match that part.  If it
reaches the end of the optional part without failing, it “finalizes” its
choice and proceeds.  If it fails, though, it backs up and tries the
other alternative.  Thus Calc has “partial” backtracking.  A fully
backtracking parser would go on to make sure the rest of the pattern
matched before finalizing the choice.


File: calc.info,  Node: Conditional Syntax Rules,  Prev: Advanced Syntax Patterns,  Up: Syntax Tables

7.8.11.4 Conditional Syntax Rules
.................................

It is possible to attach a “condition” to a syntax rule.  For example,
the rules

     foo ( # ) := ifoo(#1) :: integer(#1)
     foo ( # ) := gfoo(#1)

will parse ‘foo(3)’ as ‘ifoo(3)’, but will parse ‘foo(3.5)’ and ‘foo(x)’
as calls to ‘gfoo’.  Any number of conditions may be attached; all must
be true for the rule to succeed.  A condition is “true” if it evaluates
to a nonzero number.  *Note Logical Operations::, for a list of Calc
functions like ‘integer’ that perform logical tests.

   The exact sequence of events is as follows: When Calc tries a rule,
it first matches the pattern as usual.  It then substitutes ‘#1’, ‘#2’,
etc., in the conditions, if any.  Next, the conditions are simplified
and evaluated in order from left to right, using the algebraic
simplifications (*note Simplifying Formulas::).  Each result is true if
it is a nonzero number, or an expression that can be proven to be
nonzero (*note Declarations::).  If the results of all conditions are
true, the expression (such as ‘ifoo(#1)’) has its ‘#’s substituted, and
that is the result of the parse.  If the result of any condition is
false, Calc goes on to try the next rule in the syntax table.

   Syntax rules also support ‘let’ conditions, which operate in exactly
the same way as they do in algebraic rewrite rules.  *Note Other
Features of Rewrite Rules::, for details.  A ‘let’ condition is always
true, but as a side effect it defines a variable which can be used in
later conditions, and also in the expression after the ‘:=’ sign:

     foo ( # ) := hifoo(x) :: let(x := #1 + 0.5) :: dnumint(x)

The ‘dnumint’ function tests if a value is numerically an integer, i.e.,
either a true integer or an integer-valued float.  This rule will parse
‘foo’ with a half-integer argument, like ‘foo(3.5)’, to a call like
‘hifoo(4.)’.

   The lefthand side of a syntax rule ‘let’ must be a simple variable,
not the arbitrary pattern that is allowed in rewrite rules.

   The ‘matches’ function is also treated specially in syntax rule
conditions (again, in the same way as in rewrite rules).  *Note Matching
Commands::.  If the matching pattern contains meta-variables, then those
meta-variables may be used in later conditions and in the result
expression.  The arguments to ‘matches’ are not evaluated in this
situation.

     sum ( # , # ) := sum(#1,a,b,c) :: matches(#2, a=[b..c])

This is another way to implement the Maple mode ‘sum’ notation.  In this
approach, we allow ‘#2’ to equal the whole expression ‘i=1..10’.  Then,
we use ‘matches’ to break it apart into its components.  If the
expression turns out not to match the pattern, the syntax rule will
fail.  Note that ‘Z S’ always uses Calc’s Normal language mode for
editing expressions in syntax rules, so we must use regular Calc
notation for the interval ‘[b..c]’ that will correspond to the Maple
mode interval ‘1..10’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Modes Variable,  Next: Calc Mode Line,  Prev: Language Modes,  Up: Mode Settings

7.9 The ‘Modes’ Variable
========================

The ‘m g’ (‘calc-get-modes’) command pushes onto the stack a vector of
numbers that describes the various mode settings that are in effect.
With a numeric prefix argument, it pushes only the Nth mode, i.e., the
Nth element of this vector.  Keyboard macros can use the ‘m g’ command
to modify their behavior based on the current mode settings.

   The modes vector is also available in the special variable ‘Modes’.
In other words, ‘m g’ is like ‘s r Modes <RET>’.  It will not work to
store into this variable; in fact, if you do, ‘Modes’ will cease to
track the current modes.  (The ‘m g’ command will continue to work,
however.)

   In general, each number in this vector is suitable as a numeric
prefix argument to the associated mode-setting command.  (Recall that
the ‘~’ key takes a number from the stack and gives it as a numeric
prefix to the next command.)

   The elements of the modes vector are as follows:

  1. Current precision.  Default is 12; associated command is ‘p’.

  2. Binary word size.  Default is 32; associated command is ‘b w’.

  3. Stack size (not counting the value about to be pushed by ‘m g’).
     This is zero if ‘m g’ is executed with an empty stack.

  4. Number radix.  Default is 10; command is ‘d r’.

  5. Floating-point format.  This is the number of digits, plus the
     constant 0 for normal notation, 10000 for scientific notation,
     20000 for engineering notation, or 30000 for fixed-point notation.
     These codes are acceptable as prefix arguments to the ‘d n’
     command, but note that this may lose information: For example, ‘d
     s’ and ‘C-u 12 d s’ have similar (but not quite identical) effects
     if the current precision is 12, but they both produce a code of
     10012, which will be treated by ‘d n’ as ‘C-u 12 d s’.  If the
     precision then changes, the float format will still be frozen at 12
     significant figures.

  6. Angular mode.  Default is 1 (degrees).  Other values are 2
     (radians) and 3 (HMS). The ‘m d’ command accepts these prefixes.

  7. Symbolic mode.  Value is 0 or 1; default is 0.  Command is ‘m s’.

  8. Fraction mode.  Value is 0 or 1; default is 0.  Command is ‘m f’.

  9. Polar mode.  Value is 0 (rectangular) or 1 (polar); default is 0.
     Command is ‘m p’.

  10. Matrix/Scalar mode.  Default value is -1.  Value is 0 for Scalar
     mode, -2 for Matrix mode, -3 for square Matrix mode, or N for NxN
     Matrix mode.  Command is ‘m v’.

  11. Simplification mode.  Default is 1.  Value is -1 for off (‘m O’),
     0 for ‘m N’, 2 for ‘m B’, 3 for ‘m A’, 4 for ‘m E’, or 5 for ‘m U’.
     The ‘m D’ command accepts these prefixes.

  12. Infinite mode.  Default is -1 (off).  Value is 1 if the mode is
     on, or 0 if the mode is on with positive zeros.  Command is ‘m i’.

   For example, the sequence ‘M-1 m g <RET> 2 + ~ p’ increases the
precision by two, leaving a copy of the old precision on the stack.
Later, ‘~ p’ will restore the original precision using that stack value.
(This sequence might be especially useful inside a keyboard macro.)

   As another example, ‘M-3 m g 1 - ~ <DEL>’ deletes all but the oldest
(bottommost) stack entry.

   Yet another example: The HP-48 “round” command rounds a number to the
current displayed precision.  You could roughly emulate this in Calc
with the sequence ‘M-5 m g 10000 % ~ c c’.  (This would not work for
fixed-point mode, but it wouldn’t be hard to do a full emulation with
the help of the ‘Z [’ and ‘Z ]’ programming commands.  *Note
Conditionals in Macros::.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Calc Mode Line,  Prev: Modes Variable,  Up: Mode Settings

7.10 The Calc Mode Line
=======================

This section is a summary of all symbols that can appear on the Calc
mode line, the highlighted bar that appears under the Calc stack window
(or under an editing window in Embedded mode).

   The basic mode line format is:

     --%*-Calc: 12 Deg OTHER MODES       (Calculator)

   The ‘%*’ indicates that the buffer is “read-only”; it shows that
regular Emacs commands are not allowed to edit the stack buffer as if it
were text.

   The word ‘Calc:’ changes to ‘CalcEmbed:’ if Embedded mode is enabled.
The words after this describe the various Calc modes that are in effect.

   The first mode is always the current precision, an integer.  The
second mode is always the angular mode, either ‘Deg’, ‘Rad’, or ‘Hms’.

   Here is a complete list of the remaining symbols that can appear on
the mode line:

‘Alg’
     Algebraic mode (‘m a’; *note Algebraic Entry::).

‘Alg[(’
     Incomplete algebraic mode (‘C-u m a’).

‘Alg*’
     Total algebraic mode (‘m t’).

‘Symb’
     Symbolic mode (‘m s’; *note Symbolic Mode::).

‘Matrix’
     Matrix mode (‘m v’; *note Matrix Mode::).

‘MatrixN’
     Dimensioned Matrix mode (‘C-u N m v’; *note Matrix Mode::).

‘SqMatrix’
     Square Matrix mode (‘C-u m v’; *note Matrix Mode::).

‘Scalar’
     Scalar mode (‘m v’; *note Matrix Mode::).

‘Polar’
     Polar complex mode (‘m p’; *note Polar Mode::).

‘Frac’
     Fraction mode (‘m f’; *note Fraction Mode::).

‘Inf’
     Infinite mode (‘m i’; *note Infinite Mode::).

‘+Inf’
     Positive Infinite mode (‘C-u 0 m i’).

‘NoSimp’
     Default simplifications off (‘m O’; *note Simplification Modes::).

‘NumSimp’
     Default simplifications for numeric arguments only (‘m N’).

‘BinSimpW’
     Binary-integer simplification mode; word size W (‘m B’, ‘b w’).

‘BasicSimp’
     Basic simplification mode (‘m I’).

‘ExtSimp’
     Extended algebraic simplification mode (‘m E’).

‘UnitSimp’
     Units simplification mode (‘m U’).

‘Bin’
     Current radix is 2 (‘d 2’; *note Radix Modes::).

‘Oct’
     Current radix is 8 (‘d 8’).

‘Hex’
     Current radix is 16 (‘d 6’).

‘RadixN’
     Current radix is N (‘d r’).

‘Zero’
     Leading zeros (‘d z’; *note Radix Modes::).

‘Big’
     Big language mode (‘d B’; *note Normal Language Modes::).

‘Flat’
     One-line normal language mode (‘d O’).

‘Unform’
     Unformatted language mode (‘d U’).

‘C’
     C language mode (‘d C’; *note C FORTRAN Pascal::).

‘Pascal’
     Pascal language mode (‘d P’).

‘Fortran’
     FORTRAN language mode (‘d F’).

‘TeX’
     TeX language mode (‘d T’; *note TeX and LaTeX Language Modes::).

‘LaTeX’
     LaTeX language mode (‘d L’; *note TeX and LaTeX Language Modes::).

‘Eqn’
     “Eqn” language mode (‘d E’; *note Eqn Language Mode::).

‘Math’
     Mathematica language mode (‘d M’; *note Mathematica Language
     Mode::).

‘Maple’
     Maple language mode (‘d W’; *note Maple Language Mode::).

‘NormN’
     Normal float mode with N digits (‘d n’; *note Float Formats::).

‘FixN’
     Fixed point mode with N digits after the point (‘d f’).

‘Sci’
     Scientific notation mode (‘d s’).

‘SciN’
     Scientific notation with N digits (‘d s’).

‘Eng’
     Engineering notation mode (‘d e’).

‘EngN’
     Engineering notation with N digits (‘d e’).

‘LeftN’
     Left-justified display indented by N (‘d <’; *note
     Justification::).

‘Right’
     Right-justified display (‘d >’).

‘RightN’
     Right-justified display with width N (‘d >’).

‘Center’
     Centered display (‘d =’).

‘CenterN’
     Centered display with center column N (‘d =’).

‘WidN’
     Line breaking with width N (‘d b’; *note Normal Language Modes::).

‘Wide’
     No line breaking (‘d b’).

‘Break’
     Selections show deep structure (‘j b’; *note Making Selections::).

‘Save’
     Record modes in ‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’ (‘m R’; *note General Mode
     Commands::).

‘Local’
     Record modes in Embedded buffer (‘m R’).

‘LocEdit’
     Record modes as editing-only in Embedded buffer (‘m R’).

‘LocPerm’
     Record modes as permanent-only in Embedded buffer (‘m R’).

‘Global’
     Record modes as global in Embedded buffer (‘m R’).

‘Manual’
     Automatic recomputation turned off (‘m C’; *note Automatic
     Recomputation::).

‘Graph’
     GNUPLOT process is alive in background (*note Graphics::).

‘Sel’
     Top-of-stack has a selection (Embedded only; *note Making
     Selections::).

‘Dirty’
     The stack display may not be up-to-date (*note Display Modes::).

‘Inv’
     “Inverse” prefix was pressed (‘I’; *note Inverse and Hyperbolic::).

‘Hyp’
     “Hyperbolic” prefix was pressed (‘H’).

‘Keep’
     “Keep-arguments” prefix was pressed (‘K’).

‘Narrow’
     Stack is truncated (‘d t’; *note Truncating the Stack::).

   In addition, the symbols ‘Active’ and ‘~Active’ can appear as minor
modes on an Embedded buffer’s mode line.  *Note Embedded Mode::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Arithmetic,  Next: Scientific Functions,  Prev: Mode Settings,  Up: Top

8 Arithmetic Functions
**********************

This chapter describes the Calc commands for doing simple calculations
on numbers, such as addition, absolute value, and square roots.  These
commands work by removing the top one or two values from the stack,
performing the desired operation, and pushing the result back onto the
stack.  If the operation cannot be performed, the result pushed is a
formula instead of a number, such as ‘2/0’ (because division by zero is
invalid) or ‘sqrt(x)’ (because the argument ‘x’ is a formula).

   Most of the commands described here can be invoked by a single
keystroke.  Some of the more obscure ones are two-letter sequences
beginning with the ‘f’ (“functions”) prefix key.

   *Note Prefix Arguments::, for a discussion of the effect of numeric
prefix arguments on commands in this chapter which do not otherwise
interpret a prefix argument.

* Menu:

* Basic Arithmetic::
* Integer Truncation::
* Complex Number Functions::
* Conversions::
* Date Arithmetic::
* Financial Functions::
* Binary Functions::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Arithmetic,  Next: Integer Truncation,  Prev: Arithmetic,  Up: Arithmetic

8.1 Basic Arithmetic
====================

The ‘+’ (‘calc-plus’) command adds two numbers.  The numbers may be any
of the standard Calc data types.  The resulting sum is pushed back onto
the stack.

   If both arguments of ‘+’ are vectors or matrices (of matching
dimensions), the result is a vector or matrix sum.  If one argument is a
vector and the other a scalar (i.e., a non-vector), the scalar is added
to each of the elements of the vector to form a new vector.  If the
scalar is not a number, the operation is left in symbolic form: Suppose
you added ‘x’ to the vector ‘[1,2]’.  You may want the result
‘[1+x,2+x]’, or you may plan to substitute a 2-vector for ‘x’ in the
future.  Since the Calculator can’t tell which interpretation you want,
it makes the safest assumption.  *Note Reducing and Mapping::, for a way
to add ‘x’ to every element of a vector.

   If either argument of ‘+’ is a complex number, the result will in
general be complex.  If one argument is in rectangular form and the
other polar, the current Polar mode determines the form of the result.
If Symbolic mode is enabled, the sum may be left as a formula if the
necessary conversions for polar addition are non-trivial.

   If both arguments of ‘+’ are HMS forms, the forms are added according
to the usual conventions of hours-minutes-seconds notation.  If one
argument is an HMS form and the other is a number, that number is
converted from degrees or radians (depending on the current Angular
mode) to HMS format and then the two HMS forms are added.

   If one argument of ‘+’ is a date form, the other can be either a real
number, which advances the date by a certain number of days, or an HMS
form, which advances the date by a certain amount of time.  Subtracting
two date forms yields the number of days between them.  Adding two date
forms is meaningless, but Calc interprets it as the subtraction of one
date form and the negative of the other.  (The negative of a date form
can be understood by remembering that dates are stored as the number of
days before or after Jan 1, 1 AD.)

   If both arguments of ‘+’ are error forms, the result is an error form
with an appropriately computed standard deviation.  If one argument is
an error form and the other is a number, the number is taken to have
zero error.  Error forms may have symbolic formulas as their mean and/or
error parts; adding these will produce a symbolic error form result.
However, adding an error form to a plain symbolic formula (as in ‘(a +/-
b) + c’) will not work, for the same reasons just mentioned for vectors.
Instead you must write ‘(a +/- b) + (c +/- 0)’.

   If both arguments of ‘+’ are modulo forms with equal values of ‘M’,
or if one argument is a modulo form and the other a plain number, the
result is a modulo form which represents the sum, modulo ‘M’, of the two
values.

   If both arguments of ‘+’ are intervals, the result is an interval
which describes all possible sums of the possible input values.  If one
argument is a plain number, it is treated as the interval ‘[x .. x]’.

   If one argument of ‘+’ is an infinity and the other is not, the
result is that same infinity.  If both arguments are infinite and in the
same direction, the result is the same infinity, but if they are
infinite in different directions the result is ‘nan’.

   The ‘-’ (‘calc-minus’) command subtracts two values.  The top number
on the stack is subtracted from the one behind it, so that the
computation ‘5 <RET> 2 -’ produces 3, not -3.  All options available for
‘+’ are available for ‘-’ as well.

   The ‘*’ (‘calc-times’) command multiplies two numbers.  If one
argument is a vector and the other a scalar, the scalar is multiplied by
the elements of the vector to produce a new vector.  If both arguments
are vectors, the interpretation depends on the dimensions of the
vectors: If both arguments are matrices, a matrix multiplication is
done.  If one argument is a matrix and the other a plain vector, the
vector is interpreted as a row vector or column vector, whichever is
dimensionally correct.  If both arguments are plain vectors, the result
is a single scalar number which is the dot product of the two vectors.

   If one argument of ‘*’ is an HMS form and the other a number, the HMS
form is multiplied by that amount.  It is an error to multiply two HMS
forms together, or to attempt any multiplication involving date forms.
Error forms, modulo forms, and intervals can be multiplied; see the
comments for addition of those forms.  When two error forms or intervals
are multiplied they are considered to be statistically independent;
thus, ‘[-2 .. 3] * [-2 .. 3]’ is ‘[-6 .. 9]’, whereas ‘[-2 .. 3] ^ 2’ is
‘[0 .. 9]’.

   The ‘/’ (‘calc-divide’) command divides two numbers.

   When combining multiplication and division in an algebraic formula,
it is good style to use parentheses to distinguish between possible
interpretations; the expression ‘a/b*c’ should be written ‘(a/b)*c’ or
‘a/(b*c)’, as appropriate.  Without the parentheses, Calc will interpret
‘a/b*c’ as ‘a/(b*c)’, since in algebraic entry Calc gives division a
lower precedence than multiplication.  (This is not standard across all
computer languages, and Calc may change the precedence depending on the
language mode being used.  *Note Language Modes::.)  This default
ordering can be changed by setting the customizable variable
‘calc-multiplication-has-precedence’ to ‘nil’ (*note Customizing
Calc::); this will give multiplication and division equal precedences.
Note that Calc’s default choice of precedence allows ‘a b / c d’ to be
used as a shortcut for
     a b
     ---.
     c d

   When dividing a scalar ‘B’ by a square matrix ‘A’, the computation
performed is ‘B’ times the inverse of ‘A’.  This also occurs if ‘B’ is
itself a vector or matrix, in which case the effect is to solve the set
of linear equations represented by ‘B’.  If ‘B’ is a matrix with the
same number of rows as ‘A’, or a plain vector (which is interpreted here
as a column vector), then the equation ‘A X = B’ is solved for the
vector or matrix ‘X’.  Otherwise, if ‘B’ is a non-square matrix with the
same number of _columns_ as ‘A’, the equation ‘X A = B’ is solved.  If
you wish a vector ‘B’ to be interpreted as a row vector to be solved as
‘X A = B’, make it into a one-row matrix with ‘C-u 1 v p’ first.  To
force a left-handed solution with a square matrix ‘B’, transpose ‘A’ and
‘B’ before dividing, then transpose the result.

   HMS forms can be divided by real numbers or by other HMS forms.
Error forms can be divided in any combination of ways.  Modulo forms
where both values and the modulo are integers can be divided to get an
integer modulo form result.  Intervals can be divided; dividing by an
interval that encompasses zero or has zero as a limit will result in an
infinite interval.

   The ‘^’ (‘calc-power’) command raises a number to a power.  If the
power is an integer, an exact result is computed using repeated
multiplications.  For non-integer powers, Calc uses Newton’s method or
logarithms and exponentials.  Square matrices can be raised to integer
powers.  If either argument is an error (or interval or modulo) form,
the result is also an error (or interval or modulo) form.

   If you press the ‘I’ (inverse) key first, the ‘I ^’ command computes
an Nth root: ‘125 <RET> 3 I ^’ computes the number 5.  (This is entirely
equivalent to ‘125 <RET> 1:3 ^’.)

   The ‘\’ (‘calc-idiv’) command divides two numbers on the stack to
produce an integer result.  It is equivalent to dividing with ‘/’, then
rounding down with ‘F’ (‘calc-floor’), only a bit more convenient and
efficient.  Also, since it is an all-integer operation when the
arguments are integers, it avoids problems that ‘/ F’ would have with
floating-point roundoff.

   The ‘%’ (‘calc-mod’) command performs a “modulo” (or “remainder”)
operation.  Mathematically, ‘a%b = a - (a\b)*b’, and is defined for all
real numbers ‘a’ and ‘b’ (except ‘b=0’).  For positive ‘b’, the result
will always be between 0 (inclusive) and ‘b’ (exclusive).  Modulo does
not work for HMS forms and error forms.  If ‘a’ is a modulo form, its
modulo is changed to ‘b’, which must be positive real number.

   The ‘:’ (‘calc-fdiv’) [‘fdiv’] command divides the two integers on
the top of the stack to produce a fractional result.  This is a
convenient shorthand for enabling Fraction mode (with ‘m f’) temporarily
and using ‘/’.  Note that during numeric entry the ‘:’ key is
interpreted as a fraction separator, so to divide 8 by 6 you would have
to type ‘8 <RET> 6 <RET> :’.  (Of course, in this case, it would be much
easier simply to enter the fraction directly as ‘8:6 <RET>’!)

   The ‘n’ (‘calc-change-sign’) command negates the number on the top of
the stack.  It works on numbers, vectors and matrices, HMS forms, date
forms, error forms, intervals, and modulo forms.

   The ‘A’ (‘calc-abs’) [‘abs’] command computes the absolute value of a
number.  The result of ‘abs’ is always a nonnegative real number: With a
complex argument, it computes the complex magnitude.  With a vector or
matrix argument, it computes the Frobenius norm, i.e., the square root
of the sum of the squares of the absolute values of the elements.  The
absolute value of an error form is defined by replacing the mean part
with its absolute value and leaving the error part the same.  The
absolute value of a modulo form is undefined.  The absolute value of an
interval is defined in the obvious way.

   The ‘f A’ (‘calc-abssqr’) [‘abssqr’] command computes the absolute
value squared of a number, vector or matrix, or error form.

   The ‘f s’ (‘calc-sign’) [‘sign’] command returns 1 if its argument is
positive, -1 if its argument is negative, or 0 if its argument is zero.
In algebraic form, you can also write ‘sign(a,x)’ which evaluates to ‘x
* sign(a)’, i.e., either ‘x’, ‘-x’, or zero depending on the sign of
‘a’.

   The ‘&’ (‘calc-inv’) [‘inv’] command computes the reciprocal of a
number, i.e., ‘1 / x’.  Operating on a square matrix, it computes the
inverse of that matrix.

   The ‘Q’ (‘calc-sqrt’) [‘sqrt’] command computes the square root of a
number.  For a negative real argument, the result will be a complex
number whose form is determined by the current Polar mode.

   The ‘f h’ (‘calc-hypot’) [‘hypot’] command computes the square root
of the sum of the squares of two numbers.  That is, ‘hypot(a,b)’ is the
length of the hypotenuse of a right triangle with sides ‘a’ and ‘b’.  If
the arguments are complex numbers, their squared magnitudes are used.

   The ‘f Q’ (‘calc-isqrt’) [‘isqrt’] command computes the integer
square root of an integer.  This is the true square root of the number,
rounded down to an integer.  For example, ‘isqrt(10)’ produces 3.  Note
that, like ‘\’ [‘idiv’], this uses exact integer arithmetic throughout
to avoid roundoff problems.  If the input is a floating-point number or
other non-integer value, this is exactly the same as ‘floor(sqrt(x))’.

   The ‘f n’ (‘calc-min’) [‘min’] and ‘f x’ (‘calc-max’) [‘max’]
commands take the minimum or maximum of two real numbers, respectively.
These commands also work on HMS forms, date forms, intervals, and
infinities.  (In algebraic expressions, these functions take any number
of arguments and return the maximum or minimum among all the arguments.)

   The ‘f M’ (‘calc-mant-part’) [‘mant’] function extracts the
“mantissa” part ‘m’ of its floating-point argument; ‘f X’
(‘calc-xpon-part’) [‘xpon’] extracts the “exponent” part ‘e’.  The
original number is equal to ‘m * 10^e’, where ‘m’ is in the interval
‘[1.0 .. 10.0)’ except that ‘m=e=0’ if the original number is zero.  For
integers and fractions, ‘mant’ returns the number unchanged and ‘xpon’
returns zero.  The ‘v u’ (‘calc-unpack’) command can also be used to
“unpack” a floating-point number; this produces an integer mantissa and
exponent, with the constraint that the mantissa is not a multiple of ten
(again except for the ‘m=e=0’ case).

   The ‘f S’ (‘calc-scale-float’) [‘scf’] function scales a number by a
given power of ten.  Thus, ‘scf(mant(x), xpon(x)) = x’ for any real ‘x’.
The second argument must be an integer, but the first may actually be
any numeric value.  For example, ‘scf(5,-2) = 0.05’ or ‘1:20’ depending
on the current Fraction mode.

   The ‘f [’ (‘calc-decrement’) [‘decr’] and ‘f ]’ (‘calc-increment’)
[‘incr’] functions decrease or increase a number by one unit.  For
integers, the effect is obvious.  For floating-point numbers, the change
is by one unit in the last place.  For example, incrementing ‘12.3456’
when the current precision is 6 digits yields ‘12.3457’.  If the current
precision had been 8 digits, the result would have been ‘12.345601’.
Incrementing ‘0.0’ produces ‘10^-p’, where ‘p’ is the current precision.
These operations are defined only on integers and floats.  With numeric
prefix arguments, they change the number by ‘n’ units.

   Note that incrementing followed by decrementing, or vice-versa, will
almost but not quite always cancel out.  Suppose the precision is 6
digits and the number ‘9.99999’ is on the stack.  Incrementing will
produce ‘10.0000’; decrementing will produce ‘9.9999’.  One digit has
been dropped.  This is an unavoidable consequence of the way
floating-point numbers work.

   Incrementing a date/time form adjusts it by a certain number of
seconds.  Incrementing a pure date form adjusts it by a certain number
of days.


File: calc.info,  Node: Integer Truncation,  Next: Complex Number Functions,  Prev: Basic Arithmetic,  Up: Arithmetic

8.2 Integer Truncation
======================

There are four commands for truncating a real number to an integer,
differing mainly in their treatment of negative numbers.  All of these
commands have the property that if the argument is an integer, the
result is the same integer.  An integer-valued floating-point argument
is converted to integer form.

   If you press ‘H’ (‘calc-hyperbolic’) first, the result will be
expressed as an integer-valued floating-point number.

   The ‘F’ (‘calc-floor’) [‘floor’ or ‘ffloor’] command truncates a real
number to the next lower integer, i.e., toward minus infinity.  Thus
‘3.6 F’ produces 3, but ‘_3.6 F’ produces -4.

   The ‘I F’ (‘calc-ceiling’) [‘ceil’ or ‘fceil’] command truncates
toward positive infinity.  Thus ‘3.6 I F’ produces 4, and ‘_3.6 I F’
produces -3.

   The ‘R’ (‘calc-round’) [‘round’ or ‘fround’] command rounds to the
nearest integer.  When the fractional part is .5 exactly, this command
rounds away from zero.  (All other rounding in the Calculator uses this
convention as well.)  Thus ‘3.5 R’ produces 4 but ‘3.4 R’ produces 3;
‘_3.5 R’ produces -4.

   The ‘I R’ (‘calc-trunc’) [‘trunc’ or ‘ftrunc’] command truncates
toward zero.  In other words, it “chops off” everything after the
decimal point.  Thus ‘3.6 I R’ produces 3 and ‘_3.6 I R’ produces -3.

   These functions may not be applied meaningfully to error forms, but
they do work for intervals.  As a convenience, applying ‘floor’ to a
modulo form floors the value part of the form.  Applied to a vector,
these functions operate on all elements of the vector one by one.
Applied to a date form, they operate on the internal numerical
representation of dates, converting a date/time form into a pure date.

   There are two more rounding functions which can only be entered in
algebraic notation.  The ‘roundu’ function is like ‘round’ except that
it rounds up, toward plus infinity, when the fractional part is .5.
This distinction matters only for negative arguments.  Also, ‘rounde’
rounds to an even number in the case of a tie, rounding up or down as
necessary.  For example, ‘rounde(3.5)’ and ‘rounde(4.5)’ both return 4,
but ‘rounde(5.5)’ returns 6.  The advantage of round-to-even is that the
net error due to rounding after a long calculation tends to cancel out
to zero.  An important subtle point here is that the number being fed to
‘rounde’ will already have been rounded to the current precision before
‘rounde’ begins.  For example, ‘rounde(2.500001)’ with a current
precision of 6 will incorrectly, or at least surprisingly, yield 2
because the argument will first have been rounded down to ‘2.5’ (which
‘rounde’ sees as an exact tie between 2 and 3).

   Each of these functions, when written in algebraic formulas, allows a
second argument which specifies the number of digits after the decimal
point to keep.  For example, ‘round(123.4567, 2)’ will produce the
answer 123.46, and ‘round(123.4567, -1)’ will produce 120 (i.e., the
cutoff is one digit to the _left_ of the decimal point).  A second
argument of zero is equivalent to no second argument at all.

   To compute the fractional part of a number (i.e., the amount which,
when added to ‘floor(N)’, will produce N) just take N modulo 1 using the
‘%’ command.

   Note also the ‘\’ (integer quotient), ‘f I’ (integer logarithm), and
‘f Q’ (integer square root) commands, which are analogous to ‘/’, ‘B’,
and ‘Q’, respectively, except that they take integer arguments and
return the result rounded down to an integer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Complex Number Functions,  Next: Conversions,  Prev: Integer Truncation,  Up: Arithmetic

8.3 Complex Number Functions
============================

The ‘J’ (‘calc-conj’) [‘conj’] command computes the complex conjugate of
a number.  For complex number ‘a+bi’, the complex conjugate is ‘a-bi’.
If the argument is a real number, this command leaves it the same.  If
the argument is a vector or matrix, this command replaces each element
by its complex conjugate.

   The ‘G’ (‘calc-argument’) [‘arg’] command computes the “argument” or
polar angle of a complex number.  For a number in polar notation, this
is simply the second component of the pair ‘(R;THETA)’.  The result is
expressed according to the current angular mode and will be in the range
-180 degrees (exclusive) to +180 degrees (inclusive), or the equivalent
range in radians.

   The ‘calc-imaginary’ command multiplies the number on the top of the
stack by the imaginary number ‘i = (0,1)’.  This command is not normally
bound to a key in Calc, but it is available on the <IMAG> button in
Keypad mode.

   The ‘f r’ (‘calc-re’) [‘re’] command replaces a complex number by its
real part.  This command has no effect on real numbers.  (As an added
convenience, ‘re’ applied to a modulo form extracts the value part.)

   The ‘f i’ (‘calc-im’) [‘im’] command replaces a complex number by its
imaginary part; real numbers are converted to zero.  With a vector or
matrix argument, these functions operate element-wise.

   The ‘v p’ (‘calc-pack’) command can pack the top two numbers on the
stack into a composite object such as a complex number.  With a prefix
argument of -1, it produces a rectangular complex number; with an
argument of -2, it produces a polar complex number.  (Also, *note
Building Vectors::.)

   The ‘v u’ (‘calc-unpack’) command takes the complex number (or other
composite object) on the top of the stack and unpacks it into its
separate components.


File: calc.info,  Node: Conversions,  Next: Date Arithmetic,  Prev: Complex Number Functions,  Up: Arithmetic

8.4 Conversions
===============

The commands described in this section convert numbers from one form to
another; they are two-key sequences beginning with the letter ‘c’.

   The ‘c f’ (‘calc-float’) [‘pfloat’] command converts the number on
the top of the stack to floating-point form.  For example, ‘23’ is
converted to ‘23.0’, ‘3:2’ is converted to ‘1.5’, and ‘2.3’ is left the
same.  If the value is a composite object such as a complex number or
vector, each of the components is converted to floating-point.  If the
value is a formula, all numbers in the formula are converted to
floating-point.  Note that depending on the current floating-point
precision, conversion to floating-point format may lose information.

   As a special exception, integers which appear as powers or subscripts
are not floated by ‘c f’.  If you really want to float a power, you can
use a ‘j s’ command to select the power followed by ‘c f’.  Because ‘c
f’ cannot examine the formula outside of the selection, it does not
notice that the thing being floated is a power.  *Note Selecting
Subformulas::.

   The normal ‘c f’ command is “pervasive” in the sense that it applies
to all numbers throughout the formula.  The ‘pfloat’ algebraic function
never stays around in a formula; ‘pfloat(a + 1)’ changes to ‘a + 1.0’ as
soon as it is evaluated.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H c f’ [‘float’] operates only on the
number or vector of numbers at the top level of its argument.  Thus,
‘float(1)’ is 1.0, but ‘float(a + 1)’ is left unevaluated because its
argument is not a number.

   You should use ‘H c f’ if you wish to guarantee that the final value,
once all the variables have been assigned, is a float; you would use ‘c
f’ if you wish to do the conversion on the numbers that appear right
now.

   The ‘c F’ (‘calc-fraction’) [‘pfrac’] command converts a
floating-point number into a fractional approximation.  By default, it
produces a fraction whose decimal representation is the same as the
input number, to within the current precision.  You can also give a
numeric prefix argument to specify a tolerance, either directly, or, if
the prefix argument is zero, by using the number on top of the stack as
the tolerance.  If the tolerance is a positive integer, the fraction is
correct to within that many significant figures.  If the tolerance is a
non-positive integer, it specifies how many digits fewer than the
current precision to use.  If the tolerance is a floating-point number,
the fraction is correct to within that absolute amount.

   The ‘pfrac’ function is pervasive, like ‘pfloat’.  There is also a
non-pervasive version, ‘H c F’ [‘frac’], which is analogous to ‘H c f’
discussed above.

   The ‘c d’ (‘calc-to-degrees’) [‘deg’] command converts a number into
degrees form.  The value on the top of the stack may be an HMS form
(interpreted as degrees-minutes-seconds), or a real number which will be
interpreted in radians regardless of the current angular mode.

   The ‘c r’ (‘calc-to-radians’) [‘rad’] command converts an HMS form or
angle in degrees into an angle in radians.

   The ‘c h’ (‘calc-to-hms’) [‘hms’] command converts a real number,
interpreted according to the current angular mode, to an HMS form
describing the same angle.  In algebraic notation, the ‘hms’ function
also accepts three arguments: ‘hms(H, M, S)’.  (The three-argument
version is independent of the current angular mode.)

   The ‘calc-from-hms’ command converts the HMS form on the top of the
stack into a real number according to the current angular mode.

   The ‘c p’ (‘calc-polar’) command converts the complex number on the
top of the stack from polar to rectangular form, or from rectangular to
polar form, whichever is appropriate.  Real numbers are left the same.
This command is equivalent to the ‘rect’ or ‘polar’ functions in
algebraic formulas, depending on the direction of conversion.  (It uses
‘polar’, except that if the argument is already a polar complex number,
it uses ‘rect’ instead.  The ‘I c p’ command always uses ‘rect’.)

   The ‘c c’ (‘calc-clean’) [‘pclean’] command “cleans” the number on
the top of the stack.  Floating point numbers are re-rounded according
to the current precision.  Polar numbers whose angular components have
strayed from the -180 to +180 degree range are normalized.  (Note that
results will be undesirable if the current angular mode is different
from the one under which the number was produced!)  Integers and
fractions are generally unaffected by this operation.  Vectors and
formulas are cleaned by cleaning each component number (i.e.,
pervasively).

   If the simplification mode is set below basic simplification, it is
raised for the purposes of this command.  Thus, ‘c c’ applies the basic
simplifications even if their automatic application is disabled.  *Note
Simplification Modes::.

   A numeric prefix argument to ‘c c’ sets the floating-point precision
to that value for the duration of the command.  A positive prefix (of at
least 3) sets the precision to the specified value; a negative or zero
prefix decreases the precision by the specified amount.

   The keystroke sequences ‘c 0’ through ‘c 9’ are equivalent to ‘c c’
with the corresponding negative prefix argument.  If roundoff errors
have changed 2.0 into 1.999999, typing ‘c 1’ to clip off one decimal
place often conveniently does the trick.

   The ‘c c’ command with a numeric prefix argument, and the ‘c 0’
through ‘c 9’ commands, also “clip” very small floating-point numbers to
zero.  If the exponent is less than or equal to the negative of the
specified precision, the number is changed to 0.0.  For example, if the
current precision is 12, then ‘c 2’ changes the vector ‘[1e-8, 1e-9,
1e-10, 1e-11]’ to ‘[1e-8, 1e-9, 0, 0]’.  Numbers this small generally
arise from roundoff noise.

   If the numbers you are using really are legitimately this small, you
should avoid using the ‘c 0’ through ‘c 9’ commands.  (The plain ‘c c’
command rounds to the current precision but does not clip small
numbers.)

   One more property of ‘c 0’ through ‘c 9’, and of ‘c c’ with a prefix
argument, is that integer-valued floats are converted to plain integers,
so that ‘c 1’ on ‘[1., 1.5, 2., 2.5, 3.]’ produces ‘[1, 1.5, 2, 2.5,
3]’.  This is not done for huge numbers (‘1e100’ is technically an
integer-valued float, but you wouldn’t want it automatically converted
to a 100-digit integer).

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H c c’ and ‘H c 0’ through ‘H c 9’ operate
non-pervasively [‘clean’].


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Arithmetic,  Next: Financial Functions,  Prev: Conversions,  Up: Arithmetic

8.5 Date Arithmetic
===================

The commands described in this section perform various conversions and
calculations involving date forms (*note Date Forms::).  They use the
‘t’ (for time/date) prefix key followed by shifted letters.

   The simplest date arithmetic is done using the regular ‘+’ and ‘-’
commands.  In particular, adding a number to a date form advances the
date form by a certain number of days; adding an HMS form to a date form
advances the date by a certain amount of time; and subtracting two date
forms produces a difference measured in days.  The commands described
here provide additional, more specialized operations on dates.

   Many of these commands accept a numeric prefix argument; if you give
plain ‘C-u’ as the prefix, these commands will instead take the
additional argument from the top of the stack.

* Menu:

* Date Conversions::
* Date Functions::
* Time Zones::
* Business Days::


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Conversions,  Next: Date Functions,  Prev: Date Arithmetic,  Up: Date Arithmetic

8.5.1 Date Conversions
----------------------

The ‘t D’ (‘calc-date’) [‘date’] command converts a date form into a
number, measured in days since Jan 1, 1 AD.  The result will be an
integer if DATE is a pure date form, or a fraction or float if DATE is a
date/time form.  Or, if its argument is a number, it converts this
number into a date form.

   With a numeric prefix argument, ‘t D’ takes that many objects (up to
six) from the top of the stack and interprets them in one of the
following ways:

   The ‘date(YEAR, MONTH, DAY)’ function builds a pure date form out of
the specified year, month, and day, which must all be integers.  YEAR is
a year number, such as 1991 (_not_ the same as 91!).  MONTH must be an
integer in the range 1 to 12; DAY must be in the range 1 to 31.  If the
specified month has fewer than 31 days and DAY is too large, the
equivalent day in the following month will be used.

   The ‘date(MONTH, DAY)’ function builds a pure date form using the
current year, as determined by the real-time clock.

   The ‘date(YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HMS)’ function builds a date/time form
using an HMS form.

   The ‘date(YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND)’ function builds a
date/time form.  HOUR should be an integer in the range 0 to 23; MINUTE
should be an integer in the range 0 to 59; SECOND should be any real
number in the range ‘[0 .. 60)’.  The last two arguments default to zero
if omitted.

   The ‘t J’ (‘calc-julian’) [‘julian’] command converts a date form
into a Julian day count, which is the number of days since noon (GMT) on
Jan 1, 4713 BC.  A pure date is converted to an integer Julian count
representing noon of that day.  A date/time form is converted to an
exact floating-point Julian count, adjusted to interpret the date form
in the current time zone but the Julian day count in Greenwich Mean
Time.  A numeric prefix argument allows you to specify the time zone;
*note Time Zones::.  Use a prefix of zero to suppress the time zone
adjustment.  Note that pure date forms are never time-zone adjusted.

   This command can also do the opposite conversion, from a Julian day
count (either an integer day, or a floating-point day and time in the
GMT zone), into a pure date form or a date/time form in the current or
specified time zone.

   The ‘t U’ (‘calc-unix-time’) [‘unixtime’] command converts a date
form into a Unix time value, which is the number of seconds since
midnight on Jan 1, 1970, or vice-versa.  The numeric result will be an
integer if the current precision is 12 or less; for higher precision,
the result may be a float with (PRECISION−12) digits after the decimal.
Just as for ‘t J’, the numeric time is interpreted in the GMT time zone
and the date form is interpreted in the current or specified zone.  Some
systems use Unix-like numbering but with the local time zone; give a
prefix of zero to suppress the adjustment if so.

   The ‘t C’ (‘calc-convert-time-zones’) [‘tzconv’] command converts a
date form from one time zone to another.  You are prompted for each time
zone name in turn; you can answer with any suitable Calc time zone
expression (*note Time Zones::).  If you answer either prompt with a
blank line, the local time zone is used for that prompt.  You can also
answer the first prompt with ‘$’ to take the two time zone names from
the stack (and the date to be converted from the third stack level).


File: calc.info,  Node: Date Functions,  Next: Business Days,  Prev: Date Conversions,  Up: Date Arithmetic

8.5.2 Date Functions
--------------------

The ‘t N’ (‘calc-now’) [‘now’] command pushes the current date and time
on the stack as a date form.  The time is reported in terms of the
specified time zone; with no numeric prefix argument, ‘t N’ reports for
the current time zone.

   The ‘t P’ (‘calc-date-part’) command extracts one part of a date
form.  The prefix argument specifies the part; with no argument, this
command prompts for a part code from 1 to 9.  The various part codes are
described in the following paragraphs.

   The ‘M-1 t P’ [‘year’] function extracts the year number from a date
form as an integer, e.g., 1991.  This and the following functions will
also accept a real number for an argument, which is interpreted as a
standard Calc day number.  Note that this function will never return
zero, since the year 1 BC immediately precedes the year 1 AD.

   The ‘M-2 t P’ [‘month’] function extracts the month number from a
date form as an integer in the range 1 to 12.

   The ‘M-3 t P’ [‘day’] function extracts the day number from a date
form as an integer in the range 1 to 31.

   The ‘M-4 t P’ [‘hour’] function extracts the hour from a date form as
an integer in the range 0 (midnight) to 23.  Note that 24-hour time is
always used.  This returns zero for a pure date form.  This function
(and the following two) also accept HMS forms as input.

   The ‘M-5 t P’ [‘minute’] function extracts the minute from a date
form as an integer in the range 0 to 59.

   The ‘M-6 t P’ [‘second’] function extracts the second from a date
form.  If the current precision is 12 or less, the result is an integer
in the range 0 to 59.  For higher precision, the result may instead be a
floating-point number.

   The ‘M-7 t P’ [‘weekday’] function extracts the weekday number from a
date form as an integer in the range 0 (Sunday) to 6 (Saturday).

   The ‘M-8 t P’ [‘yearday’] function extracts the day-of-year number
from a date form as an integer in the range 1 (January 1) to 366
(December 31 of a leap year).

   The ‘M-9 t P’ [‘time’] function extracts the time portion of a date
form as an HMS form.  This returns ‘0@ 0' 0"’ for a pure date form.

   The ‘t M’ (‘calc-new-month’) [‘newmonth’] command computes a new date
form that represents the first day of the month specified by the input
date.  The result is always a pure date form; only the year and month
numbers of the input are retained.  With a numeric prefix argument N in
the range from 1 to 31, ‘t M’ computes the Nth day of the month.  (If N
is greater than the actual number of days in the month, or if N is zero,
the last day of the month is used.)

   The ‘t Y’ (‘calc-new-year’) [‘newyear’] command computes a new pure
date form that represents the first day of the year specified by the
input.  The month, day, and time of the input date form are lost.  With
a numeric prefix argument N in the range from 1 to 366, ‘t Y’ computes
the Nth day of the year (366 is treated as 365 in non-leap years).  A
prefix argument of 0 computes the last day of the year (December 31).  A
negative prefix argument from -1 to -12 computes the first day of the
Nth month of the year.

   The ‘t W’ (‘calc-new-week’) [‘newweek’] command computes a new pure
date form that represents the Sunday on or before the input date.  With
a numeric prefix argument, it can be made to use any day of the week as
the starting day; the argument must be in the range from 0 (Sunday) to 6
(Saturday).  This function always subtracts between 0 and 6 days from
the input date.

   Here’s an example use of ‘newweek’: Find the date of the next
Wednesday after a given date.  Using ‘M-3 t W’ or ‘newweek(d, 3)’ will
give you the _preceding_ Wednesday, so ‘newweek(d+7, 3)’ will give you
the following Wednesday.  A further look at the definition of ‘newweek’
shows that if the input date is itself a Wednesday, this formula will
return the Wednesday one week in the future.  An exercise for the reader
is to modify this formula to yield the same day if the input is already
a Wednesday.  Another interesting exercise is to preserve the
time-of-day portion of the input (‘newweek’ resets the time to midnight;
hint: how can ‘newweek’ be defined in terms of the ‘weekday’ function?).

   The ‘pwday(DATE)’ function (not on any key) computes the day-of-month
number of the Sunday on or before DATE.  With two arguments,
‘pwday(DATE, DAY)’ computes the day number of the Sunday on or before
day number DAY of the month specified by DATE.  The DAY must be in the
range from 7 to 31; if the day number is greater than the actual number
of days in the month, the true number of days is used instead.  Thus
‘pwday(DATE, 7)’ finds the first Sunday of the month, and ‘pwday(DATE,
31)’ finds the last Sunday of the month.  With a third WEEKDAY argument,
‘pwday’ can be made to look for any day of the week instead of Sunday.

   The ‘t I’ (‘calc-inc-month’) [‘incmonth’] command increases a date
form by one month, or by an arbitrary number of months specified by a
numeric prefix argument.  The time portion, if any, of the date form
stays the same.  The day also stays the same, except that if the new
month has fewer days the day number may be reduced to lie in the valid
range.  For example, ‘incmonth(<Jan 31, 1991>)’ produces ‘<Feb 28,
1991>’.  Because of this, ‘t I t I’ and ‘M-2 t I’ do not always give the
same results (‘<Mar 28, 1991>’ versus ‘<Mar 31, 1991>’ in this case).

   The ‘incyear(DATE, STEP)’ function increases a date form by the
specified number of years, which may be any positive or negative
integer.  Note that ‘incyear(d, n)’ is equivalent to
‘incmonth(d, 12*n)’, but these do not have simple equivalents in terms
of day arithmetic because months and years have varying lengths.  If the
STEP argument is omitted, 1 year is assumed.  There is no keyboard
command for this function; use ‘C-u 12 t I’ instead.

   There is no ‘newday’ function at all because ‘F’ [‘floor’] serves
this purpose.  Similarly, instead of ‘incday’ and ‘incweek’ simply use
‘d + n’ or ‘d + 7 n’.

   *Note Basic Arithmetic::, for the ‘f ]’ [‘incr’] command which can
adjust a date/time form by a certain number of seconds.


File: calc.info,  Node: Business Days,  Next: Time Zones,  Prev: Date Functions,  Up: Date Arithmetic

8.5.3 Business Days
-------------------

Often time is measured in “business days” or “working days,” where
weekends and holidays are skipped.  Calc’s normal date arithmetic
functions use calendar days, so that subtracting two consecutive Mondays
will yield a difference of 7 days.  By contrast, subtracting two
consecutive Mondays would yield 5 business days (assuming two-day
weekends and the absence of holidays).

   The ‘t +’ (‘calc-business-days-plus’) [‘badd’] and ‘t -’
(‘calc-business-days-minus’) [‘bsub’] commands perform arithmetic using
business days.  For ‘t +’, one argument must be a date form and the
other must be a real number (positive or negative).  If the number is
not an integer, then a certain amount of time is added as well as a
number of days; for example, adding 0.5 business days to a time in
Friday evening will produce a time in Monday morning.  It is also
possible to add an HMS form; adding ‘12@ 0' 0"’ also adds half a
business day.  For ‘t -’, the arguments are either a date form and a
number or HMS form, or two date forms, in which case the result is the
number of business days between the two dates.

   By default, Calc considers any day that is not a Saturday or Sunday
to be a business day.  You can define any number of additional holidays
by editing the variable ‘Holidays’.  (There is an ‘s H’ convenience
command for editing this variable.)  Initially, ‘Holidays’ contains the
vector ‘[sat, sun]’.  Entries in the ‘Holidays’ vector may be any of the
following kinds of objects:

   • Date forms (pure dates, not date/time forms).  These specify
     particular days which are to be treated as holidays.

   • Intervals of date forms.  These specify a range of days, all of
     which are holidays (e.g., Christmas week).  *Note Interval Forms::.

   • Nested vectors of date forms.  Each date form in the vector is
     considered to be a holiday.

   • Any Calc formula which evaluates to one of the above three things.
     If the formula involves the variable ‘y’, it stands for a yearly
     repeating holiday; ‘y’ will take on various year numbers like 1992.
     For example, ‘date(y, 12, 25)’ specifies Christmas day, and
     ‘newweek(date(y, 11, 7), 4) + 21’ specifies Thanksgiving (which is
     held on the fourth Thursday of November).  If the formula involves
     the variable ‘m’, that variable takes on month numbers from 1 to
     12: ‘date(y, m, 15)’ is a holiday that takes place on the 15th of
     every month.

   • A weekday name, such as ‘sat’ or ‘sun’.  This is really a variable
     whose name is a three-letter, lower-case day name.

   • An interval of year numbers (integers).  This specifies the span of
     years over which this holiday list is to be considered valid.  Any
     business-day arithmetic that goes outside this range will result in
     an error message.  Use this if you are including an explicit list
     of holidays, rather than a formula to generate them, and you want
     to make sure you don’t accidentally go beyond the last point where
     the holidays you entered are complete.  If there is no limiting
     interval in the ‘Holidays’ vector, the default ‘[1 .. 2737]’ is
     used.  (This is the absolute range of years for which Calc’s
     business-day algorithms will operate.)

   • An interval of HMS forms.  This specifies the span of hours that
     are to be considered one business day.  For example, if this range
     is ‘[9@ 0' 0" .. 17@ 0' 0"]’ (i.e., 9am to 5pm), then the business
     day is only eight hours long, so that ‘1.5 t +’ on ‘<4:00pm Fri Dec
     13, 1991>’ will add one business day and four business hours to
     produce ‘<12:00pm Tue Dec 17, 1991>’.  Likewise, ‘t -’ will now
     express differences in time as fractions of an eight-hour day.
     Times before 9am will be treated as 9am by business date
     arithmetic, and times at or after 5pm will be treated as 4:59:59pm.
     If there is no HMS interval in ‘Holidays’, the full 24-hour day
     ‘[0 0' 0" .. 24 0' 0"]’ is assumed.  (Regardless of the type of
     bounds you specify, the interval is treated as inclusive on the low
     end and exclusive on the high end, so that the work day goes from
     9am up to, but not including, 5pm.)

   If the ‘Holidays’ vector is empty, then ‘t +’ and ‘t -’ will act just
like ‘+’ and ‘-’ because there will then be no difference between
business days and calendar days.

   Calc expands the intervals and formulas you give into a complete list
of holidays for internal use.  This is done mainly to make sure it can
detect multiple holidays.  (For example, ‘<Jan 1, 1989>’ is both New
Year’s Day and a Sunday, but Calc’s algorithms take care to count it
only once when figuring the number of holidays between two dates.)

   Since the complete list of holidays for all the years from 1 to 2737
would be huge, Calc actually computes only the part of the list between
the smallest and largest years that have been involved in business-day
calculations so far.  Normally, you won’t have to worry about this.
Keep in mind, however, that if you do one calculation for 1992, and
another for 1792, even if both involve only a small range of years, Calc
will still work out all the holidays that fall in that 200-year span.

   If you add a (positive) number of days to a date form that falls on a
weekend or holiday, the date form is treated as if it were the most
recent business day.  (Thus adding one business day to a Friday,
Saturday, or Sunday will all yield the following Monday.)  If you
subtract a number of days from a weekend or holiday, the date is
effectively on the following business day.  (So subtracting one business
day from Saturday, Sunday, or Monday yields the preceding Friday.)  The
difference between two dates one or both of which fall on holidays
equals the number of actual business days between them.  These
conventions are consistent in the sense that, if you add N business days
to any date, the difference between the result and the original date
will come out to N business days.  (It can’t be completely consistent
though; a subtraction followed by an addition might come out a bit
differently, since ‘t +’ is incapable of producing a date that falls on
a weekend or holiday.)

   There is a ‘holiday’ function, not on any keys, that takes any date
form and returns 1 if that date falls on a weekend or holiday, as
defined in ‘Holidays’, or 0 if the date is a business day.


File: calc.info,  Node: Time Zones,  Prev: Business Days,  Up: Date Arithmetic

8.5.4 Time Zones
----------------

Time zones and daylight saving time are a complicated business.  The
conversions to and from Julian and Unix-style dates automatically
compute the correct time zone and daylight saving adjustment to use,
provided they can figure out this information.  This section describes
Calc’s time zone adjustment algorithm in detail, in case you want to do
conversions in different time zones or in case Calc’s algorithms can’t
determine the right correction to use.

   Adjustments for time zones and daylight saving time are done by ‘t
U’, ‘t J’, ‘t N’, and ‘t C’, but not by any other commands.  In
particular, ‘<may 1 1991> - <apr 1 1991>’ evaluates to exactly 30 days
even though there is a daylight-saving transition in between.  This is
also true for Julian pure dates: ‘julian(<may 1 1991>) - julian(<apr 1
1991>)’.  But Julian and Unix date/times will adjust for daylight saving
time: using Calc’s default daylight saving time rule (see the
explanation below), ‘julian(<12am may 1 1991>) - julian(<12am apr 1
1991>)’ evaluates to ‘29.95833’ (that’s 29 days and 23 hours) because
one hour was lost when daylight saving commenced on April 7, 1991.

   In brief, the idiom ‘julian(DATE1) - julian(DATE2)’ computes the
actual number of 24-hour periods between two dates, whereas ‘DATE1 -
DATE2’ computes the number of calendar days between two dates without
taking daylight saving into account.

   The ‘calc-time-zone’ [‘tzone’] command converts the time zone
specified by its numeric prefix argument into a number of seconds
difference from Greenwich mean time (GMT). If the argument is a number,
the result is simply that value multiplied by 3600.  Typical arguments
for North America are 5 (Eastern) or 8 (Pacific).  If Daylight Saving
time is in effect, one hour should be subtracted from the normal
difference.

   If you give a prefix of plain ‘C-u’, ‘calc-time-zone’ (like other
date arithmetic commands that include a time zone argument) takes the
zone argument from the top of the stack.  (In the case of ‘t J’ and ‘t
U’, the normal argument is then taken from the second-to-top stack
position.)  This allows you to give a non-integer time zone adjustment.
The time-zone argument can also be an HMS form, or it can be a variable
which is a time zone name in upper- or lower-case.  For example
‘tzone(PST) = tzone(8)’ and ‘tzone(pdt) = tzone(7)’ (for Pacific
standard and daylight saving times, respectively).

   North American and European time zone names are defined as follows;
note that for each time zone there is one name for standard time,
another for daylight saving time, and a third for “generalized” time in
which the daylight saving adjustment is computed from context.

     YST  PST  MST  CST  EST  AST    NST    GMT   WET     MET    MEZ
      9    8    7    6    5    4     3.5     0     -1      -2     -2

     YDT  PDT  MDT  CDT  EDT  ADT    NDT    BST  WETDST  METDST  MESZ
      8    7    6    5    4    3     2.5     -1    -2      -3     -3

     YGT  PGT  MGT  CGT  EGT  AGT    NGT    BGT   WEGT    MEGT   MEGZ
     9/8  8/7  7/6  6/5  5/4  4/3  3.5/2.5  0/-1 -1/-2   -2/-3  -2/-3

   To define time zone names that do not appear in the above table, you
must modify the Lisp variable ‘math-tzone-names’.  This is a list of
lists describing the different time zone names; its structure is best
explained by an example.  The three entries for Pacific Time look like
this:

     ( ( "PST" 8 0 )    ; Name as an upper-case string, then standard
       ( "PDT" 8 -1 )   ; adjustment, then daylight saving adjustment.
       ( "PGT" 8 "PST" "PDT" ) )   ; Generalized time zone.

   With no arguments, ‘calc-time-zone’ or ‘tzone()’ will by default get
the time zone and daylight saving information from the calendar (*note
Calendar/Diary: (emacs)Daylight Saving.).  To use a different time zone,
or if the calendar does not give the desired result, you can set the
Calc variable ‘TimeZone’ (which is by default ‘nil’) to an appropriate
time zone name.  (The easiest way to do this is to edit the ‘TimeZone’
variable using Calc’s ‘s T’ command, then use the ‘s p’
(‘calc-permanent-variable’) command to save the value of ‘TimeZone’
permanently.)  If the time zone given by ‘TimeZone’ is a generalized
time zone, e.g., ‘EGT’, Calc examines the date being converted to tell
whether to use standard or daylight saving time.  But if the current
time zone is explicit, e.g., ‘EST’ or ‘EDT’, then that adjustment is
used exactly and Calc’s daylight saving algorithm is not consulted.  The
special time zone name ‘local’ is equivalent to no argument; i.e., it
uses the information obtained from the calendar.

   The ‘t J’ and ‘t U’ commands with no numeric prefix arguments do the
same thing as ‘tzone()’; namely, use the information from the calendar
if ‘TimeZone’ is ‘nil’, otherwise use the time zone given by ‘TimeZone’.

   When Calc computes the daylight saving information itself (i.e., when
the ‘TimeZone’ variable is set), it will by default consider daylight
saving time to begin at 2 a.m. on the second Sunday of March (for years
from 2007 on) or on the last Sunday in April (for years before 2007),
and to end at 2 a.m. on the first Sunday of November.  (for years from
2007 on) or the last Sunday in October (for years before 2007).  These
are the rules that have been in effect in much of North America since
1966 and take into account the rule change that began in 2007.  If you
are in a country that uses different rules for computing daylight saving
time, you have two choices: Write your own daylight saving hook, or
control time zones explicitly by setting the ‘TimeZone’ variable and/or
always giving a time-zone argument for the conversion functions.

   The Lisp variable ‘math-daylight-savings-hook’ holds the name of a
function that is used to compute the daylight saving adjustment for a
given date.  The default is ‘math-std-daylight-savings’, which computes
an adjustment (either 0 or -1) using the North American rules given
above.

   The daylight saving hook function is called with four arguments: The
date, as a floating-point number in standard Calc format; a six-element
list of the date decomposed into year, month, day, hour, minute, and
second, respectively; a string which contains the generalized time zone
name in upper-case, e.g., ‘"WEGT"’; and a special adjustment to be
applied to the hour value when converting into a generalized time zone
(see below).

   The Lisp function ‘math-prev-weekday-in-month’ is useful for daylight
saving computations.  This is an internal version of the user-level
‘pwday’ function described in the previous section.  It takes four
arguments: The floating-point date value, the corresponding six-element
date list, the day-of-month number, and the weekday number (0–6).

   The default daylight saving hook ignores the time zone name, but a
more sophisticated hook could use different algorithms for different
time zones.  It would also be possible to use different algorithms
depending on the year number, but the default hook always uses the
algorithm for 1987 and later.  Here is a listing of the default daylight
saving hook:

     (defun math-std-daylight-savings (date dt zone bump)
       (cond ((< (nth 1 dt) 4) 0)
             ((= (nth 1 dt) 4)
              (let ((sunday (math-prev-weekday-in-month date dt 7 0)))
                (cond ((< (nth 2 dt) sunday) 0)
                      ((= (nth 2 dt) sunday)
                       (if (>= (nth 3 dt) (+ 3 bump)) -1 0))
                      (t -1))))
             ((< (nth 1 dt) 10) -1)
             ((= (nth 1 dt) 10)
              (let ((sunday (math-prev-weekday-in-month date dt 31 0)))
                (cond ((< (nth 2 dt) sunday) -1)
                      ((= (nth 2 dt) sunday)
                       (if (>= (nth 3 dt) (+ 2 bump)) 0 -1))
                      (t 0))))
             (t 0))
     )

The ‘bump’ parameter is equal to zero when Calc is converting from a
date form in a generalized time zone into a GMT date value.  It is -1
when Calc is converting in the other direction.  The adjustments shown
above ensure that the conversion behaves correctly and reasonably around
the 2 a.m. transition in each direction.

   There is a “missing” hour between 2 a.m. and 3 a.m. at the beginning
of daylight saving time; converting a date/time form that falls in this
hour results in a time value for the following hour, from 3 a.m. to 4
a.m.  At the end of daylight saving time, the hour from 1 a.m. to 2 a.m.
repeats itself; converting a date/time form that falls in this hour
results in a time value for the first manifestation of that time (_not_
the one that occurs one hour later).

   If ‘math-daylight-savings-hook’ is ‘nil’, then the daylight saving
adjustment is always taken to be zero.

   In algebraic formulas, ‘tzone(ZONE, DATE)’ computes the time zone
adjustment for a given zone name at a given date.  The DATE is ignored
unless ZONE is a generalized time zone.  If DATE is a date form, the
daylight saving computation is applied to it as it appears.  If DATE is
a numeric date value, it is adjusted for the daylight-saving version of
ZONE before being given to the daylight saving hook.  This odd-sounding
rule ensures that the daylight-saving computation is always done in
local time, not in the GMT time that a numeric DATE is typically
represented in.

   The ‘dsadj(DATE, ZONE)’ function computes the daylight saving
adjustment that is appropriate for DATE in time zone ZONE.  If ZONE is
explicitly in or not in daylight saving time (e.g., ‘PDT’ or ‘PST’) the
DATE is ignored.  If ZONE is a generalized time zone, the algorithms
described above are used.  If ZONE is omitted, the computation is done
for the current time zone.


File: calc.info,  Node: Financial Functions,  Next: Binary Functions,  Prev: Date Arithmetic,  Up: Arithmetic

8.6 Financial Functions
=======================

Calc’s financial or business functions use the ‘b’ prefix key followed
by a shifted letter.  (The ‘b’ prefix followed by a lower-case letter is
used for operations on binary numbers.)

   Note that the rate and the number of intervals given to these
functions must be on the same time scale, e.g., both months or both
years.  Mixing an annual interest rate with a time expressed in months
will give you very wrong answers!

   It is wise to compute these functions to a higher precision than you
really need, just to make sure your answer is correct to the last penny;
also, you may wish to check the definitions at the end of this section
to make sure the functions have the meaning you expect.

* Menu:

* Percentages::
* Future Value::
* Present Value::
* Related Financial Functions::
* Depreciation Functions::
* Definitions of Financial Functions::


File: calc.info,  Node: Percentages,  Next: Future Value,  Prev: Financial Functions,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.1 Percentages
-----------------

The ‘M-%’ (‘calc-percent’) command takes a percentage value, say 5.4,
and converts it to an equivalent actual number.  For example, ‘5.4 M-%’
enters 0.054 on the stack.  (That’s the <META> or <ESC> key combined
with ‘%’.)

   Actually, ‘M-%’ creates a formula of the form ‘5.4%’.  You can enter
‘5.4%’ yourself during algebraic entry.  The ‘%’ operator simply means,
“the preceding value divided by 100.” The ‘%’ operator has very high
precedence, so that ‘1+8%’ is interpreted as ‘1+(8%)’, not as ‘(1+8)%’.
(The ‘%’ operator is just a postfix notation for the ‘percent’ function,
just like ‘20!’ is the notation for ‘fact(20)’, or twenty-factorial.)

   The formula ‘5.4%’ would normally evaluate immediately to 0.054, but
the ‘M-%’ command suppresses evaluation as it puts the formula onto the
stack.  However, the next Calc command that uses the formula ‘5.4%’ will
evaluate it as its first step.  The net effect is that you get to look
at ‘5.4%’ on the stack, but Calc commands see it as ‘0.054’, which is
what they expect.

   In particular, ‘5.4%’ and ‘0.054’ are suitable values for the RATE
arguments of the various financial functions, but the number ‘5.4’ is
probably _not_ suitable—it represents a rate of 540 percent!

   The key sequence ‘M-% *’ effectively means “percent-of.” For example,
‘68 <RET> 25 M-% *’ computes 17, which is 25% of 68 (and also 68% of 25,
which comes out to the same thing).

   The ‘c %’ (‘calc-convert-percent’) command converts the value on the
top of the stack from numeric to percentage form.  For example, if 0.08
is on the stack, ‘c %’ converts it to ‘8%’.  The quantity is the same,
it’s just represented differently.  (Contrast this with ‘M-%’, which
would convert this number to ‘0.08%’.)  The ‘=’ key is a convenient way
to convert a formula like ‘8%’ back to numeric form, 0.08.

   To compute what percentage one quantity is of another quantity, use
‘/ c %’.  For example, ‘17 <RET> 68 / c %’ displays ‘25%’.

   The ‘b %’ (‘calc-percent-change’) [‘relch’] command calculates the
percentage change from one number to another.  For example, ‘40 <RET> 50
b %’ produces the answer ‘25%’, since 50 is 25% larger than 40.  A
negative result represents a decrease: ‘50 <RET> 40 b %’ produces
‘-20%’, since 40 is 20% smaller than 50.  (The answers are different in
magnitude because, in the first case, we’re increasing by 25% of 40, but
in the second case, we’re decreasing by 20% of 50.)  The effect of ‘40
<RET> 50 b %’ is to compute ‘(50-40)/40’, converting the answer to
percentage form as if by ‘c %’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Future Value,  Next: Present Value,  Prev: Percentages,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.2 Future Value
------------------

The ‘b F’ (‘calc-fin-fv’) [‘fv’] command computes the future value of an
investment.  It takes three arguments from the stack: ‘fv(RATE, N,
PAYMENT)’.  If you give payments of PAYMENT every year for N years, and
the money you have paid earns interest at RATE per year, then this
function tells you what your investment would be worth at the end of the
period.  (The actual interval doesn’t have to be years, as long as N and
RATE are expressed in terms of the same intervals.)  This function
assumes payments occur at the _end_ of each interval.

   The ‘I b F’ [‘fvb’] command does the same computation, but assuming
your payments are at the beginning of each interval.  Suppose you plan
to deposit $1000 per year in a savings account earning 5.4% interest,
starting right now.  How much will be in the account after five years?
‘fvb(5.4%, 5, 1000) = 5870.73’.  Thus you will have earned $870 worth of
interest over the years.  Using the stack, this calculation would have
been ‘5.4 M-% 5 <RET> 1000 I b F’.  Note that the rate is expressed as a
number between 0 and 1, _not_ as a percentage.

   The ‘H b F’ [‘fvl’] command computes the future value of an initial
lump sum investment.  Suppose you could deposit those five thousand
dollars in the bank right now; how much would they be worth in five
years?  ‘fvl(5.4%, 5, 5000) = 6503.89’.

   The algebraic functions ‘fv’ and ‘fvb’ accept an optional fourth
argument, which is used as an initial lump sum in the sense of ‘fvl’.
In other words, ‘fv(RATE, N, PAYMENT, INITIAL) = fv(RATE, N, PAYMENT) +
fvl(RATE, N, INITIAL)’.

   To illustrate the relationships between these functions, we could do
the ‘fvb’ calculation “by hand” using ‘fvl’.  The final balance will be
the sum of the contributions of our five deposits at various times.  The
first deposit earns interest for five years: ‘fvl(5.4%, 5, 1000) =
1300.78’.  The second deposit only earns interest for four years:
‘fvl(5.4%, 4, 1000) = 1234.13’.  And so on down to the last deposit,
which earns one year’s interest: ‘fvl(5.4%, 1, 1000) = 1054.00’.  The
sum of these five values is, sure enough, $5870.73, just as was computed
by ‘fvb’ directly.

   What does ‘fv(5.4%, 5, 1000) = 5569.96’ mean?  The payments are now
at the ends of the periods.  The end of one year is the same as the
beginning of the next, so what this really means is that we’ve lost the
payment at year zero (which contributed $1300.78), but we’re now
counting the payment at year five (which, since it didn’t have a chance
to earn interest, counts as $1000).  Indeed, ‘5569.96 = 5870.73 -
1300.78 + 1000’ (give or take a bit of roundoff error).


File: calc.info,  Node: Present Value,  Next: Related Financial Functions,  Prev: Future Value,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.3 Present Value
-------------------

The ‘b P’ (‘calc-fin-pv’) [‘pv’] command computes the present value of
an investment.  Like ‘fv’, it takes three arguments: ‘pv(RATE, N,
PAYMENT)’.  It computes the present value of a series of regular
payments.  Suppose you have the chance to make an investment that will
pay $2000 per year over the next four years; as you receive these
payments you can put them in the bank at 9% interest.  You want to know
whether it is better to make the investment, or to keep the money in the
bank where it earns 9% interest right from the start.  The calculation
‘pv(9%, 4, 2000)’ gives the result 6479.44.  If your initial investment
must be less than this, say, $6000, then the investment is worthwhile.
But if you had to put up $7000, then it would be better just to leave it
in the bank.

   Here is the interpretation of the result of ‘pv’: You are trying to
compare the return from the investment you are considering, which is
‘fv(9%, 4, 2000) = 9146.26’, with the return from leaving the money in
the bank, which is ‘fvl(9%, 4, X)’ where X is the amount of money you
would have to put up in advance.  The ‘pv’ function finds the break-even
point, ‘x = 6479.44’, at which ‘fvl(9%, 4, 6479.44)’ is also equal to
9146.26.  This is the largest amount you should be willing to invest.

   The ‘I b P’ [‘pvb’] command solves the same problem, but with
payments occurring at the beginning of each interval.  It has the same
relationship to ‘fvb’ as ‘pv’ has to ‘fv’.  For example ‘pvb(9%, 4,
2000) = 7062.59’, a larger number than ‘pv’ produced because we get to
start earning interest on the return from our investment sooner.

   The ‘H b P’ [‘pvl’] command computes the present value of an
investment that will pay off in one lump sum at the end of the period.
For example, if we get our $8000 all at the end of the four years,
‘pvl(9%, 4, 8000) = 5667.40’.  This is much less than ‘pv’ reported,
because we don’t earn any interest on the return from this investment.
Note that ‘pvl’ and ‘fvl’ are simple inverses: ‘fvl(9%, 4, 5667.40) =
8000’.

   You can give an optional fourth lump-sum argument to ‘pv’ and ‘pvb’;
this is handled in exactly the same way as the fourth argument for ‘fv’
and ‘fvb’.

   The ‘b N’ (‘calc-fin-npv’) [‘npv’] command computes the net present
value of a series of irregular investments.  The first argument is the
interest rate.  The second argument is a vector which represents the
expected return from the investment at the end of each interval.  For
example, if the rate represents a yearly interest rate, then the vector
elements are the return from the first year, second year, and so on.

   Thus, ‘npv(9%, [2000,2000,2000,2000]) = pv(9%, 4, 2000) = 6479.44’.
Obviously this function is more interesting when the payments are not
all the same!

   The ‘npv’ function can actually have two or more arguments.  Multiple
arguments are interpreted in the same way as for the vector statistical
functions like ‘vsum’.  *Note Single-Variable Statistics::.  Basically,
if there are several payment arguments, each either a vector or a plain
number, all these values are collected left-to-right into the complete
list of payments.  A numeric prefix argument on the ‘b N’ command says
how many payment values or vectors to take from the stack.

   The ‘I b N’ [‘npvb’] command computes the net present value where
payments occur at the beginning of each interval rather than at the end.


File: calc.info,  Node: Related Financial Functions,  Next: Depreciation Functions,  Prev: Present Value,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.4 Related Financial Functions
---------------------------------

The functions in this section are basically inverses of the present
value functions with respect to the various arguments.

   The ‘b M’ (‘calc-fin-pmt’) [‘pmt’] command computes the amount of
periodic payment necessary to amortize a loan.  Thus ‘pmt(RATE, N,
AMOUNT)’ equals the value of PAYMENT such that ‘pv(RATE, N, PAYMENT) =
AMOUNT’.

   The ‘I b M’ [‘pmtb’] command does the same computation but using
‘pvb’ instead of ‘pv’.  Like ‘pv’ and ‘pvb’, these functions can also
take a fourth argument which represents an initial lump-sum investment.

   The ‘H b M’ key just invokes the ‘fvl’ function, which is the inverse
of ‘pvl’.  There is no explicit ‘pmtl’ function.

   The ‘b #’ (‘calc-fin-nper’) [‘nper’] command computes the number of
regular payments necessary to amortize a loan.  Thus ‘nper(RATE,
PAYMENT, AMOUNT)’ equals the value of N such that ‘pv(RATE, N, PAYMENT)
= AMOUNT’.  If PAYMENT is too small ever to amortize a loan for AMOUNT
at interest rate RATE, the ‘nper’ function is left in symbolic form.

   The ‘I b #’ [‘nperb’] command does the same computation but using
‘pvb’ instead of ‘pv’.  You can give a fourth lump-sum argument to these
functions, but the computation will be rather slow in the four-argument
case.

   The ‘H b #’ [‘nperl’] command does the same computation using ‘pvl’.
By exchanging PAYMENT and AMOUNT you can also get the solution for
‘fvl’.  For example, ‘nperl(8%, 2000, 1000) = 9.006’, so if you place
$1000 in a bank account earning 8%, it will take nine years to grow to
$2000.

   The ‘b T’ (‘calc-fin-rate’) [‘rate’] command computes the rate of
return on an investment.  This is also an inverse of ‘pv’: ‘rate(N,
PAYMENT, AMOUNT)’ computes the value of RATE such that ‘pv(RATE, N,
PAYMENT) = AMOUNT’.  The result is expressed as a formula like ‘6.3%’.

   The ‘I b T’ [‘rateb’] and ‘H b T’ [‘ratel’] commands solve the
analogous equations with ‘pvb’ or ‘pvl’ in place of ‘pv’.  Also, ‘rate’
and ‘rateb’ can accept an optional fourth argument just like ‘pv’ and
‘pvb’.  To redo the above example from a different perspective,
‘ratel(9, 2000, 1000) = 8.00597%’, which says you will need an interest
rate of 8% in order to double your account in nine years.

   The ‘b I’ (‘calc-fin-irr’) [‘irr’] command is the analogous function
to ‘rate’ but for net present value.  Its argument is a vector of
payments.  Thus ‘irr(PAYMENTS)’ computes the RATE such that ‘npv(RATE,
PAYMENTS) = 0’; this rate is known as the “internal rate of return”.

   The ‘I b I’ [‘irrb’] command computes the internal rate of return
assuming payments occur at the beginning of each period.


File: calc.info,  Node: Depreciation Functions,  Next: Definitions of Financial Functions,  Prev: Related Financial Functions,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.5 Depreciation Functions
----------------------------

The functions in this section calculate “depreciation”, which is the
amount of value that a possession loses over time.  These functions are
characterized by three parameters: COST, the original cost of the asset;
SALVAGE, the value the asset will have at the end of its expected
“useful life”; and LIFE, the number of years (or other periods) of the
expected useful life.

   There are several methods for calculating depreciation that differ in
the way they spread the depreciation over the lifetime of the asset.

   The ‘b S’ (‘calc-fin-sln’) [‘sln’] command computes the
“straight-line” depreciation.  In this method, the asset depreciates by
the same amount every year (or period).  For example, ‘sln(12000, 2000,
5)’ returns 2000.  The asset costs $12000 initially and will be worth
$2000 after five years; it loses $2000 per year.

   The ‘b Y’ (‘calc-fin-syd’) [‘syd’] command computes the accelerated
“sum-of-years’-digits” depreciation.  Here the depreciation is higher
during the early years of the asset’s life.  Since the depreciation is
different each year, ‘b Y’ takes a fourth PERIOD parameter which
specifies which year is requested, from 1 to LIFE.  If PERIOD is outside
this range, the ‘syd’ function will return zero.

   The ‘b D’ (‘calc-fin-ddb’) [‘ddb’] command computes an accelerated
depreciation using the double-declining balance method.  It also takes a
fourth PERIOD parameter.

   For symmetry, the ‘sln’ function will accept a PERIOD parameter as
well, although it will ignore its value except that the return value
will as usual be zero if PERIOD is out of range.

   For example, pushing the vector ‘[1,2,3,4,5]’ (perhaps with ‘v x 5’)
and then mapping ‘V M ' [sln(12000,2000,5,$), syd(12000,2000,5,$),
ddb(12000,2000,5,$)] <RET>’ produces a matrix that allows us to compare
the three depreciation methods:

     [ [ 2000, 3333, 4800 ]
       [ 2000, 2667, 2880 ]
       [ 2000, 2000, 1728 ]
       [ 2000, 1333,  592 ]
       [ 2000,  667,   0  ] ]

(Values have been rounded to nearest integers in this figure.)  We see
that ‘sln’ depreciates by the same amount each year, ‘syd’ depreciates
more at the beginning and less at the end, and ‘ddb’ weights the
depreciation even more toward the beginning.

   Summing columns with ‘V R : +’ yields ‘[10000, 10000, 10000]’; the
total depreciation in any method is (by definition) the difference
between the cost and the salvage value.


File: calc.info,  Node: Definitions of Financial Functions,  Prev: Depreciation Functions,  Up: Financial Functions

8.6.6 Definitions
-----------------

For your reference, here are the actual formulas used to compute Calc’s
financial functions.

   Calc will not evaluate a financial function unless the RATE or N
argument is known.  However, PAYMENT or AMOUNT can be a variable.  Calc
expands these functions according to the formulas below for symbolic
arguments only when you use the ‘a "’ (‘calc-expand-formula’) command,
or when taking derivatives or integrals or solving equations involving
the functions.

   These formulas are shown using the conventions of Big display mode
(‘d B’); for example, the formula for ‘fv’ written linearly is ‘pmt *
((1 + rate)^n) - 1) / rate’.

                                             n
                                   (1 + rate)  - 1
     fv(rate, n, pmt) =      pmt * ---------------
                                        rate

                                              n
                                   ((1 + rate)  - 1) (1 + rate)
     fvb(rate, n, pmt) =     pmt * ----------------------------
                                              rate

                                             n
     fvl(rate, n, pmt) =     pmt * (1 + rate)

                                                 -n
                                   1 - (1 + rate)
     pv(rate, n, pmt) =      pmt * ----------------
                                         rate

                                                  -n
                                   (1 - (1 + rate)  ) (1 + rate)
     pvb(rate, n, pmt) =     pmt * -----------------------------
                                              rate

                                             -n
     pvl(rate, n, pmt) =     pmt * (1 + rate)

                                         -1               -2               -3
     npv(rate, [a, b, c]) =  a*(1 + rate)   + b*(1 + rate)   + c*(1 + rate)

                                             -1               -2
     npvb(rate, [a, b, c]) = a + b*(1 + rate)   + c*(1 + rate)

                                                  -n
                             (amt - x * (1 + rate)  ) * rate
     pmt(rate, n, amt, x) =  -------------------------------
                                                  -n
                                    1 - (1 + rate)

                                                  -n
                             (amt - x * (1 + rate)  ) * rate
     pmtb(rate, n, amt, x) = -------------------------------
                                             -n
                              (1 - (1 + rate)  ) (1 + rate)

                                        amt * rate
     nper(rate, pmt, amt) =  - log(1 - ------------, 1 + rate)
                                           pmt

                                         amt * rate
     nperb(rate, pmt, amt) = - log(1 - ---------------, 1 + rate)
                                       pmt * (1 + rate)

                                   amt
     nperl(rate, pmt, amt) = - log(---, 1 + rate)
                                   pmt

                                1/n
                             pmt
     ratel(n, pmt, amt) =    ------ - 1
                                1/n
                             amt

                             cost - salv
     sln(cost, salv, life) = -----------
                                life

                                  (cost - salv) * (life - per + 1)
     syd(cost, salv, life, per) = --------------------------------
                                       life * (life + 1) / 2

                                  book * 2
     ddb(cost, salv, life, per) = --------,  book = cost - depreciation so far
                                    life

In ‘pmt’ and ‘pmtb’, ‘x=0’ if omitted.

   These functions accept any numeric objects, including error forms,
intervals, and even (though not very usefully) complex numbers.  The
above formulas specify exactly the behavior of these functions with all
sorts of inputs.

   Note that if the first argument to the ‘log’ in ‘nper’ is negative,
‘nper’ leaves itself in symbolic form rather than returning a
(financially meaningless) complex number.

   ‘rate(num, pmt, amt)’ solves the equation ‘pv(rate, num, pmt) = amt’
for ‘rate’ using ‘H a R’ (‘calc-find-root’), with the interval ‘[.01% ..
100%]’ for an initial guess.  The ‘rateb’ function is the same except
that it uses ‘pvb’.  Note that ‘ratel’ can be solved directly; its
formula is shown in the above list.

   Similarly, ‘irr(pmts)’ solves the equation ‘npv(rate, pmts) = 0’ for
‘rate’.

   If you give a fourth argument to ‘nper’ or ‘nperb’, Calc will also
use ‘H a R’ to solve the equation using an initial guess interval of ‘[0
.. 100]’.

   A fourth argument to ‘fv’ simply sums the two components calculated
from the above formulas for ‘fv’ and ‘fvl’.  The same is true of ‘fvb’,
‘pv’, and ‘pvb’.

   The ‘ddb’ function is computed iteratively; the “book” value starts
out equal to COST, and decreases according to the above formula for the
specified number of periods.  If the book value would decrease below
SALVAGE, it only decreases to SALVAGE and the depreciation is zero for
all subsequent periods.  The ‘ddb’ function returns the amount the book
value decreased in the specified period.


File: calc.info,  Node: Binary Functions,  Prev: Financial Functions,  Up: Arithmetic

8.7 Binary Number Functions
===========================

The commands in this chapter all use two-letter sequences beginning with
the ‘b’ prefix.

   The “binary” operations actually work regardless of the currently
displayed radix, although their results make the most sense in a radix
like 2, 8, or 16 (as obtained by the ‘d 2’, ‘d 8’, or ‘d 6’ commands,
respectively).  You may also wish to enable display of leading zeros
with ‘d z’.  *Note Radix Modes::.

   The Calculator maintains a current “word size” ‘w’, an arbitrary
integer.  For a positive word size, all of the binary operations
described here operate modulo ‘2^w’.  In particular, negative arguments
are converted to positive integers modulo ‘2^w’ by all binary functions.

   If the word size is negative, binary operations produce
twos-complement integers from ‘-(2^(-w-1))’ to ‘2^(-w-1)-1’ inclusive.
Either mode accepts inputs in any range; the sign of ‘w’ affects only
the results produced.

   If the word size is zero, binary operations work on the entire number
without clipping, as if the word size had been negative infinity.

   The ‘b c’ (‘calc-clip’) [‘clip’] command can be used to clip a number
by reducing it modulo ‘2^w’.  The commands described in this chapter
automatically clip their results to the current word size.  Note that
other operations like addition do not use the current word size, since
integer addition generally is not “binary.” (However, *note
Simplification Modes::, ‘calc-bin-simplify-mode’.)  For example, with a
word size of 8 bits ‘b c’ converts a number to the range 0 to 255; with
a word size of -8 ‘b c’ converts to the range -128 to 127.

   The default word size is 32 bits.  All operations except the shifts
and rotates allow you to specify a different word size for that one
operation by giving a numeric prefix argument: ‘C-u 8 b c’ clips the top
of stack to the range 0 to 255 regardless of the current word size.  To
set the word size permanently, use ‘b w’ (‘calc-word-size’).  This
command displays a prompt with the current word size; press <RET>
immediately to keep this word size, or type a new word size at the
prompt.

   When the binary operations are written in symbolic form, they take an
optional second (or third) word-size parameter.  When a formula like
‘and(a,b)’ is finally evaluated, the word size current at that time will
be used, but when ‘and(a,b,-8)’ is evaluated, a word size of -8 will
always be used.  A symbolic binary function will be left in symbolic
form unless the all of its argument(s) are integers or integer-valued
floats.

   If either or both arguments are modulo forms for which ‘M’ is a power
of two, that power of two is taken as the word size unless a numeric
prefix argument overrides it.  The current word size is never consulted
when modulo-power-of-two forms are involved.

   The ‘b a’ (‘calc-and’) [‘and’] command computes the bitwise AND of
the two numbers on the top of the stack.  In other words, for each of
the ‘w’ binary digits of the two numbers (pairwise), the corresponding
bit of the result is 1 if and only if both input bits are 1:
‘and(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#1000’.

   The ‘b o’ (‘calc-or’) [‘or’] command computes the bitwise inclusive
OR of two numbers.  A bit is 1 if either of the input bits, or both, are
1: ‘or(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#1110’.

   The ‘b x’ (‘calc-xor’) [‘xor’] command computes the bitwise exclusive
OR of two numbers.  A bit is 1 if exactly one of the input bits is 1:
‘xor(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#0110’.

   The ‘b d’ (‘calc-diff’) [‘diff’] command computes the bitwise
difference of two numbers; this is defined by ‘diff(a,b) =
and(a,not(b))’, so that ‘diff(2#1100, 2#1010) = 2#0100’.

   The ‘b n’ (‘calc-not’) [‘not’] command computes the bitwise NOT of a
number.  A bit is 1 if the input bit is 0 and vice-versa.

   The ‘b l’ (‘calc-lshift-binary’) [‘lsh’] command shifts a number left
by one bit, or by the number of bits specified in the numeric prefix
argument.  A negative prefix argument performs a logical right shift, in
which zeros are shifted in on the left.  In symbolic form, ‘lsh(a)’ is
short for ‘lsh(a,1)’, which in turn is short for ‘lsh(a,n,w)’.  Bits
shifted “off the end,” according to the current word size, are lost.

   The ‘H b l’ command also does a left shift, but it takes two
arguments from the stack (the value to shift, and, at top-of-stack, the
number of bits to shift).  This version interprets the prefix argument
just like the regular binary operations, i.e., as a word size.  The
Hyperbolic flag has a similar effect on the rest of the binary shift and
rotate commands.

   The ‘b r’ (‘calc-rshift-binary’) [‘rsh’] command shifts a number
right by one bit, or by the number of bits specified in the numeric
prefix argument: ‘rsh(a,n) = lsh(a,-n)’.

   The ‘b L’ (‘calc-lshift-arith’) [‘ash’] command shifts a number left.
It is analogous to ‘lsh’, except that if the shift is rightward (the
prefix argument is negative), an arithmetic shift is performed as
described below.

   The ‘b R’ (‘calc-rshift-arith’) [‘rash’] command performs an
“arithmetic” shift to the right, in which the leftmost bit (according to
the current word size) is duplicated rather than shifting in zeros.
This corresponds to dividing by a power of two where the input is
interpreted as a signed, twos-complement number.  (The distinction
between the ‘rsh’ and ‘rash’ operations is totally independent from
whether the word size is positive or negative.)  With a negative prefix
argument, this performs a standard left shift.

   When the word size is zero, logical and arithmetic shift operations
are identical: a negative value shifted right remains negative, since
there is an infinite supply of ones to shift in.

   The ‘b t’ (‘calc-rotate-binary’) [‘rot’] command rotates a number one
bit to the left.  The leftmost bit (according to the current word size)
is dropped off the left and shifted in on the right.  With a numeric
prefix argument, the number is rotated that many bits to the left or
right.

   Rotation is not possible with a zero word size.

   *Note Set Operations::, for the ‘b p’ and ‘b u’ commands that pack
and unpack binary integers into sets.  (For example, ‘b u’ unpacks the
number ‘2#11001’ to the set of bit-numbers ‘[0, 3, 4]’.)  Type ‘b u V #’
to count the number of “1” bits in a binary integer.

   Another interesting use of the set representation of binary integers
is to reverse the bits in, say, a 32-bit integer.  Type ‘b u’ to unpack;
type ‘31 <TAB> -’ to replace each bit-number in the set with 31 minus
that bit-number; type ‘b p’ to pack the set back into a binary integer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Scientific Functions,  Next: Matrix Functions,  Prev: Arithmetic,  Up: Top

9 Scientific Functions
**********************

The functions described here perform trigonometric and other
transcendental calculations.  They generally produce floating-point
answers correct to the full current precision.  The ‘H’ (Hyperbolic) and
‘I’ (Inverse) flag keys must be used to get some of these functions from
the keyboard.

   One miscellaneous command is shift-‘P’ (‘calc-pi’), which pushes the
value of ‘pi’ (at the current precision) onto the stack.  With the
Hyperbolic flag, it pushes the value ‘e’, the base of natural
logarithms.  With the Inverse flag, it pushes Euler’s constant ‘gamma’
(about 0.5772).  With both Inverse and Hyperbolic, it pushes the “golden
ratio” ‘phi’ (about 1.618).  (At present, Euler’s constant is not
available to unlimited precision; Calc knows only the first 100 digits.)
In Symbolic mode, these commands push the actual variables ‘pi’, ‘e’,
‘gamma’, and ‘phi’, respectively, instead of their values; *note
Symbolic Mode::.

   The ‘Q’ (‘calc-sqrt’) [‘sqrt’] function is described elsewhere; *note
Basic Arithmetic::.  With the Inverse flag [‘sqr’], this command
computes the square of the argument.

   *Note Prefix Arguments::, for a discussion of the effect of numeric
prefix arguments on commands in this chapter which do not otherwise
interpret a prefix argument.

* Menu:

* Logarithmic Functions::
* Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions::
* Advanced Math Functions::
* Branch Cuts::
* Random Numbers::
* Combinatorial Functions::
* Probability Distribution Functions::


File: calc.info,  Node: Logarithmic Functions,  Next: Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions,  Prev: Scientific Functions,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.1 Logarithmic Functions
=========================

The shift-‘L’ (‘calc-ln’) [‘ln’] command computes the natural logarithm
of the real or complex number on the top of the stack.  With the Inverse
flag it computes the exponential function instead, although this is
redundant with the ‘E’ command.

   The shift-‘E’ (‘calc-exp’) [‘exp’] command computes the exponential,
i.e., ‘e’ raised to the power of the number on the stack.  The meanings
of the Inverse and Hyperbolic flags follow from those for the ‘calc-ln’
command.

   The ‘H L’ (‘calc-log10’) [‘log10’] command computes the common
(base-10) logarithm of a number.  (With the Inverse flag [‘exp10’], it
raises ten to a given power.)  Note that the common logarithm of a
complex number is computed by taking the natural logarithm and dividing
by ‘ln(10)’.

   The ‘B’ (‘calc-log’) [‘log’] command computes a logarithm to any
base.  For example, ‘1024 <RET> 2 B’ produces 10, since ‘2^10 = 1024’.
In certain cases like ‘log(3,9)’, the result will be either ‘1:2’ or
‘0.5’ depending on the current Fraction mode setting.  With the Inverse
flag [‘alog’], this command is similar to ‘^’ except that the order of
the arguments is reversed.

   The ‘f I’ (‘calc-ilog’) [‘ilog’] command computes the integer
logarithm of a number to any base.  The number and the base must
themselves be positive integers.  This is the true logarithm, rounded
down to an integer.  Thus ‘ilog(x,10)’ is 3 for all ‘x’ in the range
from 1000 to 9999.  If both arguments are positive integers, exact
integer arithmetic is used; otherwise, this is equivalent to
‘floor(log(x,b))’.

   The ‘f E’ (‘calc-expm1’) [‘expm1’] command computes ‘exp(x)-1’, but
using an algorithm that produces a more accurate answer when the result
is close to zero, i.e., when ‘exp(x)’ is close to one.

   The ‘f L’ (‘calc-lnp1’) [‘lnp1’] command computes ‘ln(x+1)’,
producing a more accurate answer when ‘x’ is close to zero.


File: calc.info,  Node: Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions,  Next: Advanced Math Functions,  Prev: Logarithmic Functions,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.2 Trigonometric/Hyperbolic Functions
======================================

The shift-‘S’ (‘calc-sin’) [‘sin’] command computes the sine of an angle
or complex number.  If the input is an HMS form, it is interpreted as
degrees-minutes-seconds; otherwise, the input is interpreted according
to the current angular mode.  It is best to use Radians mode when
operating on complex numbers.

   Calc’s “units” mechanism includes angular units like ‘deg’, ‘rad’,
and ‘grad’.  While ‘sin(45 deg)’ is not evaluated all the time, the ‘u
s’ (‘calc-simplify-units’) command will simplify ‘sin(45 deg)’ by taking
the sine of 45 degrees, regardless of the current angular mode.  *Note
Basic Operations on Units::.

   Also, the symbolic variable ‘pi’ is not ordinarily recognized in
arguments to trigonometric functions, as in ‘sin(3 pi / 4)’, but the
default algebraic simplifications recognize many such formulas when the
current angular mode is Radians _and_ Symbolic mode is enabled; this
example would be replaced by ‘sqrt(2) / 2’.  *Note Symbolic Mode::.
Beware, this simplification occurs even if you have stored a different
value in the variable ‘pi’; this is one reason why changing built-in
variables is a bad idea.  Arguments of the form ‘x’ plus a multiple of
‘pi/2’ are also simplified.  Calc includes similar formulas for ‘cos’
and ‘tan’.

   Calc’s algebraic simplifications know all angles which are integer
multiples of ‘pi/12’, ‘pi/10’, or ‘pi/8’ radians.  In Degrees mode,
analogous simplifications occur for integer multiples of 15 or 18
degrees, and for arguments plus multiples of 90 degrees.

   With the Inverse flag, ‘calc-sin’ computes an arcsine.  This is also
available as the ‘calc-arcsin’ command or ‘arcsin’ algebraic function.
The returned argument is converted to degrees, radians, or HMS notation
depending on the current angular mode.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘calc-sin’ computes the hyperbolic sine,
also available as ‘calc-sinh’ [‘sinh’].  With the Hyperbolic and Inverse
flags, it computes the hyperbolic arcsine (‘calc-arcsinh’) [‘arcsinh’].

   The shift-‘C’ (‘calc-cos’) [‘cos’] command computes the cosine of an
angle or complex number, and shift-‘T’ (‘calc-tan’) [‘tan’] computes the
tangent, along with all the various inverse and hyperbolic variants of
these functions.

   The ‘f T’ (‘calc-arctan2’) [‘arctan2’] command takes two numbers from
the stack and computes the arc tangent of their ratio.  The result is in
the full range from -180 (exclusive) to +180 (inclusive) degrees, or the
analogous range in radians.  A similar result would be obtained with ‘/’
followed by ‘I T’, but the value would only be in the range from -90 to
+90 degrees since the division loses information about the signs of the
two components, and an error might result from an explicit division by
zero which ‘arctan2’ would avoid.  By (arbitrary) definition,
‘arctan2(0,0)=0’.

   The ‘calc-sincos’ [‘sincos’] command computes the sine and cosine of
a number, returning them as a vector of the form ‘[COS, SIN]’.  With the
Inverse flag [‘arcsincos’], this command takes a two-element vector as
an argument and computes ‘arctan2’ of the elements.  (This command does
not accept the Hyperbolic flag.)

   The remaining trigonometric functions, ‘calc-sec’ [‘sec’], ‘calc-csc’
[‘csc’] and ‘calc-cot’ [‘cot’], are also available.  With the Hyperbolic
flag, these compute their hyperbolic counterparts, which are also
available separately as ‘calc-sech’ [‘sech’], ‘calc-csch’ [‘csch’] and
‘calc-coth’ [‘coth’].  (These commands do not accept the Inverse flag.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Advanced Math Functions,  Next: Branch Cuts,  Prev: Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.3 Advanced Mathematical Functions
===================================

Calc can compute a variety of less common functions that arise in
various branches of mathematics.  All of the functions described in this
section allow arbitrary complex arguments and, except as noted, will
work to arbitrarily large precision.  They can not at present handle
error forms or intervals as arguments.

   NOTE: These functions are still experimental.  In particular, their
accuracy is not guaranteed in all domains.  It is advisable to set the
current precision comfortably higher than you actually need when using
these functions.  Also, these functions may be impractically slow for
some values of the arguments.

   The ‘f g’ (‘calc-gamma’) [‘gamma’] command computes the Euler gamma
function.  For positive integer arguments, this is related to the
factorial function: ‘gamma(n+1) = fact(n)’.  For general complex
arguments the gamma function can be defined by the following definite
integral: ‘gamma(a) = integ(t^(a-1) exp(t), t, 0, inf)’.  (The actual
implementation uses far more efficient computational methods.)

   The ‘f G’ (‘calc-inc-gamma’) [‘gammaP’] command computes the
incomplete gamma function, denoted ‘P(a,x)’.  This is defined by the
integral, ‘gammaP(a,x) = integ(t^(a-1) exp(t), t, 0, x) / gamma(a)’.
This implies that ‘gammaP(a,inf) = 1’ for any ‘a’ (see the definition of
the normal gamma function).

   Several other varieties of incomplete gamma function are defined.
The complement of ‘P(a,x)’, called ‘Q(a,x) = 1-P(a,x)’ by some authors,
is computed by the ‘I f G’ [‘gammaQ’] command.  You can think of this as
taking the other half of the integral, from ‘x’ to infinity.

   The functions corresponding to the integrals that define ‘P(a,x)’ and
‘Q(a,x)’ but without the normalizing ‘1/gamma(a)’ factor are called
‘g(a,x)’ and ‘G(a,x)’, respectively (where ‘g’ and ‘G’ represent the
lower- and upper-case Greek letter gamma).  You can obtain these using
the ‘H f G’ [‘gammag’] and ‘H I f G’ [‘gammaG’] commands.

   The ‘f b’ (‘calc-beta’) [‘beta’] command computes the Euler beta
function, which is defined in terms of the gamma function as ‘beta(a,b)
= gamma(a) gamma(b) / gamma(a+b)’, or by ‘beta(a,b) = integ(t^(a-1)
(1-t)^(b-1), t, 0, 1)’.

   The ‘f B’ (‘calc-inc-beta’) [‘betaI’] command computes the incomplete
beta function ‘I(x,a,b)’.  It is defined by ‘betaI(x,a,b) =
integ(t^(a-1) (1-t)^(b-1), t, 0, x) / beta(a,b)’.  Once again, the ‘H’
(hyperbolic) prefix gives the corresponding un-normalized version
[‘betaB’].

   The ‘f e’ (‘calc-erf’) [‘erf’] command computes the error function
‘erf(x) = 2 integ(exp(-(t^2)), t, 0, x) / sqrt(pi)’.  The complementary
error function ‘I f e’ (‘calc-erfc’) [‘erfc’] is the corresponding
integral from ‘x’ to infinity; the sum ‘erf(x) + erfc(x) = 1’.

   The ‘f j’ (‘calc-bessel-J’) [‘besJ’] and ‘f y’ (‘calc-bessel-Y’)
[‘besY’] commands compute the Bessel functions of the first and second
kinds, respectively.  In ‘besJ(n,x)’ and ‘besY(n,x)’ the “order”
parameter ‘n’ is often an integer, but is not required to be one.
Calc’s implementation of the Bessel functions currently limits the
precision to 8 digits, and may not be exact even to that precision.  Use
with care!


File: calc.info,  Node: Branch Cuts,  Next: Random Numbers,  Prev: Advanced Math Functions,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.4 Branch Cuts and Principal Values
====================================

All of the logarithmic, trigonometric, and other scientific functions
are defined for complex numbers as well as for reals.  This section
describes the values returned in cases where the general result is a
family of possible values.  Calc follows section 12.5.3 of Steele’s
“Common Lisp, the Language”, second edition, in these matters.  This
section will describe each function briefly; for a more detailed
discussion (including some nifty diagrams), consult Steele’s book.

   Note that the branch cuts for ‘arctan’ and ‘arctanh’ were changed
between the first and second editions of Steele.  Recent versions of
Calc follow the second edition.

   The new branch cuts exactly match those of the HP-28/48 calculators.
They also match those of Mathematica 1.2, except that Mathematica’s
‘arctan’ cut is always in the right half of the complex plane, and its
‘arctanh’ cut is always in the top half of the plane.  Calc’s cuts are
continuous with quadrants I and III for ‘arctan’, or II and IV for
‘arctanh’.

   Note: The current implementations of these functions with complex
arguments are designed with proper behavior around the branch cuts in
mind, _not_ efficiency or accuracy.  You may need to increase the
floating precision and wait a while to get suitable answers from them.

   For ‘sqrt(a+bi)’: When ‘a<0’ and ‘b’ is small but positive or zero,
the result is close to the ‘+i’ axis.  For ‘b’ small and negative, the
result is close to the ‘-i’ axis.  The result always lies in the right
half of the complex plane.

   For ‘ln(a+bi)’: The real part is defined as ‘ln(abs(a+bi))’.  The
imaginary part is defined as ‘arg(a+bi) = arctan2(b,a)’.  Thus the
branch cuts for ‘sqrt’ and ‘ln’ both lie on the negative real axis.

   The following table describes these branch cuts in another way.  If
the real and imaginary parts of ‘z’ are as shown, then the real and
imaginary parts of ‘f(z)’ will be as shown.  Here ‘eps’ stands for a
small positive value; each occurrence of ‘eps’ may stand for a different
small value.

          z           sqrt(z)       ln(z)
     ----------------------------------------
        +,   0         +,  0       any, 0
        -,   0         0,  +       any, pi
        -, +eps      +eps, +      +eps, +
        -, -eps      +eps, -      +eps, -

   For ‘z1^z2’: This is defined by ‘exp(ln(z1)*z2)’.  One interesting
consequence of this is that ‘(-8)^1:3’ does not evaluate to -2 as you
might expect, but to the complex number ‘(1., 1.732)’.  Both of these
are valid cube roots of -8 (as is ‘(1., -1.732)’); Calc chooses a
perhaps less-obvious root for the sake of mathematical consistency.

   For ‘arcsin(z)’: This is defined by ‘-i*ln(i*z + sqrt(1-z^2))’.  The
branch cuts are on the real axis, less than -1 and greater than 1.

   For ‘arccos(z)’: This is defined by ‘-i*ln(z + i*sqrt(1-z^2))’, or
equivalently by ‘pi/2 - arcsin(z)’.  The branch cuts are on the real
axis, less than -1 and greater than 1.

   For ‘arctan(z)’: This is defined by ‘(ln(1+i*z) - ln(1-i*z)) /
(2*i)’.  The branch cuts are on the imaginary axis, below ‘-i’ and above
‘i’.

   For ‘arcsinh(z)’: This is defined by ‘ln(z + sqrt(1+z^2))’.  The
branch cuts are on the imaginary axis, below ‘-i’ and above ‘i’.

   For ‘arccosh(z)’: This is defined by ‘ln(z +
(z+1)*sqrt((z-1)/(z+1)))’.  The branch cut is on the real axis less than
1.

   For ‘arctanh(z)’: This is defined by ‘(ln(1+z) - ln(1-z)) / 2’.  The
branch cuts are on the real axis, less than -1 and greater than 1.

   The following tables for ‘arcsin’, ‘arccos’, and ‘arctan’ assume the
current angular mode is Radians.  The hyperbolic functions operate
independently of the angular mode.

            z             arcsin(z)            arccos(z)
     -------------------------------------------------------
      (-1..1),  0      (-pi/2..pi/2), 0       (0..pi), 0
      (-1..1), +eps    (-pi/2..pi/2), +eps    (0..pi), -eps
      (-1..1), -eps    (-pi/2..pi/2), -eps    (0..pi), +eps
        <-1,    0          -pi/2,     +         pi,    -
        <-1,  +eps      -pi/2 + eps,  +      pi - eps, -
        <-1,  -eps      -pi/2 + eps,  -      pi - eps, +
         >1,    0           pi/2,     -          0,    +
         >1,  +eps       pi/2 - eps,  +        +eps,   -
         >1,  -eps       pi/2 - eps,  -        +eps,   +

            z            arccosh(z)         arctanh(z)
     -----------------------------------------------------
      (-1..1),  0        0,  (0..pi)       any,     0
      (-1..1), +eps    +eps, (0..pi)       any,    +eps
      (-1..1), -eps    +eps, (-pi..0)      any,    -eps
        <-1,    0        +,    pi           -,     pi/2
        <-1,  +eps       +,  pi - eps       -,  pi/2 - eps
        <-1,  -eps       +, -pi + eps       -, -pi/2 + eps
         >1,    0        +,     0           +,    -pi/2
         >1,  +eps       +,   +eps          +,  pi/2 - eps
         >1,  -eps       +,   -eps          +, -pi/2 + eps

            z           arcsinh(z)           arctan(z)
     -----------------------------------------------------
        0, (-1..1)    0, (-pi/2..pi/2)         0,     any
        0,   <-1      -,    -pi/2            -pi/2,    -
      +eps,  <-1      +, -pi/2 + eps       pi/2 - eps, -
      -eps,  <-1      -, -pi/2 + eps      -pi/2 + eps, -
        0,    >1      +,     pi/2             pi/2,    +
      +eps,   >1      +,  pi/2 - eps       pi/2 - eps, +
      -eps,   >1      -,  pi/2 - eps      -pi/2 + eps, +

   Finally, the following identities help to illustrate the relationship
between the complex trigonometric and hyperbolic functions.  They are
valid everywhere, including on the branch cuts.

     sin(i*z)  = i*sinh(z)       arcsin(i*z)  = i*arcsinh(z)
     cos(i*z)  =   cosh(z)       arcsinh(i*z) = i*arcsin(z)
     tan(i*z)  = i*tanh(z)       arctan(i*z)  = i*arctanh(z)
     sinh(i*z) = i*sin(z)        cosh(i*z)    =   cos(z)

   The “advanced math” functions (gamma, Bessel, etc.) are also defined
for general complex arguments, but their branch cuts and principal
values are not rigorously specified at present.


File: calc.info,  Node: Random Numbers,  Next: Combinatorial Functions,  Prev: Branch Cuts,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.5 Random Numbers
==================

The ‘k r’ (‘calc-random’) [‘random’] command produces random numbers of
various sorts.

   Given a positive numeric prefix argument ‘M’, it produces a random
integer ‘N’ in the range ‘0 <= N < M’.  Each possible value ‘N’ appears
with equal probability.

   With no numeric prefix argument, the ‘k r’ command takes its argument
from the stack instead.  Once again, if this is a positive integer ‘M’
the result is a random integer less than ‘M’.  However, note that while
numeric prefix arguments are limited to six digits or so, an ‘M’ taken
from the stack can be arbitrarily large.  If ‘M’ is negative, the result
is a random integer in the range ‘M < N <= 0’.

   If the value on the stack is a floating-point number ‘M’, the result
is a random floating-point number ‘N’ in the range ‘0 <= N < M’ or ‘M <
N <= 0’, according to the sign of ‘M’.

   If ‘M’ is zero, the result is a Gaussian-distributed random real
number; the distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of
one.  The algorithm used generates random numbers in pairs; thus, every
other call to this function will be especially fast.

   If ‘M’ is an error form ‘m +/- s’ where M and S are both real
numbers, the result uses a Gaussian distribution with mean M and
standard deviation S.

   If ‘M’ is an interval form, the lower and upper bounds specify the
acceptable limits of the random numbers.  If both bounds are integers,
the result is a random integer in the specified range.  If either bound
is floating-point, the result is a random real number in the specified
range.  If the interval is open at either end, the result will be sure
not to equal that end value.  (This makes a big difference for integer
intervals, but for floating-point intervals it’s relatively minor: with
a precision of 6, ‘random([1.0..2.0))’ will return any of one million
numbers from 1.00000 to 1.99999; ‘random([1.0..2.0])’ may additionally
return 2.00000, but the probability of this happening is extremely
small.)

   If ‘M’ is a vector, the result is one element taken at random from
the vector.  All elements of the vector are given equal probabilities.

   The sequence of numbers produced by ‘k r’ is completely random by
default, i.e., the sequence is seeded each time you start Calc using the
current time and other information.  You can get a reproducible sequence
by storing a particular “seed value” in the Calc variable ‘RandSeed’.
Any integer will do for a seed; integers of from 1 to 12 digits are
good.  If you later store a different integer into ‘RandSeed’, Calc will
switch to a different pseudo-random sequence.  If you “unstore”
‘RandSeed’, Calc will re-seed itself from the current time.  If you
store the same integer that you used before back into ‘RandSeed’, you
will get the exact same sequence of random numbers as before.

   The ‘calc-rrandom’ command (not on any key) produces a random real
number between zero and one.  It is equivalent to ‘random(1.0)’.

   The ‘k a’ (‘calc-random-again’) command produces another random
number, re-using the most recent value of ‘M’.  With a numeric prefix
argument N, it produces N more random numbers using that value of ‘M’.

   The ‘k h’ (‘calc-shuffle’) command produces a vector of several
random values with no duplicates.  The value on the top of the stack
specifies the set from which the random values are drawn, and may be any
of the ‘M’ formats described above.  The numeric prefix argument gives
the length of the desired list.  (If you do not provide a numeric prefix
argument, the length of the list is taken from the top of the stack, and
‘M’ from second-to-top.)

   If ‘M’ is a floating-point number, zero, or an error form (so that
the random values are being drawn from the set of real numbers) there is
little practical difference between using ‘k h’ and using ‘k r’ several
times.  But if the set of possible values consists of just a few
integers, or the elements of a vector, then there is a very real chance
that multiple ‘k r’’s will produce the same number more than once.  The
‘k h’ command produces a vector whose elements are always distinct.
(Actually, there is a slight exception: If ‘M’ is a vector, no given
vector element will be drawn more than once, but if several elements of
‘M’ are equal, they may each make it into the result vector.)

   One use of ‘k h’ is to rearrange a list at random.  This happens if
the prefix argument is equal to the number of values in the list: ‘[1,
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3] 5 k h’ might produce the permuted list ‘[2.5, 1, 1.5, 3,
2]’.  As a convenient feature, if the argument N is negative it is
replaced by the size of the set represented by ‘M’.  Naturally, this is
allowed only when ‘M’ specifies a small discrete set of possibilities.

   To do the equivalent of ‘k h’ but with duplications allowed, given
‘M’ on the stack and with N just entered as a numeric prefix, use ‘v b’
to build a vector of copies of ‘M’, then use ‘V M k r’ to “map” the
normal ‘k r’ function over the elements of this vector.  *Note Matrix
Functions::.

* Menu:

* Random Number Generator::     (Complete description of Calc’s algorithm)


File: calc.info,  Node: Random Number Generator,  Prev: Random Numbers,  Up: Random Numbers

9.5.1 Random Number Generator
-----------------------------

Calc’s random number generator uses several methods to ensure that the
numbers it produces are highly random.  Knuth’s _Art of Computer
Programming_, Volume II, contains a thorough description of the theory
of random number generators and their measurement and characterization.

   If ‘RandSeed’ has no stored value, Calc calls Emacs’s built-in
‘random’ function to get a stream of random numbers, which it then
treats in various ways to avoid problems inherent in the simple random
number generators that many systems use to implement ‘random’.

   When Calc’s random number generator is first invoked, it “seeds” the
low-level random sequence using the time of day, so that the random
number sequence will be different every time you use Calc.

   Since Emacs Lisp doesn’t specify the range of values that will be
returned by its ‘random’ function, Calc exercises the function several
times to estimate the range.  When Calc subsequently uses the ‘random’
function, it takes only 10 bits of the result near the most-significant
end.  (It avoids at least the bottom four bits, preferably more, and
also tries to avoid the top two bits.)  This strategy works well with
the linear congruential generators that are typically used to implement
‘random’.

   If ‘RandSeed’ contains an integer, Calc uses this integer to seed an
“additive congruential” method (Knuth’s algorithm 3.2.2A, computing
‘X_n-55 - X_n-24’).  This method expands the seed value into a large
table which is maintained internally; the variable ‘RandSeed’ is changed
from, e.g., 42 to the vector ‘[42]’ to indicate that the seed has been
absorbed into this table.  When ‘RandSeed’ contains a vector, ‘k r’ and
related commands continue to use the same internal table as last time.
There is no way to extract the complete state of the random number
generator so that you can restart it from any point; you can only
restart it from the same initial seed value.  A simple way to restart
from the same seed is to type ‘s r RandSeed’ to get the seed vector, ‘v
u’ to unpack it back into a number, then ‘s t RandSeed’ to reseed the
generator with that number.

   Calc uses a “shuffling” method as described in algorithm 3.2.2B of
Knuth.  It fills a table with 13 random 10-bit numbers.  Then, to
generate a new random number, it uses the previous number to index into
the table, picks the value it finds there as the new random number, then
replaces that table entry with a new value obtained from a call to the
base random number generator (either the additive congruential generator
or the ‘random’ function supplied by the system).  If there are any
flaws in the base generator, shuffling will tend to even them out.  But
if the system provides an excellent ‘random’ function, shuffling will
not damage its randomness.

   To create a random integer of a certain number of digits, Calc builds
the integer three decimal digits at a time.  For each group of three
digits, Calc calls its 10-bit shuffling random number generator (which
returns a value from 0 to 1023); if the random value is 1000 or more,
Calc throws it out and tries again until it gets a suitable value.

   To create a random floating-point number with precision P, Calc
simply creates a random P-digit integer and multiplies by ‘10^-p’.  The
resulting random numbers should be very clean, but note that relatively
small numbers will have few significant random digits.  In other words,
with a precision of 12, you will occasionally get numbers on the order
of ‘10^-9’ or ‘10^-10’, but those numbers will only have two or three
random digits since they correspond to small integers times ‘10^-12’.

   To create a random integer in the interval ‘[0 .. M)’, Calc counts
the digits in M, creates a random integer with three additional digits,
then reduces modulo M.  Unless M is a power of ten the resulting values
will be very slightly biased toward the lower numbers, but this bias
will be less than 0.1%.  (For example, if M is 42, Calc will reduce a
random integer less than 100000 modulo 42 to get a result less than 42.
It is easy to show that the numbers 40 and 41 will be only 2380/2381 as
likely to result from this modulo operation as numbers 39 and below.)
If M is a power of ten, however, the numbers should be completely
unbiased.

   The Gaussian random numbers generated by ‘random(0.0)’ use the
“polar” method described in Knuth section 3.4.1C.  This method generates
a pair of Gaussian random numbers at a time, so only every other call to
‘random(0.0)’ will require significant calculations.


File: calc.info,  Node: Combinatorial Functions,  Next: Probability Distribution Functions,  Prev: Random Numbers,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.6 Combinatorial Functions
===========================

Commands relating to combinatorics and number theory begin with the ‘k’
key prefix.

   The ‘k g’ (‘calc-gcd’) [‘gcd’] command computes the Greatest Common
Divisor of two integers.  It also accepts fractions; the GCD of two
fractions is defined by taking the GCD of the numerators, and the LCM of
the denominators.  This definition is consistent with the idea that ‘a /
gcd(a,x)’ should yield an integer for any ‘a’ and ‘x’.  For other types
of arguments, the operation is left in symbolic form.

   The ‘k l’ (‘calc-lcm’) [‘lcm’] command computes the Least Common
Multiple of two integers or fractions.  The product of the LCM and GCD
of two numbers is equal to the absolute value of the product of the
numbers.

   The ‘k E’ (‘calc-extended-gcd’) [‘egcd’] command computes the GCD of
two integers ‘x’ and ‘y’ and returns a vector ‘[g, a, b]’ where ‘g =
gcd(x,y) = a x + b y’.

   The ‘!’ (‘calc-factorial’) [‘fact’] command computes the factorial of
the number at the top of the stack.  If the number is an integer, the
result is an exact integer.  If the number is an integer-valued float,
the result is a floating-point approximation.  If the number is a
non-integral real number, the generalized factorial is used, as defined
by the Euler Gamma function.  Please note that computation of large
factorials can be slow; using floating-point format will help since
fewer digits must be maintained.  The same is true of many of the
commands in this section.

   The ‘k d’ (‘calc-double-factorial’) [‘dfact’] command computes the
“double factorial” of an integer.  For an even integer, this is the
product of even integers from 2 to ‘N’.  For an odd integer, this is the
product of odd integers from 3 to ‘N’.  If the argument is an
integer-valued float, the result is a floating-point approximation.
This function is undefined for negative even integers.  The notation
‘N!!’ is also recognized for double factorials.

   The ‘k c’ (‘calc-choose’) [‘choose’] command computes the binomial
coefficient ‘N’-choose-‘M’, where ‘M’ is the number on the top of the
stack and ‘N’ is second-to-top.  If both arguments are integers, the
result is an exact integer.  Otherwise, the result is a floating-point
approximation.  The binomial coefficient is defined for all real numbers
by ‘N! / M! (N-M)!’.

   The ‘H k c’ (‘calc-perm’) [‘perm’] command computes the
number-of-permutations function ‘N! / (N-M)!’.

   The ‘k b’ (‘calc-bernoulli-number’) [‘bern’] command computes a given
Bernoulli number.  The value at the top of the stack is a nonnegative
integer ‘n’ that specifies which Bernoulli number is desired.  The ‘H k
b’ command computes a Bernoulli polynomial, taking ‘n’ from the
second-to-top position and ‘x’ from the top of the stack.  If ‘x’ is a
variable or formula the result is a polynomial in ‘x’; if ‘x’ is a
number the result is a number.

   The ‘k e’ (‘calc-euler-number’) [‘euler’] command similarly computes
an Euler number, and ‘H k e’ computes an Euler polynomial.  Bernoulli
and Euler numbers occur in the Taylor expansions of several functions.

   The ‘k s’ (‘calc-stirling-number’) [‘stir1’] command computes a
Stirling number of the first kind, given two integers ‘n’ and ‘m’ on the
stack.  The ‘H k s’ [‘stir2’] command computes a Stirling number of the
second kind.  These are the number of ‘m’-cycle permutations of ‘n’
objects, and the number of ways to partition ‘n’ objects into ‘m’
non-empty sets, respectively.

   The ‘k p’ (‘calc-prime-test’) command checks if the integer on the
top of the stack is prime.  For integers less than eight million, the
answer is always exact and reasonably fast.  For larger integers, a
probabilistic method is used (see Knuth vol. II, section 4.5.4,
algorithm P). The number is first checked against small prime factors
(up to 13).  Then, any number of iterations of the algorithm are
performed.  Each step either discovers that the number is non-prime, or
substantially increases the certainty that the number is prime.  After a
few steps, the chance that a number was mistakenly described as prime
will be less than one percent.  (Indeed, this is a worst-case estimate
of the probability; in practice even a single iteration is quite
reliable.)  After the ‘k p’ command, the number will be reported as
definitely prime or non-prime if possible, or otherwise “probably” prime
with a certain probability of error.

   The normal ‘k p’ command performs one iteration of the primality
test.  Pressing ‘k p’ repeatedly for the same integer will perform
additional iterations.  Also, ‘k p’ with a numeric prefix performs the
specified number of iterations.  There is also an algebraic function
‘prime(n)’ or ‘prime(n,iters)’ which returns 1 if ‘n’ is (probably)
prime and 0 if not.

   The ‘k f’ (‘calc-prime-factors’) [‘prfac’] command attempts to
decompose an integer into its prime factors.  For numbers up to 25
million, the answer is exact although it may take some time.  The result
is a vector of the prime factors in increasing order.  For larger
inputs, prime factors above 5000 may not be found, in which case the
last number in the vector will be an unfactored integer greater than 25
million (with a warning message).  For negative integers, the first
element of the list will be -1.  For inputs -1, 0, and 1, the result is
a list of the same number.

   The ‘k n’ (‘calc-next-prime’) [‘nextprime’] command finds the next
prime above a given number.  Essentially, it searches by calling
‘calc-prime-test’ on successive integers until it finds one that passes
the test.  This is quite fast for integers less than eight million, but
once the probabilistic test comes into play the search may be rather
slow.  Ordinarily this command stops for any prime that passes one
iteration of the primality test.  With a numeric prefix argument, a
number must pass the specified number of iterations before the search
stops.  (This only matters when searching above eight million.)  You can
always use additional ‘k p’ commands to increase your certainty that the
number is indeed prime.

   The ‘I k n’ (‘calc-prev-prime’) [‘prevprime’] command analogously
finds the next prime less than a given number.

   The ‘k t’ (‘calc-totient’) [‘totient’] command computes the Euler
“totient” function, the number of integers less than ‘n’ which are
relatively prime to ‘n’.

   The ‘k m’ (‘calc-moebius’) [‘moebius’] command computes the Möbius μ
function.  If the input number is a product of ‘k’ distinct factors,
this is ‘(-1)^k’.  If the input number has any duplicate factors (i.e.,
can be divided by the same prime more than once), the result is zero.


File: calc.info,  Node: Probability Distribution Functions,  Prev: Combinatorial Functions,  Up: Scientific Functions

9.7 Probability Distribution Functions
======================================

The functions in this section compute various probability distributions.
For continuous distributions, this is the integral of the probability
density function from ‘x’ to infinity.  (These are the “upper tail”
distribution functions; there are also corresponding “lower tail”
functions which integrate from minus infinity to ‘x’.)  For discrete
distributions, the upper tail function gives the sum from ‘x’ to
infinity; the lower tail function gives the sum from minus infinity up
to, but not including, ‘x’.

   To integrate from ‘x’ to ‘y’, just use the distribution function
twice and subtract.  For example, the probability that a Gaussian random
variable with mean 2 and standard deviation 1 will lie in the range from
2.5 to 2.8 is ‘utpn(2.5,2,1) - utpn(2.8,2,1)’ (“the probability that it
is greater than 2.5, but not greater than 2.8”), or equivalently
‘ltpn(2.8,2,1) - ltpn(2.5,2,1)’.

   The ‘k B’ (‘calc-utpb’) [‘utpb’] function uses the binomial
distribution.  Push the parameters N, P, and then X onto the stack; the
result (‘utpb(x,n,p)’) is the probability that an event will occur X or
more times out of N trials, if its probability of occurring in any given
trial is P.  The ‘I k B’ [‘ltpb’] function is the probability that the
event will occur fewer than X times.

   The other probability distribution functions similarly take the form
‘k X’ (‘calc-utpX’) [‘utpX’] and ‘I k X’ [‘ltpX’], for various letters
X.  The arguments to the algebraic functions are the value of the random
variable first, then whatever other parameters define the distribution.
Note these are among the few Calc functions where the order of the
arguments in algebraic form differs from the order of arguments as found
on the stack.  (The random variable comes last on the stack, so that you
can type, e.g., ‘2 <RET> 1 <RET> 2.5 k N M-<RET> <DEL> 2.8 k N -’, using
‘M-<RET> <DEL>’ to recover the original arguments but substitute a new
value for ‘x’.)

   The ‘utpc(x,v)’ function uses the chi-square distribution with ‘v’
degrees of freedom.  It is the probability that a model is correct if
its chi-square statistic is ‘x’.

   The ‘utpf(F,v1,v2)’ function uses the F distribution, used in various
statistical tests.  The parameters ‘v1’ and ‘v2’ are the degrees of
freedom in the numerator and denominator, respectively, used in
computing the statistic ‘F’.

   The ‘utpn(x,m,s)’ function uses a normal (Gaussian) distribution with
mean ‘m’ and standard deviation ‘s’.  It is the probability that such a
normal-distributed random variable would exceed ‘x’.

   The ‘utpp(n,x)’ function uses a Poisson distribution with mean ‘x’.
It is the probability that ‘n’ or more such Poisson random events will
occur.

   The ‘utpt(t,v)’ function uses the Student’s “t” distribution with ‘v’
degrees of freedom.  It is the probability that a t-distributed random
variable will be greater than ‘t’.  (Note: This computes the
distribution function ‘A(t|v)’ where ‘A(0|v) = 1’ and ‘A(inf|v) -> 0’.
The ‘UTPT’ operation on the HP-48 uses a different definition which
returns half of Calc’s value: ‘UTPT(t,v) = .5*utpt(t,v)’.)

   While Calc does not provide inverses of the probability distribution
functions, the ‘a R’ command can be used to solve for the inverse.
Since the distribution functions are monotonic, ‘a R’ is guaranteed to
be able to find a solution given any initial guess.  *Note Numerical
Solutions::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Matrix Functions,  Next: Algebra,  Prev: Scientific Functions,  Up: Top

10 Vector/Matrix Functions
**************************

Many of the commands described here begin with the ‘v’ prefix.  (For
convenience, the shift-‘V’ prefix is equivalent to ‘v’.)  The commands
usually apply to both plain vectors and matrices; some apply only to
matrices or only to square matrices.  If the argument has the wrong
dimensions the operation is left in symbolic form.

   Vectors are entered and displayed using ‘[a,b,c]’ notation.  Matrices
are vectors of which all elements are vectors of equal length.  (Though
none of the standard Calc commands use this concept, a three-dimensional
matrix or rank-3 tensor could be defined as a vector of matrices, and so
on.)

* Menu:

* Packing and Unpacking::
* Building Vectors::
* Extracting Elements::
* Manipulating Vectors::
* Vector and Matrix Arithmetic::
* Set Operations::
* Statistical Operations::
* Reducing and Mapping::
* Vector and Matrix Formats::


File: calc.info,  Node: Packing and Unpacking,  Next: Building Vectors,  Prev: Matrix Functions,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.1 Packing and Unpacking
==========================

Calc’s “pack” and “unpack” commands collect stack entries to build
composite objects such as vectors and complex numbers.  They are
described in this chapter because they are most often used to build
vectors.

   The ‘v p’ (‘calc-pack’) [‘pack’] command collects several elements
from the stack into a matrix, complex number, HMS form, error form, etc.
It uses a numeric prefix argument to specify the kind of object to be
built; this argument is referred to as the “packing mode.” If the
packing mode is a nonnegative integer, a vector of that length is
created.  For example, ‘C-u 5 v p’ will pop the top five stack elements
and push back a single vector of those five elements.  (‘C-u 0 v p’
simply creates an empty vector.)

   The same effect can be had by pressing ‘[’ to push an incomplete
vector on the stack, using <TAB> (‘calc-roll-down’) to sneak the
incomplete object up past a certain number of elements, and then
pressing ‘]’ to complete the vector.

   Negative packing modes create other kinds of composite objects:

‘-1’
     Two values are collected to build a complex number.  For example,
     ‘5 <RET> 7 C-u -1 v p’ creates the complex number ‘(5, 7)’.  The
     result is always a rectangular complex number.  The two input
     values must both be real numbers, i.e., integers, fractions, or
     floats.  If they are not, Calc will instead build a formula like ‘a
     + (0, 1) b’.  (The other packing modes also create a symbolic
     answer if the components are not suitable.)

‘-2’
     Two values are collected to build a polar complex number.  The
     first is the magnitude; the second is the phase expressed in either
     degrees or radians according to the current angular mode.

‘-3’
     Three values are collected into an HMS form.  The first two values
     (hours and minutes) must be integers or integer-valued floats.  The
     third value may be any real number.

‘-4’
     Two values are collected into an error form.  The inputs may be
     real numbers or formulas.

‘-5’
     Two values are collected into a modulo form.  The inputs must be
     real numbers.

‘-6’
     Two values are collected into the interval ‘[a .. b]’.  The inputs
     may be real numbers, HMS or date forms, or formulas.

‘-7’
     Two values are collected into the interval ‘[a .. b)’.

‘-8’
     Two values are collected into the interval ‘(a .. b]’.

‘-9’
     Two values are collected into the interval ‘(a .. b)’.

‘-10’
     Two integer values are collected into a fraction.

‘-11’
     Two values are collected into a floating-point number.  The first
     is the mantissa; the second, which must be an integer, is the
     exponent.  The result is the mantissa times ten to the power of the
     exponent.

‘-12’
     This is treated the same as -11 by the ‘v p’ command.  When
     unpacking, -12 specifies that a floating-point mantissa is desired.

‘-13’
     A real number is converted into a date form.

‘-14’
     Three numbers (year, month, day) are packed into a pure date form.

‘-15’
     Six numbers are packed into a date/time form.

   With any of the two-input negative packing modes, either or both of
the inputs may be vectors.  If both are vectors of the same length, the
result is another vector made by packing corresponding elements of the
input vectors.  If one input is a vector and the other is a plain
number, the number is packed along with each vector element to produce a
new vector.  For example, ‘C-u -4 v p’ could be used to convert a vector
of numbers and a vector of errors into a single vector of error forms;
‘C-u -5 v p’ could convert a vector of numbers and a single number M
into a vector of numbers modulo M.

   If you don’t give a prefix argument to ‘v p’, it takes the packing
mode from the top of the stack.  The elements to be packed then begin at
stack level 2.  Thus ‘1 <RET> 2 <RET> 4 n v p’ is another way to enter
the error form ‘1 +/- 2’.

   If the packing mode taken from the stack is a vector, the result is a
matrix with the dimensions specified by the elements of the vector,
which must each be integers.  For example, if the packing mode is ‘[2,
3]’, then six numbers will be taken from the stack and returned in the
form ‘[[a, b, c], [d, e, f]]’.

   If any elements of the vector are negative, other kinds of packing
are done at that level as described above.  For example, ‘[2, 3, -4]’
takes 12 objects and creates a 2x3 matrix of error forms: ‘[[a +/- b, c
+/- d ... ]]’.  Also, ‘[-4, -10]’ will convert four integers into an
error form consisting of two fractions: ‘a:b +/- c:d’.

   There is an equivalent algebraic function, ‘pack(MODE, ITEMS)’ where
MODE is a packing mode (an integer or a vector of integers) and ITEMS is
a vector of objects to be packed (re-packed, really) according to that
mode.  For example, ‘pack([3, -4], [a,b,c,d,e,f])’ yields ‘[a +/- b,
c +/- d, e +/- f]’.  The function is left in symbolic form if the
packing mode is invalid, or if the number of data items does not match
the number of items required by the mode.

   The ‘v u’ (‘calc-unpack’) command takes the vector, complex number,
HMS form, or other composite object on the top of the stack and
“unpacks” it, pushing each of its elements onto the stack as separate
objects.  Thus, it is the “inverse” of ‘v p’.  If the value at the top
of the stack is a formula, ‘v u’ unpacks it by pushing each of the
arguments of the top-level operator onto the stack.

   You can optionally give a numeric prefix argument to ‘v u’ to specify
an explicit (un)packing mode.  If the packing mode is negative and the
input is actually a vector or matrix, the result will be two or more
similar vectors or matrices of the elements.  For example, given the
vector ‘[a +/- b, c^2, d +/- 7]’, the result of ‘C-u -4 v u’ will be the
two vectors ‘[a, c^2, d]’ and ‘[b, 0, 7]’.

   Note that the prefix argument can have an effect even when the input
is not a vector.  For example, if the input is the number -5, then ‘c-u
-1 v u’ yields -5 and 0 (the components of -5 when viewed as a
rectangular complex number); ‘C-u -2 v u’ yields 5 and 180 (assuming
Degrees mode); and ‘C-u -10 v u’ yields -5 and 1 (the numerator and
denominator of -5, viewed as a rational number).  Plain ‘v u’ with this
input would complain that the input is not a composite object.

   Unpacking mode -11 converts a float into an integer mantissa and an
integer exponent, where the mantissa is not divisible by 10 (except that
0.0 is represented by a mantissa and exponent of 0).  Unpacking mode -12
converts a float into a floating-point mantissa and integer exponent,
where the mantissa (for non-zero numbers) is guaranteed to lie in the
range [1 ..  10).  In both cases, the mantissa is shifted left or right
(and the exponent adjusted to compensate) in order to satisfy these
constraints.

   Positive unpacking modes are treated differently than for ‘v p’.  A
mode of 1 is much like plain ‘v u’ with no prefix argument, except that
in addition to the components of the input object, a suitable packing
mode to re-pack the object is also pushed.  Thus, ‘C-u 1 v u’ followed
by ‘v p’ will re-build the original object.

   A mode of 2 unpacks two levels of the object; the resulting
re-packing mode will be a vector of length 2.  This might be used to
unpack a matrix, say, or a vector of error forms.  Higher unpacking
modes unpack the input even more deeply.

   There are two algebraic functions analogous to ‘v u’.  The
‘unpack(MODE, ITEM)’ function unpacks the ITEM using the given MODE,
returning the result as a vector of components.  Here the MODE must be
an integer, not a vector.  For example, ‘unpack(-4, a +/- b)’ returns
‘[a, b]’, as does ‘unpack(1, a +/- b)’.

   The ‘unpackt’ function is like ‘unpack’ but instead of returning a
simple vector of items, it returns a vector of two things: The mode, and
the vector of items.  For example, ‘unpackt(1, 2:3 +/- 1:4)’ returns
‘[-4, [2:3, 1:4]]’, and ‘unpackt(2, 2:3 +/- 1:4)’ returns ‘[[-4, -10],
[2, 3, 1, 4]]’.  The identity for re-building the original object is
‘apply(pack, unpackt(N, X)) = X’.  (The ‘apply’ function builds a
function call given the function name and a vector of arguments.)

   Subscript notation is a useful way to extract a particular part of an
object.  For example, to get the numerator of a rational number, you can
use ‘unpack(-10, X)_1’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Building Vectors,  Next: Extracting Elements,  Prev: Packing and Unpacking,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.2 Building Vectors
=====================

Vectors and matrices can be added, subtracted, multiplied, and divided;
*note Basic Arithmetic::.

   The ‘|’ (‘calc-concat’) [‘vconcat’] command “concatenates” two
vectors into one.  For example, after ‘[ 1 , 2 ] [ 3 , 4 ] |’, the stack
will contain the single vector ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’.  If the arguments are
matrices, the rows of the first matrix are concatenated with the rows of
the second.  (In other words, two matrices are just two vectors of
row-vectors as far as ‘|’ is concerned.)

   If either argument to ‘|’ is a scalar (a non-vector), it is treated
like a one-element vector for purposes of concatenation: ‘1 [ 2 , 3 ] |’
produces the vector ‘[1, 2, 3]’.  Likewise, if one argument is a matrix
and the other is a plain vector, the vector is treated as a one-row
matrix.

   The ‘H |’ (‘calc-append’) [‘append’] command concatenates two vectors
without any special cases.  Both inputs must be vectors.  Whether or not
they are matrices is not taken into account.  If either argument is a
scalar, the ‘append’ function is left in symbolic form.  See also ‘cons’
and ‘rcons’ below.

   The ‘I |’ and ‘H I |’ commands are similar, but they use their two
stack arguments in the opposite order.  Thus ‘I |’ is equivalent to
‘<TAB> |’, but possibly more convenient and also a bit faster.

   The ‘v d’ (‘calc-diag’) [‘diag’] function builds a diagonal square
matrix.  The optional numeric prefix gives the number of rows and
columns in the matrix.  If the value at the top of the stack is a
vector, the elements of the vector are used as the diagonal elements;
the prefix, if specified, must match the size of the vector.  If the
value on the stack is a scalar, it is used for each element on the
diagonal, and the prefix argument is required.

   To build a constant square matrix, e.g., a 3x3 matrix filled with
ones, use ‘0 M-3 v d 1 +’, i.e., build a zero matrix first and then add
a constant value to that matrix.  (Another alternative would be to use
‘v b’ and ‘v a’; see below.)

   The ‘v i’ (‘calc-ident’) [‘idn’] function builds an identity matrix
of the specified size.  It is a convenient form of ‘v d’ where the
diagonal element is always one.  If no prefix argument is given, this
command prompts for one.

   In algebraic notation, ‘idn(a,n)’ acts much like ‘diag(a,n)’, except
that ‘a’ is required to be a scalar (non-vector) quantity.  If ‘n’ is
omitted, ‘idn(a)’ represents ‘a’ times an identity matrix of unknown
size.  Calc can operate algebraically on such generic identity matrices,
and if one is combined with a matrix whose size is known, it is
converted automatically to an identity matrix of a suitable matching
size.  The ‘v i’ command with an argument of zero creates a generic
identity matrix, ‘idn(1)’.  Note that in dimensioned Matrix mode (*note
Matrix Mode::), generic identity matrices are immediately expanded to
the current default dimensions.

   The ‘v x’ (‘calc-index’) [‘index’] function builds a vector of
consecutive integers from 1 to N, where N is the numeric prefix
argument.  If you do not provide a prefix argument, you will be prompted
to enter a suitable number.  If N is negative, the result is a vector of
negative integers from N to -1.

   With a prefix argument of just ‘C-u’, the ‘v x’ command takes three
values from the stack: N, START, and INCR (with INCR at top-of-stack).
Counting starts at START and increases by INCR for successive vector
elements.  If START or N is in floating-point format, the resulting
vector elements will also be floats.  Note that START and INCR may in
fact be any kind of numbers or formulas.

   When START and INCR are specified, a negative N has a different
interpretation: It causes a geometric instead of arithmetic sequence to
be generated.  For example, ‘index(-3, a, b)’ produces ‘[a, a b, a
b^2]’.  If you omit INCR in the algebraic form, ‘index(N, START)’, the
default value for INCR is one for positive N or two for negative N.

   The ‘v b’ (‘calc-build-vector’) [‘cvec’] function builds a vector of
N copies of the value on the top of the stack, where N is the numeric
prefix argument.  In algebraic formulas, ‘cvec(x,n,m)’ can also be used
to build an N-by-M matrix of copies of X.  (Interactively, just use ‘v
b’ twice: once to build a row, then again to build a matrix of copies of
that row.)

   The ‘v h’ (‘calc-head’) [‘head’] function returns the first element
of a vector.  The ‘I v h’ (‘calc-tail’) [‘tail’] function returns the
vector with its first element removed.  In both cases, the argument must
be a non-empty vector.

   The ‘v k’ (‘calc-cons’) [‘cons’] function takes a value H and a
vector T from the stack, and produces the vector whose head is H and
whose tail is T.  This is similar to ‘|’, except if H is itself a
vector, ‘|’ will concatenate the two vectors whereas ‘cons’ will insert
H at the front of the vector T.

   Each of these three functions also accepts the Hyperbolic flag
[‘rhead’, ‘rtail’, ‘rcons’] in which case T instead represents the
_last_ single element of the vector, with H representing the remainder
of the vector.  Thus the vector ‘[a, b, c, d] = cons(a, [b, c, d]) =
rcons([a, b, c], d)’.  Also, ‘head([a, b, c, d]) = a’, ‘tail([a, b, c,
d]) = [b, c, d]’, ‘rhead([a, b, c, d]) = [a, b, c]’, and ‘rtail([a, b,
c, d]) = d’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Extracting Elements,  Next: Manipulating Vectors,  Prev: Building Vectors,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.3 Extracting Vector Elements
===============================

The ‘v r’ (‘calc-mrow’) [‘mrow’] command extracts one row of the matrix
on the top of the stack, or one element of the plain vector on the top
of the stack.  The row or element is specified by the numeric prefix
argument; the default is to prompt for the row or element number.  The
matrix or vector is replaced by the specified row or element in the form
of a vector or scalar, respectively.

   With a prefix argument of ‘C-u’ only, ‘v r’ takes the index of the
element or row from the top of the stack, and the vector or matrix from
the second-to-top position.  If the index is itself a vector of
integers, the result is a vector of the corresponding elements of the
input vector, or a matrix of the corresponding rows of the input matrix.
This command can be used to obtain any permutation of a vector.

   With ‘C-u’, if the index is an interval form with integer components,
it is interpreted as a range of indices and the corresponding subvector
or submatrix is returned.

   Subscript notation in algebraic formulas (‘a_b’) stands for the Calc
function ‘subscr’, which is synonymous with ‘mrow’.  Thus, ‘[x, y, z]_k’
produces ‘x’, ‘y’, or ‘z’ if ‘k’ is one, two, or three, respectively.  A
double subscript (‘M_i_j’, equivalent to ‘subscr(subscr(M, i), j)’) will
access the element at row ‘i’, column ‘j’ of a matrix.  The ‘a _’
(‘calc-subscript’) command creates a subscript formula ‘a_b’ out of two
stack entries.  (It is on the ‘a’ “algebra” prefix because subscripted
variables are often used purely as an algebraic notation.)

   Given a negative prefix argument, ‘v r’ instead deletes one row or
element from the matrix or vector on the top of the stack.  Thus ‘C-u 2
v r’ replaces a matrix with its second row, but ‘C-u -2 v r’ replaces
the matrix with the same matrix with its second row removed.  In
algebraic form this function is called ‘mrrow’.

   Given a prefix argument of zero, ‘v r’ extracts the diagonal elements
of a square matrix in the form of a vector.  In algebraic form this
function is called ‘getdiag’.

   The ‘v c’ (‘calc-mcol’) [‘mcol’ or ‘mrcol’] command is the analogous
operation on columns of a matrix.  Given a plain vector it extracts (or
removes) one element, just like ‘v r’.  If the index in ‘C-u v c’ is an
interval or vector and the argument is a matrix, the result is a
submatrix with only the specified columns retained (and possibly
permuted in the case of a vector index).

   To extract a matrix element at a given row and column, use ‘v r’ to
extract the row as a vector, then ‘v c’ to extract the column element
from that vector.  In algebraic formulas, it is often more convenient to
use subscript notation: ‘m_i_j’ gives row ‘i’, column ‘j’ of matrix ‘m’.

   The ‘v s’ (‘calc-subvector’) [‘subvec’] command extracts a subvector
of a vector.  The arguments are the vector, the starting index, and the
ending index, with the ending index in the top-of-stack position.  The
starting index indicates the first element of the vector to take.  The
ending index indicates the first element _past_ the range to be taken.
Thus, ‘subvec([a, b, c, d, e], 2, 4)’ produces the subvector ‘[b, c]’.
You could get the same result using ‘mrow([a, b, c, d, e], [2 .. 4))’.

   If either the start or the end index is zero or negative, it is
interpreted as relative to the end of the vector.  Thus ‘subvec([a, b,
c, d, e], 2, -2)’ also produces ‘[b, c]’.  In the algebraic form, the
end index can be omitted in which case it is taken as zero, i.e.,
elements from the starting element to the end of the vector are used.
The infinity symbol, ‘inf’, also has this effect when used as the ending
index.

   With the Inverse flag, ‘I v s’ [‘rsubvec’] removes a subvector from a
vector.  The arguments are interpreted the same as for the normal ‘v s’
command.  Thus, ‘rsubvec([a, b, c, d, e], 2, 4)’ produces ‘[a, d, e]’.
It is always true that ‘subvec’ and ‘rsubvec’ return complementary parts
of the input vector.

   *Note Selecting Subformulas::, for an alternative way to operate on
vectors one element at a time.


File: calc.info,  Node: Manipulating Vectors,  Next: Vector and Matrix Arithmetic,  Prev: Extracting Elements,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.4 Manipulating Vectors
=========================

The ‘v l’ (‘calc-vlength’) [‘vlen’] command computes the length of a
vector.  The length of a non-vector is considered to be zero.  Note that
matrices are just vectors of vectors for the purposes of this command.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H v l’ [‘mdims’] computes a vector of the
dimensions of a vector, matrix, or higher-order object.  For example,
‘mdims([[a,b,c],[d,e,f]])’ returns ‘[2, 3]’ since its argument is a 2x3
matrix.

   The ‘v f’ (‘calc-vector-find’) [‘find’] command searches along a
vector for the first element equal to a given target.  The target is on
the top of the stack; the vector is in the second-to-top position.  If a
match is found, the result is the index of the matching element.
Otherwise, the result is zero.  The numeric prefix argument, if given,
allows you to select any starting index for the search.

   The ‘v a’ (‘calc-arrange-vector’) [‘arrange’] command rearranges a
vector to have a certain number of columns and rows.  The numeric prefix
argument specifies the number of columns; if you do not provide an
argument, you will be prompted for the number of columns.  The vector or
matrix on the top of the stack is “flattened” into a plain vector.  If
the number of columns is nonzero, this vector is then formed into a
matrix by taking successive groups of N elements.  If the number of
columns does not evenly divide the number of elements in the vector, the
last row will be short and the result will not be suitable for use as a
matrix.  For example, with the matrix ‘[[1, 2], [3, 4]]’ on the stack,
‘v a 4’ produces ‘[[1, 2, 3, 4]]’ (a 1x4 matrix), ‘v a 1’ produces
‘[[1], [2], [3], [4]]’ (a 4x1 matrix), ‘v a 2’ produces ‘[[1, 2], [3,
4]]’ (the original 2x2 matrix), ‘v a 3’ produces ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4]]’ (not
a matrix), and ‘v a 0’ produces the flattened list ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’.

   The ‘V S’ (‘calc-sort’) [‘sort’] command sorts the elements of a
vector into increasing order.  Real numbers, real infinities, and
constant interval forms come first in this ordering; next come other
kinds of numbers, then variables (in alphabetical order), then finally
come formulas and other kinds of objects; these are sorted according to
a kind of lexicographic ordering with the useful property that one
vector is less or greater than another if the first corresponding
unequal elements are less or greater, respectively.  Since quoted
strings are stored by Calc internally as vectors of ASCII character
codes (*note Strings::), this means vectors of strings are also sorted
into alphabetical order by this command.

   The ‘I V S’ [‘rsort’] command sorts a vector into decreasing order.

   The ‘V G’ (‘calc-grade’) [‘grade’, ‘rgrade’] command produces an
index table or permutation vector which, if applied to the input vector
(as the index of ‘C-u v r’, say), would sort the vector.  A permutation
vector is just a vector of integers from 1 to N, where each integer
occurs exactly once.  One application of this is to sort a matrix of
data rows using one column as the sort key; extract that column, grade
it with ‘V G’, then use the result to reorder the original matrix with
‘C-u v r’.  Another interesting property of the ‘V G’ command is that,
if the input is itself a permutation vector, the result will be the
inverse of the permutation.  The inverse of an index table is a rank
table, whose Kth element says where the Kth original vector element will
rest when the vector is sorted.  To get a rank table, just use ‘V G V
G’.

   With the Inverse flag, ‘I V G’ produces an index table that would
sort the input into decreasing order.  Note that ‘V S’ and ‘V G’ use a
“stable” sorting algorithm, i.e., any two elements which are equal will
not be moved out of their original order.  Generally there is no way to
tell with ‘V S’, since two elements which are equal look the same, but
with ‘V G’ this can be an important issue.  In the matrix-of-rows
example, suppose you have names and telephone numbers as two columns and
you wish to sort by phone number primarily, and by name when the numbers
are equal.  You can sort the data matrix by names first, and then again
by phone numbers.  Because the sort is stable, any two rows with equal
phone numbers will remain sorted by name even after the second sort.

   The ‘V H’ (‘calc-histogram’) [‘histogram’] command builds a histogram
of a vector of numbers.  Vector elements are assumed to be integers or
real numbers in the range [0..N) for some “number of bins” N, which is
the numeric prefix argument given to the command.  The result is a
vector of N counts of how many times each value appeared in the original
vector.  Non-integers in the input are rounded down to integers.  Any
vector elements outside the specified range are ignored.  (You can tell
if elements have been ignored by noting that the counts in the result
vector don’t add up to the length of the input vector.)

   If no prefix is given, then you will be prompted for a vector which
will be used to determine the bins.  (If a positive integer is given at
this prompt, it will be still treated as if it were given as a prefix.)
Each bin will consist of the interval of numbers closest to the
corresponding number of this new vector; if the vector ‘[a, b, c, ...]’
is entered at the prompt, the bins will be ‘(-inf, (a+b)/2]’, ‘((a+b)/2,
(b+c)/2]’, etc.  The result of this command will be a vector counting
how many elements of the original vector are in each bin.

   The result will then be a vector with the same length as this new
vector; each element of the new vector will be replaced by the number of
elements of the original vector which are closest to it.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H V H’ pulls two vectors from the stack.
The second-to-top vector is the list of numbers as before.  The top
vector is an equal-sized list of “weights” to attach to the elements of
the data vector.  For example, if the first data element is 4.2 and the
first weight is 10, then 10 will be added to bin 4 of the result vector.
Without the hyperbolic flag, every element has a weight of one.

   The ‘v t’ (‘calc-transpose’) [‘trn’] command computes the transpose
of the matrix at the top of the stack.  If the argument is a plain
vector, it is treated as a row vector and transposed into a one-column
matrix.

   The ‘v v’ (‘calc-reverse-vector’) [‘rev’] command reverses a vector
end-for-end.  Given a matrix, it reverses the order of the rows.  (To
reverse the columns instead, just use ‘v t v v v t’.  The same principle
can be used to apply other vector commands to the columns of a matrix.)

   The ‘v m’ (‘calc-mask-vector’) [‘vmask’] command uses one vector as a
mask to extract elements of another vector.  The mask is in the
second-to-top position; the target vector is on the top of the stack.
These vectors must have the same length.  The result is the same as the
target vector, but with all elements which correspond to zeros in the
mask vector deleted.  Thus, for example, ‘vmask([1, 0, 1, 0, 1], [a, b,
c, d, e])’ produces ‘[a, c, e]’.  *Note Logical Operations::.

   The ‘v e’ (‘calc-expand-vector’) [‘vexp’] command expands a vector
according to another mask vector.  The result is a vector the same
length as the mask, but with nonzero elements replaced by successive
elements from the target vector.  The length of the target vector is
normally the number of nonzero elements in the mask.  If the target
vector is longer, its last few elements are lost.  If the target vector
is shorter, the last few nonzero mask elements are left unreplaced in
the result.  Thus ‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 0, 7], [a, b])’ produces ‘[a, 0, b, 0,
7]’.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H v e’ takes a filler value from the top
of the stack; the mask and target vectors come from the third and second
elements of the stack.  This filler is used where the mask is zero:
‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 0, 7], [a, b], z)’ produces ‘[a, z, c, z, 7]’.  If the
filler value is itself a vector, then successive values are taken from
it, so that the effect is to interleave two vectors according to the
mask: ‘vexp([2, 0, 3, 7, 0, 0], [a, b], [x, y])’ produces ‘[a, x, b, 7,
y, 0]’.

   Another variation on the masking idea is to combine ‘[a, b, c, d, e]’
with the mask ‘[1, 0, 1, 0, 1]’ to produce ‘[a, 0, c, 0, e]’.  You can
accomplish this with ‘V M a &’, mapping the logical “and” operation
across the two vectors.  *Note Logical Operations::.  Note that the ‘?
:’ operation also discussed there allows other types of masking using
vectors.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector and Matrix Arithmetic,  Next: Set Operations,  Prev: Manipulating Vectors,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.5 Vector and Matrix Arithmetic
=================================

Basic arithmetic operations like addition and multiplication are defined
for vectors and matrices as well as for numbers.  Division of matrices,
in the sense of multiplying by the inverse, is supported.  (Division by
a matrix actually uses LU-decomposition for greater accuracy and speed.)
*Note Basic Arithmetic::.

   The following functions are applied element-wise if their arguments
are vectors or matrices: ‘change-sign’, ‘conj’, ‘arg’, ‘re’, ‘im’,
‘polar’, ‘rect’, ‘clean’, ‘float’, ‘frac’.  *Note Function Index::.

   The ‘V J’ (‘calc-conj-transpose’) [‘ctrn’] command computes the
conjugate transpose of its argument, i.e., ‘conj(trn(x))’.

   The ‘A’ (‘calc-abs’) [‘abs’] command computes the Frobenius norm of a
vector or matrix argument.  This is the square root of the sum of the
squares of the absolute values of the elements of the vector or matrix.
If the vector is interpreted as a point in two- or three-dimensional
space, this is the distance from that point to the origin.

   The ‘v n’ (‘calc-rnorm’) [‘rnorm’] command computes the infinity-norm
of a vector, or the row norm of a matrix.  For a plain vector, this is
the maximum of the absolute values of the elements.  For a matrix, this
is the maximum of the row-absolute-value-sums, i.e., of the sums of the
absolute values of the elements along the various rows.

   The ‘V N’ (‘calc-cnorm’) [‘cnorm’] command computes the one-norm of a
vector, or column norm of a matrix.  For a plain vector, this is the sum
of the absolute values of the elements.  For a matrix, this is the
maximum of the column-absolute-value-sums.  General ‘k’-norms for ‘k’
other than one or infinity are not provided.  However, the 2-norm (or
Frobenius norm) is provided for vectors by the ‘A’ (‘calc-abs’) command.

   The ‘V C’ (‘calc-cross’) [‘cross’] command computes the right-handed
cross product of two vectors, each of which must have exactly three
elements.

   The ‘&’ (‘calc-inv’) [‘inv’] command computes the inverse of a square
matrix.  If the matrix is singular, the inverse operation is left in
symbolic form.  Matrix inverses are recorded so that once an inverse (or
determinant) of a particular matrix has been computed, the inverse and
determinant of the matrix can be recomputed quickly in the future.

   If the argument to ‘&’ is a plain number ‘x’, this command simply
computes ‘1/x’.  This is okay, because the ‘/’ operator also does a
matrix inversion when dividing one by a matrix.

   The ‘V D’ (‘calc-mdet’) [‘det’] command computes the determinant of a
square matrix.

   The ‘V L’ (‘calc-mlud’) [‘lud’] command computes the LU decomposition
of a matrix.  The result is a list of three matrices which, when
multiplied together left-to-right, form the original matrix.  The first
is a permutation matrix that arises from pivoting in the algorithm, the
second is lower-triangular with ones on the diagonal, and the third is
upper-triangular.

   The ‘V T’ (‘calc-mtrace’) [‘tr’] command computes the trace of a
square matrix.  This is defined as the sum of the diagonal elements of
the matrix.

   The ‘V K’ (‘calc-kron’) [‘kron’] command computes the Kronecker
product of two matrices.


File: calc.info,  Node: Set Operations,  Next: Statistical Operations,  Prev: Vector and Matrix Arithmetic,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.6 Set Operations using Vectors
=================================

Calc includes several commands which interpret vectors as “sets” of
objects.  A set is a collection of objects; any given object can appear
only once in the set.  Calc stores sets as vectors of objects in sorted
order.  Objects in a Calc set can be any of the usual things, such as
numbers, variables, or formulas.  Two set elements are considered equal
if they are identical, except that numerically equal numbers like the
integer 4 and the float 4.0 are considered equal even though they are
not “identical.” Variables are treated like plain symbols without
attached values by the set operations; subtracting the set ‘[b]’ from
‘[a, b]’ always yields the set ‘[a]’ even though if the variables ‘a’
and ‘b’ both equaled 17, you might expect the answer ‘[]’.

   If a set contains interval forms, then it is assumed to be a set of
real numbers.  In this case, all set operations require the elements of
the set to be only things that are allowed in intervals: Real numbers,
plus and minus infinity, HMS forms, and date forms.  If there are
variables or other non-real objects present in a real set, all set
operations on it will be left in unevaluated form.

   If the input to a set operation is a plain number or interval form A,
it is treated like the one-element vector ‘[A]’.  The result is always a
vector, except that if the set consists of a single interval, the
interval itself is returned instead.

   *Note Logical Operations::, for the ‘in’ function which tests if a
certain value is a member of a given set.  To test if the set ‘A’ is a
subset of the set ‘B’, use ‘vdiff(A, B) = []’.

   The ‘V +’ (‘calc-remove-duplicates’) [‘rdup’] command converts an
arbitrary vector into set notation.  It works by sorting the vector as
if by ‘V S’, then removing duplicates.  (For example, ‘[a, 5, 4, a,
4.0]’ is sorted to ‘[4, 4.0, 5, a, a]’ and then reduced to ‘[4, 5, a]’).
Overlapping intervals are merged as necessary.  You rarely need to use
‘V +’ explicitly, since all the other set-based commands apply ‘V +’ to
their inputs before using them.

   The ‘V V’ (‘calc-set-union’) [‘vunion’] command computes the union of
two sets.  An object is in the union of two sets if and only if it is in
either (or both) of the input sets.  (You could accomplish the same
thing by concatenating the sets with ‘|’, then using ‘V +’.)

   The ‘V ^’ (‘calc-set-intersect’) [‘vint’] command computes the
intersection of two sets.  An object is in the intersection if and only
if it is in both of the input sets.  Thus if the input sets are
disjoint, i.e., if they share no common elements, the result will be the
empty vector ‘[]’.  Note that the characters ‘V’ and ‘^’ were chosen to
be close to the conventional mathematical notation for set union and
intersection.

   The ‘V -’ (‘calc-set-difference’) [‘vdiff’] command computes the
difference between two sets.  An object is in the difference ‘A - B’ if
and only if it is in ‘A’ but not in ‘B’.  Thus subtracting ‘[y,z]’ from
a set will remove the elements ‘y’ and ‘z’ if they are present.  You can
also think of this as a general “set complement” operator; if ‘A’ is the
set of all possible values, then ‘A - B’ is the “complement” of ‘B’.
Obviously this is only practical if the set of all possible values in
your problem is small enough to list in a Calc vector (or simple enough
to express in a few intervals).

   The ‘V X’ (‘calc-set-xor’) [‘vxor’] command computes the
“exclusive-or,” or “symmetric difference” of two sets.  An object is in
the symmetric difference of two sets if and only if it is in one, but
_not_ both, of the sets.  Objects that occur in both sets “cancel out.”

   The ‘V ~’ (‘calc-set-complement’) [‘vcompl’] command computes the
complement of a set with respect to the real numbers.  Thus ‘vcompl(x)’
is equivalent to ‘vdiff([-inf .. inf], x)’.  For example, ‘vcompl([2, (3
.. 4]])’ evaluates to ‘[[-inf .. 2), (2 .. 3], (4 .. inf]]’.

   The ‘V F’ (‘calc-set-floor’) [‘vfloor’] command reinterprets a set as
a set of integers.  Any non-integer values, and intervals that do not
enclose any integers, are removed.  Open intervals are converted to
equivalent closed intervals.  Successive integers are converted into
intervals of integers.  For example, the complement of the set ‘[2, 6,
7, 8]’ is messy, but if you wanted the complement with respect to the
set of integers you could type ‘V ~ V F’ to get ‘[[-inf .. 1], [3 .. 5],
[9 .. inf]]’.

   The ‘V E’ (‘calc-set-enumerate’) [‘venum’] command converts a set of
integers into an explicit vector.  Intervals in the set are expanded out
to lists of all integers encompassed by the intervals.  This only works
for finite sets (i.e., sets which do not involve ‘-inf’ or ‘inf’).

   The ‘V :’ (‘calc-set-span’) [‘vspan’] command converts any set of
reals into an interval form that encompasses all its elements.  The
lower limit will be the smallest element in the set; the upper limit
will be the largest element.  For an empty set, ‘vspan([])’ returns the
empty interval ‘[0 .. 0)’.

   The ‘V #’ (‘calc-set-cardinality’) [‘vcard’] command counts the
number of integers in a set.  The result is the length of the vector
that would be produced by ‘V E’, although the computation is much more
efficient than actually producing that vector.

   Another representation for sets that may be more appropriate in some
cases is binary numbers.  If you are dealing with sets of integers in
the range 0 to 49, you can use a 50-bit binary number where a particular
bit is 1 if the corresponding element is in the set.  *Note Binary
Functions::, for a list of commands that operate on binary numbers.
Note that many of the above set operations have direct equivalents in
binary arithmetic: ‘b o’ (‘calc-or’), ‘b a’ (‘calc-and’), ‘b d’
(‘calc-diff’), ‘b x’ (‘calc-xor’), and ‘b n’ (‘calc-not’), respectively.
You can use whatever representation for sets is most convenient to you.

   The ‘b u’ (‘calc-unpack-bits’) [‘vunpack’] command converts an
integer that represents a set in binary into a set in vector/interval
notation.  For example, ‘vunpack(67)’ returns ‘[[0 .. 1], 6]’.  If the
input is negative, the set it represents is semi-infinite: ‘vunpack(-4)
= [2 .. inf)’.  Use ‘V E’ afterwards to expand intervals to individual
values if you wish.  Note that this command uses the ‘b’ (binary) prefix
key.

   The ‘b p’ (‘calc-pack-bits’) [‘vpack’] command converts the other
way, from a vector or interval representing a set of nonnegative
integers into a binary integer describing the same set.  The set may
include positive infinity, but must not include any negative numbers.
The input is interpreted as a set of integers in the sense of ‘V F’
(‘vfloor’).  Beware that a simple input like ‘[100]’ can result in a
huge integer representation (‘2^100’, a 31-digit integer, in this case).


File: calc.info,  Node: Statistical Operations,  Next: Reducing and Mapping,  Prev: Set Operations,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.7 Statistical Operations on Vectors
======================================

The commands in this section take vectors as arguments and compute
various statistical measures on the data stored in the vectors.  The
references used in the definitions of these functions are Bevington’s
_Data Reduction and Error Analysis for the Physical Sciences_, and
_Numerical Recipes_ by Press, Flannery, Teukolsky and Vetterling.

   The statistical commands use the ‘u’ prefix key followed by a shifted
letter or other character.

   *Note Manipulating Vectors::, for a description of ‘V H’
(‘calc-histogram’).

   *Note Curve Fitting::, for the ‘a F’ command for doing least-squares
fits to statistical data.

   *Note Probability Distribution Functions::, for several common
probability distribution functions.

* Menu:

* Single-Variable Statistics::
* Paired-Sample Statistics::


File: calc.info,  Node: Single-Variable Statistics,  Next: Paired-Sample Statistics,  Prev: Statistical Operations,  Up: Statistical Operations

10.7.1 Single-Variable Statistics
---------------------------------

These functions do various statistical computations on single vectors.
Given a numeric prefix argument, they actually pop N objects from the
stack and combine them into a data vector.  Each object may be either a
number or a vector; if a vector, any sub-vectors inside it are
“flattened” as if by ‘v a 0’; *note Manipulating Vectors::.  By default
one object is popped, which (in order to be useful) is usually a vector.

   If an argument is a variable name, and the value stored in that
variable is a vector, then the stored vector is used.  This method has
the advantage that if your data vector is large, you can avoid the slow
process of manipulating it directly on the stack.

   These functions are left in symbolic form if any of their arguments
are not numbers or vectors, e.g., if an argument is a formula, or a
non-vector variable.  However, formulas embedded within vector arguments
are accepted; the result is a symbolic representation of the
computation, based on the assumption that the formula does not itself
represent a vector.  All varieties of numbers such as error forms and
interval forms are acceptable.

   Some of the functions in this section also accept a single error form
or interval as an argument.  They then describe a property of the normal
or uniform (respectively) statistical distribution described by the
argument.  The arguments are interpreted in the same way as the M
argument of the random number function ‘k r’.  In particular, an
interval with integer limits is considered an integer distribution, so
that ‘[2 .. 6)’ is the same as ‘[2 .. 5]’.  An interval with at least
one floating-point limit is a continuous distribution: ‘[2.0 .. 6.0)’ is
_not_ the same as ‘[2.0 .. 5.0]’!

   The ‘u #’ (‘calc-vector-count’) [‘vcount’] command computes the
number of data values represented by the inputs.  For example,
‘vcount(1, [2, 3], [[4, 5], [], x, y])’ returns 7.  If the argument is a
single vector with no sub-vectors, this simply computes the length of
the vector.

   The ‘u +’ (‘calc-vector-sum’) [‘vsum’] command computes the sum of
the data values.  The ‘u *’ (‘calc-vector-prod’) [‘vprod’] command
computes the product of the data values.  If the input is a single flat
vector, these are the same as ‘V R +’ and ‘V R *’ (*note Reducing and
Mapping::).

   The ‘u X’ (‘calc-vector-max’) [‘vmax’] command computes the maximum
of the data values, and the ‘u N’ (‘calc-vector-min’) [‘vmin’] command
computes the minimum.  If the argument is an interval, this finds the
minimum or maximum value in the interval.  (Note that ‘vmax([2..6)) = 5’
as described above.)  If the argument is an error form, this returns
plus or minus infinity.

   The ‘u M’ (‘calc-vector-mean’) [‘vmean’] command computes the average
(arithmetic mean) of the data values.  If the inputs are error forms ‘x
+/- s’, this is the weighted mean of the ‘x’ values with weights ‘1 /
s^2’.  If the inputs are not error forms, this is simply the sum of the
values divided by the count of the values.

   Note that a plain number can be considered an error form with error
‘s = 0’.  If the input to ‘u M’ is a mixture of plain numbers and error
forms, the result is the mean of the plain numbers, ignoring all values
with non-zero errors.  (By the above definitions it’s clear that a plain
number effectively has an infinite weight, next to which an error form
with a finite weight is completely negligible.)

   This function also works for distributions (error forms or
intervals).  The mean of an error form ‘A +/- B’ is simply ‘a’.  The
mean of an interval is the mean of the minimum and maximum values of the
interval.

   The ‘I u M’ (‘calc-vector-mean-error’) [‘vmeane’] command computes
the mean of the data points expressed as an error form.  This includes
the estimated error associated with the mean.  If the inputs are error
forms, the error is the square root of the reciprocal of the sum of the
reciprocals of the squares of the input errors.  (I.e., the variance is
the reciprocal of the sum of the reciprocals of the variances.)  If the
inputs are plain numbers, the error is equal to the standard deviation
of the values divided by the square root of the number of values.  (This
works out to be equivalent to calculating the standard deviation and
then assuming each value’s error is equal to this standard deviation.)

   The ‘H u M’ (‘calc-vector-median’) [‘vmedian’] command computes the
median of the data values.  The values are first sorted into numerical
order; the median is the middle value after sorting.  (If the number of
data values is even, the median is taken to be the average of the two
middle values.)  The median function is different from the other
functions in this section in that the arguments must all be real
numbers; variables are not accepted even when nested inside vectors.
(Otherwise it is not possible to sort the data values.)  If any of the
input values are error forms, their error parts are ignored.

   The median function also accepts distributions.  For both normal
(error form) and uniform (interval) distributions, the median is the
same as the mean.

   The ‘H I u M’ (‘calc-vector-harmonic-mean’) [‘vhmean’] command
computes the harmonic mean of the data values.  This is defined as the
reciprocal of the arithmetic mean of the reciprocals of the values.

   The ‘u G’ (‘calc-vector-geometric-mean’) [‘vgmean’] command computes
the geometric mean of the data values.  This is the Nth root of the
product of the values.  This is also equal to the ‘exp’ of the
arithmetic mean of the logarithms of the data values.

   The ‘H u G’ [‘agmean’] command computes the “arithmetic-geometric
mean” of two numbers taken from the stack.  This is computed by
replacing the two numbers with their arithmetic mean and geometric mean,
then repeating until the two values converge.

   The ‘u R’ (‘calc-vector-rms’) [‘rms’] command computes the RMS
(root-mean-square) of the data values.  As its name suggests, this is
the square root of the mean of the squares of the data values.

   The ‘u S’ (‘calc-vector-sdev’) [‘vsdev’] command computes the
standard deviation of the data values.  If the values are error forms,
the errors are used as weights just as for ‘u M’.  This is the _sample_
standard deviation, whose value is the square root of the sum of the
squares of the differences between the values and the mean of the ‘N’
values, divided by ‘N-1’.

   This function also applies to distributions.  The standard deviation
of a single error form is simply the error part.  The standard deviation
of a continuous interval happens to equal the difference between the
limits, divided by ‘sqrt(12)’.  The standard deviation of an integer
interval is the same as the standard deviation of a vector of those
integers.

   The ‘I u S’ (‘calc-vector-pop-sdev’) [‘vpsdev’] command computes the
_population_ standard deviation.  It is defined by the same formula as
above but dividing by ‘N’ instead of by ‘N-1’.  The population standard
deviation is used when the input represents the entire set of data
values in the distribution; the sample standard deviation is used when
the input represents a sample of the set of all data values, so that the
mean computed from the input is itself only an estimate of the true
mean.

   For error forms and continuous intervals, ‘vpsdev’ works exactly like
‘vsdev’.  For integer intervals, it computes the population standard
deviation of the equivalent vector of integers.

   The ‘H u S’ (‘calc-vector-variance’) [‘vvar’] and ‘H I u S’
(‘calc-vector-pop-variance’) [‘vpvar’] commands compute the variance of
the data values.  The variance is the square of the standard deviation,
i.e., the sum of the squares of the deviations of the data values from
the mean.  (This definition also applies when the argument is a
distribution.)

   The ‘vflat’ algebraic function returns a vector of its arguments,
interpreted in the same way as the other functions in this section.  For
example, ‘vflat(1, [2, [3, 4]], 5)’ returns ‘[1, 2, 3, 4, 5]’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Paired-Sample Statistics,  Prev: Single-Variable Statistics,  Up: Statistical Operations

10.7.2 Paired-Sample Statistics
-------------------------------

The functions in this section take two arguments, which must be vectors
of equal size.  The vectors are each flattened in the same way as by the
single-variable statistical functions.  Given a numeric prefix argument
of 1, these functions instead take one object from the stack, which must
be an Nx2 matrix of data values.  Once again, variable names can be used
in place of actual vectors and matrices.

   The ‘u C’ (‘calc-vector-covariance’) [‘vcov’] command computes the
sample covariance of two vectors.  The covariance of vectors X and Y is
the sum of the products of the differences between the elements of X and
the mean of X times the differences between the corresponding elements
of Y and the mean of Y, all divided by ‘N-1’.  Note that the variance of
a vector is just the covariance of the vector with itself.  Once again,
if the inputs are error forms the errors are used as weight factors.  If
both X and Y are composed of error forms, the error for a given data
point is taken as the square root of the sum of the squares of the two
input errors.

   The ‘I u C’ (‘calc-vector-pop-covariance’) [‘vpcov’] command computes
the population covariance, which is the same as the sample covariance
computed by ‘u C’ except dividing by ‘N’ instead of ‘N-1’.

   The ‘H u C’ (‘calc-vector-correlation’) [‘vcorr’] command computes
the linear correlation coefficient of two vectors.  This is defined by
the covariance of the vectors divided by the product of their standard
deviations.  (There is no difference between sample or population
statistics here.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Reducing and Mapping,  Next: Vector and Matrix Formats,  Prev: Statistical Operations,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.8 Reducing and Mapping Vectors
=================================

The commands in this section allow for more general operations on the
elements of vectors.

   The simplest of these operations is ‘V A’ (‘calc-apply’) [‘apply’],
which applies a given operator to the elements of a vector.  For
example, applying the hypothetical function ‘f’ to the vector
‘[1, 2, 3]’ would produce the function call ‘f(1, 2, 3)’.  Applying the
‘+’ function to the vector ‘[a, b]’ gives ‘a + b’.  Applying ‘+’ to the
vector ‘[a, b, c]’ is an error, since the ‘+’ function expects exactly
two arguments.

   While ‘V A’ is useful in some cases, you will usually find that
either ‘V R’ or ‘V M’, described below, is closer to what you want.

* Menu:

* Specifying Operators::
* Mapping::
* Reducing::
* Nesting and Fixed Points::
* Generalized Products::


File: calc.info,  Node: Specifying Operators,  Next: Mapping,  Prev: Reducing and Mapping,  Up: Reducing and Mapping

10.8.1 Specifying Operators
---------------------------

Commands in this section (like ‘V A’) prompt you to press the key
corresponding to the desired operator.  Press ‘?’ for a partial list of
the available operators.  Generally, an operator is any key or sequence
of keys that would normally take one or more arguments from the stack
and replace them with a result.  For example, ‘V A H C’ uses the
hyperbolic cosine operator, ‘cosh’.  (Since ‘cosh’ expects one argument,
‘V A H C’ requires a vector with a single element as its argument.)

   You can press ‘x’ at the operator prompt to select any algebraic
function by name to use as the operator.  This includes functions you
have defined yourself using the ‘Z F’ command.  (*Note Algebraic
Definitions::.)  If you give a name for which no function has been
defined, the result is left in symbolic form, as in ‘f(1, 2, 3)’.  Calc
will prompt for the number of arguments the function takes if it can’t
figure it out on its own (say, because you named a function that is
currently undefined).  It is also possible to type a digit key before
the function name to specify the number of arguments, e.g., ‘V M 3 x f
<RET>’ calls ‘f’ with three arguments even if it looks like it ought to
have only two.  This technique may be necessary if the function allows a
variable number of arguments.  For example, the ‘v e’ [‘vexp’] function
accepts two or three arguments; if you want to map with the
three-argument version, you will have to type ‘V M 3 v e’.

   It is also possible to apply any formula to a vector by treating that
formula as a function.  When prompted for the operator to use, press ‘'’
(the apostrophe) and type your formula as an algebraic entry.  You will
then be prompted for the argument list, which defaults to a list of all
variables that appear in the formula, sorted into alphabetic order.  For
example, suppose you enter the formula ‘x + 2y^x’.  The default argument
list would be ‘(x y)’, which means that if this function is applied to
the arguments ‘[3, 10]’ the result will be ‘3 + 2*10^3’.  (If you plan
to use a certain formula in this way often, you might consider defining
it as a function with ‘Z F’.)

   Another way to specify the arguments to the formula you enter is with
‘$’, ‘$$’, and so on.  For example, ‘V A ' $$ + 2$^$$’ has the same
effect as the previous example.  The argument list is automatically
taken to be ‘($$ $)’.  (The order of the arguments may seem backwards,
but it is analogous to the way normal algebraic entry interacts with the
stack.)

   If you press ‘$’ at the operator prompt, the effect is similar to the
apostrophe except that the relevant formula is taken from top-of-stack
instead.  The actual vector arguments of the ‘V A $’ or related command
then start at the second-to-top stack position.  You will still be
prompted for an argument list.

   A function can be written without a name using the notation ‘<#1 -
#2>’, which means “a function of two arguments that computes the first
argument minus the second argument.” The symbols ‘#1’ and ‘#2’ are
placeholders for the arguments.  You can use any names for these
placeholders if you wish, by including an argument list followed by a
colon: ‘<x, y : x - y>’.  When you type ‘V A ' $$ + 2$^$$ <RET>’, Calc
builds the nameless function ‘<#1 + 2 #2^#1>’ as the function to map
across the vectors.  When you type ‘V A ' x + 2y^x <RET> <RET>’, Calc
builds the nameless function ‘<x, y : x + 2 y^x>’.  In both cases, Calc
also writes the nameless function to the Trail so that you can get it
back later if you wish.

   If there is only one argument, you can write ‘#’ in place of ‘#1’.
(Note that ‘< >’ notation is also used for date forms.  Calc tells that
‘<STUFF>’ is a nameless function by the presence of ‘#’ signs inside
STUFF, or by the fact that STUFF begins with a list of variables
followed by a colon.)

   You can type a nameless function directly to ‘V A '’, or put one on
the stack and use it with ‘V A $’.  Calc will not prompt for an argument
list in this case, since the nameless function specifies the argument
list as well as the function itself.  In ‘V A '’, you can omit the ‘< >’
marks if you use ‘#’ notation for the arguments, so that ‘V A ' #1+#2
<RET>’ is the same as ‘V A ' <#1+#2> <RET>’, which in turn is the same
as ‘V A ' $$+$ <RET>’.

   The internal format for ‘<x, y : x + y>’ is ‘lambda(x, y, x + y)’.
(The word ‘lambda’ derives from Lisp notation and the theory of
functions.)  The internal format for ‘<#1 + #2>’ is ‘lambda(ArgA, ArgB,
ArgA + ArgB)’.  Note that there is no actual Calc function called
‘lambda’; the whole point is that the ‘lambda’ expression is used in its
symbolic form, not evaluated for an answer until it is applied to
specific arguments by a command like ‘V A’ or ‘V M’.

   (Actually, ‘lambda’ does have one special property: Its arguments are
never evaluated; for example, putting ‘<(2/3) #>’ on the stack will not
simplify the ‘2/3’ until the nameless function is actually called.)

   As usual, commands like ‘V A’ have algebraic function name
equivalents.  For example, ‘V A k g’ with an argument of ‘v’ is
equivalent to ‘apply(gcd, v)’.  The first argument specifies the
operator name, and is either a variable whose name is the same as the
function name, or a nameless function like ‘<#^3+1>’.  Operators that
are normally written as algebraic symbols have the names ‘add’, ‘sub’,
‘mul’, ‘div’, ‘pow’, ‘neg’, ‘mod’, and ‘vconcat’.

   The ‘call’ function builds a function call out of several arguments:
‘call(gcd, x, y)’ is the same as ‘apply(gcd, [x, y])’, which in turn is
the same as ‘gcd(x, y)’.  The first argument of ‘call’, like the other
functions described here, may be either a variable naming a function, or
a nameless function (‘call(<#1+2#2>, x, y)’ is the same as ‘x + 2y’).

   (Experts will notice that it’s not quite proper to use a variable to
name a function, since the name ‘gcd’ corresponds to the Lisp variable
‘var-gcd’ but to the Lisp function ‘calcFunc-gcd’.  Calc automatically
makes this translation, so you don’t have to worry about it.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Mapping,  Next: Reducing,  Prev: Specifying Operators,  Up: Reducing and Mapping

10.8.2 Mapping
--------------

The ‘V M’ (‘calc-map’) [‘map’] command applies a given operator
elementwise to one or more vectors.  For example, mapping ‘A’ [‘abs’]
produces a vector of the absolute values of the elements in the input
vector.  Mapping ‘+’ pops two vectors from the stack, which must be of
equal length, and produces a vector of the pairwise sums of the
elements.  If either argument is a non-vector, it is duplicated for each
element of the other vector.  For example, ‘[1,2,3] 2 V M ^’ squares the
elements of the specified vector.  With the 2 listed first, it would
have computed a vector of powers of two.  Mapping a user-defined
function pops as many arguments from the stack as the function requires.
If you give an undefined name, you will be prompted for the number of
arguments to use.

   If any argument to ‘V M’ is a matrix, the operator is normally mapped
across all elements of the matrix.  For example, given the matrix ‘[[1,
-2, 3], [-4, 5, -6]]’, ‘V M A’ takes six absolute values to produce
another 3x2 matrix, ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4, 5, 6]]’.

   The command ‘V M _’ [‘mapr’] (i.e., type an underscore at the
operator prompt) maps by rows instead.  For example, ‘V M _ A’ views the
above matrix as a vector of two 3-element row vectors.  It produces a
new vector which contains the absolute values of those row vectors,
namely ‘[3.74, 8.77]’.  (Recall, the absolute value of a vector is
defined as the square root of the sum of the squares of the elements.)
Some operators accept vectors and return new vectors; for example, ‘v v’
reverses a vector, so ‘V M _ v v’ would reverse each row of the matrix
to get a new matrix, ‘[[3, -2, 1], [-6, 5, -4]]’.

   Sometimes a vector of vectors (representing, say, strings, sets, or
lists) happens to look like a matrix.  If so, remember to use ‘V M _’ if
you want to map a function across the whole strings or sets rather than
across their individual elements.

   The command ‘V M :’ [‘mapc’] maps by columns.  Basically, it
transposes the input matrix, maps by rows, and then, if the result is a
matrix, transposes again.  For example, ‘V M : A’ takes the absolute
values of the three columns of the matrix, treating each as a 2-vector,
and ‘V M : v v’ reverses the columns to get the matrix ‘[[-4, 5, -6],
[1, -2, 3]]’.

   (The symbols ‘_’ and ‘:’ were chosen because they had row-like and
column-like appearances, and were not already taken by useful operators.
Also, they appear shifted on most keyboards so they are easy to type
after ‘V M’.)

   The ‘_’ and ‘:’ modifiers have no effect on arguments that are not
matrices (so if none of the arguments are matrices, they have no effect
at all).  If some of the arguments are matrices and others are plain
numbers, the plain numbers are held constant for all rows of the matrix
(so that ‘2 V M _ ^’ squares every row of a matrix; squaring a vector
takes a dot product of the vector with itself).

   If some of the arguments are vectors with the same lengths as the
rows (for ‘V M _’) or columns (for ‘V M :’) of the matrix arguments,
those vectors are also held constant for every row or column.

   Sometimes it is useful to specify another mapping command as the
operator to use with ‘V M’.  For example, ‘V M _ V A +’ applies ‘V A +’
to each row of the input matrix, which in turn adds the two values on
that row.  If you give another vector-operator command as the operator
for ‘V M’, it automatically uses map-by-rows mode if you don’t specify
otherwise; thus ‘V M V A +’ is equivalent to ‘V M _ V A +’.  (If you
really want to map-by-elements another mapping command, you can use a
triple-nested mapping command: ‘V M V M V A +’ means to map ‘V M V A +’
over the rows of the matrix; in turn, ‘V A +’ is mapped over the
elements of each row.)

   Previous versions of Calc had “map across” and “map down” modes that
are now considered obsolete; the old “map across” is now simply ‘V M V
A’, and “map down” is now ‘V M : V A’.  The algebraic functions ‘mapa’
and ‘mapd’ are still supported, though.  Note also that, while the old
mapping modes were persistent (once you set the mode, it would apply to
later mapping commands until you reset it), the new ‘:’ and ‘_’
modifiers apply only to the current mapping command.  The default ‘V M’
always means map-by-elements.

   *Note Algebraic Manipulation::, for the ‘a M’ command, which is like
‘V M’ but for equations and inequalities instead of vectors.  *Note
Storing Variables::, for the ‘s m’ command which modifies a variable’s
stored value using a ‘V M’-like operator.


File: calc.info,  Node: Reducing,  Next: Nesting and Fixed Points,  Prev: Mapping,  Up: Reducing and Mapping

10.8.3 Reducing
---------------

The ‘V R’ (‘calc-reduce’) [‘reduce’] command applies a given binary
operator across all the elements of a vector.  A binary operator is a
function such as ‘+’ or ‘max’ which takes two arguments.  For example,
reducing ‘+’ over a vector computes the sum of the elements of the
vector.  Reducing ‘-’ computes the first element minus each of the
remaining elements.  Reducing ‘max’ computes the maximum element and so
on.  In general, reducing ‘f’ over the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces
‘f(f(f(a, b), c), d)’.

   The ‘I V R’ [‘rreduce’] command is similar to ‘V R’ except that works
from right to left through the vector.  For example, plain ‘V R -’ on
the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces ‘a - b - c - d’ but ‘I V R -’ on the
same vector produces ‘a - (b - (c - d))’, or ‘a - b + c - d’.  This
“alternating sum” occurs frequently in power series expansions.

   The ‘V U’ (‘calc-accumulate’) [‘accum’] command does an accumulation
operation.  Here Calc does the corresponding reduction operation, but
instead of producing only the final result, it produces a vector of all
the intermediate results.  Accumulating ‘+’ over the vector ‘[a, b, c,
d]’ produces the vector ‘[a, a + b, a + b + c, a + b + c + d]’.

   The ‘I V U’ [‘raccum’] command does a right-to-left accumulation.
For example, ‘I V U -’ on the vector ‘[a, b, c, d]’ produces the vector
‘[a - b + c - d, b - c + d, c - d, d]’.

   As for ‘V M’, ‘V R’ normally reduces a matrix elementwise.  For
example, given the matrix ‘[[a, b, c], [d, e, f]]’, ‘V R +’ will compute
‘a + b + c + d + e + f’.  You can type ‘V R _’ or ‘V R :’ to modify this
behavior.  The ‘V R _’ [‘reducea’] command reduces “across” the matrix;
it reduces each row of the matrix as a vector, then collects the
results.  Thus ‘V R _ +’ of this matrix would produce ‘[a + b + c, d + e
+ f]’.  Similarly, ‘V R :’ [‘reduced’] reduces down; ‘V R : +’ would
produce ‘[a + d, b + e, c + f]’.

   There is a third “by rows” mode for reduction that is occasionally
useful; ‘V R =’ [‘reducer’] simply reduces the operator over the rows of
the matrix themselves.  Thus ‘V R = +’ on the above matrix would get the
same result as ‘V R : +’, since adding two row vectors is equivalent to
adding their elements.  But ‘V R = *’ would multiply the two rows (to
get a single number, their dot product), while ‘V R : *’ would produce a
vector of the products of the columns.

   These three matrix reduction modes work with ‘V R’ and ‘I V R’, but
they are not currently supported with ‘V U’ or ‘I V U’.

   The obsolete reduce-by-columns function, ‘reducec’, is still
supported but there is no way to get it through the ‘V R’ command.

   The commands ‘C-x * :’ and ‘C-x * _’ are equivalent to typing ‘C-x *
r’ to grab a rectangle of data into Calc, and then typing ‘V R : +’ or
‘V R _ +’, respectively, to sum the columns or rows of the matrix.
*Note Grabbing From Buffers::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Nesting and Fixed Points,  Next: Generalized Products,  Prev: Reducing,  Up: Reducing and Mapping

10.8.4 Nesting and Fixed Points
-------------------------------

The ‘H V R’ [‘nest’] command applies a function to a given argument
repeatedly.  It takes two values, ‘a’ and ‘n’, from the stack, where ‘n’
must be an integer.  It then applies the function nested ‘n’ times; if
the function is ‘f’ and ‘n’ is 3, the result is ‘f(f(f(a)))’.  The
number ‘n’ may be negative if Calc knows an inverse for the function
‘f’; for example, ‘nest(sin, a, -2)’ returns ‘arcsin(arcsin(a))’.

   The ‘H V U’ [‘anest’] command is an accumulating version of ‘nest’:
It returns a vector of ‘n+1’ values, e.g., ‘[a, f(a), f(f(a)),
f(f(f(a)))]’.  If ‘n’ is negative and ‘F’ is the inverse of ‘f’, then
the result is of the form ‘[a, F(a), F(F(a)), F(F(F(a)))]’.

   The ‘H I V R’ [‘fixp’] command is like ‘H V R’, except that it takes
only an ‘a’ value from the stack; the function is applied until it
reaches a “fixed point,” i.e., until the result no longer changes.

   The ‘H I V U’ [‘afixp’] command is an accumulating ‘fixp’.  The first
element of the return vector will be the initial value ‘a’; the last
element will be the final result that would have been returned by
‘fixp’.

   For example, 0.739085 is a fixed point of the cosine function (in
radians): ‘cos(0.739085) = 0.739085’.  You can find this value by
putting, say, 1.0 on the stack and typing ‘H I V U C’.  (We use the
accumulating version so we can see the intermediate results: ‘[1,
0.540302, 0.857553, 0.65329, ...]’.  With a precision of six, this
command will take 36 steps to converge to 0.739085.)

   Newton’s method for finding roots is a classic example of iteration
to a fixed point.  To find the square root of five starting with an
initial guess, Newton’s method would look for a fixed point of the
function ‘(x + 5/x) / 2’.  Putting a guess of 1 on the stack and typing
‘H I V R ' ($ + 5/$)/2 <RET>’ quickly yields the result 2.23607.  This
is equivalent to using the ‘a R’ (‘calc-find-root’) command to find a
root of the equation ‘x^2 = 5’.

   These examples used numbers for ‘a’ values.  Calc keeps applying the
function until two successive results are equal to within the current
precision.  For complex numbers, both the real parts and the imaginary
parts must be equal to within the current precision.  If ‘a’ is a
formula (say, a variable name), then the function is applied until two
successive results are exactly the same formula.  It is up to you to
ensure that the function will eventually converge; if it doesn’t, you
may have to press ‘C-g’ to stop the Calculator.

   The algebraic ‘fixp’ function takes two optional arguments, ‘n’ and
‘tol’.  The first is the maximum number of steps to be allowed, and must
be either an integer or the symbol ‘inf’ (infinity, the default).  The
second is a convergence tolerance.  If a tolerance is specified, all
results during the calculation must be numbers, not formulas, and the
iteration stops when the magnitude of the difference between two
successive results is less than or equal to the tolerance.  (This
implies that a tolerance of zero iterates until the results are exactly
equal.)

   Putting it all together, ‘fixp(<(# + A/#)/2>, B, 20, 1e-10)’ computes
the square root of ‘A’ given the initial guess ‘B’, stopping when the
result is correct within the specified tolerance, or when 20 steps have
been taken, whichever is sooner.


File: calc.info,  Node: Generalized Products,  Prev: Nesting and Fixed Points,  Up: Reducing and Mapping

10.8.5 Generalized Products
---------------------------

The ‘V O’ (‘calc-outer-product’) [‘outer’] command applies a given
binary operator to all possible pairs of elements from two vectors, to
produce a matrix.  For example, ‘V O *’ with ‘[a, b]’ and ‘[x, y, z]’ on
the stack produces a multiplication table: ‘[[a x, a y, a z], [b x, b y,
b z]]’.  Element R,C of the result matrix is obtained by applying the
operator to element R of the lefthand vector and element C of the
righthand vector.

   The ‘V I’ (‘calc-inner-product’) [‘inner’] command computes the
generalized inner product of two vectors or matrices, given a
“multiplicative” operator and an “additive” operator.  These can each
actually be any binary operators; if they are ‘*’ and ‘+’, respectively,
the result is a standard matrix multiplication.  Element R,C of the
result matrix is obtained by mapping the multiplicative operator across
row R of the lefthand matrix and column C of the righthand matrix, and
then reducing with the additive operator.  Just as for the standard ‘*’
command, this can also do a vector-matrix or matrix-vector inner
product, or a vector-vector generalized dot product.

   Since ‘V I’ requires two operators, it prompts twice.  In each case,
you can use any of the usual methods for entering the operator.  If you
use ‘$’ twice to take both operator formulas from the stack, the first
(multiplicative) operator is taken from the top of the stack and the
second (additive) operator is taken from second-to-top.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector and Matrix Formats,  Prev: Reducing and Mapping,  Up: Matrix Functions

10.9 Vector and Matrix Display Formats
======================================

Commands for controlling vector and matrix display use the ‘v’ prefix
instead of the usual ‘d’ prefix.  But they are display modes; in
particular, they are influenced by the ‘I’ and ‘H’ prefix keys in the
same way (*note Display Modes::).  Matrix display is also influenced by
the ‘d O’ (‘calc-flat-language’) mode; *note Normal Language Modes::.

   The commands ‘v <’ (‘calc-matrix-left-justify’), ‘v >’
(‘calc-matrix-right-justify’), and ‘v =’ (‘calc-matrix-center-justify’)
control whether matrix elements are justified to the left, right, or
center of their columns.

   The ‘v [’ (‘calc-vector-brackets’) command turns the square brackets
that surround vectors and matrices displayed in the stack on and off.
The ‘v {’ (‘calc-vector-braces’) and ‘v (’ (‘calc-vector-parens’)
commands use curly braces or parentheses, respectively, instead of
square brackets.  For example, ‘v {’ might be used in preparation for
yanking a matrix into a buffer running Mathematica.  (In fact, the
Mathematica language mode uses this mode; *note Mathematica Language
Mode::.)  Note that, regardless of the display mode, either brackets or
braces may be used to enter vectors, and parentheses may never be used
for this purpose.

   The ‘v ]’ (‘calc-matrix-brackets’) command controls the “big” style
display of matrices, for matrices which have more than one row.  It
prompts for a string of code letters; currently implemented letters are
‘R’, which enables brackets on each row of the matrix; ‘O’, which
enables outer brackets in opposite corners of the matrix; and ‘C’, which
enables commas or semicolons at the ends of all rows but the last.  The
default format is ‘RO’.  (Before Calc 2.00, the format was fixed at
‘ROC’.)  Here are some example matrices:

     [ [ 123,  0,   0  ]       [ [ 123,  0,   0  ],
       [  0,  123,  0  ]         [  0,  123,  0  ],
       [  0,   0,  123 ] ]       [  0,   0,  123 ] ]

              RO                        ROC

       [ 123,  0,   0            [ 123,  0,   0 ;
          0,  123,  0               0,  123,  0 ;
          0,   0,  123 ]            0,   0,  123 ]

               O                        OC

       [ 123,  0,   0  ]           123,  0,   0
       [  0,  123,  0  ]            0,  123,  0
       [  0,   0,  123 ]            0,   0,  123

               R                       blank

Note that of the formats shown here, ‘RO’, ‘ROC’, and ‘OC’ are all
recognized as matrices during reading, while the others are useful for
display only.

   The ‘v ,’ (‘calc-vector-commas’) command turns commas on and off in
vector and matrix display.

   In vectors of length one, and in all vectors when commas have been
turned off, Calc adds extra parentheses around formulas that might
otherwise be ambiguous.  For example, ‘[a b]’ could be a vector of the
one formula ‘a b’, or it could be a vector of two variables with commas
turned off.  Calc will display the former case as ‘[(a b)]’.  You can
disable these extra parentheses (to make the output less cluttered at
the expense of allowing some ambiguity) by adding the letter ‘P’ to the
control string you give to ‘v ]’ (as described above).

   The ‘v .’ (‘calc-full-vectors’) command turns abbreviated display of
long vectors on and off.  In this mode, vectors of six or more elements,
or matrices of six or more rows or columns, will be displayed in an
abbreviated form that displays only the first three elements and the
last element: ‘[a, b, c, ..., z]’.  When very large vectors are involved
this will substantially improve Calc’s display speed.

   The ‘t .’ (‘calc-full-trail-vectors’) command controls a similar mode
for recording vectors in the Trail.  If you turn on this mode, vectors
of six or more elements and matrices of six or more rows or columns will
be abbreviated when they are put in the Trail.  The ‘t y’
(‘calc-trail-yank’) command will be unable to recover those vectors.  If
you are working with very large vectors, this mode will improve the
speed of all operations that involve the trail.

   The ‘v /’ (‘calc-break-vectors’) command turns multi-line vector
display on and off.  Normally, matrices are displayed with one row per
line but all other types of vectors are displayed in a single line.
This mode causes all vectors, whether matrices or not, to be displayed
with a single element per line.  Sub-vectors within the vectors will
still use the normal linear form.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebra,  Next: Units,  Prev: Matrix Functions,  Up: Top

11 Algebra
**********

This section covers the Calc features that help you work with algebraic
formulas.  First, the general sub-formula selection mechanism is
described; this works in conjunction with any Calc commands.  Then,
commands for specific algebraic operations are described.  Finally, the
flexible “rewrite rule” mechanism is discussed.

   The algebraic commands use the ‘a’ key prefix; selection commands use
the ‘j’ (for “just a letter that wasn’t used for anything else”) prefix.

   *Note Editing Stack Entries::, to see how to manipulate formulas
using regular Emacs editing commands.

   When doing algebraic work, you may find several of the Calculator’s
modes to be helpful, including Algebraic Simplification mode (‘m A’) or
No-Simplification mode (‘m O’), Algebraic entry mode (‘m a’), Fraction
mode (‘m f’), and Symbolic mode (‘m s’).  *Note Mode Settings::, for
discussions of these modes.  You may also wish to select Big display
mode (‘d B’).  *Note Normal Language Modes::.

* Menu:

* Selecting Subformulas::
* Algebraic Manipulation::
* Simplifying Formulas::
* Polynomials::
* Calculus::
* Solving Equations::
* Numerical Solutions::
* Curve Fitting::
* Summations::
* Logical Operations::
* Rewrite Rules::


File: calc.info,  Node: Selecting Subformulas,  Next: Algebraic Manipulation,  Prev: Algebra,  Up: Algebra

11.1 Selecting Sub-Formulas
===========================

When working with an algebraic formula it is often necessary to
manipulate a portion of the formula rather than the formula as a whole.
Calc allows you to “select” a portion of any formula on the stack.
Commands which would normally operate on that stack entry will now
operate only on the sub-formula, leaving the surrounding part of the
stack entry alone.

   One common non-algebraic use for selection involves vectors.  To work
on one element of a vector in-place, simply select that element as a
“sub-formula” of the vector.

* Menu:

* Making Selections::
* Changing Selections::
* Displaying Selections::
* Operating on Selections::
* Rearranging with Selections::


File: calc.info,  Node: Making Selections,  Next: Changing Selections,  Prev: Selecting Subformulas,  Up: Selecting Subformulas

11.1.1 Making Selections
------------------------

To select a sub-formula, move the Emacs cursor to any character in that
sub-formula, and press ‘j s’ (‘calc-select-here’).  Calc will highlight
the smallest portion of the formula that contains that character.  By
default the sub-formula is highlighted by blanking out all of the rest
of the formula with dots.  Selection works in any display mode but is
perhaps easiest in Big mode (‘d B’).  Suppose you enter the following
formula:

                3    ___
         (a + b)  + V c
     1:  ---------------
             2 x + 1

(by typing ‘' ((a+b)^3 + sqrt(c)) / (2x+1)’).  If you move the cursor to
the letter ‘b’ and press ‘j s’, the display changes to

                .    ...
         .. . b.  . . .
     1*  ...............
             . . . .

Every character not part of the sub-formula ‘b’ has been changed to a
dot.  (If the customizable variable
‘calc-highlight-selections-with-faces’ is non-‘nil’, then the characters
not part of the sub-formula are de-emphasized by using a less noticeable
face instead of using dots.  *note Displaying Selections::.)  The ‘*’
next to the line number is to remind you that the formula has a portion
of it selected.  (In this case, it’s very obvious, but it might not
always be.  If Embedded mode is enabled, the word ‘Sel’ also appears in
the mode line because the stack may not be visible.  *note Embedded
Mode::.)

   If you had instead placed the cursor on the parenthesis immediately
to the right of the ‘b’, the selection would have been:

                .    ...
         (a + b)  . . .
     1*  ...............
             . . . .

The portion selected is always large enough to be considered a complete
formula all by itself, so selecting the parenthesis selects the whole
formula that it encloses.  Putting the cursor on the ‘+’ sign would have
had the same effect.

   (Strictly speaking, the Emacs cursor is really the manifestation of
the Emacs “point,” which is a position _between_ two characters in the
buffer.  So purists would say that Calc selects the smallest sub-formula
which contains the character to the right of “point.”)

   If you supply a numeric prefix argument N, the selection is expanded
to the Nth enclosing sub-formula.  Thus, positioning the cursor on the
‘b’ and typing ‘C-u 1 j s’ will select ‘a + b’; typing ‘C-u 2 j s’ will
select ‘(a + b)^3’, and so on.

   If the cursor is not on any part of the formula, or if you give a
numeric prefix that is too large, the entire formula is selected.

   If the cursor is on the ‘.’ line that marks the top of the stack
(i.e., its normal “rest position”), this command selects the entire
formula at stack level 1.  Most selection commands similarly operate on
the formula at the top of the stack if you haven’t positioned the cursor
on any stack entry.

   The ‘j a’ (‘calc-select-additional’) command enlarges the current
selection to encompass the cursor.  To select the smallest sub-formula
defined by two different points, move to the first and press ‘j s’, then
move to the other and press ‘j a’.  This is roughly analogous to using
‘C-@’ (‘set-mark-command’) to select the two ends of a region of text
during normal Emacs editing.

   The ‘j o’ (‘calc-select-once’) command selects a formula in exactly
the same way as ‘j s’, except that the selection will last only as long
as the next command that uses it.  For example, ‘j o 1 +’ is a handy way
to add one to the sub-formula indicated by the cursor.

   (A somewhat more precise definition: The ‘j o’ command sets a flag
such that the next command involving selected stack entries will clear
the selections on those stack entries afterwards.  All other selection
commands except ‘j a’ and ‘j O’ clear this flag.)

   The ‘j S’ (‘calc-select-here-maybe’) and ‘j O’
(‘calc-select-once-maybe’) commands are equivalent to ‘j s’ and ‘j o’,
respectively, except that if the formula already has a selection they
have no effect.  This is analogous to the behavior of some commands such
as ‘j r’ (‘calc-rewrite-selection’; *note Selections with Rewrite
Rules::) and is mainly intended to be used in keyboard macros that
implement your own selection-oriented commands.

   Selection of sub-formulas normally treats associative terms like ‘a +
b - c + d’ and ‘x * y * z’ as single levels of the formula.  If you
place the cursor anywhere inside ‘a + b - c + d’ except on one of the
variable names and use ‘j s’, you will select the entire four-term sum.

   The ‘j b’ (‘calc-break-selections’) command controls a mode in which
the “deep structure” of these associative formulas shows through.  Calc
actually stores the above formulas as ‘((a + b) - c) + d’ and ‘x * (y *
z)’.  (Note that for certain obscure reasons, by default Calc treats
multiplication as right-associative.)  Once you have enabled ‘j b’ mode,
selecting with the cursor on the ‘-’ sign would only select the ‘a + b -
c’ portion, which makes sense when the deep structure of the sum is
considered.  There is no way to select the ‘b - c + d’ portion; although
this might initially look like just as legitimate a sub-formula as ‘a +
b - c’, the deep structure shows that it isn’t.  The ‘d U’ command can
be used to view the deep structure of any formula (*note Normal Language
Modes::).

   When ‘j b’ mode has not been enabled, the deep structure is generally
hidden by the selection commands—what you see is what you get.

   The ‘j u’ (‘calc-unselect’) command unselects the formula that the
cursor is on.  If there was no selection in the formula, this command
has no effect.  With a numeric prefix argument, it unselects the Nth
stack element rather than using the cursor position.

   The ‘j c’ (‘calc-clear-selections’) command unselects all stack
elements.


File: calc.info,  Node: Changing Selections,  Next: Displaying Selections,  Prev: Making Selections,  Up: Selecting Subformulas

11.1.2 Changing Selections
--------------------------

Once you have selected a sub-formula, you can expand it using the ‘j m’
(‘calc-select-more’) command.  If ‘a + b’ is selected, pressing ‘j m’
repeatedly works as follows:

                3    ...                3    ___                3    ___
         (a + b)  . . .          (a + b)  + V c          (a + b)  + V c
     1*  ...............     1*  ...............     1*  ---------------
             . . . .                 . . . .                 2 x + 1

In the last example, the entire formula is selected.  This is roughly
the same as having no selection at all, but because there are subtle
differences the ‘*’ character is still there on the line number.

   With a numeric prefix argument N, ‘j m’ expands N times (or until the
entire formula is selected).  Note that ‘j s’ with argument N is
equivalent to plain ‘j s’ followed by ‘j m’ with argument N.  If ‘j m’
is used when there is no current selection, it is equivalent to ‘j s’.

   Even though ‘j m’ does not explicitly use the location of the cursor
within the formula, it nevertheless uses the cursor to determine which
stack element to operate on.  As usual, ‘j m’ when the cursor is not on
any stack element operates on the top stack element.

   The ‘j l’ (‘calc-select-less’) command reduces the current selection
around the cursor position.  That is, it selects the immediate
sub-formula of the current selection which contains the cursor, the
opposite of ‘j m’.  If the cursor is not inside the current selection,
the command de-selects the formula.

   The ‘j 1’ through ‘j 9’ (‘calc-select-part’) commands select the Nth
sub-formula of the current selection.  They are like ‘j l’
(‘calc-select-less’) except they use counting rather than the cursor
position to decide which sub-formula to select.  For example, if the
current selection is ‘a + b + c’ or ‘f(a, b, c)’ or ‘[a, b, c]’, then ‘j
1’ selects ‘a’, ‘j 2’ selects ‘b’, and ‘j 3’ selects ‘c’; in each of
these cases, ‘j 4’ through ‘j 9’ would be errors.

   If there is no current selection, ‘j 1’ through ‘j 9’ select the Nth
top-level sub-formula.  (In other words, they act as if the entire stack
entry were selected first.)  To select the Nth sub-formula where N is
greater than nine, you must instead invoke ‘j 1’ with N as a numeric
prefix argument.

   The ‘j n’ (‘calc-select-next’) and ‘j p’ (‘calc-select-previous’)
commands change the current selection to the next or previous
sub-formula at the same level.  For example, if ‘b’ is selected in
‘2 + a*b*c + x’, then ‘j n’ selects ‘c’.  Further ‘j n’ commands would
be in error because, even though there is something to the right of ‘c’
(namely, ‘x’), it is not at the same level; in this case, it is not a
term of the same product as ‘b’ and ‘c’.  However, ‘j m’ (to select the
whole product ‘a*b*c’ as a term of the sum) followed by ‘j n’ would
successfully select the ‘x’.

   Similarly, ‘j p’ moves the selection from the ‘b’ in this sample
formula to the ‘a’.  Both commands accept numeric prefix arguments to
move several steps at a time.

   It is interesting to compare Calc’s selection commands with the Emacs
Info system’s commands for navigating through hierarchically organized
documentation.  Calc’s ‘j n’ command is completely analogous to Info’s
‘n’ command.  Likewise, ‘j p’ maps to ‘p’, ‘j 2’ maps to ‘2’, and Info’s
‘u’ is like ‘j m’.  (Note that ‘j u’ stands for ‘calc-unselect’, not
“up”.)  The Info ‘m’ command is somewhat similar to Calc’s ‘j s’ and ‘j
l’; in each case, you can jump directly to a sub-component of the
hierarchy simply by pointing to it with the cursor.


File: calc.info,  Node: Displaying Selections,  Next: Operating on Selections,  Prev: Changing Selections,  Up: Selecting Subformulas

11.1.3 Displaying Selections
----------------------------

The ‘j d’ (‘calc-show-selections’) command controls how selected
sub-formulas are displayed.  One of the alternatives is illustrated in
the above examples; if we press ‘j d’ we switch to the other style in
which the selected portion itself is obscured by ‘#’ signs:

                3    ...                  #    ___
         (a + b)  . . .            ## # ##  + V c
     1*  ...............       1*  ---------------
             . . . .                   2 x + 1
   If the customizable variable ‘calc-highlight-selections-with-faces’
is non-‘nil’, then the non-selected portion of the formula will be
de-emphasized by using a less noticeable face (‘calc-nonselected-face’)
instead of dots and the selected sub-formula will be highlighted by
using a more noticeable face (‘calc-selected-face’) instead of ‘#’
signs.  (*note Customizing Calc::.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Operating on Selections,  Next: Rearranging with Selections,  Prev: Displaying Selections,  Up: Selecting Subformulas

11.1.4 Operating on Selections
------------------------------

Once a selection is made, all Calc commands that manipulate items on the
stack will operate on the selected portions of the items instead.  (Note
that several stack elements may have selections at once, though there
can be only one selection at a time in any given stack element.)

   The ‘j e’ (‘calc-enable-selections’) command disables the effect that
selections have on Calc commands.  The current selections still exist,
but Calc commands operate on whole stack elements anyway.  This mode can
be identified by the fact that the ‘*’ markers on the line numbers are
gone, even though selections are visible.  To reactivate the selections,
press ‘j e’ again.

   To extract a sub-formula as a new formula, simply select the
sub-formula and press <RET>.  This normally duplicates the top stack
element; here it duplicates only the selected portion of that element.

   To replace a sub-formula with something different, you can enter the
new value onto the stack and press <TAB>.  This normally exchanges the
top two stack elements; here it swaps the value you entered into the
selected portion of the formula, returning the old selected portion to
the top of the stack.

                3    ...                    ...                    ___
         (a + b)  . . .           17 x y . . .           17 x y + V c
     2*  ...............      2*  .............      2:  -------------
             . . . .                 . . . .                2 x + 1

                                         3                      3
     1:  17 x y               1:  (a + b)            1:  (a + b)

   In this example we select a sub-formula of our original example,
enter a new formula, <TAB> it into place, then deselect to see the
complete, edited formula.

   If you want to swap whole formulas around even though they contain
selections, just use ‘j e’ before and after.

   The ‘j '’ (‘calc-enter-selection’) command is another way to replace
a selected sub-formula.  This command does an algebraic entry just like
the regular ‘'’ key.  When you press <RET>, the formula you type
replaces the original selection.  You can use the ‘$’ symbol in the
formula to refer to the original selection.  If there is no selection in
the formula under the cursor, the cursor is used to make a temporary
selection for the purposes of the command.  Thus, to change a term of a
formula, all you have to do is move the Emacs cursor to that term and
press ‘j '’.

   The ‘j `’ (‘calc-edit-selection’) command is a similar analogue of
the ‘`’ (‘calc-edit’) command.  It edits the selected sub-formula in a
separate buffer.  If there is no selection, it edits the sub-formula
indicated by the cursor.

   To delete a sub-formula, press <DEL>.  This generally replaces the
sub-formula with the constant zero, but in a few suitable contexts it
uses the constant one instead.  The <DEL> key automatically deselects
and re-simplifies the entire formula afterwards.  Thus:

                   ###
         17 x y + # #          17 x y         17 # y          17 y
     1*  -------------     1:  -------    1*  -------    1:  -------
            2 x + 1            2 x + 1        2 x + 1        2 x + 1

   In this example, we first delete the ‘sqrt(c)’ term; Calc
accomplishes this by replacing ‘sqrt(c)’ with zero and resimplifying.
We then delete the ‘x’ in the numerator; since this is part of a
product, Calc replaces it with ‘1’ and resimplifies.

   If you select an element of a vector and press <DEL>, that element is
deleted from the vector.  If you delete one side of an equation or
inequality, only the opposite side remains.

   The ‘j <DEL>’ (‘calc-del-selection’) command is like <DEL> but with
the auto-selecting behavior of ‘j '’ and ‘j `’.  It deletes the selected
portion of the formula indicated by the cursor, or, in the absence of a
selection, it deletes the sub-formula indicated by the cursor position.

   (There is also an auto-selecting ‘j <RET>’ (‘calc-copy-selection’)
command.)

   Normal arithmetic operations also apply to sub-formulas.  Here we
select the denominator, press ‘5 -’ to subtract five from the
denominator, press ‘n’ to negate the denominator, then press ‘Q’ to take
the square root.

          .. .           .. .           .. .             .. .
     1*  .......    1*  .......    1*  .......    1*  ..........
         2 x + 1        2 x - 4        4 - 2 x         _________
                                                      V 4 - 2 x

   Certain types of operations on selections are not allowed.  For
example, for an arithmetic function like ‘-’ no more than one of the
arguments may be a selected sub-formula.  (As the above example shows,
the result of the subtraction is spliced back into the argument which
had the selection; if there were more than one selection involved, this
would not be well-defined.)  If you try to subtract two selections, the
command will abort with an error message.

   Operations on sub-formulas sometimes leave the formula as a whole in
an “un-natural” state.  Consider negating the ‘2 x’ term of our sample
formula by selecting it and pressing ‘n’ (‘calc-change-sign’).

            .. .                .. .
     1*  ..........      1*  ...........
          .........           ..........
         . . . 2 x           . . . -2 x

   Unselecting the sub-formula reveals that the minus sign, which would
normally have canceled out with the subtraction automatically, has not
been able to do so because the subtraction was not part of the selected
portion.  Pressing ‘=’ (‘calc-evaluate’) or doing any other mathematical
operation on the whole formula will cause it to be simplified.

            17 y                17 y
     1:  -----------     1:  ----------
          __________          _________
         V 4 - -2 x          V 4 + 2 x


File: calc.info,  Node: Rearranging with Selections,  Prev: Operating on Selections,  Up: Selecting Subformulas

11.1.5 Rearranging Formulas using Selections
--------------------------------------------

The ‘j R’ (‘calc-commute-right’) command moves the selected sub-formula
to the right in its surrounding formula.  Generally the selection is one
term of a sum or product; the sum or product is rearranged according to
the commutative laws of algebra.

   As with ‘j '’ and ‘j <DEL>’, the term under the cursor is used if
there is no selection in the current formula.  All commands described in
this section share this property.  In this example, we place the cursor
on the ‘a’ and type ‘j R’, then repeat.

     1:  a + b - c          1:  b + a - c          1:  b - c + a

Note that in the final step above, the ‘a’ is switched with the ‘c’ but
the signs are adjusted accordingly.  When moving terms of sums and
products, ‘j R’ will never change the mathematical meaning of the
formula.

   The selected term may also be an element of a vector or an argument
of a function.  The term is exchanged with the one to its right.  In
this case, the “meaning” of the vector or function may of course be
drastically changed.

     1:  [a, b, c]          1:  [b, a, c]          1:  [b, c, a]

     1:  f(a, b, c)         1:  f(b, a, c)         1:  f(b, c, a)

   The ‘j L’ (‘calc-commute-left’) command is like ‘j R’ except that it
swaps the selected term with the one to its left.

   With numeric prefix arguments, these commands move the selected term
several steps at a time.  It is an error to try to move a term left or
right past the end of its enclosing formula.  With numeric prefix
arguments of zero, these commands move the selected term as far as
possible in the given direction.

   The ‘j D’ (‘calc-sel-distribute’) command mixes the selected sum or
product into the surrounding formula using the distributive law.  For
example, in ‘a * (b - c)’ with the ‘b - c’ selected, the result is ‘a b
- a c’.  This also distributes products or quotients into surrounding
powers, and can also do transformations like ‘exp(a + b)’ to ‘exp(a)
exp(b)’, where ‘a + b’ is the selected term, and ‘ln(a ^ b)’ to ‘ln(a)
b’, where ‘a ^ b’ is the selected term.

   For multiple-term sums or products, ‘j D’ takes off one term at a
time: ‘a * (b + c - d)’ goes to ‘a * (c - d) + a b’ with the ‘c - d’
selected so that you can type ‘j D’ repeatedly to expand completely.
The ‘j D’ command allows a numeric prefix argument which specifies the
maximum number of times to expand at once; the default is one time only.

   The ‘j D’ command is implemented using rewrite rules.  *Note
Selections with Rewrite Rules::.  The rules are stored in the Calc
variable ‘DistribRules’.  A convenient way to view these rules is to use
‘s e’ (‘calc-edit-variable’) which displays and edits the stored value
of a variable.  Press ‘C-c C-c’ to return from editing mode; be careful
not to make any actual changes or else you will affect the behavior of
future ‘j D’ commands!

   To extend ‘j D’ to handle new cases, just edit ‘DistribRules’ as
described above.  You can then use the ‘s p’ command to save this
variable’s value permanently for future Calc sessions.  *Note Operations
on Variables::.

   The ‘j M’ (‘calc-sel-merge’) command is the complement of ‘j D’;
given ‘a b - a c’ with either ‘a b’ or ‘a c’ selected, the result is ‘a
* (b - c)’.  Once again, ‘j M’ can also merge calls to functions like
‘exp’ and ‘ln’; examine the variable ‘MergeRules’ to see all the
relevant rules.

   The ‘j C’ (‘calc-sel-commute’) command swaps the arguments of the
selected sum, product, or equation.  It always behaves as if ‘j b’ mode
were in effect, i.e., the sum ‘a + b + c’ is treated as the nested sums
‘(a + b) + c’ by this command.  If you put the cursor on the first ‘+’,
the result is ‘(b + a) + c’; if you put the cursor on the second ‘+’,
the result is ‘c + (a + b)’ (which the default simplifications will
rearrange to ‘(c + a) + b’).  The relevant rules are stored in the
variable ‘CommuteRules’.

   You may need to turn default simplifications off (with the ‘m O’
command) in order to get the full benefit of ‘j C’.  For example,
commuting ‘a - b’ produces ‘-b + a’, but the default simplifications
will “simplify” this right back to ‘a - b’ if you don’t turn them off.
The same is true of some of the other manipulations described in this
section.

   The ‘j N’ (‘calc-sel-negate’) command replaces the selected term with
the negative of that term, then adjusts the surrounding formula in order
to preserve the meaning.  For example, given ‘exp(a - b)’ where ‘a - b’
is selected, the result is ‘1 / exp(b - a)’.  By contrast, selecting a
term and using the regular ‘n’ (‘calc-change-sign’) command negates the
term without adjusting the surroundings, thus changing the meaning of
the formula as a whole.  The rules variable is ‘NegateRules’.

   The ‘j &’ (‘calc-sel-invert’) command is similar to ‘j N’ except it
takes the reciprocal of the selected term.  For example, given ‘a -
ln(b)’ with ‘b’ selected, the result is ‘a + ln(1/b)’.  The rules
variable is ‘InvertRules’.

   The ‘j E’ (‘calc-sel-jump-equals’) command moves the selected term
from one side of an equation to the other.  Given ‘a + b = c + d’ with
‘c’ selected, the result is ‘a + b - c = d’.  This command also works if
the selected term is part of a ‘*’, ‘/’, or ‘^’ formula.  The relevant
rules variable is ‘JumpRules’.

   The ‘j I’ (‘calc-sel-isolate’) command isolates the selected term on
its side of an equation.  It uses the ‘a S’ (‘calc-solve-for’) command
to solve the equation, and the Hyperbolic flag affects it in the same
way.  *Note Solving Equations::.  When it applies, ‘j I’ is often easier
to use than ‘j E’.  It understands more rules of algebra, and works for
inequalities as well as equations.

   The ‘j *’ (‘calc-sel-mult-both-sides’) command prompts for a formula
using algebraic entry, then multiplies both sides of the selected
quotient or equation by that formula.  It performs the default algebraic
simplifications before re-forming the quotient or equation.  You can
suppress this simplification by providing a prefix argument: ‘C-u j *’.
There is also a ‘j /’ (‘calc-sel-div-both-sides’) which is similar to ‘j
*’ but dividing instead of multiplying by the factor you enter.

   If the selection is a quotient with numerator 1, then Calc’s default
simplifications would normally cancel the new factors.  To prevent this,
when the ‘j *’ command is used on a selection whose numerator is 1 or
-1, the denominator is expanded at the top level using the distributive
law (as if using the ‘C-u 1 a x’ command).  Suppose the formula on the
stack is ‘1 / (a + 1)’ and you wish to multiplying the top and bottom by
‘a - 1’.  Calc’s default simplifications would normally change the
result ‘(a - 1) /(a + 1) (a - 1)’ back to the original form by
cancellation; when ‘j *’ is used, Calc expands the denominator to ‘a (a
- 1) + a - 1’ to prevent this.

   If you wish the ‘j *’ command to completely expand the denominator of
a quotient you can call it with a zero prefix: ‘C-u 0 j *’.  For
example, if the formula on the stack is ‘1 / (sqrt(a) + 1)’, you may
wish to eliminate the square root in the denominator by multiplying the
top and bottom by ‘sqrt(a) - 1’.  If you did this simply by using a
simple ‘j *’ command, you would get ‘(sqrt(a)-1)/ (sqrt(a) (sqrt(a) - 1)
+ sqrt(a) - 1)’.  Instead, you would probably want to use ‘C-u 0 j *’,
which would expand the bottom and give you the desired result
‘(sqrt(a)-1)/(a-1)’.  More generally, if ‘j *’ is called with an
argument of a positive integer N, then the denominator of the expression
will be expanded N times (as if with the ‘C-u N a x’ command).

   If the selection is an inequality, ‘j *’ and ‘j /’ will accept any
factor, but will warn unless they can prove the factor is either
positive or negative.  (In the latter case the direction of the
inequality will be switched appropriately.)  *Note Declarations::, for
ways to inform Calc that a given variable is positive or negative.  If
Calc can’t tell for sure what the sign of the factor will be, it will
assume it is positive and display a warning message.

   For selections that are not quotients, equations, or inequalities,
these commands pull out a multiplicative factor: They divide (or
multiply) by the entered formula, simplify, then multiply (or divide)
back by the formula.

   The ‘j +’ (‘calc-sel-add-both-sides’) and ‘j -’
(‘calc-sel-sub-both-sides’) commands analogously add to or subtract from
both sides of an equation or inequality.  For other types of selections,
they extract an additive factor.  A numeric prefix argument suppresses
simplification of the intermediate results.

   The ‘j U’ (‘calc-sel-unpack’) command replaces the selected function
call with its argument.  For example, given ‘a + sin(x^2)’ with
‘sin(x^2)’ selected, the result is ‘a + x^2’.  (The ‘x^2’ will remain
selected; if you wanted to change the ‘sin’ to ‘cos’, just press ‘C’ now
to take the cosine of the selected part.)

   The ‘j v’ (‘calc-sel-evaluate’) command performs the basic
simplifications on the selected sub-formula.  These simplifications
would normally be done automatically on all results, but may have been
partially inhibited by previous selection-related operations, or turned
off altogether by the ‘m O’ command.  This command is just an
auto-selecting version of the ‘a v’ command (*note Algebraic
Manipulation::).

   With a numeric prefix argument of 2, ‘C-u 2 j v’ applies the default
algebraic simplifications to the selected sub-formula.  With a prefix
argument of 3 or more, e.g., ‘C-u j v’ applies the ‘a e’
(‘calc-simplify-extended’) command.  *Note Simplifying Formulas::.  With
a negative prefix argument it simplifies at the top level only, just as
with ‘a v’.  Here the “top” level refers to the top level of the
selected sub-formula.

   The ‘j "’ (‘calc-sel-expand-formula’) command is to ‘a "’ (*note
Algebraic Manipulation::) what ‘j v’ is to ‘a v’.

   You can use the ‘j r’ (‘calc-rewrite-selection’) command to define
other algebraic operations on sub-formulas.  *Note Rewrite Rules::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Manipulation,  Next: Simplifying Formulas,  Prev: Selecting Subformulas,  Up: Algebra

11.2 Algebraic Manipulation
===========================

The commands in this section perform general-purpose algebraic
manipulations.  They work on the whole formula at the top of the stack
(unless, of course, you have made a selection in that formula).

   Many algebra commands prompt for a variable name or formula.  If you
answer the prompt with a blank line, the variable or formula is taken
from top-of-stack, and the normal argument for the command is taken from
the second-to-top stack level.

   The ‘a v’ (‘calc-alg-evaluate’) command performs the normal default
simplifications on a formula; for example, ‘a - -b’ is changed to ‘a +
b’.  These simplifications are normally done automatically on all Calc
results, so this command is useful only if you have turned default
simplifications off with an ‘m O’ command.  *Note Simplification
Modes::.

   It is often more convenient to type ‘=’, which is like ‘a v’ but
which also substitutes stored values for variables in the formula.  Use
‘a v’ if you want the variables to ignore their stored values.

   If you give a numeric prefix argument of 2 to ‘a v’, it simplifies
using Calc’s algebraic simplifications; *note Simplifying Formulas::.
If you give a numeric prefix of 3 or more, it uses Extended
Simplification mode (‘a e’).

   If you give a negative prefix argument -1, -2, or -3, it simplifies
in the corresponding mode but only works on the top-level function call
of the formula.  For example, ‘(2 + 3) * (2 + 3)’ will simplify to ‘(2 +
3)^2’, without simplifying the sub-formulas ‘2 + 3’.  As another
example, typing ‘V R +’ to sum the vector ‘[1, 2, 3, 4]’ produces the
formula ‘reduce(add, [1, 2, 3, 4])’ in No-Simplify mode.  Using ‘a v’
will evaluate this all the way to 10; using ‘C-u - a v’ will evaluate it
only to ‘1 + 2 + 3 + 4’.  (*Note Reducing and Mapping::.)

   The ‘=’ command corresponds to the ‘evalv’ function, and the related
‘N’ command, which is like ‘=’ but temporarily disables Symbolic mode
(‘m s’) during the evaluation, corresponds to the ‘evalvn’ function.
(These commands interpret their prefix arguments differently than ‘a v’;
‘=’ treats the prefix as the number of stack elements to evaluate at
once, and ‘N’ treats it as a temporary different working precision.)

   The ‘evalvn’ function can take an alternate working precision as an
optional second argument.  This argument can be either an integer, to
set the precision absolutely, or a vector containing a single integer,
to adjust the precision relative to the current precision.  Note that
‘evalvn’ with a larger than current precision will do the calculation at
this higher precision, but the result will as usual be rounded back down
to the current precision afterward.  For example, ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415)’
at a precision of 12 will return ‘9.265359e-5’; ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415,
30)’ will return ‘9.26535897932e-5’ (computing a 25-digit result which
is then rounded down to 12); and ‘evalvn(pi - 3.1415, [-2])’ will return
‘9.2654e-5’.

   The ‘a "’ (‘calc-expand-formula’) command expands functions into
their defining formulas wherever possible.  For example, ‘deg(x^2)’ is
changed to ‘180 x^2 / pi’.  Most functions, like ‘sin’ and ‘gcd’, are
not defined by simple formulas and so are unaffected by this command.
One important class of functions which _can_ be expanded is the
user-defined functions created by the ‘Z F’ command.  *Note Algebraic
Definitions::.  Other functions which ‘a "’ can expand include the
probability distribution functions, most of the financial functions, and
the hyperbolic and inverse hyperbolic functions.  A numeric prefix
argument affects ‘a "’ in the same way as it does ‘a v’: A positive
argument expands all functions in the formula and then simplifies in
various ways; a negative argument expands and simplifies only the
top-level function call.

   The ‘a M’ (‘calc-map-equation’) [‘mapeq’] command applies a given
function or operator to one or more equations.  It is analogous to ‘V
M’, which operates on vectors instead of equations.  *note Reducing and
Mapping::.  For example, ‘a M S’ changes ‘x = y+1’ to ‘sin(x) =
sin(y+1)’, and ‘a M +’ with ‘x = y+1’ and ‘6’ on the stack produces ‘x+6
= y+7’.  With two equations on the stack, ‘a M +’ would add the lefthand
sides together and the righthand sides together to get the two
respective sides of a new equation.

   Mapping also works on inequalities.  Mapping two similar inequalities
produces another inequality of the same type.  Mapping an inequality
with an equation produces an inequality of the same type.  Mapping a
‘<=’ with a ‘<’ or ‘!=’ (not-equal) produces a ‘<’.  If inequalities
with opposite direction (e.g., ‘<’ and ‘>’) are mapped, the direction of
the second inequality is reversed to match the first: Using ‘a M +’ on
‘a < b’ and ‘a > 2’ reverses the latter to get ‘2 < a’, which then
allows the combination ‘a + 2 < b + a’, which the algebraic
simplifications can reduce to ‘2 < b’.

   Using ‘a M *’, ‘a M /’, ‘a M n’, or ‘a M &’ to negate or invert an
inequality will reverse the direction of the inequality.  Other
adjustments to inequalities are _not_ done automatically; ‘a M S’ will
change ‘x < y’ to ‘sin(x) < sin(y)’ even though this is not true for all
values of the variables.

   With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H a M’ [‘mapeqp’] does a plain mapping
operation without reversing the direction of any inequalities.  Thus, ‘H
a M &’ would change ‘x > 2’ to ‘1/x > 0.5’.  (This change is
mathematically incorrect, but perhaps you were fixing an inequality
which was already incorrect.)

   With the Inverse flag, ‘I a M’ [‘mapeqr’] always reverses the
direction of the inequality.  You might use ‘I a M C’ to change ‘x < y’
to ‘cos(x) > cos(y)’ if you know you are working with small positive
angles.

   The ‘a b’ (‘calc-substitute’) [‘subst’] command substitutes all
occurrences of some variable or sub-expression of an expression with a
new sub-expression.  For example, substituting ‘sin(x)’ with ‘cos(y)’ in
‘2 sin(x)^2 + x sin(x) + sin(2 x)’ produces ‘2 cos(y)^2 + x cos(y) +
sin(2 x)’.  Note that this is a purely structural substitution; the lone
‘x’ and the ‘sin(2 x)’ stayed the same because they did not look like
‘sin(x)’.  *Note Rewrite Rules::, for a more general method for doing
substitutions.

   The ‘a b’ command normally prompts for two formulas, the old one and
the new one.  If you enter a blank line for the first prompt, all three
arguments are taken from the stack (new, then old, then target
expression).  If you type an old formula but then enter a blank line for
the new one, the new formula is taken from top-of-stack and the target
from second-to-top.  If you answer both prompts, the target is taken
from top-of-stack as usual.

   Note that ‘a b’ has no understanding of commutativity or
associativity.  The pattern ‘x+y’ will not match the formula ‘y+x’.
Also, ‘y+z’ will not match inside the formula ‘x+y+z’ because the ‘+’
operator is left-associative, so the “deep structure” of that formula is
‘(x+y) + z’.  Use ‘d U’ (‘calc-unformatted-language’) mode to see the
true structure of a formula.  The rewrite rule mechanism, discussed
later, does not have these limitations.

   As an algebraic function, ‘subst’ takes three arguments: Target
expression, old, new.  Note that ‘subst’ is always evaluated
immediately, even if its arguments are variables, so if you wish to put
a call to ‘subst’ onto the stack you must turn the default
simplifications off first (with ‘m O’).


File: calc.info,  Node: Simplifying Formulas,  Next: Polynomials,  Prev: Algebraic Manipulation,  Up: Algebra

11.3 Simplifying Formulas
=========================


   The sections below describe all the various kinds of simplifications
Calc provides in full detail.  None of Calc’s simplification commands
are designed to pull rabbits out of hats; they simply apply certain
specific rules to put formulas into less redundant or more pleasing
forms.  Serious algebra in Calc must be done manually, usually with a
combination of selections and rewrite rules.  *Note Rearranging with
Selections::.  *Note Rewrite Rules::.

   *Note Simplification Modes::, for commands to control what level of
simplification occurs automatically.  Normally the algebraic
simplifications described below occur.  If you have turned on a
simplification mode which does not do these algebraic simplifications,
you can still apply them to a formula with the ‘a s’ (‘calc-simplify’)
[‘simplify’] command.

   There are some simplifications that, while sometimes useful, are
never done automatically.  For example, the ‘I’ prefix can be given to
‘a s’; the ‘I a s’ command will change any trigonometric function to the
appropriate combination of ‘sin’s and ‘cos’s before simplifying.  This
can be useful in simplifying even mildly complicated trigonometric
expressions.  For example, while the algebraic simplifications can
reduce ‘sin(x) csc(x)’ to ‘1’, they will not simplify ‘sin(x)^2 csc(x)’.
The command ‘I a s’ can be used to simplify this latter expression; it
will transform ‘sin(x)^2 csc(x)’ into ‘sin(x)’.  However, ‘I a s’ will
also perform some “simplifications” which may not be desired; for
example, it will transform ‘tan(x)^2’ into ‘sin(x)^2 / cos(x)^2’.  The
Hyperbolic prefix ‘H’ can be used similarly; the ‘H a s’ will replace
any hyperbolic functions in the formula with the appropriate
combinations of ‘sinh’s and ‘cosh’s before simplifying.

* Menu:

* Basic Simplifications::
* Algebraic Simplifications::
* Unsafe Simplifications::
* Simplification of Units::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Simplifications,  Next: Algebraic Simplifications,  Prev: Simplifying Formulas,  Up: Simplifying Formulas

11.3.1 Basic Simplifications
----------------------------

This section describes basic simplifications which Calc performs in many
situations.  For example, both binary simplifications and algebraic
simplifications begin by performing these basic simplifications.  You
can type ‘m I’ to restrict the simplifications done on the stack to
these simplifications.

   The most basic simplification is the evaluation of functions.  For
example, ‘2 + 3’ is evaluated to ‘5’, and ‘sqrt(9)’ is evaluated to ‘3’.
Evaluation does not occur if the arguments to a function are somehow of
the wrong type ‘tan([2,3,4])’), range (‘tan(90)’), or number
(‘tan(3,5)’), or if the function name is not recognized (‘f(5)’), or if
Symbolic mode (*note Symbolic Mode::) prevents evaluation (‘sqrt(2)’).

   Calc simplifies (evaluates) the arguments to a function before it
simplifies the function itself.  Thus ‘sqrt(5+4)’ is simplified to
‘sqrt(9)’ before the ‘sqrt’ function itself is applied.  There are very
few exceptions to this rule: ‘quote’, ‘lambda’, and ‘condition’ (the
‘::’ operator) do not evaluate their arguments, ‘if’ (the ‘? :’
operator) does not evaluate all of its arguments, and ‘evalto’ does not
evaluate its lefthand argument.

   Most commands apply at least these basic simplifications to all
arguments they take from the stack, perform a particular operation, then
simplify the result before pushing it back on the stack.  In the common
special case of regular arithmetic commands like ‘+’ and ‘Q’ [‘sqrt’],
the arguments are simply popped from the stack and collected into a
suitable function call, which is then simplified (the arguments being
simplified first as part of the process, as described above).

   Even the basic set of simplifications are too numerous to describe
completely here, but this section will describe the ones that apply to
the major arithmetic operators.  This list will be rather technical in
nature, and will probably be interesting to you only if you are a
serious user of Calc’s algebra facilities.

   As well as the simplifications described here, if you have stored any
rewrite rules in the variable ‘EvalRules’ then these rules will also be
applied before any of the basic simplifications.  *Note Automatic
Rewrites::, for details.

   And now, on with the basic simplifications:

   Arithmetic operators like ‘+’ and ‘*’ always take two arguments in
Calc’s internal form.  Sums and products of three or more terms are
arranged by the associative law of algebra into a left-associative form
for sums, ‘((a + b) + c) + d’, and (by default) a right-associative form
for products, ‘a * (b * (c * d))’.  Formulas like ‘(a + b) + (c + d)’
are rearranged to left-associative form, though this rarely matters
since Calc’s algebra commands are designed to hide the inner structure
of sums and products as much as possible.  Sums and products in their
proper associative form will be written without parentheses in the
examples below.

   Sums and products are _not_ rearranged according to the commutative
law (‘a + b’ to ‘b + a’) except in a few special cases described below.
Some algebra programs always rearrange terms into a canonical order,
which enables them to see that ‘a b + b a’ can be simplified to ‘2 a b’.
If you are using Basic Simplification mode, Calc assumes you have put
the terms into the order you want and generally leaves that order alone,
with the consequence that formulas like the above will only be
simplified if you explicitly give the ‘a s’ command.  *Note Algebraic
Simplifications::.

   Differences ‘a - b’ are treated like sums ‘a + (-b)’ for purposes of
simplification; one of the default simplifications is to rewrite ‘a +
(-b)’ or ‘(-b) + a’, where ‘-b’ represents a “negative-looking” term,
into ‘a - b’ form.  “Negative-looking” means negative numbers, negated
formulas like ‘-x’, and products or quotients in which either term is
negative-looking.

   Other simplifications involving negation are ‘-(-x)’ to ‘x’; ‘-(a b)’
or ‘-(a/b)’ where either ‘a’ or ‘b’ is negative-looking, simplified by
negating that term, or else where ‘a’ or ‘b’ is any number, by negating
that number; ‘-(a + b)’ to ‘-a - b’, and ‘-(b - a)’ to ‘a - b’.  (This,
and rewriting ‘(-b) + a’ to ‘a - b’, are the only cases where the order
of terms in a sum is changed by the default simplifications.)

   The distributive law is used to simplify sums in some cases: ‘a x + b
x’ to ‘(a + b) x’, where ‘a’ represents a number or an implicit 1 or -1
(as in ‘x’ or ‘-x’) and similarly for ‘b’.  Use the ‘a c’, ‘a f’, or ‘j
M’ commands to merge sums with non-numeric coefficients using the
distributive law.

   The distributive law is only used for sums of two terms, or for
adjacent terms in a larger sum.  Thus ‘a + b + b + c’ is simplified to
‘a + 2 b + c’, but ‘a + b + c + b’ is not simplified.  The reason is
that comparing all terms of a sum with one another would require time
proportional to the square of the number of terms; Calc omits
potentially slow operations like this in basic simplification mode.

   Finally, ‘a + 0’ and ‘0 + a’ are simplified to ‘a’.  A consequence of
the above rules is that ‘0 - a’ is simplified to ‘-a’.

   The products ‘1 a’ and ‘a 1’ are simplified to ‘a’; ‘(-1) a’ and ‘a
(-1)’ are simplified to ‘-a’; ‘0 a’ and ‘a 0’ are simplified to ‘0’,
except that in Matrix mode where ‘a’ is not provably scalar the result
is the generic zero matrix ‘idn(0)’, and that if ‘a’ is infinite the
result is ‘nan’.

   Also, ‘(-a) b’ and ‘a (-b)’ are simplified to ‘-(a b)’, where this
occurs for negated formulas but not for regular negative numbers.

   Products are commuted only to move numbers to the front: ‘a b 2’ is
commuted to ‘2 a b’.

   The product ‘a (b + c)’ is distributed over the sum only if ‘a’ and
at least one of ‘b’ and ‘c’ are numbers: ‘2 (x + 3)’ goes to ‘2 x + 6’.
The formula ‘(-a) (b - c)’, where ‘-a’ is a negative number, is
rewritten to ‘a (c - b)’.

   The distributive law of products and powers is used for adjacent
terms of the product: ‘x^a x^b’ goes to ‘x^(a+b)’ where ‘a’ is a number,
or an implicit 1 (as in ‘x’), or the implicit one-half of ‘sqrt(x)’, and
similarly for ‘b’.  The result is written using ‘sqrt’ or ‘1/sqrt’ if
the sum of the powers is ‘1/2’ or ‘-1/2’, respectively.  If the sum of
the powers is zero, the product is simplified to ‘1’ or to ‘idn(1)’ if
Matrix mode is enabled.

   The product of a negative power times anything but another negative
power is changed to use division: ‘x^(-2) y’ goes to ‘y / x^2’ unless
Matrix mode is in effect and neither ‘x’ nor ‘y’ are scalar (in which
case it is considered unsafe to rearrange the order of the terms).

   Finally, ‘a (b/c)’ is rewritten to ‘(a b)/c’, and also ‘(a/b) c’ is
changed to ‘(a c)/b’ unless in Matrix mode.

   Simplifications for quotients are analogous to those for products.
The quotient ‘0 / x’ is simplified to ‘0’, with the same exceptions that
were noted for ‘0 x’.  Likewise, ‘x / 1’ and ‘x / (-1)’ are simplified
to ‘x’ and ‘-x’, respectively.

   The quotient ‘x / 0’ is left unsimplified or changed to an infinite
quantity, as directed by the current infinite mode.  *Note Infinite
Mode::.

   The expression ‘a / b^(-c)’ is changed to ‘a b^c’, where ‘-c’ is any
negative-looking power.  Also, ‘1 / b^c’ is changed to ‘b^(-c)’ for any
power ‘c’.

   Also, ‘(-a) / b’ and ‘a / (-b)’ go to ‘-(a/b)’; ‘(a/b) / c’ goes to
‘a / (b c)’; and ‘a / (b/c)’ goes to ‘(a c) / b’ unless Matrix mode
prevents this rearrangement.  Similarly, ‘a / (b:c)’ is simplified to
‘(c:b) a’ for any fraction ‘b:c’.

   The distributive law is applied to ‘(a + b) / c’ only if ‘c’ and at
least one of ‘a’ and ‘b’ are numbers.  Quotients of powers and square
roots are distributed just as described for multiplication.

   Quotients of products cancel only in the leading terms of the
numerator and denominator.  In other words, ‘a x b / a y b’ is canceled
to ‘x b / y b’ but not to ‘x / y’.  Once again this is because full
cancellation can be slow; use ‘a s’ to cancel all terms of the quotient.

   Quotients of negative-looking values are simplified according to
‘(-a) / (-b)’ to ‘a / b’, ‘(-a) / (b - c)’ to ‘a / (c - b)’, and ‘(a -
b) / (-c)’ to ‘(b - a) / c’.

   The formula ‘x^0’ is simplified to ‘1’, or to ‘idn(1)’ in Matrix
mode.  The formula ‘0^x’ is simplified to ‘0’ unless ‘x’ is a negative
number, complex number or zero.  If ‘x’ is negative, complex or ‘0.0’,
‘0^x’ is an infinity or an unsimplified formula according to the current
infinite mode.  The expression ‘0^0’ is simplified to ‘1’.

   Powers of products or quotients ‘(a b)^c’, ‘(a/b)^c’ are distributed
to ‘a^c b^c’, ‘a^c / b^c’ only if ‘c’ is an integer, or if either ‘a’ or
‘b’ are nonnegative real numbers.  Powers of powers ‘(a^b)^c’ are
simplified to ‘a^(b c)’ only when ‘c’ is an integer and ‘b c’ also
evaluates to an integer.  Without these restrictions these
simplifications would not be safe because of problems with principal
values.  (In other words, ‘((-3)^1:2)^2’ is safe to simplify, but
‘((-3)^2)^1:2’ is not.)  *Note Declarations::, for ways to inform Calc
that your variables satisfy these requirements.

   As a special case of this rule, ‘sqrt(x)^n’ is simplified to
‘x^(n/2)’ only for even integers ‘n’.

   If ‘a’ is known to be real, ‘b’ is an even integer, and ‘c’ is a
half- or quarter-integer, then ‘(a^b)^c’ is simplified to ‘abs(a^(b
c))’.

   Also, ‘(-a)^b’ is simplified to ‘a^b’ if ‘b’ is an even integer, or
to ‘-(a^b)’ if ‘b’ is an odd integer, for any negative-looking
expression ‘-a’.

   Square roots ‘sqrt(x)’ generally act like one-half powers ‘x^1:2’ for
the purposes of the above-listed simplifications.

   Also, note that ‘1 / x^1:2’ is changed to ‘x^(-1:2)’, but ‘1 /
sqrt(x)’ is left alone.

   Generic identity matrices (*note Matrix Mode::) are simplified by the
following rules: ‘idn(a) + b’ to ‘a + b’ if ‘b’ is provably scalar, or
expanded out if ‘b’ is a matrix; ‘idn(a) + idn(b)’ to ‘idn(a + b)’;
‘-idn(a)’ to ‘idn(-a)’; ‘a idn(b)’ to ‘idn(a b)’ if ‘a’ is provably
scalar, or to ‘a b’ if ‘a’ is provably non-scalar; ‘idn(a) idn(b)’ to
‘idn(a b)’; analogous simplifications for quotients involving ‘idn’; and
‘idn(a)^n’ to ‘idn(a^n)’ where ‘n’ is an integer.

   The ‘floor’ function and other integer truncation functions vanish if
the argument is provably integer-valued, so that ‘floor(round(x))’
simplifies to ‘round(x)’.  Also, combinations of ‘float’, ‘floor’ and
its friends, and ‘ffloor’ and its friends, are simplified in appropriate
ways.  *Note Integer Truncation::.

   The expression ‘abs(-x)’ changes to ‘abs(x)’.  The expression
‘abs(abs(x))’ changes to ‘abs(x)’; in fact, ‘abs(x)’ changes to ‘x’ or
‘-x’ if ‘x’ is provably nonnegative or nonpositive (*note
Declarations::).

   While most functions do not recognize the variable ‘i’ as an
imaginary number, the ‘arg’ function does handle the two cases ‘arg(i)’
and ‘arg(-i)’ just for convenience.

   The expression ‘conj(conj(x))’ simplifies to ‘x’.  Various other
expressions involving ‘conj’, ‘re’, and ‘im’ are simplified, especially
if some of the arguments are provably real or involve the constant ‘i’.
For example, ‘conj(a + b i)’ is changed to ‘conj(a) - conj(b) i’, or to
‘a - b i’ if ‘a’ and ‘b’ are known to be real.

   Functions like ‘sin’ and ‘arctan’ generally don’t have any default
simplifications beyond simply evaluating the functions for suitable
numeric arguments and infinity.  The algebraic simplifications described
in the next section do provide some simplifications for these functions,
though.

   One important simplification that does occur is that ‘ln(e)’ is
simplified to 1, and ‘ln(e^x)’ is simplified to ‘x’ for any ‘x’.  This
occurs even if you have stored a different value in the Calc variable
‘e’; but this would be a bad idea in any case if you were also using
natural logarithms!

   Among the logical functions, !(A <= B) changes to A > B and so on.
Equations and inequalities where both sides are either negative-looking
or zero are simplified by negating both sides and reversing the
inequality.  While it might seem reasonable to simplify ‘!!x’ to ‘x’,
this would not be valid in general because ‘!!2’ is 1, not 2.

   Most other Calc functions have few if any basic simplifications
defined, aside of course from evaluation when the arguments are suitable
numbers.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Simplifications,  Next: Unsafe Simplifications,  Prev: Basic Simplifications,  Up: Simplifying Formulas

11.3.2 Algebraic Simplifications
--------------------------------

This section describes all simplifications that are performed by the
algebraic simplification mode, which is the default simplification mode.
If you have switched to a different simplification mode, you can switch
back with the ‘m A’ command.  Even in other simplification modes, the ‘a
s’ command will use these algebraic simplifications to simplify the
formula.

   There is a variable, ‘AlgSimpRules’, in which you can put rewrites to
be applied.  Its use is analogous to ‘EvalRules’, but without the
special restrictions.  Basically, the simplifier does ‘a r AlgSimpRules’
with an infinite repeat count on the whole expression being simplified,
then it traverses the expression applying the built-in rules described
below.  If the result is different from the original expression, the
process repeats with the basic simplifications (including ‘EvalRules’),
then ‘AlgSimpRules’, then the built-in simplifications, and so on.

   Sums are simplified in two ways.  Constant terms are commuted to the
end of the sum, so that ‘a + 2 + b’ changes to ‘a + b + 2’.  The only
exception is that a constant will not be commuted away from the first
position of a difference, i.e., ‘2 - x’ is not commuted to ‘-x + 2’.

   Also, terms of sums are combined by the distributive law, as in ‘x +
y + 2 x’ to ‘y + 3 x’.  This always occurs for adjacent terms, but
Calc’s algebraic simplifications compare all pairs of terms including
non-adjacent ones.

   Products are sorted into a canonical order using the commutative law.
For example, ‘b c a’ is commuted to ‘a b c’.  This allows easier
comparison of products; for example, the basic simplifications will not
change ‘x y + y x’ to ‘2 x y’, but the algebraic simplifications; it
first rewrites the sum to ‘x y + x y’ which can then be recognized as a
sum of identical terms.

   The canonical ordering used to sort terms of products has the
property that real-valued numbers, interval forms and infinities come
first, and are sorted into increasing order.  The ‘V S’ command uses the
same ordering when sorting a vector.

   Sorting of terms of products is inhibited when Matrix mode is turned
on; in this case, Calc will never exchange the order of two terms unless
it knows at least one of the terms is a scalar.

   Products of powers are distributed by comparing all pairs of terms,
using the same method that the default simplifications use for adjacent
terms of products.

   Even though sums are not sorted, the commutative law is still taken
into account when terms of a product are being compared.  Thus ‘(x + y)
(y + x)’ will be simplified to ‘(x + y)^2’.  A subtle point is that ‘(x
- y) (y - x)’ will _not_ be simplified to ‘-(x - y)^2’; Calc does not
notice that one term can be written as a constant times the other, even
if that constant is -1.

   A fraction times any expression, ‘(a:b) x’, is changed to a quotient
involving integers: ‘a x / b’.  This is not done for floating-point
numbers like ‘0.5’, however.  This is one reason why you may find it
convenient to turn Fraction mode on while doing algebra; *note Fraction
Mode::.

   Quotients are simplified by comparing all terms in the numerator with
all terms in the denominator for possible cancellation using the
distributive law.  For example, ‘a x^2 b / c x^3 d’ will cancel ‘x^2’
from the top and bottom to get ‘a b / c x d’.  (The terms in the
denominator will then be rearranged to ‘c d x’ as described above.)  If
there is any common integer or fractional factor in the numerator and
denominator, it is canceled out; for example, ‘(4 x + 6) / 8 x’
simplifies to ‘(2 x + 3) / 4 x’.

   Non-constant common factors are not found even by algebraic
simplifications.  To cancel the factor ‘a’ in ‘(a x + a) / a^2’ you
could first use ‘j M’ on the product ‘a x’ to Merge the numerator to ‘a
(1+x)’, which can then be simplified successfully.

   Integer powers of the variable ‘i’ are simplified according to the
identity ‘i^2 = -1’.  If you store a new value other than the complex
number ‘(0,1)’ in ‘i’, this simplification will no longer occur.  This
is not done by the basic simplifications; in case someone (unwisely)
wants to use the name ‘i’ for a variable unrelated to complex numbers,
they can use basic simplification mode.

   Square roots of integer or rational arguments are simplified in
several ways.  (Note that these will be left unevaluated only in
Symbolic mode.)  First, square integer or rational factors are pulled
out so that ‘sqrt(8)’ is rewritten as ‘2 sqrt(2)’.  Conceptually
speaking this implies factoring the argument into primes and moving
pairs of primes out of the square root, but for reasons of efficiency
Calc only looks for primes up to 29.

   Square roots in the denominator of a quotient are moved to the
numerator: ‘1 / sqrt(3)’ changes to ‘sqrt(3) / 3’.  The same effect
occurs for the square root of a fraction: ‘sqrt(2:3)’ changes to
‘sqrt(6) / 3’.

   The ‘%’ (modulo) operator is simplified in several ways when the
modulus ‘M’ is a positive real number.  First, if the argument is of the
form ‘x + n’ for some real number ‘n’, then ‘n’ is itself reduced modulo
‘M’.  For example, ‘(x - 23) % 10’ is simplified to ‘(x + 7) % 10’.

   If the argument is multiplied by a constant, and this constant has a
common integer divisor with the modulus, then this factor is canceled
out.  For example, ‘12 x % 15’ is changed to ‘3 (4 x % 5)’ by factoring
out 3.  Also, ‘(12 x + 1) % 15’ is changed to ‘3 ((4 x + 1:3) % 5)’.
While these forms may not seem “simpler,” they allow Calc to discover
useful information about modulo forms in the presence of declarations.

   If the modulus is 1, then Calc can use ‘int’ declarations to evaluate
the expression.  For example, the idiom ‘x % 2’ is often used to check
whether a number is odd or even.  As described above, ‘2 n % 2’ and ‘(2
n + 1) % 2’ are simplified to ‘2 (n % 1)’ and ‘2 ((n + 1:2) % 1)’,
respectively; Calc can simplify these to 0 and 1 (respectively) if ‘n’
has been declared to be an integer.

   Trigonometric functions are simplified in several ways.  Whenever a
products of two trigonometric functions can be replaced by a single
function, the replacement is made; for example, ‘tan(x) cos(x)’ is
simplified to ‘sin(x)’.  Reciprocals of trigonometric functions are
replaced by their reciprocal function; for example, ‘1/sec(x)’ is
simplified to ‘cos(x)’.  The corresponding simplifications for the
hyperbolic functions are also handled.

   Trigonometric functions of their inverse functions are simplified.
The expression ‘sin(arcsin(x))’ is simplified to ‘x’, and similarly for
‘cos’ and ‘tan’.  Trigonometric functions of inverses of different
trigonometric functions can also be simplified, as in ‘sin(arccos(x))’
to ‘sqrt(1 - x^2)’.

   If the argument to ‘sin’ is negative-looking, it is simplified to
‘-sin(x)’, and similarly for ‘cos’ and ‘tan’.  Finally, certain special
values of the argument are recognized; *note Trigonometric and
Hyperbolic Functions::.

   Hyperbolic functions of their inverses and of negative-looking
arguments are also handled, as are exponentials of inverse hyperbolic
functions.

   No simplifications for inverse trigonometric and hyperbolic functions
are known, except for negative arguments of ‘arcsin’, ‘arctan’,
‘arcsinh’, and ‘arctanh’.  Note that ‘arcsin(sin(x))’ can _not_ safely
change to ‘x’, since this only correct within an integer multiple of ‘2
pi’ radians or 360 degrees.  However, ‘arcsinh(sinh(x))’ is simplified
to ‘x’ if ‘x’ is known to be real.

   Several simplifications that apply to logarithms and exponentials are
that ‘exp(ln(x))’, ‘e^ln(x)’, and ‘10^log10(x)’ all reduce to ‘x’.
Also, ‘ln(exp(x))’, etc., can reduce to ‘x’ if ‘x’ is provably real.
The form ‘exp(x)^y’ is simplified to ‘exp(x y)’.  If ‘x’ is a suitable
multiple of ‘pi i’ (as described above for the trigonometric functions),
then ‘exp(x)’ or ‘e^x’ will be expanded.  Finally, ‘ln(x)’ is simplified
to a form involving ‘pi’ and ‘i’ where ‘x’ is provably negative,
positive imaginary, or negative imaginary.

   The error functions ‘erf’ and ‘erfc’ are simplified when their
arguments are negative-looking or are calls to the ‘conj’ function.

   Equations and inequalities are simplified by canceling factors of
products, quotients, or sums on both sides.  Inequalities change sign if
a negative multiplicative factor is canceled.  Non-constant
multiplicative factors as in ‘a b = a c’ are canceled from equations
only if they are provably nonzero (generally because they were declared
so; *note Declarations::).  Factors are canceled from inequalities only
if they are nonzero and their sign is known.

   Simplification also replaces an equation or inequality with 1 or 0
(“true” or “false”) if it can through the use of declarations.  If ‘x’
is declared to be an integer greater than 5, then ‘x < 3’, ‘x = 3’, and
‘x = 7.5’ are all simplified to 0, but ‘x > 3’ is simplified to 1.  By a
similar analysis, ‘abs(x) >= 0’ is simplified to 1, as is ‘x^2 >= 0’ if
‘x’ is known to be real.


File: calc.info,  Node: Unsafe Simplifications,  Next: Simplification of Units,  Prev: Algebraic Simplifications,  Up: Simplifying Formulas

11.3.3 “Unsafe” Simplifications
-------------------------------

Calc is capable of performing some simplifications which may sometimes
be desired but which are not “safe” in all cases.  The ‘a e’
(‘calc-simplify-extended’) [‘esimplify’] command applies the algebraic
simplifications as well as these extended, or “unsafe”, simplifications.
Use this only if you know the values in your formula lie in the
restricted ranges for which these simplifications are valid.  You can
use Extended Simplification mode (‘m E’) to have these simplifications
done automatically.

   The symbolic integrator uses these extended simplifications; one
effect of this is that the integrator’s results must be used with
caution.  Where an integral table will often attach conditions like “for
positive ‘a’ only,” Calc (like most other symbolic integration programs)
will simply produce an unqualified result.

   Because ‘a e’’s simplifications are unsafe, it is sometimes better to
type ‘C-u -3 a v’, which does extended simplification only on the top
level of the formula without affecting the sub-formulas.  In fact, ‘C-u
-3 j v’ allows you to target extended simplification to any specific
part of a formula.

   The variable ‘ExtSimpRules’ contains rewrites to be applied when the
extended simplifications are used.  These are applied in addition to
‘EvalRules’ and ‘AlgSimpRules’.  (The ‘a r AlgSimpRules’ step described
above is simply followed by an ‘a r ExtSimpRules’ step.)

   Following is a complete list of the “unsafe” simplifications.

   Inverse trigonometric or hyperbolic functions, called with their
corresponding non-inverse functions as arguments, are simplified.  For
example, ‘arcsin(sin(x))’ changes to ‘x’.  Also, ‘arcsin(cos(x))’ and
‘arccos(sin(x))’ both change to ‘pi/2 - x’.  These simplifications are
unsafe because they are valid only for values of ‘x’ in a certain range;
outside that range, values are folded down to the 360-degree range that
the inverse trigonometric functions always produce.

   Powers of powers ‘(x^a)^b’ are simplified to ‘x^(a b)’ for all ‘a’
and ‘b’.  These results will be valid only in a restricted range of ‘x’;
for example, in ‘(x^2)^1:2’ the powers cancel to get ‘x’, which is valid
for positive values of ‘x’ but not for negative or complex values.

   Similarly, ‘sqrt(x^a)’ and ‘sqrt(x)^a’ are both simplified (possibly
unsafely) to ‘x^(a/2)’.

   Forms like ‘sqrt(1 - sin(x)^2)’ are simplified to, e.g., ‘cos(x)’.
Calc has identities of this sort for ‘sin’, ‘cos’, ‘tan’, ‘sinh’, and
‘cosh’.

   Arguments of square roots are partially factored to look for squared
terms that can be extracted.  For example, ‘sqrt(a^2 b^3 + a^3 b^2)’
simplifies to ‘a b sqrt(a+b)’.

   The simplifications of ‘ln(exp(x))’, ‘ln(e^x)’, and ‘log10(10^x)’ to
‘x’ are also unsafe because of problems with principal values (although
these simplifications are safe if ‘x’ is known to be real).

   Common factors are canceled from products on both sides of an
equation, even if those factors may be zero: ‘a x / b x’ to ‘a / b’.
Such factors are never canceled from inequalities: Even the extended
simplifications are not bold enough to reduce ‘a x < b x’ to ‘a < b’ (or
‘a > b’, depending on whether you believe ‘x’ is positive or negative).
The ‘a M /’ command can be used to divide a factor out of both sides of
an inequality.


File: calc.info,  Node: Simplification of Units,  Prev: Unsafe Simplifications,  Up: Simplifying Formulas

11.3.4 Simplification of Units
------------------------------

The simplifications described in this section (as well as the algebraic
simplifications) are applied when units need to be simplified.  They can
be applied using the ‘u s’ (‘calc-simplify-units’) command, or will be
done automatically in Units Simplification mode (‘m U’).  *Note Basic
Operations on Units::.

   The variable ‘UnitSimpRules’ contains rewrites to be applied by units
simplifications.  These are applied in addition to ‘EvalRules’ and
‘AlgSimpRules’.

   Scalar mode is automatically put into effect when simplifying units.
*Note Matrix Mode::.

   Sums ‘a + b’ involving units are simplified by extracting the units
of ‘a’ as if by the ‘u x’ command (call the result ‘u_a’), then
simplifying the expression ‘b / u_a’ using ‘u b’ and ‘u s’.  If the
result has units then the sum is inconsistent and is left alone.
Otherwise, it is rewritten in terms of the units ‘u_a’.

   If units auto-ranging mode is enabled, products or quotients in which
the first argument is a number which is out of range for the leading
unit are modified accordingly.

   When canceling and combining units in products and quotients, Calc
accounts for unit names that differ only in the prefix letter.  For
example, ‘2 km m’ is simplified to ‘2000 m^2’.  However, compatible but
different units like ‘ft’ and ‘in’ are not combined in this way.

   Quotients ‘a / b’ are simplified in three additional ways.  First, if
‘b’ is a number or a product beginning with a number, Calc computes the
reciprocal of this number and moves it to the numerator.

   Second, for each pair of unit names from the numerator and
denominator of a quotient, if the units are compatible (e.g., they are
both units of area) then they are replaced by the ratio between those
units.  For example, in ‘3 s in N / kg cm’ the units ‘in / cm’ will be
replaced by ‘2.54’.

   Third, if the units in the quotient exactly cancel out, so that a ‘u
b’ command on the quotient would produce a dimensionless number for an
answer, then the quotient simplifies to that number.

   For powers and square roots, the “unsafe” simplifications ‘(a b)^c’
to ‘a^c b^c’, ‘(a/b)^c’ to ‘a^c / b^c’, and ‘(a^b)^c’ to ‘a^(b c)’ are
done if the powers are real numbers.  (These are safe in the context of
units because all numbers involved can reasonably be assumed to be
real.)

   Also, if a unit name is raised to a fractional power, and the base
units in that unit name all occur to powers which are a multiple of the
denominator of the power, then the unit name is expanded out into its
base units, which can then be simplified according to the previous
paragraph.  For example, ‘acre^1.5’ is simplified by noting that ‘1.5 =
3:2’, that ‘acre’ is defined in terms of ‘m^2’, and that the 2 in the
power of ‘m’ is a multiple of 2 in ‘3:2’.  Thus, ‘acre^1.5’ is replaced
by approximately ‘(4046 m^2)^1.5’, which is then changed to ‘4046^1.5
(m^2)^1.5’, then to ‘257440 m^3’.

   The functions ‘float’, ‘frac’, ‘clean’, ‘abs’, as well as ‘floor’ and
the other integer truncation functions, applied to unit names or
products or quotients involving units, are simplified.  For example,
‘round(1.6 in)’ is changed to ‘round(1.6) round(in)’; the lefthand term
evaluates to 2, and the righthand term simplifies to ‘in’.

   The functions ‘sin’, ‘cos’, and ‘tan’ with arguments that have
angular units like ‘rad’ or ‘arcmin’ are simplified by converting to
base units (radians), then evaluating with the angular mode temporarily
set to radians.


File: calc.info,  Node: Polynomials,  Next: Calculus,  Prev: Simplifying Formulas,  Up: Algebra

11.4 Polynomials
================

A “polynomial” is a sum of terms which are coefficients times various
powers of a “base” variable.  For example, ‘2 x^2 + 3 x - 4’ is a
polynomial in ‘x’.  Some formulas can be considered polynomials in
several different variables: ‘1 + 2 x + 3 y + 4 x y^2’ is a polynomial
in both ‘x’ and ‘y’.  Polynomial coefficients are often numbers, but
they may in general be any formulas not involving the base variable.

   The ‘a f’ (‘calc-factor’) [‘factor’] command factors a polynomial
into a product of terms.  For example, the polynomial ‘x^3 + 2 x^2 + x’
is factored into ‘x*(x+1)^2’.  As another example, ‘a c + b d + b c + a
d’ is factored into the product ‘(a + b) (c + d)’.

   Calc currently has three algorithms for factoring.  Formulas which
are linear in several variables, such as the second example above, are
merged according to the distributive law.  Formulas which are
polynomials in a single variable, with constant integer or fractional
coefficients, are factored into irreducible linear and/or quadratic
terms.  The first example above factors into three linear terms (‘x’,
‘x+1’, and ‘x+1’ again).  Finally, formulas which do not fit the above
criteria are handled by the algebraic rewrite mechanism.

   Calc’s polynomial factorization algorithm works by using the general
root-finding command (‘a P’) to solve for the roots of the polynomial.
It then looks for roots which are rational numbers or complex-conjugate
pairs, and converts these into linear and quadratic terms, respectively.
Because it uses floating-point arithmetic, it may be unable to find
terms that involve large integers (whose number of digits approaches the
current precision).  Also, irreducible factors of degree higher than
quadratic are not found, and polynomials in more than one variable are
not treated.  (A more robust factorization algorithm may be included in
a future version of Calc.)

   The rewrite-based factorization method uses rules stored in the
variable ‘FactorRules’.  *Note Rewrite Rules::, for a discussion of the
operation of rewrite rules.  The default ‘FactorRules’ are able to
factor quadratic forms symbolically into two linear terms, ‘(a x + b) (c
x + d)’.  You can edit these rules to include other cases if you wish.
To use the rules, Calc builds the formula ‘thecoefs(x, [a, b, c, ...])’
where ‘x’ is the polynomial base variable and ‘a’, ‘b’, etc., are
polynomial coefficients (which may be numbers or formulas).  The
constant term is written first, i.e., in the ‘a’ position.  When the
rules complete, they should have changed the formula into the form
‘thefactors(x, [f1, f2, f3, ...])’ where each ‘fi’ should be a factored
term, e.g., ‘x - ai’.  Calc then multiplies these terms together to get
the complete factored form of the polynomial.  If the rules do not
change the ‘thecoefs’ call to a ‘thefactors’ call, ‘a f’ leaves the
polynomial alone on the assumption that it is unfactorable.  (Note that
the function names ‘thecoefs’ and ‘thefactors’ are used only as
placeholders; there are no actual Calc functions by those names.)

   The ‘H a f’ [‘factors’] command also factors a polynomial, but it
returns a list of factors instead of an expression which is the product
of the factors.  Each factor is represented by a sub-vector of the
factor, and the power with which it appears.  For example, ‘x^5 + x^4 -
33 x^3 + 63 x^2’ factors to ‘(x + 7) x^2 (x - 3)^2’ in ‘a f’, or to ‘[
[x, 2], [x+7, 1], [x-3, 2] ]’ in ‘H a f’.  If there is an overall
numeric factor, it always comes first in the list.  The functions
‘factor’ and ‘factors’ allow a second argument when written in algebraic
form; ‘factor(x,v)’ factors ‘x’ with respect to the specific variable
‘v’.  The default is to factor with respect to all the variables that
appear in ‘x’.

   The ‘a c’ (‘calc-collect’) [‘collect’] command rearranges a formula
as a polynomial in a given variable, ordered in decreasing powers of
that variable.  For example, given ‘1 + 2 x + 3 y + 4 x y^2’ on the
stack, ‘a c x’ would produce ‘(2 + 4 y^2) x + (1 + 3 y)’, and ‘a c y’
would produce ‘(4 x) y^2 + 3 y + (1 + 2 x)’.  The polynomial will be
expanded out using the distributive law as necessary: Collecting ‘x’ in
‘(x - 1)^3’ produces ‘x^3 - 3 x^2 + 3 x - 1’.  Terms not involving ‘x’
will not be expanded.

   The “variable” you specify at the prompt can actually be any
expression: ‘a c ln(x+1)’ will collect together all terms multiplied by
‘ln(x+1)’ or integer powers thereof.  If ‘x’ also appears in the formula
in a context other than ‘ln(x+1)’, ‘a c’ will treat those occurrences as
unrelated to ‘ln(x+1)’, i.e., as constants.

   The ‘a x’ (‘calc-expand’) [‘expand’] command expands an expression by
applying the distributive law everywhere.  It applies to products,
quotients, and powers involving sums.  By default, it fully distributes
all parts of the expression.  With a numeric prefix argument, the
distributive law is applied only the specified number of times, then the
partially expanded expression is left on the stack.

   The ‘a x’ and ‘j D’ commands are somewhat redundant.  Use ‘a x’ if
you want to expand all products of sums in your formula.  Use ‘j D’ if
you want to expand a particular specified term of the formula.  There is
an exactly analogous correspondence between ‘a f’ and ‘j M’.  (The ‘j D’
and ‘j M’ commands also know many other kinds of expansions, such as
‘exp(a + b) = exp(a) exp(b)’, which ‘a x’ and ‘a f’ do not do.)

   Calc’s automatic simplifications will sometimes reverse a partial
expansion.  For example, the first step in expanding ‘(x+1)^3’ is to
write ‘(x+1) (x+1)^2’.  If ‘a x’ stops there and tries to put this
formula onto the stack, though, Calc will automatically simplify it back
to ‘(x+1)^3’ form.  The solution is to turn simplification off first
(*note Simplification Modes::), or to run ‘a x’ without a numeric prefix
argument so that it expands all the way in one step.

   The ‘a a’ (‘calc-apart’) [‘apart’] command expands a rational
function by partial fractions.  A rational function is the quotient of
two polynomials; ‘apart’ pulls this apart into a sum of rational
functions with simple denominators.  In algebraic notation, the ‘apart’
function allows a second argument that specifies which variable to use
as the “base”; by default, Calc chooses the base variable automatically.

   The ‘a n’ (‘calc-normalize-rat’) [‘nrat’] command attempts to arrange
a formula into a quotient of two polynomials.  For example, given ‘1 +
(a + b/c) / d’, the result would be ‘(b + a c + c d) / c d’.  The
quotient is reduced, so that ‘a n’ will simplify ‘(x^2 + 2x + 1) / (x^2
- 1)’ by dividing out the common factor ‘x + 1’, yielding ‘(x + 1) / (x
- 1)’.

   The ‘a \’ (‘calc-poly-div’) [‘pdiv’] command divides two polynomials
‘u’ and ‘v’, yielding a new polynomial ‘q’.  If several variables occur
in the inputs, the inputs are considered multivariate polynomials.
(Calc divides by the variable with the largest power in ‘u’ first, or,
in the case of equal powers, chooses the variables in alphabetical
order.)  For example, dividing ‘x^2 + 3 x + 2’ by ‘x + 2’ yields ‘x +
1’.  The remainder from the division, if any, is reported at the bottom
of the screen and is also placed in the Trail along with the quotient.

   Using ‘pdiv’ in algebraic notation, you can specify the particular
variable to be used as the base: ‘pdiv(A,B,X)’.  If ‘pdiv’ is given only
two arguments (as is always the case with the ‘a \’ command), then it
does a multivariate division as outlined above.

   The ‘a %’ (‘calc-poly-rem’) [‘prem’] command divides two polynomials
and keeps the remainder ‘r’.  The quotient ‘q’ is discarded.  For any
formulas ‘a’ and ‘b’, the results of ‘a \’ and ‘a %’ satisfy ‘a = q b +
r’.  (This is analogous to plain ‘\’ and ‘%’, which compute the integer
quotient and remainder from dividing two numbers.)

   The ‘a /’ (‘calc-poly-div-rem’) [‘pdivrem’] command divides two
polynomials and reports both the quotient and the remainder as a vector
‘[q, r]’.  The ‘H a /’ [‘pdivide’] command divides two polynomials and
constructs the formula ‘q + r/b’ on the stack.  (Naturally if the
remainder is zero, this will immediately simplify to ‘q’.)

   The ‘a g’ (‘calc-poly-gcd’) [‘pgcd’] command computes the greatest
common divisor of two polynomials.  (The GCD actually is unique only to
within a constant multiplier; Calc attempts to choose a GCD which will
be unsurprising.)  For example, the ‘a n’ command uses ‘a g’ to take the
GCD of the numerator and denominator of a quotient, then divides each by
the result using ‘a \’.  (The definition of GCD ensures that this
division can take place without leaving a remainder.)

   While the polynomials used in operations like ‘a /’ and ‘a g’ often
have integer coefficients, this is not required.  Calc can also deal
with polynomials over the rationals or floating-point reals.
Polynomials with modulo-form coefficients are also useful in many
applications; if you enter ‘(x^2 + 3 x - 1) mod 5’, Calc automatically
transforms this into a polynomial over the field of integers mod 5: ‘(1
mod 5) x^2 + (3 mod 5) x + (4 mod 5)’.

   Congratulations and thanks go to Ove Ewerlid
(‘ewerlid@mizar.DoCS.UU.SE’), who contributed many of the polynomial
routines used in the above commands.

   *Note Decomposing Polynomials::, for several useful functions for
extracting the individual coefficients of a polynomial.


File: calc.info,  Node: Calculus,  Next: Solving Equations,  Prev: Polynomials,  Up: Algebra

11.5 Calculus
=============

The following calculus commands do not automatically simplify their
inputs or outputs using ‘calc-simplify’.  You may find it helps to do
this by hand by typing ‘a s’ or ‘a e’.  It may also help to use ‘a x’
and/or ‘a c’ to arrange a result in the most readable way.

* Menu:

* Differentiation::
* Integration::
* Customizing the Integrator::
* Numerical Integration::
* Taylor Series::


File: calc.info,  Node: Differentiation,  Next: Integration,  Prev: Calculus,  Up: Calculus

11.5.1 Differentiation
----------------------

The ‘a d’ (‘calc-derivative’) [‘deriv’] command computes the derivative
of the expression on the top of the stack with respect to some variable,
which it will prompt you to enter.  Normally, variables in the formula
other than the specified differentiation variable are considered
constant, i.e., ‘deriv(y,x)’ is reduced to zero.  With the Hyperbolic
flag, the ‘tderiv’ (total derivative) operation is used instead, in
which derivatives of variables are not reduced to zero unless those
variables are known to be “constant,” i.e., independent of any other
variables.  (The built-in special variables like ‘pi’ are considered
constant, as are variables that have been declared ‘const’; *note
Declarations::.)

   With a numeric prefix argument N, this command computes the Nth
derivative.

   When working with trigonometric functions, it is best to switch to
Radians mode first (with ‘m r’).  The derivative of ‘sin(x)’ in degrees
is ‘(pi/180) cos(x)’, probably not the expected answer!

   If you use the ‘deriv’ function directly in an algebraic formula, you
can write ‘deriv(f,x,x0)’ which represents the derivative of ‘f’ with
respect to ‘x’, evaluated at the point ‘x=x0’.

   If the formula being differentiated contains functions which Calc
does not know, the derivatives of those functions are produced by adding
primes (apostrophe characters).  For example, ‘deriv(f(2x), x)’ produces
‘2 f'(2 x)’, where the function ‘f'’ represents the derivative of ‘f’.

   For functions you have defined with the ‘Z F’ command, Calc expands
the functions according to their defining formulas unless you have also
defined ‘f'’ suitably.  For example, suppose we define ‘sinc(x) =
sin(x)/x’ using ‘Z F’.  If we then differentiate the formula ‘sinc(2
x)’, the formula will be expanded to ‘sin(2 x) / (2 x)’ and
differentiated.  However, if we also define ‘sinc'(x) = dsinc(x)’, say,
then Calc will write the result as ‘2 dsinc(2 x)’.  *Note Algebraic
Definitions::.

   For multi-argument functions ‘f(x,y,z)’, the derivative with respect
to the first argument is written ‘f'(x,y,z)’; derivatives with respect
to the other arguments are ‘f'2(x,y,z)’ and ‘f'3(x,y,z)’.  Various
higher-order derivatives can be formed in the obvious way, e.g.,
‘f''(x)’ (the second derivative of ‘f’) or ‘f''2'3(x,y,z)’ (‘f’
differentiated with respect to each argument once).


File: calc.info,  Node: Integration,  Next: Customizing the Integrator,  Prev: Differentiation,  Up: Calculus

11.5.2 Integration
------------------

The ‘a i’ (‘calc-integral’) [‘integ’] command computes the indefinite
integral of the expression on the top of the stack with respect to a
prompted-for variable.  The integrator is not guaranteed to work for all
integrable functions, but it is able to integrate several large classes
of formulas.  In particular, any polynomial or rational function (a
polynomial divided by a polynomial) is acceptable.  (Rational functions
don’t have to be in explicit quotient form, however; ‘x/(1+x^-2)’ is not
strictly a quotient of polynomials, but it is equivalent to
‘x^3/(x^2+1)’, which is.)  Also, square roots of terms involving ‘x’ and
‘x^2’ may appear in rational functions being integrated.  Finally,
rational functions involving trigonometric or hyperbolic functions can
be integrated.

   With an argument (‘C-u a i’), this command will compute the definite
integral of the expression on top of the stack.  In this case, the
command will again prompt for an integration variable, then prompt for a
lower limit and an upper limit.

   If you use the ‘integ’ function directly in an algebraic formula, you
can also write ‘integ(f,x,v)’ which expresses the resulting indefinite
integral in terms of variable ‘v’ instead of ‘x’.  With four arguments,
‘integ(f(x),x,a,b)’ represents a definite integral from ‘a’ to ‘b’.

   Please note that the current implementation of Calc’s integrator
sometimes produces results that are significantly more complex than they
need to be.  For example, the integral Calc finds for
‘1/(x+sqrt(x^2+1))’ is several times more complicated than the answer
Mathematica returns for the same input, although the two forms are
numerically equivalent.  Also, any indefinite integral should be
considered to have an arbitrary constant of integration added to it,
although Calc does not write an explicit constant of integration in its
result.  For example, Calc’s solution for ‘1/(1+tan(x))’ differs from
the solution given in the _CRC Math Tables_ by a constant factor of ‘pi
i / 2’, due to a different choice of constant of integration.

   The Calculator remembers all the integrals it has done.  If
conditions change in a way that would invalidate the old integrals, say,
a switch from Degrees to Radians mode, then they will be thrown out.  If
you suspect this is not happening when it should, use the
‘calc-flush-caches’ command; *note Caches::.

   Calc normally will pursue integration by substitution or integration
by parts up to 3 nested times before abandoning an approach as
fruitless.  If the integrator is taking too long, you can lower this
limit by storing a number (like 2) in the variable ‘IntegLimit’.  (The
‘s I’ command is a convenient way to edit ‘IntegLimit’.)  If this
variable has no stored value or does not contain a nonnegative integer,
a limit of 3 is used.  The lower this limit is, the greater the chance
that Calc will be unable to integrate a function it could otherwise
handle.  Raising this limit allows the Calculator to solve more
integrals, though the time it takes may grow exponentially.  You can
monitor the integrator’s actions by creating an Emacs buffer called
‘*Trace*’.  If such a buffer exists, the ‘a i’ command will write a log
of its actions there.

   If you want to manipulate integrals in a purely symbolic way, you can
set the integration nesting limit to 0 to prevent all but fast
table-lookup solutions of integrals.  You might then wish to define
rewrite rules for integration by parts, various kinds of substitutions,
and so on.  *Note Rewrite Rules::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Customizing the Integrator,  Next: Numerical Integration,  Prev: Integration,  Up: Calculus

11.5.3 Customizing the Integrator
---------------------------------

Calc has two built-in rewrite rules called ‘IntegRules’ and
‘IntegAfterRules’ which you can edit to define new integration methods.
*Note Rewrite Rules::.  At each step of the integration process, Calc
wraps the current integrand in a call to the fictitious function
‘integtry(EXPR,VAR)’, where EXPR is the integrand and VAR is the
integration variable.  If your rules rewrite this to be a plain formula
(not a call to ‘integtry’), then Calc will use this formula as the
integral of EXPR.  For example, the rule ‘integtry(mysin(x),x) :=
-mycos(x)’ would define a rule to integrate a function ‘mysin’ that acts
like the sine function.  Then, putting ‘4 mysin(2y+1)’ on the stack and
typing ‘a i y’ will produce the integral ‘-2 mycos(2y+1)’.  Note that
Calc has automatically made various transformations on the integral to
allow it to use your rule; integral tables generally give rules for
‘mysin(a x + b)’, but you don’t need to use this much generality in your
‘IntegRules’.

   As a more serious example, the expression ‘exp(x)/x’ cannot be
integrated in terms of the standard functions, so the “exponential
integral” function ‘Ei(x)’ was invented to describe it.  We can get Calc
to do this integral in terms of a made-up ‘Ei’ function by adding the
rule ‘[integtry(exp(x)/x, x) := Ei(x)]’ to ‘IntegRules’.  Now entering
‘exp(2x)/x’ on the stack and typing ‘a i x’ yields ‘Ei(2 x)’.  This new
rule will work with Calc’s various built-in integration methods (such as
integration by substitution) to solve a variety of other problems
involving ‘Ei’: For example, now Calc will also be able to integrate
‘exp(exp(x))’ and ‘ln(ln(x))’ (to get ‘Ei(exp(x))’ and ‘x ln(ln(x)) -
Ei(ln(x))’, respectively).

   Your rule may do further integration by calling ‘integ’.  For
example, ‘integtry(twice(u),x) := twice(integ(u))’ allows Calc to
integrate ‘twice(sin(x))’ to get ‘twice(-cos(x))’.  Note that ‘integ’
was called with only one argument.  This notation is allowed only within
‘IntegRules’; it means “integrate this with respect to the same
integration variable.” If Calc is unable to integrate ‘u’, the
integration that invoked ‘IntegRules’ also fails.  Thus integrating
‘twice(f(x))’ fails, returning the unevaluated integral
‘integ(twice(f(x)), x)’.  It is still valid to call ‘integ’ with two or
more arguments, however; in this case, if ‘u’ is not integrable, ‘twice’
itself will still be integrated: If the above rule is changed to ‘... :=
twice(integ(u,x))’, then integrating ‘twice(f(x))’ will yield
‘twice(integ(f(x),x))’.

   If a rule instead produces the formula ‘integsubst(SEXPR, SVAR)’,
either replacing the top-level ‘integtry’ call or nested anywhere inside
the expression, then Calc will apply the substitution ‘U = SEXPR(SVAR)’
to try to integrate the original EXPR.  For example, the rule ‘sqrt(a)
:= integsubst(sqrt(x),x)’ says that if Calc ever finds a square root in
the integrand, it should attempt the substitution ‘u = sqrt(x)’.  (This
particular rule is unnecessary because Calc always tries “obvious”
substitutions where SEXPR actually appears in the integrand.)  The
variable SVAR may be the same as the VAR that appeared in the call to
‘integtry’, but it need not be.

   When integrating according to an ‘integsubst’, Calc uses the equation
solver to find the inverse of SEXPR (if the integrand refers to VAR
anywhere except in subexpressions that exactly match SEXPR).  It uses
the differentiator to find the derivative of SEXPR and/or its inverse
(it has two methods that use one derivative or the other).  You can also
specify these items by adding extra arguments to the ‘integsubst’ your
rules construct; the general form is ‘integsubst(SEXPR, SVAR, SINV,
SPRIME)’, where SINV is the inverse of SEXPR (still written as a
function of SVAR), and SPRIME is the derivative of SEXPR with respect to
SVAR.  If you don’t specify these things, and Calc is not able to work
them out on its own with the information it knows, then your
substitution rule will work only in very specific, simple cases.

   Calc applies ‘IntegRules’ as if by ‘C-u 1 a r IntegRules’; in other
words, Calc stops rewriting as soon as any rule in your rule set
succeeds.  (If it weren’t for this, the ‘integsubst(sqrt(x),x)’ example
above would keep on adding layers of ‘integsubst’ calls forever!)

   Another set of rules, stored in ‘IntegSimpRules’, are applied every
time the integrator uses algebraic simplifications to simplify an
intermediate result.  For example, putting the rule ‘twice(x) := 2 x’
into ‘IntegSimpRules’ would tell Calc to convert the ‘twice’ function
into a form it knows whenever integration is attempted.

   One more way to influence the integrator is to define a function with
the ‘Z F’ command (*note Algebraic Definitions::).  Calc’s integrator
automatically expands such functions according to their defining
formulas, even if you originally asked for the function to be left
unevaluated for symbolic arguments.  (Certain other Calc systems, such
as the differentiator and the equation solver, also do this.)

   Sometimes Calc is able to find a solution to your integral, but it
expresses the result in a way that is unnecessarily complicated.  If
this happens, you can either use ‘integsubst’ as described above to try
to hint at a more direct path to the desired result, or you can use
‘IntegAfterRules’.  This is an extra rule set that runs after the main
integrator returns its result; basically, Calc does an ‘a r
IntegAfterRules’ on the result before showing it to you.  (It also does
algebraic simplifications, without ‘IntegSimpRules’, after that to
further simplify the result.)  For example, Calc’s integrator sometimes
produces expressions of the form ‘ln(1+x) - ln(1-x)’; the default
‘IntegAfterRules’ rewrite this into the more readable form ‘2
arctanh(x)’.  Note that, unlike ‘IntegRules’, ‘IntegSimpRules’ and
‘IntegAfterRules’ are applied any number of times until no further
changes are possible.  Rewriting by ‘IntegAfterRules’ occurs only after
the main integrator has finished, not at every step as for ‘IntegRules’
and ‘IntegSimpRules’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Numerical Integration,  Next: Taylor Series,  Prev: Customizing the Integrator,  Up: Calculus

11.5.4 Numerical Integration
----------------------------

If you want a purely numerical answer to an integration problem, you can
use the ‘a I’ (‘calc-num-integral’) [‘ninteg’] command.  This command
prompts for an integration variable, a lower limit, and an upper limit.
Except for the integration variable, all other variables that appear in
the integrand formula must have stored values.  (A stored value, if any,
for the integration variable itself is ignored.)

   Numerical integration works by evaluating your formula at many points
in the specified interval.  Calc uses an “open Romberg” method; this
means that it does not evaluate the formula actually at the endpoints
(so that it is safe to integrate ‘sin(x)/x’ from zero, for example).
Also, the Romberg method works especially well when the function being
integrated is fairly smooth.  If the function is not smooth, Calc will
have to evaluate it at quite a few points before it can accurately
determine the value of the integral.

   Integration is much faster when the current precision is small.  It
is best to set the precision to the smallest acceptable number of digits
before you use ‘a I’.  If Calc appears to be taking too long, press
‘C-g’ to halt it and try a lower precision.  If Calc still appears to
need hundreds of evaluations, check to make sure your function is
well-behaved in the specified interval.

   It is possible for the lower integration limit to be ‘-inf’ (minus
infinity).  Likewise, the upper limit may be plus infinity.  Calc
internally transforms the integral into an equivalent one with finite
limits.  However, integration to or across singularities is not
supported: The integral of ‘1/sqrt(x)’ from 0 to 1 exists (it can be
found by Calc’s symbolic integrator, for example), but ‘a I’ will fail
because the integrand goes to infinity at one of the endpoints.


File: calc.info,  Node: Taylor Series,  Prev: Numerical Integration,  Up: Calculus

11.5.5 Taylor Series
--------------------

The ‘a t’ (‘calc-taylor’) [‘taylor’] command computes a power series
expansion or Taylor series of a function.  You specify the variable and
the desired number of terms.  You may give an expression of the form
‘VAR = A’ or ‘VAR - A’ instead of just a variable to produce a Taylor
expansion about the point A.  You may specify the number of terms with a
numeric prefix argument; otherwise the command will prompt you for the
number of terms.  Note that many series expansions have coefficients of
zero for some terms, so you may appear to get fewer terms than you asked
for.

   If the ‘a i’ command is unable to find a symbolic integral for a
function, you can get an approximation by integrating the function’s
Taylor series.


File: calc.info,  Node: Solving Equations,  Next: Numerical Solutions,  Prev: Calculus,  Up: Algebra

11.6 Solving Equations
======================

The ‘a S’ (‘calc-solve-for’) [‘solve’] command rearranges an equation to
solve for a specific variable.  An equation is an expression of the form
‘L = R’.  For example, the command ‘a S x’ will rearrange ‘y = 3x + 6’
to the form, ‘x = y/3 - 2’.  If the input is not an equation, it is
treated like an equation of the form ‘X = 0’.

   This command also works for inequalities, as in ‘y < 3x + 6’.  Some
inequalities cannot be solved where the analogous equation could be; for
example, solving ‘a < b c’ for ‘b’ is impossible without knowing the
sign of ‘c’.  In this case, ‘a S’ will produce the result ‘b != a/c’
(using the not-equal-to operator) to signify that the direction of the
inequality is now unknown.  The inequality ‘a <= b c’ is not even
partially solved.  *Note Declarations::, for a way to tell Calc that the
signs of the variables in a formula are in fact known.

   Two useful commands for working with the result of ‘a S’ are ‘a .’
(*note Logical Operations::), which converts ‘x = y/3 - 2’ to ‘y/3 - 2’,
and ‘s l’ (*note Let Command::) which evaluates another formula with ‘x’
set equal to ‘y/3 - 2’.

* Menu:

* Multiple Solutions::
* Solving Systems of Equations::
* Decomposing Polynomials::


File: calc.info,  Node: Multiple Solutions,  Next: Solving Systems of Equations,  Prev: Solving Equations,  Up: Solving Equations

11.6.1 Multiple Solutions
-------------------------

Some equations have more than one solution.  The Hyperbolic flag (‘H a
S’) [‘fsolve’] tells the solver to report the fully general family of
solutions.  It will invent variables ‘n1’, ‘n2’, ..., which represent
independent arbitrary integers, and ‘s1’, ‘s2’, ..., which represent
independent arbitrary signs (either +1 or -1).  If you don’t use the
Hyperbolic flag, Calc will use zero in place of all arbitrary integers,
and plus one in place of all arbitrary signs.  Note that variables like
‘n1’ and ‘s1’ are not given any special interpretation in Calc except by
the equation solver itself.  As usual, you can use the ‘s l’
(‘calc-let’) command to obtain solutions for various actual values of
these variables.

   For example, ‘' x^2 = y <RET> H a S x <RET>’ solves to get ‘x = s1
sqrt(y)’, indicating that the two solutions to the equation are
‘sqrt(y)’ and ‘-sqrt(y)’.  Another way to think about it is that the
square-root operation is really a two-valued function; since every Calc
function must return a single result, ‘sqrt’ chooses to return the
positive result.  Then ‘H a S’ doctors this result using ‘s1’ to
indicate the full set of possible values of the mathematical
square-root.

   There is a similar phenomenon going the other direction: Suppose we
solve ‘sqrt(y) = x’ for ‘y’.  Calc squares both sides to get ‘y = x^2’.
This is correct, except that it introduces some dubious solutions.
Consider solving ‘sqrt(y) = -3’: Calc will report ‘y = 9’ as a valid
solution, which is true in the mathematical sense of square-root, but
false (there is no solution) for the actual Calc positive-valued ‘sqrt’.
This happens for both ‘a S’ and ‘H a S’.

   If you store a positive integer in the Calc variable ‘GenCount’, then
Calc will generate formulas of the form ‘as(N)’ for arbitrary signs, and
‘an(N)’ for arbitrary integers, where N represents successive values
taken by incrementing ‘GenCount’ by one.  While the normal arbitrary
sign and integer symbols start over at ‘s1’ and ‘n1’ with each new Calc
command, the ‘GenCount’ approach will give each arbitrary value a name
that is unique throughout the entire Calc session.  Also, the arbitrary
values are function calls instead of variables, which is advantageous in
some cases.  For example, you can make a rewrite rule that recognizes
all arbitrary signs using a pattern like ‘as(n)’.  The ‘s l’ command
only works on variables, but you can use the ‘a b’ (‘calc-substitute’)
command to substitute actual values for function calls like ‘as(3)’.

   The ‘s G’ (‘calc-edit-GenCount’) command is a convenient way to
create or edit this variable.  Press ‘C-c C-c’ to finish.

   If you have not stored a value in ‘GenCount’, or if the value in that
variable is not a positive integer, the regular ‘s1’/‘n1’ notation is
used.

   With the Inverse flag, ‘I a S’ [‘finv’] treats the expression on top
of the stack as a function of the specified variable and solves to find
the inverse function, written in terms of the same variable.  For
example, ‘I a S x’ inverts ‘2x + 6’ to ‘x/2 - 3’.  You can use both
Inverse and Hyperbolic [‘ffinv’] to obtain a fully general inverse, as
described above.

   Some equations, specifically polynomials, have a known, finite number
of solutions.  The ‘a P’ (‘calc-poly-roots’) [‘roots’] command uses ‘H a
S’ to solve an equation in general form, then, for all arbitrary-sign
variables like ‘s1’, and all arbitrary-integer variables like ‘n1’ for
which ‘n1’ only usefully varies over a finite range, it expands these
variables out to all their possible values.  The results are collected
into a vector, which is returned.  For example, ‘roots(x^4 = 1, x)’
returns the four solutions ‘[1, -1, (0, 1), (0, -1)]’.  Generally an Nth
degree polynomial will always have N roots on the complex plane.  (If
you have given a ‘real’ declaration for the solution variable, then only
the real-valued solutions, if any, will be reported; *note
Declarations::.)

   Note that because ‘a P’ uses ‘H a S’, it is able to deliver symbolic
solutions if the polynomial has symbolic coefficients.  Also note that
Calc’s solver is not able to get exact symbolic solutions to all
polynomials.  Polynomials containing powers up to ‘x^4’ can always be
solved exactly; polynomials of higher degree sometimes can be: ‘x^6 +
x^3 + 1’ is converted to ‘(x^3)^2 + (x^3) + 1’, which can be solved for
‘x^3’ using the quadratic equation, and then for ‘x’ by taking cube
roots.  But in many cases, like ‘x^6 + x + 1’, Calc does not know how to
rewrite the polynomial into a form it can solve.  The ‘a P’ command can
still deliver a list of numerical roots, however, provided that Symbolic
mode (‘m s’) is not turned on.  (If you work with Symbolic mode on,
recall that the ‘N’ (‘calc-eval-num’) key is a handy way to reevaluate
the formula on the stack with Symbolic mode temporarily off.)
Naturally, ‘a P’ can only provide numerical roots if the polynomial
coefficients are all numbers (real or complex).


File: calc.info,  Node: Solving Systems of Equations,  Next: Decomposing Polynomials,  Prev: Multiple Solutions,  Up: Solving Equations

11.6.2 Solving Systems of Equations
-----------------------------------

You can also use the commands described above to solve systems of
simultaneous equations.  Just create a vector of equations, then specify
a vector of variables for which to solve.  (You can omit the surrounding
brackets when entering the vector of variables at the prompt.)

   For example, putting ‘[x + y = a, x - y = b]’ on the stack and typing
‘a S x,y <RET>’ produces the vector of solutions ‘[x = a - (a-b)/2, y =
(a-b)/2]’.  The result vector will have the same length as the variables
vector, and the variables will be listed in the same order there.  Note
that the solutions are not always simplified as far as possible; the
solution for ‘x’ here could be improved by an application of the ‘a n’
command.

   Calc’s algorithm works by trying to eliminate one variable at a time
by solving one of the equations for that variable and then substituting
into the other equations.  Calc will try all the possibilities, but you
can speed things up by noting that Calc first tries to eliminate the
first variable with the first equation, then the second variable with
the second equation, and so on.  It also helps to put the simpler (e.g.,
more linear) equations toward the front of the list.  Calc’s algorithm
will solve any system of linear equations, and also many kinds of
nonlinear systems.

   Normally there will be as many variables as equations.  If you give
fewer variables than equations (an “over-determined” system of
equations), Calc will find a partial solution.  For example, typing ‘a S
y <RET>’ with the above system of equations would produce ‘[y = a - x]’.
There are now several ways to express this solution in terms of the
original variables; Calc uses the first one that it finds.  You can
control the choice by adding variable specifiers of the form ‘elim(V)’
to the variables list.  This says that V should be eliminated from the
equations; the variable will not appear at all in the solution.  For
example, typing ‘a S y,elim(x)’ would yield ‘[y = a - (b+a)/2]’.

   If the variables list contains only ‘elim’ specifiers, Calc simply
eliminates those variables from the equations and then returns the
resulting set of equations.  For example, ‘a S elim(x)’ produces ‘[a - 2
y = b]’.  Every variable eliminated will reduce the number of equations
in the system by one.

   Again, ‘a S’ gives you one solution to the system of equations.  If
there are several solutions, you can use ‘H a S’ to get a general family
of solutions, or, if there is a finite number of solutions, you can use
‘a P’ to get a list.  (In the latter case, the result will take the form
of a matrix where the rows are different solutions and the columns
correspond to the variables you requested.)

   Another way to deal with certain kinds of overdetermined systems of
equations is the ‘a F’ command, which does least-squares fitting to
satisfy the equations.  *Note Curve Fitting::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Decomposing Polynomials,  Prev: Solving Systems of Equations,  Up: Solving Equations

11.6.3 Decomposing Polynomials
------------------------------

The ‘poly’ function takes a polynomial and a variable as arguments, and
returns a vector of polynomial coefficients (constant coefficient
first).  For example, ‘poly(x^3 + 2 x, x)’ returns ‘[0, 2, 0, 1]’.  If
the input is not a polynomial in ‘x’, the call to ‘poly’ is left in
symbolic form.  If the input does not involve the variable ‘x’, the
input is returned in a list of length one, representing a polynomial
with only a constant coefficient.  The call ‘poly(x, x)’ returns the
vector ‘[0, 1]’.  The last element of the returned vector is guaranteed
to be nonzero; note that ‘poly(0, x)’ returns the empty vector ‘[]’.
Note also that ‘x’ may actually be any formula; for example,
‘poly(sin(x)^2 - sin(x) + 3, sin(x))’ returns ‘[3, -1, 1]’.

   To get the ‘x^k’ coefficient of polynomial ‘p’, use ‘poly(p,
x)_(k+1)’.  To get the degree of polynomial ‘p’, use ‘vlen(poly(p, x)) -
1’.  For example, ‘poly((x+1)^4, x)’ returns ‘[1, 4, 6, 4, 1]’, so
‘poly((x+1)^4, x)_(2+1)’ gives the ‘x^2’ coefficient of this polynomial,
6.

   One important feature of the solver is its ability to recognize
formulas which are “essentially” polynomials.  This ability is made
available to the user through the ‘gpoly’ function, which is used just
like ‘poly’: ‘gpoly(EXPR, VAR)’.  If EXPR is a polynomial in some term
which includes VAR, then this function will return a vector ‘[X, C, A]’
where X is the term that depends on VAR, C is a vector of polynomial
coefficients (like the one returned by ‘poly’), and A is a multiplier
which is usually 1.  Basically, ‘EXPR = A*(C_1 + C_2 X + C_3 X^2 +
...)’.  The last element of C is guaranteed to be non-zero, and C will
not equal ‘[1]’ (i.e., the trivial decomposition EXPR = X is not
considered a polynomial).  One side effect is that ‘gpoly(x, x)’ and
‘gpoly(6, x)’, both of which might be expected to recognize their
arguments as polynomials, will not because the decomposition is
considered trivial.

   For example, ‘gpoly((x-2)^2, x)’ returns ‘[x, [4, -4, 1], 1]’, since
the expanded form of this polynomial is ‘4 - 4 x + x^2’.

   The term X may itself be a polynomial in VAR.  This is done to reduce
the size of the C vector.  For example, ‘gpoly(x^4 + x^2 - 1, x)’
returns ‘[x^2, [-1, 1, 1], 1]’, since a quadratic polynomial in ‘x^2’ is
easier to solve than a quartic polynomial in ‘x’.

   A few more examples of the kinds of polynomials ‘gpoly’ can discover:

     sin(x) - 1               [sin(x), [-1, 1], 1]
     x + 1/x - 1              [x, [1, -1, 1], 1/x]
     x + 1/x                  [x^2, [1, 1], 1/x]
     x^3 + 2 x                [x^2, [2, 1], x]
     x + x^2:3 + sqrt(x)      [x^1:6, [1, 1, 0, 1], x^1:2]
     x^(2a) + 2 x^a + 5       [x^a, [5, 2, 1], 1]
     (exp(-x) + exp(x)) / 2   [e^(2 x), [0.5, 0.5], e^-x]

   The ‘poly’ and ‘gpoly’ functions accept a third integer argument
which specifies the largest degree of polynomial that is acceptable.  If
this is ‘n’, then only C vectors of length ‘n+1’ or less will be
returned.  Otherwise, the ‘poly’ or ‘gpoly’ call will remain in symbolic
form.  For example, the equation solver can handle quartics and smaller
polynomials, so it calls ‘gpoly(EXPR, VAR, 4)’ to discover whether EXPR
can be treated by its linear, quadratic, cubic, or quartic formulas.

   The ‘pdeg’ function computes the degree of a polynomial; ‘pdeg(p,x)’
is the highest power of ‘x’ that appears in ‘p’.  This is the same as
‘vlen(poly(p,x))-1’, but is much more efficient.  If ‘p’ is constant
with respect to ‘x’, then ‘pdeg(p,x) = 0’.  If ‘p’ is not a polynomial
in ‘x’ (e.g., ‘pdeg(2 cos(x), x)’, the function remains unevaluated.  It
is possible to omit the second argument ‘x’, in which case ‘pdeg(p)’
returns the highest total degree of any term of the polynomial, counting
all variables that appear in ‘p’.  Note that ‘pdeg(c) = pdeg(c,x) = 0’
for any nonzero constant ‘c’; the degree of the constant zero is
considered to be ‘-inf’ (minus infinity).

   The ‘plead’ function finds the leading term of a polynomial.  Thus
‘plead(p,x)’ is equivalent to ‘poly(p,x)_vlen(poly(p,x))’, though again
more efficient.  In particular, ‘plead((2x+1)^10, x)’ returns 1024
without expanding out the list of coefficients.  The value of
‘plead(p,x)’ will be zero only if ‘p = 0’.

   The ‘pcont’ function finds the “content” of a polynomial.  This is
the greatest common divisor of all the coefficients of the polynomial.
With two arguments, ‘pcont(p,x)’ effectively uses ‘poly(p,x)’ to get a
list of coefficients, then uses ‘pgcd’ (the polynomial GCD function) to
combine these into an answer.  For example, ‘pcont(4 x y^2 + 6 x^2 y,
x)’ is ‘2 y’.  The content is basically the “biggest” polynomial that
can be divided into ‘p’ exactly.  The sign of the content is the same as
the sign of the leading coefficient.

   With only one argument, ‘pcont(p)’ computes the numerical content of
the polynomial, i.e., the ‘gcd’ of the numerical coefficients of all the
terms in the formula.  Note that ‘gcd’ is defined on rational numbers as
well as integers; it computes the ‘gcd’ of the numerators and the ‘lcm’
of the denominators.  Thus ‘pcont(4:3 x y^2 + 6 x^2 y)’ returns 2:3.
Dividing the polynomial by this number will clear all the denominators,
as well as dividing by any common content in the numerators.  The
numerical content of a polynomial is negative only if all the
coefficients in the polynomial are negative.

   The ‘pprim’ function finds the “primitive part” of a polynomial,
which is simply the polynomial divided (using ‘pdiv’ if necessary) by
its content.  If the input polynomial has rational coefficients, the
result will have integer coefficients in simplest terms.


File: calc.info,  Node: Numerical Solutions,  Next: Curve Fitting,  Prev: Solving Equations,  Up: Algebra

11.7 Numerical Solutions
========================

Not all equations can be solved symbolically.  The commands in this
section use numerical algorithms that can find a solution to a specific
instance of an equation to any desired accuracy.  Note that the
numerical commands are slower than their algebraic cousins; it is a good
idea to try ‘a S’ before resorting to these commands.

   (*Note Curve Fitting::, for some other, more specialized, operations
on numerical data.)

* Menu:

* Root Finding::
* Minimization::
* Numerical Systems of Equations::


File: calc.info,  Node: Root Finding,  Next: Minimization,  Prev: Numerical Solutions,  Up: Numerical Solutions

11.7.1 Root Finding
-------------------

The ‘a R’ (‘calc-find-root’) [‘root’] command finds a numerical solution
(or “root”) of an equation.  (This command treats inequalities the same
as equations.  If the input is any other kind of formula, it is
interpreted as an equation of the form ‘X = 0’.)

   The ‘a R’ command requires an initial guess on the top of the stack,
and a formula in the second-to-top position.  It prompts for a solution
variable, which must appear in the formula.  All other variables that
appear in the formula must have assigned values, i.e., when a value is
assigned to the solution variable and the formula is evaluated with ‘=’,
it should evaluate to a number.  Any assigned value for the solution
variable itself is ignored and unaffected by this command.

   When the command completes, the initial guess is replaced on the
stack by a vector of two numbers: The value of the solution variable
that solves the equation, and the difference between the lefthand and
righthand sides of the equation at that value.  Ordinarily, the second
number will be zero or very nearly zero.  (Note that Calc uses a
slightly higher precision while finding the root, and thus the second
number may be slightly different from the value you would compute from
the equation yourself.)

   The ‘v h’ (‘calc-head’) command is a handy way to extract the first
element of the result vector, discarding the error term.

   The initial guess can be a real number, in which case Calc searches
for a real solution near that number, or a complex number, in which case
Calc searches the whole complex plane near that number for a solution,
or it can be an interval form which restricts the search to real numbers
inside that interval.

   Calc tries to use ‘a d’ to take the derivative of the equation.  If
this succeeds, it uses Newton’s method.  If the equation is not
differentiable Calc uses a bisection method.  (If Newton’s method
appears to be going astray, Calc switches over to bisection if it can,
or otherwise gives up.  In this case it may help to try again with a
slightly different initial guess.)  If the initial guess is a complex
number, the function must be differentiable.

   If the formula (or the difference between the sides of an equation)
is negative at one end of the interval you specify and positive at the
other end, the root finder is guaranteed to find a root.  Otherwise,
Calc subdivides the interval into small parts looking for positive and
negative values to bracket the root.  When your guess is an interval,
Calc will not look outside that interval for a root.

   The ‘H a R’ [‘wroot’] command is similar to ‘a R’, except that if the
initial guess is an interval for which the function has the same sign at
both ends, then rather than subdividing the interval Calc attempts to
widen it to enclose a root.  Use this mode if you are not sure if the
function has a root in your interval.

   If the function is not differentiable, and you give a simple number
instead of an interval as your initial guess, Calc uses this widening
process even if you did not type the Hyperbolic flag.  (If the function
_is_ differentiable, Calc uses Newton’s method which does not require a
bounding interval in order to work.)

   If Calc leaves the ‘root’ or ‘wroot’ function in symbolic form on the
stack, it will normally display an explanation for why no root was
found.  If you miss this explanation, press ‘w’ (‘calc-why’) to get it
back.


File: calc.info,  Node: Minimization,  Next: Numerical Systems of Equations,  Prev: Root Finding,  Up: Numerical Solutions

11.7.2 Minimization
-------------------

The ‘a N’ (‘calc-find-minimum’) [‘minimize’] command finds a minimum
value for a formula.  It is very similar in operation to ‘a R’
(‘calc-find-root’): You give the formula and an initial guess on the
stack, and are prompted for the name of a variable.  The guess may be
either a number near the desired minimum, or an interval enclosing the
desired minimum.  The function returns a vector containing the value of
the variable which minimizes the formula’s value, along with the minimum
value itself.

   Note that this command looks for a _local_ minimum.  Many functions
have more than one minimum; some, like ‘x sin(x)’, have infinitely many.
In fact, there is no easy way to define the “global” minimum of ‘x
sin(x)’ but Calc can still locate any particular local minimum for you.
Calc basically goes downhill from the initial guess until it finds a
point at which the function’s value is greater both to the left and to
the right.  Calc does not use derivatives when minimizing a function.

   If your initial guess is an interval and it looks like the minimum
occurs at one or the other endpoint of the interval, Calc will return
that endpoint only if that endpoint is closed; thus, minimizing ‘17 x’
over ‘[2..3]’ will return ‘[2, 38]’, but minimizing over ‘(2..3]’ would
report no minimum found.  In general, you should use closed intervals to
find literally the minimum value in that range of ‘x’, or open intervals
to find the local minimum, if any, that happens to lie in that range.

   Most functions are smooth and flat near their minimum values.
Because of this flatness, if the current precision is, say, 12 digits,
the variable can only be determined meaningfully to about six digits.
Thus you should set the precision to twice as many digits as you need in
your answer.

   The ‘H a N’ [‘wminimize’] command, analogously to ‘H a R’, expands
the guess interval to enclose a minimum rather than requiring that the
minimum lie inside the interval you supply.

   The ‘a X’ (‘calc-find-maximum’) [‘maximize’] and ‘H a X’
[‘wmaximize’] commands effectively minimize the negative of the formula
you supply.

   The formula must evaluate to a real number at all points inside the
interval (or near the initial guess if the guess is a number).  If the
initial guess is a complex number the variable will be minimized over
the complex numbers; if it is real or an interval it will be minimized
over the reals.


File: calc.info,  Node: Numerical Systems of Equations,  Prev: Minimization,  Up: Numerical Solutions

11.7.3 Systems of Equations
---------------------------

The ‘a R’ command can also solve systems of equations.  In this case,
the equation should instead be a vector of equations, the guess should
instead be a vector of numbers (intervals are not supported), and the
variable should be a vector of variables.  You can omit the brackets
while entering the list of variables.  Each equation must be
differentiable by each variable for this mode to work.  The result will
be a vector of two vectors: The variable values that solved the system
of equations, and the differences between the sides of the equations
with those variable values.  There must be the same number of equations
as variables.  Since only plain numbers are allowed as guesses, the
Hyperbolic flag has no effect when solving a system of equations.

   It is also possible to minimize over many variables with ‘a N’ (or
maximize with ‘a X’).  Once again the variable name should be replaced
by a vector of variables, and the initial guess should be an equal-sized
vector of initial guesses.  But, unlike the case of multidimensional ‘a
R’, the formula being minimized should still be a single formula, _not_
a vector.  Beware that multidimensional minimization is currently _very_
slow.


File: calc.info,  Node: Curve Fitting,  Next: Summations,  Prev: Numerical Solutions,  Up: Algebra

11.8 Curve Fitting
==================

The ‘a F’ command fits a set of data to a “model formula”, such as ‘y =
m x + b’ where ‘m’ and ‘b’ are parameters to be determined.  For a
typical set of measured data there will be no single ‘m’ and ‘b’ that
exactly fit the data; in this case, Calc chooses values of the
parameters that provide the closest possible fit.  The model formula can
be entered in various ways after the key sequence ‘a F’ is pressed.

   If the letter ‘P’ is pressed after ‘a F’ but before the model
description is entered, the data as well as the model formula will be
plotted after the formula is determined.  This will be indicated by a
“P” in the minibuffer after the help message.

* Menu:

* Linear Fits::
* Polynomial and Multilinear Fits::
* Error Estimates for Fits::
* Standard Nonlinear Models::
* Curve Fitting Details::
* Interpolation::


File: calc.info,  Node: Linear Fits,  Next: Polynomial and Multilinear Fits,  Prev: Curve Fitting,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.1 Linear Fits
------------------

The ‘a F’ (‘calc-curve-fit’) [‘fit’] command attempts to fit a set of
data (‘x’ and ‘y’ vectors of numbers) to a straight line, polynomial, or
other function of ‘x’.  For the moment we will consider only the case of
fitting to a line, and we will ignore the issue of whether or not the
model was in fact a good fit for the data.

   In a standard linear least-squares fit, we have a set of ‘(x,y)’ data
points that we wish to fit to the model ‘y = m x + b’ by adjusting the
parameters ‘m’ and ‘b’ to make the ‘y’ values calculated from the
formula be as close as possible to the actual ‘y’ values in the data
set.  (In a polynomial fit, the model is instead, say, ‘y = a x^3 + b
x^2 + c x + d’.  In a multilinear fit, we have data points of the form
‘(x_1,x_2,x_3,y)’ and our model is ‘y = a x_1 + b x_2 + c x_3 + d’.
These will be discussed later.)

   In the model formula, variables like ‘x’ and ‘x_2’ are called the
“independent variables”, and ‘y’ is the “dependent variable”.  Variables
like ‘m’, ‘a’, and ‘b’ are called the “parameters” of the model.

   The ‘a F’ command takes the data set to be fitted from the stack.  By
default, it expects the data in the form of a matrix.  For example, for
a linear or polynomial fit, this would be a 2xN matrix where the first
row is a list of ‘x’ values and the second row has the corresponding ‘y’
values.  For the multilinear fit shown above, the matrix would have four
rows (‘x_1’, ‘x_2’, ‘x_3’, and ‘y’, respectively).

   If you happen to have an Nx2 matrix instead of a 2xN matrix, just
press ‘v t’ first to transpose the matrix.

   After you type ‘a F’, Calc prompts you to select a model.  For a
linear fit, press the digit ‘1’.

   Calc then prompts for you to name the variables.  By default it
chooses high letters like ‘x’ and ‘y’ for independent variables and low
letters like ‘a’ and ‘b’ for parameters.  (The dependent variable
doesn’t need a name.)  The two kinds of variables are separated by a
semicolon.  Since you generally care more about the names of the
independent variables than of the parameters, Calc also allows you to
name only those and let the parameters use default names.

   For example, suppose the data matrix

     [ [ 1, 2, 3, 4,  5  ]
       [ 5, 7, 9, 11, 13 ] ]

is on the stack and we wish to do a simple linear fit.  Type ‘a F’, then
‘1’ for the model, then <RET> to use the default names.  The result will
be the formula ‘3. + 2. x’ on the stack.  Calc has created the model
expression ‘a + b x’, then found the optimal values of ‘a’ and ‘b’ to
fit the data.  (In this case, it was able to find an exact fit.)  Calc
then substituted those values for ‘a’ and ‘b’ in the model formula.

   The ‘a F’ command puts two entries in the trail.  One is, as always,
a copy of the result that went to the stack; the other is a vector of
the actual parameter values, written as equations: ‘[a = 3, b = 2]’, in
case you’d rather read them in a list than pick them out of the formula.
(You can type ‘t y’ to move this vector to the stack; see *note Trail
Commands::.

   Specifying a different independent variable name will affect the
resulting formula: ‘a F 1 k <RET>’ produces ‘3 + 2 k’.  Changing the
parameter names (say, ‘a F 1 k;b,m <RET>’) will affect the equations
that go into the trail.

   To see what happens when the fit is not exact, we could change the
number 13 in the data matrix to 14 and try the fit again.  The result
is:

     2.6 + 2.2 x

   Evaluating this formula, say with ‘v x 5 <RET> <TAB> V M $ <RET>’,
shows a reasonably close match to the y-values in the data.

     [4.8, 7., 9.2, 11.4, 13.6]

   Since there is no line which passes through all the N data points,
Calc has chosen a line that best approximates the data points using the
method of least squares.  The idea is to define the “chi-square” error
measure

     chi^2 = sum((y_i - (a + b x_i))^2, i, 1, N)

which is clearly zero if ‘a + b x’ exactly fits all data points, and
increases as various ‘a + b x_i’ values fail to match the corresponding
‘y_i’ values.  There are several reasons why the summand is squared, one
of them being to ensure that ‘chi^2 >= 0’.  Least-squares fitting simply
chooses the values of ‘a’ and ‘b’ for which the error ‘chi^2’ is as
small as possible.

   Other kinds of models do the same thing but with a different model
formula in place of ‘a + b x_i’.

   A numeric prefix argument causes the ‘a F’ command to take the data
in some other form than one big matrix.  A positive argument N will take
N items from the stack, corresponding to the N rows of a data matrix.
In the linear case, N must be 2 since there is always one independent
variable and one dependent variable.

   A prefix of zero or plain ‘C-u’ is a compromise; Calc takes two items
from the stack, an N-row matrix of ‘x’ values, and a vector of ‘y’
values.  If there is only one independent variable, the ‘x’ values can
be either a one-row matrix or a plain vector, in which case the ‘C-u’
prefix is the same as a ‘C-u 2’ prefix.


File: calc.info,  Node: Polynomial and Multilinear Fits,  Next: Error Estimates for Fits,  Prev: Linear Fits,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.2 Polynomial and Multilinear Fits
--------------------------------------

To fit the data to higher-order polynomials, just type one of the digits
‘2’ through ‘9’ when prompted for a model.  For example, we could fit
the original data matrix from the previous section (with 13, not 14) to
a parabola instead of a line by typing ‘a F 2 <RET>’.

     2.00000000001 x - 1.5e-12 x^2 + 2.99999999999

   Note that since the constant and linear terms are enough to fit the
data exactly, it’s no surprise that Calc chose a tiny contribution for
‘x^2’.  (The fact that it’s not exactly zero is due only to roundoff
error.  Since our data are exact integers, we could get an exact answer
by typing ‘m f’ first to get Fraction mode.  Then the ‘x^2’ term would
vanish altogether.  Usually, though, the data being fitted will be
approximate floats so Fraction mode won’t help.)

   Doing the ‘a F 2’ fit on the data set with 14 instead of 13 gives a
much larger ‘x^2’ contribution, as Calc bends the line slightly to
improve the fit.

     0.142857142855 x^2 + 1.34285714287 x + 3.59999999998

   An important result from the theory of polynomial fitting is that it
is always possible to fit N data points exactly using a polynomial of
degree N-1, sometimes called an “interpolating polynomial”.  Using the
modified (14) data matrix, a model number of 4 gives a polynomial that
exactly matches all five data points:

     0.04167 x^4 - 0.4167 x^3 + 1.458 x^2 - 0.08333 x + 4.

   The actual coefficients we get with a precision of 12, like
‘0.0416666663588’, clearly suffer from loss of precision.  It is a good
idea to increase the working precision to several digits beyond what you
need when you do a fitting operation.  Or, if your data are exact, use
Fraction mode to get exact results.

   You can type ‘i’ instead of a digit at the model prompt to fit the
data exactly to a polynomial.  This just counts the number of columns of
the data matrix to choose the degree of the polynomial automatically.

   Fitting data “exactly” to high-degree polynomials is not always a
good idea, though.  High-degree polynomials have a tendency to wiggle
uncontrollably in between the fitting data points.  Also, if the
exact-fit polynomial is going to be used to interpolate or extrapolate
the data, it is numerically better to use the ‘a p’ command described
below.  *Note Interpolation::.

   Another generalization of the linear model is to assume the ‘y’
values are a sum of linear contributions from several ‘x’ values.  This
is a “multilinear” fit, and it is also selected by the ‘1’ digit key.
(Calc decides whether the fit is linear or multilinear by counting the
rows in the data matrix.)

   Given the data matrix,

     [ [  1,   2,   3,    4,   5  ]
       [  7,   2,   3,    5,   2  ]
       [ 14.5, 15, 18.5, 22.5, 24 ] ]

the command ‘a F 1 <RET>’ will call the first row ‘x’ and the second row
‘y’, and will fit the values in the third row to the model ‘a + b x + c
y’.

     8. + 3. x + 0.5 y

   Calc can do multilinear fits with any number of independent variables
(i.e., with any number of data rows).

   Yet another variation is “homogeneous” linear models, in which the
constant term is known to be zero.  In the linear case, this means the
model formula is simply ‘a x’; in the multilinear case, the model might
be ‘a x + b y + c z’; and in the polynomial case, the model could be ‘a
x + b x^2 + c x^3’.  You can get a homogeneous linear or multilinear
model by pressing the letter ‘h’ followed by a regular model key, like
‘1’ or ‘2’.  This will be indicated by an “h” in the minibuffer after
the help message.

   It is certainly possible to have other constrained linear models,
like ‘2.3 + a x’ or ‘a - 4 x’.  While there is no single key to select
models like these, a later section shows how to enter any desired model
by hand.  In the first case, for example, you would enter ‘a F ' 2.3 + a
x’.

   Another class of models that will work but must be entered by hand
are multinomial fits, e.g., ‘a + b x + c y + d x^2 + e y^2 + f x y’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Error Estimates for Fits,  Next: Standard Nonlinear Models,  Prev: Polynomial and Multilinear Fits,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.3 Error Estimates for Fits
-------------------------------

With the Hyperbolic flag, ‘H a F’ [‘efit’] performs the same fitting
operation as ‘a F’, but reports the coefficients as error forms instead
of plain numbers.  Fitting our two data matrices (first with 13, then
with 14) to a line with ‘H a F’ gives the results,

     3. + 2. x
     2.6 +/- 0.382970843103 + 2.2 +/- 0.115470053838 x

   In the first case the estimated errors are zero because the linear
fit is perfect.  In the second case, the errors are nonzero but
moderately small, because the data are still very close to linear.

   It is also possible for the _input_ to a fitting operation to contain
error forms.  The data values must either all include errors or all be
plain numbers.  Error forms can go anywhere but generally go on the
numbers in the last row of the data matrix.  If the last row contains
error forms ‘Y_I +/- SIGMA_I’, then the ‘chi^2’ statistic is now,

     chi^2 = sum(((y_i - (a + b x_i)) / sigma_i)^2, i, 1, N)

so that data points with larger error estimates contribute less to the
fitting operation.

   If there are error forms on other rows of the data matrix, all the
errors for a given data point are combined; the square root of the sum
of the squares of the errors forms the ‘sigma_i’ used for the data
point.

   Both ‘a F’ and ‘H a F’ can accept error forms in the input matrix,
although if you are concerned about error analysis you will probably use
‘H a F’ so that the output also contains error estimates.

   If the input contains error forms but all the ‘sigma_i’ values are
the same, it is easy to see that the resulting fitted model will be the
same as if the input did not have error forms at all (‘chi^2’ is simply
scaled uniformly by ‘1 / sigma^2’, which doesn’t affect where it has a
minimum).  But there _will_ be a difference in the estimated errors of
the coefficients reported by ‘H a F’.

   Consult any text on statistical modeling of data for a discussion of
where these error estimates come from and how they should be
interpreted.

   With the Inverse flag, ‘I a F’ [‘xfit’] produces even more
information.  The result is a vector of six items:

  1. The model formula with error forms for its coefficients or
     parameters.  This is the result that ‘H a F’ would have produced.

  2. A vector of “raw” parameter values for the model.  These are the
     polynomial coefficients or other parameters as plain numbers, in
     the same order as the parameters appeared in the final prompt of
     the ‘I a F’ command.  For polynomials of degree ‘d’, this vector
     will have length ‘M = d+1’ with the constant term first.

  3. The covariance matrix ‘C’ computed from the fit.  This is an MxM
     symmetric matrix; the diagonal elements ‘C_j_j’ are the variances
     ‘sigma_j^2’ of the parameters.  The other elements are covariances
     ‘sigma_i_j^2’ that describe the correlation between pairs of
     parameters.  (A related set of numbers, the “linear correlation
     coefficients” ‘r_i_j’, are defined as ‘sigma_i_j^2 / sigma_i
     sigma_j’.)

  4. A vector of ‘M’ “parameter filter” functions whose meanings are
     described below.  If no filters are necessary this will instead be
     an empty vector; this is always the case for the polynomial and
     multilinear fits described so far.

  5. The value of ‘chi^2’ for the fit, calculated by the formulas shown
     above.  This gives a measure of the quality of the fit;
     statisticians consider ‘chi^2 = N - M’ to indicate a moderately
     good fit (where again ‘N’ is the number of data points and ‘M’ is
     the number of parameters).

  6. A measure of goodness of fit expressed as a probability ‘Q’.  This
     is computed from the ‘utpc’ probability distribution function using
     ‘chi^2’ with ‘N - M’ degrees of freedom.  A value of 0.5 implies a
     good fit; some texts recommend that often ‘Q = 0.1’ or even 0.001
     can signify an acceptable fit.  In particular, ‘chi^2’ statistics
     assume the errors in your inputs follow a normal (Gaussian)
     distribution; if they don’t, you may have to accept smaller values
     of ‘Q’.

     The ‘Q’ value is computed only if the input included error
     estimates.  Otherwise, Calc will report the symbol ‘nan’ for ‘Q’.
     The reason is that in this case the ‘chi^2’ value has effectively
     been used to estimate the original errors in the input, and thus
     there is no redundant information left over to use for a confidence
     test.


File: calc.info,  Node: Standard Nonlinear Models,  Next: Curve Fitting Details,  Prev: Error Estimates for Fits,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.4 Standard Nonlinear Models
--------------------------------

The ‘a F’ command also accepts other kinds of models besides lines and
polynomials.  Some common models have quick single-key abbreviations;
others must be entered by hand as algebraic formulas.

   Here is a complete list of the standard models recognized by ‘a F’:

‘1’
     Linear or multilinear.  a + b x + c y + d z.
‘2-9’
     Polynomials.  a + b x + c x^2 + d x^3.
‘e’
     Exponential.  a exp(b x) exp(c y).
‘E’
     Base-10 exponential.  a 10^(b x) 10^(c y).
‘x’
     Exponential (alternate notation).  exp(a + b x + c y).
‘X’
     Base-10 exponential (alternate).  10^(a + b x + c y).
‘l’
     Logarithmic.  a + b ln(x) + c ln(y).
‘L’
     Base-10 logarithmic.  a + b log10(x) + c log10(y).
‘^’
     General exponential.  a b^x c^y.
‘p’
     Power law.  a x^b y^c.
‘q’
     Quadratic.  a + b (x-c)^2 + d (x-e)^2.
‘g’
     Gaussian.  (a / b sqrt(2 pi)) exp(-0.5*((x-c)/b)^2).
‘s’
     Logistic _s_ curve.  a/(1 + exp(b (x - c))).
‘b’
     Logistic bell curve.  a exp(b (x - c))/(1 + exp(b (x - c)))^2.
‘o’
     Hubbert linearization.  (y/x) = a (1 - x/b).

   All of these models are used in the usual way; just press the
appropriate letter at the model prompt, and choose variable names if you
wish.  The result will be a formula as shown in the above table, with
the best-fit values of the parameters substituted.  (You may find it
easier to read the parameter values from the vector that is placed in
the trail.)

   All models except Gaussian, logistics, Hubbert and polynomials can
generalize as shown to any number of independent variables.  Also, all
the built-in models except for the logistic and Hubbert curves have an
additive or multiplicative parameter shown as ‘a’ in the above table
which can be replaced by zero or one, as appropriate, by typing ‘h’
before the model key.

   Note that many of these models are essentially equivalent, but
express the parameters slightly differently.  For example, ‘a b^x’ and
the other two exponential models are all algebraic rearrangements of
each other.  Also, the “quadratic” model is just a degree-2 polynomial
with the parameters expressed differently.  Use whichever form best
matches the problem.

   The HP-28/48 calculators support four different models for curve
fitting, called ‘LIN’, ‘LOG’, ‘EXP’, and ‘PWR’.  These correspond to
Calc models ‘a + b x’, ‘a + b ln(x)’, ‘a exp(b x)’, and ‘a x^b’,
respectively.  In each case, ‘a’ is what the HP-48 identifies as the
“intercept,” and ‘b’ is what it calls the “slope.”

   If the model you want doesn’t appear on this list, press ‘'’ (the
apostrophe key) at the model prompt to enter any algebraic formula, such
as ‘m x - b’, as the model.  (Not all models will work, though—see the
next section for details.)

   The model can also be an equation like ‘y = m x + b’.  In this case,
Calc thinks of all the rows of the data matrix on equal terms; this
model effectively has two parameters (‘m’ and ‘b’) and two independent
variables (‘x’ and ‘y’), with no “dependent” variables.  Model equations
do not need to take this ‘y =’ form.  For example, the implicit line
equation ‘a x + b y = 1’ works fine as a model.

   When you enter a model, Calc makes an alphabetical list of all the
variables that appear in the model.  These are used for the default
parameters, independent variables, and dependent variable (in that
order).  If you enter a plain formula (not an equation), Calc assumes
the dependent variable does not appear in the formula and thus does not
need a name.

   For example, if the model formula has the variables ‘a,mu,sigma,t,x’,
and the data matrix has three rows (meaning two independent variables),
Calc will use ‘a,mu,sigma’ as the default parameters, and the data rows
will be named ‘t’ and ‘x’, respectively.  If you enter an equation
instead of a plain formula, Calc will use ‘a,mu’ as the parameters, and
‘sigma,t,x’ as the three independent variables.

   You can, of course, override these choices by entering something
different at the prompt.  If you leave some variables out of the list,
those variables must have stored values and those stored values will be
used as constants in the model.  (Stored values for the parameters and
independent variables are ignored by the ‘a F’ command.)  If you list
only independent variables, all the remaining variables in the model
formula will become parameters.

   If there are ‘$’ signs in the model you type, they will stand for
parameters and all other variables (in alphabetical order) will be
independent.  Use ‘$’ for one parameter, ‘$$’ for another, and so on.
Thus ‘$ x + $$’ is another way to describe a linear model.

   If you type a ‘$’ instead of ‘'’ at the model prompt itself, Calc
will take the model formula from the stack.  (The data must then appear
at the second stack level.)  The same conventions are used to choose
which variables in the formula are independent by default and which are
parameters.

   Models taken from the stack can also be expressed as vectors of two
or three elements, ‘[MODEL, VARS]’ or ‘[MODEL, VARS, PARAMS]’.  Each of
VARS and PARAMS may be either a variable or a vector of variables.  (If
PARAMS is omitted, all variables in MODEL except those listed as VARS
are parameters.)

   When you enter a model manually with ‘'’, Calc puts a 3-vector
describing the model in the trail so you can get it back if you wish.

   Finally, you can store a model in one of the Calc variables ‘Model1’
or ‘Model2’, then use this model by typing ‘a F u’ or ‘a F U’
(respectively).  The value stored in the variable can be any of the
formats that ‘a F $’ would accept for a model on the stack.

   Calc uses the principal values of inverse functions like ‘ln’ and
‘arcsin’ when doing fits.  For example, when you enter the model ‘y =
sin(a t + b)’ Calc actually uses the easier form ‘arcsin(y) = a t + b’.
The ‘arcsin’ function always returns results in the range from -90 to 90
degrees (or the equivalent range in radians).  Suppose you had data that
you believed to represent roughly three oscillations of a sine wave, so
that the argument of the sine might go from zero to 3*360 degrees.  The
above model would appear to be a good way to determine the true
frequency and phase of the sine wave, but in practice it would fail
utterly.  The righthand side of the actual model ‘arcsin(y) = a t + b’
will grow smoothly with ‘t’, but the lefthand side will bounce back and
forth between -90 and 90.  No values of ‘a’ and ‘b’ can make the two
sides match, even approximately.

   There is no good solution to this problem at present.  You could
restrict your data to small enough ranges so that the above problem
doesn’t occur (i.e., not straddling any peaks in the sine wave).  Or, in
this case, you could use a totally different method such as Fourier
analysis, which is beyond the scope of the ‘a F’ command.
(Unfortunately, Calc does not currently have any facilities for taking
Fourier and related transforms.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Curve Fitting Details,  Next: Interpolation,  Prev: Standard Nonlinear Models,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.5 Curve Fitting Details
----------------------------

Calc’s internal least-squares fitter can only handle multilinear models.
More precisely, it can handle any model of the form ‘a f(x,y,z) + b
g(x,y,z) + c h(x,y,z)’, where ‘a,b,c’ are the parameters and ‘x,y,z’ are
the independent variables (of course there can be any number of each,
not just three).

   In a simple multilinear or polynomial fit, it is easy to see how to
convert the model into this form.  For example, if the model is ‘a + b x
+ c x^2’, then ‘f(x) = 1’, ‘g(x) = x’, and ‘h(x) = x^2’ are suitable
functions.

   For most other models, Calc uses a variety of algebraic manipulations
to try to put the problem into the form

     Y(x,y,z) = A(a,b,c) F(x,y,z) + B(a,b,c) G(x,y,z) + C(a,b,c) H(x,y,z)

where ‘Y,A,B,C,F,G,H’ are arbitrary functions.  It computes ‘Y’, ‘F’,
‘G’, and ‘H’ for all the data points, does a standard linear fit to find
the values of ‘A’, ‘B’, and ‘C’, then uses the equation solver to solve
for ‘a,b,c’ in terms of ‘A,B,C’.

   A remarkable number of models can be cast into this general form.
We’ll look at two examples here to see how it works.  The power-law
model ‘y = a x^b’ with two independent variables and two parameters can
be rewritten as follows:

     y = a x^b
     y = a exp(b ln(x))
     y = exp(ln(a) + b ln(x))
     ln(y) = ln(a) + b ln(x)

which matches the desired form with ‘Y = ln(y)’, ‘A = ln(a)’, ‘F = 1’,
‘B = b’, and ‘G = ln(x)’.  Calc thus computes the logarithms of your ‘y’
and ‘x’ values, does a linear fit for ‘A’ and ‘B’, then solves to get ‘a
= exp(A)’ and ‘b = B’.

   Another interesting example is the “quadratic” model, which can be
handled by expanding according to the distributive law.

     y = a + b*(x - c)^2
     y = a + b c^2 - 2 b c x + b x^2

which matches with ‘Y = y’, ‘A = a + b c^2’, ‘F = 1’, ‘B = -2 b c’, ‘G =
x’ (the -2 factor could just as easily have been put into ‘G’ instead of
‘B’), ‘C = b’, and ‘H = x^2’.

   The Gaussian model looks quite complicated, but a closer examination
shows that it’s actually similar to the quadratic model but with an
exponential that can be brought to the top and moved into ‘Y’.

   The logistic models cannot be put into general linear form.  For
these models, and the Hubbert linearization, Calc computes a rough
approximation for the parameters, then uses the Levenberg-Marquardt
iterative method to refine the approximations.

   Another model that cannot be put into general linear form is a
Gaussian with a constant background added on, i.e., ‘d’ + the regular
Gaussian formula.  If you have a model like this, your best bet is to
replace enough of your parameters with constants to make the model
linearizable, then adjust the constants manually by doing a series of
fits.  You can compare the fits by graphing them, by examining the
goodness-of-fit measures returned by ‘I a F’, or by some other method
suitable to your application.  Note that some models can be linearized
in several ways.  The Gaussian-plus-D model can be linearized by setting
‘d’ (the background) to a constant, or by setting ‘b’ (the standard
deviation) and ‘c’ (the mean) to constants.

   To fit a model with constants substituted for some parameters, just
store suitable values in those parameter variables, then omit them from
the list of parameters when you answer the variables prompt.

   A last desperate step would be to use the general-purpose ‘minimize’
function rather than ‘fit’.  After all, both functions solve the problem
of minimizing an expression (the ‘chi^2’ sum) by adjusting certain
parameters in the expression.  The ‘a F’ command is able to use a vastly
more efficient algorithm due to its special knowledge about linear
chi-square sums, but the ‘a N’ command can do the same thing by brute
force.

   A compromise would be to pick out a few parameters without which the
fit is linearizable, and use ‘minimize’ on a call to ‘fit’ which
efficiently takes care of the rest of the parameters.  The thing to be
minimized would be the value of ‘chi^2’ returned as the fifth result of
the ‘xfit’ function:

     minimize(xfit(gaus(a,b,c,d,x), x, [a,b,c], data)_5, d, guess)

where ‘gaus’ represents the Gaussian model with background, ‘data’
represents the data matrix, and ‘guess’ represents the initial guess for
‘d’ that ‘minimize’ requires.  This operation will only be, shall we
say, extraordinarily slow rather than astronomically slow (as would be
the case if ‘minimize’ were used by itself to solve the problem).

   The ‘I a F’ [‘xfit’] command is somewhat trickier when nonlinear
models are used.  The second item in the result is the vector of “raw”
parameters ‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’.  The covariance matrix is written in terms of
those raw parameters.  The fifth item is a vector of “filter”
expressions.  This is the empty vector ‘[]’ if the raw parameters were
the same as the requested parameters, i.e., if ‘A = a’, ‘B = b’, and so
on (which is always true if the model is already linear in the
parameters as written, e.g., for polynomial fits).  If the parameters
had to be rearranged, the fifth item is instead a vector of one formula
per parameter in the original model.  The raw parameters are expressed
in these “filter” formulas as ‘fitdummy(1)’ for ‘A’, ‘fitdummy(2)’ for
‘B’, and so on.

   When Calc needs to modify the model to return the result, it replaces
‘fitdummy(1)’ in all the filters with the first item in the raw
parameters list, and so on for the other raw parameters, then evaluates
the resulting filter formulas to get the actual parameter values to be
substituted into the original model.  In the case of ‘H a F’ and ‘I a F’
where the parameters must be error forms, Calc uses the square roots of
the diagonal entries of the covariance matrix as error values for the
raw parameters, then lets Calc’s standard error-form arithmetic take it
from there.

   If you use ‘I a F’ with a nonlinear model, be sure to remember that
the covariance matrix is in terms of the raw parameters, _not_ the
actual requested parameters.  It’s up to you to figure out how to
interpret the covariances in the presence of nontrivial filter
functions.

   Things are also complicated when the input contains error forms.
Suppose there are three independent and dependent variables, ‘x’, ‘y’,
and ‘z’, one or more of which are error forms in the data.  Calc
combines all the error values by taking the square root of the sum of
the squares of the errors.  It then changes ‘x’ and ‘y’ to be plain
numbers, and makes ‘z’ into an error form with this combined error.  The
‘Y(x,y,z)’ part of the linearized model is evaluated, and the result
should be an error form.  The error part of that result is used for
‘sigma_i’ for the data point.  If for some reason ‘Y(x,y,z)’ does not
return an error form, the combined error from ‘z’ is used directly for
‘sigma_i’.  Finally, ‘z’ is also stripped of its error for use in
computing ‘F(x,y,z)’, ‘G(x,y,z)’ and so on; the righthand side of the
linearized model is computed in regular arithmetic with no error forms.

   (While these rules may seem complicated, they are designed to do the
most reasonable thing in the typical case that ‘Y(x,y,z)’ depends only
on the dependent variable ‘z’, and in fact is often simply equal to ‘z’.
For common cases like polynomials and multilinear models, the combined
error is simply used as the ‘sigma’ for the data point with no further
ado.)

   It may be the case that the model you wish to use is linearizable,
but Calc’s built-in rules are unable to figure it out.  Calc uses its
algebraic rewrite mechanism to linearize a model.  The rewrite rules are
kept in the variable ‘FitRules’.  You can edit this variable using the
‘s e FitRules’ command; in fact, there is a special ‘s F’ command just
for editing ‘FitRules’.  *Note Operations on Variables::.

   *Note Rewrite Rules::, for a discussion of rewrite rules.

   Calc uses ‘FitRules’ as follows.  First, it converts the model to an
equation if necessary and encloses the model equation in a call to the
function ‘fitmodel’ (which is not actually a defined function in Calc;
it is only used as a placeholder by the rewrite rules).  Parameter
variables are renamed to function calls ‘fitparam(1)’, ‘fitparam(2)’,
and so on, and independent variables are renamed to ‘fitvar(1)’,
‘fitvar(2)’, etc.  The dependent variable is the highest-numbered
‘fitvar’.  For example, the power law model ‘a x^b’ is converted to ‘y =
a x^b’, then to

     fitmodel(fitvar(2) = fitparam(1) fitvar(1)^fitparam(2))

   Calc then applies the rewrites as if by ‘C-u 0 a r FitRules’.  (The
zero prefix means that rewriting should continue until no further
changes are possible.)

   When rewriting is complete, the ‘fitmodel’ call should have been
replaced by a ‘fitsystem’ call that looks like this:

     fitsystem(Y, FGH, ABC)

where Y is a formula that describes the function ‘Y(x,y,z)’, FGH is the
vector of formulas ‘[F(x,y,z), G(x,y,z), H(x,y,z)]’, and ABC is the
vector of parameter filters which refer to the raw parameters as
‘fitdummy(1)’ for ‘A’, ‘fitdummy(2)’ for ‘B’, etc.  While the number of
raw parameters (the length of the FGH vector) is usually the same as the
number of original parameters (the length of the ABC vector), this is
not required.

   The power law model eventually boils down to

     fitsystem(ln(fitvar(2)),
               [1, ln(fitvar(1))],
               [exp(fitdummy(1)), fitdummy(2)])

   The actual implementation of ‘FitRules’ is complicated; it proceeds
in four phases.  First, common rearrangements are done to try to bring
linear terms together and to isolate functions like ‘exp’ and ‘ln’
either all the way “out” (so that they can be put into Y) or all the way
“in” (so that they can be put into ABC or FGH).  In particular, all
non-constant powers are converted to logs-and-exponentials form, and the
distributive law is used to expand products of sums.  Quotients are
rewritten to use the ‘fitinv’ function, where ‘fitinv(x)’ represents
‘1/x’ while the ‘FitRules’ are operating.  (The use of ‘fitinv’ makes
recognition of linear-looking forms easier.)  If you modify ‘FitRules’,
you will probably only need to modify the rules for this phase.

   Phase two, whose rules can actually also apply during phases one and
three, first rewrites ‘fitmodel’ to a two-argument form ‘fitmodel(Y,
MODEL)’, where Y is initially zero and MODEL has been changed from ‘a=b’
to ‘a-b’ form.  It then tries to peel off invertible functions from the
outside of MODEL and put them into Y instead, calling the equation
solver to invert the functions.  Finally, when this is no longer
possible, the ‘fitmodel’ is changed to a four-argument ‘fitsystem’,
where the fourth argument is MODEL and the FGH and ABC vectors are
initially empty.  (The last vector is really ABC, corresponding to raw
parameters, for now.)

   Phase three converts a sum of items in the MODEL to a sum of
‘fitpart(A, B, C)’ terms which represent terms ‘A*B*C’ of the sum, where
A is all factors that do not involve any variables, B is all factors
that involve only parameters, and C is the factors that involve only
independent variables.  (If this decomposition is not possible, the rule
set will not complete and Calc will complain that the model is too
complex.)  Then ‘fitpart’s with equal B or C components are merged back
together using the distributive law in order to minimize the number of
raw parameters needed.

   Phase four moves the ‘fitpart’ terms into the FGH and ABC vectors.
Also, some of the algebraic expansions that were done in phase 1 are
undone now to make the formulas more computationally efficient.
Finally, it calls the solver one more time to convert the ABC vector to
an ABC vector, and removes the fourth MODEL argument (which by now will
be zero) to obtain the three-argument ‘fitsystem’ that the linear
least-squares solver wants to see.

   Two functions which are useful in connection with ‘FitRules’ are
‘hasfitparams(x)’ and ‘hasfitvars(x)’, which check whether ‘x’ refers to
any parameters or independent variables, respectively.  Specifically,
these functions return “true” if the argument contains any ‘fitparam’
(or ‘fitvar’) function calls, and “false” otherwise.  (Recall that
“true” means a nonzero number, and “false” means zero.  The actual
nonzero number returned is the largest N from all the ‘fitparam(N)’s or
‘fitvar(N)’s, respectively, that appear in the formula.)

   The ‘fit’ function in algebraic notation normally takes four
arguments, ‘fit(MODEL, VARS, PARAMS, DATA)’, where MODEL is the model
formula as it would be typed after ‘a F '’, VARS is the independent
variable or a vector of independent variables, PARAMS likewise gives the
parameter(s), and DATA is the data matrix.  Note that the length of VARS
must be equal to the number of rows in DATA if MODEL is an equation, or
one less than the number of rows if MODEL is a plain formula.
(Actually, a name for the dependent variable is allowed but will be
ignored in the plain-formula case.)

   If PARAMS is omitted, the parameters are all variables in MODEL
except those that appear in VARS.  If VARS is also omitted, Calc sorts
all the variables that appear in MODEL alphabetically and uses the
higher ones for VARS and the lower ones for PARAMS.

   Alternatively, ‘fit(MODELVEC, DATA)’ is allowed where MODELVEC is a
2- or 3-vector describing the model and variables, as discussed
previously.

   If Calc is unable to do the fit, the ‘fit’ function is left in
symbolic form, ordinarily with an explanatory message.  The message will
be “Model expression is too complex” if the linearizer was unable to put
the model into the required form.

   The ‘efit’ (corresponding to ‘H a F’) and ‘xfit’ (for ‘I a F’)
functions are completely analogous.


File: calc.info,  Node: Interpolation,  Prev: Curve Fitting Details,  Up: Curve Fitting

11.8.6 Polynomial Interpolation
-------------------------------

The ‘a p’ (‘calc-poly-interp’) [‘polint’] command does a polynomial
interpolation at a particular ‘x’ value.  It takes two arguments from
the stack: A data matrix of the sort used by ‘a F’, and a single number
which represents the desired ‘x’ value.  Calc effectively does an exact
polynomial fit as if by ‘a F i’, then substitutes the ‘x’ value into the
result in order to get an approximate ‘y’ value based on the fit.  (Calc
does not actually use ‘a F i’, however; it uses a direct method which is
both more efficient and more numerically stable.)

   The result of ‘a p’ is actually a vector of two values: The ‘y’ value
approximation, and an error measure ‘dy’ that reflects Calc’s estimation
of the probable error of the approximation at that value of ‘x’.  If the
input ‘x’ is equal to any of the ‘x’ values in the data matrix, the
output ‘y’ will be the corresponding ‘y’ value from the matrix, and the
output ‘dy’ will be exactly zero.

   A prefix argument of 2 causes ‘a p’ to take separate x- and y-vectors
from the stack instead of one data matrix.

   If ‘x’ is a vector of numbers, ‘a p’ will return a matrix of
interpolated results for each of those ‘x’ values.  (The matrix will
have two columns, the ‘y’ values and the ‘dy’ values.)  If ‘x’ is a
formula instead of a number, the ‘polint’ function remains in symbolic
form; use the ‘a "’ command to expand it out to a formula that describes
the fit in symbolic terms.

   In all cases, the ‘a p’ command leaves the data vectors or matrix on
the stack.  Only the ‘x’ value is replaced by the result.

   The ‘H a p’ [‘ratint’] command does a rational function
interpolation.  It is used exactly like ‘a p’, except that it uses as
its model the quotient of two polynomials.  If there are ‘N’ data
points, the numerator and denominator polynomials will each have degree
‘N/2’ (if ‘N’ is odd, the denominator will have degree one higher than
the numerator).

   Rational approximations have the advantage that they can accurately
describe functions that have poles (points at which the function’s value
goes to infinity, so that the denominator polynomial of the
approximation goes to zero).  If ‘x’ corresponds to a pole of the fitted
rational function, then the result will be a division by zero.  If
Infinite mode is enabled, the result will be ‘[uinf, uinf]’.

   There is no way to get the actual coefficients of the rational
function used by ‘H a p’.  (The algorithm never generates these
coefficients explicitly, and quotients of polynomials are beyond ‘a F’’s
capabilities to fit.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Summations,  Next: Logical Operations,  Prev: Curve Fitting,  Up: Algebra

11.9 Summations
===============

The ‘a +’ (‘calc-summation’) [‘sum’] command computes the sum of a
formula over a certain range of index values.  The formula is taken from
the top of the stack; the command prompts for the name of the summation
index variable, the lower limit of the sum (any formula), and the upper
limit of the sum.  If you enter a blank line at any of these prompts,
that prompt and any later ones are answered by reading additional
elements from the stack.  Thus, ‘' k^2 <RET> ' k <RET> 1 <RET> 5 <RET> a
+ <RET>’ produces the result 55.

   The choice of index variable is arbitrary, but it’s best not to use a
variable with a stored value.  In particular, while ‘i’ is often a
favorite index variable, it should be avoided in Calc because ‘i’ has
the imaginary constant ‘(0, 1)’ as a value.  If you pressed ‘=’ on a sum
over ‘i’, it would be changed to a nonsensical sum over the “variable”
‘(0, 1)’!  If you really want to use ‘i’ as an index variable, use
‘s u i <RET>’ first to “unstore” this variable.  (*Note Storing
Variables::.)

   A numeric prefix argument steps the index by that amount rather than
by one.  Thus ‘' a_k <RET> C-u -2 a + k <RET> 10 <RET> 0 <RET>’ yields
‘a_10 + a_8 + a_6 + a_4 + a_2 + a_0’.  A prefix argument of plain ‘C-u’
causes ‘a +’ to prompt for the step value, in which case you can enter
any formula or enter a blank line to take the step value from the stack.
With the ‘C-u’ prefix, ‘a +’ can take up to five arguments from the
stack: The formula, the variable, the lower limit, the upper limit, and
(at the top of the stack), the step value.

   Calc knows how to do certain sums in closed form.  For example,
‘sum(6 k^2, k, 1, n) = 2 n^3 + 3 n^2 + n’.  In particular, this is
possible if the formula being summed is polynomial or exponential in the
index variable.  Sums of logarithms are transformed into logarithms of
products.  Sums of trigonometric and hyperbolic functions are
transformed to sums of exponentials and then done in closed form.  Also,
of course, sums in which the lower and upper limits are both numbers can
always be evaluated just by grinding them out, although Calc will use
closed forms whenever it can for the sake of efficiency.

   The notation for sums in algebraic formulas is ‘sum(EXPR, VAR, LOW,
HIGH, STEP)’.  If STEP is omitted, it defaults to one.  If HIGH is
omitted, LOW is actually the upper limit and the lower limit is one.  If
LOW is also omitted, the limits are ‘-inf’ and ‘inf’, respectively.

   Infinite sums can sometimes be evaluated: ‘sum(.5^k, k, 1, inf)’
returns ‘1’.  This is done by evaluating the sum in closed form (to ‘1.
- 0.5^n’ in this case), then evaluating this formula with ‘n’ set to
‘inf’.  Calc’s usual rules for “infinite” arithmetic can find the answer
from there.  If infinite arithmetic yields a ‘nan’, or if the sum cannot
be solved in closed form, Calc leaves the ‘sum’ function in symbolic
form.  *Note Infinities::.

   As a special feature, if the limits are infinite (or omitted, as
described above) but the formula includes vectors subscripted by
expressions that involve the iteration variable, Calc narrows the limits
to include only the range of integers which result in valid subscripts
for the vector.  For example, the sum ‘sum(k [a,b,c,d,e,f,g]_(2k),k)’
evaluates to ‘b + 2 d + 3 f’.

   The limits of a sum do not need to be integers.  For example,
‘sum(a_k, k, 0, 2 n, n)’ produces ‘a_0 + a_n + a_(2 n)’.  Calc computes
the number of iterations using the formula ‘1 + (HIGH - LOW) / STEP’,
which must, after algebraic simplification, evaluate to an integer.

   If the number of iterations according to the above formula does not
come out to an integer, the sum is invalid and will be left in symbolic
form.  However, closed forms are still supplied, and you are on your
honor not to misuse the resulting formulas by substituting mismatched
bounds into them.  For example, ‘sum(k, k, 1, 10, 2)’ is invalid, but
Calc will go ahead and evaluate the closed form solution for the limits
1 and 10 to get the rather dubious answer, 29.25.

   If the lower limit is greater than the upper limit (assuming a
positive step size), the result is generally zero.  However, Calc only
guarantees a zero result when the upper limit is exactly one step less
than the lower limit, i.e., if the number of iterations is -1.  Thus
‘sum(f(k), k, n, n-1)’ is zero but the sum from ‘n’ to ‘n-2’ may report
a nonzero value if Calc used a closed form solution.

   Calc’s logical predicates like ‘a < b’ return 1 for “true” and 0 for
“false.” *Note Logical Operations::.  This can be used to advantage for
building conditional sums.  For example, ‘sum(prime(k)*k^2, k, 1, 20)’
is the sum of the squares of all prime numbers from 1 to 20; the ‘prime’
predicate returns 1 if its argument is prime and 0 otherwise.  You can
read this expression as “the sum of ‘k^2’, where ‘k’ is prime.” Indeed,
‘sum(prime(k)*k^2, k)’ would represent the sum of _all_ primes squared,
since the limits default to plus and minus infinity, but there are no
such sums that Calc’s built-in rules can do in closed form.

   As another example, ‘sum((k != k_0) * f(k), k, 1, n)’ is the sum of
‘f(k)’ for all ‘k’ from 1 to ‘n’, excluding one value ‘k_0’.  Slightly
more tricky is the summand ‘(k != k_0) / (k - k_0)’, which is an attempt
to describe the sum of all ‘1/(k-k_0)’ except at ‘k = k_0’, where this
would be a division by zero.  But at ‘k = k_0’, this formula works out
to the indeterminate form ‘0 / 0’, which Calc will not assume is zero.
Better would be to use ‘(k != k_0) ? 1/(k-k_0) : 0’; the ‘? :’ operator
does an “if-then-else” test: This expression says, “if ‘k != k_0’, then
‘1/(k-k_0)’, else zero.” Now the formula ‘1/(k-k_0)’ will not even be
evaluated by Calc when ‘k = k_0’.

   The ‘a -’ (‘calc-alt-summation’) [‘asum’] command computes an
alternating sum.  Successive terms of the sequence are given alternating
signs, with the first term (corresponding to the lower index value)
being positive.  Alternating sums are converted to normal sums with an
extra term of the form ‘(-1)^(k-LOW)’.  This formula is adjusted
appropriately if the step value is other than one.  For example, the
Taylor series for the sine function is ‘asum(x^k / k!, k, 1, inf, 2)’.
(Calc cannot evaluate this infinite series, but it can approximate it if
you replace ‘inf’ with any particular odd number.)  Calc converts this
series to a regular sum with a step of one, namely ‘sum((-1)^k x^(2k+1)
/ (2k+1)!, k, 0, inf)’.

   The ‘a *’ (‘calc-product’) [‘prod’] command is the analogous way to
take a product of many terms.  Calc also knows some closed forms for
products, such as ‘prod(k, k, 1, n) = n!’.  Conditional products can be
written ‘prod(k^prime(k), k, 1, n)’ or ‘prod(prime(k) ? k : 1, k, 1,
n)’.

   The ‘a T’ (‘calc-tabulate’) [‘table’] command evaluates a formula at
a series of iterated index values, just like ‘sum’ and ‘prod’, but its
result is simply a vector of the results.  For example, ‘table(a_i, i,
1, 7, 2)’ produces ‘[a_1, a_3, a_5, a_7]’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Logical Operations,  Next: Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Summations,  Up: Algebra

11.10 Logical Operations
========================

The following commands and algebraic functions return true/false values,
where 1 represents “true” and 0 represents “false.” In cases where a
truth value is required (such as for the condition part of a rewrite
rule, or as the condition for a ‘Z [ Z ]’ control structure), any
nonzero value is accepted to mean “true.” (Specifically, anything for
which ‘dnonzero’ returns 1 is “true,” and anything for which ‘dnonzero’
returns 0 or cannot decide is assumed “false.” Note that this means that
‘Z [ Z ]’ will execute the “then” portion if its condition is provably
true, but it will execute the “else” portion for any condition like ‘a =
b’ that is not provably true, even if it might be true.  Algebraic
functions that have conditions as arguments, like ‘? :’ and ‘&&’, remain
unevaluated if the condition is neither provably true nor provably
false.  *Note Declarations::.)

   The ‘a =’ (‘calc-equal-to’) command, or ‘eq(a,b)’ function (which can
also be written ‘a = b’ or ‘a == b’ in an algebraic formula) is true if
‘a’ and ‘b’ are equal, either because they are identical expressions, or
because they are numbers which are numerically equal.  (Thus the integer
1 is considered equal to the float 1.0.)  If the equality of ‘a’ and ‘b’
cannot be determined, the comparison is left in symbolic form.  Note
that as a command, this operation pops two values from the stack and
pushes back either a 1 or a 0, or a formula ‘a = b’ if the values’
equality cannot be determined.

   Many Calc commands use ‘=’ formulas to represent “equations”.  For
example, the ‘a S’ (‘calc-solve-for’) command rearranges an equation to
solve for a given variable.  The ‘a M’ (‘calc-map-equation’) command can
be used to apply any function to both sides of an equation; for example,
‘2 a M *’ multiplies both sides of the equation by two.  Note that just
‘2 *’ would not do the same thing; it would produce the formula ‘2 (a =
b)’ which represents 2 if the equality is true or zero if not.

   The ‘eq’ function with more than two arguments (e.g., ‘C-u 3 a =’ or
‘a = b = c’) tests if all of its arguments are equal.  In algebraic
notation, the ‘=’ operator is unusual in that it is neither left- nor
right-associative: ‘a = b = c’ is not the same as ‘(a = b) = c’ or ‘a =
(b = c)’ (which each compare one variable with the 1 or 0 that results
from comparing two other variables).

   The ‘a #’ (‘calc-not-equal-to’) command, or ‘neq(a,b)’ or ‘a != b’
function, is true if ‘a’ and ‘b’ are not equal.  This also works with
more than two arguments; ‘a != b != c != d’ tests that all four of ‘a’,
‘b’, ‘c’, and ‘d’ are distinct numbers.

   The ‘a <’ (‘calc-less-than’) [‘lt(a,b)’ or ‘a < b’] operation is true
if ‘a’ is less than ‘b’.  Similar functions are ‘a >’
(‘calc-greater-than’) [‘gt(a,b)’ or ‘a > b’], ‘a [’ (‘calc-less-equal’)
[‘leq(a,b)’ or ‘a <= b’], and ‘a ]’ (‘calc-greater-equal’) [‘geq(a,b)’
or ‘a >= b’].

   While the inequality functions like ‘lt’ do not accept more than two
arguments, the syntax ‘a <= b < c’ is translated to an equivalent
expression involving intervals: ‘b in [a .. c)’.  (See the description
of ‘in’ below.)  All four combinations of ‘<’ and ‘<=’ are allowed, or
any of the four combinations of ‘>’ and ‘>=’.  Four-argument
constructions like ‘a < b < c < d’, and mixtures like ‘a < b = c’ that
involve both equations and inequalities, are not allowed.

   The ‘a .’ (‘calc-remove-equal’) [‘rmeq’] command extracts the
righthand side of the equation or inequality on the top of the stack.
It also works elementwise on vectors.  For example, if ‘[x = 2.34, y = z
/ 2]’ is on the stack, then ‘a .’ produces ‘[2.34, z / 2]’.  As a
special case, if the righthand side is a variable and the lefthand side
is a number (as in ‘2.34 = x’), then Calc keeps the lefthand side
instead.  Finally, this command works with assignments ‘x := 2.34’ as
well as equations, always taking the righthand side, and for ‘=>’
(evaluates-to) operators, always taking the lefthand side.

   The ‘a &’ (‘calc-logical-and’) [‘land(a,b)’ or ‘a && b’] function is
true if both of its arguments are true, i.e., are non-zero numbers.  In
this case, the result will be either ‘a’ or ‘b’, chosen arbitrarily.  If
either argument is zero, the result is zero.  Otherwise, the formula is
left in symbolic form.

   The ‘a |’ (‘calc-logical-or’) [‘lor(a,b)’ or ‘a || b’] function is
true if either or both of its arguments are true (nonzero).  The result
is whichever argument was nonzero, choosing arbitrarily if both are
nonzero.  If both ‘a’ and ‘b’ are zero, the result is zero.

   The ‘a !’ (‘calc-logical-not’) [‘lnot(a)’ or ‘! a’] function is true
if ‘a’ is false (zero), or false if ‘a’ is true (nonzero).  It is left
in symbolic form if ‘a’ is not a number.

   The ‘a :’ (‘calc-logical-if’) [‘if(a,b,c)’ or ‘a ? b : c’] function
is equal to either ‘b’ or ‘c’ if ‘a’ is a nonzero number or zero,
respectively.  If ‘a’ is not a number, the test is left in symbolic form
and neither ‘b’ nor ‘c’ is evaluated in any way.  In algebraic formulas,
this is one of the few Calc functions whose arguments are not
automatically evaluated when the function itself is evaluated.  The
others are ‘lambda’, ‘quote’, and ‘condition’.

   One minor surprise to watch out for is that the formula ‘a?3:4’ will
not work because the ‘3:4’ is parsed as a fraction instead of as three
separate symbols.  Type something like ‘a ? 3 : 4’ or ‘a?(3):4’ instead.

   As a special case, if ‘a’ evaluates to a vector, then both ‘b’ and
‘c’ are evaluated; the result is a vector of the same length as ‘a’
whose elements are chosen from corresponding elements of ‘b’ and ‘c’
according to whether each element of ‘a’ is zero or nonzero.  Each of
‘b’ and ‘c’ must be either a vector of the same length as ‘a’, or a
non-vector which is matched with all elements of ‘a’.

   The ‘a {’ (‘calc-in-set’) [‘in(a,b)’] function is true if the number
‘a’ is in the set of numbers represented by ‘b’.  If ‘b’ is an interval
form, ‘a’ must be one of the values encompassed by the interval.  If ‘b’
is a vector, ‘a’ must be equal to one of the elements of the vector.
(If any vector elements are intervals, ‘a’ must be in any of the
intervals.)  If ‘b’ is a plain number, ‘a’ must be numerically equal to
‘b’.  *Note Set Operations::, for a group of commands that manipulate
sets of this sort.

   The ‘typeof(a)’ function produces an integer or variable which
characterizes ‘a’.  If ‘a’ is a number, vector, or variable, the result
will be one of the following numbers:

      1   Integer
      2   Fraction
      3   Floating-point number
      4   HMS form
      5   Rectangular complex number
      6   Polar complex number
      7   Error form
      8   Interval form
      9   Modulo form
     10   Date-only form
     11   Date/time form
     12   Infinity (inf, uinf, or nan)
     100  Variable
     101  Vector (but not a matrix)
     102  Matrix

   Otherwise, ‘a’ is a formula, and the result is a variable which
represents the name of the top-level function call.

   The ‘integer(a)’ function returns true if ‘a’ is an integer.  The
‘real(a)’ function is true if ‘a’ is a real number, either integer,
fraction, or float.  The ‘constant(a)’ function returns true if ‘a’ is
any of the objects for which ‘typeof’ would produce an integer code
result except for variables, and provided that the components of an
object like a vector or error form are themselves constant.  Note that
infinities do not satisfy any of these tests, nor do special constants
like ‘pi’ and ‘e’.

   *Note Declarations::, for a set of similar functions that recognize
formulas as well as actual numbers.  For example, ‘dint(floor(x))’ is
true because ‘floor(x)’ is provably integer-valued, but
‘integer(floor(x))’ does not because ‘floor(x)’ is not literally an
integer constant.

   The ‘refers(a,b)’ function is true if the variable (or
sub-expression) ‘b’ appears in ‘a’, or false otherwise.  Unlike the
other tests described here, this function returns a definite “no” answer
even if its arguments are still in symbolic form.  The only case where
‘refers’ will be left unevaluated is if ‘a’ is a plain variable
(different from ‘b’).

   The ‘negative(a)’ function returns true if ‘a’ “looks” negative,
because it is a negative number, because it is of the form ‘-x’, or
because it is a product or quotient with a term that looks negative.
This is most useful in rewrite rules.  Beware that ‘negative(a)’
evaluates to 1 or 0 for _any_ argument ‘a’, so it can only be stored in
a formula if the default simplifications are turned off first with ‘m O’
(or if it appears in an unevaluated context such as a rewrite rule
condition).

   The ‘variable(a)’ function is true if ‘a’ is a variable, or false if
not.  If ‘a’ is a function call, this test is left in symbolic form.
Built-in variables like ‘pi’ and ‘inf’ are considered variables like any
others by this test.

   The ‘nonvar(a)’ function is true if ‘a’ is a non-variable.  If its
argument is a variable it is left unsimplified; it never actually
returns zero.  However, since Calc’s condition-testing commands consider
“false” anything not provably true, this is often good enough.

   The functions ‘lin’, ‘linnt’, ‘islin’, and ‘islinnt’ check if an
expression is “linear,” i.e., can be written in the form ‘a + b x’ for
some constants ‘a’ and ‘b’, and some variable or subformula ‘x’.  The
function ‘islin(f,x)’ checks if formula ‘f’ is linear in ‘x’, returning
1 if so.  For example, ‘islin(x,x)’, ‘islin(-x,x)’, ‘islin(3,x)’, and
‘islin(x y / 3 - 2, x)’ all return 1.  The ‘lin(f,x)’ function is
similar, except that instead of returning 1 it returns the vector ‘[a,
b, x]’.  For the above examples, this vector would be ‘[0, 1, x]’, ‘[0,
-1, x]’, ‘[3, 0, x]’, and ‘[-2, y/3, x]’, respectively.  Both ‘lin’ and
‘islin’ generally remain unevaluated for expressions which are not
linear, e.g., ‘lin(2 x^2, x)’ and ‘lin(sin(x), x)’.  The second argument
can also be a formula; ‘islin(2 + 3 sin(x), sin(x))’ returns true.

   The ‘linnt’ and ‘islinnt’ functions perform a similar check, but
require a “non-trivial” linear form, which means that the ‘b’
coefficient must be non-zero.  For example, ‘lin(2,x)’ returns ‘[2, 0,
x]’ and ‘lin(y,x)’ returns ‘[y, 0, x]’, but ‘linnt(2,x)’ and
‘linnt(y,x)’ are left unevaluated (in other words, these formulas are
considered to be only “trivially” linear in ‘x’).

   All four linearity-testing functions allow you to omit the second
argument, in which case the input may be linear in any non-constant
formula.  Here, the ‘a=0’, ‘b=1’ case is also considered trivial, and
only constant values for ‘a’ and ‘b’ are recognized.  Thus, ‘lin(2 x y)’
returns ‘[0, 2, x y]’, ‘lin(2 - x y)’ returns ‘[2, -1, x y]’, and ‘lin(x
y)’ returns ‘[0, 1, x y]’.  The ‘linnt’ function would allow the first
two cases but not the third.  Also, neither ‘lin’ nor ‘linnt’ accept
plain constants as linear in the one-argument case: ‘islin(2,x)’ is
true, but ‘islin(2)’ is false.

   The ‘istrue(a)’ function returns 1 if ‘a’ is a nonzero number or
provably nonzero formula, or 0 if ‘a’ is anything else.  Calls to
‘istrue’ can only be manipulated if ‘m O’ mode is used to make sure they
are not evaluated prematurely.  (Note that declarations are used when
deciding whether a formula is true; ‘istrue’ returns 1 when ‘dnonzero’
would return 1, and it returns 0 when ‘dnonzero’ would return 0 or leave
itself in symbolic form.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Logical Operations,  Up: Algebra

11.11 Rewrite Rules
===================

The ‘a r’ (‘calc-rewrite’) [‘rewrite’] command makes substitutions in a
formula according to a specified pattern or patterns known as “rewrite
rules”.  Whereas ‘a b’ (‘calc-substitute’) matches literally, so that
substituting ‘sin(x)’ with ‘cos(x)’ matches only the ‘sin’ function
applied to the variable ‘x’, rewrite rules match general kinds of
formulas; rewriting using the rule ‘sin(x) := cos(x)’ matches ‘sin’ of
any argument and replaces it with ‘cos’ of that same argument.  The only
significance of the name ‘x’ is that the same name is used on both sides
of the rule.

   Rewrite rules rearrange formulas already in Calc’s memory.  *Note
Syntax Tables::, to read about “syntax rules”, which are similar to
algebraic rewrite rules but operate when new algebraic entries are being
parsed, converting strings of characters into Calc formulas.

* Menu:

* Entering Rewrite Rules::
* Basic Rewrite Rules::
* Conditional Rewrite Rules::
* Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules::
* Other Features of Rewrite Rules::
* Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules::
* Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules::
* Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules::
* Selections with Rewrite Rules::
* Matching Commands::
* Automatic Rewrites::
* Debugging Rewrites::
* Examples of Rewrite Rules::


File: calc.info,  Node: Entering Rewrite Rules,  Next: Basic Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.1 Entering Rewrite Rules
------------------------------

Rewrite rules normally use the “assignment” operator ‘OLD := NEW’.  This
operator is equivalent to the function call ‘assign(old, new)’.  The
‘assign’ function is undefined by itself in Calc, so an assignment
formula such as a rewrite rule will be left alone by ordinary Calc
commands.  But certain commands, like the rewrite system, interpret
assignments in special ways.

   For example, the rule ‘sin(x)^2 := 1-cos(x)^2’ says to replace every
occurrence of the sine of something, squared, with one minus the square
of the cosine of that same thing.  All by itself as a formula on the
stack it does nothing, but when given to the ‘a r’ command it turns that
command into a sine-squared-to-cosine-squared converter.

   To specify a set of rules to be applied all at once, make a vector of
rules.

   When ‘a r’ prompts you to enter the rewrite rules, you can answer in
several ways:

  1. With a rule: ‘f(x) := g(x) <RET>’.
  2. With a vector of rules: ‘[f1(x) := g1(x), f2(x) := g2(x)] <RET>’.
     (You can omit the enclosing square brackets if you wish.)
  3. With the name of a variable that contains the rule or rules vector:
     ‘myrules <RET>’.
  4. With any formula except a rule, a vector, or a variable name; this
     will be interpreted as the OLD half of a rewrite rule, and you will
     be prompted a second time for the NEW half: ‘f(x) <RET> g(x)
     <RET>’.
  5. With a blank line, in which case the rule, rules vector, or
     variable will be taken from the top of the stack (and the formula
     to be rewritten will come from the second-to-top position).

   If you enter the rules directly (as opposed to using rules stored in
a variable), those rules will be put into the Trail so that you can
retrieve them later.  *Note Trail Commands::.

   It is most convenient to store rules you use often in a variable and
invoke them by giving the variable name.  The ‘s e’
(‘calc-edit-variable’) command is an easy way to create or edit a rule
set stored in a variable.  You may also wish to use ‘s p’
(‘calc-permanent-variable’) to save your rules permanently; *note
Operations on Variables::.

   Rewrite rules are compiled into a special internal form for faster
matching.  If you enter a rule set directly it must be recompiled every
time.  If you store the rules in a variable and refer to them through
that variable, they will be compiled once and saved away along with the
variable for later reference.  This is another good reason to store your
rules in a variable.

   Calc also accepts an obsolete notation for rules, as vectors ‘[OLD,
NEW]’.  But because it is easily confused with a vector of two rules,
the use of this notation is no longer recommended.


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Rewrite Rules,  Next: Conditional Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Entering Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.2 Basic Rewrite Rules
---------------------------

To match a particular formula ‘x’ with a particular rewrite rule ‘OLD :=
NEW’, Calc compares the structure of ‘x’ with the structure of OLD.
Variables that appear in OLD are treated as “meta-variables”; the
corresponding positions in ‘x’ may contain any sub-formulas.  For
example, the pattern ‘f(x,y)’ would match the expression ‘f(12, a+1)’
with the meta-variable ‘x’ corresponding to 12 and with ‘y’
corresponding to ‘a+1’.  However, this pattern would not match ‘f(12)’
or ‘g(12, a+1)’, since there is no assignment of the meta-variables that
will make the pattern match these expressions.  Notice that if the
pattern is a single meta-variable, it will match any expression.

   If a given meta-variable appears more than once in OLD, the
corresponding sub-formulas of ‘x’ must be identical.  Thus the pattern
‘f(x,x)’ would match ‘f(12, 12)’ and ‘f(a+1, a+1)’ but not ‘f(12, a+1)’
or ‘f(a+b, b+a)’.  (*Note Conditional Rewrite Rules::, for a way to
match the latter.)

   Things other than variables must match exactly between the pattern
and the target formula.  To match a particular variable exactly, use the
pseudo-function ‘quote(v)’ in the pattern.  For example, the pattern
‘x+quote(y)’ matches ‘x+y’, ‘2+y’, or ‘sin(a)+y’.

   The special variable names ‘e’, ‘pi’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, ‘gamma’, ‘inf’,
‘uinf’, and ‘nan’ always match literally.  Thus the pattern ‘sin(d + e +
f)’ acts exactly like ‘sin(d + quote(e) + f)’.

   If the OLD pattern is found to match a given formula, that formula is
replaced by NEW, where any occurrences in NEW of meta-variables from the
pattern are replaced with the sub-formulas that they matched.  Thus,
applying the rule ‘f(x,y) := g(y+x,x)’ to ‘f(12, a+1)’ would produce
‘g(a+13, 12)’.

   The normal ‘a r’ command applies rewrite rules over and over
throughout the target formula until no further changes are possible (up
to a limit of 100 times).  Use ‘C-u 1 a r’ to make only one change at a
time.


File: calc.info,  Node: Conditional Rewrite Rules,  Next: Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Basic Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.3 Conditional Rewrite Rules
---------------------------------

A rewrite rule can also be “conditional”, written in the form ‘OLD :=
NEW :: COND’.  (There is also the obsolete form ‘[OLD, NEW, COND]’.)  If
a COND part is present in the rule, this is an additional condition that
must be satisfied before the rule is accepted.  Once OLD has been
successfully matched to the target expression, COND is evaluated (with
all the meta-variables substituted for the values they matched) and
simplified with Calc’s algebraic simplifications.  If the result is a
nonzero number or any other object known to be nonzero (*note
Declarations::), the rule is accepted.  If the result is zero or if it
is a symbolic formula that is not known to be nonzero, the rule is
rejected.  *Note Logical Operations::, for a number of functions that
return 1 or 0 according to the results of various tests.

   For example, the formula ‘n > 0’ simplifies to 1 or 0 if ‘n’ is
replaced by a positive or nonpositive number, respectively (or if ‘n’
has been declared to be positive or nonpositive).  Thus, the rule
‘f(x,y) := g(y+x,x) :: x+y > 0’ would apply to ‘f(0, 4)’ but not to
‘f(-3, 2)’ or ‘f(12, a+1)’ (assuming no outstanding declarations for
‘a’).  In the case of ‘f(-3, 2)’, the condition can be shown not to be
satisfied; in the case of ‘f(12, a+1)’, the condition merely cannot be
shown to be satisfied, but that is enough to reject the rule.

   While Calc will use declarations to reason about variables in the
formula being rewritten, declarations do not apply to meta-variables.
For example, the rule ‘f(a) := g(a+1)’ will match for any values of ‘a’,
such as complex numbers, vectors, or formulas, even if ‘a’ has been
declared to be real or scalar.  If you want the meta-variable ‘a’ to
match only literal real numbers, use ‘f(a) := g(a+1) :: real(a)’.  If
you want ‘a’ to match only reals and formulas which are provably real,
use ‘dreal(a)’ as the condition.

   The ‘::’ operator is a shorthand for the ‘condition’ function; ‘OLD
:= NEW :: COND’ is equivalent to the formula ‘condition(assign(OLD,
NEW), COND)’.

   If you have several conditions, you can use ‘... :: c1 :: c2 :: c3’
or ‘... :: c1 && c2 && c3’.  The two are entirely equivalent.

   It is also possible to embed conditions inside the pattern: ‘f(x ::
x>0, y) := g(y+x, x)’.  This is purely a notational convenience, though;
where a condition appears in a rule has no effect on when it is tested.
The rewrite-rule compiler automatically decides when it is best to test
each condition while a rule is being matched.

   Certain conditions are handled as special cases by the rewrite rule
system and are tested very efficiently: Where ‘x’ is any meta-variable,
these conditions are ‘integer(x)’, ‘real(x)’, ‘constant(x)’,
‘negative(x)’, ‘x >= y’ where ‘y’ is either a constant or another
meta-variable and ‘>=’ may be replaced by any of the six relational
operators, and ‘x % a = b’ where ‘a’ and ‘b’ are constants.  Other
conditions, like ‘x >= y+1’ or ‘dreal(x)’, will be less efficient to
check since Calc must bring the whole evaluator and simplifier into
play.

   An interesting property of ‘::’ is that neither of its arguments will
be touched by Calc’s default simplifications.  This is important because
conditions often are expressions that cannot safely be evaluated early.
For example, the ‘typeof’ function never remains in symbolic form;
entering ‘typeof(a)’ will put the number 100 (the type code for
variables like ‘a’) on the stack.  But putting the condition ‘... ::
typeof(a) = 6’ on the stack is safe since ‘::’ prevents the ‘typeof’
from being evaluated until the condition is actually used by the rewrite
system.

   Since ‘::’ protects its lefthand side, too, you can use a dummy
condition to protect a rule that must itself not evaluate early.  For
example, it’s not safe to put ‘a(f,x) := apply(f, [x])’ on the stack
because it will immediately evaluate to ‘a(f,x) := f(x)’, where the
meta-variable-ness of ‘f’ on the righthand side has been lost.  But
‘a(f,x) := apply(f, [x]) :: 1’ is safe, and of course the condition ‘1’
is always true (nonzero) so it has no effect on the functioning of the
rule.  (The rewrite compiler will ensure that it doesn’t even impact the
speed of matching the rule.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules,  Next: Other Features of Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Conditional Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.4 Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules
---------------------------------------------

The rewrite mechanism understands the algebraic properties of functions
like ‘+’ and ‘*’.  In particular, pattern matching takes the
associativity and commutativity of the following functions into account:

     + - *  = !=  && ||  and or xor  vint vunion vxor  gcd lcm  max min  beta

   For example, the rewrite rule:

     a x + b x  :=  (a + b) x

will match formulas of the form,

     a x + b x,  x a + x b,  a x + x b,  x a + b x

   Rewrites also understand the relationship between the ‘+’ and ‘-’
operators.  The above rewrite rule will also match the formulas,

     a x - b x,  x a - x b,  a x - x b,  x a - b x

by matching ‘b’ in the pattern to ‘-b’ from the formula.

   Applied to a sum of many terms like ‘r + a x + s + b x + t’, this
pattern will check all pairs of terms for possible matches.  The rewrite
will take whichever suitable pair it discovers first.

   In general, a pattern using an associative operator like ‘a + b’ will
try 2 N different ways to match a sum of N terms like ‘x + y + z - w’.
First, ‘a’ is matched against each of ‘x’, ‘y’, ‘z’, and ‘-w’ in turn,
with ‘b’ being matched to the remainders ‘y + z - w’, ‘x + z - w’, etc.
If none of these succeed, then ‘b’ is matched against each of the four
terms with ‘a’ matching the remainder.  Half-and-half matches, like ‘(x
+ y) + (z - w)’, are not tried.

   Note that ‘*’ is not commutative when applied to matrices, but
rewrite rules pretend that it is.  If you type ‘m v’ to enable Matrix
mode (*note Matrix Mode::), rewrite rules will match ‘*’ literally,
ignoring its usual commutativity property.  (In the current
implementation, the associativity also vanishes—it is as if the pattern
had been enclosed in a ‘plain’ marker; see below.)  If you are applying
rewrites to formulas with matrices, it’s best to enable Matrix mode
first to prevent algebraically incorrect rewrites from occurring.

   The pattern ‘-x’ will actually match any expression.  For example,
the rule

     f(-x)  :=  -f(x)

will rewrite ‘f(a)’ to ‘-f(-a)’.  To avoid this, either use a ‘plain’
marker as described below, or add a ‘negative(x)’ condition.  The
‘negative’ function is true if its argument “looks” negative, for
example, because it is a negative number or because it is a formula like
‘-x’.  The new rule using this condition is:

     f(x)  :=  -f(-x)  :: negative(x)    or, equivalently,
     f(-x)  :=  -f(x)  :: negative(-x)

   In the same way, the pattern ‘x - y’ will match the sum ‘a + b’ by
matching ‘y’ to ‘-b’.

   The pattern ‘a b’ will also match the formula ‘x/y’ if ‘y’ is a
number.  Thus the rule ‘a x + b x := (a+b) x’ will also convert ‘a x + x
/ 2’ to ‘(a + 0.5) x’ (or ‘(a + 1:2) x’, depending on the current
fraction mode).

   Calc will _not_ take other liberties with ‘*’, ‘/’, and ‘^’.  For
example, the pattern ‘f(a b)’ will not match ‘f(x^2)’, and ‘f(a + b)’
will not match ‘f(2 x)’, even though conceivably these patterns could
match with ‘a = b = x’.  Nor will ‘f(a b)’ match ‘f(x / y)’ if ‘y’ is
not a constant, even though it could be considered to match with ‘a = x’
and ‘b = 1/y’.  The reasons are partly for efficiency, and partly
because while few mathematical operations are substantively different
for addition and subtraction, often it is preferable to treat the cases
of multiplication, division, and integer powers separately.

   Even more subtle is the rule set

     [ f(a) + f(b) := f(a + b),  -f(a) := f(-a) ]

attempting to match ‘f(x) - f(y)’.  You might think that Calc will view
this subtraction as ‘f(x) + (-f(y))’ and then apply the above two rules
in turn, but actually this will not work because Calc only does this
when considering rules for ‘+’ (like the first rule in this set).  So it
will see first that ‘f(x) + (-f(y))’ does not match ‘f(a) + f(b)’ for
any assignments of the meta-variables, and then it will see that ‘f(x) -
f(y)’ does not match ‘-f(a)’ for any assignment of ‘a’.  Because Calc
tries only one rule at a time, it will not be able to rewrite ‘f(x) -
f(y)’ with this rule set.  An explicit ‘f(a) - f(b)’ rule will have to
be added.

   Another thing patterns will _not_ do is break up complex numbers.
The pattern ‘myconj(a + b i) := a - b i’ will work for formulas
involving the special constant ‘i’ (such as ‘3 - 4 i’), but it will not
match actual complex numbers like ‘(3, -4)’.  A version of the above
rule for complex numbers would be

     myconj(a)  :=  re(a) - im(a) (0,1)  :: im(a) != 0

(Because the ‘re’ and ‘im’ functions understand the properties of the
special constant ‘i’, this rule will also work for ‘3 - 4 i’.  In fact,
this particular rule would probably be better without the ‘im(a) != 0’
condition, since if ‘im(a) = 0’ the righthand side of the rule will
still give the correct answer for the conjugate of a real number.)

   It is also possible to specify optional arguments in patterns.  The
rule

     opt(a) x + opt(b) (x^opt(c) + opt(d))  :=  f(a, b, c, d)

will match the formula

     5 (x^2 - 4) + 3 x

in a fairly straightforward manner, but it will also match reduced
formulas like

     x + x^2,    2(x + 1) - x,    x + x

producing, respectively,

     f(1, 1, 2, 0),   f(-1, 2, 1, 1),   f(1, 1, 1, 0)

   (The latter two formulas can be entered only if default
simplifications have been turned off with ‘m O’.)

   The default value for a term of a sum is zero.  The default value for
a part of a product, for a power, or for the denominator of a quotient,
is one.  Also, ‘-x’ matches the pattern ‘opt(a) b’ with ‘a = -1’.

   In particular, the distributive-law rule can be refined to

     opt(a) x + opt(b) x  :=  (a + b) x

so that it will convert, e.g., ‘a x - x’, to ‘(a - 1) x’.

   The pattern ‘opt(a) + opt(b) x’ matches almost any formulas which are
linear in ‘x’.  You can also use the ‘lin’ and ‘islin’ functions with
rewrite conditions to test for this; *note Logical Operations::.  These
functions are not as convenient to use in rewrite rules, but they
recognize more kinds of formulas as linear: ‘x/z’ is considered linear
with ‘b = 1/z’ by ‘lin’, but it will not match the above pattern because
that pattern calls for a multiplication, not a division.

   As another example, the obvious rule to replace ‘sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2’
by 1,

     sin(x)^2 + cos(x)^2  :=  1

misses many cases because the sine and cosine may both be multiplied by
an equal factor.  Here’s a more successful rule:

     opt(a) sin(x)^2 + opt(a) cos(x)^2  :=  a

   Note that this rule will _not_ match ‘sin(x)^2 + 6 cos(x)^2’ because
one ‘a’ would have “matched” 1 while the other matched 6.

   Calc automatically converts a rule like

     f(x-1, x)  :=  g(x)

into the form

     f(temp, x)  :=  g(x)  :: temp = x-1

(where ‘temp’ stands for a new, invented meta-variable that doesn’t
actually have a name).  This modified rule will successfully match ‘f(6,
7)’, binding ‘temp’ and ‘x’ to 6 and 7, respectively, then verifying
that they differ by one even though ‘6’ does not superficially look like
‘x-1’.

   However, Calc does not solve equations to interpret a rule.  The
following rule,

     f(x-1, x+1)  :=  g(x)

will not work.  That is, it will match ‘f(a - 1 + b, a + 1 + b)’ but not
‘f(6, 8)’.  Calc always interprets at least one occurrence of a variable
by literal matching.  If the variable appears “isolated” then Calc is
smart enough to use it for literal matching.  But in this last example,
Calc is forced to rewrite the rule to ‘f(x-1, temp) := g(x) :: temp =
x+1’ where the ‘x-1’ term must correspond to an actual
“something-minus-one” in the target formula.

   A successful way to write this would be ‘f(x, x+2) := g(x+1)’.  You
could make this resemble the original form more closely by using ‘let’
notation, which is described in the next section:

     f(xm1, x+1)  :=  g(x)  :: let(x := xm1+1)

   Calc does this rewriting or “conditionalizing” for any sub-pattern
which involves only the functions in the following list, operating only
on constants and meta-variables which have already been matched
elsewhere in the pattern.  When matching a function call, Calc is
careful to match arguments which are plain variables before arguments
which are calls to any of the functions below, so that a pattern like
‘f(x-1, x)’ can be conditionalized even though the isolated ‘x’ comes
after the ‘x-1’.

     + - * / \ % ^  abs sign  round rounde roundu trunc floor ceil
     max min  re im conj arg

   You can suppress all of the special treatments described in this
section by surrounding a function call with a ‘plain’ marker.  This
marker causes the function call which is its argument to be matched
literally, without regard to commutativity, associativity, negation, or
conditionalization.  When you use ‘plain’, the “deep structure” of the
formula being matched can show through.  For example,

     plain(a - a b)  :=  f(a, b)

will match only literal subtractions.  However, the ‘plain’ marker does
not affect its arguments’ arguments.  In this case, commutativity and
associativity is still considered while matching the ‘a b’ sub-pattern,
so the whole pattern will match ‘x - y x’ as well as ‘x - x y’.  We
could go still further and use

     plain(a - plain(a b))  :=  f(a, b)

which would do a completely strict match for the pattern.

   By contrast, the ‘quote’ marker means that not only the function name
but also the arguments must be literally the same.  The above pattern
will match ‘x - x y’ but

     quote(a - a b)  :=  f(a, b)

will match only the single formula ‘a - a b’.  Also,

     quote(a - quote(a b))  :=  f(a, b)

will match only ‘a - quote(a b)’—probably not the desired effect!

   A certain amount of algebra is also done when substituting the
meta-variables on the righthand side of a rule.  For example, in the
rule

     a + f(b)  :=  f(a + b)

matching ‘f(x) - y’ would produce ‘f((-y) + x)’ if taken literally, but
the rewrite mechanism will simplify the righthand side to ‘f(x - y)’
automatically.  (Of course, the default simplifications would do this
anyway, so this special simplification is only noticeable if you have
turned the default simplifications off.)  This rewriting is done only
when a meta-variable expands to a “negative-looking” expression.  If
this simplification is not desirable, you can use a ‘plain’ marker on
the righthand side:

     a + f(b)  :=  f(plain(a + b))

In this example, we are still allowing the pattern-matcher to use all
the algebra it can muster, but the righthand side will always simplify
to a literal addition like ‘f((-y) + x)’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Other Features of Rewrite Rules,  Next: Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.5 Other Features of Rewrite Rules
---------------------------------------

Certain “function names” serve as markers in rewrite rules.  Here is a
complete list of these markers.  First are listed the markers that work
inside a pattern; then come the markers that work in the righthand side
of a rule.

   One kind of marker, ‘import(x)’, takes the place of a whole rule.
Here ‘x’ is the name of a variable containing another rule set; those
rules are “spliced into” the rule set that imports them.  For example,
if ‘[f(a+b) := f(a) + f(b), f(a b) := a f(b) :: real(a)]’ is stored in
variable ‘linearF’, then the rule set ‘[f(0) := 0, import(linearF)]’
will apply all three rules.  It is possible to modify the imported rules
slightly: ‘import(x, v1, x1, v2, x2, ...)’ imports the rule set ‘x’ with
all occurrences of ‘v1’, as either a variable name or a function name,
replaced with ‘x1’ and so on.  (If ‘v1’ is used as a function name, then
‘x1’ must be either a function name itself or a ‘< >’ nameless function;
*note Specifying Operators::.)  For example, ‘[g(0) := 0,
import(linearF, f, g)]’ applies the linearity rules to the function ‘g’
instead of ‘f’.  Imports can be nested, but the import-with-renaming
feature may fail to rename sub-imports properly.

   The special functions allowed in patterns are:

‘quote(x)’
     This pattern matches exactly ‘x’; variable names in ‘x’ are not
     interpreted as meta-variables.  The only flexibility is that
     numbers are compared for numeric equality, so that the pattern
     ‘f(quote(12))’ will match both ‘f(12)’ and ‘f(12.0)’.  (Numbers are
     always treated this way by the rewrite mechanism: The rule ‘f(x,x)
     := g(x)’ will match ‘f(12, 12.0)’.  The rewrite may produce either
     ‘g(12)’ or ‘g(12.0)’ as a result in this case.)

‘plain(x)’
     Here ‘x’ must be a function call ‘f(x1,x2,...)’.  This pattern
     matches a call to function ‘f’ with the specified argument
     patterns.  No special knowledge of the properties of the function
     ‘f’ is used in this case; ‘+’ is not commutative or associative.
     Unlike ‘quote’, the arguments ‘x1,x2,...’ are treated as patterns.
     If you wish them to be treated “plainly” as well, you must enclose
     them with more ‘plain’ markers: ‘plain(plain(-a) + plain(b c))’.

‘opt(x,def)’
     Here ‘x’ must be a variable name.  This must appear as an argument
     to a function or an element of a vector; it specifies that the
     argument or element is optional.  As an argument to ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’,
     ‘&&’, or ‘||’, or as the second argument to ‘/’ or ‘^’, the value
     DEF may be omitted.  The pattern ‘x + opt(y)’ matches a sum by
     binding one summand to ‘x’ and the other to ‘y’, and it matches
     anything else by binding the whole expression to ‘x’ and zero to
     ‘y’.  The other operators above work similarly.

     For general miscellaneous functions, the default value ‘def’ must
     be specified.  Optional arguments are dropped starting with the
     rightmost one during matching.  For example, the pattern
     ‘f(opt(a,0), b, opt(c,b))’ will match ‘f(b)’, ‘f(a,b)’, or
     ‘f(a,b,c)’.  Default values of zero and ‘b’ are supplied in this
     example for the omitted arguments.  Note that the literal variable
     ‘b’ will be the default in the latter case, _not_ the value that
     matched the meta-variable ‘b’.  In other words, the default DEF is
     effectively quoted.

‘condition(x,c)’
     This matches the pattern ‘x’, with the attached condition ‘c’.  It
     is the same as ‘x :: c’.

‘pand(x,y)’
     This matches anything that matches both pattern ‘x’ and pattern
     ‘y’.  It is the same as ‘x &&& y’.  *note Composing Patterns in
     Rewrite Rules::.

‘por(x,y)’
     This matches anything that matches either pattern ‘x’ or pattern
     ‘y’.  It is the same as ‘x ||| y’.

‘pnot(x)’
     This matches anything that does not match pattern ‘x’.  It is the
     same as ‘!!! x’.

‘cons(h,t)’
     This matches any vector of one or more elements.  The first element
     is matched to ‘h’; a vector of the remaining elements is matched to
     ‘t’.  Note that vectors of fixed length can also be matched as
     actual vectors: The rule ‘cons(a,cons(b,[])) := cons(a+b,[])’ is
     equivalent to the rule ‘[a,b] := [a+b]’.

‘rcons(t,h)’
     This is like ‘cons’, except that the _last_ element is matched to
     ‘h’, with the remaining elements matched to ‘t’.

‘apply(f,args)’
     This matches any function call.  The name of the function, in the
     form of a variable, is matched to ‘f’.  The arguments of the
     function, as a vector of zero or more objects, are matched to
     ‘args’.  Constants, variables, and vectors do _not_ match an
     ‘apply’ pattern.  For example, ‘apply(f,x)’ matches any function
     call, ‘apply(quote(f),x)’ matches any call to the function ‘f’,
     ‘apply(f,[a,b])’ matches any function call with exactly two
     arguments, and ‘apply(quote(f), cons(a,cons(b,x)))’ matches any
     call to the function ‘f’ with two or more arguments.  Another way
     to implement the latter, if the rest of the rule does not need to
     refer to the first two arguments of ‘f’ by name, would be
     ‘apply(quote(f), x :: vlen(x) >= 2)’.  Here’s a more interesting
     sample use of ‘apply’:

          apply(f,[x+n])  :=  n + apply(f,[x])
             :: in(f, [floor,ceil,round,trunc]) :: integer(n)

     Note, however, that this will be slower to match than a rule set
     with four separate rules.  The reason is that Calc sorts the rules
     of a rule set according to top-level function name; if the
     top-level function is ‘apply’, Calc must try the rule for every
     single formula and sub-formula.  If the top-level function in the
     pattern is, say, ‘floor’, then Calc invokes the rule only for
     sub-formulas which are calls to ‘floor’.

     Formulas normally written with operators like ‘+’ are still
     considered function calls: ‘apply(f,x)’ matches ‘a+b’ with ‘f =
     add’, ‘x = [a,b]’.

     You must use ‘apply’ for meta-variables with function names on both
     sides of a rewrite rule: ‘apply(f, [x]) := f(x+1)’ is _not_
     correct, because it rewrites ‘spam(6)’ into ‘f(7)’.  The righthand
     side should be ‘apply(f, [x+1])’.  Also note that you will have to
     use No-Simplify mode (‘m O’) when entering this rule so that the
     ‘apply’ isn’t evaluated immediately to get the new rule ‘f(x) :=
     f(x+1)’.  Or, use ‘s e’ to enter the rule without going through the
     stack, or enter the rule as ‘apply(f, [x]) := apply(f, [x+1])
     :: 1’.  *Note Conditional Rewrite Rules::.

‘select(x)’
     This is used for applying rules to formulas with selections; *note
     Selections with Rewrite Rules::.

   Special functions for the righthand sides of rules are:

‘quote(x)’
     The notation ‘quote(x)’ is changed to ‘x’ when the righthand side
     is used.  As far as the rewrite rule is concerned, ‘quote’ is
     invisible.  However, ‘quote’ has the special property in Calc that
     its argument is not evaluated.  Thus, while it will not work to put
     the rule ‘t(a) := typeof(a)’ on the stack because ‘typeof(a)’ is
     evaluated immediately to produce ‘t(a) := 100’, you can use ‘quote’
     to protect the righthand side: ‘t(a) := quote(typeof(a))’.  (*Note
     Conditional Rewrite Rules::, for another trick for protecting rules
     from evaluation.)

‘plain(x)’
     Special properties of and simplifications for the function call ‘x’
     are not used.  One interesting case where ‘plain’ is useful is the
     rule, ‘q(x) := quote(x)’, trying to expand a shorthand notation for
     the ‘quote’ function.  This rule will not work as shown; instead of
     replacing ‘q(foo)’ with ‘quote(foo)’, it will replace it with
     ‘foo’!  The correct rule would be ‘q(x) := plain(quote(x))’.

‘cons(h,t)’
     Where ‘t’ is a vector, this is converted into an expanded vector
     during rewrite processing.  Note that ‘cons’ is a regular Calc
     function which normally does this anyway; the only way ‘cons’ is
     treated specially by rewrites is that ‘cons’ on the righthand side
     of a rule will be evaluated even if default simplifications have
     been turned off.

‘rcons(t,h)’
     Analogous to ‘cons’ except putting ‘h’ at the _end_ of the vector
     ‘t’.

‘apply(f,args)’
     Where ‘f’ is a variable and ARGS is a vector, this is converted to
     a function call.  Once again, note that ‘apply’ is also a regular
     Calc function.

‘eval(x)’
     The formula ‘x’ is handled in the usual way, then the default
     simplifications are applied to it even if they have been turned off
     normally.  This allows you to treat any function similarly to the
     way ‘cons’ and ‘apply’ are always treated.  However, there is a
     slight difference: ‘cons(2+3, [])’ with default simplifications off
     will be converted to ‘[2+3]’, whereas ‘eval(cons(2+3, []))’ will be
     converted to ‘[5]’.

‘evalsimp(x)’
     The formula ‘x’ has meta-variables substituted in the usual way,
     then algebraically simplified.

‘evalextsimp(x)’
     The formula ‘x’ has meta-variables substituted in the normal way,
     then “extendedly” simplified as if by the ‘a e’ command.

‘select(x)’
     *Note Selections with Rewrite Rules::.

   There are also some special functions you can use in conditions.

‘let(v := x)’
     The expression ‘x’ is evaluated with meta-variables substituted.
     The algebraic simplifications are _not_ applied by default, but ‘x’
     can include calls to ‘evalsimp’ or ‘evalextsimp’ as described above
     to invoke higher levels of simplification.  The result of ‘x’ is
     then bound to the meta-variable ‘v’.  As usual, if this
     meta-variable has already been matched to something else the two
     values must be equal; if the meta-variable is new then it is bound
     to the result of the expression.  This variable can then appear in
     later conditions, and on the righthand side of the rule.  In fact,
     ‘v’ may be any pattern in which case the result of evaluating ‘x’
     is matched to that pattern, binding any meta-variables that appear
     in that pattern.  Note that ‘let’ can only appear by itself as a
     condition, or as one term of an ‘&&’ which is a whole condition: It
     cannot be inside an ‘||’ term or otherwise buried.

     The alternate, equivalent form ‘let(v, x)’ is also recognized.
     Note that the use of ‘:=’ by ‘let’, while still being
     assignment-like in character, is unrelated to the use of ‘:=’ in
     the main part of a rewrite rule.

     As an example, ‘f(a) := g(ia) :: let(ia := 1/a) :: constant(ia)’
     replaces ‘f(a)’ with ‘g’ of the inverse of ‘a’, if that inverse
     exists and is constant.  For example, if ‘a’ is a singular matrix
     the operation ‘1/a’ is left unsimplified and ‘constant(ia)’ fails,
     but if ‘a’ is an invertible matrix then the rule succeeds.  Without
     ‘let’ there would be no way to express this rule that didn’t have
     to invert the matrix twice.  Note that, because the meta-variable
     ‘ia’ is otherwise unbound in this rule, the ‘let’ condition itself
     always “succeeds” because no matter what ‘1/a’ evaluates to, it can
     successfully be bound to ‘ia’.

     Here’s another example, for integrating cosines of linear terms:
     ‘myint(cos(y),x) := sin(y)/b :: let([a,b,x] := lin(y,x))’.  The
     ‘lin’ function returns a 3-vector if its argument is linear, or
     leaves itself unevaluated if not.  But an unevaluated ‘lin’ call
     will not match the 3-vector on the lefthand side of the ‘let’, so
     this ‘let’ both verifies that ‘y’ is linear, and binds the
     coefficients ‘a’ and ‘b’ for use elsewhere in the rule.  (It would
     have been possible to use ‘sin(a x + b)/b’ for the righthand side
     instead, but using ‘sin(y)/b’ avoids gratuitous rearrangement of
     the argument of the sine.)

     Similarly, here is a rule that implements an inverse-‘erf’
     function.  It uses ‘root’ to search for a solution.  If ‘root’
     succeeds, it will return a vector of two numbers where the first
     number is the desired solution.  If no solution is found, ‘root’
     remains in symbolic form.  So we use ‘let’ to check that the result
     was indeed a vector.

          ierf(x)  :=  y  :: let([y,z] := root(erf(a) = x, a, .5))

‘matches(v,p)’
     The meta-variable V, which must already have been matched to
     something elsewhere in the rule, is compared against pattern P.
     Since ‘matches’ is a standard Calc function, it can appear anywhere
     in a condition.  But if it appears alone or as a term of a
     top-level ‘&&’, then you get the special extra feature that
     meta-variables which are bound to things inside P can be used
     elsewhere in the surrounding rewrite rule.

     The only real difference between ‘let(p := v)’ and ‘matches(v, p)’
     is that the former evaluates ‘v’ using the default simplifications,
     while the latter does not.

‘remember’
     This is actually a variable, not a function.  If ‘remember’ appears
     as a condition in a rule, then when that rule succeeds the original
     expression and rewritten expression are added to the front of the
     rule set that contained the rule.  If the rule set was not stored
     in a variable, ‘remember’ is ignored.  The lefthand side is
     enclosed in ‘quote’ in the added rule if it contains any variables.

     For example, the rule ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: remember’ applied to
     ‘f(7)’ will add the rule ‘f(7) := 7 f(6)’ to the front of the rule
     set.  The rule set ‘EvalRules’ works slightly differently: There,
     the evaluation of ‘f(6)’ will complete before the result is added
     to the rule set, in this case as ‘f(7) := 5040’.  Thus ‘remember’
     is most useful inside ‘EvalRules’.

     It is up to you to ensure that the optimization performed by
     ‘remember’ is safe.  For example, the rule ‘foo(n) := n ::
     evalv(eatfoo) > 0 :: remember’ is a bad idea (‘evalv’ is the
     function equivalent of the ‘=’ command); if the variable ‘eatfoo’
     ever contains 1, rules like ‘foo(7) := 7’ will be added to the rule
     set and will continue to operate even if ‘eatfoo’ is later changed
     to 0.

‘remember(c)’
     Remember the match as described above, but only if condition ‘c’ is
     true.  For example, ‘remember(n % 4 = 0)’ in the above factorial
     rule remembers only every fourth result.  Note that ‘remember(1)’
     is equivalent to ‘remember’, and ‘remember(0)’ has no effect.


File: calc.info,  Node: Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules,  Next: Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Other Features of Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.6 Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules
-------------------------------------------

There are three operators, ‘&&&’, ‘|||’, and ‘!!!’, that combine rewrite
patterns to make larger patterns.  The combinations are “and,” “or,” and
“not,” respectively, and these operators are the pattern equivalents of
‘&&’, ‘||’ and ‘!’ (which operate on zero-or-nonzero logical values).

   Note that ‘&&&’, ‘|||’, and ‘!!!’ are left in symbolic form by all
regular Calc features; they have special meaning only in the context of
rewrite rule patterns.

   The pattern ‘P1 &&& P2’ matches anything that matches both P1 and P2.
One especially useful case is when one of P1 or P2 is a meta-variable.
For example, here is a rule that operates on error forms:

     f(x &&& a +/- b, x)  :=  g(x)

   This does the same thing, but is arguably simpler than, the rule

     f(a +/- b, a +/- b)  :=  g(a +/- b)

   Here’s another interesting example:

     ends(cons(a, x) &&& rcons(y, b))  :=  [a, b]

which effectively clips out the middle of a vector leaving just the
first and last elements.  This rule will change a one-element vector
‘[a]’ to ‘[a, a]’.  The similar rule

     ends(cons(a, rcons(y, b)))  :=  [a, b]

would do the same thing except that it would fail to match a one-element
vector.

   The pattern ‘P1 ||| P2’ matches anything that matches either P1 or
P2.  Calc first tries matching against P1; if that fails, it goes on to
try P2.

   A simple example of ‘|||’ is

     curve(inf ||| -inf)  :=  0

which converts both ‘curve(inf)’ and ‘curve(-inf)’ to zero.

   Here is a larger example:

     log(a, b) ||| (ln(a) :: let(b := e))  :=  mylog(a, b)

   This matches both generalized and natural logarithms in a single
rule.  Note that the ‘::’ term must be enclosed in parentheses because
that operator has lower precedence than ‘|||’ or ‘:=’.

   (In practice this rule would probably include a third alternative,
omitted here for brevity, to take care of ‘log10’.)

   While Calc generally treats interior conditions exactly the same as
conditions on the outside of a rule, it does guarantee that if all the
variables in the condition are special names like ‘e’, or already bound
in the pattern to which the condition is attached (say, if ‘a’ had
appeared in this condition), then Calc will process this condition right
after matching the pattern to the left of the ‘::’.  Thus, we know that
‘b’ will be bound to ‘e’ only if the ‘ln’ branch of the ‘|||’ was taken.

   Note that this rule was careful to bind the same set of
meta-variables on both sides of the ‘|||’.  Calc does not check this,
but if you bind a certain meta-variable only in one branch and then use
that meta-variable elsewhere in the rule, results are unpredictable:

     f(a,b) ||| g(b)  :=  h(a,b)

   Here if the pattern matches ‘g(17)’, Calc makes no promises about the
value that will be substituted for ‘a’ on the righthand side.

   The pattern ‘!!! PAT’ matches anything that does not match PAT.  Any
meta-variables that are bound while matching PAT remain unbound outside
of PAT.

   For example,

     f(x &&& !!! a +/- b, !!![])  :=  g(x)

converts ‘f’ whose first argument is anything _except_ an error form,
and whose second argument is not the empty vector, into a similar call
to ‘g’ (but without the second argument).

   If we know that the second argument will be a vector (empty or not),
then an equivalent rule would be:

     f(x, y)  :=  g(x)  :: typeof(x) != 7 :: vlen(y) > 0

where of course 7 is the ‘typeof’ code for error forms.  Another final
condition, that works for any kind of ‘y’, would be ‘!istrue(y == [])’.
(The ‘istrue’ function returns an explicit 0 if its argument was left in
symbolic form; plain ‘!(y == [])’ or ‘y != []’ would not work to replace
‘!!![]’ since these would be left unsimplified, and thus cause the rule
to fail, if ‘y’ was something like a variable name.)

   It is possible for a ‘!!!’ to refer to meta-variables bound elsewhere
in the pattern.  For example,

     f(a, !!!a)  :=  g(a)

matches any call to ‘f’ with different arguments, changing this to ‘g’
with only the first argument.

   If a function call is to be matched and one of the argument patterns
contains a ‘!!!’ somewhere inside it, that argument will be matched
last.  Thus

     f(!!!a, a)  :=  g(a)

will be careful to bind ‘a’ to the second argument of ‘f’ before testing
the first argument.  If Calc had tried to match the first argument of
‘f’ first, the results would have been disastrous: since ‘a’ was unbound
so far, the pattern ‘a’ would have matched anything at all, and the
pattern ‘!!!a’ therefore would _not_ have matched anything at all!


File: calc.info,  Node: Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules,  Next: Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.7 Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules
------------------------------------------

When ‘a r’ (‘calc-rewrite’) is used, it takes an expression from the top
of the stack and attempts to match any of the specified rules to any
part of the expression, starting with the whole expression and then, if
that fails, trying deeper and deeper sub-expressions.  For each part of
the expression, the rules are tried in the order they appear in the
rules vector.  The first rule to match the first sub-expression wins; it
replaces the matched sub-expression according to the NEW part of the
rule.

   Often, the rule set will match and change the formula several times.
The top-level formula is first matched and substituted repeatedly until
it no longer matches the pattern; then, sub-formulas are tried, and so
on.  Once every part of the formula has gotten its chance, the rewrite
mechanism starts over again with the top-level formula (in case a
substitution of one of its arguments has caused it again to match).
This continues until no further matches can be made anywhere in the
formula.

   It is possible for a rule set to get into an infinite loop.  The most
obvious case, replacing a formula with itself, is not a problem because
a rule is not considered to “succeed” unless the righthand side actually
comes out to something different from the original formula or
sub-formula that was matched.  But if you accidentally had both ‘ln(a b)
:= ln(a) + ln(b)’ and the reverse ‘ln(a) + ln(b) := ln(a b)’ in your
rule set, Calc would run forever switching a formula back and forth
between the two forms.

   To avoid disaster, Calc normally stops after 100 changes have been
made to the formula.  This will be enough for most multiple rewrites,
but it will keep an endless loop of rewrites from locking up the
computer forever.  (On most systems, you can also type ‘C-g’ to halt any
Emacs command prematurely.)

   To change this limit, give a positive numeric prefix argument.  In
particular, ‘M-1 a r’ applies only one rewrite at a time, useful when
you are first testing your rule (or just if repeated rewriting is not
what is called for by your application).

   You can also put a “function call” ‘iterations(N)’ in place of a rule
anywhere in your rules vector (but usually at the top).  Then, N will be
used instead of 100 as the default number of iterations for this rule
set.  You can use ‘iterations(inf)’ if you want no iteration limit by
default.  A prefix argument will override the ‘iterations’ limit in the
rule set.

     [ iterations(1),
       f(x) := f(x+1) ]

   More precisely, the limit controls the number of “iterations,” where
each iteration is a successful matching of a rule pattern whose
righthand side, after substituting meta-variables and applying the
default simplifications, is different from the original sub-formula that
was matched.

   A prefix argument of zero sets the limit to infinity.  Use with
caution!

   Given a negative numeric prefix argument, ‘a r’ will match and
substitute the top-level expression up to that many times, but will not
attempt to match the rules to any sub-expressions.

   In a formula, ‘rewrite(EXPR, RULES, N)’ does a rewriting operation.
Here EXPR is the expression being rewritten, RULES is the rule, vector
of rules, or variable containing the rules, and N is the optional
iteration limit, which may be a positive integer, a negative integer, or
‘inf’ or ‘-inf’.  If N is omitted the ‘iterations’ value from the rule
set is used; if both are omitted, 100 is used.


File: calc.info,  Node: Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules,  Next: Selections with Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.8 Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules
---------------------------------

It is possible to separate a rewrite rule set into several “phases”.
During each phase, certain rules will be enabled while certain others
will be disabled.  A “phase schedule” controls the order in which phases
occur during the rewriting process.

   If a call to the marker function ‘phase’ appears in the rules vector
in place of a rule, all rules following that point will be members of
the phase(s) identified in the arguments to ‘phase’.  Phases are given
integer numbers.  The markers ‘phase()’ and ‘phase(all)’ both mean the
following rules belong to all phases; this is the default at the start
of the rule set.

   If you do not explicitly schedule the phases, Calc sorts all phase
numbers that appear in the rule set and executes the phases in ascending
order.  For example, the rule set

     [ f0(x) := g0(x),
       phase(1),
       f1(x) := g1(x),
       phase(2),
       f2(x) := g2(x),
       phase(3),
       f3(x) := g3(x),
       phase(1,2),
       f4(x) := g4(x) ]

has three phases, 1 through 3.  Phase 1 consists of the ‘f0’, ‘f1’, and
‘f4’ rules (in that order).  Phase 2 consists of ‘f0’, ‘f2’, and ‘f4’.
Phase 3 consists of ‘f0’ and ‘f3’.

   When Calc rewrites a formula using this rule set, it first rewrites
the formula using only the phase 1 rules until no further changes are
possible.  Then it switches to the phase 2 rule set and continues until
no further changes occur, then finally rewrites with phase 3.  When no
more phase 3 rules apply, rewriting finishes.  (This is assuming ‘a r’
with a large enough prefix argument to allow the rewriting to run to
completion; the sequence just described stops early if the number of
iterations specified in the prefix argument, 100 by default, is
reached.)

   During each phase, Calc descends through the nested levels of the
formula as described previously.  (*Note Nested Formulas with Rewrite
Rules::.)  Rewriting starts at the top of the formula, then works its
way down to the parts, then goes back to the top and works down again.
The phase 2 rules do not begin until no phase 1 rules apply anywhere in
the formula.

   A ‘schedule’ marker appearing in the rule set (anywhere, but
conventionally at the top) changes the default schedule of phases.  In
the simplest case, ‘schedule’ has a sequence of phase numbers for
arguments; each phase number is invoked in turn until the arguments to
‘schedule’ are exhausted.  Thus adding ‘schedule(3,2,1)’ at the top of
the above rule set would reverse the order of the phases;
‘schedule(1,2,3)’ would have no effect since this is the default
schedule; and ‘schedule(1,2,1,3)’ would give phase 1 a second chance
after phase 2 has completed, before moving on to phase 3.

   Any argument to ‘schedule’ can instead be a vector of phase numbers
(or even of sub-vectors).  Then the sub-sequence of phases described by
the vector are tried repeatedly until no change occurs in any phase in
the sequence.  For example, ‘schedule([1, 2], 3)’ tries phase 1, then
phase 2, then, if either phase made any changes to the formula, repeats
these two phases until they can make no further progress.  Finally, it
goes on to phase 3 for finishing touches.

   Also, items in ‘schedule’ can be variable names as well as numbers.
A variable name is interpreted as the name of a function to call on the
whole formula.  For example, ‘schedule(1, simplify)’ says to apply the
phase-1 rules (presumably, all of them), then to call ‘simplify’ which
is the function name equivalent of ‘a s’.  Likewise, ‘schedule([1,
simplify])’ says to alternate between phase 1 and ‘a s’ until no further
changes occur.

   Phases can be used purely to improve efficiency; if it is known that
a certain group of rules will apply only at the beginning of rewriting,
and a certain other group will apply only at the end, then rewriting
will be faster if these groups are identified as separate phases.  Once
the phase 1 rules are done, Calc can put them aside and no longer spend
any time on them while it works on phase 2.

   There are also some problems that can only be solved with several
rewrite phases.  For a real-world example of a multi-phase rule set,
examine the set ‘FitRules’, which is used by the curve-fitting command
to convert a model expression to linear form.  *Note Curve Fitting
Details::.  This set is divided into four phases.  The first phase
rewrites certain kinds of expressions to be more easily linearizable,
but less computationally efficient.  After the linear components have
been picked out, the final phase includes the opposite rewrites to put
each component back into an efficient form.  If both sets of rules were
included in one big phase, Calc could get into an infinite loop going
back and forth between the two forms.

   Elsewhere in ‘FitRules’, the components are first isolated, then
recombined where possible to reduce the complexity of the linear fit,
then finally packaged one component at a time into vectors.  If the
packaging rules were allowed to begin before the recombining rules were
finished, some components might be put away into vectors before they had
a chance to recombine.  By putting these rules in two separate phases,
this problem is neatly avoided.


File: calc.info,  Node: Selections with Rewrite Rules,  Next: Matching Commands,  Prev: Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.9 Selections with Rewrite Rules
-------------------------------------

If a sub-formula of the current formula is selected (as by ‘j s’; *note
Selecting Subformulas::), the ‘a r’ (‘calc-rewrite’) command applies
only to that sub-formula.  Together with a negative prefix argument, you
can use this fact to apply a rewrite to one specific part of a formula
without affecting any other parts.

   The ‘j r’ (‘calc-rewrite-selection’) command allows more
sophisticated operations on selections.  This command prompts for the
rules in the same way as ‘a r’, but it then applies those rules to the
whole formula in question even though a sub-formula of it has been
selected.  However, the selected sub-formula will first have been
surrounded by a ‘select( )’ function call.  (Calc’s evaluator does not
understand the function name ‘select’; this is only a tag used by the ‘j
r’ command.)

   For example, suppose the formula on the stack is ‘2 (a + b)^2’ and
the sub-formula ‘a + b’ is selected.  This formula will be rewritten to
‘2 select(a + b)^2’ and then the rewrite rules will be applied in the
usual way.  The rewrite rules can include references to ‘select’ to tell
where in the pattern the selected sub-formula should appear.

   If there is still exactly one ‘select( )’ function call in the
formula after rewriting is done, it indicates which part of the formula
should be selected afterwards.  Otherwise, the formula will be
unselected.

   You can make ‘j r’ act much like ‘a r’ by enclosing both parts of the
rewrite rule with ‘select()’.  However, ‘j r’ allows you to use the
current selection in more flexible ways.  Suppose you wished to make a
rule which removed the exponent from the selected term; the rule
‘select(a)^x := select(a)’ would work.  In the above example, it would
rewrite ‘2 select(a + b)^2’ to ‘2 select(a + b)’.  This would then be
returned to the stack as ‘2 (a + b)’ with the ‘a + b’ selected.

   The ‘j r’ command uses one iteration by default, unlike ‘a r’ which
defaults to 100 iterations.  A numeric prefix argument affects ‘j r’ in
the same way as ‘a r’.  *Note Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules::.

   As with other selection commands, ‘j r’ operates on the stack entry
that contains the cursor.  (If the cursor is on the top-of-stack ‘.’
marker, it works as if the cursor were on the formula at stack level 1.)

   If you don’t specify a set of rules, the rules are taken from the top
of the stack, just as with ‘a r’.  In this case, the cursor must
indicate stack entry 2 or above as the formula to be rewritten
(otherwise the same formula would be used as both the target and the
rewrite rules).

   If the indicated formula has no selection, the cursor position within
the formula temporarily selects a sub-formula for the purposes of this
command.  If the cursor is not on any sub-formula (e.g., it is in the
line-number area to the left of the formula), the ‘select( )’ markers
are ignored by the rewrite mechanism and the rules are allowed to apply
anywhere in the formula.

   As a special feature, the normal ‘a r’ command also ignores ‘select(
)’ calls in rewrite rules.  For example, if you used the above rule
‘select(a)^x := select(a)’ with ‘a r’, it would apply the rule as if it
were ‘a^x := a’.  Thus, you can write general purpose rules with
‘select( )’ hints inside them so that they will “do the right thing” in
both ‘a r’ and ‘j r’, both with and without selections.


File: calc.info,  Node: Matching Commands,  Next: Automatic Rewrites,  Prev: Selections with Rewrite Rules,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.10 Matching Commands
--------------------------

The ‘a m’ (‘calc-match’) [‘match’] function takes a vector of formulas
and a rewrite-rule-style pattern, and produces a vector of all formulas
which match the pattern.  The command prompts you to enter the pattern;
as for ‘a r’, you can enter a single pattern (i.e., a formula with
meta-variables), or a vector of patterns, or a variable which contains
patterns, or you can give a blank response in which case the patterns
are taken from the top of the stack.  The pattern set will be compiled
once and saved if it is stored in a variable.  If there are several
patterns in the set, vector elements are kept if they match any of the
patterns.

   For example, ‘match(a+b, [x, x+y, x-y, 7, x+y+z])’ will return ‘[x+y,
x-y, x+y+z]’.

   The ‘import’ mechanism is not available for pattern sets.

   The ‘a m’ command can also be used to extract all vector elements
which satisfy any condition: The pattern ‘x :: x>0’ will select all the
positive vector elements.

   With the Inverse flag [‘matchnot’], this command extracts all vector
elements which do _not_ match the given pattern.

   There is also a function ‘matches(X, P)’ which evaluates to 1 if
expression X matches pattern P, or to 0 otherwise.  This is sometimes
useful for including into the conditional clauses of other rewrite
rules.

   The function ‘vmatches’ is just like ‘matches’, except that if the
match succeeds it returns a vector of assignments to the meta-variables
instead of the number 1.  For example, ‘vmatches(f(1,2), f(a,b))’
returns ‘[a := 1, b := 2]’.  If the match fails, the function returns
the number 0.


File: calc.info,  Node: Automatic Rewrites,  Next: Debugging Rewrites,  Prev: Matching Commands,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.11 Automatic Rewrites
---------------------------

It is possible to get Calc to apply a set of rewrite rules on all
results, effectively adding to the built-in set of default
simplifications.  To do this, simply store your rule set in the variable
‘EvalRules’.  There is a convenient ‘s E’ command for editing
‘EvalRules’; *note Operations on Variables::.

   For example, suppose you want ‘sin(a + b)’ to be expanded out to
‘sin(b) cos(a) + cos(b) sin(a)’ wherever it appears, and similarly for
‘cos(a + b)’.  The corresponding rewrite rule set would be,

     [ sin(a + b)  :=  cos(a) sin(b) + sin(a) cos(b),
       cos(a + b)  :=  cos(a) cos(b) - sin(a) sin(b) ]

   To apply these manually, you could put them in a variable called
‘trigexp’ and then use ‘a r trigexp’ every time you wanted to expand
trig functions.  But if instead you store them in the variable
‘EvalRules’, they will automatically be applied to all sines and cosines
of sums.  Then, with ‘2 x’ and ‘45’ on the stack, typing ‘+ S’ will
(assuming Degrees mode) result in ‘0.7071 sin(2 x) + 0.7071 cos(2 x)’
automatically.

   As each level of a formula is evaluated, the rules from ‘EvalRules’
are applied before the default simplifications.  Rewriting continues
until no further ‘EvalRules’ apply.  Note that this is different from
the usual order of application of rewrite rules: ‘EvalRules’ works from
the bottom up, simplifying the arguments to a function before the
function itself, while ‘a r’ applies rules from the top down.

   Because the ‘EvalRules’ are tried first, you can use them to override
the normal behavior of any built-in Calc function.

   It is important not to write a rule that will get into an infinite
loop.  For example, the rule set ‘[f(0) := 1, f(n) := n f(n-1)]’ appears
to be a good definition of a factorial function, but it is unsafe.
Imagine what happens if ‘f(2.5)’ is simplified.  Calc will continue to
subtract 1 from this argument forever without reaching zero.  A safer
second rule would be ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: n>0’.  Another dangerous rule
is ‘g(x, y) := g(y, x)’.  Rewriting ‘g(2, 4)’, this would bounce back
and forth between that and ‘g(4, 2)’ forever.  If an infinite loop in
‘EvalRules’ occurs, Emacs will eventually stop with a “Computation got
stuck or ran too long” message.

   Another subtle difference between ‘EvalRules’ and regular rewrites
concerns rules that rewrite a formula into an identical formula.  For
example, ‘f(n) := f(floor(n))’ “fails to match” when ‘n’ is already an
integer.  But in ‘EvalRules’ this case is detected only if the righthand
side literally becomes the original formula before any further
simplification.  This means that ‘f(n) := f(floor(n))’ will get into an
infinite loop if it occurs in ‘EvalRules’.  Calc will replace ‘f(6)’
with ‘f(floor(6))’, which is different from ‘f(6)’, so it will consider
the rule to have matched and will continue simplifying that formula;
first the argument is simplified to get ‘f(6)’, then the rule matches
again to get ‘f(floor(6))’ again, ad infinitum.  A much safer rule would
check its argument first, say, with ‘f(n) := f(floor(n)) :: !dint(n)’.

   (What really happens is that the rewrite mechanism substitutes the
meta-variables in the righthand side of a rule, compares to see if the
result is the same as the original formula and fails if so, then uses
the default simplifications to simplify the result and compares again
(and again fails if the formula has simplified back to its original
form).  The only special wrinkle for the ‘EvalRules’ is that the same
rules will come back into play when the default simplifications are
used.  What Calc wants to do is build ‘f(floor(6))’, see that this is
different from the original formula, simplify to ‘f(6)’, see that this
is the same as the original formula, and thus halt the rewriting.  But
while simplifying, ‘f(6)’ will again trigger the same ‘EvalRules’ rule
and Calc will get into a loop inside the rewrite mechanism itself.)

   The ‘phase’, ‘schedule’, and ‘iterations’ markers do not work in
‘EvalRules’.  If the rule set is divided into phases, only the phase 1
rules are applied, and the schedule is ignored.  The rules are always
repeated as many times as possible.

   The ‘EvalRules’ are applied to all function calls in a formula, but
not to numbers (and other number-like objects like error forms), nor to
vectors or individual variable names.  (Though they will apply to
_components_ of vectors and error forms when appropriate.)  You might
try to make a variable ‘phihat’ which automatically expands to its
definition without the need to press ‘=’ by writing the rule
‘quote(phihat) := (1-sqrt(5))/2’, but unfortunately this rule will not
work as part of ‘EvalRules’.

   Finally, another limitation is that Calc sometimes calls its built-in
functions directly rather than going through the default
simplifications.  When it does this, ‘EvalRules’ will not be able to
override those functions.  For example, when you take the absolute value
of the complex number ‘(2, 3)’, Calc computes ‘sqrt(2*2 + 3*3)’ by
calling the multiplication, addition, and square root functions directly
rather than applying the default simplifications to this formula.  So an
‘EvalRules’ rule that (perversely) rewrites ‘sqrt(13) := 6’ would not
apply.  (However, if you put Calc into Symbolic mode so that ‘sqrt(13)’
will be left in symbolic form by the built-in square root function, your
rule will be able to apply.  But if the complex number were ‘(3,4)’, so
that ‘sqrt(25)’ must be calculated, then Symbolic mode will not help
because ‘sqrt(25)’ can be evaluated exactly to 5.)

   One subtle restriction that normally only manifests itself with
‘EvalRules’ is that while a given rewrite rule is in the process of
being checked, that same rule cannot be recursively applied.  Calc
effectively removes the rule from its rule set while checking the rule,
then puts it back once the match succeeds or fails.  (The technical
reason for this is that compiled pattern programs are not reentrant.)
For example, consider the rule ‘foo(x) := x :: foo(x/2) > 0’ attempting
to match ‘foo(8)’.  This rule will be inactive while the condition
‘foo(4) > 0’ is checked, even though it might be an integral part of
evaluating that condition.  Note that this is not a problem for the more
usual recursive type of rule, such as ‘foo(x) := foo(x/2)’, because
there the rule has succeeded and been reactivated by the time the
righthand side is evaluated.

   If ‘EvalRules’ has no stored value (its default state), or if
anything but a vector is stored in it, then it is ignored.

   Even though Calc’s rewrite mechanism is designed to compare rewrite
rules to formulas as quickly as possible, storing rules in ‘EvalRules’
may make Calc run substantially slower.  This is particularly true of
rules where the top-level call is a commonly used function, or is not
fixed.  The rule ‘f(n) := n f(n-1) :: n>0’ will only activate the
rewrite mechanism for calls to the function ‘f’, but ‘lg(n) + lg(m) :=
lg(n m)’ will check every ‘+’ operator.

     apply(f, [a*b]) := apply(f, [a]) + apply(f, [b]) :: in(f, [ln, log10])

may seem more “efficient” than two separate rules for ‘ln’ and ‘log10’,
but actually it is vastly less efficient because rules with ‘apply’ as
the top-level pattern must be tested against _every_ function call that
is simplified.

   Suppose you want ‘sin(a + b)’ to be expanded out not all the time,
but only when algebraic simplifications are used to simplify the
formula.  The variable ‘AlgSimpRules’ holds rules for this purpose.  The
‘a s’ command will apply ‘EvalRules’ and ‘AlgSimpRules’ to the formula,
as well as all of its built-in simplifications.

   Most of the special limitations for ‘EvalRules’ don’t apply to
‘AlgSimpRules’.  Calc simply does an ‘a r AlgSimpRules’ command with an
infinite repeat count as the first step of algebraic simplifications.
It then applies its own built-in simplifications throughout the formula,
and then repeats these two steps (along with applying the default
simplifications) until no further changes are possible.

   There are also ‘ExtSimpRules’ and ‘UnitSimpRules’ variables that are
used by ‘a e’ and ‘u s’, respectively; these commands also apply
‘EvalRules’ and ‘AlgSimpRules’.  The variable ‘IntegSimpRules’ contains
simplification rules that are used only during integration by ‘a i’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Debugging Rewrites,  Next: Examples of Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Automatic Rewrites,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.12 Debugging Rewrites
---------------------------

If a buffer named ‘*Trace*’ exists, the rewrite mechanism will record
some useful information there as it operates.  The original formula is
written there, as is the result of each successful rewrite, and the
final result of the rewriting.  All phase changes are also noted.

   Calc always appends to ‘*Trace*’.  You must empty this buffer
yourself periodically if it is in danger of growing unwieldy.

   Note that the rewriting mechanism is substantially slower when the
‘*Trace*’ buffer exists, even if the buffer is not visible on the
screen.  Once you are done, you will probably want to kill this buffer
(with ‘C-x k *Trace* <RET>’).  If you leave it in existence and forget
about it, all your future rewrite commands will be needlessly slow.


File: calc.info,  Node: Examples of Rewrite Rules,  Prev: Debugging Rewrites,  Up: Rewrite Rules

11.11.13 Examples of Rewrite Rules
----------------------------------

Returning to the example of substituting the pattern ‘sin(x)^2 +
cos(x)^2’ with 1, we saw that the rule ‘opt(a) sin(x)^2 + opt(a)
cos(x)^2 := a’ does a good job of finding suitable cases.  Another
solution would be to use the rule ‘cos(x)^2 := 1 - sin(x)^2’, followed
by algebraic simplification if necessary.  This rule will be the most
effective way to do the job, but at the expense of making some changes
that you might not desire.

   Another algebraic rewrite rule is ‘exp(x+y) := exp(x) exp(y)’.  To
make this work with the ‘j r’ command so that it can be easily targeted
to a particular exponential in a large formula, you might wish to write
the rule as ‘select(exp(x+y)) := select(exp(x) exp(y))’.  The ‘select’
markers will be ignored by the regular ‘a r’ command (*note Selections
with Rewrite Rules::).

   A surprisingly useful rewrite rule is ‘a/(b-c) := a*(b+c)/(b^2-c^2)’.
This will simplify the formula whenever ‘b’ and/or ‘c’ can be made
simpler by squaring.  For example, applying this rule to ‘2 / (sqrt(2) +
3)’ yields ‘6:7 - 2:7 sqrt(2)’ (assuming Symbolic mode has been enabled
to keep the square root from being evaluated to a floating-point
approximation).  This rule is also useful when working with symbolic
complex numbers, e.g., ‘(a + b i) / (c + d i)’.

   As another example, we could define our own “triangular numbers”
function with the rules ‘[tri(0) := 0, tri(n) := n + tri(n-1) :: n>0]’.
Enter this vector and store it in a variable: ‘s t trirules’.  Now,
given a suitable formula like ‘tri(5)’ on the stack, type ‘a r trirules’
to apply these rules repeatedly.  After six applications, ‘a r’ will
stop with 15 on the stack.  Once these rules are debugged, it would
probably be most useful to add them to ‘EvalRules’ so that Calc will
evaluate the new ‘tri’ function automatically.  We could then use ‘Z K’
on the keyboard macro ‘' tri($) <RET>’ to make a command that applies
‘tri’ to the value on the top of the stack.  *Note Programming::.

   The following rule set, contributed by François Pinard, implements
“quaternions”, a generalization of the concept of complex numbers.
Quaternions have four components, and are here represented by function
calls ‘quat(W, [X, Y, Z])’ with “real part” W and the three “imaginary”
parts collected into a vector.  Various arithmetical operations on
quaternions are supported.  To use these rules, either add them to
‘EvalRules’, or create a command based on ‘a r’ for simplifying
quaternion formulas.  A convenient way to enter quaternions would be a
command defined by a keyboard macro containing: ‘' quat($$$$, [$$$, $$,
$]) <RET>’.

     [ quat(w, x, y, z) := quat(w, [x, y, z]),
       quat(w, [0, 0, 0]) := w,
       abs(quat(w, v)) := hypot(w, v),
       -quat(w, v) := quat(-w, -v),
       r + quat(w, v) := quat(r + w, v) :: real(r),
       r - quat(w, v) := quat(r - w, -v) :: real(r),
       quat(w1, v1) + quat(w2, v2) := quat(w1 + w2, v1 + v2),
       r * quat(w, v) := quat(r * w, r * v) :: real(r),
       plain(quat(w1, v1) * quat(w2, v2))
          := quat(w1 * w2 - v1 * v2, w1 * v2 + w2 * v1 + cross(v1, v2)),
       quat(w1, v1) / r := quat(w1 / r, v1 / r) :: real(r),
       z / quat(w, v) := z * quatinv(quat(w, v)),
       quatinv(quat(w, v)) := quat(w, -v) / (w^2 + v^2),
       quatsqr(quat(w, v)) := quat(w^2 - v^2, 2 * w * v),
       quat(w, v)^k := quatsqr(quat(w, v)^(k / 2))
                    :: integer(k) :: k > 0 :: k % 2 = 0,
       quat(w, v)^k := quatsqr(quat(w, v)^((k - 1) / 2)) * quat(w, v)
                    :: integer(k) :: k > 2,
       quat(w, v)^-k := quatinv(quat(w, v)^k) :: integer(k) :: k > 0 ]

   Quaternions, like matrices, have non-commutative multiplication.  In
other words, ‘q1 * q2 = q2 * q1’ is not necessarily true if ‘q1’ and
‘q2’ are ‘quat’ forms.  The ‘quat*quat’ rule above uses ‘plain’ to
prevent Calc from rearranging the product.  It may also be wise to add
the line ‘[quat(), matrix]’ to the ‘Decls’ matrix, to ensure that Calc’s
other algebraic operations will not rearrange a quaternion product.
*Note Declarations::.

   These rules also accept a four-argument ‘quat’ form, converting it to
the preferred form in the first rule.  If you would rather see results
in the four-argument form, just append the two items ‘phase(2), quat(w,
[x, y, z]) := quat(w, x, y, z)’ to the end of the rule set.  (But
remember that multi-phase rule sets don’t work in ‘EvalRules’.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Units,  Next: Store and Recall,  Prev: Algebra,  Up: Top

12 Operating on Units
*********************

One special interpretation of algebraic formulas is as numbers with
units.  For example, the formula ‘5 m / s^2’ can be read “five meters
per second squared.” The commands in this chapter help you manipulate
units expressions in this form.  Units-related commands begin with the
‘u’ prefix key.

* Menu:

* Basic Operations on Units::
* The Units Table::
* Predefined Units::
* User-Defined Units::
* Logarithmic Units::
* Musical Notes::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Operations on Units,  Next: The Units Table,  Prev: Units,  Up: Units

12.1 Basic Operations on Units
==============================

A “units expression” is a formula which is basically a number multiplied
and/or divided by one or more “unit names”, which may optionally be
raised to integer powers.  Actually, the value part need not be a
number; any product or quotient involving unit names is a units
expression.  Many of the units commands will also accept any formula,
where the command applies to all units expressions which appear in the
formula.

   A unit name is a variable whose name appears in the “unit table”, or
a variable whose name is a prefix character like ‘k’ (for “kilo”) or ‘u’
(for “micro”) followed by a name in the unit table.  A substantial table
of built-in units is provided with Calc; *note Predefined Units::.  You
can also define your own unit names; *note User-Defined Units::.

   Note that if the value part of a units expression is exactly ‘1’, it
will be removed by the Calculator’s automatic algebra routines: The
formula ‘1 mm’ is “simplified” to ‘mm’.  This is only a display anomaly,
however; ‘mm’ will work just fine as a representation of one millimeter.

   You may find that Algebraic mode (*note Algebraic Entry::) makes
working with units expressions easier.  Otherwise, you will have to
remember to hit the apostrophe key every time you wish to enter units.

   The ‘u s’ (‘calc-simplify-units’) [‘usimplify’] command simplifies a
units expression.  It uses Calc’s algebraic simplifications to simplify
the expression first as a regular algebraic formula; it then looks for
features that can be further simplified by converting one object’s units
to be compatible with another’s.  For example, ‘5 m + 23 mm’ will
simplify to ‘5.023 m’.  When different but compatible units are added,
the righthand term’s units are converted to match those of the lefthand
term.  *Note Simplification Modes::, for a way to have this done
automatically at all times.

   Units simplification also handles quotients of two units with the
same dimensionality, as in ‘2 in s/L cm’ to ‘5.08 s/L’; fractional
powers of unit expressions, as in ‘sqrt(9 mm^2)’ to ‘3 mm’ and ‘sqrt(9
acre)’ to a quantity in meters; and ‘floor’, ‘ceil’, ‘round’, ‘rounde’,
‘roundu’, ‘trunc’, ‘float’, ‘frac’, ‘abs’, and ‘clean’ applied to units
expressions, in which case the operation in question is applied only to
the numeric part of the expression.  Finally, trigonometric functions of
quantities with units of angle are evaluated, regardless of the current
angular mode.

   The ‘u c’ (‘calc-convert-units’) command converts a units expression
to new, compatible units.  For example, given the units expression ‘55
mph’, typing ‘u c m/s <RET>’ produces ‘24.5872 m/s’.  If you have
previously converted a units expression with the same type of units (in
this case, distance over time), you will be offered the previous choice
of new units as a default.  Continuing the above example, entering the
units expression ‘100 km/hr’ and typing ‘u c <RET>’ (without specifying
new units) produces ‘27.7777777778 m/s’.

   The ‘u c’ command treats temperature units (like ‘degC’ and ‘K’) as
relative temperatures.  For example, ‘u c’ converts ‘10 degC’ to ‘18
degF’: A change of 10 degrees Celsius corresponds to a change of 18
degrees Fahrenheit.  To convert absolute temperatures, you can use the
‘u t’ (‘calc-convert-temperature’) command.  The value on the stack must
be a simple units expression with units of temperature only.  This
command would convert ‘10 degC’ to ‘50 degF’, the equivalent temperature
on the Fahrenheit scale.

   While many of Calc’s conversion factors are exact, some are
necessarily approximate.  If Calc is in fraction mode (*note Fraction
Mode::), then unit conversions will try to give exact, rational
conversions, but it isn’t always possible.  Given ‘55 mph’ in fraction
mode, typing ‘u c m/s <RET>’ produces ‘15367:625 m/s’, for example,
while typing ‘u c au/yr <RET>’ produces ‘5.18665819999e-3 au/yr’.

   If the units you request are inconsistent with the original units,
the number will be converted into your units times whatever “remainder”
units are left over.  For example, converting ‘55 mph’ into acres
produces ‘6.08e-3 acre / (m s)’.  Remainder units are expressed in terms
of “fundamental” units like ‘m’ and ‘s’, regardless of the input units.

   If you intend that your new units be consistent with the original
units, the ‘u n’ (‘calc-convert-exact-units’) command will check the
units before the conversion.  For example, to change ‘mi/hr’ to ‘km/hr’,
you could type ‘u c km <RET>’, but ‘u n km <RET>’ would signal an error.
You would need to type ‘u n km/hr <RET>’.

   One special exception is that if you specify a single unit name, and
a compatible unit appears somewhere in the units expression, then that
compatible unit will be converted to the new unit and the remaining
units in the expression will be left alone.  For example, given the
input ‘980 cm/s^2’, the command ‘u c ms’ will change the ‘s’ to ‘ms’ to
get ‘9.8e-4 cm/ms^2’.  The “remainder unit” ‘cm’ is left alone rather
than being changed to the base unit ‘m’.

   You can use explicit unit conversion instead of the ‘u s’ command to
gain more control over the units of the result of an expression.  For
example, given ‘5 m + 23 mm’, you can type ‘u c m’ or ‘u c mm’ to
express the result in either meters or millimeters.  (For that matter,
you could type ‘u c fath’ to express the result in fathoms, if you
preferred!)

   In place of a specific set of units, you can also enter one of the
units system names ‘si’, ‘mks’ (equivalent), or ‘cgs’.  For example, ‘u
c si <RET>’ converts the expression into International System of Units
(SI) base units.  Also, ‘u c base’ converts to Calc’s base units, which
are the same as ‘si’ units except that ‘base’ uses ‘g’ as the
fundamental unit of mass whereas ‘si’ uses ‘kg’.

   The ‘u c’ command also accepts “composite units”, which are expressed
as the sum of several compatible unit names.  For example, converting
‘30.5 in’ to units ‘mi+ft+in’ (miles, feet, and inches) produces ‘2 ft +
6.5 in’.  Calc first sorts the unit names into order of decreasing
relative size.  It then accounts for as much of the input quantity as it
can using an integer number times the largest unit, then moves on to the
next smaller unit, and so on.  Only the smallest unit may have a
non-integer amount attached in the result.  A few standard unit names
exist for common combinations, such as ‘mfi’ for ‘mi+ft+in’, and ‘tpo’
for ‘ton+lb+oz’.  Composite units are expanded as if by ‘a x’, so that
‘(ft+in)/hr’ is first converted to ‘ft/hr+in/hr’.

   If the value on the stack does not contain any units, ‘u c’ will
prompt first for the old units which this value should be considered to
have, then for the new units.  (If the value on the stack can be
simplified so that it doesn’t contain any units, like ‘ft/in’ can be
simplified to 12, then ‘u c’ will still prompt for both old units and
new units.  Assuming the old and new units you give are consistent with
each other, the result also will not contain any units.  For example,
‘u c cm <RET> in <RET>’ converts the number 2 on the stack to 5.08.

   The ‘u b’ (‘calc-base-units’) command is shorthand for ‘u c base’; it
converts the units expression on the top of the stack into ‘base’ units.
If ‘u s’ does not simplify a units expression as far as you would like,
try ‘u b’.

   Like the ‘u c’ command, the ‘u b’ command treats temperature units as
relative temperatures.

   The ‘u r’ (‘calc-remove-units’) command removes units from the
formula at the top of the stack.  The ‘u x’ (‘calc-extract-units’)
command extracts only the units portion of a formula.  These commands
essentially replace every term of the formula that does or doesn’t
(respectively) look like a unit name by the constant 1, then resimplify
the formula.

   The ‘u a’ (‘calc-autorange-units’) command turns on and off a mode in
which unit prefixes like ‘k’ (“kilo”) are automatically applied to keep
the numeric part of a units expression in a reasonable range.  This mode
affects ‘u s’ and all units conversion commands except ‘u b’.  For
example, with autoranging on, ‘12345 Hz’ will be simplified to ‘12.345
kHz’.  Autoranging is useful for some kinds of units (like ‘Hz’ and
‘m’), but is probably undesirable for non-metric units like ‘ft’ and
‘tbsp’.  (Composite units are more appropriate for those; see above.)

   Autoranging always applies the prefix to the leftmost unit name.
Calc chooses the largest prefix that causes the number to be greater
than or equal to 1.0.  Thus an increasing sequence of adjusted times
would be ‘1 ms, 10 ms, 100 ms, 1 s, 10 s, 100 s, 1 ks’.  Generally the
rule of thumb is that the number will be adjusted to be in the interval
‘[1 .. 1000)’, although there are several exceptions to this rule.
First, if the unit has a power then this is not possible; ‘0.1 s^2’
simplifies to ‘100000 ms^2’.  Second, the “centi-” prefix is allowed to
form ‘cm’ (centimeters), but will not apply to other units.  The
“deci-,” “deka-,” and “hecto-” prefixes are never used.  Thus the
allowable interval is ‘[1 .. 10)’ for millimeters and ‘[1 .. 100)’ for
centimeters.  Finally, a prefix will not be added to a unit if the
resulting name is also the actual name of another unit; ‘1e-15 t’ would
normally be considered a “femto-ton,” but it is written as ‘1000 at’
(1000 atto-tons) instead because ‘ft’ would be confused with feet.


File: calc.info,  Node: The Units Table,  Next: Predefined Units,  Prev: Basic Operations on Units,  Up: Units

12.2 The Units Table
====================

The ‘u v’ (‘calc-enter-units-table’) command displays the units table in
another buffer called ‘*Units Table*’.  Each entry in this table gives
the unit name as it would appear in an expression, the definition of the
unit in terms of simpler units, and a full name or description of the
unit.  Fundamental units are defined as themselves; these are the units
produced by the ‘u b’ command.  The fundamental units are meters,
seconds, grams, kelvins, amperes, candelas, moles, radians, and
steradians.

   The Units Table buffer also displays the Unit Prefix Table.  Note
that two prefixes, “kilo” and “hecto,” accept either upper- or
lower-case prefix letters.  ‘Meg’ is also accepted as a synonym for the
‘M’ prefix.  Whenever a unit name can be interpreted as either a
built-in name or a prefix followed by another built-in name, the former
interpretation wins.  For example, ‘2 pt’ means two pints, not two
pico-tons.

   The Units Table buffer, once created, is not rebuilt unless you
define new units.  To force the buffer to be rebuilt, give any numeric
prefix argument to ‘u v’.

   The ‘u V’ (‘calc-view-units-table’) command is like ‘u v’ except that
the cursor is not moved into the Units Table buffer.  You can type ‘u V’
again to remove the Units Table from the display.  To return from the
Units Table buffer after a ‘u v’, type ‘C-x * c’ again or use the
regular Emacs ‘C-x o’ (‘other-window’) command.  You can also kill the
buffer with ‘C-x k’ if you wish; the actual units table is safely stored
inside the Calculator.

   The ‘u g’ (‘calc-get-unit-definition’) command retrieves a unit’s
defining expression and pushes it onto the Calculator stack.  For
example, ‘u g in’ will produce the expression ‘2.54 cm’.  This is the
same definition for the unit that would appear in the Units Table
buffer.  Note that this command works only for actual unit names; ‘u g
km’ will report that no such unit exists, for example, because ‘km’ is
really the unit ‘m’ with a ‘k’ (“kilo”) prefix.  To see a definition of
a unit in terms of base units, it is easier to push the unit name on the
stack and then reduce it to base units with ‘u b’.

   The ‘u e’ (‘calc-explain-units’) command displays an English
description of the units of the expression on the stack.  For example,
for the expression ‘62 km^2 g / s^2 mol K’, the description is
“Square-Kilometer Gram per (Second-squared Mole Degree-Kelvin).” This
command uses the English descriptions that appear in the righthand
column of the Units Table.


File: calc.info,  Node: Predefined Units,  Next: User-Defined Units,  Prev: The Units Table,  Up: Units

12.3 Predefined Units
=====================

The definitions of many units have changed over the years.  For example,
the meter was originally defined in 1791 as one ten-millionth of the
distance from the Equator to the North Pole.  In order to be more
precise, the definition was adjusted several times, and now a meter is
defined as the distance that light will travel in a vacuum in
1/299792458 of a second; consequently, the speed of light in a vacuum is
exactly 299792458 m/s.  Many other units have been redefined in terms of
fundamental physical processes; a second, for example, is currently
defined as 9192631770 periods of a certain radiation related to the
cesium-133 atom.  The British imperial units, once defined in terms of
physical objects, were redefined in 1963 in terms of SI units.  The US
customary units, which were the same as British units until the British
imperial system was created in 1824, were also defined in terms of the
SI units in 1893.  Because of these redefinitions, conversions between
metric, British Imperial, and US customary units can often be done
precisely.

   Since the exact definitions of many kinds of units have evolved over
the years, and since certain countries sometimes have local differences
in their definitions, it is a good idea to examine Calc’s definition of
a unit before depending on its exact value.  For example, there are
three different units for gallons, corresponding to the US (‘gal’),
Canadian (‘galC’), and British (‘galUK’) definitions.  Also, note that
‘oz’ is a standard ounce of mass, ‘ozt’ is a Troy ounce, and ‘ozfl’ is a
fluid ounce.

   The temperature units corresponding to degrees Kelvin and Centigrade
(Celsius) are the same in this table, since most units commands treat
temperatures as being relative.  The ‘calc-convert-temperature’ command
has special rules for handling the different absolute magnitudes of the
various temperature scales.

   The unit of volume “liters” can be referred to by either the
lower-case ‘l’ or the upper-case ‘L’.

   The unit ‘A’ stands for amperes; the name ‘Ang’ is used for
angstroms.

   The unit ‘pt’ stands for pints; the name ‘point’ stands for a
typographical point, defined by ‘72 point = 1 in’.  This is slightly
different from the point defined by the American Typefounder’s
Association in 1886, but the point used by Calc has become standard
largely due to its use by the PostScript page description language.
There is also ‘texpt’, which stands for a printer’s point as defined by
the TeX typesetting system: ‘72.27 texpt = 1 in’.  Other units used by
TeX are available; they are ‘texpc’ (a pica), ‘texbp’ (a “big point”,
equal to a standard point which is larger than the point used by TeX),
‘texdd’ (a Didot point), ‘texcc’ (a Cicero) and ‘texsp’ (a scaled TeX
point, all dimensions representable in TeX are multiples of this value).

   When Calc is using the TeX or LaTeX language mode (*note TeX and
LaTeX Language Modes::), the TeX specific unit names will not use the
‘tex’ prefix; the unit name for a TeX point will be ‘pt’ instead of
‘texpt’, for example.  To avoid conflicts, the unit names for pint and
parsec will simply be ‘pint’ and ‘parsec’ instead of ‘pt’ and ‘pc’.

   The unit ‘e’ stands for the elementary (electron) unit of charge;
because algebra command could mistake this for the special constant ‘e’,
Calc provides the alternate unit name ‘ech’ which is preferable to ‘e’.

   The name ‘g’ stands for one gram of mass; there is also ‘gf’, one
gram of force.  (Likewise for ‘lb’, pounds, and ‘lbf’.)  Meanwhile, one
“‘g’” of acceleration is denoted ‘ga’.

   The unit ‘ton’ is a U.S. ton of ‘2000 lb’, and ‘t’ is a metric ton of
‘1000 kg’.

   The names ‘s’ (or ‘sec’) and ‘min’ refer to units of time; ‘arcsec’
and ‘arcmin’ are units of angle.

   Some “units” are really physical constants; for example, ‘c’
represents the speed of light, and ‘h’ represents Planck’s constant.
You can use these just like other units: converting ‘.5 c’ to ‘m/s’
expresses one-half the speed of light in meters per second.  You can
also use this merely as a handy reference; the ‘u g’ command gets the
definition of one of these constants in its normal terms, and ‘u b’
expresses the definition in base units.

   Two units, ‘pi’ and ‘alpha’ (the fine structure constant,
approximately 1/137) are dimensionless.  The units simplification
commands simply treat these names as equivalent to their corresponding
values.  However you can, for example, use ‘u c’ to convert a pure
number into multiples of the fine structure constant, or ‘u b’ to
convert this back into a pure number.  (When ‘u c’ prompts for the “old
units,” just enter a blank line to signify that the value really is
unitless.)


File: calc.info,  Node: User-Defined Units,  Next: Logarithmic Units,  Prev: Predefined Units,  Up: Units

12.4 User-Defined Units
=======================

Calc provides ways to get quick access to your selected “favorite”
units, as well as ways to define your own new units.

   To select your favorite units, store a vector of unit names or
expressions in the Calc variable ‘Units’.  The ‘u 1’ through ‘u 9’
commands (‘calc-quick-units’) provide access to these units.  If the
value on the top of the stack is a plain number (with no units
attached), then ‘u 1’ gives it the specified units.  (Basically, it
multiplies the number by the first item in the ‘Units’ vector.)  If the
number on the stack _does_ have units, then ‘u 1’ converts that number
to the new units.  For example, suppose the vector ‘[in, ft]’ is stored
in ‘Units’.  Then ‘30 u 1’ will create the expression ‘30 in’, and ‘u 2’
will convert that expression to ‘2.5 ft’.

   The ‘u 0’ command accesses the tenth element of ‘Units’.  Only ten
quick units may be defined at a time.  If the ‘Units’ variable has no
stored value (the default), or if its value is not a vector, then the
quick-units commands will not function.  The ‘s U’ command is a
convenient way to edit the ‘Units’ variable; *note Operations on
Variables::.

   The ‘u d’ (‘calc-define-unit’) command records the units expression
on the top of the stack as the definition for a new, user-defined unit.
For example, putting ‘16.5 ft’ on the stack and typing ‘u d rod’ defines
the new unit ‘rod’ to be equivalent to 16.5 feet.  The unit conversion
and simplification commands will now treat ‘rod’ just like any other
unit of length.  You will also be prompted for an optional English
description of the unit, which will appear in the Units Table.  If you
wish the definition of this unit to be displayed in a special way in the
Units Table buffer (such as with an asterisk to indicate an approximate
value), then you can call this command with an argument, ‘C-u u d’; you
will then also be prompted for a string that will be used to display the
definition.

   The ‘u u’ (‘calc-undefine-unit’) command removes a user-defined unit.
It is not possible to remove one of the predefined units, however.

   If you define a unit with an existing unit name, your new definition
will replace the original definition of that unit.  If the unit was a
predefined unit, the old definition will not be replaced, only
“shadowed.” The built-in definition will reappear if you later use ‘u u’
to remove the shadowing definition.

   To create a new fundamental unit, use either 1 or the unit name
itself as the defining expression.  Otherwise the expression can involve
any other units that you like (except for composite units like ‘mfi’).
You can create a new composite unit with a sum of other units as the
defining expression.  The next unit operation like ‘u c’ or ‘u v’ will
rebuild the internal unit table incorporating your modifications.  Note
that erroneous definitions (such as two units defined in terms of each
other) will not be detected until the unit table is next rebuilt; ‘u v’
is a convenient way to force this to happen.

   Temperature units are treated specially inside the Calculator; it is
not possible to create user-defined temperature units.

   The ‘u p’ (‘calc-permanent-units’) command stores the user-defined
units in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable
‘calc-settings-file’, typically ‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’), so that the units
will still be available in subsequent Emacs sessions.  If there was
already a set of user-defined units in your Calc init file, it is
replaced by the new set.  (*Note General Mode Commands::, for a way to
tell Calc to use a different file for the Calc init file.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Logarithmic Units,  Next: Musical Notes,  Prev: User-Defined Units,  Up: Units

12.5 Logarithmic Units
======================

The units ‘dB’ (decibels) and ‘Np’ (nepers) are logarithmic units which
are manipulated differently than standard units.  Calc provides commands
to work with these logarithmic units.

   Decibels and nepers are used to measure power quantities as well as
field quantities (quantities whose squares are proportional to power);
these two types of quantities are handled slightly different from each
other.  By default the Calc commands work as if power quantities are
being used; with the ‘H’ prefix the Calc commands work as if field
quantities are being used.

   The decibel level of a power P1, relative to a reference power P0, is
defined to be 10 log10(P1/P0) dB. (The factor of 10 is because a
decibel, as its name implies, is one-tenth of a bel.  The bel, named
after Alexander Graham Bell, was considered to be too large of a unit
and was effectively replaced by the decibel.)  If F is a field quantity
with power P=k F^2, then a reference quantity of F0 would correspond to
a power of P0=k F0^2.  If P1=k F1^2, then

     10 log10(P1/P0) = 10 log10(F1^2/F0^2) = 20 log10(F1/F0).

In order to get the same decibel level regardless of whether a field
quantity or the corresponding power quantity is used, the decibel level
of a field quantity F1, relative to a reference F0, is defined as 20
log10(F1/F0) dB. For example, the decibel value of a sound pressure
level of 60 uPa relative to 20 uPa (the threshold of human hearing) is
20 log10(60 uPa/ 20 uPa) dB = 20 log10(3) dB, which is about 9.54 dB.
Note that in taking the ratio, the original units cancel and so these
logarithmic units are dimensionless.

   Nepers (named after John Napier, who is credited with inventing the
logarithm) are similar to bels except they use natural logarithms
instead of common logarithms.  The neper level of a power P1, relative
to a reference power P0, is (1/2) ln(P1/P0) Np.  The neper level of a
field F1, relative to a reference field F0, is ln(F1/F0) Np.

   For power quantities, Calc uses 1 mW as the default reference
quantity; this default can be changed by changing the value of the
customizable variable ‘calc-lu-power-reference’ (*note Customizing
Calc::).  For field quantities, Calc uses 20 uPa as the default
reference quantity; this is the value used in acoustics which is where
decibels are commonly encountered.  This default can be changed by
changing the value of the customizable variable
‘calc-lu-field-reference’ (*note Customizing Calc::).  A non-default
reference quantity will be read from the stack if the capital ‘O’ prefix
is used.

   The ‘l q’ (‘calc-lu-quant’) [‘lupquant’] command computes the power
quantity corresponding to a given number of logarithmic units.  With the
capital ‘O’ prefix, ‘O l q’, the reference level will be read from the
top of the stack.  (In an algebraic formula, ‘lupquant’ can be given an
optional second argument which will be used for the reference level.)
For example, ‘20 dB <RET> l q’ will return ‘100 mW’; ‘20 dB <RET> 4 W
<RET> O l q’ will return ‘400 W’.  The ‘H l q’ [‘lufquant’] command
behaves like ‘l q’ but computes field quantities instead of power
quantities.

   The ‘l d’ (‘calc-db’) [‘dbpower’] command will compute the decibel
level of a power quantity using the default reference level; ‘H l d’
[‘dbfield’] will compute the decibel level of a field quantity.  The
commands ‘l n’ (‘calc-np’) [‘nppower’] and ‘H l n’ [‘npfield’] will
similarly compute neper levels.  With the capital ‘O’ prefix these
commands will read a reference level from the stack; in an algebraic
formula the reference level can be given as an optional second argument.

   The sum of two power or field quantities doesn’t correspond to the
sum of the corresponding decibel or neper levels.  If the powers
corresponding to decibel levels D1 and D2 are added, the corresponding
decibel level “sum” will be

       10 log10(10^(D1/10) + 10^(D2/10)) dB.

When field quantities are combined, it often means the corresponding
powers are added and so the above formula might be used.  In acoustics,
for example, the sound pressure level is a field quantity and so the
decibels are often defined using the field formula, but the sound
pressure levels are combined as the sound power levels, and so the above
formula should be used.  If two field quantities themselves are added,
the new decibel level will be

       20 log10(10^(D1/20) + 10^(D2/20)) dB.

If the power corresponding to D dB is multiplied by a number N, then the
corresponding decibel level will be

       D + 10 log10(N) dB,

if a field quantity is multiplied by N the corresponding decibel level
will be

       D + 20 log10(N) dB.

There are similar formulas for combining nepers.  The ‘l +’
(‘calc-lu-plus’) [‘lupadd’] command will “add” two logarithmic unit
power levels this way; with the ‘H’ prefix, ‘H l +’ [‘lufadd’] will add
logarithmic unit field levels.  Similarly, logarithmic units can be
“subtracted” with ‘l -’ (‘calc-lu-minus’) [‘lupsub’] or ‘H l -’
[‘lufsub’].  The ‘l *’ (‘calc-lu-times’) [‘lupmul’] and ‘H l *’
[‘lufmul’] commands will “multiply” a logarithmic unit by a number; the
‘l /’ (‘calc-lu-divide’) [‘lupdiv’] and ‘H l /’ [‘lufdiv’] commands will
“divide” a logarithmic unit by a number.  Note that the reference
quantities don’t play a role in this arithmetic.


File: calc.info,  Node: Musical Notes,  Prev: Logarithmic Units,  Up: Units

12.6 Musical Notes
==================

Calc can convert between musical notes and their associated frequencies.
Notes can be given using either scientific pitch notation or midi
numbers.  Since these note systems are basically logarithmic scales,
Calc uses the ‘l’ prefix for functions operating on notes.

   Scientific pitch notation refers to a note by giving a letter A
through G, possibly followed by a flat or sharp) with a subscript
indicating an octave number.  Each octave starts with C and ends with B
and the octave numbered 0 was chosen to correspond to the lowest audible
frequency.  Using this system, middle C (about 261.625 Hz) corresponds
to the note ‘C’ in octave 4 and is denoted ‘C_4’.  Any frequency can be
described by giving a note plus an offset in cents (where a cent is a
ratio of frequencies so that a semitone consists of 100 cents).

   The midi note number system assigns numbers to notes so that ‘C_(-1)’
corresponds to the midi note number 0 and ‘G_9’ corresponds to the midi
note number 127.  A midi controller can have up to 128 keys and each
midi note number from 0 to 127 corresponds to a possible key.

   The ‘l s’ (‘calc-spn’) [‘spn’] command converts either a frequency or
a midi number to scientific pitch notation.  For example, ‘500 Hz’ gets
converted to ‘B_4 + 21.3094853649 cents’ and ‘84’ to ‘C_6’.

   The ‘l m’ (‘calc-midi’) [‘midi’] command converts either a frequency
or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the corresponding midi
number.  For example, ‘C_6’ gets converted to 84 and ‘440 Hz’ to 69.

   The ‘l f’ (‘calc-freq’) [‘freq’] command converts either either a
midi number or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the
corresponding frequency.  For example, ‘Asharp_2 + 30 cents’ gets
converted to ‘118.578040134 Hz’ and ‘55’ to ‘195.99771799 Hz’.

   Since the frequencies of notes are not usually given exactly (and are
typically irrational), the customizable variable ‘calc-note-threshold’
determines how close (in cents) a frequency needs to be to a note to be
recognized as that note (*note Customizing Calc::).  This variable has a
default value of ‘1’.  For example, middle C is approximately
‘261.625565302 Hz’; this frequency is often shortened to ‘261.625 Hz’.
Without ‘calc-note-threshold’ (or a value of ‘0’), Calc would convert
‘261.625 Hz’ to scientific pitch notation ‘B_3 + 99.9962592773 cents’;
with the default value of ‘1’, Calc converts ‘261.625 Hz’ to ‘C_4’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Store and Recall,  Next: Graphics,  Prev: Units,  Up: Top

13 Storing and Recalling
************************

Calculator variables are really just Lisp variables that contain numbers
or formulas in a form that Calc can understand.  The commands in this
section allow you to manipulate variables conveniently.  Commands
related to variables use the ‘s’ prefix key.

* Menu:

* Storing Variables::
* Recalling Variables::
* Operations on Variables::
* Let Command::
* Evaluates-To Operator::


File: calc.info,  Node: Storing Variables,  Next: Recalling Variables,  Prev: Store and Recall,  Up: Store and Recall

13.1 Storing Variables
======================

The ‘s s’ (‘calc-store’) command stores the value at the top of the
stack into a specified variable.  It prompts you to enter the name of
the variable.  If you press a single digit, the value is stored
immediately in one of the “quick” variables ‘q0’ through ‘q9’.  Or you
can enter any variable name.

   The ‘s s’ command leaves the stored value on the stack.  There is
also an ‘s t’ (‘calc-store-into’) command, which removes a value from
the stack and stores it in a variable.

   If the top of stack value is an equation ‘a = 7’ or assignment ‘a :=
7’ with a variable on the lefthand side, then Calc will assign that
variable with that value by default, i.e., if you type ‘s s <RET>’ or ‘s
t <RET>’.  In this example, the value 7 would be stored in the variable
‘a’.  (If you do type a variable name at the prompt, the top-of-stack
value is stored in its entirety, even if it is an equation: ‘s s b
<RET>’ with ‘a := 7’ on the stack stores ‘a := 7’ in ‘b’.)

   In fact, the top of stack value can be a vector of equations or
assignments with different variables on their lefthand sides; the
default will be to store all the variables with their corresponding
righthand sides simultaneously.

   It is also possible to type an equation or assignment directly at the
prompt for the ‘s s’ or ‘s t’ command: ‘s s foo = 7’.  In this case the
expression to the right of the ‘=’ or ‘:=’ symbol is evaluated as if by
the ‘=’ command, and that value is stored in the variable.  No value is
taken from the stack; ‘s s’ and ‘s t’ are equivalent when used in this
way.

   The prefix keys ‘s’ and ‘t’ may be followed immediately by a digit;
‘s 9’ is equivalent to ‘s s 9’, and ‘t 9’ is equivalent to ‘s t 9’.
(The ‘t’ prefix is otherwise used for trail and time/date commands.)

   There are also several “arithmetic store” commands.  For example, ‘s
+’ removes a value from the stack and adds it to the specified variable.
The other arithmetic stores are ‘s -’, ‘s *’, ‘s /’, ‘s ^’, and ‘s |’
(vector concatenation), plus ‘s n’ and ‘s &’ which negate or invert the
value in a variable, and ‘s [’ and ‘s ]’ which decrease or increase a
variable by one.

   All the arithmetic stores accept the Inverse prefix to reverse the
order of the operands.  If ‘v’ represents the contents of the variable,
and ‘a’ is the value drawn from the stack, then regular ‘s -’ assigns ‘v
:= v - a’, but ‘I s -’ assigns ‘v := a - v’.  While ‘I s *’ might seem
pointless, it is useful if matrix multiplication is involved.  Actually,
all the arithmetic stores use formulas designed to behave usefully both
forwards and backwards:

     s +        v := v + a          v := a + v
     s -        v := v - a          v := a - v
     s *        v := v * a          v := a * v
     s /        v := v / a          v := a / v
     s ^        v := v ^ a          v := a ^ v
     s |        v := v | a          v := a | v
     s n        v := v / (-1)       v := (-1) / v
     s &        v := v ^ (-1)       v := (-1) ^ v
     s [        v := v - 1          v := 1 - v
     s ]        v := v - (-1)       v := (-1) - v

   In the last four cases, a numeric prefix argument will be used in
place of the number one.  (For example, ‘M-2 s ]’ increases a variable
by 2, and ‘M-2 I s ]’ replaces a variable by minus-two minus the
variable.

   The first six arithmetic stores can also be typed ‘s t +’, ‘s t -’,
etc.  The commands ‘s s +’, ‘s s -’, and so on are analogous arithmetic
stores that don’t remove the value ‘a’ from the stack.

   All arithmetic stores report the new value of the variable in the
Trail for your information.  They signal an error if the variable
previously had no stored value.  If default simplifications have been
turned off, the arithmetic stores temporarily turn them on for numeric
arguments only (i.e., they temporarily do an ‘m N’ command).  *Note
Simplification Modes::.  Large vectors put in the trail by these
commands always use abbreviated (‘t .’) mode.

   The ‘s m’ command is a general way to adjust a variable’s value using
any Calc function.  It is a “mapping” command analogous to ‘V M’, ‘V R’,
etc.  *Note Reducing and Mapping::, to see how to specify a function for
a mapping command.  Basically, all you do is type the Calc command key
that would invoke that function normally.  For example, ‘s m n’ applies
the ‘n’ key to negate the contents of the variable, so ‘s m n’ is
equivalent to ‘s n’.  Also, ‘s m Q’ takes the square root of the value
stored in a variable, ‘s m v v’ uses ‘v v’ to reverse the vector stored
in the variable, and ‘s m H I S’ takes the hyperbolic arcsine of the
variable contents.

   If the mapping function takes two or more arguments, the additional
arguments are taken from the stack; the old value of the variable is
provided as the first argument.  Thus ‘s m -’ with ‘a’ on the stack
computes ‘v - a’, just like ‘s -’.  With the Inverse prefix, the
variable’s original value becomes the _last_ argument instead of the
first.  Thus ‘I s m -’ is also equivalent to ‘I s -’.

   The ‘s x’ (‘calc-store-exchange’) command exchanges the value of a
variable with the value on the top of the stack.  Naturally, the
variable must already have a stored value for this to work.

   You can type an equation or assignment at the ‘s x’ prompt.  The
command ‘s x a=6’ takes no values from the stack; instead, it pushes the
old value of ‘a’ on the stack and stores ‘a = 6’.

   Until you store something in them, most variables are “void,” that
is, they contain no value at all.  If they appear in an algebraic
formula they will be left alone even if you press ‘=’ (‘calc-evaluate’).
The ‘s u’ (‘calc-unstore’) command returns a variable to the void state.

   The ‘s c’ (‘calc-copy-variable’) command copies the stored value of
one variable to another.  One way it differs from a simple ‘s r’
followed by an ‘s t’ (aside from saving keystrokes) is that the value
never goes on the stack and thus is never rounded, evaluated, or
simplified in any way; it is not even rounded down to the current
precision.

   The only variables with predefined values are the “special constants”
‘pi’, ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and ‘gamma’.  You are free to unstore these
variables or to store new values into them if you like, although some of
the algebraic-manipulation functions may assume these variables
represent their standard values.  Calc displays a warning if you change
the value of one of these variables, or of one of the other special
variables ‘inf’, ‘uinf’, and ‘nan’ (which are normally void).

   Note that ‘pi’ doesn’t actually have 3.14159265359 stored in it, but
rather a special magic value that evaluates to ‘pi’ at the current
precision.  Likewise ‘e’, ‘i’, and ‘phi’ evaluate according to the
current precision or polar mode.  If you recall a value from ‘pi’ and
store it back, this magic property will be lost.  The magic property is
preserved, however, when a variable is copied with ‘s c’.

   If one of the “special constants” is redefined (or undefined) so that
it no longer has its magic property, the property can be restored with
‘s k’ (‘calc-copy-special-constant’).  This command will prompt for a
special constant and a variable to store it in, and so a special
constant can be stored in any variable.  Here, the special constant that
you enter doesn’t depend on the value of the corresponding variable;
‘pi’ will represent 3.14159... regardless of what is currently stored in
the Calc variable ‘pi’.  If one of the other special variables, ‘inf’,
‘uinf’ or ‘nan’, is given a value, its original behavior can be restored
by voiding it with ‘s u’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Recalling Variables,  Next: Operations on Variables,  Prev: Storing Variables,  Up: Store and Recall

13.2 Recalling Variables
========================

The most straightforward way to extract the stored value from a variable
is to use the ‘s r’ (‘calc-recall’) command.  This command prompts for a
variable name (similarly to ‘calc-store’), looks up the value of the
specified variable, and pushes that value onto the stack.  It is an
error to try to recall a void variable.

   It is also possible to recall the value from a variable by evaluating
a formula containing that variable.  For example, ‘' a <RET> =’ is the
same as ‘s r a <RET>’ except that if the variable is void, the former
will simply leave the formula ‘a’ on the stack whereas the latter will
produce an error message.

   The ‘r’ prefix may be followed by a digit, so that ‘r 9’ is
equivalent to ‘s r 9’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Operations on Variables,  Next: Let Command,  Prev: Recalling Variables,  Up: Store and Recall

13.3 Other Operations on Variables
==================================

The ‘s e’ (‘calc-edit-variable’) command edits the stored value of a
variable without ever putting that value on the stack or simplifying or
evaluating the value.  It prompts for the name of the variable to edit.
If the variable has no stored value, the editing buffer will start out
empty.  If the editing buffer is empty when you press ‘C-c C-c’ to
finish, the variable will be made void.  *Note Editing Stack Entries::,
for a general description of editing.

   The ‘s e’ command is especially useful for creating and editing
rewrite rules which are stored in variables.  Sometimes these rules
contain formulas which must not be evaluated until the rules are
actually used.  (For example, they may refer to ‘deriv(x,y)’, where ‘x’
will someday become some expression involving ‘y’; if you let Calc
evaluate the rule while you are defining it, Calc will replace
‘deriv(x,y)’ with 0 because the formula ‘x’ does not itself refer to
‘y’.)  By contrast, recalling the variable, editing with ‘`’, and
storing will evaluate the variable’s value as a side effect of putting
the value on the stack.

   There are several special-purpose variable-editing commands that use
the ‘s’ prefix followed by a shifted letter:

‘s A’
     Edit ‘AlgSimpRules’.  *Note Algebraic Simplifications::.
‘s D’
     Edit ‘Decls’.  *Note Declarations::.
‘s E’
     Edit ‘EvalRules’.  *Note Basic Simplifications::.
‘s F’
     Edit ‘FitRules’.  *Note Curve Fitting::.
‘s G’
     Edit ‘GenCount’.  *Note Solving Equations::.
‘s H’
     Edit ‘Holidays’.  *Note Business Days::.
‘s I’
     Edit ‘IntegLimit’.  *Note Calculus::.
‘s L’
     Edit ‘LineStyles’.  *Note Graphics::.
‘s P’
     Edit ‘PointStyles’.  *Note Graphics::.
‘s R’
     Edit ‘PlotRejects’.  *Note Graphics::.
‘s T’
     Edit ‘TimeZone’.  *Note Time Zones::.
‘s U’
     Edit ‘Units’.  *Note User-Defined Units::.
‘s X’
     Edit ‘ExtSimpRules’.  *Note Unsafe Simplifications::.

   These commands are just versions of ‘s e’ that use fixed variable
names rather than prompting for the variable name.

   The ‘s p’ (‘calc-permanent-variable’) command saves a variable’s
value permanently in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable
‘calc-settings-file’, typically ‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’), so that its value
will still be available in future Emacs sessions.  You can re-execute
‘s p’ later on to update the saved value, but the only way to remove a
saved variable is to edit your calc init file by hand.  (*Note General
Mode Commands::, for a way to tell Calc to use a different file for the
Calc init file.)

   If you do not specify the name of a variable to save (i.e., ‘s p
<RET>’), all Calc variables with defined values are saved except for the
special constants ‘pi’, ‘e’, ‘i’, ‘phi’, and ‘gamma’; the variables
‘TimeZone’ and ‘PlotRejects’; ‘FitRules’, ‘DistribRules’, and other
built-in rewrite rules; and ‘PlotDataN’ variables generated by the
graphics commands.  (You can still save these variables by explicitly
naming them in an ‘s p’ command.)

   The ‘s i’ (‘calc-insert-variables’) command writes the values of all
Calc variables into a specified buffer.  The variables are written with
the prefix ‘var-’ in the form of Lisp ‘setq’ commands which store the
values in string form.  You can place these commands in your Calc init
file (or ‘.emacs’) if you wish, though in this case it would be easier
to use ‘s p <RET>’.  (Note that ‘s i’ omits the same set of variables as
‘s p <RET>’; the difference is that ‘s i’ will store the variables in
any buffer, and it also stores in a more human-readable format.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Let Command,  Next: Evaluates-To Operator,  Prev: Operations on Variables,  Up: Store and Recall

13.4 The Let Command
====================

If you have an expression like ‘a+b^2’ on the stack and you wish to
compute its value where ‘b=3’, you can simply store 3 in ‘b’ and then
press ‘=’ to reevaluate the formula.  This has the side-effect of
leaving the stored value of 3 in ‘b’ for future operations.

   The ‘s l’ (‘calc-let’) command evaluates a formula under a
_temporary_ assignment of a variable.  It stores the value on the top of
the stack into the specified variable, then evaluates the second-to-top
stack entry, then restores the original value (or lack of one) in the
variable.  Thus after ‘' a+b^2 <RET> 3 s l b <RET>’, the stack will
contain the formula ‘a + 9’.  The subsequent command ‘5 s l a <RET>’
will replace this formula with the number 14.  The variables ‘a’ and ‘b’
are not permanently affected in any way by these commands.

   The value on the top of the stack may be an equation or assignment,
or a vector of equations or assignments, in which case the default will
be analogous to the case of ‘s t <RET>’.  *Note Storing Variables::.

   Also, you can answer the variable-name prompt with an equation or
assignment: ‘s l b=3 <RET>’ is the same as storing 3 on the stack and
typing ‘s l b <RET>’.

   The ‘a b’ (‘calc-substitute’) command is another way to substitute a
variable with a value in a formula.  It does an actual substitution
rather than temporarily assigning the variable and evaluating.  For
example, letting ‘n=2’ in ‘f(n pi)’ with ‘a b’ will produce ‘f(2 pi)’,
whereas ‘s l’ would give ‘f(6.28)’ since the evaluation step will also
evaluate ‘pi’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Evaluates-To Operator,  Prev: Let Command,  Up: Store and Recall

13.5 The Evaluates-To Operator
==============================

The special algebraic symbol ‘=>’ is known as the “evaluates-to
operator”.  (It will show up as an ‘evalto’ function call in other
language modes like Pascal and LaTeX.)  This is a binary operator, that
is, it has a lefthand and a righthand argument, although it can be
entered with the righthand argument omitted.

   A formula like ‘A => B’ is evaluated by Calc as follows: First, A is
not simplified or modified in any way.  The previous value of argument B
is thrown away; the formula A is then copied and evaluated as if by the
‘=’ command according to all current modes and stored variable values,
and the result is installed as the new value of B.

   For example, suppose you enter the algebraic formula ‘2 + 3 => 17’.
The number 17 is ignored, and the lefthand argument is left in its
unevaluated form; the result is the formula ‘2 + 3 => 5’.

   You can enter an ‘=>’ formula either directly using algebraic entry
(in which case the righthand side may be omitted since it is going to be
replaced right away anyhow), or by using the ‘s =’ (‘calc-evalto’)
command, which takes A from the stack and replaces it with ‘A => B’.

   Calc keeps track of all ‘=>’ operators on the stack, and recomputes
them whenever anything changes that might affect their values, i.e., a
mode setting or variable value.  This occurs only if the ‘=>’ operator
is at the top level of the formula, or if it is part of a top-level
vector.  In other words, pushing ‘2 + (a => 17)’ will change the 17 to
the actual value of ‘a’ when you enter the formula, but the result will
not be dynamically updated when ‘a’ is changed later because the ‘=>’
operator is buried inside a sum.  However, a vector of ‘=>’ operators
will be recomputed, since it is convenient to push a vector like ‘[a =>,
b =>, c =>]’ on the stack to make a concise display of all the variables
in your problem.  (Another way to do this would be to use ‘[a, b, c]
=>’, which provides a slightly different format of display.  You can use
whichever you find easiest to read.)

   The ‘m C’ (‘calc-auto-recompute’) command allows you to turn this
automatic recomputation on or off.  If you turn recomputation off, you
must explicitly recompute an ‘=>’ operator on the stack in one of the
usual ways, such as by pressing ‘=’.  Turning recomputation off
temporarily can save a lot of time if you will be changing several modes
or variables before you look at the ‘=>’ entries again.

   Most commands are not especially useful with ‘=>’ operators as
arguments.  For example, given ‘x + 2 => 17’, it won’t work to type ‘1
+’ to get ‘x + 3 => 18’.  If you want to operate on the lefthand side of
the ‘=>’ operator on the top of the stack, type ‘j 1’ (that’s the digit
“one”) to select the lefthand side, execute your commands, then type ‘j
u’ to unselect.

   All current modes apply when an ‘=>’ operator is computed, including
the current simplification mode.  Recall that the formula
‘arcsin(sin(x))’ will not be handled by Calc’s algebraic
simplifications, but Calc’s unsafe simplifications will reduce it to
‘x’.  If you enter ‘arcsin(sin(x)) =>’ normally, the result will be
‘arcsin(sin(x)) => arcsin(sin(x))’.  If you change to Extended
Simplification mode, the result will be ‘arcsin(sin(x)) => x’.  However,
just pressing ‘a e’ once will have no effect on ‘arcsin(sin(x)) =>
arcsin(sin(x))’, because the righthand side depends only on the lefthand
side and the current mode settings, and the lefthand side is not
affected by commands like ‘a e’.

   The “let” command (‘s l’) has an interesting interaction with the
‘=>’ operator.  The ‘s l’ command evaluates the second-to-top stack
entry with the top stack entry supplying a temporary value for a given
variable.  As you might expect, if that stack entry is an ‘=>’ operator
its righthand side will temporarily show this value for the variable.
In fact, all ‘=>’s on the stack will be updated if they refer to that
variable.  But this change is temporary in the sense that the next
command that causes Calc to look at those stack entries will make them
revert to the old variable value.

     2:  a => a             2:  a => 17         2:  a => a
     1:  a + 1 => a + 1     1:  a + 1 => 18     1:  a + 1 => a + 1
         .                      .                   .

                                17 s l a <RET>        p 8 <RET>

   Here the ‘p 8’ command changes the current precision, thus causing
the ‘=>’ forms to be recomputed after the influence of the “let” is
gone.  The ‘d <SPC>’ command (‘calc-refresh’) is a handy way to force
the ‘=>’ operators on the stack to be recomputed without any other side
effects.

   Embedded mode also uses ‘=>’ operators.  In Embedded mode, the
lefthand side of an ‘=>’ operator can refer to variables assigned
elsewhere in the file by ‘:=’ operators.  The assignment operator ‘a :=
17’ does not actually do anything by itself.  But Embedded mode
recognizes it and marks it as a sort of file-local definition of the
variable.  You can enter ‘:=’ operators in Algebraic mode, or by using
the ‘s :’ (‘calc-assign’) [‘assign’] command which takes a variable and
value from the stack and replaces them with an assignment.

   *Note TeX and LaTeX Language Modes::, for the way ‘=>’ appears in TeX
language output.  The “eqn” mode gives similar treatment to ‘=>’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Graphics,  Next: Kill and Yank,  Prev: Store and Recall,  Up: Top

14 Graphics
***********

The commands for graphing data begin with the ‘g’ prefix key.  Calc uses
GNUPLOT 2.0 or later to do graphics.  These commands will only work if
GNUPLOT is available on your system.  (While GNUPLOT sounds like a
relative of GNU Emacs, it is actually completely unrelated.  However, it
is free software.  It can be obtained from ‘http://www.gnuplot.info’.)

   If you have GNUPLOT installed on your system but Calc is unable to
find it, you may need to set the ‘calc-gnuplot-name’ variable in your
Calc init file or ‘.emacs’.  You may also need to set some Lisp
variables to show Calc how to run GNUPLOT on your system; these are
described under ‘g D’ and ‘g O’ below.  If you are using the X window
system or MS-Windows, Calc will configure GNUPLOT for you automatically.
If you have GNUPLOT 3.0 or later and you are using a Unix or GNU system
without X, Calc will configure GNUPLOT to display graphs using simple
character graphics that will work on any POSIX-compatible terminal.

* Menu:

* Basic Graphics::
* Three Dimensional Graphics::
* Managing Curves::
* Graphics Options::
* Devices::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Graphics,  Next: Three Dimensional Graphics,  Prev: Graphics,  Up: Graphics

14.1 Basic Graphics
===================

The easiest graphics command is ‘g f’ (‘calc-graph-fast’).  This command
takes two vectors of equal length from the stack.  The vector at the top
of the stack represents the “y” values of the various data points.  The
vector in the second-to-top position represents the corresponding “x”
values.  This command runs GNUPLOT (if it has not already been started
by previous graphing commands) and displays the set of data points.  The
points will be connected by lines, and there will also be some kind of
symbol to indicate the points themselves.

   The “x” entry may instead be an interval form, in which case suitable
“x” values are interpolated between the minimum and maximum values of
the interval (whether the interval is open or closed is ignored).

   The “x” entry may also be a number, in which case Calc uses the
sequence of “x” values ‘x’, ‘x+1’, ‘x+2’, etc.  (Generally the number 0
or 1 would be used for ‘x’ in this case.)

   The “y” entry may be any formula instead of a vector.  Calc
effectively uses ‘N’ (‘calc-eval-num’) to evaluate variables in the
formula; the result of this must be a formula in a single (unassigned)
variable.  The formula is plotted with this variable taking on the
various “x” values.  Graphs of formulas by default use lines without
symbols at the computed data points.  Note that if neither “x” nor “y”
is a vector, Calc guesses at a reasonable number of data points to use.
See the ‘g N’ command below.  (The “x” values must be either a vector or
an interval if “y” is a formula.)

   If “y” is (or evaluates to) a formula of the form ‘xy(X, Y)’ then the
result is a parametric plot.  The two arguments of the fictitious ‘xy’
function are used as the “x” and “y” coordinates of the curve,
respectively.  In this case the “x” vector or interval you specified is
not directly visible in the graph.  For example, if “x” is the interval
‘[0..360]’ and “y” is the formula ‘xy(sin(t), cos(t))’, the resulting
graph will be a circle.

   Also, “x” and “y” may each be variable names, in which case Calc
looks for suitable vectors, intervals, or formulas stored in those
variables.

   The “x” and “y” values for the data points (as pulled from the
vectors, calculated from the formulas, or interpolated from the
intervals) should be real numbers (integers, fractions, or floats).  One
exception to this is that the “y” entry can consist of a vector of
numbers combined with error forms, in which case the points will be
plotted with the appropriate error bars.  Other than this, if either the
“x” value or the “y” value of a given data point is not a real number,
that data point will be omitted from the graph.  The points on either
side of the invalid point will _not_ be connected by a line.

   See the documentation for ‘g a’ below for a description of the way
numeric prefix arguments affect ‘g f’.

   If you store an empty vector in the variable ‘PlotRejects’ (i.e., ‘[
] s t PlotRejects’), Calc will append information to this vector for
every data point which was rejected because its “x” or “y” values were
not real numbers.  The result will be a matrix where each row holds the
curve number, data point number, “x” value, and “y” value for a rejected
data point.  *Note Evaluates-To Operator::, for a handy way to keep tabs
on the current value of ‘PlotRejects’.  *Note Operations on Variables::,
for the ‘s R’ command which is another easy way to examine
‘PlotRejects’.

   To clear the graphics display, type ‘g c’ (‘calc-graph-clear’).  If
the GNUPLOT output device is an X window, the window will go away.
Effects on other kinds of output devices will vary.  You don’t need to
use ‘g c’ if you don’t want to—if you give another ‘g f’ or ‘g p’
command later on, it will reuse the existing graphics window if there is
one.


File: calc.info,  Node: Three Dimensional Graphics,  Next: Managing Curves,  Prev: Basic Graphics,  Up: Graphics

14.2 Three-Dimensional Graphics
===============================

The ‘g F’ (‘calc-graph-fast-3d’) command makes a three-dimensional
graph.  It works only if you have GNUPLOT 3.0 or later; with GNUPLOT
2.0, you will see a GNUPLOT error message if you try this command.

   The ‘g F’ command takes three values from the stack, called “x”, “y”,
and “z”, respectively.  As was the case for 2D graphs, there are several
options for these values.

   In the first case, “x” and “y” are each vectors (not necessarily of
the same length); either or both may instead be interval forms.  The “z”
value must be a matrix with the same number of rows as elements in “x”,
and the same number of columns as elements in “y”.  The result is a
surface plot where ‘z_ij’ is the height of the point at coordinate
‘(x_i, y_j)’ on the surface.  The 3D graph will be displayed from a
certain default viewpoint; you can change this viewpoint by adding a
‘set view’ to the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ buffer as described later.  See
the GNUPLOT documentation for a description of the ‘set view’ command.

   Each point in the matrix will be displayed as a dot in the graph, and
these points will be connected by a grid of lines (“isolines”).

   In the second case, “x”, “y”, and “z” are all vectors of equal
length.  The resulting graph displays a 3D line instead of a surface,
where the coordinates of points along the line are successive triplets
of values from the input vectors.

   In the third case, “x” and “y” are vectors or interval forms, and “z”
is any formula involving two variables (not counting variables with
assigned values).  These variables are sorted into alphabetical order;
the first takes on values from “x” and the second takes on values from
“y” to form a matrix of results that are graphed as a 3D surface.

   If the “z” formula evaluates to a call to the fictitious function
‘xyz(X, Y, Z)’, then the result is a “parametric surface.” In this case,
the axes of the graph are taken from the X and Y values in these calls,
and the “x” and “y” values from the input vectors or intervals are used
only to specify the range of inputs to the formula.  For example,
plotting ‘[0..360], [0..180], xyz(sin(x)*sin(y), cos(x)*sin(y), cos(y))’
will draw a sphere.  (Since the default resolution for 3D plots is 5
steps in each of “x” and “y”, this will draw a very crude sphere.  You
could use the ‘g N’ command, described below, to increase this
resolution, or specify the “x” and “y” values as vectors with more than
5 elements.

   It is also possible to have a function in a regular ‘g f’ plot
evaluate to an ‘xyz’ call.  Since ‘g f’ plots a line, not a surface, the
result will be a 3D parametric line.  For example, ‘[[0..720],
xyz(sin(x), cos(x), x)]’ will plot two turns of a helix (a
three-dimensional spiral).

   As for ‘g f’, each of “x”, “y”, and “z” may instead be variables
containing the relevant data.


File: calc.info,  Node: Managing Curves,  Next: Graphics Options,  Prev: Three Dimensional Graphics,  Up: Graphics

14.3 Managing Curves
====================

The ‘g f’ command is really shorthand for the following commands: ‘C-u g
d g a g p’.  Likewise, ‘g F’ is shorthand for ‘C-u g d g A g p’.  You
can gain more control over your graph by using these commands directly.

   The ‘g a’ (‘calc-graph-add’) command adds the “curve” represented by
the two values on the top of the stack to the current graph.  You can
have any number of curves in the same graph.  When you give the ‘g p’
command, all the curves will be drawn superimposed on the same axes.

   The ‘g a’ command (and many others that affect the current graph)
will cause a special buffer, ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’, to be displayed in
another window.  This buffer is a template of the commands that will be
sent to GNUPLOT when it is time to draw the graph.  The first ‘g a’
command adds a ‘plot’ command to this buffer.  Succeeding ‘g a’ commands
add extra curves onto that ‘plot’ command.  Other graph-related commands
put other GNUPLOT commands into this buffer.  In normal usage you never
need to work with this buffer directly, but you can if you wish.  The
only constraint is that there must be only one ‘plot’ command, and it
must be the last command in the buffer.  If you want to save and later
restore a complete graph configuration, you can use regular Emacs
commands to save and restore the contents of the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’
buffer.

   If the values on the stack are not variable names, ‘g a’ will invent
variable names for them (of the form ‘PlotDataN’) and store the values
in those variables.  The “x” and “y” variables are what go into the
‘plot’ command in the template.  If you add a curve that uses a certain
variable and then later change that variable, you can replot the graph
without having to delete and re-add the curve.  That’s because the
variable name, not the vector, interval or formula itself, is what was
added by ‘g a’.

   A numeric prefix argument on ‘g a’ or ‘g f’ changes the way stack
entries are interpreted as curves.  With a positive prefix argument ‘n’,
the top ‘n’ stack entries are “y” values for ‘n’ different curves which
share a common “x” value in the ‘n+1’st stack entry.  (Thus ‘g a’ with
no prefix argument is equivalent to ‘C-u 1 g a’.)

   A prefix of zero or plain ‘C-u’ means to take two stack entries, “x”
and “y” as usual, but to interpret “y” as a vector of “y” values for
several curves that share a common “x”.

   A negative prefix argument tells Calc to read ‘n’ vectors from the
stack; each vector ‘[x, y]’ describes an independent curve.  This is the
only form of ‘g a’ that creates several curves at once that don’t have
common “x” values.  (Of course, the range of “x” values covered by all
the curves ought to be roughly the same if they are to look nice on the
same graph.)

   For example, to plot ‘sin(n x)’ for integers ‘n’ from 1 to 5, you
could use ‘v x’ to create a vector of integers (‘n’), then ‘V M '’ or ‘V
M $’ to map ‘sin(n x)’ across this vector.  The resulting vector of
formulas is suitable for use as the “y” argument to a ‘C-u g a’ or ‘C-u
g f’ command.

   The ‘g A’ (‘calc-graph-add-3d’) command adds a 3D curve to the graph.
It is not valid to intermix 2D and 3D curves in a single graph.  This
command takes three arguments, “x”, “y”, and “z”, from the stack.  With
a positive prefix ‘n’, it takes ‘n+2’ arguments (common “x” and “y”,
plus ‘n’ separate “z”s).  With a zero prefix, it takes three stack
entries but the “z” entry is a vector of curve values.  With a negative
prefix ‘-n’, it takes ‘n’ vectors of the form ‘[x, y, z]’.  The ‘g A’
command works by adding a ‘splot’ (surface-plot) command to the
‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ buffer.

   (Although ‘g a’ adds a 2D ‘plot’ command to the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’
buffer, Calc changes this to ‘splot’ before sending it to GNUPLOT if it
notices that the data points are evaluating to ‘xyz’ calls.  It will not
work to mix 2D and 3D ‘g a’ curves in a single graph, although Calc does
not currently check for this.)

   The ‘g d’ (‘calc-graph-delete’) command deletes the most recently
added curve from the graph.  It has no effect if there are no curves in
the graph.  With a numeric prefix argument of any kind, it deletes all
of the curves from the graph.

   The ‘g H’ (‘calc-graph-hide’) command “hides” or “unhides” the most
recently added curve.  A hidden curve will not appear in the actual
plot, but information about it such as its name and line and point
styles will be retained.

   The ‘g j’ (‘calc-graph-juggle’) command moves the curve at the end of
the list (the “most recently added curve”) to the front of the list.
The next-most-recent curve is thus exposed for ‘g d’ or similar commands
to use.  With ‘g j’ you can work with any curve in the graph even though
curve-related commands only affect the last curve in the list.

   The ‘g p’ (‘calc-graph-plot’) command uses GNUPLOT to draw the graph
described in the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ buffer.  Any GNUPLOT parameters
which are not defined by commands in this buffer are reset to their
default values.  The variables named in the ‘plot’ command are written
to a temporary data file and the variable names are then replaced by the
file name in the template.  The resulting plotting commands are fed to
the GNUPLOT program.  See the documentation for the GNUPLOT program for
more specific information.  All temporary files are removed when Emacs
or GNUPLOT exits.

   If you give a formula for “y”, Calc will remember all the values that
it calculates for the formula so that later plots can reuse these
values.  Calc throws out these saved values when you change any
circumstances that may affect the data, such as switching from Degrees
to Radians mode, or changing the value of a parameter in the formula.
You can force Calc to recompute the data from scratch by giving a
negative numeric prefix argument to ‘g p’.

   Calc uses a fairly rough step size when graphing formulas over
intervals.  This is to ensure quick response.  You can “refine” a plot
by giving a positive numeric prefix argument to ‘g p’.  Calc goes
through the data points it has computed and saved from previous plots of
the function, and computes and inserts a new data point midway between
each of the existing points.  You can refine a plot any number of times,
but beware that the amount of calculation involved doubles each time.

   Calc does not remember computed values for 3D graphs.  This means the
numerix prefix argument, if any, to ‘g p’ is effectively ignored if the
current graph is three-dimensional.

   The ‘g P’ (‘calc-graph-print’) command is like ‘g p’, except that it
sends the output to a printer instead of to the screen.  More precisely,
‘g p’ looks for ‘set terminal’ or ‘set output’ commands in the ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’ buffer; lacking these it uses the default settings.  However,
‘g P’ ignores ‘set terminal’ and ‘set output’ commands and uses a
different set of default values.  All of these values are controlled by
the ‘g D’ and ‘g O’ commands discussed below.  Provided everything is
set up properly, ‘g p’ will plot to the screen unless you have specified
otherwise and ‘g P’ will always plot to the printer.


File: calc.info,  Node: Graphics Options,  Next: Devices,  Prev: Managing Curves,  Up: Graphics

14.4 Graphics Options
=====================

The ‘g g’ (‘calc-graph-grid’) command turns the “grid” on and off.  It
is off by default; tick marks appear only at the edges of the graph.
With the grid turned on, dotted lines appear across the graph at each
tick mark.  Note that this command only changes the setting in ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’; to see the effects of the change you must give another ‘g p’
command.

   The ‘g b’ (‘calc-graph-border’) command turns the border (the box
that surrounds the graph) on and off.  It is on by default.  This
command will only work with GNUPLOT 3.0 and later versions.

   The ‘g k’ (‘calc-graph-key’) command turns the “key” on and off.  The
key is a chart in the corner of the graph that shows the correspondence
between curves and line styles.  It is off by default, and is only
really useful if you have several curves on the same graph.

   The ‘g N’ (‘calc-graph-num-points’) command allows you to select the
number of data points in the graph.  This only affects curves where
neither “x” nor “y” is specified as a vector.  Enter a blank line to
revert to the default value (initially 15).  With no prefix argument,
this command affects only the current graph.  With a positive prefix
argument this command changes or, if you enter a blank line, displays
the default number of points used for all graphs created by ‘g a’ that
don’t specify the resolution explicitly.  With a negative prefix
argument, this command changes or displays the default value (initially
5) used for 3D graphs created by ‘g A’.  Note that a 3D setting of 5
means that a total of ‘5^2 = 25’ points will be computed for the
surface.

   Data values in the graph of a function are normally computed to a
precision of five digits, regardless of the current precision at the
time.  This is usually more than adequate, but there are cases where it
will not be.  For example, plotting ‘1 + x’ with ‘x’ in the interval ‘[0
.. 1e-6]’ will round all the data points down to 1.0!  Putting the
command ‘set precision N’ in the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ buffer will cause
the data to be computed at precision N instead of 5.  Since this is such
a rare case, there is no keystroke-based command to set the precision.

   The ‘g h’ (‘calc-graph-header’) command sets the title for the graph.
This will show up centered above the graph.  The default title is blank
(no title).

   The ‘g n’ (‘calc-graph-name’) command sets the title of an individual
curve.  Like the other curve-manipulating commands, it affects the most
recently added curve, i.e., the last curve on the list in the ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’ buffer.  To set the title of the other curves you must first
juggle them to the end of the list with ‘g j’, or edit the ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’ buffer by hand.  Curve titles appear in the key; if the key
is turned off they are not used.

   The ‘g t’ (‘calc-graph-title-x’) and ‘g T’ (‘calc-graph-title-y’)
commands set the titles on the “x” and “y” axes, respectively.  These
titles appear next to the tick marks on the left and bottom edges of the
graph, respectively.  Calc does not have commands to control the tick
marks themselves, but you can edit them into the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’
buffer if you wish.  See the GNUPLOT documentation for details.

   The ‘g r’ (‘calc-graph-range-x’) and ‘g R’ (‘calc-graph-range-y’)
commands set the range of values on the “x” and “y” axes, respectively.
You are prompted to enter a suitable range.  This should be either a
pair of numbers of the form, ‘MIN:MAX’, or a blank line to revert to the
default behavior of setting the range based on the range of values in
the data, or ‘$’ to take the range from the top of the stack.  Ranges on
the stack can be represented as either interval forms or vectors: ‘[MIN
.. MAX]’ or ‘[MIN, MAX]’.

   The ‘g l’ (‘calc-graph-log-x’) and ‘g L’ (‘calc-graph-log-y’)
commands allow you to set either or both of the axes of the graph to be
logarithmic instead of linear.

   For 3D plots, ‘g C-t’, ‘g C-r’, and ‘g C-l’ (those are letters with
the Control key held down) are the corresponding commands for the “z”
axis.

   The ‘g z’ (‘calc-graph-zero-x’) and ‘g Z’ (‘calc-graph-zero-y’)
commands control whether a dotted line is drawn to indicate the “x”
and/or “y” zero axes.  (These are the same dotted lines that would be
drawn there anyway if you used ‘g g’ to turn the “grid” feature on.)
Zero-axis lines are on by default, and may be turned off only in GNUPLOT
3.0 and later versions.  They are not available for 3D plots.

   The ‘g s’ (‘calc-graph-line-style’) command turns the connecting
lines on or off for the most recently added curve, and optionally
selects the style of lines to be used for that curve.  Plain ‘g s’
simply toggles the lines on and off.  With a numeric prefix argument, ‘g
s’ turns lines on and sets a particular line style.  Line style numbers
start at one and their meanings vary depending on the output device.
GNUPLOT guarantees that there will be at least six different line styles
available for any device.

   The ‘g S’ (‘calc-graph-point-style’) command similarly turns the
symbols at the data points on or off, or sets the point style.  If you
turn both lines and points off, the data points will show as tiny dots.
If the “y” values being plotted contain error forms and the connecting
lines are turned off, then this command will also turn the error bars on
or off.

   Another way to specify curve styles is with the ‘LineStyles’ and
‘PointStyles’ variables.  These variables initially have no stored
values, but if you store a vector of integers in one of these variables,
the ‘g a’ and ‘g f’ commands will use those style numbers instead of the
defaults for new curves that are added to the graph.  An entry should be
a positive integer for a specific style, or 0 to let the style be chosen
automatically, or -1 to turn off lines or points altogether.  If there
are more curves than elements in the vector, the last few curves will
continue to have the default styles.  Of course, you can later use ‘g s’
and ‘g S’ to change any of these styles.

   For example, ‘'[2 -1 3] <RET> s t LineStyles’ causes the first curve
to have lines in style number 2, the second curve to have no connecting
lines, and the third curve to have lines in style 3.  Point styles will
still be assigned automatically, but you could store another vector in
‘PointStyles’ to define them, too.


File: calc.info,  Node: Devices,  Prev: Graphics Options,  Up: Graphics

14.5 Graphical Devices
======================

The ‘g D’ (‘calc-graph-device’) command sets the device name (or
“terminal name” in GNUPLOT lingo) to be used by ‘g p’ commands on this
graph.  It does not affect the permanent default device name.  If you
enter a blank name, the device name reverts to the default.  Enter ‘?’
to see a list of supported devices.

   With a positive numeric prefix argument, ‘g D’ instead sets the
default device name, used by all plots in the future which do not
override it with a plain ‘g D’ command.  If you enter a blank line this
command shows you the current default.  The special name ‘default’
signifies that Calc should choose ‘x11’ if the X window system is in use
(as indicated by the presence of a ‘DISPLAY’ environment variable),
‘windows’ on MS-Windows, or otherwise ‘dumb’ under GNUPLOT 3.0 and
later, or ‘postscript’ under GNUPLOT 2.0.  This is the initial default
value.

   The ‘dumb’ device is an interface to “dumb terminals,” i.e.,
terminals with no special graphics facilities.  It writes a crude
picture of the graph composed of characters like ‘-’ and ‘|’ to a buffer
called ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’, which Calc then displays.  The graph is made
the same size as the Emacs screen, which on most dumb terminals will be
80x24 characters.  The graph is displayed in an Emacs “recursive edit”;
type ‘q’ or ‘C-c C-c’ to exit the recursive edit and return to Calc.
Note that the ‘dumb’ device is present only in GNUPLOT 3.0 and later
versions.

   The word ‘dumb’ may be followed by two numbers separated by spaces.
These are the desired width and height of the graph in characters.
Also, the device name ‘big’ is like ‘dumb’ but creates a graph four
times the width and height of the Emacs screen.  You will then have to
scroll around to view the entire graph.  In the ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’
buffer, <SPC>, <DEL>, ‘<’, and ‘>’ are defined to scroll by one
screenful in each of the four directions.

   With a negative numeric prefix argument, ‘g D’ sets or displays the
device name used by ‘g P’ (‘calc-graph-print’).  This is initially
‘postscript’.  If you don’t have a PostScript printer, you may decide
once again to use ‘dumb’ to create a plot on any text-only printer.

   The ‘g O’ (‘calc-graph-output’) command sets the name of the output
file used by GNUPLOT.  For some devices, notably ‘x11’ and ‘windows’,
there is no output file and this information is not used.  Many other
“devices” are really file formats like ‘postscript’; in these cases the
output in the desired format goes into the file you name with ‘g O’.
Type ‘g O stdout <RET>’ to set GNUPLOT to write to its standard output
stream, i.e., to ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’.  This is the default setting.

   Another special output name is ‘tty’, which means that GNUPLOT is
going to write graphics commands directly to its standard output, which
you wish Emacs to pass through to your terminal.  Tektronix graphics
terminals, among other devices, operate this way.  Calc does this by
telling GNUPLOT to write to a temporary file, then running a sub-shell
executing the command ‘cat tempfile >/dev/tty’.  On typical Unix
systems, this will copy the temporary file directly to the terminal,
bypassing Emacs entirely.  You will have to type ‘C-l’ to Emacs
afterwards to refresh the screen.

   Once again, ‘g O’ with a positive or negative prefix argument sets
the default or printer output file names, respectively.  In each case
you can specify ‘auto’, which causes Calc to invent a temporary file
name for each ‘g p’ (or ‘g P’) command.  This temporary file will be
deleted once it has been displayed or printed.  If the output file name
is not ‘auto’, the file is not automatically deleted.

   The default and printer devices and output files can be saved
permanently by the ‘m m’ (‘calc-save-modes’) command.  The default
number of data points (see ‘g N’) and the X geometry (see ‘g X’) are
also saved.  Other graph information is _not_ saved; you can save a
graph’s configuration simply by saving the contents of the ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’ buffer.

   You may wish to configure the default and printer devices and output
files for the whole system.  The relevant Lisp variables are
‘calc-gnuplot-default-device’ and ‘-output’, and
‘calc-gnuplot-print-device’ and ‘-output’.  The output file names must
be either strings as described above, or Lisp expressions which are
evaluated on the fly to get the output file names.

   Other important Lisp variables are ‘calc-gnuplot-plot-command’ and
‘calc-gnuplot-print-command’, which give the system commands to display
or print the output of GNUPLOT, respectively.  These may be ‘nil’ if no
command is necessary, or strings which can include ‘%s’ to signify the
name of the file to be displayed or printed.  Or, these variables may
contain Lisp expressions which are evaluated to display or print the
output.  These variables are customizable (*note Customizing Calc::).

   The ‘g x’ (‘calc-graph-display’) command lets you specify on which X
window system display your graphs should be drawn.  Enter a blank line
to see the current display name.  This command has no effect unless the
current device is ‘x11’.

   The ‘g X’ (‘calc-graph-geometry’) command is a similar command for
specifying the position and size of the X window.  The normal value is
‘default’, which generally means your window manager will let you place
the window interactively.  Entering ‘800x500+0+0’ would create an
800-by-500 pixel window in the upper-left corner of the screen.  This
command has no effect if the current device is ‘windows’.

   The buffer called ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’ holds a transcript of the session
with GNUPLOT.  This shows the commands Calc has “typed” to GNUPLOT and
the responses it has received.  Calc tries to notice when an error
message has appeared here and display the buffer for you when this
happens.  You can check this buffer yourself if you suspect something
has gone wrong(1).

   The ‘g C’ (‘calc-graph-command’) command prompts you to enter any
line of text, then simply sends that line to the current GNUPLOT
process.  The ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’ buffer looks deceptively like a Shell
buffer but you can’t type commands in it yourself.  Instead, you must
use ‘g C’ for this purpose.

   The ‘g v’ (‘calc-graph-view-commands’) and ‘g V’
(‘calc-graph-view-trail’) commands display the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ and
‘*Gnuplot Trail*’ buffers, respectively, in another window.  This
happens automatically when Calc thinks there is something you will want
to see in either of these buffers.  If you type ‘g v’ or ‘g V’ when the
relevant buffer is already displayed, the buffer is hidden again.  (Note
that on MS-Windows, the ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’ buffer will usually show
nothing of interest, because GNUPLOT’s responses are not communicated
back to Calc.)

   One reason to use ‘g v’ is to add your own commands to the ‘*Gnuplot
Commands*’ buffer.  Press ‘g v’, then use ‘C-x o’ to switch into that
window.  For example, GNUPLOT has ‘set label’ and ‘set arrow’ commands
that allow you to annotate your plots.  Since Calc doesn’t understand
these commands, you have to add them to the ‘*Gnuplot Commands*’ buffer
yourself, then use ‘g p’ to replot using these new commands.  Note that
your commands must appear _before_ the ‘plot’ command.  To get help on
any GNUPLOT feature, type, e.g., ‘g C help set label’.  You may have to
type ‘g C <RET>’ a few times to clear the “press return for more” or
“subtopic of ...” requests.  Note that Calc always sends commands (like
‘set nolabel’) to reset all plotting parameters to the defaults before
each plot, so to delete a label all you need to do is delete the ‘set
label’ line you added (or comment it out with ‘#’) and then replot with
‘g p’.

   You can use ‘g q’ (‘calc-graph-quit’) to kill the GNUPLOT process
that is running.  The next graphing command you give will start a fresh
GNUPLOT process.  The word ‘Graph’ appears in the Calc window’s mode
line whenever a GNUPLOT process is currently running.  The GNUPLOT
process is automatically killed when you exit Emacs if you haven’t
killed it manually by then.

   The ‘g K’ (‘calc-graph-kill’) command is like ‘g q’ except that it
also views the ‘*Gnuplot Trail*’ buffer so that you can see the process
being killed.  This is better if you are killing GNUPLOT because you
think it has gotten stuck.

   ---------- Footnotes ----------

   (1) On MS-Windows, due to the peculiarities of how the Windows
version of GNUPLOT (called ‘wgnuplot’) works, the GNUPLOT responses are
not communicated back to Calc.  Instead, you need to look them up in the
GNUPLOT command window that is displayed as in normal interactive usage
of GNUPLOT.


File: calc.info,  Node: Kill and Yank,  Next: Keypad Mode,  Prev: Graphics,  Up: Top

15 Kill and Yank Functions
**************************

The commands in this chapter move information between the Calculator and
other Emacs editing buffers.

   In many cases Embedded mode is an easier and more natural way to work
with Calc from a regular editing buffer.  *Note Embedded Mode::.

* Menu:

* Killing From Stack::
* Yanking Into Stack::
* Saving Into Registers::
* Inserting From Registers::
* Grabbing From Buffers::
* Yanking Into Buffers::
* X Cut and Paste::


File: calc.info,  Node: Killing From Stack,  Next: Yanking Into Stack,  Prev: Kill and Yank,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.1 Killing from the Stack
===========================

“Kill” commands are Emacs commands that insert text into the “kill
ring,” from which it can later be “yanked” by a ‘C-y’ command.  Three
common kill commands in normal Emacs are ‘C-k’, which kills one line,
‘C-w’, which kills the region between mark and point, and ‘M-w’, which
puts the region into the kill ring without actually deleting it.  All of
these commands work in the Calculator, too, although in the Calculator
they operate on whole stack entries, so they “round up” the specified
region to encompass full lines.  (To copy only parts of lines, the
‘M-C-w’ command in the Calculator will copy the region to the kill ring
without any “rounding up”, just like the ‘M-w’ command in normal Emacs.)
Also, ‘M-k’ has been provided to complete the set; it puts the current
line into the kill ring without deleting anything.

   The kill commands are unusual in that they pay attention to the
location of the cursor in the Calculator buffer.  If the cursor is on or
below the bottom line, the kill commands operate on the top of the
stack.  Otherwise, they operate on whatever stack element the cursor is
on.  The text is copied into the kill ring exactly as it appears on the
screen, including line numbers if they are enabled.

   A numeric prefix argument to ‘C-k’ or ‘M-k’ affects the number of
lines killed.  A positive argument kills the current line and ‘n-1’
lines below it.  A negative argument kills the ‘-n’ lines above the
current line.  Again this mirrors the behavior of the standard Emacs
‘C-k’ command.  Although a whole line is always deleted, ‘C-k’ with no
argument copies only the number itself into the kill ring, whereas ‘C-k’
with a prefix argument of 1 copies the number with its trailing newline.


File: calc.info,  Node: Yanking Into Stack,  Next: Saving Into Registers,  Prev: Killing From Stack,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.2 Yanking into the Stack
===========================

The ‘C-y’ command yanks the most recently killed text back into the
Calculator.  It pushes this value onto the top of the stack regardless
of the cursor position.  In general it re-parses the killed text as a
number or formula (or a list of these separated by commas or newlines).
However if the thing being yanked is something that was just killed from
the Calculator itself, its full internal structure is yanked.  For
example, if you have set the floating-point display mode to show only
four significant digits, then killing and re-yanking 3.14159 (which
displays as 3.142) will yank the full 3.14159, even though yanking it
into any other buffer would yank the number in its displayed form,
3.142.  (Since the default display modes show all objects to their full
precision, this feature normally makes no difference.)

   The ‘C-y’ command can be given a prefix, which will interpret the
text being yanked with a different radix.  If the text being yanked can
be interpreted as a binary, octal, hexadecimal, or decimal number, then
a prefix of ‘2’, ‘8’, ‘6’ or ‘0’ will have Calc interpret the yanked
text as a number in the appropriate base.  For example, if ‘111’ has
just been killed and is yanked into Calc with a command of ‘C-2 C-y’,
then the number ‘7’ will be put on the stack.  If you use the plain
prefix ‘C-u’, then you will be prompted for a base to use, which can be
any integer from 2 to 36.  If Calc doesn’t allow the text being yanked
to be read in a different base (such as if the text is an algebraic
expression), then the prefix will have no effect.


File: calc.info,  Node: Saving Into Registers,  Next: Inserting From Registers,  Prev: Yanking Into Stack,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.3 Saving into Registers
==========================

An alternative to killing and yanking stack entries is using registers
in Calc.  Saving stack entries in registers is like saving text in
normal Emacs registers; although, like Calc’s kill commands, register
commands always operate on whole stack entries.

   Registers in Calc are places to store stack entries for later use;
each register is indexed by a single character.  To store the current
region (rounded up, of course, to include full stack entries) into a
register, use the command ‘r s’ (‘calc-copy-to-register’).  You will
then be prompted for a register to use, the next character you type will
be the index for the register.  To store the region in register R, the
full command will be ‘r s R’.  With an argument, ‘C-u r s R’, the region
being copied to the register will be deleted from the Calc buffer.

   It is possible to add additional stack entries to a register.  The
command ‘M-x calc-append-to-register’ will prompt for a register, then
add the stack entries in the region to the end of the register contents.
The command ‘M-x calc-prepend-to-register’ will similarly prompt for a
register and add the stack entries in the region to the beginning of the
register contents.  Both commands take ‘C-u’ arguments, which will cause
the region to be deleted after being added to the register.


File: calc.info,  Node: Inserting From Registers,  Next: Grabbing From Buffers,  Prev: Saving Into Registers,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.4 Inserting from Registers
=============================

The command ‘r i’ (‘calc-insert-register’) will prompt for a register,
then insert the contents of that register into the Calculator.  If the
contents of the register were placed there from within Calc, then the
full internal structure of the contents will be inserted into the
Calculator, otherwise whatever text is in the register is reparsed and
then inserted into the Calculator.


File: calc.info,  Node: Grabbing From Buffers,  Next: Yanking Into Buffers,  Prev: Inserting From Registers,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.5 Grabbing from Other Buffers
================================

The ‘C-x * g’ (‘calc-grab-region’) command takes the text between point
and mark in the current buffer and attempts to parse it as a vector of
values.  Basically, it wraps the text in vector brackets ‘[ ]’ unless
the text already is enclosed in vector brackets, then reads the text as
if it were an algebraic entry.  The contents of the vector may be
numbers, formulas, or any other Calc objects.  If the ‘C-x * g’ command
works successfully, it does an automatic ‘C-x * c’ to enter the
Calculator buffer.

   A numeric prefix argument grabs the specified number of lines around
point, ignoring the mark.  A positive prefix grabs from point to the
‘n’th following newline (so that ‘M-1 C-x * g’ grabs from point to the
end of the current line); a negative prefix grabs from point back to the
‘n+1’st preceding newline.  In these cases the text that is grabbed is
exactly the same as the text that ‘C-k’ would delete given that prefix
argument.

   A prefix of zero grabs the current line; point may be anywhere on the
line.

   A plain ‘C-u’ prefix interprets the region between point and mark as
a single number or formula rather than a vector.  For example, ‘C-x * g’
on the text ‘2 a b’ produces the vector of three values ‘[2, a, b]’, but
‘C-u C-x * g’ on the same region reads a formula which is a product of
three things: ‘2 a b’.  (The text ‘a + b’, on the other hand, will be
grabbed as a vector of one element by plain ‘C-x * g’ because the
interpretation ‘[a, +, b]’ would be a syntax error.)

   If a different language has been specified (*note Language Modes::),
the grabbed text will be interpreted according to that language.

   The ‘C-x * r’ (‘calc-grab-rectangle’) command takes the text between
point and mark and attempts to parse it as a matrix.  If point and mark
are both in the leftmost column, the lines in between are parsed in
their entirety.  Otherwise, point and mark define the corners of a
rectangle whose contents are parsed.

   Each line of the grabbed area becomes a row of the matrix.  The
result will actually be a vector of vectors, which Calc will treat as a
matrix only if every row contains the same number of values.

   If a line contains a portion surrounded by square brackets (or curly
braces), that portion is interpreted as a vector which becomes a row of
the matrix.  Any text surrounding the bracketed portion on the line is
ignored.

   Otherwise, the entire line is interpreted as a row vector as if it
were surrounded by square brackets.  Leading line numbers (in the format
used in the Calc stack buffer) are ignored.  If you wish to force this
interpretation (even if the line contains bracketed portions), give a
negative numeric prefix argument to the ‘C-x * r’ command.

   If you give a numeric prefix argument of zero or plain ‘C-u’, each
line is instead interpreted as a single formula which is converted into
a one-element vector.  Thus the result of ‘C-u C-x * r’ will be a
one-column matrix.  For example, suppose one line of the data is the
expression ‘2 a’.  A plain ‘C-x * r’ will interpret this as ‘[2 a]’,
which in turn is read as a two-element vector that forms one row of the
matrix.  But a ‘C-u C-x * r’ will interpret this row as ‘[2*a]’.

   If you give a positive numeric prefix argument N, then each line will
be split up into columns of width N; each column is parsed separately as
a matrix element.  If a line contained ‘2 +/- 3 4 +/- 5’, then grabbing
with a prefix argument of 8 would correctly split the line into two
error forms.

   *Note Matrix Functions::, to see how to pull the matrix apart into
its constituent rows and columns.  (If it is a 1x1 matrix, just hit ‘v
u’ (‘calc-unpack’) twice.)

   The ‘C-x * :’ (‘calc-grab-sum-down’) command is a handy way to grab a
rectangle of data and sum its columns.  It is equivalent to typing ‘C-x
* r’, followed by ‘V R : +’ (the vector reduction command that sums the
columns of a matrix; *note Reducing::).  The result of the command will
be a vector of numbers, one for each column in the input data.  The ‘C-x
* _’ (‘calc-grab-sum-across’) command similarly grabs a rectangle and
sums its rows by executing ‘V R _ +’.

   As well as being more convenient, ‘C-x * :’ and ‘C-x * _’ are also
much faster because they don’t actually place the grabbed vector on the
stack.  In a ‘C-x * r V R : +’ sequence, formatting the vector for
display on the stack takes a large fraction of the total time (unless
you have planned ahead and used ‘v .’ and ‘t .’ modes).

   For example, suppose we have a column of numbers in a file which we
wish to sum.  Go to one corner of the column and press ‘C-@’ to set the
mark; go to the other corner and type ‘C-x * :’.  Since there is only
one column, the result will be a vector of one number, the sum.  (You
can type ‘v u’ to unpack this vector into a plain number if you want to
do further arithmetic with it.)

   To compute the product of the column of numbers, we would have to do
it “by hand” since there’s no special grab-and-multiply command.  Use
‘C-x * r’ to grab the column of numbers into the calculator in the form
of a column matrix.  The statistics command ‘u *’ is a handy way to find
the product of a vector or matrix of numbers.  *Note Statistical
Operations::.  Another approach would be to use an explicit column
reduction command, ‘V R : *’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Yanking Into Buffers,  Next: X Cut and Paste,  Prev: Grabbing From Buffers,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.6 Yanking into Other Buffers
===============================

The plain ‘y’ (‘calc-copy-to-buffer’) command inserts the number at the
top of the stack into the most recently used normal editing buffer.
(More specifically, this is the most recently used buffer which is
displayed in a window and whose name does not begin with ‘*’.  If there
is no such buffer, this is the most recently used buffer except for
Calculator and Calc Trail buffers.)  The number is inserted exactly as
it appears and without a newline.  (If line-numbering is enabled, the
line number is normally not included.)  The number is _not_ removed from
the stack.

   With a prefix argument, ‘y’ inserts several numbers, one per line.  A
positive argument inserts the specified number of values from the top of
the stack.  A negative argument inserts the ‘n’th value from the top of
the stack.  An argument of zero inserts the entire stack.  Note that ‘y’
with an argument of 1 is slightly different from ‘y’ with no argument;
the former always copies full lines, whereas the latter strips off the
trailing newline.

   With a lone ‘C-u’ as a prefix argument, ‘y’ _replaces_ the region in
the other buffer with the yanked text, then quits the Calculator,
leaving you in that buffer.  A typical use would be to use ‘C-x * g’ to
read a region of data into the Calculator, operate on the data to
produce a new matrix, then type ‘C-u y’ to replace the original data
with the new data.  One might wish to alter the matrix display style
(*note Vector and Matrix Formats::) or change the current display
language (*note Language Modes::) before doing this.  Also, note that
this command replaces a linear region of text (as grabbed by ‘C-x * g’),
not a rectangle (as grabbed by ‘C-x * r’).

   If the editing buffer is in overwrite (as opposed to insert) mode,
and the ‘C-u’ prefix was not used, then the yanked number will overwrite
the characters following point rather than being inserted before those
characters.  The usual conventions of overwrite mode are observed; for
example, characters will be inserted at the end of a line rather than
overflowing onto the next line.  Yanking a multi-line object such as a
matrix in overwrite mode overwrites the next N lines in the buffer,
lengthening or shortening each line as necessary.  Finally, if the thing
being yanked is a simple integer or floating-point number (like
‘-1.2345e-3’) and the characters following point also make up such a
number, then Calc will replace that number with the new number,
lengthening or shortening as necessary.  The concept of “overwrite mode”
has thus been generalized from overwriting characters to overwriting one
complete number with another.

   The ‘C-x * y’ key sequence is equivalent to ‘y’ except that it can be
typed anywhere, not just in Calc.  This provides an easy way to
guarantee that Calc knows which editing buffer you want to use!


File: calc.info,  Node: X Cut and Paste,  Prev: Yanking Into Buffers,  Up: Kill and Yank

15.7 X Cut and Paste
====================

If you are using Emacs with the X window system, there is an easier way
to move small amounts of data into and out of the calculator: Use the
mouse-oriented cut and paste facilities of X.

   The default bindings for a three-button mouse cause the left button
to move the Emacs cursor to the given place, the right button to select
the text between the cursor and the clicked location, and the middle
button to yank the selection into the buffer at the clicked location.
So, if you have a Calc window and an editing window on your Emacs
screen, you can use left-click/right-click to select a number, vector,
or formula from one window, then middle-click to paste that value into
the other window.  When you paste text into the Calc window, Calc
interprets it as an algebraic entry.  It doesn’t matter where you click
in the Calc window; the new value is always pushed onto the top of the
stack.

   The ‘xterm’ program that is typically used for general-purpose shell
windows in X interprets the mouse buttons in the same way.  So you can
use the mouse to move data between Calc and any other Unix program.  One
nice feature of ‘xterm’ is that a double left-click selects one word,
and a triple left-click selects a whole line.  So you can usually
transfer a single number into Calc just by double-clicking on it in the
shell, then middle-clicking in the Calc window.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Mode,  Next: Embedded Mode,  Prev: Kill and Yank,  Up: Top

16 Keypad Mode
**************

The ‘C-x * k’ (‘calc-keypad’) command starts the Calculator and displays
a picture of a calculator-style keypad.  If you are using the X window
system, you can click on any of the “keys” in the keypad using the left
mouse button to operate the calculator.  The original window remains the
selected window; in Keypad mode you can type in your file while
simultaneously performing calculations with the mouse.

   If you have used ‘C-x * b’ first, ‘C-x * k’ instead invokes the
‘full-calc-keypad’ command, which takes over the whole Emacs screen and
displays the keypad, the Calc stack, and the Calc trail all at once.
This mode would normally be used when running Calc standalone (*note
Standalone Operation::).

   If you aren’t using the X window system, you must switch into the
‘*Calc Keypad*’ window, place the cursor on the desired “key,” and type
<SPC> or <RET>.  If you think this is easier than using Calc normally,
go right ahead.

   Calc commands are more or less the same in Keypad mode.  Certain
keypad keys differ slightly from the corresponding normal Calc
keystrokes; all such deviations are described below.

   Keypad mode includes many more commands than will fit on the keypad
at once.  Click the right mouse button [‘calc-keypad-menu’] to switch to
the next menu.  The bottom five rows of the keypad stay the same; the
top three rows change to a new set of commands.  To return to earlier
menus, click the middle mouse button [‘calc-keypad-menu-back’] or simply
advance through the menus until you wrap around.  Typing <TAB> inside
the keypad window is equivalent to clicking the right mouse button
there.

   You can always click the <EXEC> button and type any normal Calc key
sequence.  This is equivalent to switching into the Calc buffer, typing
the keys, then switching back to your original buffer.

* Menu:

* Keypad Main Menu::
* Keypad Functions Menu::
* Keypad Binary Menu::
* Keypad Vectors Menu::
* Keypad Modes Menu::


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Main Menu,  Next: Keypad Functions Menu,  Prev: Keypad Mode,  Up: Keypad Mode

16.1 Main Menu
==============

     |----+----+--Calc---+----+----1
     |FLR |CEIL|RND |TRNC|CLN2|FLT |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     | LN |EXP |    |ABS |IDIV|MOD |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |SIN |COS |TAN |SQRT|y^x |1/x |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |  ENTER  |+/- |EEX |UNDO| <- |
     |-----+---+-+--+--+-+---++----|
     | INV |  7  |  8  |  9  |  /  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     | HYP |  4  |  5  |  6  |  *  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     |EXEC |  1  |  2  |  3  |  -  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----|
     | OFF |  0  |  .  | PI  |  +  |
     |-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+

This is the menu that appears the first time you start Keypad mode.  It
will show up in a vertical window on the right side of your screen.
Above this menu is the traditional Calc stack display.  On a 24-line
screen you will be able to see the top three stack entries.

   The ten digit keys, decimal point, and <EEX> key are used for
entering numbers in the obvious way.  <EEX> begins entry of an exponent
in scientific notation.  Just as with regular Calc, the number is pushed
onto the stack as soon as you press <ENTER> or any other function key.

   The <+/-> key corresponds to normal Calc’s ‘n’ key.  During numeric
entry it changes the sign of the number or of the exponent.  At other
times it changes the sign of the number on the top of the stack.

   The <INV> and <HYP> keys modify other keys.  As well as having the
effects described elsewhere in this manual, Keypad mode defines several
other “inverse” operations.  These are described below and in the
following sections.

   The <ENTER> key finishes the current numeric entry, or otherwise
duplicates the top entry on the stack.

   The <UNDO> key undoes the most recent Calc operation.  ‘INV UNDO’ is
the “redo” command, and ‘HYP UNDO’ is “last arguments” (‘M-<RET>’).

   The <<-> key acts as a “backspace” during numeric entry.  At other
times it removes the top stack entry.  ‘INV <-’ clears the entire stack.
‘HYP <-’ takes an integer from the stack, then removes that many
additional stack elements.

   The <EXEC> key prompts you to enter any keystroke sequence that would
normally work in Calc mode.  This can include a numeric prefix if you
wish.  It is also possible simply to switch into the Calc window and
type commands in it; there is nothing “magic” about this window when
Keypad mode is active.

   The other keys in this display perform their obvious calculator
functions.  <CLN2> rounds the top-of-stack by temporarily reducing the
precision by 2 digits.  <FLT> converts an integer or fraction on the top
of the stack to floating-point.

   The <INV> and <HYP> keys combined with several of these keys give you
access to some common functions even if the appropriate menu is not
displayed.  Obviously you don’t need to learn these keys unless you find
yourself wasting time switching among the menus.

‘INV +/-’
     is the same as <1/x>.
‘INV +’
     is the same as <SQRT>.
‘INV -’
     is the same as <CONJ>.
‘INV *’
     is the same as <y^x>.
‘INV /’
     is the same as ‘INV y^x’ (the ‘x’th root of ‘y’).
‘HYP/INV 1’
     are the same as <SIN> / ‘INV SIN’.
‘HYP/INV 2’
     are the same as <COS> / ‘INV COS’.
‘HYP/INV 3’
     are the same as <TAN> / ‘INV TAN’.
‘INV/HYP 4’
     are the same as <LN> / ‘HYP LN’.
‘INV/HYP 5’
     are the same as <EXP> / ‘HYP EXP’.
‘INV 6’
     is the same as <ABS>.
‘INV 7’
     is the same as <RND> (‘calc-round’).
‘INV 8’
     is the same as <CLN2>.
‘INV 9’
     is the same as <FLT> (‘calc-float’).
‘INV 0’
     is the same as <IMAG>.
‘INV .’
     is the same as <PREC>.
‘INV ENTER’
     is the same as <SWAP>.
‘HYP ENTER’
     is the same as <RLL3>.
‘INV HYP ENTER’
     is the same as <OVER>.
‘HYP +/-’
     packs the top two stack entries as an error form.
‘HYP EEX’
     packs the top two stack entries as a modulo form.
‘INV EEX’
     creates an interval form; this removes an integer which is one of 0
     ‘[]’, 1 ‘[)’, 2 ‘(]’ or 3 ‘()’, followed by the two limits of the
     interval.

   The ‘OFF’ key turns Calc off; typing ‘C-x * k’ or ‘C-x * *’ again has
the same effect.  This is analogous to typing ‘q’ or hitting ‘C-x * c’
again in the normal calculator.  If Calc is running standalone (the
‘full-calc-keypad’ command appeared in the command line that started
Emacs), then ‘OFF’ is replaced with ‘EXIT’; clicking on this actually
exits Emacs itself.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Functions Menu,  Next: Keypad Binary Menu,  Prev: Keypad Main Menu,  Up: Keypad Mode

16.2 Functions Menu
===================

     |----+----+----+----+----+----2
     |IGAM|BETA|IBET|ERF |BESJ|BESY|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |IMAG|CONJ| RE |ATN2|RAND|RAGN|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |GCD |FACT|DFCT|BNOM|PERM|NXTP|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|

This menu provides various operations from the ‘f’ and ‘k’ prefix keys.

   <IMAG> multiplies the number on the stack by the imaginary number ‘i
= (0, 1)’.

   <RE> extracts the real part a complex number.  ‘INV RE’ extracts the
imaginary part.

   <RAND> takes a number from the top of the stack and computes a random
number greater than or equal to zero but less than that number.  (*Note
Random Numbers::.)  <RAGN> is the “random again” command; it computes
another random number using the same limit as last time.

   ‘INV GCD’ computes the LCM (least common multiple) function.

   ‘INV FACT’ is the gamma function.  ‘gamma(x) = (x-1)!’.

   <PERM> is the number-of-permutations function, which is on the ‘H k
c’ key in normal Calc.

   <NXTP> finds the next prime after a number.  ‘INV NXTP’ finds the
previous prime.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Binary Menu,  Next: Keypad Vectors Menu,  Prev: Keypad Functions Menu,  Up: Keypad Mode

16.3 Binary Menu
================

     |----+----+----+----+----+----3
     |AND | OR |XOR |NOT |LSH |RSH |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |DEC |HEX |OCT |BIN |WSIZ|ARSH|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     | A  | B  | C  | D  | E  | F  |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|

The keys in this menu perform operations on binary integers.  Note that
both logical and arithmetic right-shifts are provided.  ‘INV LSH’
rotates one bit to the left.

   The “difference” function (normally on ‘b d’) is on ‘INV AND’.  The
“clip” function (normally on ‘b c’) is on ‘INV NOT’.

   The <DEC>, <HEX>, <OCT>, and <BIN> keys select the current radix for
display and entry of numbers: Decimal, hexadecimal, octal, or binary.
The six letter keys ‘A’ through ‘F’ are used for entering hexadecimal
numbers.

   The <WSIZ> key displays the current word size for binary operations
and allows you to enter a new word size.  You can respond to the prompt
using either the keyboard or the digits and <ENTER> from the keypad.
The initial word size is 32 bits.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Vectors Menu,  Next: Keypad Modes Menu,  Prev: Keypad Binary Menu,  Up: Keypad Mode

16.4 Vectors Menu
=================

     |----+----+----+----+----+----4
     |SUM |PROD|MAX |MAP*|MAP^|MAP$|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |MINV|MDET|MTRN|IDNT|CRSS|"x" |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |PACK|UNPK|INDX|BLD |LEN |... |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|

The keys in this menu operate on vectors and matrices.

   <PACK> removes an integer N from the top of the stack; the next N
stack elements are removed and packed into a vector, which is replaced
onto the stack.  Thus the sequence ‘1 ENTER 3 ENTER 5 ENTER 3 PACK’
enters the vector ‘[1, 3, 5]’ onto the stack.  To enter a matrix, build
each row on the stack as a vector, then use a final <PACK> to collect
the rows into a matrix.

   <UNPK> unpacks the vector on the stack, pushing each of its
components separately.

   <INDX> removes an integer N, then builds a vector of integers from 1
to N.  ‘INV INDX’ takes three numbers from the stack: The vector size N,
the starting number, and the increment.  ‘BLD’ takes an integer N and
any value X and builds a vector of N copies of X.

   <IDNT> removes an integer N, then builds an N-by-N identity matrix.

   <LEN> replaces a vector by its length, an integer.

   <...> turns on or off “abbreviated” display mode for large vectors.

   <MINV>, <MDET>, <MTRN>, and <CROSS> are the matrix inverse,
determinant, and transpose, and vector cross product.

   <SUM> replaces a vector by the sum of its elements.  It is equivalent
to ‘u +’ in normal Calc (*note Statistical Operations::).  <PROD>
computes the product of the elements of a vector, and <MAX> computes the
maximum of all the elements of a vector.

   ‘INV SUM’ computes the alternating sum of the first element minus the
second, plus the third, minus the fourth, and so on.  ‘INV MAX’ computes
the minimum of the vector elements.

   ‘HYP SUM’ computes the mean of the vector elements.  ‘HYP PROD’
computes the sample standard deviation.  ‘HYP MAX’ computes the median.

   <MAP*> multiplies two vectors elementwise.  It is equivalent to the
‘V M *’ command.  <MAP^> computes powers elementwise.  The arguments
must be vectors of equal length, or one must be a vector and the other
must be a plain number.  For example, ‘2 MAP^’ squares all the elements
of a vector.

   <MAP$> maps the formula on the top of the stack across the vector in
the second-to-top position.  If the formula contains several variables,
Calc takes that many vectors starting at the second-to-top position and
matches them to the variables in alphabetical order.  The result is a
vector of the same size as the input vectors, whose elements are the
formula evaluated with the variables set to the various sets of numbers
in those vectors.  For example, you could simulate <MAP^> using <MAP$>
with the formula ‘x^y’.

   The ‘"x"’ key pushes the variable name ‘x’ onto the stack.  To build
the formula ‘x^2 + 6’, you would use the key sequence ‘"x" 2 y^x 6 +’.
This formula would then be suitable for use with the <MAP$> key
described above.  With <INV>, <HYP>, or <INV> and <HYP>, the ‘"x"’ key
pushes the variable names ‘y’, ‘z’, and ‘t’, respectively.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keypad Modes Menu,  Prev: Keypad Vectors Menu,  Up: Keypad Mode

16.5 Modes Menu
===============

     |----+----+----+----+----+----5
     |FLT |FIX |SCI |ENG |GRP |    |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |RAD |DEG |FRAC|POLR|SYMB|PREC|
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|
     |SWAP|RLL3|RLL4|OVER|STO |RCL |
     |----+----+----+----+----+----|

The keys in this menu manipulate modes, variables, and the stack.

   The <FLT>, <FIX>, <SCI>, and <ENG> keys select floating-point,
fixed-point, scientific, or engineering notation.  <FIX> displays two
digits after the decimal by default; the others display full precision.
With the <INV> prefix, these keys pop a number-of-digits argument from
the stack.

   The <GRP> key turns grouping of digits with commas on or off.  ‘INV
GRP’ enables grouping to the right of the decimal point as well as to
the left.

   The <RAD> and <DEG> keys switch between radians and degrees for
trigonometric functions.

   The <FRAC> key turns Fraction mode on or off.  This affects whether
commands like ‘/’ with integer arguments produce fractional or
floating-point results.

   The <POLR> key turns Polar mode on or off, determining whether polar
or rectangular complex numbers are used by default.

   The <SYMB> key turns Symbolic mode on or off, in which operations
that would produce inexact floating-point results are left unevaluated
as algebraic formulas.

   The <PREC> key selects the current precision.  Answer with the
keyboard or with the keypad digit and <ENTER> keys.

   The <SWAP> key exchanges the top two stack elements.  The <RLL3> key
rotates the top three stack elements upwards.  The <RLL4> key rotates
the top four stack elements upwards.  The <OVER> key duplicates the
second-to-top stack element.

   The <STO> and <RCL> keys are analogous to ‘s t’ and ‘s r’ in regular
Calc.  *Note Store and Recall::.  Click the <STO> or <RCL> key, then one
of the ten digits.  (Named variables are not available in Keypad mode.)
You can also use, for example, ‘STO + 3’ to add to register 3.


File: calc.info,  Node: Embedded Mode,  Next: Programming,  Prev: Keypad Mode,  Up: Top

17 Embedded Mode
****************

Embedded mode in Calc provides an alternative to copying numbers and
formulas back and forth between editing buffers and the Calc stack.  In
Embedded mode, your editing buffer becomes temporarily linked to the
stack and this copying is taken care of automatically.

* Menu:

* Basic Embedded Mode::
* More About Embedded Mode::
* Assignments in Embedded Mode::
* Mode Settings in Embedded Mode::
* Customizing Embedded Mode::


File: calc.info,  Node: Basic Embedded Mode,  Next: More About Embedded Mode,  Prev: Embedded Mode,  Up: Embedded Mode

17.1 Basic Embedded Mode
========================

To enter Embedded mode, position the Emacs point (cursor) on a formula
in any buffer and press ‘C-x * e’ (‘calc-embedded’).  Note that ‘C-x *
e’ is not to be used in the Calc stack buffer like most Calc commands,
but rather in regular editing buffers that are visiting your own files.

   Calc will try to guess an appropriate language based on the major
mode of the editing buffer.  (*Note Language Modes::.)  If the current
buffer is in ‘latex-mode’, for example, Calc will set its language to
LaTeX.  Similarly, Calc will use TeX language for ‘tex-mode’,
‘plain-tex-mode’ and ‘context-mode’, C language for ‘c-mode’ and
‘c++-mode’, FORTRAN language for ‘fortran-mode’ and ‘f90-mode’, Pascal
for ‘pascal-mode’, and eqn for ‘nroff-mode’ (*note Customizing Calc::).
These can be overridden with Calc’s mode changing commands (*note Mode
Settings in Embedded Mode::).  If no suitable language is available,
Calc will continue with its current language.

   Calc normally scans backward and forward in the buffer for the
nearest opening and closing “formula delimiters”.  The simplest
delimiters are blank lines.  Other delimiters that Embedded mode
understands are:

  1. The TeX and LaTeX math delimiters ‘$ $’, ‘$$ $$’, ‘\[ \]’, and ‘\(
     \)’;
  2. Lines beginning with ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ (except matrix
     delimiters);
  3. Lines beginning with ‘@’ (Texinfo delimiters).
  4. Lines beginning with ‘.EQ’ and ‘.EN’ (“eqn” delimiters);
  5. Lines containing a single ‘%’ or ‘.\"’ symbol and nothing else.

   *Note Customizing Embedded Mode::, to see how to make Calc recognize
your own favorite delimiters.  Delimiters like ‘$ $’ can appear on their
own separate lines or in-line with the formula.

   If you give a positive or negative numeric prefix argument, Calc
instead uses the current point as one end of the formula, and includes
that many lines forward or backward (respectively, including the current
line).  Explicit delimiters are not necessary in this case.

   With a prefix argument of zero, Calc uses the current region
(delimited by point and mark) instead of formula delimiters.  With a
prefix argument of ‘C-u’ only, Calc uses the current line as the
formula.

   The ‘C-x * w’ (‘calc-embedded-word’) command will start Embedded mode
on the current “word”; in this case Calc will scan for the first
non-numeric character (i.e., the first character that is not a digit,
sign, decimal point, or upper- or lower-case ‘e’) forward and backward
to delimit the formula.

   When you enable Embedded mode for a formula, Calc reads the text
between the delimiters and tries to interpret it as a Calc formula.
Calc can generally identify TeX formulas and Big-style formulas even if
the language mode is wrong.  If Calc can’t make sense of the formula, it
beeps and refuses to enter Embedded mode.  But if the current language
is wrong, Calc can sometimes parse the formula successfully (but
incorrectly); for example, the C expression ‘atan(a[1])’ can be parsed
in Normal language mode, but the ‘atan’ won’t correspond to the built-in
‘arctan’ function, and the ‘a[1]’ will be interpreted as ‘a’ times the
vector ‘[1]’!

   If you press ‘C-x * e’ or ‘C-x * w’ to activate an embedded formula
which is blank, say with the cursor on the space between the two
delimiters ‘$ $’, Calc will immediately prompt for an algebraic entry.

   Only one formula in one buffer can be enabled at a time.  If you move
to another area of the current buffer and give Calc commands, Calc turns
Embedded mode off for the old formula and then tries to restart Embedded
mode at the new position.  Other buffers are not affected by Embedded
mode.

   When Embedded mode begins, Calc pushes the current formula onto the
stack.  No Calc stack window is created; however, Calc copies the
top-of-stack position into the original buffer at all times.  You can
create a Calc window by hand with ‘C-x * o’ if you find you need to see
the entire stack.

   For example, typing ‘C-x * e’ while somewhere in the formula ‘n>2’ in
the following line enables Embedded mode on that inequality:

     We define $F_n = F_(n-1)+F_(n-2)$ for all $n>2$.

The formula ‘n>2’ will be pushed onto the Calc stack, and the top of
stack will be copied back into the editing buffer.  This means that
spaces will appear around the ‘>’ symbol to match Calc’s usual display
style:

     We define $F_n = F_(n-1)+F_(n-2)$ for all $n > 2$.

No spaces have appeared around the ‘+’ sign because it’s in a different
formula, one which we have not yet touched with Embedded mode.

   Now that Embedded mode is enabled, keys you type in this buffer are
interpreted as Calc commands.  At this point we might use the “commute”
command ‘j C’ to reverse the inequality.  This is a selection-based
command for which we first need to move the cursor onto the operator
(‘>’ in this case) that needs to be commuted.

     We define $F_n = F_(n-1)+F_(n-2)$ for all $2 < n$.

   The ‘C-x * o’ command is a useful way to open a Calc window without
actually selecting that window.  Giving this command verifies that ‘2 <
n’ is also on the Calc stack.  Typing ‘17 <RET>’ would produce:

     We define $F_n = F_(n-1)+F_(n-2)$ for all $17$.

with ‘2 < n’ and ‘17’ on the stack; typing <TAB> at this point will
exchange the two stack values and restore ‘2 < n’ to the embedded
formula.  Even though you can’t normally see the stack in Embedded mode,
it is still there and it still operates in the same way.  But, as with
old-fashioned RPN calculators, you can only see the value at the top of
the stack at any given time (unless you use ‘C-x * o’).

   Typing ‘C-x * e’ again turns Embedded mode off.  The Calc window
reveals that the formula ‘2 < n’ is automatically removed from the
stack, but the ‘17’ is not.  Entering Embedded mode always pushes one
thing onto the stack, and leaving Embedded mode always removes one
thing.  Anything else that happens on the stack is entirely your
business as far as Embedded mode is concerned.

   If you press ‘C-x * e’ in the wrong place by accident, it is possible
that Calc will be able to parse the nearby text as a formula and will
mangle that text in an attempt to redisplay it “properly” in the current
language mode.  If this happens, press ‘C-x * e’ again to exit Embedded
mode, then give the regular Emacs “undo” command (‘C-_’ or ‘C-x u’) to
put the text back the way it was before Calc edited it.  Note that
Calc’s own Undo command (typed before you turn Embedded mode back off)
will not do you any good, because as far as Calc is concerned you
haven’t done anything with this formula yet.


File: calc.info,  Node: More About Embedded Mode,  Next: Assignments in Embedded Mode,  Prev: Basic Embedded Mode,  Up: Embedded Mode

17.2 More About Embedded Mode
=============================

When Embedded mode “activates” a formula, i.e., when it examines the
formula for the first time since the buffer was created or loaded, Calc
tries to sense the language in which the formula was written.  If the
formula contains any LaTeX-like ‘\’ sequences, it is parsed (i.e., read)
in LaTeX mode.  If the formula appears to be written in multi-line Big
mode, it is parsed in Big mode.  Otherwise, it is parsed according to
the current language mode.

   Note that Calc does not change the current language mode according
the formula it reads in.  Even though it can read a LaTeX formula when
not in LaTeX mode, it will immediately rewrite this formula using
whatever language mode is in effect.

   Calc’s parser is unable to read certain kinds of formulas.  For
example, with ‘v ]’ (‘calc-matrix-brackets’) you can specify matrix
display styles which the parser is unable to recognize as matrices.  The
‘d p’ (‘calc-show-plain’) command turns on a mode in which a “plain”
version of a formula is placed in front of the fully-formatted version.
When Calc reads a formula that has such a plain version in front, it
reads the plain version and ignores the formatted version.

   Plain formulas are preceded and followed by ‘%%%’ signs by default.
This notation has the advantage that the ‘%’ character begins a comment
in TeX and LaTeX, so if your formula is embedded in a TeX or LaTeX
document its plain version will be invisible in the final printed copy.
Certain major modes have different delimiters to ensure that the “plain”
version will be in a comment for those modes, also.  See *note
Customizing Embedded Mode:: to see how to change the “plain” formula
delimiters.

   There are several notations which Calc’s parser for “big” formatted
formulas can’t yet recognize.  In particular, it can’t read the large
symbols for ‘sum’, ‘prod’, and ‘integ’, and it can’t handle ‘=>’ with
the righthand argument omitted.  Also, Calc won’t recognize special
formats you have defined with the ‘Z C’ command (*note User-Defined
Compositions::).  In these cases it is important to use “plain” mode to
make sure Calc will be able to read your formula later.

   Another example where “plain” mode is important is if you have
specified a float mode with few digits of precision.  Normally any
digits that are computed but not displayed will simply be lost when you
save and re-load your embedded buffer, but “plain” mode allows you to
make sure that the complete number is present in the file as well as the
rounded-down number.

   Embedded buffers remember active formulas for as long as they exist
in Emacs memory.  Suppose you have an embedded formula which is ‘pi’ to
the normal 12 decimal places, and then type ‘C-u 5 d n’ to display only
five decimal places.  If you then type ‘d n’, all 12 places reappear
because the full number is still there on the Calc stack.  More
surprisingly, even if you exit Embedded mode and later re-enter it for
that formula, typing ‘d n’ will restore all 12 places because each
buffer remembers all its active formulas.  However, if you save the
buffer in a file and reload it in a new Emacs session, all non-displayed
digits will have been lost unless you used “plain” mode.

   In some applications of Embedded mode, you will want to have a
sequence of copies of a formula that show its evolution as you work on
it.  For example, you might want to have a sequence like this in your
file (elaborating here on the example from the “Getting Started”
chapter):

     The derivative of

                                   ln(ln(x))

     is

                       (the derivative of ln(ln(x)))

     whose value at x = 2 is

                                 (the value)

     and at x = 3 is

                                 (the value)

   The ‘C-x * d’ (‘calc-embedded-duplicate’) command is a handy way to
make sequences like this.  If you type ‘C-x * d’, the formula under the
cursor (which may or may not have Embedded mode enabled for it at the
time) is copied immediately below and Embedded mode is then enabled for
that copy.

   For this example, you would start with just

     The derivative of

                                   ln(ln(x))

and press ‘C-x * d’ with the cursor on this formula.  The result is

     The derivative of

                                   ln(ln(x))


                                   ln(ln(x))

with the second copy of the formula enabled in Embedded mode.  You can
now press ‘a d x <RET>’ to take the derivative, and ‘C-x * d C-x * d’ to
make two more copies of the derivative.  To complete the computations,
type ‘3 s l x <RET>’ to evaluate the last formula, then move up to the
second-to-last formula and type ‘2 s l x <RET>’.

   Finally, you would want to press ‘C-x * e’ to exit Embedded mode,
then go up and insert the necessary text in between the various formulas
and numbers.

   The ‘C-x * f’ (‘calc-embedded-new-formula’) command creates a new
embedded formula at the current point.  It inserts some default
delimiters, which are usually just blank lines, and then does an
algebraic entry to get the formula (which is then enabled for Embedded
mode).  This is just shorthand for typing the delimiters yourself,
positioning the cursor between the new delimiters, and pressing ‘C-x *
e’.  The key sequence ‘C-x * '’ is equivalent to ‘C-x * f’.

   The ‘C-x * n’ (‘calc-embedded-next’) and ‘C-x * p’
(‘calc-embedded-previous’) commands move the cursor to the next or
previous active embedded formula in the buffer.  They can take positive
or negative prefix arguments to move by several formulas.  Note that
these commands do not actually examine the text of the buffer looking
for formulas; they only see formulas which have previously been
activated in Embedded mode.  In fact, ‘C-x * n’ and ‘C-x * p’ are a
useful way to tell which embedded formulas are currently active.  Also,
note that these commands do not enable Embedded mode on the next or
previous formula, they just move the cursor.

   The ‘C-x * `’ (‘calc-embedded-edit’) command edits the embedded
formula at the current point as if by ‘`’ (‘calc-edit’).  Embedded mode
does not have to be enabled for this to work.  Press ‘C-c C-c’ to finish
the edit, or ‘C-x k’ to cancel.


File: calc.info,  Node: Assignments in Embedded Mode,  Next: Mode Settings in Embedded Mode,  Prev: More About Embedded Mode,  Up: Embedded Mode

17.3 Assignments in Embedded Mode
=================================

The ‘:=’ (assignment) and ‘=>’ (“evaluates-to”) operators are especially
useful in Embedded mode.  They allow you to make a definition in one
formula, then refer to that definition in other formulas embedded in the
same buffer.

   An embedded formula which is an assignment to a variable, as in

     foo := 5

records ‘5’ as the stored value of ‘foo’ for the purposes of Embedded
mode operations in the current buffer.  It does _not_ actually store ‘5’
as the “global” value of ‘foo’, however.  Regular Calc operations, and
Embedded formulas in other buffers, will not see this assignment.

   One way to use this assigned value is simply to create an Embedded
formula elsewhere that refers to ‘foo’, and to press ‘=’ in that
formula.  However, this permanently replaces the ‘foo’ in the formula
with its current value.  More interesting is to use ‘=>’ elsewhere:

     foo + 7 => 12

   *Note Evaluates-To Operator::, for a general discussion of ‘=>’.

   If you move back and change the assignment to ‘foo’, any ‘=>’
formulas which refer to it are automatically updated.

     foo := 17

     foo + 7 => 24

   The obvious question then is, _how_ can one easily change the
assignment to ‘foo’?  If you simply select the formula in Embedded mode
and type 17, the assignment itself will be replaced by the 17.  The
effect on the other formula will be that the variable ‘foo’ becomes
unassigned:

     17

     foo + 7 => foo + 7

   The right thing to do is first to use a selection command (‘j 2’ will
do the trick) to select the righthand side of the assignment.  Then, ‘17
<TAB> <DEL>’ will swap the 17 into place (*note Selecting Subformulas::,
to see how this works).

   The ‘C-x * j’ (‘calc-embedded-select’) command provides an easy way
to operate on assignments.  It is just like ‘C-x * e’, except that if
the enabled formula is an assignment, it uses ‘j 2’ to select the
righthand side.  If the enabled formula is an evaluates-to, it uses ‘j
1’ to select the lefthand side.  A formula can also be a combination of
both:

     bar := foo + 3 => 20

in which case ‘C-x * j’ will select the middle part (‘foo + 3’).

   The formula is automatically deselected when you leave Embedded mode.

   Another way to change the assignment to ‘foo’ would simply be to edit
the number using regular Emacs editing rather than Embedded mode.  Then,
we have to find a way to get Embedded mode to notice the change.  The
‘C-x * u’ (‘calc-embedded-update-formula’) command is a convenient way
to do this.

     foo := 6

     foo + 7 => 13

   Pressing ‘C-x * u’ is much like pressing ‘C-x * e = C-x * e’, that
is, temporarily enabling Embedded mode for the formula under the cursor
and then evaluating it with ‘=’.  But ‘C-x * u’ does not actually use
‘C-x * e’, and in fact another formula somewhere else can be enabled in
Embedded mode while you use ‘C-x * u’ and that formula will not be
disturbed.

   With a numeric prefix argument, ‘C-x * u’ updates all active ‘=>’
formulas in the buffer.  Formulas which have not yet been activated in
Embedded mode, and formulas which do not have ‘=>’ as their top-level
operator, are not affected by this.  (This is useful only if you have
used ‘m C’; see below.)

   With a plain ‘C-u’ prefix, ‘C-u C-x * u’ updates only in the region
between mark and point rather than in the whole buffer.

   ‘C-x * u’ is also a handy way to activate a formula, such as an ‘=>’
formula that has freshly been typed in or loaded from a file.

   The ‘C-x * a’ (‘calc-embedded-activate’) command scans through the
current buffer and activates all embedded formulas that contain ‘:=’ or
‘=>’ symbols.  This does not mean that Embedded mode is actually turned
on, but only that the formulas’ positions are registered with Embedded
mode so that the ‘=>’ values can be properly updated as assignments are
changed.

   It is a good idea to type ‘C-x * a’ right after loading a file that
uses embedded ‘=>’ operators.  Emacs includes a nifty “buffer-local
variables” feature that you can use to do this automatically.  The idea
is to place near the end of your file a few lines that look like this:

     --- Local Variables: ---
     --- eval:(calc-embedded-activate) ---
     --- End: ---

where the leading and trailing ‘---’ can be replaced by any suitable
strings (which must be the same on all three lines) or omitted
altogether; in a TeX or LaTeX file, ‘%’ would be a good leading string
and no trailing string would be necessary.  In a C program, ‘/*’ and
‘*/’ would be good leading and trailing strings.

   When Emacs loads a file into memory, it checks for a Local Variables
section like this one at the end of the file.  If it finds this section,
it does the specified things (in this case, running ‘C-x * a’
automatically) before editing of the file begins.  The Local Variables
section must be within 3000 characters of the end of the file for Emacs
to find it, and it must be in the last page of the file if the file has
any page separators.  *Note Local Variables in Files: (emacs)File
Variables.

   Note that ‘C-x * a’ does not update the formulas it finds.  To do
this, type, say, ‘M-1 C-x * u’ after ‘C-x * a’.  Generally this should
not be a problem, though, because the formulas will have been up-to-date
already when the file was saved.

   Normally, ‘C-x * a’ activates all the formulas it finds, but any
previous active formulas remain active as well.  With a positive numeric
prefix argument, ‘C-x * a’ first deactivates all current active
formulas, then actives the ones it finds in its scan of the buffer.
With a negative prefix argument, ‘C-x * a’ simply deactivates all
formulas.

   Embedded mode has two symbols, ‘Active’ and ‘~Active’, which it puts
next to the major mode name in a buffer’s mode line.  It puts ‘Active’
if it has reason to believe that all formulas in the buffer are active,
because you have typed ‘C-x * a’ and Calc has not since had to
deactivate any formulas (which can happen if Calc goes to update an ‘=>’
formula somewhere because a variable changed, and finds that the formula
is no longer there due to some kind of editing outside of Embedded
mode).  Calc puts ‘~Active’ in the mode line if some, but probably not
all, formulas in the buffer are active.  This happens if you activate a
few formulas one at a time but never use ‘C-x * a’, or if you used ‘C-x
* a’ but then Calc had to deactivate a formula because it lost track of
it.  If neither of these symbols appears in the mode line, no embedded
formulas are active in the buffer (e.g., before Embedded mode has been
used, or after a ‘M-- C-x * a’).

   Embedded formulas can refer to assignments both before and after them
in the buffer.  If there are several assignments to a variable, the
nearest preceding assignment is used if there is one, otherwise the
following assignment is used.

     x => 1

     x := 1

     x => 1

     x := 2

     x => 2

   As well as simple variables, you can also assign to subscript
expressions of the form ‘VAR_NUMBER’ (as in ‘x_0’), or ‘VAR_VAR’ (as in
‘x_max’).  Assignments to other kinds of objects can be represented by
Calc, but the automatic linkage between assignments and references works
only for plain variables and these two kinds of subscript expressions.

   If there are no assignments to a given variable, the global stored
value for the variable is used (*note Storing Variables::), or, if no
value is stored, the variable is left in symbolic form.  Note that
global stored values will be lost when the file is saved and loaded in a
later Emacs session, unless you have used the ‘s p’
(‘calc-permanent-variable’) command to save them; *note Operations on
Variables::.

   The ‘m C’ (‘calc-auto-recompute’) command turns automatic
recomputation of ‘=>’ forms on and off.  If you turn automatic
recomputation off, you will have to use ‘C-x * u’ to update these
formulas manually after an assignment has been changed.  If you plan to
change several assignments at once, it may be more efficient to type ‘m
C’, change all the assignments, then use ‘M-1 C-x * u’ to update the
entire buffer afterwards.  The ‘m C’ command also controls ‘=>’ formulas
on the stack; *note Evaluates-To Operator::.  When you turn automatic
recomputation back on, the stack will be updated but the Embedded buffer
will not; you must use ‘C-x * u’ to update the buffer by hand.


File: calc.info,  Node: Mode Settings in Embedded Mode,  Next: Customizing Embedded Mode,  Prev: Assignments in Embedded Mode,  Up: Embedded Mode

17.4 Mode Settings in Embedded Mode
===================================

The mode settings can be changed while Calc is in embedded mode, but by
default they will revert to their original values when embedded mode is
ended.  However, the modes saved when the mode-recording mode is ‘Save’
(see below) and the modes in effect when the ‘m e’
(‘calc-embedded-preserve-modes’) command is given will be preserved when
embedded mode is ended.

   Embedded mode has a rather complicated mechanism for handling mode
settings in Embedded formulas.  It is possible to put annotations in the
file that specify mode settings either global to the entire file or
local to a particular formula or formulas.  In the latter case,
different modes can be specified for use when a formula is the enabled
Embedded mode formula.

   When you give any mode-setting command, like ‘m f’ (for Fraction
mode) or ‘d s’ (for scientific notation), Embedded mode adds a line like
the following one to the file just before the opening delimiter of the
formula.

     % [calc-mode: fractions: t]
     % [calc-mode: float-format: (sci 0)]

   When Calc interprets an embedded formula, it scans the text before
the formula for mode-setting annotations like these and sets the Calc
buffer to match these modes.  Modes not explicitly described in the file
are not changed.  Calc scans all the way to the top of the file, or up
to a line of the form

     % [calc-defaults]

which you can insert at strategic places in the file if this backward
scan is getting too slow, or just to provide a barrier between one
“zone” of mode settings and another.

   If the file contains several annotations for the same mode, the
closest one before the formula is used.  Annotations after the formula
are never used (except for global annotations, described below).

   The scan does not look for the leading ‘% ’, only for the square
brackets and the text they enclose.  In fact, the leading characters are
different for different major modes.  You can edit the mode annotations
to a style that works better in context if you wish.  *Note Customizing
Embedded Mode::, to see how to change the style that Calc uses when it
generates the annotations.  You can write mode annotations into the file
yourself if you know the syntax; the easiest way to find the syntax for
a given mode is to let Calc write the annotation for it once and see
what it does.

   If you give a mode-changing command for a mode that already has a
suitable annotation just above the current formula, Calc will modify
that annotation rather than generating a new, conflicting one.

   Mode annotations have three parts, separated by colons.  (Spaces
after the colons are optional.)  The first identifies the kind of mode
setting, the second is a name for the mode itself, and the third is the
value in the form of a Lisp symbol, number, or list.  Annotations with
unrecognizable text in the first or second parts are ignored.  The third
part is not checked to make sure the value is of a valid type or range;
if you write an annotation by hand, be sure to give a proper value or
results will be unpredictable.  Mode-setting annotations are
case-sensitive.

   While Embedded mode is enabled, the word ‘Local’ appears in the mode
line.  This is to show that mode setting commands generate annotations
that are “local” to the current formula or set of formulas.  The ‘m R’
(‘calc-mode-record-mode’) command causes Calc to generate different
kinds of annotations.  Pressing ‘m R’ repeatedly cycles through the
possible modes.

   ‘LocEdit’ and ‘LocPerm’ modes generate annotations that look like
this, respectively:

     % [calc-edit-mode: float-format: (sci 0)]
     % [calc-perm-mode: float-format: (sci 5)]

   The first kind of annotation will be used only while a formula is
enabled in Embedded mode.  The second kind will be used only when the
formula is _not_ enabled.  (Whether the formula is “active” or not,
i.e., whether Calc has seen this formula yet, is not relevant here.)

   ‘Global’ mode generates an annotation like this at the end of the
file:

     % [calc-global-mode: fractions t]

   Global mode annotations affect all formulas throughout the file, and
may appear anywhere in the file.  This allows you to tuck your mode
annotations somewhere out of the way, say, on a new page of the file, as
long as those mode settings are suitable for all formulas in the file.

   Enabling a formula with ‘C-x * e’ causes a fresh scan for local mode
annotations; you will have to use this after adding annotations above a
formula by hand to get the formula to notice them.  Updating a formula
with ‘C-x * u’ will also re-scan the local modes, but global modes are
only re-scanned by ‘C-x * a’.

   Another way that modes can get out of date is if you add a local mode
annotation to a formula that has another formula after it.  In this
example, we have used the ‘d s’ command while the first of the two
embedded formulas is active.  But the second formula has not changed its
style to match, even though by the rules of reading annotations the
‘(sci 0)’ applies to it, too.

     % [calc-mode: float-format: (sci 0)]
     1.23e2

     456.

   We would have to go down to the other formula and press ‘C-x * u’ on
it in order to get it to notice the new annotation.

   Two more mode-recording modes selectable by ‘m R’ are available which
are also available outside of Embedded mode.  (*note General Mode
Commands::.)  They are ‘Save’, in which mode settings are recorded
permanently in your Calc init file (the file given by the variable
‘calc-settings-file’, typically ‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’) rather than by
annotating the current document, and no-recording mode (where there is
no symbol like ‘Save’ or ‘Local’ in the mode line), in which
mode-changing commands do not leave any annotations at all.

   When Embedded mode is not enabled, mode-recording modes except for
‘Save’ have no effect.


File: calc.info,  Node: Customizing Embedded Mode,  Prev: Mode Settings in Embedded Mode,  Up: Embedded Mode

17.5 Customizing Embedded Mode
==============================

You can modify Embedded mode’s behavior by setting various Lisp
variables described here.  These variables are customizable (*note
Customizing Calc::), or you can use ‘M-x set-variable’ to adjust a
variable on the fly.  (Another possibility would be to use a file-local
variable annotation at the end of the file; *note Local Variables in
Files: (emacs)File Variables.)  Many of the variables given mentioned
here can be set to depend on the major mode of the editing buffer (*note
Customizing Calc::).

   The ‘calc-embedded-open-formula’ variable holds a regular expression
for the opening delimiter of a formula.  *Note Regular Expression
Search: (emacs)Regexp Search, to see how regular expressions work.
Basically, a regular expression is a pattern that Calc can search for.
A regular expression that considers blank lines, ‘$’, and ‘$$’ to be
opening delimiters is ‘"\\`\\|^\n\\|\\$\\$?"’.  Just in case the meaning
of this regular expression is not completely plain, let’s go through it
in detail.

   The surrounding ‘" "’ marks quote the text between them as a Lisp
string.  If you left them off, ‘set-variable’ (for example) would try to
read the regular expression as a Lisp program.

   The most obvious property of this regular expression is that it
contains indecently many backslashes.  There are actually two levels of
backslash usage going on here.  First, when Lisp reads a quoted string,
all pairs of characters beginning with a backslash are interpreted as
special characters.  Here, ‘\n’ changes to a new-line character, and
‘\\’ changes to a single backslash.  So the actual regular expression
seen by Calc is ‘\`\|^ (newline) \|\$\$?’.

   Regular expressions also consider pairs beginning with backslash to
have special meanings.  Sometimes the backslash is used to quote a
character that otherwise would have a special meaning in a regular
expression, like ‘$’, which normally means “end-of-line,” or ‘?’, which
means that the preceding item is optional.  So ‘\$\$?’ matches either
one or two dollar signs.

   The other codes in this regular expression are ‘^’, which matches
“beginning-of-line,” ‘\|’, which means “or,” and ‘\`’, which matches
“beginning-of-buffer.” So the whole pattern means that a formula begins
at the beginning of the buffer, or on a newline that occurs at the
beginning of a line (i.e., a blank line), or at one or two dollar signs.

   The default value of ‘calc-embedded-open-formula’ looks just like
this example, with several more alternatives added on to recognize
various other common kinds of delimiters.

   By the way, the reason to use ‘^\n’ rather than ‘^$’ or ‘\n\n’, which
also would appear to match blank lines, is that the former expression
actually “consumes” only one newline character as _part of_ the
delimiter, whereas the latter expressions consume zero or two newlines,
respectively.  The former choice gives the most natural behavior when
Calc must operate on a whole formula including its delimiters.

   See the Emacs manual for complete details on regular expressions.
But just for your convenience, here is a list of all characters which
must be quoted with backslash (like ‘\$’) to avoid some special
interpretation: ‘. * + ? [ ] ^ $ \’.  (Note the backslash in this list;
for example, to match ‘\[’ you must use ‘"\\\\\\["’.  An exercise for
the reader is to account for each of these six backslashes!)

   The ‘calc-embedded-close-formula’ variable holds a regular expression
for the closing delimiter of a formula.  A closing regular expression to
match the above example would be ‘"\\'\\|\n$\\|\\$\\$?"’.  This is
almost the same as the other one, except it now uses ‘\'’
(“end-of-buffer”) and ‘\n$’ (newline occurring at end of line, yet
another way of describing a blank line that is more appropriate for this
case).

   The ‘calc-embedded-word-regexp’ variable holds a regular expression
used to define an expression to look for (a “word”) when you type ‘C-x *
w’ to enable Embedded mode.

   The ‘calc-embedded-open-plain’ variable is a string which begins a
“plain” formula written in front of the formatted formula when ‘d p’
mode is turned on.  Note that this is an actual string, not a regular
expression, because Calc must be able to write this string into a buffer
as well as to recognize it.  The default string is ‘"%%% "’ (note the
trailing space), but may be different for certain major modes.

   The ‘calc-embedded-close-plain’ variable is a string which ends a
“plain” formula.  The default is ‘" %%%\n"’, but may be different for
different major modes.  Without the trailing newline here, the first
line of a Big mode formula that followed might be shifted over with
respect to the other lines.

   The ‘calc-embedded-open-new-formula’ variable is a string which is
inserted at the front of a new formula when you type ‘C-x * f’.  Its
default value is ‘"\n\n"’.  If this string begins with a newline
character and the ‘C-x * f’ is typed at the beginning of a line, ‘C-x *
f’ will skip this first newline to avoid introducing unnecessary blank
lines in the file.

   The ‘calc-embedded-close-new-formula’ variable is the corresponding
string which is inserted at the end of a new formula.  Its default value
is also ‘"\n\n"’.  The final newline is omitted by ‘C-x * f’ if typed at
the end of a line.  (It follows that if ‘C-x * f’ is typed on a blank
line, both a leading opening newline and a trailing closing newline are
omitted.)

   The ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula’ variable is a regular expression
which is sure to be followed by an embedded formula.  The ‘C-x * a’
command searches for this pattern as well as for ‘=>’ and ‘:=’
operators.  Note that ‘C-x * a’ will not activate just anything
surrounded by formula delimiters; after all, blank lines are considered
formula delimiters by default!  But if your language includes a
delimiter which can only occur actually in front of a formula, you can
take advantage of it here.  The default pattern is ‘"%Embed\n\\(%
.*\n\\)*"’, but may be different for different major modes.  This
pattern will check for ‘%Embed’ followed by any number of lines
beginning with ‘%’ and a space.  This last is important to make Calc
consider mode annotations part of the pattern, so that the formula’s
opening delimiter really is sure to follow the pattern.

   The ‘calc-embedded-open-mode’ variable is a string (not a regular
expression) which should precede a mode annotation.  Calc never scans
for this string; Calc always looks for the annotation itself.  But this
is the string that is inserted before the opening bracket when Calc adds
an annotation on its own.  The default is ‘"% "’, but may be different
for different major modes.

   The ‘calc-embedded-close-mode’ variable is a string which follows a
mode annotation written by Calc.  Its default value is simply a newline,
‘"\n"’, but may be different for different major modes.  If you change
this, it is a good idea still to end with a newline so that mode
annotations will appear on lines by themselves.


File: calc.info,  Node: Programming,  Next: Copying,  Prev: Embedded Mode,  Up: Top

18 Programming
**************

There are several ways to “program” the Emacs Calculator, depending on
the nature of the problem you need to solve.

  1. “Keyboard macros” allow you to record a sequence of keystrokes and
     play them back at a later time.  This is just the standard Emacs
     keyboard macro mechanism, dressed up with a few more features such
     as loops and conditionals.

  2. “Algebraic definitions” allow you to use any formula to define a
     new function.  This function can then be used in algebraic formulas
     or as an interactive command.

  3. “Rewrite rules” are discussed in the section on algebra commands.
     *Note Rewrite Rules::.  If you put your rewrite rules in the
     variable ‘EvalRules’, they will be applied automatically to all
     Calc results in just the same way as an internal “rule” is applied
     to evaluate ‘sqrt(9)’ to 3 and so on.  *Note Automatic Rewrites::.

  4. “Lisp” is the programming language that Calc (and most of Emacs) is
     written in.  If the above techniques aren’t powerful enough, you
     can write Lisp functions to do anything that built-in Calc commands
     can do.  Lisp code is also somewhat faster than keyboard macros or
     rewrite rules.

   Programming features are available through the ‘z’ and ‘Z’ prefix
keys.  New commands that you define are two-key sequences beginning with
‘z’.  Commands for managing these definitions use the shift-‘Z’ prefix.
(The ‘Z T’ (‘calc-timing’) command is described elsewhere; *note
Troubleshooting Commands::.  The ‘Z C’ (‘calc-user-define-composition’)
command is also described elsewhere; *note User-Defined Compositions::.)

* Menu:

* Creating User Keys::
* Keyboard Macros::
* Invocation Macros::
* Algebraic Definitions::
* Lisp Definitions::


File: calc.info,  Node: Creating User Keys,  Next: Keyboard Macros,  Prev: Programming,  Up: Programming

18.1 Creating User Keys
=======================

Any Calculator command may be bound to a key using the ‘Z D’
(‘calc-user-define’) command.  Actually, it is bound to a two-key
sequence beginning with the lower-case ‘z’ prefix.

   The ‘Z D’ command first prompts for the key to define.  For example,
press ‘Z D a’ to define the new key sequence ‘z a’.  You are then
prompted for the name of the Calculator command that this key should
run.  For example, the ‘calc-sincos’ command is not normally available
on a key.  Typing ‘Z D s sincos <RET>’ programs the ‘z s’ key sequence
to run ‘calc-sincos’.  This definition will remain in effect for the
rest of this Emacs session, or until you redefine ‘z s’ to be something
else.

   You can actually bind any Emacs command to a ‘z’ key sequence by
backspacing over the ‘calc-’ when you are prompted for the command name.

   As with any other prefix key, you can type ‘z ?’ to see a list of all
the two-key sequences you have defined that start with ‘z’.  Initially,
no ‘z’ sequences (except ‘z ?’ itself) are defined.

   User keys are typically letters, but may in fact be any key.
(<META>-keys are not permitted, nor are a terminal’s special function
keys which generate multi-character sequences when pressed.)  You can
define different commands on the shifted and unshifted versions of a
letter if you wish.

   The ‘Z U’ (‘calc-user-undefine’) command unbinds a user key.  For
example, the key sequence ‘Z U s’ will undefine the ‘sincos’ key we
defined above.

   The ‘Z P’ (‘calc-user-define-permanent’) command makes a key binding
permanent so that it will remain in effect even in future Emacs
sessions.  (It does this by adding a suitable bit of Lisp code into your
Calc init file; that is, the file given by the variable
‘calc-settings-file’, typically ‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’.)  For example, ‘Z
P s’ would register our ‘sincos’ command permanently.  If you later wish
to unregister this command you must edit your Calc init file by hand.
(*Note General Mode Commands::, for a way to tell Calc to use a
different file for the Calc init file.)

   The ‘Z P’ command also saves the user definition, if any, for the
command bound to the key.  After ‘Z F’ and ‘Z C’, a given user key could
invoke a command, which in turn calls an algebraic function, which might
have one or more special display formats.  A single ‘Z P’ command will
save all of these definitions.  To save an algebraic function, type ‘'’
(the apostrophe) when prompted for a key, and type the function name.
To save a command without its key binding, type ‘M-x’ and enter a
function name.  (The ‘calc-’ prefix will automatically be inserted for
you.)  (If the command you give implies a function, the function will be
saved, and if the function has any display formats, those will be saved,
but not the other way around: Saving a function will not save any
commands or key bindings associated with the function.)

   The ‘Z E’ (‘calc-user-define-edit’) command edits the definition of a
user key.  This works for keys that have been defined by either keyboard
macros or formulas; further details are contained in the relevant
following sections.


File: calc.info,  Node: Keyboard Macros,  Next: Invocation Macros,  Prev: Creating User Keys,  Up: Programming

18.2 Programming with Keyboard Macros
=====================================

The easiest way to “program” the Emacs Calculator is to use standard
keyboard macros.  Press ‘C-x (’ to begin recording a macro.  From this
point on, keystrokes you type will be saved away as well as performing
their usual functions.  Press ‘C-x )’ to end recording.  Press shift-‘X’
(or the standard Emacs key sequence ‘C-x e’) to execute your keyboard
macro by replaying the recorded keystrokes.  *Note (emacs)Keyboard
Macros::, for further information.

   When you use ‘X’ to invoke a keyboard macro, the entire macro is
treated as a single command by the undo and trail features.  The stack
display buffer is not updated during macro execution, but is instead
fixed up once the macro completes.  Thus, commands defined with keyboard
macros are convenient and efficient.  The ‘C-x e’ command, on the other
hand, invokes the keyboard macro with no special treatment: Each command
in the macro will record its own undo information and trail entry, and
update the stack buffer accordingly.  If your macro uses features
outside of Calc’s control to operate on the contents of the Calc stack
buffer, or if it includes Undo, Redo, or last-arguments commands, you
must use ‘C-x e’ to make sure the buffer and undo list are up-to-date at
all times.  You could also consider using ‘K’ (‘calc-keep-args’) instead
of ‘M-<RET>’ (‘calc-last-args’).

   Calc extends the standard Emacs keyboard macros in several ways.
Keyboard macros can be used to create user-defined commands.  Keyboard
macros can include conditional and iteration structures, somewhat
analogous to those provided by a traditional programmable calculator.

* Menu:

* Naming Keyboard Macros::
* Conditionals in Macros::
* Loops in Macros::
* Local Values in Macros::
* Queries in Macros::


File: calc.info,  Node: Naming Keyboard Macros,  Next: Conditionals in Macros,  Prev: Keyboard Macros,  Up: Keyboard Macros

18.2.1 Naming Keyboard Macros
-----------------------------

Once you have defined a keyboard macro, you can bind it to a ‘z’ key
sequence with the ‘Z K’ (‘calc-user-define-kbd-macro’) command.  This
command prompts first for a key, then for a command name.  For example,
if you type ‘C-x ( n <TAB> n <TAB> C-x )’ you will define a keyboard
macro which negates the top two numbers on the stack (<TAB> swaps the
top two stack elements).  Now you can type ‘Z K n <RET>’ to define this
keyboard macro onto the ‘z n’ key sequence.  The default command name
(if you answer the second prompt with just the <RET> key as in this
example) will be something like ‘calc-User-n’.  The keyboard macro will
now be available as both ‘z n’ and ‘M-x calc-User-n’.  You can backspace
and enter a more descriptive command name if you wish.

   Macros defined by ‘Z K’ act like single commands; they are executed
in the same way as by the ‘X’ key.  If you wish to define the macro as a
standard no-frills Emacs macro (to be executed as if by ‘C-x e’), give a
negative prefix argument to ‘Z K’.

   Once you have bound your keyboard macro to a key, you can use ‘Z P’
to register it permanently with Emacs.  *Note Creating User Keys::.

   The ‘Z E’ (‘calc-user-define-edit’) command on a key that has been
defined by a keyboard macro tries to use the ‘edmacro’ package edit the
macro.  Type ‘C-c C-c’ to finish editing and update the definition
stored on the key, or, to cancel the edit, kill the buffer with ‘C-x k’.
The special characters ‘RET’, ‘LFD’, ‘TAB’, ‘SPC’, ‘DEL’, and ‘NUL’ must
be entered as these three character sequences, written in all uppercase,
as must the prefixes ‘C-’ and ‘M-’.  Spaces and line breaks are ignored.
Other characters are copied verbatim into the keyboard macro.
Basically, the notation is the same as is used in all of this manual’s
examples, except that the manual takes some liberties with spaces: When
we say ‘' [1 2 3] <RET>’, we take it for granted that it is clear we
really mean ‘' [1 <SPC> 2 <SPC> 3] <RET>’.

   The ‘C-x * m’ (‘read-kbd-macro’) command reads an Emacs “region” of
spelled-out keystrokes and defines it as the current keyboard macro.  It
is a convenient way to define a keyboard macro that has been stored in a
file, or to define a macro without executing it at the same time.


File: calc.info,  Node: Conditionals in Macros,  Next: Loops in Macros,  Prev: Naming Keyboard Macros,  Up: Keyboard Macros

18.2.2 Conditionals in Keyboard Macros
--------------------------------------

The ‘Z [’ (‘calc-kbd-if’) and ‘Z ]’ (‘calc-kbd-end-if’) commands allow
you to put simple tests in a keyboard macro.  When Calc sees the ‘Z [’,
it pops an object from the stack and, if the object is a non-zero value,
continues executing keystrokes.  But if the object is zero, or if it is
not provably nonzero, Calc skips ahead to the matching ‘Z ]’ keystroke.
*Note Logical Operations::, for a set of commands for performing tests
which conveniently produce 1 for true and 0 for false.

   For example, ‘<RET> 0 a < Z [ n Z ]’ implements an absolute-value
function in the form of a keyboard macro.  This macro duplicates the
number on the top of the stack, pushes zero and compares using ‘a <’
(‘calc-less-than’), then, if the number was less than zero, executes ‘n’
(‘calc-change-sign’).  Otherwise, the change-sign command is skipped.

   To program this macro, type ‘C-x (’, type the above sequence of
keystrokes, then type ‘C-x )’.  Note that the keystrokes will be
executed while you are making the definition as well as when you later
re-execute the macro by typing ‘X’.  Thus you should make sure a
suitable number is on the stack before defining the macro so that you
don’t get a stack-underflow error during the definition process.

   Conditionals can be nested arbitrarily.  However, there should be
exactly one ‘Z ]’ for each ‘Z [’ in a keyboard macro.

   The ‘Z :’ (‘calc-kbd-else’) command allows you to choose between two
keystroke sequences.  The general format is ‘COND Z [ THEN-PART Z :
ELSE-PART Z ]’.  If COND is true (i.e., if the top of stack contains a
non-zero number after COND has been executed), the THEN-PART will be
executed and the ELSE-PART will be skipped.  Otherwise, the THEN-PART
will be skipped and the ELSE-PART will be executed.

   The ‘Z |’ (‘calc-kbd-else-if’) command allows you to choose between
any number of alternatives.  For example, ‘COND1 Z [ PART1 Z : COND2 Z |
PART2 Z : PART3 Z ]’ will execute PART1 if COND1 is true, otherwise it
will execute PART2 if COND2 is true, otherwise it will execute PART3.

   More precisely, ‘Z [’ pops a number and conditionally skips to the
next matching ‘Z :’ or ‘Z ]’ key.  ‘Z ]’ has no effect when actually
executed.  ‘Z :’ skips to the next matching ‘Z ]’.  ‘Z |’ pops a number
and conditionally skips to the next matching ‘Z :’ or ‘Z ]’; thus, ‘Z [’
and ‘Z |’ are functionally equivalent except that ‘Z [’ participates in
nesting but ‘Z |’ does not.

   Calc’s conditional and looping constructs work by scanning the
keyboard macro for occurrences of character sequences like ‘Z:’ and
‘Z]’.  One side-effect of this is that if you use these constructs you
must be careful that these character pairs do not occur by accident in
other parts of the macros.  Since Calc rarely uses shift-‘Z’ for any
purpose except as a prefix character, this is not likely to be a
problem.  Another side-effect is that it will not work to define your
own custom key bindings for these commands.  Only the standard shift-‘Z’
bindings will work correctly.

   If Calc gets stuck while skipping characters during the definition of
a macro, type ‘Z C-g’ to cancel the definition.  (Typing plain ‘C-g’
actually adds a ‘C-g’ keystroke to the macro.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Loops in Macros,  Next: Local Values in Macros,  Prev: Conditionals in Macros,  Up: Keyboard Macros

18.2.3 Loops in Keyboard Macros
-------------------------------

The ‘Z <’ (‘calc-kbd-repeat’) and ‘Z >’ (‘calc-kbd-end-repeat’) commands
pop a number from the stack, which must be an integer, then repeat the
keystrokes between the brackets the specified number of times.  If the
integer is zero or negative, the body is skipped altogether.  For
example, ‘1 <TAB> Z < 2 * Z >’ computes two to a nonnegative integer
power.  First, we push 1 on the stack and then swap the integer argument
back to the top.  The ‘Z <’ pops that argument leaving the 1 back on top
of the stack.  Then, we repeat a multiply-by-two step however many
times.

   Once again, the keyboard macro is executed as it is being entered.
In this case it is especially important to set up reasonable initial
conditions before making the definition: Suppose the integer 1000 just
happened to be sitting on the stack before we typed the above
definition!  Another approach is to enter a harmless dummy definition
for the macro, then go back and edit in the real one with a ‘Z E’
command.  Yet another approach is to type the macro as written-out
keystroke names in a buffer, then use ‘C-x * m’ (‘read-kbd-macro’) to
read the macro.

   The ‘Z /’ (‘calc-kbd-break’) command allows you to break out of a
keyboard macro loop prematurely.  It pops an object from the stack; if
that object is true (a non-zero number), control jumps out of the
innermost enclosing ‘Z <’ ... ‘Z >’ loop and continues after the ‘Z >’.
If the object is false, the ‘Z /’ has no effect.  Thus ‘COND Z /’ is
similar to ‘if (COND) break;’ in the C language.

   The ‘Z (’ (‘calc-kbd-for’) and ‘Z )’ (‘calc-kbd-end-for’) commands
are similar to ‘Z <’ and ‘Z >’, except that they make the value of the
counter available inside the loop.  The general layout is ‘INIT FINAL Z
( BODY STEP Z )’.  The ‘Z (’ command pops initial and final values from
the stack.  It then creates a temporary internal counter and initializes
it with the value INIT.  The ‘Z (’ command then repeatedly pushes the
counter value onto the stack and executes BODY and STEP, adding STEP to
the counter each time until the loop finishes.

   By default, the loop finishes when the counter becomes greater than
(or less than) FINAL, assuming INITIAL is less than (greater than)
FINAL.  If INITIAL is equal to FINAL, the body executes exactly once.
The body of the loop always executes at least once.  For example, ‘0 1
10 Z ( 2 ^ + 1 Z )’ computes the sum of the squares of the integers from
1 to 10, in steps of 1.

   If you give a numeric prefix argument of 1 to ‘Z (’, the loop is
forced to use upward-counting conventions.  In this case, if INITIAL is
greater than FINAL the body will not be executed at all.  Note that STEP
may still be negative in this loop; the prefix argument merely
constrains the loop-finished test.  Likewise, a prefix argument of -1
forces downward-counting conventions.

   The ‘Z {’ (‘calc-kbd-loop’) and ‘Z }’ (‘calc-kbd-end-loop’) commands
are similar to ‘Z <’ and ‘Z >’, except that they do not pop a count from
the stack—they effectively create an infinite loop.  Every ‘Z {’ ... ‘Z
}’ loop ought to include at least one ‘Z /’ to make sure the loop
doesn’t run forever.  (If any error message occurs which causes Emacs to
beep, the keyboard macro will also be halted; this is a standard feature
of Emacs.  You can also generally press ‘C-g’ to halt a running keyboard
macro, although not all versions of Unix support this feature.)

   The conditional and looping constructs are not actually tied to
keyboard macros, but they are most often used in that context.  For
example, the keystrokes ‘10 Z < 23 <RET> Z >’ push ten copies of 23 onto
the stack.  This can be typed “live” just as easily as in a macro
definition.

   *Note Conditionals in Macros::, for some additional notes about
conditional and looping commands.


File: calc.info,  Node: Local Values in Macros,  Next: Queries in Macros,  Prev: Loops in Macros,  Up: Keyboard Macros

18.2.4 Local Values in Macros
-----------------------------

Keyboard macros sometimes want to operate under known conditions without
affecting surrounding conditions.  For example, a keyboard macro may
wish to turn on Fraction mode, or set a particular precision,
independent of the user’s normal setting for those modes.

   Macros also sometimes need to use local variables.  Assignments to
local variables inside the macro should not affect any variables outside
the macro.  The ‘Z `’ (‘calc-kbd-push’) and ‘Z '’ (‘calc-kbd-pop’)
commands give you both of these capabilities.

   When you type ‘Z `’ (with a grave accent), the values of various mode
settings are saved away.  The ten “quick” variables ‘q0’ through ‘q9’
are also saved.  When you type ‘Z '’ (with an apostrophe), these values
are restored.  Pairs of ‘Z `’ and ‘Z '’ commands may be nested.

   If a keyboard macro halts due to an error in between a ‘Z `’ and a ‘Z
'’, the saved values will be restored correctly even though the macro
never reaches the ‘Z '’ command.  Thus you can use ‘Z `’ and ‘Z '’
without having to worry about what happens in exceptional conditions.

   If you type ‘Z `’ “live” (not in a keyboard macro), Calc puts you
into a “recursive edit.” You can tell you are in a recursive edit
because there will be extra square brackets in the mode line, as in
‘[(Calculator)]’.  These brackets will go away when you type the
matching ‘Z '’ command.  The modes and quick variables will be saved and
restored in just the same way as if actual keyboard macros were
involved.

   The modes saved by ‘Z `’ and ‘Z '’ are the current precision and
binary word size, the angular mode (Deg, Rad, or HMS), the
simplification mode, Algebraic mode, Symbolic mode, Infinite mode,
Matrix or Scalar mode, Fraction mode, and the current complex mode
(Polar or Rectangular).  The ten “quick” variables’ values (or lack
thereof) are also saved.

   Most mode-setting commands act as toggles, but with a numeric prefix
they force the mode either on (positive prefix) or off (negative or zero
prefix).  Since you don’t know what the environment might be when you
invoke your macro, it’s best to use prefix arguments for all
mode-setting commands inside the macro.

   In fact, ‘C-u Z `’ is like ‘Z `’ except that it sets the modes listed
above to their default values.  As usual, the matching ‘Z '’ will
restore the modes to their settings from before the ‘C-u Z `’.  Also,
‘Z `’ with a negative prefix argument resets the algebraic mode to its
default (off) but leaves the other modes the same as they were outside
the construct.

   The contents of the stack and trail, values of non-quick variables,
and other settings such as the language mode and the various display
modes, are _not_ affected by ‘Z `’ and ‘Z '’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Queries in Macros,  Prev: Local Values in Macros,  Up: Keyboard Macros

18.2.5 Queries in Keyboard Macros
---------------------------------

The ‘Z #’ (‘calc-kbd-query’) command prompts for an algebraic entry
which takes its input from the keyboard, even during macro execution.
All the normal conventions of algebraic input, including the use of ‘$’
characters, are supported.  The prompt message itself is taken from the
top of the stack, and so must be entered (as a string) before the ‘Z #’
command.  (Recall, as a string it can be entered by pressing the ‘"’ key
and will appear as a vector when it is put on the stack.  The prompt
message is only put on the stack to provide a prompt for the ‘Z #’
command; it will not play any role in any subsequent calculations.)
This command allows your keyboard macros to accept numbers or formulas
as interactive input.

   As an example, ‘2 <RET> "Power: " <RET> Z # 3 <RET> ^’ will prompt
for input with “Power: ” in the minibuffer, then return 2 to the
provided power.  (The response to the prompt that’s given, 3 in this
example, will not be part of the macro.)

   *Note (emacs)Keyboard Macro Query::, for a description of ‘C-x q’
(‘kbd-macro-query’), the standard Emacs way to accept keyboard input
during a keyboard macro.  In particular, you can use ‘C-x q’ to enter a
recursive edit, which allows the user to perform any Calculator
operations interactively before pressing ‘C-M-c’ to return control to
the keyboard macro.


File: calc.info,  Node: Invocation Macros,  Next: Algebraic Definitions,  Prev: Keyboard Macros,  Up: Programming

18.3 Invocation Macros
======================

Calc provides one special keyboard macro, called up by ‘C-x * z’
(‘calc-user-invocation’), that is intended to allow you to define your
own special way of starting Calc.  To define this “invocation macro,”
create the macro in the usual way with ‘C-x (’ and ‘C-x )’, then type ‘Z
I’ (‘calc-user-define-invocation’).  There is only one invocation macro,
so you don’t need to type any additional letters after ‘Z I’.  From now
on, you can type ‘C-x * z’ at any time to execute your invocation macro.

   For example, suppose you find yourself often grabbing rectangles of
numbers into Calc and multiplying their columns.  You can do this by
typing ‘C-x * r’ to grab, and ‘V R : *’ to multiply columns.  To make
this into an invocation macro, just type ‘C-x ( C-x * r V R : * C-x )’,
then ‘Z I’.  Then, to multiply a rectangle of data, just mark the data
in its buffer in the usual way and type ‘C-x * z’.

   Invocation macros are treated like regular Emacs keyboard macros; all
the special features described above for ‘Z K’-style macros do not
apply.  ‘C-x * z’ is just like ‘C-x e’, except that it uses the macro
that was last stored by ‘Z I’.  (In fact, the macro does not even have
to have anything to do with Calc!)

   The ‘m m’ command saves the last invocation macro defined by ‘Z I’
along with all the other Calc mode settings.  *Note General Mode
Commands::.


File: calc.info,  Node: Algebraic Definitions,  Next: Lisp Definitions,  Prev: Invocation Macros,  Up: Programming

18.4 Programming with Formulas
==============================

Another way to create a new Calculator command uses algebraic formulas.
The ‘Z F’ (‘calc-user-define-formula’) command stores the formula at the
top of the stack as the definition for a key.  This command prompts for
five things: The key, the command name, the function name, the argument
list, and the behavior of the command when given non-numeric arguments.

   For example, suppose we type ‘' a+2b <RET>’ to push the formula ‘a +
2*b’ onto the stack.  We now type ‘Z F m’ to define this formula on the
‘z m’ key sequence.  The next prompt is for a command name, beginning
with ‘calc-’, which should be the long (‘M-x’) form for the new command.
If you simply press <RET>, a default name like ‘calc-User-m’ will be
constructed.  In our example, suppose we enter ‘spam <RET>’ to define
the new command as ‘calc-spam’.

   If you want to give the formula a long-style name only, you can press
<SPC> or <RET> when asked which single key to use.  For example ‘Z F
<RET> spam <RET>’ defines the new command as ‘M-x calc-spam’, with no
keyboard equivalent.

   The third prompt is for an algebraic function name.  The default is
to use the same name as the command name but without the ‘calc-’ prefix.
(If this is of the form ‘User-m’, the hyphen is removed so it won’t be
taken for a minus sign in algebraic formulas.)  This is the name you
will use if you want to enter your new function in an algebraic formula.
Suppose we enter ‘yow <RET>’.  Then the new function can be invoked by
pushing two numbers on the stack and typing ‘z m’ or ‘x spam’, or by
entering the algebraic formula ‘yow(x,y)’.

   The fourth prompt is for the function’s argument list.  This is used
to associate values on the stack with the variables that appear in the
formula.  The default is a list of all variables which appear in the
formula, sorted into alphabetical order.  In our case, the default would
be ‘(a b)’.  This means that, when the user types ‘z m’, the Calculator
will remove two numbers from the stack, substitute these numbers for ‘a’
and ‘b’ (respectively) in the formula, then simplify the formula and
push the result on the stack.  In other words, ‘10 <RET> 100 z m’ would
replace the 10 and 100 on the stack with the number 210, which is ‘a + 2
b’ with ‘a=10’ and ‘b=100’.  Likewise, the formula ‘yow(10, 100)’ will
be evaluated by substituting ‘a=10’ and ‘b=100’ in the definition.

   You can rearrange the order of the names before pressing <RET> to
control which stack positions go to which variables in the formula.  If
you remove a variable from the argument list, that variable will be left
in symbolic form by the command.  Thus using an argument list of ‘(b)’
for our function would cause ‘10 z m’ to replace the 10 on the stack
with the formula ‘a + 20’.  If we had used an argument list of ‘(b a)’,
the result with inputs 10 and 100 would have been 120.

   You can also put a nameless function on the stack instead of just a
formula, as in ‘<a, b : a + 2 b>’.  *Note Specifying Operators::.  In
this example, the command will be defined by the formula ‘a + 2 b’ using
the argument list ‘(a b)’.

   The final prompt is a y-or-n question concerning what to do if
symbolic arguments are given to your function.  If you answer ‘y’, then
executing ‘z m’ (using the original argument list ‘(a b)’) with
arguments ‘10’ and ‘x’ will leave the function in symbolic form, i.e.,
‘yow(10,x)’.  On the other hand, if you answer ‘n’, then the formula
will always be expanded, even for non-constant arguments: ‘10 + 2 x’.
If you never plan to feed algebraic formulas to your new function, it
doesn’t matter how you answer this question.

   If you answered ‘y’ to this question you can still cause a function
call to be expanded by typing ‘a "’ (‘calc-expand-formula’).  Also, Calc
will expand the function if necessary when you take a derivative or
integral or solve an equation involving the function.

   Once you have defined a formula on a key, you can retrieve this
formula with the ‘Z G’ (‘calc-user-define-get-defn’) command.  Press a
key, and this command pushes the formula that was used to define that
key onto the stack.  Actually, it pushes a nameless function that
specifies both the argument list and the defining formula.  You will get
an error message if the key is undefined, or if the key was not defined
by a ‘Z F’ command.

   The ‘Z E’ (‘calc-user-define-edit’) command on a key that has been
defined by a formula uses a variant of the ‘calc-edit’ command to edit
the defining formula.  Press ‘C-c C-c’ to finish editing and store the
new formula back in the definition, or kill the buffer with ‘C-x k’ to
cancel the edit.  (The argument list and other properties of the
definition are unchanged; to adjust the argument list, you can use ‘Z G’
to grab the function onto the stack, edit with ‘`’, and then re-execute
the ‘Z F’ command.)

   As usual, the ‘Z P’ command records your definition permanently.  In
this case it will permanently record all three of the relevant
definitions: the key, the command, and the function.

   You may find it useful to turn off the default simplifications with
‘m O’ (‘calc-no-simplify-mode’) when entering a formula to be used as a
function definition.  For example, the formula ‘deriv(a^2,v)’ which
might be used to define a new function ‘dsqr(a,v)’ will be “simplified”
to 0 immediately upon entry since ‘deriv’ considers ‘a’ to be constant
with respect to ‘v’.  Turning off default simplifications cures this
problem: The definition will be stored in symbolic form without ever
activating the ‘deriv’ function.  Press ‘m D’ to turn the default
simplifications back on afterwards.


File: calc.info,  Node: Lisp Definitions,  Prev: Algebraic Definitions,  Up: Programming

18.5 Programming with Lisp
==========================

The Calculator can be programmed quite extensively in Lisp.  All you do
is write a normal Lisp function definition, but with ‘defmath’ in place
of ‘defun’.  This has the same form as ‘defun’, but it automagically
replaces calls to standard Lisp functions like ‘+’ and ‘zerop’ with
calls to the corresponding functions in Calc’s own library.  Thus you
can write natural-looking Lisp code which operates on all of the
standard Calculator data types.  You can then use ‘Z D’ if you wish to
bind your new command to a ‘z’-prefix key sequence.  The ‘Z E’ command
will not edit a Lisp-based definition.

   Emacs Lisp is described in the GNU Emacs Lisp Reference Manual.  This
section assumes a familiarity with Lisp programming concepts; if you do
not know Lisp, you may find keyboard macros or rewrite rules to be an
easier way to program the Calculator.

   This section first discusses ways to write commands, functions, or
small programs to be executed inside of Calc.  Then it discusses how
your own separate programs are able to call Calc from the outside.
Finally, there is a list of internal Calc functions and data structures
for the true Lisp enthusiast.

* Menu:

* Defining Functions::
* Defining Simple Commands::
* Defining Stack Commands::
* Argument Qualifiers::
* Example Definitions::

* Calling Calc from Your Programs::
* Internals::


File: calc.info,  Node: Defining Functions,  Next: Defining Simple Commands,  Prev: Lisp Definitions,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.1 Defining New Functions
-----------------------------

The ‘defmath’ function (actually a Lisp macro) is like ‘defun’ except
that code in the body of the definition can make use of the full range
of Calculator data types.  The prefix ‘calcFunc-’ is added to the
specified name to get the actual Lisp function name.  As a simple
example,

     (defmath myfact (n)
       (if (> n 0)
           (* n (myfact (1- n)))
         1))

This actually expands to the code,

     (defun calcFunc-myfact (n)
       (if (math-posp n)
           (math-mul n (calcFunc-myfact (math-add n -1)))
         1))

This function can be used in algebraic expressions, e.g., ‘myfact(5)’.

   The ‘myfact’ function as it is defined above has the bug that an
expression ‘myfact(a+b)’ will be simplified to 1 because the formula
‘a+b’ is not considered to be ‘posp’.  A robust factorial function would
be written along the following lines:

     (defmath myfact (n)
       (if (> n 0)
           (* n (myfact (1- n)))
         (if (= n 0)
             1
           nil)))    ; this could be simplified as: (and (= n 0) 1)

   If a function returns ‘nil’, it is left unsimplified by the
Calculator (except that its arguments will be simplified).  Thus,
‘myfact(a+1+2)’ will be simplified to ‘myfact(a+3)’ but no further.
Beware that every time the Calculator reexamines this formula it will
attempt to resimplify it, so your function ought to detect the
returning-‘nil’ case as efficiently as possible.

   The following standard Lisp functions are treated by ‘defmath’: ‘+’,
‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, ‘%’, ‘^’ or ‘expt’, ‘=’, ‘<’, ‘>’, ‘<=’, ‘>=’, ‘/=’,
‘1+’, ‘1-’, ‘logand’, ‘logior’, ‘logxor’, ‘logandc2’, ‘lognot’.  Also,
‘~=’ is an abbreviation for ‘math-nearly-equal’, which is useful in
implementing Taylor series.

   For other functions FUNC, if a function by the name ‘calcFunc-FUNC’
exists it is used, otherwise if a function by the name ‘math-FUNC’
exists it is used, otherwise if FUNC itself is defined as a function it
is used, otherwise ‘calcFunc-FUNC’ is used on the assumption that this
is a to-be-defined math function.  Also, if the function name is quoted
as in ‘('integerp a)’ the function name is always used exactly as
written (but not quoted).

   Variable names have ‘var-’ prepended to them unless they appear in
the function’s argument list or in an enclosing ‘let’, ‘let*’, ‘for’, or
‘foreach’ form, or their names already contain a ‘-’ character.  Thus a
reference to ‘foo’ is the same as a reference to ‘var-foo’.

   A few other Lisp extensions are available in ‘defmath’ definitions:

   • The ‘elt’ function accepts any number of index variables.  Note
     that Calc vectors are stored as Lisp lists whose first element is
     the symbol ‘vec’; thus, ‘(elt v 2)’ yields the second element of
     vector ‘v’, and ‘(elt m i j)’ yields one element of a Calc matrix.

   • The ‘setq’ function has been extended to act like the Common Lisp
     ‘setf’ function.  (The name ‘setf’ is recognized as a synonym of
     ‘setq’.)  Specifically, the first argument of ‘setq’ can be an
     ‘nth’, ‘elt’, ‘car’, or ‘cdr’ form, in which case the effect is to
     store into the specified element of a list.  Thus, ‘(setq (elt m i
     j) x)’ stores ‘x’ into one element of a matrix.

   • A ‘for’ looping construct is available.  For example, ‘(for ((i 0
     10)) body)’ executes ‘body’ once for each binding of ‘i’ from zero
     to 10.  This is like a ‘let’ form in that ‘i’ is temporarily bound
     to the loop count without disturbing its value outside the ‘for’
     construct.  Nested loops, as in ‘(for ((i 0 10) (j 0 (1- i) 2))
     body)’, are also available.  For each value of ‘i’ from zero to 10,
     ‘j’ counts from 0 to ‘i-1’ in steps of two.  Note that ‘for’ has
     the same general outline as ‘let*’, except that each element of the
     header is a list of three or four things, not just two.

   • The ‘foreach’ construct loops over elements of a list.  For
     example, ‘(foreach ((x (cdr v))) body)’ executes ‘body’ with ‘x’
     bound to each element of Calc vector ‘v’ in turn.  The purpose of
     ‘cdr’ here is to skip over the initial ‘vec’ symbol in the vector.

   • The ‘break’ function breaks out of the innermost enclosing ‘while’,
     ‘for’, or ‘foreach’ loop.  If given a value, as in ‘(break x)’,
     this value is returned by the loop.  (Lisp loops otherwise always
     return ‘nil’.)

   • The ‘return’ function prematurely returns from the enclosing
     function.  For example, ‘(return (+ x y))’ returns ‘x+y’ as the
     value of a function.  You can use ‘return’ anywhere inside the body
     of the function.

   Non-integer numbers (and extremely large integers) cannot be included
directly into a ‘defmath’ definition.  This is because the Lisp reader
will fail to parse them long before ‘defmath’ ever gets control.
Instead, use the notation, ‘:"3.1415"’.  In fact, any algebraic formula
can go between the quotes.  For example,

     (defmath sqexp (x)     ; sqexp(x) == sqrt(exp(x)) == exp(x*0.5)
       (and (numberp x)
            (exp :"x * 0.5")))

   expands to

     (defun calcFunc-sqexp (x)
       (and (math-numberp x)
            (calcFunc-exp (math-mul x '(float 5 -1)))))

   Note the use of ‘numberp’ as a guard to ensure that the argument is a
number first, returning ‘nil’ if not.  The exponential function could
itself have been included in the expression, if we had preferred:
‘:"exp(x * 0.5)"’.  As another example, the multiplication-and-recursion
step of ‘myfact’ could have been written

     :"n * myfact(n-1)"

   A good place to put your ‘defmath’ commands is your Calc init file
(the file given by ‘calc-settings-file’, typically
‘~/.emacs.d/calc.el’), which will not be loaded until Calc starts.  If a
file named ‘.emacs’ exists in your home directory, Emacs reads and
executes the Lisp forms in this file as it starts up.  While it may seem
reasonable to put your favorite ‘defmath’ commands there, this has the
unfortunate side-effect that parts of the Calculator must be loaded in
to process the ‘defmath’ commands whether or not you will actually use
the Calculator!  If you want to put the ‘defmath’ commands there (for
example, if you redefine ‘calc-settings-file’ to be ‘.emacs’), a better
effect can be had by writing

     (put 'calc-define 'thing '(progn
      (defmath ... )
      (defmath ... )
     ))

The ‘put’ function adds a “property” to a symbol.  Each Lisp symbol has
a list of properties associated with it.  Here we add a property with a
name of ‘thing’ and a ‘(progn ...)’ form as its value.  When Calc starts
up, and at the start of every Calc command, the property list for the
symbol ‘calc-define’ is checked and the values of any properties found
are evaluated as Lisp forms.  The properties are removed as they are
evaluated.  The property names (like ‘thing’) are not used; you should
choose something like the name of your project so as not to conflict
with other properties.

   The net effect is that you can put the above code in your ‘.emacs’
file and it will not be executed until Calc is loaded.  Or, you can put
that same code in another file which you load by hand either before or
after Calc itself is loaded.

   The properties of ‘calc-define’ are evaluated in the same order that
they were added.  They can assume that the Calc modules ‘calc.el’,
‘calc-ext.el’, and ‘calc-macs.el’ have been fully loaded, and that the
‘*Calculator*’ buffer will be the current buffer.

   If your ‘calc-define’ property only defines algebraic functions, you
can be sure that it will have been evaluated before Calc tries to call
your function, even if the file defining the property is loaded after
Calc is loaded.  But if the property defines commands or key sequences,
it may not be evaluated soon enough.  (Suppose it defines the new
command ‘tweak-calc’; the user can load your file, then type ‘M-x
tweak-calc’ before Calc has had chance to do anything.)  To protect
against this situation, you can put

     (run-hooks 'calc-check-defines)

at the end of your file.  The ‘calc-check-defines’ function is what
looks for and evaluates properties on ‘calc-define’; ‘run-hooks’ has the
advantage that it is quietly ignored if ‘calc-check-defines’ is not yet
defined because Calc has not yet been loaded.

   Examples of things that ought to be enclosed in a ‘calc-define’
property are ‘defmath’ calls, ‘define-key’ calls that modify the Calc
key map, and any calls that redefine things defined inside Calc.
Ordinary ‘defun’s need not be enclosed with ‘calc-define’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Defining Simple Commands,  Next: Defining Stack Commands,  Prev: Defining Functions,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.2 Defining New Simple Commands
-----------------------------------

If a ‘defmath’ form contains an ‘interactive’ clause, it defines a
Calculator command.  Actually such a ‘defmath’ results in _two_ function
definitions: One, a ‘calcFunc-’ function as was just described, with the
‘interactive’ clause removed.  Two, a ‘calc-’ function with a suitable
‘interactive’ clause and some sort of wrapper to make the command work
in the Calc environment.

   In the simple case, the ‘interactive’ clause has the same form as for
normal Emacs Lisp commands:

     (defmath increase-precision (delta)
       "Increase precision by DELTA."     ; This is the "documentation string"
       (interactive "p")                  ; Register this as a M-x-able command
       (setq calc-internal-prec (+ calc-internal-prec delta)))

   This expands to the pair of definitions,

     (defun calc-increase-precision (delta)
       "Increase precision by DELTA."
       (interactive "p")
       (calc-wrapper
        (setq calc-internal-prec (math-add calc-internal-prec delta))))

     (defun calcFunc-increase-precision (delta)
       "Increase precision by DELTA."
       (setq calc-internal-prec (math-add calc-internal-prec delta)))

where in this case the latter function would never really be used!  Note
that since the Calculator stores small integers as plain Lisp integers,
the ‘math-add’ function will work just as well as the native ‘+’ even
when the intent is to operate on native Lisp integers.

   The ‘calc-wrapper’ call invokes a macro which surrounds the body of
the function with code that looks roughly like this:

     (let ((calc-command-flags nil))
       (unwind-protect
           (save-current-buffer
             (calc-select-buffer)
             _body of function_
             _renumber stack_
             _clear_ Working _message_)
         _realign cursor and window_
         _clear Inverse, Hyperbolic, and Keep Args flags_
         _update Emacs mode line_))

   The ‘calc-select-buffer’ function selects the ‘*Calculator*’ buffer
if necessary, say, because the command was invoked from inside the
‘*Calc Trail*’ window.

   You can call, for example, ‘(calc-set-command-flag 'no-align)’ to set
the above-mentioned command flags.  Calc routines recognize the
following command flags:

‘renum-stack’
     Stack line numbers ‘1:’, ‘2:’, and so on must be renumbered after
     this command completes.  This is set by routines like ‘calc-push’.

‘clear-message’
     Calc should call ‘(message "")’ if this command completes normally
     (to clear a “Working...” message out of the echo area).

‘no-align’
     Do not move the cursor back to the ‘.’ top-of-stack marker.

‘position-point’
     Use the variables ‘calc-position-point-line’ and
     ‘calc-position-point-column’ to position the cursor after this
     command finishes.

‘keep-flags’
     Do not clear ‘calc-inverse-flag’, ‘calc-hyperbolic-flag’, and
     ‘calc-keep-args-flag’ at the end of this command.

‘do-edit’
     Switch to buffer ‘*Calc Edit*’ after this command.

‘hold-trail’
     Do not move trail pointer to end of trail when something is
     recorded there.

   Calc reserves a special prefix key, shift-‘Y’, for user-written
extensions to Calc.  There are no built-in commands that work with this
prefix key; you must call ‘define-key’ from Lisp (probably from inside a
‘calc-define’ property) to add to it.  Initially only ‘Y ?’ is defined;
it takes help messages from a list of strings (initially ‘nil’) in the
variable ‘calc-Y-help-msgs’.  All other undefined keys except for ‘Y’
are reserved for use by future versions of Calc.

   If you are writing a Calc enhancement which you expect to give to
others, it is best to minimize the number of ‘Y’-key sequences you use.
In fact, if you have more than one key sequence you should consider
defining three-key sequences with a ‘Y’, then a key that stands for your
package, then a third key for the particular command within your
package.

   Users may wish to install several Calc enhancements, and it is
possible that several enhancements will choose to use the same key.  In
the example below, a variable ‘inc-prec-base-key’ has been defined to
contain the key that identifies the ‘inc-prec’ package.  Its value is
initially ‘"P"’, but a user can change this variable if necessary
without having to modify the file.

   Here is a complete file, ‘inc-prec.el’, which makes a ‘Y P I’ command
that increases the precision, and a ‘Y P D’ command that decreases the
precision.

     ;;; Increase and decrease Calc precision.  Dave Gillespie, 5/31/91.
     ;; (Include copyright or copyleft stuff here.)

     (defvar inc-prec-base-key "P"
       "Base key for inc-prec.el commands.")

     (put 'calc-define 'inc-prec '(progn

     (define-key calc-mode-map (format "Y%sI" inc-prec-base-key)
                 'increase-precision)
     (define-key calc-mode-map (format "Y%sD" inc-prec-base-key)
                 'decrease-precision)

     (setq calc-Y-help-msgs
           (cons (format "%s + Inc-prec, Dec-prec" inc-prec-base-key)
                 calc-Y-help-msgs))

     (defmath increase-precision (delta)
       "Increase precision by DELTA."
       (interactive "p")
       (setq calc-internal-prec (+ calc-internal-prec delta)))

     (defmath decrease-precision (delta)
       "Decrease precision by DELTA."
       (interactive "p")
       (setq calc-internal-prec (- calc-internal-prec delta)))

     ))  ; end of calc-define property

     (run-hooks 'calc-check-defines)


File: calc.info,  Node: Defining Stack Commands,  Next: Argument Qualifiers,  Prev: Defining Simple Commands,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.3 Defining New Stack-Based Commands
----------------------------------------

To define a new computational command which takes and/or leaves
arguments on the stack, a special form of ‘interactive’ clause is used.

     (interactive NUM TAG)

where NUM is an integer, and TAG is a string.  The effect is to pop NUM
values off the stack, resimplify them by calling ‘calc-normalize’, and
hand them to your function according to the function’s argument list.
Your function may include ‘&optional’ and ‘&rest’ parameters, so long as
calling the function with NUM parameters is valid.

   Your function must return either a number or a formula in a form
acceptable to Calc, or a list of such numbers or formulas.  These
value(s) are pushed onto the stack when the function completes.  They
are also recorded in the Calc Trail buffer on a line beginning with TAG,
a string of (normally) four characters or less.  If you omit TAG or use
‘nil’ as a tag, the result is not recorded in the trail.

   As an example, the definition

     (defmath myfact (n)
       "Compute the factorial of the integer at the top of the stack."
       (interactive 1 "fact")
       (if (> n 0)
           (* n (myfact (1- n)))
         (and (= n 0) 1)))

is a version of the factorial function shown previously which can be
used as a command as well as an algebraic function.  It expands to

     (defun calc-myfact ()
       "Compute the factorial of the integer at the top of the stack."
       (interactive)
       (calc-slow-wrapper
        (calc-enter-result 1 "fact"
          (cons 'calcFunc-myfact (calc-top-list-n 1)))))

     (defun calcFunc-myfact (n)
       "Compute the factorial of the integer at the top of the stack."
       (if (math-posp n)
           (math-mul n (calcFunc-myfact (math-add n -1)))
         (and (math-zerop n) 1)))

   The ‘calc-slow-wrapper’ function is a version of ‘calc-wrapper’ that
automatically puts up a ‘Working...’ message before the computation
begins.  (This message can be turned off by the user with an ‘m w’
(‘calc-working’) command.)

   The ‘calc-top-list-n’ function returns a list of the specified number
of values from the top of the stack.  It resimplifies each value by
calling ‘calc-normalize’.  If its argument is zero it returns an empty
list.  It does not actually remove these values from the stack.

   The ‘calc-enter-result’ function takes an integer NUM and string TAG
as described above, plus a third argument which is either a Calculator
data object or a list of such objects.  These objects are resimplified
and pushed onto the stack after popping the specified number of values
from the stack.  If TAG is non-‘nil’, the values being pushed are also
recorded in the trail.

   Note that if ‘calcFunc-myfact’ returns ‘nil’ this represents “leave
the function in symbolic form.” To return an actual empty list, in the
sense that ‘calc-enter-result’ will push zero elements back onto the
stack, you should return the special value ‘'(nil)’, a list containing
the single symbol ‘nil’.

   The ‘interactive’ declaration can actually contain a limited
Emacs-style code string as well which comes just before NUM and TAG.
Currently the only Emacs code supported is ‘"p"’, as in

     (defmath foo (a b &optional c)
       (interactive "p" 2 "foo")
       BODY)

   In this example, the command ‘calc-foo’ will evaluate the expression
‘foo(a,b)’ if executed with no argument, or ‘foo(a,b,n)’ if executed
with a numeric prefix argument of ‘n’.

   The other code string allowed is ‘"m"’ (unrelated to the usual ‘"m"’
code as used with ‘defun’).  It uses the numeric prefix argument as the
number of objects to remove from the stack and pass to the function.  In
this case, the integer NUM serves as a default number of arguments to be
used when no prefix is supplied.


File: calc.info,  Node: Argument Qualifiers,  Next: Example Definitions,  Prev: Defining Stack Commands,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.4 Argument Qualifiers
--------------------------

Anywhere a parameter name can appear in the parameter list you can also
use an “argument qualifier”.  Thus the general form of a definition is:

     (defmath NAME (PARAM PARAM...
                    &optional PARAM PARAM...
                    &rest PARAM)
       BODY)

where each PARAM is either a symbol or a list of the form

     (QUAL PARAM)

   The following qualifiers are recognized:

‘complete’
     The argument must not be an incomplete vector, interval, or complex
     number.  (This is rarely needed since the Calculator itself will
     never call your function with an incomplete argument.  But there is
     nothing stopping your own Lisp code from calling your function with
     an incomplete argument.)

‘integer’
     The argument must be an integer.  If it is an integer-valued float
     it will be accepted but converted to integer form.  Non-integers
     and formulas are rejected.

‘natnum’
     Like ‘integer’, but the argument must be non-negative.

‘fixnum’
     Like ‘integer’, but the argument must fit into a native Lisp
     integer, which on most systems means less than 2^23 in absolute
     value.  The argument is converted into Lisp-integer form if
     necessary.

‘float’
     The argument is converted to floating-point format if it is a
     number or vector.  If it is a formula it is left alone.  (The
     argument is never actually rejected by this qualifier.)

‘PRED’
     The argument must satisfy predicate PRED, which is one of the
     standard Calculator predicates.  *Note Predicates::.

‘not-PRED’
     The argument must _not_ satisfy predicate PRED.

   For example,

     (defmath foo (a (constp (not-matrixp b)) &optional (float c)
                   &rest (integer d))
       BODY)

expands to

     (defun calcFunc-foo (a b &optional c &rest d)
       (and (math-matrixp b)
            (math-reject-arg b 'not-matrixp))
       (or (math-constp b)
           (math-reject-arg b 'constp))
       (and c (setq c (math-check-float c)))
       (setq d (mapcar 'math-check-integer d))
       BODY)

which performs the necessary checks and conversions before executing the
body of the function.


File: calc.info,  Node: Example Definitions,  Next: Calling Calc from Your Programs,  Prev: Argument Qualifiers,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.5 Example Definitions
--------------------------

This section includes some Lisp programming examples on a larger scale.
These programs make use of some of the Calculator’s internal functions;
*note Internals::.

* Menu:

* Bit Counting Example::
* Sine Example::


File: calc.info,  Node: Bit Counting Example,  Next: Sine Example,  Prev: Example Definitions,  Up: Example Definitions

18.5.5.1 Bit-Counting
.....................

Calc does not include a built-in function for counting the number of
“one” bits in a binary integer.  It’s easy to invent one using ‘b u’ to
convert the integer to a set, and ‘V #’ to count the elements of that
set; let’s write a function that counts the bits without having to
create an intermediate set.

     (defmath bcount ((natnum n))
       (interactive 1 "bcnt")
       (let ((count 0))
         (while (> n 0)
           (if (oddp n)
               (setq count (1+ count)))
           (setq n (ash n -1)))
         count))

When this is expanded by ‘defmath’, it will become the following Emacs
Lisp function:

     (defun calcFunc-bcount (n)
       (setq n (math-check-natnum n))
       (let ((count 0))
         (while (math-posp n)
           (if (math-oddp n)
               (setq count (math-add count 1)))
           (setq n (calcFunc-lsh n -1)))
         count))

   If the input numbers are large, this function involves a fair amount
of arithmetic.  A binary right shift is essentially a division by two;
recall that Calc stores integers in decimal form so bit shifts must
involve actual division.

   To gain a bit more efficiency, we could divide the integer into N-bit
chunks, each of which can be handled quickly because they fit into Lisp
integers.  It turns out that Calc’s arithmetic routines are especially
fast when dividing by an integer less than 1000, so we can set N = 9
bits and use repeated division by 512:

     (defmath bcount ((natnum n))
       (interactive 1 "bcnt")
       (let ((count 0))
         (while (not (fixnump n))
           (let ((qr (idivmod n 512)))
             (setq count (+ count (bcount-fixnum (cdr qr)))
                   n (car qr))))
         (+ count (bcount-fixnum n))))

     (defun bcount-fixnum (n)
       (let ((count 0))
         (while (> n 0)
           (setq count (+ count (logand n 1))
                 n (ash n -1)))
         count))

Note that the second function uses ‘defun’, not ‘defmath’.  Because this
function deals only with native Lisp integers (“fixnums”), it can use
the actual Emacs ‘+’ and related functions rather than the slower but
more general Calc equivalents which ‘defmath’ uses.

   The ‘idivmod’ function does an integer division, returning both the
quotient and the remainder at once.  Again, note that while it might
seem that ‘(logand n 511)’ and ‘(ash n -9)’ are more efficient ways to
split off the bottom nine bits of ‘n’, actually they are less efficient
because each operation is really a division by 512 in disguise;
‘idivmod’ allows us to do the same thing with a single division by 512.


File: calc.info,  Node: Sine Example,  Prev: Bit Counting Example,  Up: Example Definitions

18.5.5.2 The Sine Function
..........................

A somewhat limited sine function could be defined as follows, using the
well-known Taylor series expansion for ‘sin(x)’:

     (defmath mysin ((float (anglep x)))
       (interactive 1 "mysn")
       (setq x (to-radians x))    ; Convert from current angular mode.
       (let ((sum x)              ; Initial term of Taylor expansion of sin.
             newsum
             (nfact 1)            ; "nfact" equals "n" factorial at all times.
             (xnegsqr :"-(x^2)")) ; "xnegsqr" equals -x^2.
         (for ((n 3 100 2))       ; Upper limit of 100 is a good precaution.
           (working "mysin" sum)  ; Display "Working" message, if enabled.
           (setq nfact (* nfact (1- n) n)
                 x (* x xnegsqr)
                 newsum (+ sum (/ x nfact)))
           (if (~= newsum sum)    ; If newsum is "nearly equal to" sum,
               (break))           ;  then we are done.
           (setq sum newsum))
         sum))

   The actual ‘sin’ function in Calc works by first reducing the problem
to a sine or cosine of a nonnegative number less than ‘pi/4’.  This
ensures that the Taylor series will converge quickly.  Also, the
calculation is carried out with two extra digits of precision to guard
against cumulative round-off in ‘sum’.  Finally, complex arguments are
allowed and handled by a separate algorithm.

     (defmath mysin ((float (scalarp x)))
       (interactive 1 "mysn")
       (setq x (to-radians x))    ; Convert from current angular mode.
       (with-extra-prec 2         ; Evaluate with extra precision.
         (cond ((complexp x)
                (mysin-complex x))
               ((< x 0)
                (- (mysin-raw (- x)))    ; Always call mysin-raw with x >= 0.
               (t (mysin-raw x))))))

     (defmath mysin-raw (x)
       (cond ((>= x 7)
              (mysin-raw (% x (two-pi))))     ; Now x < 7.
             ((> x (pi-over-2))
              (- (mysin-raw (- x (pi)))))     ; Now -pi/2 <= x <= pi/2.
             ((> x (pi-over-4))
              (mycos-raw (- x (pi-over-2))))  ; Now -pi/2 <= x <= pi/4.
             ((< x (- (pi-over-4)))
              (- (mycos-raw (+ x (pi-over-2)))))  ; Now -pi/4 <= x <= pi/4,
             (t (mysin-series x))))           ; so the series will be efficient.

where ‘mysin-complex’ is an appropriate function to handle complex
numbers, ‘mysin-series’ is the routine to compute the sine Taylor series
as before, and ‘mycos-raw’ is a function analogous to ‘mysin-raw’ for
cosines.

   The strategy is to ensure that ‘x’ is nonnegative before calling
‘mysin-raw’.  This function then recursively reduces its argument to a
suitable range, namely, plus-or-minus ‘pi/4’.  Note that each test, and
particularly the first comparison against 7, is designed so that small
roundoff errors cannot produce an infinite loop.  (Suppose we compared
with ‘(two-pi)’ instead; if due to roundoff problems the modulo operator
ever returned ‘(two-pi)’ exactly, an infinite recursion could result!)
We use modulo only for arguments that will clearly get reduced, knowing
that the next rule will catch any reductions that this rule misses.

   If a program is being written for general use, it is important to
code it carefully as shown in this second example.  For quick-and-dirty
programs, when you know that your own use of the sine function will
never encounter a large argument, a simpler program like the first one
shown is fine.


File: calc.info,  Node: Calling Calc from Your Programs,  Next: Internals,  Prev: Example Definitions,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.6 Calling Calc from Your Lisp Programs
-------------------------------------------

A later section (*note Internals::) gives a full description of Calc’s
internal Lisp functions.  It’s not hard to call Calc from inside your
programs, but the number of these functions can be daunting.  So Calc
provides one special “programmer-friendly” function called ‘calc-eval’
that can be made to do just about everything you need.  It’s not as fast
as the low-level Calc functions, but it’s much simpler to use!

   It may seem that ‘calc-eval’ itself has a daunting number of options,
but they all stem from one simple operation.

   In its simplest manifestation, ‘(calc-eval "1+2")’ parses the string
‘"1+2"’ as if it were a Calc algebraic entry and returns the result
formatted as a string: ‘"3"’.

   Since ‘calc-eval’ is on the list of recommended ‘autoload’ functions,
you don’t need to make any special preparations to load Calc before
calling ‘calc-eval’ the first time.  Calc will be loaded and initialized
for you.

   All the Calc modes that are currently in effect will be used when
evaluating the expression and formatting the result.



18.5.6.1 Additional Arguments to ‘calc-eval’
............................................

If the input string parses to a list of expressions, Calc returns the
results separated by ‘", "’.  You can specify a different separator by
giving a second string argument to ‘calc-eval’: ‘(calc-eval "1+2,3+4"
";")’ returns ‘"3;7"’.

   The “separator” can also be any of several Lisp symbols which request
other behaviors from ‘calc-eval’.  These are discussed one by one below.

   You can give additional arguments to be substituted for ‘$’, ‘$$’,
and so on in the main expression.  For example, ‘(calc-eval "$/$$" nil
"7" "1+1")’ evaluates the expression ‘"7/(1+1)"’ to yield the result
‘"3.5"’ (assuming Fraction mode is not in effect).  Note the ‘nil’ used
as a placeholder for the item-separator argument.



18.5.6.2 Error Handling
.......................

If ‘calc-eval’ encounters an error, it returns a list containing the
character position of the error, plus a suitable message as a string.
Note that ‘1 / 0’ is _not_ an error by Calc’s standards; it simply
returns the string ‘"1 / 0"’ which is the division left in symbolic
form.  But ‘(calc-eval "1/")’ will return the list ‘(2 "Expected a
number")’.

   If you bind the variable ‘calc-eval-error’ to ‘t’ using a ‘let’ form
surrounding the call to ‘calc-eval’, errors instead call the Emacs
‘error’ function which aborts to the Emacs command loop with a beep and
an error message.

   If you bind this variable to the symbol ‘string’, error messages are
returned as strings instead of lists.  The character position is
ignored.

   As a courtesy to other Lisp code which may be using Calc, be sure to
bind ‘calc-eval-error’ using ‘let’ rather than changing it permanently
with ‘setq’.



18.5.6.3 Numbers Only
.....................

Sometimes it is preferable to treat ‘1 / 0’ as an error rather than
returning a symbolic result.  If you pass the symbol ‘num’ as the second
argument to ‘calc-eval’, results that are not constants are treated as
errors.  The error message reported is the first ‘calc-why’ message if
there is one, or otherwise “Number expected.”

   A result is “constant” if it is a number, vector, or other object
that does not include variables or function calls.  If it is a vector,
the components must themselves be constants.



18.5.6.4 Default Modes
......................

If the first argument to ‘calc-eval’ is a list whose first element is a
formula string, then ‘calc-eval’ sets all the various Calc modes to
their default values while the formula is evaluated and formatted.  For
example, the precision is set to 12 digits, digit grouping is turned
off, and the Normal language mode is used.

   This same principle applies to the other options discussed below.  If
the first argument would normally be X, then it can also be the list
‘(X)’ to use the default mode settings.

   If there are other elements in the list, they are taken as
variable-name/value pairs which override the default mode settings.
Look at the documentation at the front of the ‘calc.el’ file to find the
names of the Lisp variables for the various modes.  The mode settings
are restored to their original values when ‘calc-eval’ is done.

   For example, ‘(calc-eval '("$+$$" calc-internal-prec 8) 'num a b)’
computes the sum of two numbers, requiring a numeric result, and using
default mode settings except that the precision is 8 instead of the
default of 12.

   It’s usually best to use this form of ‘calc-eval’ unless your program
actually considers the interaction with Calc’s mode settings to be a
feature.  This will avoid all sorts of potential “gotchas”; consider
what happens with ‘(calc-eval "sqrt(2)" 'num)’ when the user has left
Calc in Symbolic mode or No-Simplify mode.

   As another example, ‘(equal (calc-eval '("$<$$") nil a b) "1")’
checks if the number in string ‘a’ is less than the one in string ‘b’.
Without using a list, the integer 1 might come out in a variety of
formats which would be hard to test for conveniently: ‘"1"’, ‘"8#1"’,
‘"00001"’.  (But see “Predicates” mode, below.)



18.5.6.5 Raw Numbers
....................

Normally all input and output for ‘calc-eval’ is done with strings.  You
can do arithmetic with, say, ‘(calc-eval "$+$$" nil a b)’ in place of
‘(+ a b)’, but this is very inefficient since the numbers must be
converted to and from string format as they are passed from one
‘calc-eval’ to the next.

   If the separator is the symbol ‘raw’, the result will be returned as
a raw Calc data structure rather than a string.  You can read about how
these objects look in the following sections, but usually you can treat
them as “black box” objects with no important internal structure.

   There is also a ‘rawnum’ symbol, which is a combination of ‘raw’
(returning a raw Calc object) and ‘num’ (signaling an error if that
object is not a constant).

   You can pass a raw Calc object to ‘calc-eval’ in place of a string,
either as the formula itself or as one of the ‘$’ arguments.  Thus
‘(calc-eval "$+$$" 'raw a b)’ is an addition function that operates on
raw Calc objects.  Of course in this case it would be easier to call the
low-level ‘math-add’ function in Calc, if you can remember its name.

   In particular, note that a plain Lisp integer is acceptable to Calc
as a raw object.  (All Lisp integers are accepted on input, but integers
of more than six decimal digits are converted to “big-integer” form for
output.  *Note Data Type Formats::.)

   When it comes time to display the object, just use ‘(calc-eval a)’ to
format it as a string.

   It is an error if the input expression evaluates to a list of values.
The separator symbol ‘list’ is like ‘raw’ except that it returns a list
of one or more raw Calc objects.

   Note that a Lisp string is not a valid Calc object, nor is a list
containing a string.  Thus you can still safely distinguish all the
various kinds of error returns discussed above.



18.5.6.6 Predicates
...................

If the separator symbol is ‘pred’, the result of the formula is treated
as a true/false value; ‘calc-eval’ returns ‘t’ or ‘nil’, respectively.
A value is considered “true” if it is a non-zero number, or false if it
is zero or if it is not a number.

   For example, ‘(calc-eval "$<$$" 'pred a b)’ tests whether one value
is less than another.

   As usual, it is also possible for ‘calc-eval’ to return one of the
error indicators described above.  Lisp will interpret such an indicator
as “true” if you don’t check for it explicitly.  If you wish to have an
error register as “false”, use something like ‘(eq (calc-eval ...) t)’.



18.5.6.7 Variable Values
........................

Variables in the formula passed to ‘calc-eval’ are not normally replaced
by their values.  If you wish this, you can use the ‘evalv’ function
(*note Algebraic Manipulation::).  For example, if 4 is stored in Calc
variable ‘a’ (i.e., in Lisp variable ‘var-a’), then ‘(calc-eval "a+pi")’
will return the formula ‘"a + pi"’, but ‘(calc-eval "evalv(a+pi)")’ will
return ‘"7.14159265359"’.

   To store in a Calc variable, just use ‘setq’ to store in the
corresponding Lisp variable.  (This is obtained by prepending ‘var-’ to
the Calc variable name.)  Calc routines will understand either string or
raw form values stored in variables, although raw data objects are much
more efficient.  For example, to increment the Calc variable ‘a’:

     (setq var-a (calc-eval "evalv(a+1)" 'raw))



18.5.6.8 Stack Access
.....................

If the separator symbol is ‘push’, the formula argument is evaluated
(with possible ‘$’ expansions, as usual).  The result is pushed onto the
Calc stack.  The return value is ‘nil’ (unless there is an error from
evaluating the formula, in which case the return value depends on
‘calc-eval-error’ in the usual way).

   If the separator symbol is ‘pop’, the first argument to ‘calc-eval’
must be an integer instead of a string.  That many values are popped
from the stack and thrown away.  A negative argument deletes the entry
at that stack level.  The return value is the number of elements
remaining in the stack after popping; ‘(calc-eval 0 'pop)’ is a good way
to measure the size of the stack.

   If the separator symbol is ‘top’, the first argument to ‘calc-eval’
must again be an integer.  The value at that stack level is formatted as
a string and returned.  Thus ‘(calc-eval 1 'top)’ returns the
top-of-stack value.  If the integer is out of range, ‘nil’ is returned.

   The separator symbol ‘rawtop’ is just like ‘top’ except that the
stack entry is returned as a raw Calc object instead of as a string.

   In all of these cases the first argument can be made a list in order
to force the default mode settings, as described above.  Thus
‘(calc-eval '(2 calc-number-radix 16) 'top)’ returns the second-to-top
stack entry, formatted as a string using the default instead of current
display modes, except that the radix is hexadecimal instead of decimal.

   It is, of course, polite to put the Calc stack back the way you found
it when you are done, unless the user of your program is actually
expecting it to affect the stack.

   Note that you do not actually have to switch into the ‘*Calculator*’
buffer in order to use ‘calc-eval’; it temporarily switches into the
stack buffer if necessary.



18.5.6.9 Keyboard Macros
........................

If the separator symbol is ‘macro’, the first argument must be a string
of characters which Calc can execute as a sequence of keystrokes.  This
switches into the Calc buffer for the duration of the macro.  For
example, ‘(calc-eval "vx5\rVR+" 'macro)’ pushes the vector ‘[1,2,3,4,5]’
on the stack and then replaces it with the sum of those numbers.  Note
that ‘\r’ is the Lisp notation for the carriage return, <RET>,
character.

   If your keyboard macro wishes to pop the stack, ‘\C-d’ is safer than
‘\177’ (the <DEL> character) because some installations may have
switched the meanings of <DEL> and ‘C-h’.  Calc always interprets ‘C-d’
as a synonym for “pop-stack” regardless of key mapping.

   If you provide a third argument to ‘calc-eval’, evaluation of the
keyboard macro will leave a record in the Trail using that argument as a
tag string.  Normally the Trail is unaffected.

   The return value in this case is always ‘nil’.



18.5.6.10 Lisp Evaluation
.........................

Finally, if the separator symbol is ‘eval’, then the Lisp ‘eval’
function is called on the first argument, which must be a Lisp
expression rather than a Calc formula.  Remember to quote the expression
so that it is not evaluated until inside ‘calc-eval’.

   The difference from plain ‘eval’ is that ‘calc-eval’ switches to the
Calc buffer before evaluating the expression.  For example, ‘(calc-eval
'(setq calc-internal-prec 17) 'eval)’ will correctly affect the
buffer-local Calc precision variable.

   An alternative would be ‘(calc-eval '(calc-precision 17) 'eval)’.
This is evaluating a call to the function that is normally invoked by
the ‘p’ key, giving it 17 as its “numeric prefix argument.” Note that
this function will leave a message in the echo area as a side effect.
Also, all Calc functions switch to the Calc buffer automatically if not
invoked from there, so the above call is also equivalent to
‘(calc-precision 17)’ by itself.  In all cases, Calc uses
‘save-excursion’ to switch back to your original buffer when it is done.

   As usual the first argument can be a list that begins with a Lisp
expression to use default instead of current mode settings.

   The result of ‘calc-eval’ in this usage is just the result returned
by the evaluated Lisp expression.



18.5.6.11 Example
.................

Here is a sample Emacs command that uses ‘calc-eval’.  Suppose you have
a document with lots of references to temperatures on the Fahrenheit
scale, say “98.6 F”, and you wish to convert these references to
Centigrade.  The following command does this conversion.  Place the
Emacs cursor right after the letter “F” and invoke the command to change
“98.6 F” to “37 C”.  Or, if the temperature is already in Centigrade
form, the command changes it back to Fahrenheit.

     (defun convert-temp ()
       (interactive)
       (save-excursion
         (re-search-backward "[^-.0-9]\\([-.0-9]+\\) *\\([FC]\\)")
         (let* ((top1 (match-beginning 1))
                (bot1 (match-end 1))
                (number (buffer-substring top1 bot1))
                (top2 (match-beginning 2))
                (bot2 (match-end 2))
                (type (buffer-substring top2 bot2)))
           (if (equal type "F")
               (setq type "C"
                     number (calc-eval "($ - 32)*5/9" nil number))
             (setq type "F"
                   number (calc-eval "$*9/5 + 32" nil number)))
           (goto-char top2)
           (delete-region top2 bot2)
           (insert-before-markers type)
           (goto-char top1)
           (delete-region top1 bot1)
           (if (string-match "\\.$" number)   ; change "37." to "37"
               (setq number (substring number 0 -1)))
           (insert number))))

   Note the use of ‘insert-before-markers’ when changing between “F” and
“C”, so that the character winds up before the cursor instead of after
it.


File: calc.info,  Node: Internals,  Prev: Calling Calc from Your Programs,  Up: Lisp Definitions

18.5.7 Calculator Internals
---------------------------

This section describes the Lisp functions defined by the Calculator that
may be of use to user-written Calculator programs (as described in the
rest of this chapter).  These functions are shown by their names as they
conventionally appear in ‘defmath’.  Their full Lisp names are generally
gotten by prepending ‘calcFunc-’ or ‘math-’ to their apparent names.
(Names that begin with ‘calc-’ are already in their full Lisp form.)
You can use the actual full names instead if you prefer them, or if you
are calling these functions from regular Lisp.

   The functions described here are scattered throughout the various
Calc component files.  Note that ‘calc.el’ includes ‘autoload’s for only
a few component files; to get autoloads of the more advanced function,
one needs to load ‘calc-ext.el’, which in turn autoloads all the
functions in the remaining component files.

   Because ‘defmath’ itself uses the extensions, user-written code
generally always executes with the extensions already loaded, so
normally you can use any Calc function and be confident that it will be
autoloaded for you when necessary.  If you are doing something special,
check carefully to make sure each function you are using is from
‘calc.el’ or its components, and use ‘(require 'calc-ext)’ before using
any function based in ‘calc-ext.el’ if you can’t prove this file will
already be loaded.

* Menu:

* Data Type Formats::
* Interactive Lisp Functions::
* Stack Lisp Functions::
* Predicates::
* Computational Lisp Functions::
* Vector Lisp Functions::
* Symbolic Lisp Functions::
* Formatting Lisp Functions::
* Hooks::


File: calc.info,  Node: Data Type Formats,  Next: Interactive Lisp Functions,  Prev: Internals,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.1 Data Type Formats
..........................

Integers are stored in either of two ways, depending on their magnitude.
Integers less than one million in absolute value are stored as standard
Lisp integers.  This is the only storage format for Calc data objects
which is not a Lisp list.

   Large integers are stored as lists of the form ‘(bigpos D0 D1 D2
...)’ for sufficiently large positive integers (where “sufficiently
large” depends on the machine), or ‘(bigneg D0 D1 D2 ...)’ for negative
integers.  Each D is a base-‘10^n’ “digit” (where again, ‘n’ depends on
the machine), a Lisp integer from 0 to 99...9.  The least significant
digit is D0; the last digit, DN, which is always nonzero, is the most
significant digit.  For example, the integer -12345678 might be stored
as ‘(bigneg 678 345 12)’.

   The distinction between small and large integers is entirely hidden
from the user.  In ‘defmath’ definitions, the Lisp predicate ‘integerp’
returns true for either kind of integer, and in general both big and
small integers are accepted anywhere the word “integer” is used in this
manual.  If the distinction must be made, native Lisp integers are
called “fixnums” and large integers are called “bignums”.

   Fractions are stored as a list of the form, ‘(frac N D)’ where N is
an integer (big or small) numerator, D is an integer denominator greater
than one, and N and D are relatively prime.  Note that fractions where D
is one are automatically converted to plain integers by all math
routines; fractions where D is negative are normalized by negating the
numerator and denominator.

   Floating-point numbers are stored in the form, ‘(float MANT EXP)’,
where MANT (the “mantissa”) is an integer less than ‘10^P’ in absolute
value (P represents the current precision), and EXP (the “exponent”) is
a fixnum.  The value of the float is ‘MANT * 10^EXP’.  For example, the
number -3.14 is stored as ‘(float -314 -2) = -314*10^-2’.  Other
constraints are that the number 0.0 is always stored as ‘(float 0 0)’,
and, except for the 0.0 case, the rightmost base-10 digit of MANT is
always nonzero.  (If the rightmost digit is zero, the number is
rearranged by dividing MANT by ten and incrementing EXP.)

   Rectangular complex numbers are stored in the form ‘(cplx RE IM)’,
where RE and IM are each real numbers, either integers, fractions, or
floats.  The value is ‘RE + IMi’.  The IM part is nonzero; complex
numbers with zero imaginary components are converted to real numbers
automatically.

   Polar complex numbers are stored in the form ‘(polar R THETA)’, where
R is a positive real value and THETA is a real value or HMS form
representing an angle.  This angle is usually normalized to lie in the
interval ‘(-180 .. 180)’ degrees, or ‘(-pi .. pi)’ radians, according to
the current angular mode.  If the angle is 0 the value is converted to a
real number automatically.  (If the angle is 180 degrees, the value is
usually also converted to a negative real number.)

   Hours-minutes-seconds forms are stored as ‘(hms H M S)’, where H is
an integer or an integer-valued float (i.e., a float with ‘EXP >= 0’), M
is an integer or integer-valued float in the range ‘[0 .. 60)’, and S is
any real number in the range ‘[0 .. 60)’.

   Date forms are stored as ‘(date N)’, where N is a real number that
counts days since midnight on the morning of January 1, 1 AD.  If N is
an integer, this is a pure date form.  If N is a fraction or float, this
is a date/time form.

   Modulo forms are stored as ‘(mod N M)’, where M is a positive real
number or HMS form, and N is a real number or HMS form in the range ‘[0
.. M)’.

   Error forms are stored as ‘(sdev X SIGMA)’, where X is the mean value
and SIGMA is the standard deviation.  Each component is either a number,
an HMS form, or a symbolic object (a variable or function call).  If
SIGMA is zero, the value is converted to a plain real number.  If SIGMA
is negative or complex, it is automatically normalized to be a positive
real.

   Interval forms are stored as ‘(intv MASK LO HI)’, where MASK is one
of the integers 0, 1, 2, or 3, and LO and HI are real numbers, HMS
forms, or symbolic objects.  The MASK is a binary integer where 1
represents the fact that the interval is closed on the high end, and 2
represents the fact that it is closed on the low end.  (Thus 3
represents a fully closed interval.)  The interval ‘(intv 3 X X)’ is
converted to the plain number X; intervals ‘(intv MASK X X)’ for any
other MASK represent empty intervals.  If HI is less than LO, the
interval is converted to a standard empty interval by replacing HI with
LO.

   Vectors are stored as ‘(vec V1 V2 ...)’, where V1 is the first
element of the vector, V2 is the second, and so on.  An empty vector is
stored as ‘(vec)’.  A matrix is simply a vector where all V’s are
themselves vectors of equal lengths.  Note that Calc vectors are
unrelated to the Emacs Lisp “vector” type, which is generally unused by
Calc data structures.

   Variables are stored as ‘(var NAME SYM)’, where NAME is a Lisp symbol
whose print name is used as the visible name of the variable, and SYM is
a Lisp symbol in which the variable’s value is actually stored.  Thus,
‘(var pi var-pi)’ represents the special constant ‘pi’.  Almost always,
the form is ‘(var V var-V)’.  If the variable name was entered with ‘#’
signs (which are converted to hyphens internally), the form is ‘(var U
V)’, where U is a symbol whose name contains ‘#’ characters, and V is a
symbol that contains ‘-’ characters instead.  The value of a variable is
the Calc object stored in its SYM symbol’s value cell.  If the symbol’s
value cell is void or if it contains ‘nil’, the variable has no value.
Special constants have the form ‘(special-const VALUE)’ stored in their
value cell, where VALUE is a formula which is evaluated when the
constant’s value is requested.  Variables which represent units are not
stored in any special way; they are units only because their names
appear in the units table.  If the value cell contains a string, it is
parsed to get the variable’s value when the variable is used.

   A Lisp list with any other symbol as the first element is a function
call.  The symbols ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, ‘%’, ‘^’, and ‘|’ represent
special binary operators; these lists are always of the form ‘(OP LHS
RHS)’ where LHS is the sub-formula on the lefthand side and RHS is the
sub-formula on the right.  The symbol ‘neg’ represents unary negation;
this list is always of the form ‘(neg ARG)’.  Any other symbol FUNC
represents a function that would be displayed in function-call notation;
the symbol FUNC is in general always of the form ‘calcFunc-NAME’.  The
function cell of the symbol FUNC should contain a Lisp function for
evaluating a call to FUNC.  This function is passed the remaining
elements of the list (themselves already evaluated) as arguments; such
functions should return ‘nil’ or call ‘reject-arg’ to signify that they
should be left in symbolic form, or they should return a Calc object
which represents their value, or a list of such objects if they wish to
return multiple values.  (The latter case is allowed only for functions
which are the outer-level call in an expression whose value is about to
be pushed on the stack; this feature is considered obsolete and is not
used by any built-in Calc functions.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Interactive Lisp Functions,  Next: Stack Lisp Functions,  Prev: Data Type Formats,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.2 Interactive Functions
..............................

The functions described here are used in implementing interactive Calc
commands.  Note that this list is not exhaustive!  If there is an
existing command that behaves similarly to the one you want to define,
you may find helpful tricks by checking the source code for that
command.

 -- Function: calc-set-command-flag flag
     Set the command flag FLAG.  This is generally a Lisp symbol, but
     may in fact be anything.  The effect is to add FLAG to the list
     stored in the variable ‘calc-command-flags’, unless it is already
     there.  *Note Defining Simple Commands::.

 -- Function: calc-clear-command-flag flag
     If FLAG appears among the list of currently-set command flags,
     remove it from that list.

 -- Function: calc-record-undo rec
     Add the “undo record” REC to the list of steps to take if the
     current operation should need to be undone.  Stack push and pop
     functions automatically call ‘calc-record-undo’, so the kinds of
     undo records you might need to create take the form ‘(set SYM
     VALUE)’, which says that the Lisp variable SYM was changed and had
     previously contained VALUE; ‘(store VAR VALUE)’ which says that the
     Calc variable VAR (a string which is the name of the symbol that
     contains the variable’s value) was stored and its previous value
     was VALUE (either a Calc data object, or ‘nil’ if the variable was
     previously void); or ‘(eval UNDO REDO ARGS ...)’, which means that
     to undo requires calling the function ‘(UNDO ARGS ...)’ and, if the
     undo is later redone, calling ‘(REDO ARGS ...)’.

 -- Function: calc-record-why msg args
     Record the error or warning message MSG, which is normally a
     string.  This message will be replayed if the user types ‘w’
     (‘calc-why’); if the message string begins with a ‘*’, it is
     considered important enough to display even if the user doesn’t
     type ‘w’.  If one or more ARGS are present, the displayed message
     will be of the form, ‘MSG: ARG1, ARG2, ...’, where the arguments
     are formatted on the assumption that they are either strings or
     Calc objects of some sort.  If MSG is a symbol, it is the name of a
     Calc predicate (such as ‘integerp’ or ‘numvecp’) which the
     arguments did not satisfy; it is expanded to a suitable string such
     as “Expected an integer.” The ‘reject-arg’ function calls
     ‘calc-record-why’ automatically; *note Predicates::.

 -- Function: calc-is-inverse
     This predicate returns true if the current command is inverse,
     i.e., if the Inverse (‘I’ key) flag was set.

 -- Function: calc-is-hyperbolic
     This predicate is the analogous function for the ‘H’ key.


File: calc.info,  Node: Stack Lisp Functions,  Next: Predicates,  Prev: Interactive Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.3 Stack-Oriented Functions
.................................

The functions described here perform various operations on the Calc
stack and trail.  They are to be used in interactive Calc commands.

 -- Function: calc-push-list vals n
     Push the Calc objects in list VALS onto the stack at stack level N.
     If N is omitted it defaults to 1, so that the elements are pushed
     at the top of the stack.  If N is greater than 1, the elements will
     be inserted into the stack so that the last element will end up at
     level N, the next-to-last at level N+1, etc.  The elements of VALS
     are assumed to be valid Calc objects, and are not evaluated,
     rounded, or renormalized in any way.  If VALS is an empty list,
     nothing happens.

     The stack elements are pushed without any sub-formula selections.
     You can give an optional third argument to this function, which
     must be a list the same size as VALS of selections.  Each selection
     must be ‘eq’ to some sub-formula of the corresponding formula in
     VALS, or ‘nil’ if that formula should have no selection.

 -- Function: calc-top-list n m
     Return a list of the N objects starting at level M of the stack.
     If M is omitted it defaults to 1, so that the elements are taken
     from the top of the stack.  If N is omitted, it also defaults to 1,
     so that the top stack element (in the form of a one-element list)
     is returned.  If M is greater than 1, the Mth stack element will be
     at the end of the list, the M+1st element will be next-to-last,
     etc.  If N or M are out of range, the command is aborted with a
     suitable error message.  If N is zero, the function returns an
     empty list.  The stack elements are not evaluated, rounded, or
     renormalized.

     If any stack elements contain selections, and selections have not
     been disabled by the ‘j e’ (‘calc-enable-selections’) command, this
     function returns the selected portions rather than the entire stack
     elements.  It can be given a third “selection-mode” argument which
     selects other behaviors.  If it is the symbol ‘t’, then a selection
     in any of the requested stack elements produces an “invalid
     operation on selections” error.  If it is the symbol ‘full’, the
     whole stack entry is always returned regardless of selections.  If
     it is the symbol ‘sel’, the selected portion is always returned, or
     ‘nil’ if there is no selection.  (This mode ignores the ‘j e’
     command.)  If the symbol is ‘entry’, the complete stack entry in
     list form is returned; the first element of this list will be the
     whole formula, and the third element will be the selection (or
     ‘nil’).

 -- Function: calc-pop-stack n m
     Remove the specified elements from the stack.  The parameters N and
     M are defined the same as for ‘calc-top-list’.  The return value of
     ‘calc-pop-stack’ is uninteresting.

     If there are any selected sub-formulas among the popped elements,
     and ‘j e’ has not been used to disable selections, this produces an
     error without changing the stack.  If you supply an optional third
     argument of ‘t’, the stack elements are popped even if they contain
     selections.

 -- Function: calc-record-list vals tag
     This function records one or more results in the trail.  The VALS
     are a list of strings or Calc objects.  The TAG is the
     four-character tag string to identify the values.  If TAG is
     omitted, a blank tag will be used.

 -- Function: calc-normalize n
     This function takes a Calc object and “normalizes” it.  At the very
     least this involves re-rounding floating-point values according to
     the current precision and other similar jobs.  Also, unless the
     user has selected No-Simplify mode (*note Simplification Modes::),
     this involves actually evaluating a formula object by executing the
     function calls it contains, and possibly also doing algebraic
     simplification, etc.

 -- Function: calc-top-list-n n m
     This function is identical to ‘calc-top-list’, except that it calls
     ‘calc-normalize’ on the values that it takes from the stack.  They
     are also passed through ‘check-complete’, so that incomplete
     objects will be rejected with an error message.  All computational
     commands should use this in preference to ‘calc-top-list’; the only
     standard Calc commands that operate on the stack without
     normalizing are stack management commands like ‘calc-enter’ and
     ‘calc-roll-up’.  This function accepts the same optional
     selection-mode argument as ‘calc-top-list’.

 -- Function: calc-top-n m
     This function is a convenient form of ‘calc-top-list-n’ in which
     only a single element of the stack is taken and returned, rather
     than a list of elements.  This also accepts an optional
     selection-mode argument.

 -- Function: calc-enter-result n tag vals
     This function is a convenient interface to most of the above
     functions.  The VALS argument should be either a single Calc
     object, or a list of Calc objects; the object or objects are
     normalized, and the top N stack entries are replaced by the
     normalized objects.  If TAG is non-‘nil’, the normalized objects
     are also recorded in the trail.  A typical stack-based
     computational command would take the form,

          (calc-enter-result N TAG (cons 'calcFunc-FUNC
                                         (calc-top-list-n N)))

     If any of the N stack elements replaced contain sub-formula
     selections, and selections have not been disabled by ‘j e’, this
     function takes one of two courses of action.  If N is equal to the
     number of elements in VALS, then each element of VALS is spliced
     into the corresponding selection; this is what happens when you use
     the <TAB> key, or when you use a unary arithmetic operation like
     ‘sqrt’.  If VALS has only one element but N is greater than one,
     there must be only one selection among the top N stack elements;
     the element from VALS is spliced into that selection.  This is what
     happens when you use a binary arithmetic operation like ‘+’.  Any
     other combination of N and VALS is an error when selections are
     present.

 -- Function: calc-unary-op tag func arg
     This function implements a unary operator that allows a numeric
     prefix argument to apply the operator over many stack entries.  If
     the prefix argument ARG is ‘nil’, this uses ‘calc-enter-result’ as
     outlined above.  Otherwise, it maps the function over several stack
     elements; *note Prefix Arguments::.  For example,

          (defun calc-zeta (arg)
            (interactive "P")
            (calc-unary-op "zeta" 'calcFunc-zeta arg))

 -- Function: calc-binary-op tag func arg ident unary
     This function implements a binary operator, analogously to
     ‘calc-unary-op’.  The optional IDENT and UNARY arguments specify
     the behavior when the prefix argument is zero or one, respectively.
     If the prefix is zero, the value IDENT is pushed onto the stack, if
     specified, otherwise an error message is displayed.  If the prefix
     is one, the unary function UNARY is applied to the top stack
     element, or, if UNARY is not specified, nothing happens.  When the
     argument is two or more, the binary function FUNC is reduced across
     the top ARG stack elements; when the argument is negative, the
     function is mapped between the next-to-top -ARG stack elements and
     the top element.

 -- Function: calc-stack-size
     Return the number of elements on the stack as an integer.  This
     count does not include elements that have been temporarily hidden
     by stack truncation; *note Truncating the Stack::.

 -- Function: calc-cursor-stack-index n
     Move the point to the Nth stack entry.  If N is zero, this will be
     the ‘.’ line.  If N is from 1 to the current stack size, this will
     be the beginning of the first line of that stack entry’s display.
     If line numbers are enabled, this will move to the first character
     of the line number, not the stack entry itself.

 -- Function: calc-substack-height n
     Return the number of lines between the beginning of the Nth stack
     entry and the bottom of the buffer.  If N is zero, this will be one
     (assuming no stack truncation).  If all stack entries are one line
     long (i.e., no matrices are displayed), the return value will be
     equal N+1 as long as N is in range.  (Note that in Big mode, the
     return value includes the blank lines that separate stack entries.)

 -- Function: calc-refresh
     Erase the ‘*Calculator*’ buffer and reformat its contents from
     memory.  This must be called after changing any parameter, such as
     the current display radix, which might change the appearance of
     existing stack entries.  (During a keyboard macro invoked by the
     ‘X’ key, refreshing is suppressed, but a flag is set so that the
     entire stack will be refreshed rather than just the top few
     elements when the macro finishes.)


File: calc.info,  Node: Predicates,  Next: Computational Lisp Functions,  Prev: Stack Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.4 Predicates
...................

The functions described here are predicates, that is, they return a
true/false value where ‘nil’ means false and anything else means true.
These predicates are expanded by ‘defmath’, for example, from ‘zerop’ to
‘math-zerop’.  In many cases they correspond to native Lisp functions by
the same name, but are extended to cover the full range of Calc data
types.

 -- Function: zerop x
     Returns true if X is numerically zero, in any of the Calc data
     types.  (Note that for some types, such as error forms and
     intervals, it never makes sense to return true.)  In ‘defmath’, the
     expression ‘(= x 0)’ will automatically be converted to
     ‘(math-zerop x)’, and ‘(/= x 0)’ will be converted to ‘(not
     (math-zerop x))’.

 -- Function: negp x
     Returns true if X is negative.  This accepts negative real numbers
     of various types, negative HMS and date forms, and intervals in
     which all included values are negative.  In ‘defmath’, the
     expression ‘(< x 0)’ will automatically be converted to ‘(math-negp
     x)’, and ‘(>= x 0)’ will be converted to ‘(not (math-negp x))’.

 -- Function: posp x
     Returns true if X is positive (and non-zero).  For complex numbers,
     none of these three predicates will return true.

 -- Function: looks-negp x
     Returns true if X is “negative-looking.” This returns true if X is
     a negative number, or a formula with a leading minus sign such as
     ‘-a/b’.  In other words, this is an object which can be made
     simpler by calling ‘(- X)’.

 -- Function: integerp x
     Returns true if X is an integer of any size.

 -- Function: fixnump x
     Returns true if X is a native Lisp integer.

 -- Function: natnump x
     Returns true if X is a nonnegative integer of any size.

 -- Function: fixnatnump x
     Returns true if X is a nonnegative Lisp integer.

 -- Function: num-integerp x
     Returns true if X is numerically an integer, i.e., either a true
     integer or a float with no significant digits to the right of the
     decimal point.

 -- Function: messy-integerp x
     Returns true if X is numerically, but not literally, an integer.  A
     value is ‘num-integerp’ if it is ‘integerp’ or ‘messy-integerp’
     (but it is never both at once).

 -- Function: num-natnump x
     Returns true if X is numerically a nonnegative integer.

 -- Function: evenp x
     Returns true if X is an even integer.

 -- Function: looks-evenp x
     Returns true if X is an even integer, or a formula with a leading
     multiplicative coefficient which is an even integer.

 -- Function: oddp x
     Returns true if X is an odd integer.

 -- Function: ratp x
     Returns true if X is a rational number, i.e., an integer or a
     fraction.

 -- Function: realp x
     Returns true if X is a real number, i.e., an integer, fraction, or
     floating-point number.

 -- Function: anglep x
     Returns true if X is a real number or HMS form.

 -- Function: floatp x
     Returns true if X is a float, or a complex number, error form,
     interval, date form, or modulo form in which at least one component
     is a float.

 -- Function: complexp x
     Returns true if X is a rectangular or polar complex number (but not
     a real number).

 -- Function: rect-complexp x
     Returns true if X is a rectangular complex number.

 -- Function: polar-complexp x
     Returns true if X is a polar complex number.

 -- Function: numberp x
     Returns true if X is a real number or a complex number.

 -- Function: scalarp x
     Returns true if X is a real or complex number or an HMS form.

 -- Function: vectorp x
     Returns true if X is a vector (this simply checks if its argument
     is a list whose first element is the symbol ‘vec’).

 -- Function: numvecp x
     Returns true if X is a number or vector.

 -- Function: matrixp x
     Returns true if X is a matrix, i.e., a vector of one or more
     vectors, all of the same size.

 -- Function: square-matrixp x
     Returns true if X is a square matrix.

 -- Function: objectp x
     Returns true if X is any numeric Calc object, including real and
     complex numbers, HMS forms, date forms, error forms, intervals, and
     modulo forms.  (Note that error forms and intervals may include
     formulas as their components; see ‘constp’ below.)

 -- Function: objvecp x
     Returns true if X is an object or a vector.  This also accepts
     incomplete objects, but it rejects variables and formulas (except
     as mentioned above for ‘objectp’).

 -- Function: primp x
     Returns true if X is a “primitive” or “atomic” Calc object, i.e.,
     one whose components cannot be regarded as sub-formulas.  This
     includes variables, and all ‘objectp’ types except error forms and
     intervals.

 -- Function: constp x
     Returns true if X is constant, i.e., a real or complex number, HMS
     form, date form, or error form, interval, or vector all of whose
     components are ‘constp’.

 -- Function: lessp x y
     Returns true if X is numerically less than Y.  Returns false if X
     is greater than or equal to Y, or if the order is undefined or
     cannot be determined.  Generally speaking, this works by checking
     whether ‘X - Y’ is ‘negp’.  In ‘defmath’, the expression ‘(< x y)’
     will automatically be converted to ‘(lessp x y)’; expressions
     involving ‘>’, ‘<=’, and ‘>=’ are similarly converted in terms of
     ‘lessp’.

 -- Function: beforep x y
     Returns true if X comes before Y in a canonical ordering of Calc
     objects.  If X and Y are both real numbers, this will be the same
     as ‘lessp’.  But whereas ‘lessp’ considers other types of objects
     to be unordered, ‘beforep’ puts any two objects into a definite,
     consistent order.  The ‘beforep’ function is used by the ‘V S’
     vector-sorting command, and also by Calc’s algebraic
     simplifications to put the terms of a product into canonical order:
     This allows ‘x y + y x’ to be simplified easily to ‘2 x y’.

 -- Function: equal x y
     This is the standard Lisp ‘equal’ predicate; it returns true if X
     and Y are structurally identical.  This is the usual way to compare
     numbers for equality, but note that ‘equal’ will treat 0 and 0.0 as
     different.

 -- Function: math-equal x y
     Returns true if X and Y are numerically equal, either because they
     are ‘equal’, or because their difference is ‘zerop’.  In ‘defmath’,
     the expression ‘(= x y)’ will automatically be converted to
     ‘(math-equal x y)’.

 -- Function: equal-int x n
     Returns true if X and N are numerically equal, where N is a fixnum
     which is not a multiple of 10.  This will automatically be used by
     ‘defmath’ in place of the more general ‘math-equal’ whenever
     possible.

 -- Function: nearly-equal x y
     Returns true if X and Y, as floating-point numbers, are equal
     except possibly in the last decimal place.  For example, 314.159
     and 314.166 are considered nearly equal if the current precision is
     6 (since they differ by 7 units), but not if the current precision
     is 7 (since they differ by 70 units).  Most functions which use
     series expansions use ‘with-extra-prec’ to evaluate the series with
     2 extra digits of precision, then use ‘nearly-equal’ to decide when
     the series has converged; this guards against cumulative error in
     the series evaluation without doing extra work which would be lost
     when the result is rounded back down to the current precision.  In
     ‘defmath’, this can be written ‘(~= X Y)’.  The X and Y can be
     numbers of any kind, including complex.

 -- Function: nearly-zerop x y
     Returns true if X is nearly zero, compared to Y.  This checks
     whether X plus Y would by be ‘nearly-equal’ to Y itself, to within
     the current precision, in other words, if adding X to Y would have
     a negligible effect on Y due to roundoff error.  X may be a real or
     complex number, but Y must be real.

 -- Function: is-true x
     Return true if the formula X represents a true value in Calc, not
     Lisp, terms.  It tests if X is a non-zero number or a provably
     non-zero formula.

 -- Function: reject-arg val pred
     Abort the current function evaluation due to unacceptable argument
     values.  This calls ‘(calc-record-why PRED VAL)’, then signals a
     Lisp error which ‘normalize’ will trap.  The net effect is that the
     function call which led here will be left in symbolic form.

 -- Function: inexact-value
     If Symbolic mode is enabled, this will signal an error that causes
     ‘normalize’ to leave the formula in symbolic form, with the message
     “Inexact result.” (This function has no effect when not in Symbolic
     mode.)  Note that if your function calls ‘(sin 5)’ in Symbolic
     mode, the ‘sin’ function will call ‘inexact-value’, which will
     cause your function to be left unsimplified.  You may instead wish
     to call ‘(normalize (list 'calcFunc-sin 5))’, which in Symbolic
     mode will return the formula ‘sin(5)’ to your function.

 -- Function: overflow
     This signals an error that will be reported as a floating-point
     overflow.

 -- Function: underflow
     This signals a floating-point underflow.


File: calc.info,  Node: Computational Lisp Functions,  Next: Vector Lisp Functions,  Prev: Predicates,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.5 Computational Functions
................................

The functions described here do the actual computational work of the
Calculator.  In addition to these, note that any function described in
the main body of this manual may be called from Lisp; for example, if
the documentation refers to the ‘calc-sqrt’ [‘sqrt’] command, this means
‘calc-sqrt’ is an interactive stack-based square-root command and ‘sqrt’
(which ‘defmath’ expands to ‘calcFunc-sqrt’) is the actual Lisp function
for taking square roots.

   The functions ‘math-add’, ‘math-sub’, ‘math-mul’, ‘math-div’,
‘math-mod’, and ‘math-neg’ are not included in this list, since
‘defmath’ allows you to write native Lisp ‘+’, ‘-’, ‘*’, ‘/’, ‘%’, and
unary ‘-’, respectively, instead.

 -- Function: normalize val
     (Full form: ‘math-normalize’.)  Reduce the value VAL to standard
     form.  For example, if VAL is a fixnum, it will be converted to a
     bignum if it is too large, and if VAL is a bignum it will be
     normalized by clipping off trailing (i.e., most-significant) zero
     digits and converting to a fixnum if it is small.  All the various
     data types are similarly converted to their standard forms.
     Variables are left alone, but function calls are actually evaluated
     in formulas.  For example, normalizing ‘(+ 2 (calcFunc-abs -4))’
     will return 6.

     If a function call fails, because the function is void or has the
     wrong number of parameters, or because it returns ‘nil’ or calls
     ‘reject-arg’ or ‘inexact-result’, ‘normalize’ returns the formula
     still in symbolic form.

     If the current simplification mode is “none” or “numeric arguments
     only,” ‘normalize’ will act appropriately.  However, the more
     powerful simplification modes (like Algebraic Simplification) are
     not handled by ‘normalize’.  They are handled by ‘calc-normalize’,
     which calls ‘normalize’ and possibly some other routines, such as
     ‘simplify’ or ‘simplify-units’.  Programs generally will never call
     ‘calc-normalize’ except when popping or pushing values on the
     stack.

 -- Function: evaluate-expr expr
     Replace all variables in EXPR that have values with their values,
     then use ‘normalize’ to simplify the result.  This is what happens
     when you press the ‘=’ key interactively.

 -- Macro: with-extra-prec n body
     Evaluate the Lisp forms in BODY with precision increased by N
     digits.  This is a macro which expands to

          (math-normalize
            (let ((calc-internal-prec (+ calc-internal-prec N)))
              BODY))

     The surrounding call to ‘math-normalize’ causes a floating-point
     result to be rounded down to the original precision afterwards.
     This is important because some arithmetic operations assume a
     number’s mantissa contains no more digits than the current
     precision allows.

 -- Function: make-frac n d
     Build a fraction ‘N:D’.  This is equivalent to calling ‘(normalize
     (list 'frac N D))’, but more efficient.

 -- Function: make-float mant exp
     Build a floating-point value out of MANT and EXP, both of which are
     arbitrary integers.  This function will return a properly
     normalized float value, or signal an overflow or underflow if EXP
     is out of range.

 -- Function: make-sdev x sigma
     Build an error form out of X and the absolute value of SIGMA.  If
     SIGMA is zero, the result is the number X directly.  If SIGMA is
     negative or complex, its absolute value is used.  If X or SIGMA is
     not a valid type of object for use in error forms, this calls
     ‘reject-arg’.

 -- Function: make-intv mask lo hi
     Build an interval form out of MASK (which is assumed to be an
     integer from 0 to 3), and the limits LO and HI.  If LO is greater
     than HI, an empty interval form is returned.  This calls
     ‘reject-arg’ if LO or HI is unsuitable.

 -- Function: sort-intv mask lo hi
     Build an interval form, similar to ‘make-intv’, except that if LO
     is less than HI they are simply exchanged, and the bits of MASK are
     swapped accordingly.

 -- Function: make-mod n m
     Build a modulo form out of N and the modulus M.  Since modulo forms
     do not allow formulas as their components, if N or M is not a real
     number or HMS form the result will be a formula which is a call to
     ‘makemod’, the algebraic version of this function.

 -- Function: float x
     Convert X to floating-point form.  Integers and fractions are
     converted to numerically equivalent floats; components of complex
     numbers, vectors, HMS forms, date forms, error forms, intervals,
     and modulo forms are recursively floated.  If the argument is a
     variable or formula, this calls ‘reject-arg’.

 -- Function: compare x y
     Compare the numbers X and Y, and return -1 if ‘(lessp X Y)’, 1 if
     ‘(lessp Y X)’, 0 if ‘(math-equal X Y)’, or 2 if the order is
     undefined or cannot be determined.

 -- Function: numdigs n
     Return the number of digits of integer N, effectively
     ‘ceil(log10(N))’, but much more efficient.  Zero is considered to
     have zero digits.

 -- Function: scale-int x n
     Shift integer X left N decimal digits, or right -N digits with
     truncation toward zero.

 -- Function: scale-rounding x n
     Like ‘scale-int’, except that a right shift rounds to the nearest
     integer rather than truncating.

 -- Function: fixnum n
     Return the integer N as a fixnum, i.e., a native Lisp integer.  If
     N is outside the permissible range for Lisp integers (usually 24
     binary bits) the result is undefined.

 -- Function: sqr x
     Compute the square of X; short for ‘(* X X)’.

 -- Function: quotient x y
     Divide integer X by integer Y; return an integer quotient and
     discard the remainder.  If X or Y is negative, the direction of
     rounding is undefined.

 -- Function: idiv x y
     Perform an integer division; if X and Y are both nonnegative
     integers, this uses the ‘quotient’ function, otherwise it computes
     ‘floor(X/Y)’.  Thus the result is well-defined but slower than for
     ‘quotient’.

 -- Function: imod x y
     Divide integer X by integer Y; return the integer remainder and
     discard the quotient.  Like ‘quotient’, this works only for integer
     arguments and is not well-defined for negative arguments.  For a
     more well-defined result, use ‘(% X Y)’.

 -- Function: idivmod x y
     Divide integer X by integer Y; return a cons cell whose ‘car’ is
     ‘(quotient X Y)’ and whose ‘cdr’ is ‘(imod X Y)’.

 -- Function: pow x y
     Compute X to the power Y.  In ‘defmath’ code, this can also be
     written ‘(^ X Y)’ or ‘(expt X Y)’.

 -- Function: abs-approx x
     Compute a fast approximation to the absolute value of X.  For
     example, for a rectangular complex number the result is the sum of
     the absolute values of the components.

 -- Function: pi
     The function ‘(pi)’ computes ‘pi’ to the current precision.  Other
     related constant-generating functions are ‘two-pi’, ‘pi-over-2’,
     ‘pi-over-4’, ‘pi-over-180’, ‘sqrt-two-pi’, ‘e’, ‘sqrt-e’, ‘ln-2’,
     ‘ln-10’, ‘phi’ and ‘gamma-const’.  Each function returns a
     floating-point value in the current precision, and each uses
     caching so that all calls after the first are essentially free.

 -- Macro: math-defcache FUNC INITIAL FORM
     This macro, usually used as a top-level call like ‘defun’ or
     ‘defvar’, defines a new cached constant analogous to ‘pi’, etc.  It
     defines a function ‘func’ which returns the requested value; if
     INITIAL is non-‘nil’ it must be a ‘(float ...)’ form which serves
     as an initial value for the cache.  If FUNC is called when the
     cache is empty or does not have enough digits to satisfy the
     current precision, the Lisp expression FORM is evaluated with the
     current precision increased by four, and the result minus its two
     least significant digits is stored in the cache.  For example,
     calling ‘(pi)’ with a precision of 30 computes ‘pi’ to 34 digits,
     rounds it down to 32 digits for future use, then rounds it again to
     30 digits for use in the present request.

 -- Function: full-circle symb
     If the current angular mode is Degrees or HMS, this function
     returns the integer 360.  In Radians mode, this function returns
     either the corresponding value in radians to the current precision,
     or the formula ‘2*pi’, depending on the Symbolic mode.  There are
     also similar function ‘half-circle’ and ‘quarter-circle’.

 -- Function: power-of-2 n
     Compute two to the integer power N, as a (potentially very large)
     integer.  Powers of two are cached, so only the first call for a
     particular N is expensive.

 -- Function: integer-log2 n
     Compute the base-2 logarithm of N, which must be an integer which
     is a power of two.  If N is not a power of two, this function will
     return ‘nil’.

 -- Function: div-mod a b m
     Divide A by B, modulo M.  This returns ‘nil’ if there is no
     solution, or if any of the arguments are not integers.

 -- Function: pow-mod a b m
     Compute A to the power B, modulo M.  If A, B, and M are integers,
     this uses an especially efficient algorithm.  Otherwise, it simply
     computes ‘(% (^ a b) m)’.

 -- Function: isqrt n
     Compute the integer square root of N.  This is the square root of N
     rounded down toward zero, i.e., ‘floor(sqrt(N))’.  If N is itself
     an integer, the computation is especially efficient.

 -- Function: to-hms a ang
     Convert the argument A into an HMS form.  If ANG is specified, it
     is the angular mode in which to interpret A, either ‘deg’ or ‘rad’.
     Otherwise, the current angular mode is used.  If A is already an
     HMS form it is returned as-is.

 -- Function: from-hms a ang
     Convert the HMS form A into a real number.  If ANG is specified, it
     is the angular mode in which to express the result, otherwise the
     current angular mode is used.  If A is already a real number, it is
     returned as-is.

 -- Function: to-radians a
     Convert the number or HMS form A to radians from the current
     angular mode.

 -- Function: from-radians a
     Convert the number A from radians to the current angular mode.  If
     A is a formula, this returns the formula ‘deg(A)’.

 -- Function: to-radians-2 a
     Like ‘to-radians’, except that in Symbolic mode a degrees to
     radians conversion yields a formula like ‘A*pi/180’.

 -- Function: from-radians-2 a
     Like ‘from-radians’, except that in Symbolic mode a radians to
     degrees conversion yields a formula like ‘A*180/pi’.

 -- Function: random-digit
     Produce a random base-1000 digit in the range 0 to 999.

 -- Function: random-digits n
     Produce a random N-digit integer; this will be an integer in the
     interval ‘[0, 10^N)’.

 -- Function: random-float
     Produce a random float in the interval ‘[0, 1)’.

 -- Function: prime-test n iters
     Determine whether the integer N is prime.  Return a list which has
     one of these forms: ‘(nil F)’ means the number is non-prime because
     it was found to be divisible by F; ‘(nil)’ means it was found to be
     non-prime by table look-up (so no factors are known); ‘(nil
     unknown)’ means it is definitely non-prime but no factors are known
     because N was large enough that Fermat’s probabilistic test had to
     be used; ‘(t)’ means the number is definitely prime; and ‘(maybe I
     P)’ means that Fermat’s test, after I iterations, is P percent sure
     that the number is prime.  The ITERS parameter is the number of
     Fermat iterations to use, in the case that this is necessary.  If
     ‘prime-test’ returns “maybe,” you can call it again with the same N
     to get a greater certainty; ‘prime-test’ remembers where it left
     off.

 -- Function: to-simple-fraction f
     If F is a floating-point number which can be represented exactly as
     a small rational number, return that number, else return F.  For
     example, 0.75 would be converted to 3:4.  This function is very
     fast.

 -- Function: to-fraction f tol
     Find a rational approximation to floating-point number F to within
     a specified tolerance TOL; this corresponds to the algebraic
     function ‘frac’, and can be rather slow.

 -- Function: quarter-integer n
     If N is an integer or integer-valued float, this function returns
     zero.  If N is a half-integer (i.e., an integer plus 1:2 or 0.5),
     it returns 2.  If N is a quarter-integer, it returns 1 or 3.  If N
     is anything else, this function returns ‘nil’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Vector Lisp Functions,  Next: Symbolic Lisp Functions,  Prev: Computational Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.6 Vector Functions
.........................

The functions described here perform various operations on vectors and
matrices.

 -- Function: math-concat x y
     Do a vector concatenation; this operation is written ‘X | Y’ in a
     symbolic formula.  *Note Building Vectors::.

 -- Function: vec-length v
     Return the length of vector V.  If V is not a vector, the result is
     zero.  If V is a matrix, this returns the number of rows in the
     matrix.

 -- Function: mat-dimens m
     Determine the dimensions of vector or matrix M.  If M is not a
     vector, the result is an empty list.  If M is a plain vector but
     not a matrix, the result is a one-element list containing the
     length of the vector.  If M is a matrix with R rows and C columns,
     the result is the list ‘(R C)’.  Higher-order tensors produce lists
     of more than two dimensions.  Note that the object ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4,
     5]]’ is a vector of vectors not all the same size, and is treated
     by this and other Calc routines as a plain vector of two elements.

 -- Function: dimension-error
     Abort the current function with a message of “Dimension error.” The
     Calculator will leave the function being evaluated in symbolic
     form; this is really just a special case of ‘reject-arg’.

 -- Function: build-vector args
     Return a Calc vector with ARGS as elements.  For example,
     ‘(build-vector 1 2 3)’ returns the Calc vector ‘[1, 2, 3]’, stored
     internally as the list ‘(vec 1 2 3)’.

 -- Function: make-vec obj dims
     Return a Calc vector or matrix all of whose elements are equal to
     OBJ.  For example, ‘(make-vec 27 3 4)’ returns a 3x4 matrix filled
     with 27’s.

 -- Function: row-matrix v
     If V is a plain vector, convert it into a row matrix, i.e., a
     matrix whose single row is V.  If V is already a matrix, leave it
     alone.

 -- Function: col-matrix v
     If V is a plain vector, convert it into a column matrix, i.e., a
     matrix with each element of V as a separate row.  If V is already a
     matrix, leave it alone.

 -- Function: map-vec f v
     Map the Lisp function F over the Calc vector V.  For example,
     ‘(map-vec 'math-floor v)’ returns a vector of the floored
     components of vector V.

 -- Function: map-vec-2 f a b
     Map the Lisp function F over the two vectors A and B.  If A and B
     are vectors of equal length, the result is a vector of the results
     of calling ‘(F AI BI)’ for each pair of elements AI and BI.  If
     either A or B is a scalar, it is matched with each value of the
     other vector.  For example, ‘(map-vec-2 'math-add v 1)’ returns the
     vector V with each element increased by one.  Note that using ‘'+’
     would not work here, since ‘defmath’ does not expand function names
     everywhere, just where they are in the function position of a Lisp
     expression.

 -- Function: reduce-vec f v
     Reduce the function F over the vector V.  For example, if V is
     ‘[10, 20, 30, 40]’, this calls ‘(f (f (f 10 20) 30) 40)’.  If V is
     a matrix, this reduces over the rows of V.

 -- Function: reduce-cols f m
     Reduce the function F over the columns of matrix M.  For example,
     if M is ‘[[1, 2], [3, 4], [5, 6]]’, the result is a vector of the
     two elements ‘(f (f 1 3) 5)’ and ‘(f (f 2 4) 6)’.

 -- Function: mat-row m n
     Return the Nth row of matrix M.  This is equivalent to ‘(elt m n)’.
     For a slower but safer version, use ‘mrow’.  (*Note Extracting
     Elements::.)

 -- Function: mat-col m n
     Return the Nth column of matrix M, in the form of a vector.  The
     arguments are not checked for correctness.

 -- Function: mat-less-row m n
     Return a copy of matrix M with its Nth row deleted.  The number N
     must be in range from 1 to the number of rows in M.

 -- Function: mat-less-col m n
     Return a copy of matrix M with its Nth column deleted.

 -- Function: transpose m
     Return the transpose of matrix M.

 -- Function: flatten-vector v
     Flatten nested vector V into a vector of scalars.  For example, if
     V is ‘[[1, 2, 3], [4, 5]]’ the result is ‘[1, 2, 3, 4, 5]’.

 -- Function: copy-matrix m
     If M is a matrix, return a copy of M.  This maps ‘copy-sequence’
     over the rows of M; in Lisp terms, each element of the result
     matrix will be ‘eq’ to the corresponding element of M, but none of
     the ‘cons’ cells that make up the structure of the matrix will be
     ‘eq’.  If M is a plain vector, this is the same as ‘copy-sequence’.

 -- Function: swap-rows m r1 r2
     Exchange rows R1 and R2 of matrix M in-place.  In other words,
     unlike most of the other functions described here, this function
     changes M itself rather than building up a new result matrix.  The
     return value is M, i.e., ‘(eq (swap-rows m 1 2) m)’ is true, with
     the side effect of exchanging the first two rows of M.


File: calc.info,  Node: Symbolic Lisp Functions,  Next: Formatting Lisp Functions,  Prev: Vector Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.7 Symbolic Functions
...........................

The functions described here operate on symbolic formulas in the
Calculator.

 -- Function: calc-prepare-selection num
     Prepare a stack entry for selection operations.  If NUM is omitted,
     the stack entry containing the cursor is used; otherwise, it is the
     number of the stack entry to use.  This function stores useful
     information about the current stack entry into a set of variables.
     ‘calc-selection-cache-num’ contains the number of the stack entry
     involved (equal to NUM if you specified it);
     ‘calc-selection-cache-entry’ contains the stack entry as a list
     (such as ‘calc-top-list’ would return with ‘entry’ as the selection
     mode); and ‘calc-selection-cache-comp’ contains a special “tagged”
     composition (*note Formatting Lisp Functions::) which allows Calc
     to relate cursor positions in the buffer with their corresponding
     sub-formulas.

     A slight complication arises in the selection mechanism because
     formulas may contain small integers.  For example, in the vector
     ‘[1, 2, 1]’ the first and last elements are ‘eq’ to each other;
     selections are recorded as the actual Lisp object that appears
     somewhere in the tree of the whole formula, but storing ‘1’ would
     falsely select both ‘1’’s in the vector.  So
     ‘calc-prepare-selection’ also checks the stack entry and replaces
     any plain integers with “complex number” lists of the form ‘(cplx N
     0)’.  This list will be displayed the same as a plain N and the
     change will be completely invisible to the user, but it will
     guarantee that no two sub-formulas of the stack entry will be ‘eq’
     to each other.  Next time the stack entry is involved in a
     computation, ‘calc-normalize’ will replace these lists with plain
     numbers again, again invisibly to the user.

 -- Function: calc-encase-atoms x
     This modifies the formula X to ensure that each part of the formula
     is a unique atom, using the ‘(cplx N 0)’ trick described above.
     This function may use ‘setcar’ to modify the formula in-place.

 -- Function: calc-find-selected-part
     Find the smallest sub-formula of the current formula that contains
     the cursor.  This assumes ‘calc-prepare-selection’ has been called
     already.  If the cursor is not actually on any part of the formula,
     this returns ‘nil’.

 -- Function: calc-change-current-selection selection
     Change the currently prepared stack element’s selection to
     SELECTION, which should be ‘eq’ to some sub-formula of the stack
     element, or ‘nil’ to unselect the formula.  The stack element’s
     appearance in the Calc buffer is adjusted to reflect the new
     selection.

 -- Function: calc-find-nth-part expr n
     Return the Nth sub-formula of EXPR.  This function is used by the
     selection commands, and (unless ‘j b’ has been used) treats sums
     and products as flat many-element formulas.  Thus if EXPR is ‘((a +
     b) - c) + d’, calling ‘calc-find-nth-part’ with N equal to four
     will return ‘d’.

 -- Function: calc-find-parent-formula expr part
     Return the sub-formula of EXPR which immediately contains PART.  If
     EXPR is ‘a*b + (c+1)*d’ and PART is ‘eq’ to the ‘c+1’ term of EXPR,
     then this function will return ‘(c+1)*d’.  If PART turns out not to
     be a sub-formula of EXPR, the function returns ‘nil’.  If PART is
     ‘eq’ to EXPR, the function returns ‘t’.  This function does not
     take associativity into account.

 -- Function: calc-find-assoc-parent-formula expr part
     This is the same as ‘calc-find-parent-formula’, except that (unless
     ‘j b’ has been used) it continues widening the selection to contain
     a complete level of the formula.  Given ‘a’ from ‘((a + b) - c) +
     d’, ‘calc-find-parent-formula’ will return ‘a + b’ but
     ‘calc-find-assoc-parent-formula’ will return the whole expression.

 -- Function: calc-grow-assoc-formula expr part
     This expands sub-formula PART of EXPR to encompass a complete level
     of the formula.  If PART and its immediate parent are not
     compatible associative operators, or if ‘j b’ has been used, this
     simply returns PART.

 -- Function: calc-find-sub-formula expr part
     This finds the immediate sub-formula of EXPR which contains PART.
     It returns an index N such that ‘(calc-find-nth-part EXPR N)’ would
     return PART.  If PART is not a sub-formula of EXPR, it returns
     ‘nil’.  If PART is ‘eq’ to EXPR, it returns ‘t’.  This function
     does not take associativity into account.

 -- Function: calc-replace-sub-formula expr old new
     This function returns a copy of formula EXPR, with the sub-formula
     that is ‘eq’ to OLD replaced by NEW.

 -- Function: simplify expr
     Simplify the expression EXPR by applying Calc’s algebraic
     simplifications.  This always returns a copy of the expression; the
     structure EXPR points to remains unchanged in memory.

     More precisely, here is what ‘simplify’ does: The expression is
     first normalized and evaluated by calling ‘normalize’.  If any
     ‘AlgSimpRules’ have been defined, they are then applied.  Then the
     expression is traversed in a depth-first, bottom-up fashion; at
     each level, any simplifications that can be made are made until no
     further changes are possible.  Once the entire formula has been
     traversed in this way, it is compared with the original formula
     (from before the call to ‘normalize’) and, if it has changed, the
     entire procedure is repeated (starting with ‘normalize’) until no
     further changes occur.  Usually only two iterations are needed: one
     to simplify the formula, and another to verify that no further
     simplifications were possible.

 -- Function: simplify-extended expr
     Simplify the expression EXPR, with additional rules enabled that
     help do a more thorough job, while not being entirely “safe” in all
     circumstances.  (For example, this mode will simplify ‘sqrt(x^2)’
     to ‘x’, which is only valid when X is positive.)  This is
     implemented by temporarily binding the variable
     ‘math-living-dangerously’ to ‘t’ (using a ‘let’ form) and calling
     ‘simplify’.  Dangerous simplification rules are written to check
     this variable before taking any action.

 -- Function: simplify-units expr
     Simplify the expression EXPR, treating variable names as units
     whenever possible.  This works by binding the variable
     ‘math-simplifying-units’ to ‘t’ while calling ‘simplify’.

 -- Macro: math-defsimplify funcs body
     Register a new simplification rule; this is normally called as a
     top-level form, like ‘defun’ or ‘defmath’.  If FUNCS is a symbol
     (like ‘+’ or ‘calcFunc-sqrt’), this simplification rule is applied
     to the formulas which are calls to the specified function.  Or,
     FUNCS can be a list of such symbols; the rule applies to all
     functions on the list.  The BODY is written like the body of a
     function with a single argument called ‘expr’.  The body will be
     executed with ‘expr’ bound to a formula which is a call to one of
     the functions FUNCS.  If the function body returns ‘nil’, or if it
     returns a result ‘equal’ to the original ‘expr’, it is ignored and
     Calc goes on to try the next simplification rule that applies.  If
     the function body returns something different, that new formula is
     substituted for EXPR in the original formula.

     At each point in the formula, rules are tried in the order of the
     original calls to ‘math-defsimplify’; the search stops after the
     first rule that makes a change.  Thus later rules for that same
     function will not have a chance to trigger until the next iteration
     of the main ‘simplify’ loop.

     Note that, since ‘defmath’ is not being used here, BODY must be
     written in true Lisp code without the conveniences that ‘defmath’
     provides.  If you prefer, you can have BODY simply call another
     function (defined with ‘defmath’) which does the real work.

     The arguments of a function call will already have been simplified
     before any rules for the call itself are invoked.  Since a new
     argument list is consed up when this happens, this means that the
     rule’s body is allowed to rearrange the function’s arguments
     destructively if that is convenient.  Here is a typical example of
     a simplification rule:

          (math-defsimplify calcFunc-arcsinh
            (or (and (math-looks-negp (nth 1 expr))
                     (math-neg (list 'calcFunc-arcsinh
                                     (math-neg (nth 1 expr)))))
                (and (eq (car-safe (nth 1 expr)) 'calcFunc-sinh)
                     (or math-living-dangerously
                         (math-known-realp (nth 1 (nth 1 expr))))
                     (nth 1 (nth 1 expr)))))

     This is really a pair of rules written with one ‘math-defsimplify’
     for convenience; the first replaces ‘arcsinh(-x)’ with
     ‘-arcsinh(x)’, and the second, which is safe only for real ‘x’,
     replaces ‘arcsinh(sinh(x))’ with ‘x’.

 -- Function: common-constant-factor expr
     Check EXPR to see if it is a sum of terms all multiplied by the
     same rational value.  If so, return this value.  If not, return
     ‘nil’.  For example, if called on ‘6x + 9y + 12z’, it would return
     3, since 3 is a common factor of all the terms.

 -- Function: cancel-common-factor expr factor
     Assuming EXPR is a sum with FACTOR as a common factor, divide each
     term of the sum by FACTOR.  This is done by destructively modifying
     parts of EXPR, on the assumption that it is being used by a
     simplification rule (where such things are allowed; see above).
     For example, consider this built-in rule for square roots:

          (math-defsimplify calcFunc-sqrt
            (let ((fac (math-common-constant-factor (nth 1 expr))))
              (and fac (not (eq fac 1))
                   (math-mul (math-normalize (list 'calcFunc-sqrt fac))
                             (math-normalize
                              (list 'calcFunc-sqrt
                                    (math-cancel-common-factor
                                     (nth 1 expr) fac)))))))

 -- Function: frac-gcd a b
     Compute a “rational GCD” of A and B, which must both be rational
     numbers.  This is the fraction composed of the GCD of the
     numerators of A and B, over the GCD of the denominators.  It is
     used by ‘common-constant-factor’.  Note that the standard ‘gcd’
     function uses the LCM to combine the denominators.

 -- Function: map-tree func expr many
     Try applying Lisp function FUNC to various sub-expressions of EXPR.
     Initially, call FUNC with EXPR itself as an argument.  If this
     returns an expression which is not ‘equal’ to EXPR, apply FUNC
     again until eventually it does return EXPR with no changes.  Then,
     if EXPR is a function call, recursively apply FUNC to each of the
     arguments.  This keeps going until no changes occur anywhere in the
     expression; this final expression is returned by ‘map-tree’.  Note
     that, unlike simplification rules, FUNC functions may _not_ make
     destructive changes to EXPR.  If a third argument MANY is provided,
     it is an integer which says how many times FUNC may be applied; the
     default, as described above, is infinitely many times.

 -- Function: compile-rewrites rules
     Compile the rewrite rule set specified by RULES, which should be a
     formula that is either a vector or a variable name.  If the latter,
     the compiled rules are saved so that later ‘compile-rules’ calls
     for that same variable can return immediately.  If there are
     problems with the rules, this function calls ‘error’ with a
     suitable message.

 -- Function: apply-rewrites expr crules heads
     Apply the compiled rewrite rule set CRULES to the expression EXPR.
     This will make only one rewrite and only checks at the top level of
     the expression.  The result ‘nil’ if no rules matched, or if the
     only rules that matched did not actually change the expression.
     The HEADS argument is optional; if is given, it should be a list of
     all function names that (may) appear in EXPR.  The rewrite compiler
     tags each rule with the rarest-looking function name in the rule;
     if you specify HEADS, ‘apply-rewrites’ can use this information to
     narrow its search down to just a few rules in the rule set.

 -- Function: rewrite-heads expr
     Compute a HEADS list for EXPR suitable for use with
     ‘apply-rewrites’, as discussed above.

 -- Function: rewrite expr rules many
     This is an all-in-one rewrite function.  It compiles the rule set
     specified by RULES, then uses ‘map-tree’ to apply the rules
     throughout EXPR up to MANY (default infinity) times.

 -- Function: match-patterns pat vec not-flag
     Given a Calc vector VEC and an uncompiled pattern set or pattern
     set variable PAT, this function returns a new vector of all
     elements of VEC which do (or don’t, if NOT-FLAG is non-‘nil’) match
     any of the patterns in PAT.

 -- Function: deriv expr var value symb
     Compute the derivative of EXPR with respect to variable VAR (which
     may actually be any sub-expression).  If VALUE is specified, the
     derivative is evaluated at the value of VAR; otherwise, the
     derivative is left in terms of VAR.  If the expression contains
     functions for which no derivative formula is known, new derivative
     functions are invented by adding primes to the names; *note
     Calculus::.  However, if SYMB is non-‘nil’, the presence of
     nondifferentiable functions in EXPR instead cancels the whole
     differentiation, and ‘deriv’ returns ‘nil’ instead.

     Derivatives of an N-argument function can be defined by adding a
     ‘math-derivative-N’ property to the property list of the symbol for
     the function’s derivative, which will be the function name followed
     by an apostrophe.  The value of the property should be a Lisp
     function; it is called with the same arguments as the original
     function call that is being differentiated.  It should return a
     formula for the derivative.  For example, the derivative of ‘ln’ is
     defined by

          (put 'calcFunc-ln\' 'math-derivative-1
               (lambda (u) (math-div 1 u)))

     The two-argument ‘log’ function has two derivatives,
          (put 'calcFunc-log\' 'math-derivative-2     ; d(log(x,b)) / dx
               (lambda (x b) ... ))
          (put 'calcFunc-log\'2 'math-derivative-2    ; d(log(x,b)) / db
               (lambda (x b) ... ))

 -- Function: tderiv expr var value symb
     Compute the total derivative of EXPR.  This is the same as ‘deriv’,
     except that variables other than VAR are not assumed to be constant
     with respect to VAR.

 -- Function: integ expr var low high
     Compute the integral of EXPR with respect to VAR.  *Note
     Calculus::, for further details.

 -- Macro: math-defintegral funcs body
     Define a rule for integrating a function or functions of one
     argument; this macro is very similar in format to
     ‘math-defsimplify’.  The main difference is that here BODY is the
     body of a function with a single argument ‘u’ which is bound to the
     argument to the function being integrated, not the function call
     itself.  Also, the variable of integration is available as
     ‘math-integ-var’.  If evaluation of the integral requires doing
     further integrals, the body should call ‘(math-integral X)’ to find
     the integral of X with respect to ‘math-integ-var’; this function
     returns ‘nil’ if the integral could not be done.  Some examples:

          (math-defintegral calcFunc-conj
            (let ((int (math-integral u)))
              (and int
                   (list 'calcFunc-conj int))))

          (math-defintegral calcFunc-cos
            (and (equal u math-integ-var)
                 (math-from-radians-2 (list 'calcFunc-sin u))))

     In the ‘cos’ example, we define only the integral of ‘cos(x) dx’,
     relying on the general integration-by-substitution facility to
     handle cosines of more complicated arguments.  An integration rule
     should return ‘nil’ if it can’t do the integral; if several rules
     are defined for the same function, they are tried in order until
     one returns a non-‘nil’ result.

 -- Macro: math-defintegral-2 funcs body
     Define a rule for integrating a function or functions of two
     arguments.  This is exactly analogous to ‘math-defintegral’, except
     that BODY is written as the body of a function with two arguments,
     U and V.

 -- Function: solve-for lhs rhs var full
     Attempt to solve the equation ‘LHS = RHS’ by isolating the variable
     VAR on the lefthand side; return the resulting righthand side, or
     ‘nil’ if the equation cannot be solved.  The variable VAR must
     appear at least once in LHS or RHS.  Note that the return value is
     a formula which does not contain VAR; this is different from the
     user-level ‘solve’ and ‘finv’ functions, which return a rearranged
     equation or a functional inverse, respectively.  If FULL is
     non-‘nil’, a full solution including dummy signs and dummy integers
     will be produced.  User-defined inverses are provided as properties
     in a manner similar to derivatives:

          (put 'calcFunc-ln 'math-inverse
               (lambda (x) (list 'calcFunc-exp x)))

     This function can call ‘(math-solve-get-sign X)’ to create a new
     arbitrary sign variable, returning X times that sign, and
     ‘(math-solve-get-int X)’ to create a new arbitrary integer variable
     multiplied by X.  These functions simply return X if the caller
     requested a non-“full” solution.

 -- Function: solve-eqn expr var full
     This version of ‘solve-for’ takes an expression which will
     typically be an equation or inequality.  (If it is not, it will be
     interpreted as the equation ‘EXPR = 0’.)  It returns an equation or
     inequality, or ‘nil’ if no solution could be found.

 -- Function: solve-system exprs vars full
     This function solves a system of equations.  Generally, EXPRS and
     VARS will be vectors of equal length.  *Note Solving Systems of
     Equations::, for other options.

 -- Function: expr-contains expr var
     Returns a non-‘nil’ value if VAR occurs as a subexpression of EXPR.

     This function might seem at first to be identical to
     ‘calc-find-sub-formula’.  The key difference is that
     ‘expr-contains’ uses ‘equal’ to test for matches, whereas
     ‘calc-find-sub-formula’ uses ‘eq’.  In the formula ‘f(a, a)’, the
     two ‘a’s will be ‘equal’ but not ‘eq’ to each other.

 -- Function: expr-contains-count expr var
     Returns the number of occurrences of VAR as a subexpression of
     EXPR, or ‘nil’ if there are no occurrences.

 -- Function: expr-depends expr var
     Returns true if EXPR refers to any variable the occurs in VAR.  In
     other words, it checks if EXPR and VAR have any variables in
     common.

 -- Function: expr-contains-vars expr
     Return true if EXPR contains any variables, or ‘nil’ if EXPR
     contains only constants and functions with constant arguments.

 -- Function: expr-subst expr old new
     Returns a copy of EXPR, with all occurrences of OLD replaced by
     NEW.  This treats ‘lambda’ forms specially with respect to the
     dummy argument variables, so that the effect is always to return
     EXPR evaluated at OLD = NEW.

 -- Function: multi-subst expr old new
     This is like ‘expr-subst’, except that OLD and NEW are lists of
     expressions to be substituted simultaneously.  If one list is
     shorter than the other, trailing elements of the longer list are
     ignored.

 -- Function: expr-weight expr
     Returns the “weight” of EXPR, basically a count of the total number
     of objects and function calls that appear in EXPR.  For “primitive”
     objects, this will be one.

 -- Function: expr-height expr
     Returns the “height” of EXPR, which is the deepest level to which
     function calls are nested.  (Note that ‘A + B’ counts as a function
     call.)  For primitive objects, this returns zero.

 -- Function: polynomial-p expr var
     Check if EXPR is a polynomial in variable (or sub-expression) VAR.
     If so, return the degree of the polynomial, that is, the highest
     power of VAR that appears in EXPR.  For example, for ‘(x^2 + 3)^3 +
     4’ this would return 6.  This function returns ‘nil’ unless EXPR,
     when expanded out by ‘a x’ (‘calc-expand’), would consist of a sum
     of terms in which VAR appears only raised to nonnegative integer
     powers.  Note that if VAR does not occur in EXPR, then EXPR is
     considered a polynomial of degree 0.

 -- Function: is-polynomial expr var degree loose
     Check if EXPR is a polynomial in variable or sub-expression VAR,
     and, if so, return a list representation of the polynomial where
     the elements of the list are coefficients of successive powers of
     VAR: ‘A + B x + C x^3’ would produce the list ‘(A B 0 C)’, and ‘(x
     + 1)^2’ would produce the list ‘(1 2 1)’.  The highest element of
     the list will be non-zero, with the special exception that if EXPR
     is the constant zero, the returned value will be ‘(0)’.  Return
     ‘nil’ if EXPR is not a polynomial in VAR.  If DEGREE is specified,
     this will not consider polynomials of degree higher than that
     value.  This is a good precaution because otherwise an input of
     ‘(x+1)^1000’ will cause a huge coefficient list to be built.  If
     LOOSE is non-‘nil’, then a looser definition of a polynomial is
     used in which coefficients are no longer required not to depend on
     VAR, but are only required not to take the form of polynomials
     themselves.  For example, ‘sin(x) x^2 + cos(x)’ is a loose
     polynomial with coefficients ‘((calcFunc-cos x) 0 (calcFunc-sin
     x))’.  The result will never be ‘nil’ in loose mode, since any
     expression can be interpreted as a “constant” loose polynomial.

 -- Function: polynomial-base expr pred
     Check if EXPR is a polynomial in any variable that occurs in it; if
     so, return that variable.  (If EXPR is a multivariate polynomial,
     this chooses one variable arbitrarily.)  If PRED is specified, it
     should be a Lisp function which is called as ‘(PRED SUBEXPR)’, and
     which should return true if ‘mpb-top-expr’ (a global name for the
     original EXPR) is a suitable polynomial in SUBEXPR.  The default
     predicate uses ‘(polynomial-p mpb-top-expr SUBEXPR)’; you can use
     PRED to specify additional conditions.  Or, you could have PRED
     build up a list of every suitable SUBEXPR that is found.

 -- Function: poly-simplify poly
     Simplify polynomial coefficient list POLY by (destructively)
     clipping off trailing zeros.

 -- Function: poly-mix a ac b bc
     Mix two polynomial lists A and B (in the form returned by
     ‘is-polynomial’) in a linear combination with coefficient
     expressions AC and BC.  The result is a (not necessarily
     simplified) polynomial list representing ‘AC A + BC B’.

 -- Function: poly-mul a b
     Multiply two polynomial coefficient lists A and B.  The result will
     be in simplified form if the inputs were simplified.

 -- Function: build-polynomial-expr poly var
     Construct a Calc formula which represents the polynomial
     coefficient list POLY applied to variable VAR.  The ‘a c’
     (‘calc-collect’) command uses ‘is-polynomial’ to turn an expression
     into a coefficient list, then ‘build-polynomial-expr’ to turn the
     list back into an expression in regular form.

 -- Function: check-unit-name var
     Check if VAR is a variable which can be interpreted as a unit name.
     If so, return the units table entry for that unit.  This will be a
     list whose first element is the unit name (not counting prefix
     characters) as a symbol and whose second element is the Calc
     expression which defines the unit.  (Refer to the Calc sources for
     details on the remaining elements of this list.)  If VAR is not a
     variable or is not a unit name, return ‘nil’.

 -- Function: units-in-expr-p expr sub-exprs
     Return true if EXPR contains any variables which can be interpreted
     as units.  If SUB-EXPRS is ‘t’, the entire expression is searched.
     If SUB-EXPRS is ‘nil’, this checks whether EXPR is directly a units
     expression.

 -- Function: single-units-in-expr-p expr
     Check whether EXPR contains exactly one units variable.  If so,
     return the units table entry for the variable.  If EXPR does not
     contain any units, return ‘nil’.  If EXPR contains two or more
     units, return the symbol ‘wrong’.

 -- Function: to-standard-units expr which
     Convert units expression EXPR to base units.  If WHICH is ‘nil’,
     use Calc’s native base units.  Otherwise, WHICH can specify a units
     system, which is a list of two-element lists, where the first
     element is a Calc base symbol name and the second is an expression
     to substitute for it.

 -- Function: remove-units expr
     Return a copy of EXPR with all units variables replaced by ones.
     This expression is generally normalized before use.

 -- Function: extract-units expr
     Return a copy of EXPR with everything but units variables replaced
     by ones.


File: calc.info,  Node: Formatting Lisp Functions,  Next: Hooks,  Prev: Symbolic Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.8 I/O and Formatting Functions
.....................................

The functions described here are responsible for parsing and formatting
Calc numbers and formulas.

 -- Function: calc-eval str sep arg1 arg2 ...
     This is the simplest interface to the Calculator from another Lisp
     program.  *Note Calling Calc from Your Programs::.

 -- Function: read-number str
     If string STR contains a valid Calc number, either integer,
     fraction, float, or HMS form, this function parses and returns that
     number.  Otherwise, it returns ‘nil’.

 -- Function: read-expr str
     Read an algebraic expression from string STR.  If STR does not have
     the form of a valid expression, return a list of the form ‘(error
     POS MSG)’ where POS is an integer index into STR of the general
     location of the error, and MSG is a string describing the problem.

 -- Function: read-exprs str
     Read a list of expressions separated by commas, and return it as a
     Lisp list.  If an error occurs in any expressions, an error list as
     shown above is returned instead.

 -- Function: calc-do-alg-entry initial prompt no-norm
     Read an algebraic formula or formulas using the minibuffer.  All
     conventions of regular algebraic entry are observed.  The return
     value is a list of Calc formulas; there will be more than one if
     the user entered a list of values separated by commas.  The result
     is ‘nil’ if the user presses Return with a blank line.  If INITIAL
     is given, it is a string which the minibuffer will initially
     contain.  If PROMPT is given, it is the prompt string to use; the
     default is “Algebraic:”.  If NO-NORM is ‘t’, the formulas will be
     returned exactly as parsed; otherwise, they will be passed through
     ‘calc-normalize’ first.

     To support the use of ‘$’ characters in the algebraic entry, use
     ‘let’ to bind ‘calc-dollar-values’ to a list of the values to be
     substituted for ‘$’, ‘$$’, and so on, and bind ‘calc-dollar-used’
     to 0.  Upon return, ‘calc-dollar-used’ will have been changed to
     the highest number of consecutive ‘$’s that actually appeared in
     the input.

 -- Function: format-number a
     Convert the real or complex number or HMS form A to string form.

 -- Function: format-flat-expr a prec
     Convert the arbitrary Calc number or formula A to string form, in
     the style used by the trail buffer and the ‘calc-edit’ command.
     This is a simple format designed mostly to guarantee the string is
     of a form that can be re-parsed by ‘read-expr’.  Most formatting
     modes, such as digit grouping, complex number format, and point
     character, are ignored to ensure the result will be re-readable.
     The PREC parameter is normally 0; if you pass a large integer like
     1000 instead, the expression will be surrounded by parentheses
     unless it is a plain number or variable name.

 -- Function: format-nice-expr a width
     This is like ‘format-flat-expr’ (with PREC equal to 0), except that
     newlines will be inserted to keep lines down to the specified
     WIDTH, and vectors that look like matrices or rewrite rules are
     written in a pseudo-matrix format.  The ‘calc-edit’ command uses
     this when only one stack entry is being edited.

 -- Function: format-value a width
     Convert the Calc number or formula A to string form, using the
     format seen in the stack buffer.  Beware the string returned may
     not be re-readable by ‘read-expr’, for example, because of digit
     grouping.  Multi-line objects like matrices produce strings that
     contain newline characters to separate the lines.  The W parameter,
     if given, is the target window size for which to format the
     expressions.  If W is omitted, the width of the Calculator window
     is used.

 -- Function: compose-expr a prec
     Format the Calc number or formula A according to the current
     language mode, returning a “composition.” To learn about the
     structure of compositions, see the comments in the Calc source
     code.  You can specify the format of a given type of function call
     by putting a ‘math-compose-LANG’ property on the function’s symbol,
     whose value is a Lisp function that takes A and PREC as arguments
     and returns a composition.  Here LANG is a language mode name, one
     of ‘normal’, ‘big’, ‘c’, ‘pascal’, ‘fortran’, ‘tex’, ‘eqn’, ‘math’,
     or ‘maple’.  In Big mode, Calc actually tries ‘math-compose-big’
     first, then tries ‘math-compose-normal’.  If this property does not
     exist, or if the function returns ‘nil’, the function is written in
     the normal function-call notation for that language.

 -- Function: composition-to-string c w
     Convert a composition structure returned by ‘compose-expr’ into a
     string.  Multi-line compositions convert to strings containing
     newline characters.  The target window size is given by W.  The
     ‘format-value’ function basically calls ‘compose-expr’ followed by
     ‘composition-to-string’.

 -- Function: comp-width c
     Compute the width in characters of composition C.

 -- Function: comp-height c
     Compute the height in lines of composition C.

 -- Function: comp-ascent c
     Compute the portion of the height of composition C which is on or
     above the baseline.  For a one-line composition, this will be one.

 -- Function: comp-descent c
     Compute the portion of the height of composition C which is below
     the baseline.  For a one-line composition, this will be zero.

 -- Function: comp-first-char c
     If composition C is a “flat” composition, return the first
     (leftmost) character of the composition as an integer.  Otherwise,
     return ‘nil’.

 -- Function: comp-last-char c
     If composition C is a “flat” composition, return the last
     (rightmost) character, otherwise return ‘nil’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Hooks,  Prev: Formatting Lisp Functions,  Up: Internals

18.5.7.9 Hooks
..............

Hooks are variables which contain Lisp functions (or lists of functions)
which are called at various times.  Calc defines a number of hooks that
help you to customize it in various ways.  Calc uses the Lisp function
‘run-hooks’ to invoke the hooks shown below.  Several other
customization-related variables are also described here.  To run code
after Calc has loaded, use ‘with-eval-after-load’.

 -- Variable: calc-start-hook
     This hook is called as the last step in a ‘M-x calc’ command.  At
     this point, the Calc buffer has been created and initialized if
     necessary, the Calc window and trail window have been created, and
     the “Welcome to Calc” message has been displayed.

 -- Variable: calc-mode-hook
     This hook is called when the Calc buffer is being created.  Usually
     this will only happen once per Emacs session.  The hook is called
     after Emacs has switched to the new buffer, the mode-settings file
     has been read if necessary, and all other buffer-local variables
     have been set up.  After this hook returns, Calc will perform a
     ‘calc-refresh’ operation, set up the mode line display, then
     evaluate any deferred ‘calc-define’ properties that have not been
     evaluated yet.

 -- Variable: calc-trail-mode-hook
     This hook is called when the Calc Trail buffer is being created.
     It is called as the very last step of setting up the Trail buffer.
     Like ‘calc-mode-hook’, this will normally happen only once per
     Emacs session.

 -- Variable: calc-end-hook
     This hook is called by ‘calc-quit’, generally because the user
     presses ‘q’ or ‘C-x * c’ while in Calc.  The Calc buffer will be
     the current buffer.  The hook is called as the very first step,
     before the Calc window is destroyed.

 -- Variable: calc-window-hook
     If this hook is non-‘nil’, it is called to create the Calc window.
     Upon return, this new Calc window should be the current window.
     (The Calc buffer will already be the current buffer when the hook
     is called.)  If the hook is not defined, Calc will generally use
     ‘split-window’, ‘set-window-buffer’, and ‘select-window’ to create
     the Calc window.

 -- Variable: calc-trail-window-hook
     If this hook is non-‘nil’, it is called to create the Calc Trail
     window.  The variable ‘calc-trail-buffer’ will contain the buffer
     which the window should use.  Unlike ‘calc-window-hook’, this hook
     must _not_ switch into the new window.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-mode-hook
     This hook is called the first time that Embedded mode is entered.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-new-buffer-hook
     This hook is called each time that Embedded mode is entered in a
     new buffer.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-new-formula-hook
     This hook is called each time that Embedded mode is enabled for a
     new formula.

 -- Variable: calc-edit-mode-hook
     This hook is called by ‘calc-edit’ (and the other “edit” commands)
     when the temporary editing buffer is being created.  The buffer
     will have been selected and set up to be in ‘calc-edit-mode’, but
     will not yet have been filled with text.  (In fact it may still
     have leftover text from a previous ‘calc-edit’ command.)

 -- Variable: calc-mode-save-hook
     This hook is called by the ‘calc-save-modes’ command, after Calc’s
     own mode features have been inserted into the Calc init file and
     just before the “End of mode settings” message is inserted.

 -- Variable: calc-reset-hook
     This hook is called after ‘C-x * 0’ (‘calc-reset’) has reset all
     modes.  The Calc buffer will be the current buffer.

 -- Variable: calc-other-modes
     This variable contains a list of strings.  The strings are
     concatenated at the end of the modes portion of the Calc mode line
     (after standard modes such as “Deg”, “Inv” and “Hyp”).  Each string
     should be a short, single word followed by a space.  The variable
     is ‘nil’ by default.

 -- Variable: calc-mode-map
     This is the keymap that is used by Calc mode.  The best time to
     adjust it is probably in a ‘calc-mode-hook’.  If the Calc
     extensions package (‘calc-ext.el’) has not yet been loaded, many of
     these keys will be bound to ‘calc-missing-key’, which is a command
     that loads the extensions package and “retypes” the key.  If your
     ‘calc-mode-hook’ rebinds one of these keys, it will probably be
     overridden when the extensions are loaded.

 -- Variable: calc-digit-map
     This is the keymap that is used during numeric entry.  Numeric
     entry uses the minibuffer, but this map binds every non-numeric key
     to ‘calcDigit-nondigit’ which generally calls ‘exit-minibuffer’ and
     “retypes” the key.

 -- Variable: calc-alg-ent-map
     This is the keymap that is used during algebraic entry.  This is
     mostly a copy of ‘minibuffer-local-map’.

 -- Variable: calc-store-var-map
     This is the keymap that is used during entry of variable names for
     commands like ‘calc-store’ and ‘calc-recall’.  This is mostly a
     copy of ‘minibuffer-local-completion-map’.

 -- Variable: calc-edit-mode-map
     This is the (sparse) keymap used by ‘calc-edit’ and other temporary
     editing commands.  It binds <RET>, <LFD>, and ‘C-c C-c’ to
     ‘calc-edit-finish’.

 -- Variable: calc-mode-var-list
     This is a list of variables which are saved by ‘calc-save-modes’.
     Each entry is a list of two items, the variable (as a Lisp symbol)
     and its default value.  When modes are being saved, each variable
     is compared with its default value (using ‘equal’) and any
     non-default variables are written out.

 -- Variable: calc-local-var-list
     This is a list of variables which should be buffer-local to the
     Calc buffer.  Each entry is a variable name (as a Lisp symbol).
     These variables also have their default values manipulated by the
     ‘calc’ and ‘calc-quit’ commands; *note Multiple Calculators::.
     Since ‘calc-mode-hook’ is called after this list has been used the
     first time, your hook should add a variable to the list and also
     call ‘make-local-variable’ itself.


File: calc.info,  Node: Copying,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Programming,  Up: Top

Appendix A GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
*************************************

                        Version 3, 29 June 2007

     Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <https://fsf.org/>

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
     license document, but changing it is not allowed.

Preamble
========

The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software
and other kinds of works.

   The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change all versions of a program—to make sure it remains free
software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
your programs, too.

   When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
free programs, and that you know you can do these things.

   To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.

   For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
know their rights.

   Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.

   For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains
that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users’ and
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
authors of previous versions.

   Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
protecting users’ freedom to change the software.  The systematic
pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.

   Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.

   The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
modification follow.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
====================

  0. Definitions.

     “This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public
     License.

     “Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other
     kinds of works, such as semiconductor masks.

     “The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
     License.  Each licensee is addressed as “you”.  “Licensees” and
     “recipients” may be individuals or organizations.

     To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the
     work in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the
     making of an exact copy.  The resulting work is called a “modified
     version” of the earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work.

     A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work
     based on the Program.

     To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without
     permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
     infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on
     a computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes
     copying, distribution (with or without modification), making
     available to the public, and in some countries other activities as
     well.

     To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
     parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user
     through a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not
     conveying.

     An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices”
     to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
     feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
     tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to
     the extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey
     the work under this License, and how to view a copy of this
     License.  If the interface presents a list of user commands or
     options, such as a menu, a prominent item in the list meets this
     criterion.

  1. Source Code.

     The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work
     for making modifications to it.  “Object code” means any non-source
     form of a work.

     A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an
     official standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in
     the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming
     language, one that is widely used among developers working in that
     language.

     The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything,
     other than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal
     form of packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that
     Major Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with
     that Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for
     which an implementation is available to the public in source code
     form.  A “Major Component”, in this context, means a major
     essential component (kernel, window system, and so on) of the
     specific operating system (if any) on which the executable work
     runs, or a compiler used to produce the work, or an object code
     interpreter used to run it.

     The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all
     the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
     work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts
     to control those activities.  However, it does not include the
     work’s System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally
     available free programs which are used unmodified in performing
     those activities but which are not part of the work.  For example,
     Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated
     with source files for the work, and the source code for shared
     libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is
     specifically designed to require, such as by intimate data
     communication or control flow between those subprograms and other
     parts of the work.

     The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can
     regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
     Source.

     The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
     same work.

  2. Basic Permissions.

     All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
     copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
     conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
     permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running
     a covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given
     its content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges
     your rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by
     copyright law.

     You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
     convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise
     remains in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the
     sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you,
     or provide you with facilities for running those works, provided
     that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all
     material for which you do not control copyright.  Those thus making
     or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your
     behalf, under your direction and control, on terms that prohibit
     them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside
     their relationship with you.

     Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
     the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section
     10 makes it unnecessary.

  3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.

     No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
     measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under
     article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December
     1996, or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of
     such measures.

     When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
     circumvention of technological measures to the extent such
     circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License
     with respect to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to
     limit operation or modification of the work as a means of
     enforcing, against the work’s users, your or third parties’ legal
     rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures.

  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.

     You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
     receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
     appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
     keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
     non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the
     code; keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and
     give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.

     You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
     and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.

  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.

     You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
     produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
     terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these
     conditions:

       a. The work must carry prominent notices stating that you
          modified it, and giving a relevant date.

       b. The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
          released under this License and any conditions added under
          section 7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in
          section 4 to “keep intact all notices”.

       c. You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
          License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
          License will therefore apply, along with any applicable
          section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all
          its parts, regardless of how they are packaged.  This License
          gives no permission to license the work in any other way, but
          it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately
          received it.

       d. If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
          Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has
          interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal
          Notices, your work need not make them do so.

     A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
     works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered
     work, and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger
     program, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is
     called an “aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting
     copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the
     compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit.
     Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this
     License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate.

  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.

     You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
     of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
     machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this
     License, in one of these ways:

       a. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
          (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
          Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
          customarily used for software interchange.

       b. Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
          (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
          written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
          long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that
          product model, to give anyone who possesses the object code
          either (1) a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the
          software in the product that is covered by this License, on a
          durable physical medium customarily used for software
          interchange, for a price no more than your reasonable cost of
          physically performing this conveying of source, or (2) access
          to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no
          charge.

       c. Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
          written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
          alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially,
          and only if you received the object code with such an offer,
          in accord with subsection 6b.

       d. Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
          place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to
          the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same
          place at no further charge.  You need not require recipients
          to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code.
          If the place to copy the object code is a network server, the
          Corresponding Source may be on a different server (operated by
          you or a third party) that supports equivalent copying
          facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to the
          object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source.
          Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you
          remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as
          needed to satisfy these requirements.

       e. Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission,
          provided you inform other peers where the object code and
          Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the
          general public at no charge under subsection 6d.

     A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is
     excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need
     not be included in conveying the object code work.

     A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means
     any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal,
     family, or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for
     incorporation into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is
     a consumer product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of
     coverage.  For a particular product received by a particular user,
     “normally used” refers to a typical or common use of that class of
     product, regardless of the status of the particular user or of the
     way in which the particular user actually uses, or expects or is
     expected to use, the product.  A product is a consumer product
     regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial,
     industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent the
     only significant mode of use of the product.

     “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods,
     procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to
     install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that
     User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source.
     The information must suffice to ensure that the continued
     functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or
     interfered with solely because modification has been made.

     If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with,
     or specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying
     occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession
     and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in
     perpetuity or for a fixed term (regardless of how the transaction
     is characterized), the Corresponding Source conveyed under this
     section must be accompanied by the Installation Information.  But
     this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party
     retains the ability to install modified object code on the User
     Product (for example, the work has been installed in ROM).

     The requirement to provide Installation Information does not
     include a requirement to continue to provide support service,
     warranty, or updates for a work that has been modified or installed
     by the recipient, or for the User Product in which it has been
     modified or installed.  Access to a network may be denied when the
     modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation
     of the network or violates the rules and protocols for
     communication across the network.

     Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information
     provided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is
     publicly documented (and with an implementation available to the
     public in source code form), and must require no special password
     or key for unpacking, reading or copying.

  7. Additional Terms.

     “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of
     this License by making exceptions from one or more of its
     conditions.  Additional permissions that are applicable to the
     entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in
     this License, to the extent that they are valid under applicable
     law.  If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program,
     that part may be used separately under those permissions, but the
     entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to
     the additional permissions.

     When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
     remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part
     of it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
     removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
     additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
     for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.

     Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material
     you add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright
     holders of that material) supplement the terms of this License with
     terms:

       a. Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from
          the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or

       b. Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices
          or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate
          Legal Notices displayed by works containing it; or

       c. Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material,
          or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked
          in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or

       d. Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors
          or authors of the material; or

       e. Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
          trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or

       f. Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
          material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified
          versions of it) with contractual assumptions of liability to
          the recipient, for any liability that these contractual
          assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors.

     All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further
     restrictions” within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as
     you received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that
     it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further
     restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document
     contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying
     under this License, you may add to a covered work material governed
     by the terms of that license document, provided that the further
     restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying.

     If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
     must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
     additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
     where to find the applicable terms.

     Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in
     the form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
     the above requirements apply either way.

  8. Termination.

     You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
     provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
     modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
     under this License (including any patent licenses granted under the
     third paragraph of section 11).

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
     permanently reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses
     for the same material under section 10.

  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.

     You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
     run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
     occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer
     transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require
     acceptance.  However, nothing other than this License grants you
     permission to propagate or modify any covered work.  These actions
     infringe copyright if you do not accept this License.  Therefore,
     by modifying or propagating a covered work, you indicate your
     acceptance of this License to do so.

  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.

     Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
     receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
     propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not
     responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this
     License.

     An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an
     organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
     organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a
     covered work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
     transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
     licenses to the work the party’s predecessor in interest had or
     could give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession
     of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in
     interest, if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable
     efforts.

     You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
     rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you
     may not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise
     of rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate
     litigation (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
     alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making, using,
     selling, offering for sale, or importing the Program or any portion
     of it.

  11. Patents.

     A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
     License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.
     The work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor
     version”.

     A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims
     owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
     hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner,
     permitted by this License, of making, using, or selling its
     contributor version, but do not include claims that would be
     infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the
     contributor version.  For purposes of this definition, “control”
     includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner
     consistent with the requirements of this License.

     Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide,
     royalty-free patent license under the contributor’s essential
     patent claims, to make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and
     otherwise run, modify and propagate the contents of its contributor
     version.

     In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any
     express agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to
     enforce a patent (such as an express permission to practice a
     patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement).  To “grant”
     such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or
     commitment not to enforce a patent against the party.

     If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent
     license, and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available
     for anyone to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this
     License, through a publicly available network server or other
     readily accessible means, then you must either (1) cause the
     Corresponding Source to be so available, or (2) arrange to deprive
     yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular
     work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent with the requirements
     of this License, to extend the patent license to downstream
     recipients.  “Knowingly relying” means you have actual knowledge
     that, but for the patent license, your conveying the covered work
     in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work in a
     country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
     country that you have reason to believe are valid.

     If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
     arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
     covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
     receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate,
     modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the
     patent license you grant is automatically extended to all
     recipients of the covered work and works based on it.

     A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within
     the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
     conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that
     are specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a
     covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third
     party that is in the business of distributing software, under which
     you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your
     activity of conveying the work, and under which the third party
     grants, to any of the parties who would receive the covered work
     from you, a discriminatory patent license (a) in connection with
     copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or copies made from
     those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection with specific
     products or compilations that contain the covered work, unless you
     entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was granted,
     prior to 28 March 2007.

     Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
     any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
     otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.

  12. No Surrender of Others’ Freedom.

     If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
     or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they
     do not excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you
     cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your
     obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations,
     then as a consequence you may not convey it at all.  For example,
     if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for
     further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program, the
     only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would
     be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.

  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.

     Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
     permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
     under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a
     single combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms
     of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the
     covered work, but the special requirements of the GNU Affero
     General Public License, section 13, concerning interaction through
     a network will apply to the combination as such.

  14. Revised Versions of this License.

     The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new
     versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such
     new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
     may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.

     Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
     Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
     General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free
     Software Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version
     number of the GNU General Public License, you may choose any
     version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.

     If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
     versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that
     proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Program.

     Later license versions may give you additional or different
     permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
     author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
     later version.

  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.

     THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
     APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE
     COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS”
     WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
     INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
     MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE
     RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU.
     SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
     NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.

  16. Limitation of Liability.

     IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
     WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES
     AND/OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR
     DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
     CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
     THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
     BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
     PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
     PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
     THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.

     If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
     above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
     reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely
     approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in
     connection with the Program, unless a warranty or assumption of
     liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
===========================

How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
=============================================

If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these
terms.

   To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the
“copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.

     ONE LINE TO GIVE THE PROGRAM'S NAME AND A BRIEF IDEA OF WHAT IT DOES.
     Copyright (C) YEAR NAME OF AUTHOR

     This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
     it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
     the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at
     your option) any later version.

     This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
     WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
     MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
     General Public License for more details.

     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
     along with this program.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.

   Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
mail.

   If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:

     PROGRAM Copyright (C) YEAR NAME OF AUTHOR
     This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’.
     This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
     under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.

   The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the
appropriate parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your
program’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would
use an “about box”.

   You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if
necessary.  For more information on this, and how to apply and follow
the GNU GPL, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.

   The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your
program into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine
library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
applications with the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the
GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.  But first,
please read <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/why-not-lgpl.html>.


File: calc.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: Customizing Calc,  Prev: Copying,  Up: Top

Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
*****************************************

                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008

     Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     <https://fsf.org/>

     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.

  0. PREAMBLE

     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
     functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to
     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.

     This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative
     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
     license designed for free software.

     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.  We
     recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
     instruction or reference.

  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS

     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
     be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
     “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”.  You accept
     the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
     requiring permission under copyright law.

     A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the
     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
     modifications and/or translated into another language.

     A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section
     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall
     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
     regarding them.

     The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose
     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
     notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
     If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
     is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may
     contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify
     any Invariant Sections then there are none.

     The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are
     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
     be at most 25 words.

     A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
     of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
     available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
     formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
     suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise
     Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
     been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
     readers is not Transparent.  An image format is not Transparent if
     used for any substantial amount of text.  A copy that is not
     “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.

     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
     simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
     Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
     Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
     edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
     the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
     the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
     processors for output purposes only.

     The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title
     Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
     work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.

     The “publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies
     of the Document to the public.

     A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document
     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
     “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.)
     To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the
     Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according
     to this definition.

     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
     has no effect on the meaning of this License.

  2. VERBATIM COPYING

     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
     conditions in section 3.

     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
     and you may publicly display copies.

  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY

     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
     the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
     front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
     equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material on the
     covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
     long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
     conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.

     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
     adjacent pages.

     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
     numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
     Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
     each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
     network-using public has access to download using public-standard
     network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
     of added material.  If you use the latter option, you must take
     reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
     copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
     remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
     year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
     through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.

     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
     the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
     to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
     Document.

  4. MODIFICATIONS

     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
     Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
     distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
     possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these things in
     the Modified Version:

       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
          versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
          History section of the Document).  You may use the same title
          as a previous version if the original publisher of that
          version gives permission.

       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
          from this requirement.

       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
          Modified Version, as the publisher.

       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.

       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
          adjacent to the other copyright notices.

       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
          the Addendum below.

       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s
          license notice.

       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.

       I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title,
          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
          Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled “History” in the
          Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
          publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
          an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
          previous sentence.

       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in the
          “History” section.  You may omit a network location for a work
          that was published at least four years before the Document
          itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
          to gives permission.

       K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”,
          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
          all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.

       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
          in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers or the
          equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.

       M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”.  Such a section
          may not be included in the Modified Version.

       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
          “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant
          Section.

       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.

     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
     material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
     some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their
     titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s
     license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any other
     section titles.

     You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains
     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
     parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
     been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of
     a standard.

     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
     the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage
     of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
     through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document
     already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
     by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
     behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
     one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
     the old one.

     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.

  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS

     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
     of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
     their Warranty Disclaimers.

     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
     combined work.

     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
     “History” in the various original documents, forming one section
     Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled
     “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”.  You
     must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements.”

  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS

     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
     in all other respects.

     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
     License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
     document.

  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS

     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
     storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the
     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
     legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual
     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.

     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
     of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed
     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
     the whole aggregate.

  8. TRANSLATION

     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
     include the original English version of this License and the
     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
     prevail.

     If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”,
     “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to
     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
     actual title.

  9. TERMINATION

     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.

     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
     finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.

     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
     after your receipt of the notice.

     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
     under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not
     permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
     same material does not give you any rights to use it.

  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE

     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
     <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.

     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
     version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you
     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
     that specified version or of any later version that has been
     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the
     Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
     choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
     Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy can
     decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
     proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.

  11. RELICENSING

     “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or “MMC Site”) means any
     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
     A “Massive Multiauthor Collaboration” (or “MMC”) contained in the
     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
     site.

     “CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
     published by that same organization.

     “Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
     in part, as part of another Document.

     An MMC is “eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this
     License, and if all works that were first published under this
     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
     to November 1, 2008.

     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.

ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
====================================================

To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
notices just after the title page:

       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
       Free Documentation License''.

   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:

         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
         being LIST.

   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
situation.

   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
their use in free software.


File: calc.info,  Node: Customizing Calc,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top

Appendix C Customizing Calc
***************************

The usual prefix for Calc is the key sequence ‘C-x *’.  If you wish to
use a different prefix, you can put

     (global-set-key "NEWPREFIX" 'calc-dispatch)

in your .emacs file.  (*Note Customizing Key Bindings: (emacs)Key
Bindings, for more information on binding keys.)  A convenient way to
start Calc is with ‘C-x * *’; to make it equally convenient for users
who use a different prefix, the prefix can be followed by ‘=’, ‘&’, ‘#’,
‘\’, ‘/’, ‘+’ or ‘-’ as well as ‘*’ to start Calc, and so in many cases
the last character of the prefix can simply be typed twice.

   Calc is controlled by many variables, most of which can be reset from
within Calc.  Some variables are less involved with actual calculation
and can be set outside of Calc using Emacs’s customization facilities.
These variables are listed below.  Typing ‘M-x customize-variable <RET>
VARIABLE-NAME <RET>’ will bring up a buffer in which the variable’s
value can be redefined.  Typing ‘M-x customize-group <RET> calc <RET>’
will bring up a buffer which contains all of Calc’s customizable
variables.  (These variables can also be reset by putting the
appropriate lines in your .emacs file; *Note Init File: (emacs)Init
File.)

   Some of the customizable variables are regular expressions.  A
regular expression is basically a pattern that Calc can search for.  See
*note Regular Expression Search: (emacs)Regexp Search. to see how
regular expressions work.

 -- Variable: calc-settings-file
     The variable ‘calc-settings-file’ holds the file name in which
     commands like ‘m m’ and ‘Z P’ store “permanent” definitions.  If
     ‘calc-settings-file’ is not your user init file (typically
     ‘~/.emacs’) and if the variable ‘calc-loaded-settings-file’ is
     ‘nil’, then Calc will automatically load your settings file (if it
     exists) the first time Calc is invoked.

     The default value for this variable is ‘"~/.emacs.d/calc.el"’
     unless the file ‘~/.calc.el’ exists, in which case the default
     value will be ‘"~/.calc.el"’.

 -- Variable: calc-gnuplot-name
     See *note Graphics::.
     The variable ‘calc-gnuplot-name’ should be the name of the GNUPLOT
     program (a string).  If you have GNUPLOT installed on your system
     but Calc is unable to find it, you may need to set this variable.
     You may also need to set some Lisp variables to show Calc how to
     run GNUPLOT on your system, see *note Graphical Devices: Devices. .
     The default value of ‘calc-gnuplot-name’ is ‘"gnuplot"’.

 -- Variable: calc-gnuplot-plot-command
 -- Variable: calc-gnuplot-print-command
     See *note Graphical Devices: Devices.
     The variables ‘calc-gnuplot-plot-command’ and
     ‘calc-gnuplot-print-command’ represent system commands to display
     and print the output of GNUPLOT, respectively.  These may be ‘nil’
     if no command is necessary, or strings which can include ‘%s’ to
     signify the name of the file to be displayed or printed.  Or, these
     variables may contain Lisp expressions which are evaluated to
     display or print the output.

     The default value of ‘calc-gnuplot-plot-command’ is ‘nil’, and the
     default value of ‘calc-gnuplot-print-command’ is ‘"lp %s"’.

 -- Variable: calc-language-alist
     See *note Basic Embedded Mode::.
     The variable ‘calc-language-alist’ controls the languages that Calc
     will associate with major modes.  When Calc embedded mode is
     enabled, it will try to use the current major mode to determine
     what language should be used.  (This can be overridden using Calc’s
     mode changing commands, *Note Mode Settings in Embedded Mode::.)
     The variable ‘calc-language-alist’ consists of a list of pairs of
     the form ‘(MAJOR-MODE . LANGUAGE)’; for example, ‘(latex-mode .
     latex)’ is one such pair.  If Calc embedded is activated in a
     buffer whose major mode is MAJOR-MODE, it will set itself to use
     the language LANGUAGE.

     The default value of ‘calc-language-alist’ is
             ((latex-mode . latex)
              (tex-mode   . tex)
              (plain-tex-mode . tex)
              (context-mode . tex)
              (nroff-mode . eqn)
              (pascal-mode . pascal)
              (c-mode . c)
              (c++-mode . c)
              (fortran-mode . fortran)
              (f90-mode . fortran))

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-announce-formula
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variable ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula’ helps determine what
     formulas ‘C-x * a’ will activate in a buffer.  It is a regular
     expression, and when activating embedded formulas with ‘C-x * a’,
     it will tell Calc that what follows is a formula to be activated.
     (Calc also uses other patterns to find formulas, such as ‘=>’ and
     ‘:=’.)

     The default pattern is ‘"%Embed\n\\(% .*\n\\)*"’, which checks for
     ‘%Embed’ followed by any number of lines beginning with ‘%’ and a
     space.

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist’ is used to set
     ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula’ to different regular expressions
     depending on the major mode of the editing buffer.  It consists of
     a list of pairs of the form ‘(MAJOR-MODE . REGEXP)’, and its
     default value is
             ((c++-mode     . "//Embed\n\\(// .*\n\\)*")
              (c-mode       . "/\\*Embed\\*/\n\\(/\\* .*\\*/\n\\)*")
              (f90-mode     . "!Embed\n\\(! .*\n\\)*")
              (fortran-mode . "C Embed\n\\(C .*\n\\)*")
              (html-helper-mode . "<!-- Embed -->\n\\(<!-- .* -->\n\\)*")
              (html-mode    . "<!-- Embed -->\n\\(<!-- .* -->\n\\)*")
              (nroff-mode   . "\\\\\"Embed\n\\(\\\\\" .*\n\\)*")
              (pascal-mode  . "{Embed}\n\\({.*}\n\\)*")
              (sgml-mode    . "<!-- Embed -->\n\\(<!-- .* -->\n\\)*")
              (xml-mode     . "<!-- Embed -->\n\\(<!-- .* -->\n\\)*")
              (texinfo-mode . "@c Embed\n\\(@c .*\n\\)*"))
     Any major modes added to ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist’
     should also be added to ‘calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist’.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-formula
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-close-formula
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variables ‘calc-embedded-open-formula’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-close-formula’ control the region that Calc will
     activate as a formula when Embedded mode is entered with ‘C-x * e’.
     They are regular expressions; Calc normally scans backward and
     forward in the buffer for the nearest text matching these regular
     expressions to be the “formula delimiters”.

     The simplest delimiters are blank lines.  Other delimiters that
     Embedded mode understands by default are:
       1. The TeX and LaTeX math delimiters ‘$ $’, ‘$$ $$’, ‘\[ \]’, and
          ‘\( \)’;
       2. Lines beginning with ‘\begin’ and ‘\end’ (except matrix
          delimiters);
       3. Lines beginning with ‘@’ (Texinfo delimiters).
       4. Lines beginning with ‘.EQ’ and ‘.EN’ (“eqn” delimiters);
       5. Lines containing a single ‘%’ or ‘.\"’ symbol and nothing
          else.

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist’ is used to
     set ‘calc-embedded-open-formula’ and ‘calc-embedded-close-formula’
     to different regular expressions depending on the major mode of the
     editing buffer.  It consists of a list of lists of the form
     ‘(MAJOR-MODE OPEN-FORMULA-REGEXP CLOSE-FORMULA-REGEXP)’, and its
     default value is ‘nil’.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-word-regexp
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variable ‘calc-embedded-word-regexp’ determines the expression
     that Calc will activate when Embedded mode is entered with ‘C-x *
     w’.  It is a regular expressions.

     The default value of ‘calc-embedded-word-regexp’ is
     ‘"[-+]?[0-9]+\\(\\.[0-9]+\\)?\\([eE][-+]?[0-9]+\\)?"’.

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist’ is used to set
     ‘calc-embedded-word-regexp’ to a different regular expression
     depending on the major mode of the editing buffer.  It consists of
     a list of lists of the form ‘(MAJOR-MODE WORD-REGEXP)’, and its
     default value is ‘nil’.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-plain
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-close-plain
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variables ‘calc-embedded-open-plain’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-open-plain’ are used to delimit “plain” formulas.
     Note that these are actual strings, not regular expressions,
     because Calc must be able to write these string into a buffer as
     well as to recognize them.

     The default string for ‘calc-embedded-open-plain’ is ‘"%%% "’, note
     the trailing space.  The default string for
     ‘calc-embedded-close-plain’ is ‘" %%%\n"’, without the trailing
     newline here, the first line of a Big mode formula that followed
     might be shifted over with respect to the other lines.

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist’ is used to set
     ‘calc-embedded-open-plain’ and ‘calc-embedded-close-plain’ to
     different strings depending on the major mode of the editing
     buffer.  It consists of a list of lists of the form ‘(MAJOR-MODE
     OPEN-PLAIN-STRING CLOSE-PLAIN-STRING)’, and its default value is
             ((c++-mode     "// %% "   " %%\n")
              (c-mode       "/* %% "   " %% */\n")
              (f90-mode     "! %% "    " %%\n")
              (fortran-mode "C %% "    " %%\n")
              (html-helper-mode "<!-- %% " " %% -->\n")
              (html-mode "<!-- %% " " %% -->\n")
              (nroff-mode   "\\\" %% " " %%\n")
              (pascal-mode  "{%% "    " %%}\n")
              (sgml-mode     "<!-- %% " " %% -->\n")
              (xml-mode     "<!-- %% " " %% -->\n")
              (texinfo-mode "@c %% "   " %%\n"))
     Any major modes added to ‘calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist’
     should also be added to ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist’.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-new-formula
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-close-new-formula
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variables ‘calc-embedded-open-new-formula’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-close-new-formula’ are strings which are inserted
     before and after a new formula when you type ‘C-x * f’.

     The default value of ‘calc-embedded-open-new-formula’ is ‘"\n\n"’.
     If this string begins with a newline character and the ‘C-x * f’ is
     typed at the beginning of a line, ‘C-x * f’ will skip this first
     newline to avoid introducing unnecessary blank lines in the file.
     The default value of ‘calc-embedded-close-new-formula’ is also
     ‘"\n\n"’.  The final newline is omitted by ‘C-x * f’ if typed at
     the end of a line.  (It follows that if ‘C-x * f’ is typed on a
     blank line, both a leading opening newline and a trailing closing
     newline are omitted.)

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist’ is used
     to set ‘calc-embedded-open-new-formula’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-close-new-formula’ to different strings depending on
     the major mode of the editing buffer.  It consists of a list of
     lists of the form ‘(MAJOR-MODE OPEN-NEW-FORMULA-STRING
     CLOSE-NEW-FORMULA-STRING)’, and its default value is ‘nil’.

 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-mode
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-close-mode
 -- Variable: calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist
     See *note Customizing Embedded Mode::.
     The variables ‘calc-embedded-open-mode’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-close-mode’ are strings which Calc will place before
     and after any mode annotations that it inserts.  Calc never scans
     for these strings; Calc always looks for the annotation itself, so
     it is not necessary to add them to user-written annotations.

     The default value of ‘calc-embedded-open-mode’ is ‘"% "’ and the
     default value of ‘calc-embedded-close-mode’ is ‘"\n"’.  If you
     change the value of ‘calc-embedded-close-mode’, it is a good idea
     still to end with a newline so that mode annotations will appear on
     lines by themselves.

     The variable ‘calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist’ is used to set
     ‘calc-embedded-open-mode’ and ‘calc-embedded-close-mode’ to
     different strings expressions depending on the major mode of the
     editing buffer.  It consists of a list of lists of the form
     ‘(MAJOR-MODE OPEN-MODE-STRING CLOSE-MODE-STRING)’, and its default
     value is
             ((c++-mode     "// "   "\n")
              (c-mode       "/* "   " */\n")
              (f90-mode     "! "    "\n")
              (fortran-mode "C "    "\n")
              (html-helper-mode "<!-- " " -->\n")
              (html-mode    "<!-- " " -->\n")
              (nroff-mode   "\\\" " "\n")
              (pascal-mode  "{ "    " }\n")
              (sgml-mode    "<!-- " " -->\n")
              (xml-mode     "<!-- " " -->\n")
              (texinfo-mode "@c "   "\n"))
     Any major modes added to ‘calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist’
     should also be added to ‘calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist’ and
     ‘calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist’.

 -- Variable: calc-lu-power-reference
 -- Variable: calc-lu-field-reference
     See *note Logarithmic Units::.
     The variables ‘calc-lu-power-reference’ and
     ‘calc-lu-field-reference’ are unit expressions (written as strings)
     which Calc will use as reference quantities for logarithmic units.

     The default value of ‘calc-lu-power-reference’ is ‘"mW"’ and the
     default value of ‘calc-lu-field-reference’ is ‘"20 uPa"’.

 -- Variable: calc-note-threshold
     See *note Musical Notes::.
     The variable ‘calc-note-threshold’ is a number (written as a
     string) which determines how close (in cents) a frequency needs to
     be to a note to be recognized as that note.

     The default value of ‘calc-note-threshold’ is 1.

 -- Variable: calc-highlight-selections-with-faces
 -- Variable: calc-selected-face
 -- Variable: calc-nonselected-face
     See *note Displaying Selections::.
     The variable ‘calc-highlight-selections-with-faces’ determines how
     selected sub-formulas are distinguished.  If
     ‘calc-highlight-selections-with-faces’ is nil, then a selected
     sub-formula is distinguished either by changing every character not
     part of the sub-formula with a dot or by changing every character
     in the sub-formula with a ‘#’ sign.  If
     ‘calc-highlight-selections-with-faces’ is t, then a selected
     sub-formula is distinguished either by displaying the non-selected
     portion of the formula with ‘calc-nonselected-face’ or by
     displaying the selected sub-formula with ‘calc-nonselected-face’.

 -- Variable: calc-multiplication-has-precedence
     The variable ‘calc-multiplication-has-precedence’ determines
     whether multiplication has precedence over division in algebraic
     formulas in normal language modes.  If
     ‘calc-multiplication-has-precedence’ is non-‘nil’, then
     multiplication has precedence (and, for certain obscure reasons, is
     right associative), and so for example ‘a/b*c’ will be interpreted
     as ‘a/(b*c)’.  If ‘calc-multiplication-has-precedence’ is ‘nil’,
     then multiplication has the same precedence as division (and, like
     division, is left associative), and so for example ‘a/b*c’ will be
     interpreted as ‘(a/b)*c’.  The default value of
     ‘calc-multiplication-has-precedence’ is ‘t’.

 -- Variable: calc-context-sensitive-enter
     The commands ‘calc-enter’ and ‘calc-pop’ will typically duplicate
     the top of the stack.  If ‘calc-context-sensitive-enter’ is
     non-‘nil’, then the ‘calc-enter’ will copy the element at the
     cursor to the top of the stack and ‘calc-pop’ will delete the
     element at the cursor.  The default value of
     ‘calc-context-sensitive-enter’ is ‘nil’.

 -- Variable: calc-undo-length
     The variable ‘calc-undo-length’ determines the number of undo steps
     that Calc will keep track of when ‘calc-quit’ is called.  If
     ‘calc-undo-length’ is a non-negative integer, then this is the
     number of undo steps that will be preserved; if ‘calc-undo-length’
     has any other value, then all undo steps will be preserved.  The
     default value of ‘calc-undo-length’ is ‘100’.

 -- Variable: calc-gregorian-switch
     See *note Date Forms::.
     The variable ‘calc-gregorian-switch’ is either a list of integers
     ‘(YEAR MONTH DAY)’ or ‘nil’.  If it is ‘nil’, then Calc’s date
     forms always represent Gregorian dates.  Otherwise,
     ‘calc-gregorian-switch’ represents the date that the calendar
     switches from Julian dates to Gregorian dates; ‘(YEAR MONTH DAY)’
     will be the first Gregorian date.  The customization buffer will
     offer several standard dates to choose from, or the user can enter
     their own date.

     The default value of ‘calc-gregorian-switch’ is ‘nil’.


File: calc.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: Summary,  Prev: Customizing Calc,  Up: Top

Appendix D Reporting Bugs
*************************

If you find a bug in Calc, send e-mail to <bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org>.
There is an automatic command ‘M-x report-emacs-bug’ which helps you to
report bugs.  This command prompts you for a brief subject line, then
leaves you in a mail editing buffer.  Type ‘C-c C-c’ to send your mail.
Make sure your subject line indicates that you are reporting a Calc bug.

   If you have suggestions for additional features for Calc, please send
them.  Some have dared to suggest that Calc is already top-heavy with
features; this obviously cannot be the case, so if you have ideas, send
them right in.

   At the front of the source file, ‘calc.el’, is a list of ideas for
future work.  If any enthusiastic souls wish to take it upon themselves
to work on these, please send a message (using ‘M-x report-emacs-bug’)
so any efforts can be coordinated.

   The latest version of Calc is available from Savannah, in the Emacs
repository.  See <https://savannah.gnu.org/projects/emacs>.


File: calc.info,  Node: Summary,  Next: Key Index,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top

Appendix E Calc Summary
***********************

This section includes a complete list of Calc keystroke commands.  Each
line lists the stack entries used by the command (top-of-stack last),
the keystrokes themselves, the prompts asked by the command, and the
result of the command (also with top-of-stack last).  The result is
expressed using the equivalent algebraic function.  Commands which put
no results on the stack show the full ‘M-x’ command name in that
position.  Numbers preceding the result or command name refer to notes
at the end.

   Algebraic functions and ‘M-x’ commands that don’t have corresponding
keystrokes are not listed in this summary.  *Note Command Index::.
*Note Function Index::.

            C-x * a                   33  calc-embedded-activate
            C-x * b                       calc-big-or-small
            C-x * c                       calc
            C-x * d                       calc-embedded-duplicate
            C-x * e                   34  calc-embedded
            C-x * f  formula              calc-embedded-new-formula
            C-x * g                   35  calc-grab-region
            C-x * i                       calc-info
            C-x * j                       calc-embedded-select
            C-x * k                       calc-keypad
            C-x * l                       calc-load-everything
            C-x * m                       read-kbd-macro
            C-x * n                    4  calc-embedded-next
            C-x * o                       calc-other-window
            C-x * p                    4  calc-embedded-previous
            C-x * q  formula              quick-calc
            C-x * r                   36  calc-grab-rectangle
            C-x * s                       calc-info-summary
            C-x * t                       calc-tutorial
            C-x * u                       calc-embedded-update-formula
            C-x * w                       calc-embedded-word
            C-x * x                       calc-quit
            C-x * y              1,28,49  calc-copy-to-buffer
            C-x * z                       calc-user-invocation
            C-x * :                   36  calc-grab-sum-down
            C-x * _                   36  calc-grab-sum-across
            C-x * ‘  editing          30  calc-embedded-edit
            C-x * 0  (zero)               calc-reset

             0-9   number               number
             .     number               0.number
             _     number               -number
             e     number               1e number
             #     number               current-radix#number
             p     (in number)          +/-
             M     (in number)          mod
             @ ’ "   (in number)        HMS form
             h m s   (in number)        HMS form

             ’     formula       37,46  formula
             $     formula       37,46  $formula
             "     string        37,46  string

    a b      +                       2  add(a,b)  a+b
    a b      -                       2  sub(a,b)  a−b
    a b      *                       2  mul(a,b)  a b, a*b
    a b      /                       2  div(a,b)  a/b
    a b      ^                       2  pow(a,b)  a^b
    a b    I ^                       2  nroot(a,b)  a^(1/b)
    a b      %                       2  mod(a,b)  a%b
    a b      \                       2  idiv(a,b)  a\b
    a b      :                       2  fdiv(a,b)
    a b      |                       2  vconcat(a,b)  a|b
    a b    I |                          vconcat(b,a)  b|a
    a b    H |                       2  append(a,b)
    a b  I H |                          append(b,a)
      a      &                       1  inv(a)  1/a
      a      !                       1  fact(a)  a!
      a      =                       1  evalv(a)
      a      M-%                        percent(a)  a%

  ... a      RET                     1  ... a a
  ... a      SPC                     1  ... a a
... a b      TAB                     3  ... b a
. a b c      M-TAB                   3  ... b c a
... a b      LFD                     1  ... a b a
  ... a      DEL                     1  ...
... a b      M-DEL                   1  ... b
             M-RET                   4  calc-last-args
      a      ‘     editing        1,30  calc-edit

  ... a      C-d                     1  ...
             C-k                    27  calc-kill
             C-w                    27  calc-kill-region
             C-y                        calc-yank
             C-_                     4  calc-undo
             M-k                    27  calc-copy-as-kill
             M-w                    27  calc-copy-region-as-kill

             [                          [...
[.. a b      ]                          [a,b]
             (                          (...
(.. a b      )                          (a,b)
             ,                          vector or rect complex
             ;                          matrix or polar complex
             ..                         interval

             ~                          calc-num-prefix
             <                       4  calc-scroll-left
             >                       4  calc-scroll-right
             {                       4  calc-scroll-down
             }                       4  calc-scroll-up
             ?                          calc-help

      a      n                       1  neg(a)  −a
             o                       4  calc-realign
             p     precision        31  calc-precision
             q                          calc-quit
             w                          calc-why
             x     command              M-x calc-command
      a      y                 1,28,49  calc-copy-to-buffer

      a      A                       1  abs(a)
    a b      B                       2  log(a,b)
    a b    I B                       2  alog(a,b)  b^a
      a      C                       1  cos(a)
      a    I C                       1  arccos(a)
      a    H C                       1  cosh(a)
      a  I H C                       1  arccosh(a)
             D                       4  calc-redo
      a      E                       1  exp(a)
      a    H E                       1  exp10(a)  10.^a
      a      F                    1,11  floor(a,d)
      a    I F                    1,11  ceil(a,d)
      a    H F                    1,11  ffloor(a,d)
      a  I H F                    1,11  fceil(a,d)
      a      G                       1  arg(a)
             H     command          32  Hyperbolic
             I     command          32  Inverse
      a      J                       1  conj(a)
             K     command          32  Keep-args
      a      L                       1  ln(a)
      a    H L                       1  log10(a)
             M                          calc-more-recursion-depth
           I M                          calc-less-recursion-depth
      a      N                       5  evalvn(a)
             O     command          32  Option
             P                          pi
           I P                          gamma
           H P                          e
         I H P                          phi
      a      Q                       1  sqrt(a)
      a    I Q                       1  sqr(a)  a^2
      a      R                    1,11  round(a,d)
      a    I R                    1,11  trunc(a,d)
      a    H R                    1,11  fround(a,d)
      a  I H R                    1,11  ftrunc(a,d)
      a      S                       1  sin(a)
      a    I S                       1  arcsin(a)
      a    H S                       1  sinh(a)
      a  I H S                       1  arcsinh(a)
      a      T                       1  tan(a)
      a    I T                       1  arctan(a)
      a    H T                       1  tanh(a)
      a  I H T                       1  arctanh(a)
             U                       4  calc-undo
             X                       4  calc-call-last-kbd-macro

    a b      a =                     2  eq(a,b)  a=b
    a b      a #                     2  neq(a,b)  a!=b
    a b      a <                     2  lt(a,b)  a<b
    a b      a >                     2  gt(a,b)  a>b
    a b      a [                     2  leq(a,b)  a<=b
    a b      a ]                     2  geq(a,b)  a>=b
    a b      a {                     2  in(a,b)
    a b      a &                  2,45  land(a,b)  a&&b
    a b      a |                  2,45  lor(a,b)  a||b
      a      a !                  1,45  lnot(a)  !a
  a b c      a :                    45  if(a,b,c)  a?b:c
      a      a .                     1  rmeq(a)
      a      a "                   7,8  calc-expand-formula

      a      a +   i, l, h        6,38  sum(a,i,l,h)
      a      a -   i, l, h        6,38  asum(a,i,l,h)
      a      a *   i, l, h        6,38  prod(a,i,l,h)
    a b      a _                     2  subscr(a,b)  a_b

    a b      a \                     2  pdiv(a,b)
    a b      a %                     2  prem(a,b)
    a b      a /                     2  pdivrem(a,b)  [q,r]
    a b    H a /                     2  pdivide(a,b)  q+r/b

      a      a a                     1  apart(a)
      a      a b   old, new         38  subst(a,old,new)
      a      a c   v                38  collect(a,v)
      a      a d   v              4,38  deriv(a,v)
      a    H a d   v              4,38  tderiv(a,v)
      a      a e                        esimplify(a)
      a      a f                     1  factor(a)
      a    H a f                     1  factors(a)
    a b      a g                     2  pgcd(a,b)
      a      a i   v                38  integ(a,v)
      a      a m   pats             38  match(a,pats)
      a    I a m   pats             38  matchnot(a,pats)
 data x      a p                    28  polint(data,x)
 data x    H a p                    28  ratint(data,x)
      a      a n                     1  nrat(a)
      a      a r   rules        4,8,38  rewrite(a,rules,n)
      a      a s                        simplify(a)
      a      a t   v, n          31,39  taylor(a,v,n)
      a      a v                   7,8  calc-alg-evaluate
      a      a x                   4,8  expand(a)

   data      a F   model, vars      48  fit(m,iv,pv,data)
   data    I a F   model, vars      48  xfit(m,iv,pv,data)
   data    H a F   model, vars      48  efit(m,iv,pv,data)
      a      a I   v, l, h          38  ninteg(a,v,l,h)
    a b      a M   op               22  mapeq(op,a,b)
    a b    I a M   op               22  mapeqr(op,a,b)
    a b    H a M   op               22  mapeqp(op,a,b)
    a g      a N   v                38  minimize(a,v,g)
    a g    H a N   v                38  wminimize(a,v,g)
      a      a P   v                38  roots(a,v)
    a g      a R   v                38  root(a,v,g)
    a g    H a R   v                38  wroot(a,v,g)
      a      a S   v                38  solve(a,v)
      a    I a S   v                38  finv(a,v)
      a    H a S   v                38  fsolve(a,v)
      a  I H a S   v                38  ffinv(a,v)
      a      a T   i, l, h        6,38  table(a,i,l,h)
    a g      a X   v                38  maximize(a,v,g)
    a g    H a X   v                38  wmaximize(a,v,g)

    a b      b a                     9  and(a,b,w)
      a      b c                     9  clip(a,w)
    a b      b d                     9  diff(a,b,w)
      a      b l                    10  lsh(a,n,w)
    a n    H b l                     9  lsh(a,n,w)
      a      b n                     9  not(a,w)
    a b      b o                     9  or(a,b,w)
      v      b p                     1  vpack(v)
      a      b r                    10  rsh(a,n,w)
    a n    H b r                     9  rsh(a,n,w)
      a      b t                    10  rot(a,n,w)
    a n    H b t                     9  rot(a,n,w)
      a      b u                     1  vunpack(a)
             b w   w              9,50  calc-word-size
    a b      b x                     9  xor(a,b,w)

c s l p      b D                        ddb(c,s,l,p)
  r n p      b F                        fv(r,n,p)
  r n p    I b F                        fvb(r,n,p)
  r n p    H b F                        fvl(r,n,p)
      v      b I                    19  irr(v)
      v    I b I                    19  irrb(v)
      a      b L                    10  ash(a,n,w)
    a n    H b L                     9  ash(a,n,w)
  r n a      b M                        pmt(r,n,a)
  r n a    I b M                        pmtb(r,n,a)
  r n a    H b M                        pmtl(r,n,a)
    r v      b N                    19  npv(r,v)
    r v    I b N                    19  npvb(r,v)
  r n p      b P                        pv(r,n,p)
  r n p    I b P                        pvb(r,n,p)
  r n p    H b P                        pvl(r,n,p)
      a      b R                    10  rash(a,n,w)
    a n    H b R                     9  rash(a,n,w)
  c s l      b S                        sln(c,s,l)
  n p a      b T                        rate(n,p,a)
  n p a    I b T                        rateb(n,p,a)
  n p a    H b T                        ratel(n,p,a)
c s l p      b Y                        syd(c,s,l,p)

  r p a      b #                        nper(r,p,a)
  r p a    I b #                        nperb(r,p,a)
  r p a    H b #                        nperl(r,p,a)
    a b      b %                        relch(a,b)

      a      c c                     5  pclean(a,p)
      a      c 0-9                      pclean(a,p)
      a    H c c                     5  clean(a,p)
      a    H c 0-9                      clean(a,p)
      a      c d                     1  deg(a)
      a      c f                     1  pfloat(a)
      a    H c f                     1  float(a)
      a      c h                     1  hms(a)
      a      c p                        polar(a)
      a    I c p                        rect(a)
      a      c r                     1  rad(a)

      a      c F                     5  pfrac(a,p)
      a    H c F                     5  frac(a,p)

      a      c %                        percent(a*100)

             d .   char             50  calc-point-char
             d ,   char             50  calc-group-char
             d <                 13,50  calc-left-justify
             d =                 13,50  calc-center-justify
             d >                 13,50  calc-right-justify
             d {   label            50  calc-left-label
             d }   label            50  calc-right-label
             d [                     4  calc-truncate-up
             d ]                     4  calc-truncate-down
             d "                 12,50  calc-display-strings
             d SPC                      calc-refresh
             d RET                   1  calc-refresh-top

             d 0                    50  calc-decimal-radix
             d 2                    50  calc-binary-radix
             d 6                    50  calc-hex-radix
             d 8                    50  calc-octal-radix

             d b              12,13,50  calc-line-breaking
             d c                    50  calc-complex-notation
             d d   format           50  calc-date-notation
             d e                  5,50  calc-eng-notation
             d f   num           31,50  calc-fix-notation
             d g              12,13,50  calc-group-digits
             d h   format           50  calc-hms-notation
             d i                    50  calc-i-notation
             d j                    50  calc-j-notation
             d l                 12,50  calc-line-numbering
             d n                  5,50  calc-normal-notation
             d o   format           50  calc-over-notation
             d p                 12,50  calc-show-plain
             d r   radix         31,50  calc-radix
             d s                  5,50  calc-sci-notation
             d t                    27  calc-truncate-stack
             d w                 12,13  calc-auto-why
             d z                 12,50  calc-leading-zeros

             d B                    50  calc-big-language
             d C                    50  calc-c-language
             d E                    50  calc-eqn-language
             d F                    50  calc-fortran-language
             d M                    50  calc-mathematica-language
             d N                    50  calc-normal-language
             d O                    50  calc-flat-language
             d P                    50  calc-pascal-language
             d T                    50  calc-tex-language
             d L                    50  calc-latex-language
             d U                    50  calc-unformatted-language
             d W                    50  calc-maple-language

      a      f [                     4  decr(a,n)
      a      f ]                     4  incr(a,n)

    a b      f b                     2  beta(a,b)
      a      f e                     1  erf(a)
      a    I f e                     1  erfc(a)
      a      f g                     1  gamma(a)
    a b      f h                     2  hypot(a,b)
      a      f i                     1  im(a)
    n a      f j                     2  besJ(n,a)
    a b      f n                     2  min(a,b)
      a      f r                     1  re(a)
      a      f s                     1  sign(a)
    a b      f x                     2  max(a,b)
    n a      f y                     2  besY(n,a)

      a      f A                     1  abssqr(a)
  x a b      f B                        betaI(x,a,b)
  x a b    H f B                        betaB(x,a,b)
      a      f E                     1  expm1(a)
    a x      f G                     2  gammaP(a,x)
    a x    I f G                     2  gammaQ(a,x)
    a x    H f G                     2  gammag(a,x)
    a x  I H f G                     2  gammaG(a,x)
    a b      f I                     2  ilog(a,b)
    a b    I f I                     2  alog(a,b)  b^a
      a      f L                     1  lnp1(a)
      a      f M                     1  mant(a)
      a      f Q                     1  isqrt(a)
      a    I f Q                     1  sqr(a)  a^2
    a n      f S                     2  scf(a,n)
    y x      f T                        arctan2(y,x)
      a      f X                     1  xpon(a)

    x y      g a                 28,40  calc-graph-add
             g b                    12  calc-graph-border
             g c                        calc-graph-clear
             g d                    41  calc-graph-delete
    x y      g f                 28,40  calc-graph-fast
             g g                    12  calc-graph-grid
             g h   title                calc-graph-header
             g j                     4  calc-graph-juggle
             g k                    12  calc-graph-key
             g l                    12  calc-graph-log-x
             g n   name                 calc-graph-name
             g p                    42  calc-graph-plot
             g q                        calc-graph-quit
             g r   range                calc-graph-range-x
             g s                 12,13  calc-graph-line-style
             g t   title                calc-graph-title-x
             g v                        calc-graph-view-commands
             g x   display              calc-graph-display
             g z                    12  calc-graph-zero-x

  x y z      g A                 28,40  calc-graph-add-3d
             g C   command              calc-graph-command
             g D   device        43,44  calc-graph-device
  x y z      g F                 28,40  calc-graph-fast-3d
             g H                    12  calc-graph-hide
             g K                        calc-graph-kill
             g L                    12  calc-graph-log-y
             g N   number        43,51  calc-graph-num-points
             g O   filename      43,44  calc-graph-output
             g P                    42  calc-graph-print
             g R   range                calc-graph-range-y
             g S                 12,13  calc-graph-point-style
             g T   title                calc-graph-title-y
             g V                        calc-graph-view-trail
             g X   format               calc-graph-geometry
             g Z                    12  calc-graph-zero-y

             g C-l                  12  calc-graph-log-z
             g C-r range                calc-graph-range-z
             g C-t title                calc-graph-title-z

             h b                        calc-describe-bindings
             h c   key                  calc-describe-key-briefly
             h f   function             calc-describe-function
             h h                        calc-full-help
             h i                        calc-info
             h k   key                  calc-describe-key
             h n                        calc-view-news
             h s                        calc-info-summary
             h t                        calc-tutorial
             h v   var                  calc-describe-variable

             j 1-9                      calc-select-part
             j RET                  27  calc-copy-selection
             j DEL                  27  calc-del-selection
             j ’   formula          27  calc-enter-selection
             j ‘   editing       27,30  calc-edit-selection
             j "                  7,27  calc-sel-expand-formula

             j +   formula          27  calc-sel-add-both-sides
             j -   formula          27  calc-sel-sub-both-sides
             j *   formula          27  calc-sel-mult-both-sides
             j /   formula          27  calc-sel-div-both-sides
             j &                    27  calc-sel-invert

             j a                    27  calc-select-additional
             j b                    12  calc-break-selections
             j c                        calc-clear-selections
             j d                 12,50  calc-show-selections
             j e                    12  calc-enable-selections
             j l                  4,27  calc-select-less
             j m                  4,27  calc-select-more
             j n                     4  calc-select-next
             j o                  4,27  calc-select-once
             j p                     4  calc-select-previous
             j r   rules        4,8,27  calc-rewrite-selection
             j s                  4,27  calc-select-here
             j u                    27  calc-unselect
             j v                  7,27  calc-sel-evaluate

             j C                    27  calc-sel-commute
             j D                  4,27  calc-sel-distribute
             j E                    27  calc-sel-jump-equals
             j I                    27  calc-sel-isolate
           H j I                    27  calc-sel-isolate (full)
             j L                  4,27  calc-commute-left
             j M                    27  calc-sel-merge
             j N                    27  calc-sel-negate
             j O                  4,27  calc-select-once-maybe
             j R                  4,27  calc-commute-right
             j S                  4,27  calc-select-here-maybe
             j U                    27  calc-sel-unpack

             k a                        calc-random-again
      n      k b                     1  bern(n)
    n x    H k b                     2  bern(n,x)
    n m      k c                     2  choose(n,m)
    n m    H k c                     2  perm(n,m)
      n      k d                     1  dfact(n)  n!!
      n      k e                     1  euler(n)
    n x    H k e                     2  euler(n,x)
      n      k f                     4  prfac(n)
    n m      k g                     2  gcd(n,m)
    m n      k h                    14  shuffle(n,m)
    n m      k l                     2  lcm(n,m)
      n      k m                     1  moebius(n)
      n      k n                     4  nextprime(n)
      n    I k n                     4  prevprime(n)
      n      k p                  4,28  calc-prime-test
      m      k r                    14  random(m)
    n m      k s                     2  stir1(n,m)
    n m    H k s                     2  stir2(n,m)
      n      k t                     1  totient(n)

  n p x      k B                        utpb(x,n,p)
  n p x    I k B                        ltpb(x,n,p)
    v x      k C                        utpc(x,v)
    v x    I k C                        ltpc(x,v)
    n m      k E                        egcd(n,m)
v1 v2 x      k F                        utpf(x,v1,v2)
v1 v2 x    I k F                        ltpf(x,v1,v2)
  m s x      k N                        utpn(x,m,s)
  m s x    I k N                        ltpn(x,m,s)
    m x      k P                        utpp(x,m)
    m x    I k P                        ltpp(x,m)
    v x      k T                        utpt(x,v)
    v x    I k T                        ltpt(x,v)

    a b      l +                        lupadd(a,b)
    a b    H l +                        lufadd(a,b)
    a b      l -                        lupsub(a,b)
    a b    H l -                        lufsub(a,b)
    a b      l *                        lupmul(a,b)
    a b    H l *                        lufmul(a,b)
    a b      l /                        lupdiv(a,b)
    a b    H l /                        lufdiv(a,b)
      a      l d                        dbpower(a)
    a b    O l d                        dbpower(a,b)
      a    H l d                        dbfield(a)
    a b  O H l d                        dbfield(a,b)
      a      l n                        nppower(a)
    a b    O l n                        nppower(a,b)
      a    H l n                        npfield(a)
    a b  O H l n                        npfield(a,b)
      a      l q                        lupquant(a)
    a b    O l q                        lupquant(a,b)
      a    H l q                        lufquant(a)
    a b  O H l q                        lufquant(a,b)
      a      l s                        spn(a)
      a      l m                        midi(a)
      a      l f                        freq(a)

             m a                 12,13  calc-algebraic-mode
             m d                        calc-degrees-mode
             m e                        calc-embedded-preserve-modes
             m f                    12  calc-frac-mode
             m g                    52  calc-get-modes
             m h                        calc-hms-mode
             m i                 12,13  calc-infinite-mode
             m m                        calc-save-modes
             m p                    12  calc-polar-mode
             m r                        calc-radians-mode
             m s                    12  calc-symbolic-mode
             m t                    12  calc-total-algebraic-mode
             m v                 12,13  calc-matrix-mode
             m w                    13  calc-working
             m x                        calc-always-load-extensions

             m A                    12  calc-alg-simplify-mode
             m B                    12  calc-bin-simplify-mode
             m C                    12  calc-auto-recompute
             m D                        calc-default-simplify-mode
             m E                    12  calc-ext-simplify-mode
             m F   filename         13  calc-settings-file-name
             m N                    12  calc-num-simplify-mode
             m O                    12  calc-no-simplify-mode
             m R                 12,13  calc-mode-record-mode
             m S                    12  calc-shift-prefix
             m U                    12  calc-units-simplify-mode

             r s   register         27  calc-copy-to-register
             r i   register             calc-insert-register

             s c   var1, var2       29  calc-copy-variable
             s d   var, decl            calc-declare-variable
             s e   var, editing  29,30  calc-edit-variable
             s i   buffer               calc-insert-variables
             s k   const, var       29  calc-copy-special-constant
    a b      s l   var              29  a  (letting var=b)
  a ...      s m   op, var       22,29  calc-store-map
             s n   var           29,47  calc-store-neg  (v/-1)
             s p   var              29  calc-permanent-variable
             s r   var              29  v  (recalled value)
             r 0-9                      calc-recall-quick
      a      s s   var           28,29  calc-store
      a      s 0-9                      calc-store-quick
      a      s t   var              29  calc-store-into
      a      t 0-9                      calc-store-into-quick
             s u   var              29  calc-unstore
      a      s x   var              29  calc-store-exchange

             s A   editing          30  calc-edit-AlgSimpRules
             s D   editing          30  calc-edit-Decls
             s E   editing          30  calc-edit-EvalRules
             s F   editing          30  calc-edit-FitRules
             s G   editing          30  calc-edit-GenCount
             s H   editing          30  calc-edit-Holidays
             s I   editing          30  calc-edit-IntegLimit
             s L   editing          30  calc-edit-LineStyles
             s P   editing          30  calc-edit-PointStyles
             s R   editing          30  calc-edit-PlotRejects
             s T   editing          30  calc-edit-TimeZone
             s U   editing          30  calc-edit-Units
             s X   editing          30  calc-edit-ExtSimpRules

      a      s +   var           29,47  calc-store-plus  (v+a)
      a      s -   var           29,47  calc-store-minus  (v-a)
      a      s *   var           29,47  calc-store-times  (v*a)
      a      s /   var           29,47  calc-store-div  (v/a)
      a      s ^   var           29,47  calc-store-power  (v^a)
      a      s |   var           29,47  calc-store-concat  (v|a)
             s &   var           29,47  calc-store-inv  (v^-1)
             s [   var           29,47  calc-store-decr  (v-1)
             s ]   var           29,47  calc-store-incr  (v-(-1))
    a b      s :                     2  assign(a,b)  a := b
      a      s =                     1  evalto(a,b)  a =>

             t [                     4  calc-trail-first
             t ]                     4  calc-trail-last
             t <                     4  calc-trail-scroll-left
             t >                     4  calc-trail-scroll-right
             t .                    12  calc-full-trail-vectors

             t b                     4  calc-trail-backward
             t d                 12,50  calc-trail-display
             t f                     4  calc-trail-forward
             t h                        calc-trail-here
             t i                        calc-trail-in
             t k                     4  calc-trail-kill
             t m   string               calc-trail-marker
             t n                     4  calc-trail-next
             t o                        calc-trail-out
             t p                     4  calc-trail-previous
             t r   string               calc-trail-isearch-backward
             t s   string               calc-trail-isearch-forward
             t y                     4  calc-trail-yank

      d      t C   oz, nz               tzconv(d,oz,nz)
d oz nz      t C   $                    tzconv(d,oz,nz)
      d      t D                    15  date(d)
      d      t I                     4  incmonth(d,n)
      d      t J                    16  julian(d,z)
      d      t M                    17  newmonth(d,n)
             t N                    16  now(z)
      d      t P   1                31  year(d)
      d      t P   2                31  month(d)
      d      t P   3                31  day(d)
      d      t P   4                31  hour(d)
      d      t P   5                31  minute(d)
      d      t P   6                31  second(d)
      d      t P   7                31  weekday(d)
      d      t P   8                31  yearday(d)
      d      t P   9                31  time(d)
      d      t U                    16  unixtime(d,z)
      d      t W                    17  newweek(d,w)
      d      t Y                    17  newyear(d,n)

    a b      t +                     2  badd(a,b)
    a b      t -                     2  bsub(a,b)

             u a                    12  calc-autorange-units
      a      u b                        calc-base-units
      a      u c   units            18  calc-convert-units
   defn      u d   unit, descr          calc-define-unit
             u e                        calc-explain-units
             u g   unit                 calc-get-unit-definition
             u n   units            18  calc-convert-exact-units
             u p                        calc-permanent-units
      a      u r                        calc-remove-units
      a      u s                        usimplify(a)
      a      u t   units            18  calc-convert-temperature
             u u   unit                 calc-undefine-unit
             u v                        calc-enter-units-table
      a      u x                        calc-extract-units
      a      u 0-9                      calc-quick-units

  v1 v2      u C                    20  vcov(v1,v2)
  v1 v2    I u C                    20  vpcov(v1,v2)
  v1 v2    H u C                    20  vcorr(v1,v2)
      v      u G                    19  vgmean(v)
    a b    H u G                     2  agmean(a,b)
      v      u M                    19  vmean(v)
      v    I u M                    19  vmeane(v)
      v    H u M                    19  vmedian(v)
      v  I H u M                    19  vhmean(v)
      v      u N                    19  vmin(v)
      v      u R                        rms(v)
      v      u S                    19  vsdev(v)
      v    I u S                    19  vpsdev(v)
      v    H u S                    19  vvar(v)
      v  I H u S                    19  vpvar(v)
             u V                        calc-view-units-table
      v      u X                    19  vmax(v)

      v      u +                    19  vsum(v)
      v      u *                    19  vprod(v)
      v      u #                    19  vcount(v)

             V (                    50  calc-vector-parens
             V {                    50  calc-vector-braces
             V [                    50  calc-vector-brackets
             V ]   ROCP             50  calc-matrix-brackets
             V ,                    50  calc-vector-commas
             V <                    50  calc-matrix-left-justify
             V =                    50  calc-matrix-center-justify
             V >                    50  calc-matrix-right-justify
             V /                 12,50  calc-break-vectors
             V .                 12,50  calc-full-vectors

    s t      V ^                     2  vint(s,t)
    s t      V -                     2  vdiff(s,t)
      s      V ~                     1  vcompl(s)
      s      V #                     1  vcard(s)
      s      V :                     1  vspan(s)
      s      V +                     1  rdup(s)

      m      V &                     1  inv(m)  1/m

      v      v a   n                    arrange(v,n)
      a      v b   n                    cvec(a,n)
      v      v c   n >0          21,31  mcol(v,n)
      v      v c   n <0             31  mrcol(v,-n)
      m      v c   0                31  getdiag(m)
      v      v d                    25  diag(v,n)
    v m      v e                     2  vexp(v,m)
  v m f    H v e                     2  vexp(v,m,f)
    v a      v f                    26  find(v,a,n)
      v      v h                     1  head(v)
      v    I v h                     1  tail(v)
      v    H v h                     1  rhead(v)
      v  I H v h                     1  rtail(v)
             v i   n                31  idn(1,n)
             v i   0                31  idn(1)
    h t      v k                     2  cons(h,t)
    h t    H v k                     2  rcons(h,t)
      v      v l                     1  vlen(v)
      v    H v l                     1  mdims(v)
    v m      v m                     2  vmask(v,m)
      v      v n                     1  rnorm(v)
  a b c      v p                    24  calc-pack
      v      v r   n >0          21,31  mrow(v,n)
      v      v r   n <0             31  mrrow(v,-n)
      m      v r   0                31  getdiag(m)
  v i j      v s                        subvec(v,i,j)
  v i j    I v s                        rsubvec(v,i,j)
      m      v t                     1  trn(m)
      v      v u                    24  calc-unpack
      v      v v                     1  rev(v)
             v x   n                31  index(n)
  n s i  C-u v x                        index(n,s,i)

      v      V A   op               22  apply(op,v)
  v1 v2      V C                     2  cross(v1,v2)
      m      V D                     1  det(m)
      s      V E                     1  venum(s)
      s      V F                     1  vfloor(s)
      v      V G                        grade(v)
      v    I V G                        rgrade(v)
      v      V H   n                31  histogram(v,n)
    v w    H V H   n                31  histogram(v,w,n)
  v1 v2      V I   mop aop          22  inner(mop,aop,v1,v2)
      m      V J                     1  ctrn(m)
  m1 m2      V K                        kron(m1,m2)
      m      V L                     1  lud(m)
      v      V M   op            22,23  map(op,v)
      v      V N                     1  cnorm(v)
  v1 v2      V O   op               22  outer(op,v1,v2)
      v      V R   op            22,23  reduce(op,v)
      v    I V R   op            22,23  rreduce(op,v)
    a n    H V R   op               22  nest(op,a,n)
      a  I H V R   op               22  fixp(op,a)
      v      V S                        sort(v)
      v    I V S                        rsort(v)
      m      V T                     1  tr(m)
      v      V U   op               22  accum(op,v)
      v    I V U   op               22  raccum(op,v)
    a n    H V U   op               22  anest(op,a,n)
      a  I H V U   op               22  afixp(op,a)
    s t      V V                     2  vunion(s,t)
    s t      V X                     2  vxor(s,t)

             Y                          user commands

             z                          user commands

      c      Z [                    45  calc-kbd-if
      c      Z |                    45  calc-kbd-else-if
             Z :                        calc-kbd-else
             Z ]                        calc-kbd-end-if

             Z {                     4  calc-kbd-loop
      c      Z /                    45  calc-kbd-break
             Z }                        calc-kbd-end-loop
      n      Z <                        calc-kbd-repeat
             Z >                        calc-kbd-end-repeat
    n m      Z (                        calc-kbd-for
      s      Z )                        calc-kbd-end-for

             Z C-g                      cancel if/loop command

             Z ‘                        calc-kbd-push
             Z ’                        calc-kbd-pop
             Z #                        calc-kbd-query

   comp      Z C   func, args       50  calc-user-define-composition
             Z D   key, command         calc-user-define
             Z E   key, editing     30  calc-user-define-edit
   defn      Z F   k, c, f, a, n    28  calc-user-define-formula
             Z G   key                  calc-get-user-defn
             Z I                        calc-user-define-invocation
             Z K   key, command         calc-user-define-kbd-macro
             Z P   key                  calc-user-define-permanent
             Z S                    30  calc-edit-user-syntax
             Z T                    12  calc-timing
             Z U   key                  calc-user-undefine


NOTES

  1. Positive prefix arguments apply to ‘n’ stack entries.  Negative
     prefix arguments apply to the ‘-n’th stack entry.  A prefix of zero
     applies to the entire stack.  (For <LFD> and ‘M-<DEL>’, the meaning
     of the sign is reversed.)

  2. Positive prefix arguments apply to ‘n’ stack entries.  Negative
     prefix arguments apply to the top stack entry and the next ‘-n’
     stack entries.

  3. Positive prefix arguments rotate top ‘n’ stack entries by one.
     Negative prefix arguments rotate the entire stack by ‘-n’.  A
     prefix of zero reverses the entire stack.

  4. Prefix argument specifies a repeat count or distance.

  5. Positive prefix arguments specify a precision ‘p’.  Negative prefix
     arguments reduce the current precision by ‘-p’.

  6. A prefix argument is interpreted as an additional step-size
     parameter.  A plain ‘C-u’ prefix means to prompt for the step size.

  7. A prefix argument specifies simplification level and depth.
     1=Basic simplifications, 2=Algebraic simplifications, 3=Extended
     simplifications

  8. A negative prefix operates only on the top level of the input
     formula.

  9. Positive prefix arguments specify a word size of ‘w’ bits,
     unsigned.  Negative prefix arguments specify a word size of ‘w’
     bits, signed.

  10. Prefix arguments specify the shift amount ‘n’.  The ‘w’ argument
     cannot be specified in the keyboard version of this command.

  11. From the keyboard, ‘d’ is omitted and defaults to zero.

  12. Mode is toggled; a positive prefix always sets the mode, and a
     negative prefix always clears the mode.

  13. Some prefix argument values provide special variations of the
     mode.

  14. A prefix argument, if any, is used for ‘m’ instead of taking ‘m’
     from the stack.  ‘M’ may take any of these values:
     Integer
          Random integer in the interval ‘[0 .. m)’.
     Float
          Random floating-point number in the interval ‘[0 .. m)’.
     0.0
          Gaussian with mean 1 and standard deviation 0.
     Error form
          Gaussian with specified mean and standard deviation.
     Interval
          Random integer or floating-point number in that interval.
     Vector
          Random element from the vector.

  15. A prefix argument from 1 to 6 specifies number of date components
     to remove from the stack.  *Note Date Conversions::.

  16. A prefix argument specifies a time zone; ‘C-u’ says to take the
     time zone number or name from the top of the stack.  *Note Time
     Zones::.

  17. A prefix argument specifies a day number (0–6, 0–31, or 0–366).

  18. If the input has no units, you will be prompted for both the old
     and the new units.

  19. With a prefix argument, collect that many stack entries to form
     the input data set.  Each entry may be a single value or a vector
     of values.

  20. With a prefix argument of 1, take a single Nx2 matrix from the
     stack instead of two separate data vectors.

  21. The row or column number ‘n’ may be given as a numeric prefix
     argument instead.  A plain ‘C-u’ prefix says to take ‘n’ from the
     top of the stack.  If ‘n’ is a vector or interval, a
     subvector/submatrix of the input is created.

  22. The ‘op’ prompt can be answered with the key sequence for the
     desired function, or with ‘x’ or ‘z’ followed by a function name,
     or with ‘$’ to take a formula from the top of the stack, or with
     ‘'’ and a typed formula.  In the last two cases, the formula may be
     a nameless function like ‘<#1+#2>’ or ‘<x, y : x+y>’; or it may
     include ‘$’, ‘$$’, etc., where ‘$’ will correspond to the last
     argument of the created function; or otherwise you will be prompted
     for an argument list.  The number of vectors popped from the stack
     by ‘V M’ depends on the number of arguments of the function.

  23. One of the mapping direction keys ‘_’ (horizontal, i.e., map by
     rows or reduce across), ‘:’ (vertical, i.e., map by columns or
     reduce down), or ‘=’ (map or reduce by rows) may be used before
     entering ‘op’; these modify the function name by adding the letter
     ‘r’ for “rows,” ‘c’ for “columns,” ‘a’ for “across,” or ‘d’ for
     “down.”

  24. The prefix argument specifies a packing mode.  A nonnegative mode
     is the number of items (for ‘v p’) or the number of levels (for ‘v
     u’).  A negative mode is as described below.  With no prefix
     argument, the mode is taken from the top of the stack and may be an
     integer or a vector of integers.
     ‘-1’
          (2) Rectangular complex number.
     ‘-2’
          (2) Polar complex number.
     ‘-3’
          (3) HMS form.
     ‘-4’
          (2) Error form.
     ‘-5’
          (2) Modulo form.
     ‘-6’
          (2) Closed interval.
     ‘-7’
          (2) Closed ..  open interval.
     ‘-8’
          (2) Open ..  closed interval.
     ‘-9’
          (2) Open interval.
     ‘-10’
          (2) Fraction.
     ‘-11’
          (2) Float with integer mantissa.
     ‘-12’
          (2) Float with mantissa in ‘[1 .. 10)’.
     ‘-13’
          (1) Date form (using date numbers).
     ‘-14’
          (3) Date form (using year, month, day).
     ‘-15’
          (6) Date form (using year, month, day, hour, minute, second).

  25. A prefix argument specifies the size ‘n’ of the matrix.  With no
     prefix argument, ‘n’ is omitted and the size is inferred from the
     input vector.

  26. The prefix argument specifies the starting position ‘n’ (default
     1).

  27. Cursor position within stack buffer affects this command.

  28. Arguments are not actually removed from the stack by this command.

  29. Variable name may be a single digit or a full name.

  30. Editing occurs in a separate buffer.  Press ‘C-c C-c’ (or <LFD>,
     or in some cases <RET>) to finish the edit, or kill the buffer with
     ‘C-x k’ to cancel the edit.  The <LFD> key prevents evaluation of
     the result of the edit.

  31. The number prompted for can also be provided as a prefix argument.

  32. Press this key a second time to cancel the prefix.

  33. With a negative prefix, deactivate all formulas.  With a positive
     prefix, deactivate and then reactivate from scratch.

  34. Default is to scan for nearest formula delimiter symbols.  With a
     prefix of zero, formula is delimited by mark and point.  With a
     non-zero prefix, formula is delimited by scanning forward or
     backward by that many lines.

  35. Parse the region between point and mark as a vector.  A nonzero
     prefix parses N lines before or after point as a vector.  A zero
     prefix parses the current line as a vector.  A ‘C-u’ prefix parses
     the region between point and mark as a single formula.

  36. Parse the rectangle defined by point and mark as a matrix.  A
     positive prefix N divides the rectangle into columns of width N.  A
     zero or ‘C-u’ prefix parses each line as one formula.  A negative
     prefix suppresses special treatment of bracketed portions of a
     line.

  37. A numeric prefix causes the current language mode to be ignored.

  38. Responding to a prompt with a blank line answers that and all
     later prompts by popping additional stack entries.

  39. Answer for ‘v’ may also be of the form ‘v = v_0’ or ‘v - v_0’.

  40. With a positive prefix argument, stack contains many ‘y’’s and one
     common ‘x’.  With a zero prefix, stack contains a vector of ‘y’s
     and a common ‘x’.  With a negative prefix, stack contains many
     ‘[x,y]’ vectors.  (For 3D plots, substitute ‘z’ for ‘y’ and ‘x,y’
     for ‘x’.)

  41. With any prefix argument, all curves in the graph are deleted.

  42. With a positive prefix, refines an existing plot with more data
     points.  With a negative prefix, forces recomputation of the plot
     data.

  43. With any prefix argument, set the default value instead of the
     value for this graph.

  44. With a negative prefix argument, set the value for the printer.

  45. Condition is considered “true” if it is a nonzero real or complex
     number, or a formula whose value is known to be nonzero; it is
     “false” otherwise.

  46. Several formulas separated by commas are pushed as multiple stack
     entries.  Trailing ‘)’, ‘]’, ‘}’, ‘>’, and ‘"’ delimiters may be
     omitted.  The notation ‘$$$’ refers to the value in stack level
     three, and causes the formula to replace the top three stack
     levels.  The notation ‘$3’ refers to stack level three without
     causing that value to be removed from the stack.  Use <LFD> in
     place of <RET> to prevent evaluation; use ‘M-=’ in place of <RET>
     to evaluate variables.

  47. The variable is replaced by the formula shown on the right.  The
     Inverse flag reverses the order of the operands, e.g., ‘I s - x’
     assigns ‘x := a-x’.

  48. Press ‘?’ repeatedly to see how to choose a model.  Answer the
     variables prompt with ‘iv’ or ‘iv;pv’ to specify independent and
     parameter variables.  A positive prefix argument takes N+1 vectors
     from the stack; a zero prefix takes a matrix and a vector from the
     stack.

  49. With a plain ‘C-u’ prefix, replace the current region of the
     destination buffer with the yanked text instead of inserting.

  50. All stack entries are reformatted; the ‘H’ prefix inhibits this.
     The ‘I’ prefix sets the mode temporarily, redraws the top stack
     entry, then restores the original setting of the mode.

  51. A negative prefix sets the default 3D resolution instead of the
     default 2D resolution.

  52. This grabs a vector of the form [PREC, WSIZE, SSIZE, RADIX, FLFMT,
     ANG, FRAC, SYMB, POLAR, MATRIX, SIMP, INF].  A prefix argument from
     1 to 12 grabs the Nth mode value only.


File: calc.info,  Node: Key Index,  Next: Command Index,  Prev: Summary,  Up: Top

Index of Key Sequences
**********************

[index]
* Menu:

* !:                                     Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* ":                                     Strings.             (line   6)
* " (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* #:                                     Integers.            (line  18)
* $:                                     Algebraic Entry.     (line  58)
* %:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 147)
* &:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 185)
* & (matrices):                          Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  42)
* ':                                     Algebraic Entry.     (line   6)
* ' (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* (:                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* ):                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* *:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  71)
* +:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line   6)
* ,:                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* -:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  66)
* .:                                     Numeric Entry.       (line   6)
* ..:                                    Incomplete Objects.  (line  32)
* /:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  90)
* 0-9:                                   Numeric Entry.       (line   6)
* ::                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 154)
* ;:                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line  27)
* <:                                     Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* =:                                     Variables.           (line  30)
* >:                                     Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* ?:                                     Help Commands.       (line   6)
* @:                                     HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* [:                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* \:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 140)
* ]:                                     Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* ^:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 129)
* _:                                     Numeric Entry.       (line  12)
* `:                                     Editing Stack Entries.
                                                              (line   6)
* {:                                     Basic Commands.      (line 101)
* |:                                     Building Vectors.    (line   9)
* }:                                     Basic Commands.      (line 101)
* ~:                                     Prefix Arguments.    (line  39)
* A:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 166)
* a !:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  88)
* a ":                                   Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  59)
* a #:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  47)
* a %:                                   Polynomials.         (line 134)
* a &:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  77)
* A (vectors):                           Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  19)
* a *:                                   Summations.          (line 117)
* a +:                                   Summations.          (line   6)
* a -:                                   Summations.          (line 105)
* a .:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  67)
* a /:                                   Polynomials.         (line 140)
* a ::                                   Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* a <:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* a =:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  22)
* a >:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* a ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* a a:                                   Polynomials.         (line 106)
* a b:                                   Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line 110)
* a c:                                   Polynomials.         (line  69)
* a d:                                   Differentiation.     (line   6)
* a e:                                   Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* a f:                                   Polynomials.         (line  13)
* a F:                                   Linear Fits.         (line   6)
* a g:                                   Polynomials.         (line 146)
* a i:                                   Integration.         (line   6)
* a I:                                   Numerical Integration.
                                                              (line   6)
* a M:                                   Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  73)
* a m:                                   Matching Commands.   (line   6)
* a n:                                   Polynomials.         (line 113)
* a N:                                   Minimization.        (line   6)
* a P:                                   Multiple Solutions.  (line  62)
* a p:                                   Interpolation.       (line   6)
* a R:                                   Root Finding.        (line   6)
* a r:                                   Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* a s:                                   Simplifying Formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* a s <1>:                               Algebraic Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* a S:                                   Solving Equations.   (line   6)
* a t:                                   Taylor Series.       (line   6)
* a T:                                   Summations.          (line 123)
* a v:                                   Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  15)
* a x:                                   Polynomials.         (line  84)
* a X:                                   Minimization.        (line   6)
* a [:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* a \:                                   Polynomials.         (line 120)
* a ]:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* a _:                                   Extracting Elements. (line  24)
* a {:                                   Logical Operations.  (line 111)
* a |:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  83)
* B:                                     Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* b #:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* b %:                                   Percentages.         (line  43)
* b ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* b a:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  59)
* b c:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  28)
* b D:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* b d:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  73)
* b F:                                   Future Value.        (line   6)
* b I:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* b l:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  80)
* b L:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  98)
* b M:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* b N:                                   Present Value.       (line  45)
* b n:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  77)
* b o:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  65)
* b P:                                   Present Value.       (line   6)
* b p:                                   Set Operations.      (line 111)
* b r:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  94)
* b R:                                   Binary Functions.    (line 103)
* b S:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* b T:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* b t:                                   Binary Functions.    (line 116)
* b u:                                   Set Operations.      (line 111)
* b w:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  37)
* b x:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  69)
* b Y:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* C:                                     Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* c %:                                   Percentages.         (line  33)
* c 0-9:                                 Conversions.         (line 101)
* c ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* c c:                                   Conversions.         (line  81)
* c d:                                   Conversions.         (line  56)
* c f:                                   Conversions.         (line   9)
* c F:                                   Conversions.         (line  40)
* c h:                                   Conversions.         (line  64)
* c p:                                   Conversions.         (line  73)
* c r:                                   Conversions.         (line  61)
* C-d:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line  23)
* C-k:                                   Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* C-w:                                   Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* C-x * ':                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 115)
* C-x * *:                               Basic Commands.      (line  19)
* C-x * 0:                               Basic Commands.      (line 105)
* C-x * ::                               Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  77)
* C-x * a:                               Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  93)
* C-x * b:                               Basic Commands.      (line  53)
* C-x * c:                               Basic Commands.      (line  19)
* C-x * d:                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  84)
* C-x * e:                               Basic Embedded Mode. (line   6)
* C-x * f:                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 115)
* C-x * g:                               Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line   6)
* C-x * i:                               Help Commands.       (line  20)
* C-x * j:                               Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  51)
* C-x * k:                               Keypad Mode.         (line   6)
* C-x * L:                               Autoloading Problems.
                                                              (line  12)
* C-x * m:                               Naming Keyboard Macros.
                                                              (line  39)
* C-x * n:                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 123)
* C-x * o:                               Basic Commands.      (line  61)
* C-x * p:                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 123)
* C-x * q:                               Quick Calculator.    (line   6)
* C-x * r:                               Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  37)
* C-x * s:                               Help Commands.       (line  37)
* C-x * t:                               Help Commands.       (line  29)
* C-x * u:                               Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  64)
* C-x * w:                               Basic Embedded Mode. (line  49)
* C-x * x:                               Basic Commands.      (line  84)
* C-x * y:                               Yanking Into Buffers.
                                                              (line  50)
* C-x * z:                               Invocation Macros.   (line   6)
* C-x * _:                               Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  77)
* C-x * `:                               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 134)
* C-xC-t:                                Stack Manipulation.  (line  83)
* C-y:                                   Yanking Into Stack.  (line   6)
* C-_:                                   Undo.                (line   6)
* D:                                     Undo.                (line  23)
* d ":                                   Strings.             (line  25)
* d ,:                                   Grouping Digits.     (line  20)
* d .:                                   Float Formats.       (line  49)
* d 0:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* d 2:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* d 6:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* d 8:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* d <:                                   Justification.       (line   6)
* d =:                                   Justification.       (line   6)
* d >:                                   Justification.       (line   6)
* d ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* d A:                                   Giac Language Mode.  (line   6)
* d b:                                   Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  16)
* d B:                                   Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  24)
* d c:                                   Complex Formats.     (line   6)
* d C:                                   C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line   6)
* d d:                                   Date Formats.        (line   6)
* d e:                                   Float Formats.       (line  33)
* d E:                                   Eqn Language Mode.   (line   6)
* d f:                                   Float Formats.       (line  19)
* d F:                                   C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  40)
* d g:                                   Grouping Digits.     (line   6)
* d h:                                   HMS Formats.         (line   6)
* d i:                                   Complex Formats.     (line  11)
* d j:                                   Complex Formats.     (line  11)
* d l:                                   Stack Basics.        (line  24)
* d L:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* d M:                                   Mathematica Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* d n:                                   Float Formats.       (line  12)
* d N:                                   Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* d o:                                   Fraction Formats.    (line   6)
* d O:                                   Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  11)
* d P:                                   C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  30)
* d p:                                   More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  19)
* d r:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  19)
* d RET:                                 Display Modes.       (line  19)
* d s:                                   Float Formats.       (line  27)
* d SPC:                                 Basic Commands.      (line  88)
* d t:                                   Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line   6)
* d T:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* d U:                                   Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  67)
* d w:                                   Error Messages.      (line  20)
* d W:                                   Maple Language Mode. (line   6)
* d X:                                   Maxima Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* d Y:                                   Yacas Language Mode. (line   6)
* d z:                                   Radix Modes.         (line  23)
* d [:                                   Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line  25)
* d ]:                                   Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line  25)
* d {:                                   Labels.              (line   6)
* d }:                                   Labels.              (line  16)
* DEL:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line  23)
* e:                                     Numeric Entry.       (line   6)
* E:                                     Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* F:                                     Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* f ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* f A:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 176)
* f b:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  42)
* f B:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  47)
* f E:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  37)
* f e:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* f g:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* f G:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* f h:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 193)
* f i:                                   Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* f I:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* f j:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* f L:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* f M:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* f n:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* f Q:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 198)
* f r:                                   Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* f s:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 179)
* f S:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 222)
* f T:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* f x:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* f X:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* f y:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* f [:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* f ]:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* G:                                     Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* g ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* g a:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  10)
* g A:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  61)
* g b:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  13)
* g c:                                   Basic Graphics.      (line  68)
* g C:                                   Devices.             (line 111)
* g C-l:                                 Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* g C-r:                                 Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* g C-t:                                 Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* g d:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  77)
* g D:                                   Devices.             (line   6)
* g f:                                   Basic Graphics.      (line   6)
* g F:                                   Three Dimensional Graphics.
                                                              (line   6)
* g g:                                   Graphics Options.    (line   6)
* g H:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  82)
* g h:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  44)
* g j:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  87)
* g k:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  17)
* g K:                                   Devices.             (line 150)
* g l:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  72)
* g L:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  72)
* g N:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  22)
* g n:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  48)
* g O:                                   Devices.             (line  45)
* g p:                                   Managing Curves.     (line  94)
* g P:                                   Managing Curves.     (line 124)
* g q:                                   Devices.             (line 143)
* g r:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  63)
* g R:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  63)
* g s:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  87)
* g S:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  96)
* g t:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  56)
* g T:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  56)
* g v:                                   Devices.             (line 117)
* g V:                                   Devices.             (line 117)
* g x:                                   Devices.             (line  92)
* g X:                                   Devices.             (line  97)
* g z:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  80)
* g Z:                                   Graphics Options.    (line  80)
* H:                                     Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line  12)
* h (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* H a /:                                 Polynomials.         (line 140)
* H a d:                                 Differentiation.     (line   6)
* H a f:                                 Polynomials.         (line  57)
* H a F:                                 Error Estimates for Fits.
                                                              (line   6)
* H a M:                                 Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  99)
* H a N:                                 Minimization.        (line   6)
* H a p:                                 Interpolation.       (line  35)
* H a R:                                 Root Finding.        (line  52)
* H a s:                                 Simplifying Formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* H a S:                                 Multiple Solutions.  (line   6)
* H a X:                                 Minimization.        (line   6)
* h b:                                   Help Commands.       (line  77)
* H b #:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* H b F:                                 Future Value.        (line  24)
* H b l:                                 Binary Functions.    (line  87)
* H b L:                                 Binary Functions.    (line  87)
* H b M:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* H b P:                                 Present Value.       (line  33)
* H b r:                                 Binary Functions.    (line  87)
* H b R:                                 Binary Functions.    (line  87)
* H b T:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* H b t:                                 Binary Functions.    (line  87)
* h c:                                   Help Commands.       (line  52)
* H C:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* H c 0-9:                               Conversions.         (line 126)
* H c c:                                 Conversions.         (line 126)
* H c f:                                 Conversions.         (line  30)
* H c F:                                 Conversions.         (line  52)
* h C-c:                                 Help Commands.       (line  85)
* h C-d:                                 Help Commands.       (line  85)
* h C-w:                                 Help Commands.       (line  85)
* H E:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* h f:                                   Help Commands.       (line  67)
* H F:                                   Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* H f B:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  47)
* H f G:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* h h:                                   Help Commands.       (line  12)
* h i:                                   Help Commands.       (line  20)
* H I a S:                               Multiple Solutions.  (line  55)
* H I C:                                 Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* H I E:                                 Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* H I F:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  19)
* H I f G:                               Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* H I L:                                 Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* H I P:                                 Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* H I R:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  29)
* H I S:                                 Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* H I T:                                 Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* H I u M:                               Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  98)
* H I u S:                               Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* H I v h:                               Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H I V h:                               Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H I v R:                               Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  18)
* H I V R:                               Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  18)
* H I v U:                               Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  22)
* H I V U:                               Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  22)
* H I |:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  28)
* H j I:                                 Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 109)
* h k:                                   Help Commands.       (line  41)
* H k b:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* H k c:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* H k e:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  61)
* H k s:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  66)
* H L:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* h n:                                   Help Commands.       (line  80)
* H P:                                   Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* H R:                                   Integer Truncation.  (line  23)
* h s:                                   Help Commands.       (line  37)
* H S:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* h t:                                   Help Commands.       (line  29)
* H T:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* H u C:                                 Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  28)
* H u G:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 107)
* H u M:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  84)
* H u S:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* h v:                                   Help Commands.       (line  74)
* H v e:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 135)
* H V e:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 135)
* H v h:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H V h:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H v H:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 100)
* H V H:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 100)
* H v k:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H V k:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* H v l:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  10)
* H V l:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  10)
* H v R:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line   6)
* H V R:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line   6)
* H v U:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  13)
* H V U:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  13)
* H |:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  22)
* i:                                     Help Commands.       (line  20)
* I:                                     Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line   6)
* I a F:                                 Error Estimates for Fits.
                                                              (line  49)
* I a M:                                 Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line 105)
* I a m:                                 Matching Commands.   (line  26)
* I a s:                                 Simplifying Formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* I a S:                                 Multiple Solutions.  (line  55)
* I B:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* I b #:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  27)
* I b F:                                 Future Value.        (line  15)
* I b I:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  55)
* I b M:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  14)
* I b N:                                 Present Value.       (line  64)
* I b P:                                 Present Value.       (line  27)
* I b T:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* I C:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* I c p:                                 Conversions.         (line  73)
* I E:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* I F:                                   Integer Truncation.  (line  19)
* I f e:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* I f G:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* I k B:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* I k C:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* I k F:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  45)
* I k n:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 117)
* I k N:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* I k P:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* I k T:                                 Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* I L:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* I M:                                   Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* I P:                                   Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* I Q:                                   Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* I R:                                   Integer Truncation.  (line  29)
* I S:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  34)
* I T:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* I u C:                                 Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  24)
* I u M:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  73)
* I u S:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 130)
* I v G:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* I V G:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* I v h:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* I V h:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* I v R:                                 Reducing.            (line  15)
* I V R:                                 Reducing.            (line  15)
* I v s:                                 Extracting Elements. (line  71)
* I V s:                                 Extracting Elements. (line  71)
* I v S:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* I V S:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* I v U:                                 Reducing.            (line  27)
* I V U:                                 Reducing.            (line  27)
* I ^:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 136)
* I |:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  28)
* J:                                     Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* j ":                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 188)
* j &:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  98)
* j ':                                   Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  43)
* j *:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 116)
* j +:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 160)
* j -:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 160)
* j /:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 116)
* j 1-9:                                 Changing Selections. (line  35)
* j ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* j a:                                   Making Selections.   (line  71)
* j b:                                   Making Selections.   (line 101)
* j c:                                   Making Selections.   (line 122)
* j C:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  74)
* j d:                                   Displaying Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* j D:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  41)
* j DEL:                                 Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  77)
* j e:                                   Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  11)
* j E:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 103)
* j I:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 109)
* j l:                                   Changing Selections. (line  29)
* j L:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  32)
* j m:                                   Changing Selections. (line   6)
* j M:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  68)
* j n:                                   Changing Selections. (line  50)
* j N:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  90)
* j o:                                   Making Selections.   (line  78)
* j O:                                   Making Selections.   (line  88)
* j p:                                   Changing Selections. (line  50)
* j R:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* j r:                                   Selections with Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  12)
* j RET:                                 Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  82)
* j s:                                   Making Selections.   (line   6)
* j S:                                   Making Selections.   (line  88)
* j u:                                   Making Selections.   (line 117)
* j U:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 166)
* j v:                                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 172)
* j `:                                   Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  53)
* K:                                     Keep Arguments.      (line   6)
* k ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* k a:                                   Random Numbers.      (line  62)
* k b:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* k B:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* k c:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* k C:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* k d:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  35)
* k E:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* k e:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  61)
* k f:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* k F:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  45)
* k g:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* k h:                                   Random Numbers.      (line  66)
* k l:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* k m:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 124)
* k n:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 105)
* k N:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* k p:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  73)
* k P:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* k r:                                   Random Numbers.      (line   6)
* k s:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  66)
* k t:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 120)
* k T:                                   Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* L:                                     Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* l *:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* l +:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* l -:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* l /:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* l d:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* l f:                                   Musical Notes.       (line  33)
* l m:                                   Musical Notes.       (line  29)
* l n:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* l q:                                   Logarithmic Units.   (line  53)
* l s:                                   Musical Notes.       (line  25)
* LFD:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line  16)
* M:                                     Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* m (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* M (modulo forms):                      Modulo Forms.        (line  12)
* m ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* m a:                                   Algebraic Entry.     (line  28)
* m A:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  50)
* m A <1>:                               Algebraic Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* m B:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  43)
* m C:                                   Automatic Recomputation.
                                                              (line  11)
* m C <1>:                               Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  41)
* m d:                                   Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* m E:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  53)
* m E <1>:                               Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* m e:                                   Mode Settings in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* m F:                                   General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  26)
* m f:                                   Fraction Mode.       (line  13)
* m g:                                   Modes Variable.      (line   6)
* m h:                                   Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* m i:                                   Infinite Mode.       (line  10)
* m I:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  38)
* m m:                                   General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* m N:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  28)
* m O:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  21)
* m p:                                   Polar Mode.          (line  12)
* m R:                                   General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  17)
* m r:                                   Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* m S:                                   General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  56)
* m s:                                   Symbolic Mode.       (line  12)
* m t:                                   Algebraic Entry.     (line  42)
* m U:                                   Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  56)
* m v:                                   Matrix Mode.         (line  11)
* m w:                                   Working Message.     (line  14)
* m x:                                   General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  47)
* M-%:                                   Percentages.         (line   6)
* M-C-w:                                 Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* M-DEL:                                 Stack Manipulation.  (line  33)
* M-k:                                   Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* M-RET:                                 Undo.                (line  31)
* M-TAB:                                 Stack Manipulation.  (line  60)
* M-w:                                   Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* M-x:                                   Basic Commands.      (line  23)
* N:                                     Symbolic Mode.       (line  17)
* n:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 162)
* o:                                     Stack Basics.        (line  30)
* O:                                     Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line  23)
* o (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* p:                                     Precision.           (line   6)
* P:                                     Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* p (error forms):                       Error Forms.         (line  47)
* q:                                     Basic Commands.      (line  77)
* Q:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 189)
* R:                                     Integer Truncation.  (line  23)
* r 0-9:                                 Recalling Variables. (line  18)
* r ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* r i:                                   Inserting From Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* r s:                                   Saving Into Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* RET:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line   6)
* S:                                     Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* s &:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s (HMS forms):                         HMS Forms.           (line  13)
* s *:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s +:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s -:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s /:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s 0-9:                                 Storing Variables.   (line  36)
* s ::                                   Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  89)
* s =:                                   Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  22)
* s ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* s A:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s c:                                   Storing Variables.   (line 115)
* s d:                                   Declaration Basics.  (line   6)
* s D:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s e:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* s E:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s F:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s G:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s H:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s I:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s i:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  75)
* s k:                                   Storing Variables.   (line 137)
* s L:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s l:                                   Let Command.         (line   6)
* s m:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  84)
* s n:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s P:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s p:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  58)
* s r:                                   Recalling Variables. (line   6)
* s R:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s s:                                   Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* s t:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  12)
* s T:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s u:                                   Storing Variables.   (line 110)
* s U:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s x:                                   Storing Variables.   (line 102)
* s X:                                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* s [:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s ]:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s ^:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* s |:                                   Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* SPC:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line   6)
* T:                                     Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* t +:                                   Business Days.       (line  13)
* t -:                                   Business Days.       (line  13)
* t .:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  78)
* t 0-9:                                 Storing Variables.   (line  36)
* t <:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  35)
* t >:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  35)
* t ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* t b:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* t C:                                   Date Conversions.    (line  60)
* t d:                                   Trail Commands.      (line   9)
* t D:                                   Date Conversions.    (line   6)
* t f:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* t h:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* t i:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  19)
* t I:                                   Date Functions.      (line  96)
* t J:                                   Date Conversions.    (line  35)
* t k:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  65)
* t m:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  59)
* t M:                                   Date Functions.      (line  51)
* t n:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* t N:                                   Date Functions.      (line   6)
* t o:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  19)
* t p:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* t P:                                   Date Functions.      (line  11)
* t r:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  52)
* t s:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  52)
* t U:                                   Date Conversions.    (line  50)
* t W:                                   Date Functions.      (line  68)
* t y:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  30)
* t Y:                                   Date Functions.      (line  59)
* t [:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* t ]:                                   Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* TAB:                                   Stack Manipulation.  (line  50)
* U:                                     Undo.                (line   6)
* u #:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  36)
* u *:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* u +:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* u 0-9:                                 User-Defined Units.  (line   9)
* u ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* u a:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 145)
* u b:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 130)
* u C:                                   Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  13)
* u c:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  49)
* u d:                                   User-Defined Units.  (line  27)
* u e:                                   The Units Table.     (line  46)
* u G:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 102)
* u g:                                   The Units Table.     (line  36)
* u M:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  55)
* u N:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* u n:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  80)
* u p:                                   User-Defined Units.  (line  62)
* u R:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 112)
* u r:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 138)
* u S:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 116)
* u s:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  29)
* u t:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  58)
* u u:                                   User-Defined Units.  (line  40)
* u v:                                   The Units Table.     (line   6)
* u V:                                   The Units Table.     (line  27)
* u X:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* u x:                                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 138)
* v #:                                   Set Operations.      (line  96)
* V #:                                   Set Operations.      (line  96)
* v (:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V (:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V ):                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v ):                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v +:                                   Set Operations.      (line  34)
* V +:                                   Set Operations.      (line  34)
* v ,:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  59)
* V ,:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  59)
* v -:                                   Set Operations.      (line  55)
* V -:                                   Set Operations.      (line  55)
* v .:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  71)
* V .:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  71)
* v /:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  86)
* V /:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  86)
* v ::                                   Set Operations.      (line  89)
* V ::                                   Set Operations.      (line  89)
* v <:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* V <:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* v =:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* V =:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* v >:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* V >:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* v ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* V ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* v a:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* V a:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* v A:                                   Reducing and Mapping.
                                                              (line   9)
* V A:                                   Reducing and Mapping.
                                                              (line   9)
* v b:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  80)
* V b:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  80)
* v c:                                   Extracting Elements. (line  43)
* V c:                                   Extracting Elements. (line  43)
* v C:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  38)
* V C:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  38)
* v d:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  32)
* V d:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  32)
* v D:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  52)
* V D:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  52)
* v e:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 125)
* V e:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 125)
* v E:                                   Set Operations.      (line  84)
* V E:                                   Set Operations.      (line  84)
* v f:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  15)
* V f:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  15)
* v F:                                   Set Operations.      (line  75)
* V F:                                   Set Operations.      (line  75)
* v G:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* V G:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* v h:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* V h:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* v H:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  77)
* V H:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  77)
* v i:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  45)
* V i:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  45)
* v I:                                   Generalized Products.
                                                              (line  14)
* V I:                                   Generalized Products.
                                                              (line  14)
* v J:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  16)
* V J:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  16)
* v k:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  92)
* V k:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  92)
* v K:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  66)
* V K:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  66)
* v l:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line   6)
* V l:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line   6)
* v L:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  55)
* V L:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  55)
* v m:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 117)
* V m:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 117)
* v M:                                   Mapping.             (line   6)
* V M:                                   Mapping.             (line   6)
* v n:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  25)
* V n:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  25)
* v N:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  31)
* V N:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  31)
* v O:                                   Generalized Products.
                                                              (line   6)
* V O:                                   Generalized Products.
                                                              (line   6)
* v p:                                   Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line  11)
* V p:                                   Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line  11)
* v p (complex):                         Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* V p (complex):                         Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* v r:                                   Extracting Elements. (line   6)
* V r:                                   Extracting Elements. (line   6)
* v R:                                   Reducing.            (line   6)
* V R:                                   Reducing.            (line   6)
* v s:                                   Extracting Elements. (line  55)
* V s:                                   Extracting Elements. (line  55)
* v S:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* V S:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* v t:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 107)
* V t:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 107)
* v T:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  62)
* V T:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  62)
* v u:                                   Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 125)
* V u:                                   Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 125)
* v U:                                   Reducing.            (line  21)
* V U:                                   Reducing.            (line  21)
* v u (complex):                         Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* V u (complex):                         Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* v v:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 112)
* V v:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 112)
* v V:                                   Set Operations.      (line  42)
* V V:                                   Set Operations.      (line  42)
* v x:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  61)
* V x:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  61)
* v X:                                   Set Operations.      (line  65)
* V X:                                   Set Operations.      (line  65)
* v [:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V [:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V ]:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v ]:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v ^:                                   Set Operations.      (line  47)
* V ^:                                   Set Operations.      (line  47)
* v {:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V {:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* V }:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v }:                                   Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* v ~:                                   Set Operations.      (line  70)
* V ~:                                   Set Operations.      (line  70)
* w:                                     Error Messages.      (line   6)
* x:                                     Basic Commands.      (line  23)
* X:                                     Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* y:                                     Yanking Into Buffers.
                                                              (line   6)
* Y:                                     Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  87)
* Y ?:                                   Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  87)
* z:                                     Programming.         (line  30)
* Z #:                                   Queries in Macros.   (line   6)
* Z ':                                   Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line  11)
* Z (:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line  33)
* Z ):                                   Loops in Macros.     (line  33)
* Z /:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line  26)
* Z ::                                   Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line  30)
* Z <:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* Z >:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* z ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* Z ?:                                   Help Commands.       (line   6)
* Z C:                                   User-Defined Compositions.
                                                              (line   6)
* Z C-g:                                 Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line  59)
* Z D:                                   Creating User Keys.  (line   6)
* Z E:                                   Creating User Keys.  (line  59)
* Z F:                                   Algebraic Definitions.
                                                              (line   6)
* Z G:                                   Algebraic Definitions.
                                                              (line  73)
* Z I:                                   Invocation Macros.   (line   6)
* Z K:                                   Naming Keyboard Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Z P:                                   Creating User Keys.  (line  36)
* Z S:                                   Syntax Tables.       (line  13)
* Z T:                                   Debugging Calc.      (line  10)
* Z U:                                   Creating User Keys.  (line  32)
* Z [:                                   Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Z ]:                                   Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Z `:                                   Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line  11)
* Z {:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line  56)
* Z |:                                   Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line  37)
* Z }:                                   Loops in Macros.     (line  56)


File: calc.info,  Node: Command Index,  Next: Function Index,  Prev: Key Index,  Up: Top

Index of Calculator Commands
****************************

Since all Calculator commands begin with the prefix ‘calc-’, the ‘x’ key
has been provided as a variant of ‘M-x’ which automatically types
‘calc-’ for you.  Thus, ‘x last-args’ is short for ‘M-x calc-last-args’.

[index]
* Menu:

* another-calc:                          Multiple Calculators.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc:                                  Basic Commands.      (line   6)
* calc-abs:                              Basic Arithmetic.    (line 166)
* calc-abs (vectors):                    Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  19)
* calc-abssqr:                           Basic Arithmetic.    (line 176)
* calc-alg-evaluate:                     Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  15)
* calc-alg-simplify-mode:                Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  50)
* calc-algebraic-entry:                  Algebraic Entry.     (line   6)
* calc-algebraic-mode:                   Algebraic Entry.     (line  28)
* calc-alt-summation:                    Summations.          (line 105)
* calc-always-load-extensions:           General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  47)
* calc-and:                              Binary Functions.    (line  59)
* calc-apart:                            Polynomials.         (line 106)
* calc-append-to-register:               Saving Into Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-apply:                            Reducing and Mapping.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-arccos:                           Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-arccosh:                          Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-arcsin:                           Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  34)
* calc-arcsinh:                          Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* calc-arctan:                           Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-arctan2:                          Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* calc-arctanh:                          Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-argument:                         Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-arrange-vector:                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* calc-assign:                           Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  89)
* calc-auto-recompute:                   Automatic Recomputation.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-auto-recompute <1>:               Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  41)
* calc-auto-why:                         Error Messages.      (line  20)
* calc-autorange-units:                  Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 145)
* calc-base-units:                       Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 130)
* calc-basic-simplify-mode:              Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  38)
* calc-bernoulli-number:                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* calc-bessel-J:                         Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-bessel-Y:                         Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-beta:                             Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  42)
* calc-big-language:                     Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  24)
* calc-bin-simplify-mode:                Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-break:                            Loops in Macros.     (line  26)
* calc-break-selections:                 Making Selections.   (line 101)
* calc-break-vectors:                    Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  86)
* calc-build-vector:                     Building Vectors.    (line  80)
* calc-business-days-minus:              Business Days.       (line  13)
* calc-business-days-plus:               Business Days.       (line  13)
* calc-c-language:                       C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line   6)
* calc-ceiling:                          Integer Truncation.  (line  19)
* calc-center-justify:                   Justification.       (line   6)
* calc-change-sign:                      Basic Arithmetic.    (line 162)
* calc-choose:                           Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-clean:                            Conversions.         (line  81)
* calc-clean-num:                        Conversions.         (line 101)
* calc-clear-selections:                 Making Selections.   (line 122)
* calc-clip:                             Binary Functions.    (line  28)
* calc-cnorm:                            Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  31)
* calc-collect:                          Polynomials.         (line  69)
* calc-commute-left:                     Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  32)
* calc-commute-right:                    Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-complex-notation:                 Complex Formats.     (line   6)
* calc-concat:                           Building Vectors.    (line   9)
* calc-conj:                             Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-conj-transpose:                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  16)
* calc-cons:                             Building Vectors.    (line  92)
* calc-convert-exact-units:              Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  80)
* calc-convert-percent:                  Percentages.         (line  33)
* calc-convert-temperature:              Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-convert-time-zones:               Date Conversions.    (line  60)
* calc-convert-units:                    Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  49)
* calc-copy-as-kill:                     Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* calc-copy-region-as-kill:              Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* calc-copy-special-constant:            Storing Variables.   (line 137)
* calc-copy-to-buffer:                   Yanking Into Buffers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-copy-to-register:                 Saving Into Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-copy-variable:                    Storing Variables.   (line 115)
* calc-cos:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-cosh:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-cot:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-coth:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-cross:                            Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  38)
* calc-csc:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-csch:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-curve-fit:                        Linear Fits.         (line   6)
* calc-date:                             Date Conversions.    (line   6)
* calc-date-notation:                    Date Formats.        (line   6)
* calc-date-part:                        Date Functions.      (line  11)
* calc-db:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* calc-declare-variable:                 Declaration Basics.  (line   6)
* calc-decrement:                        Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* calc-define-unit:                      User-Defined Units.  (line  27)
* calc-degrees-mode:                     Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* calc-del-selection:                    Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  77)
* calc-derivative:                       Differentiation.     (line   6)
* calc-describe-function:                Help Commands.       (line  67)
* calc-describe-key:                     Help Commands.       (line  41)
* calc-describe-key-briefly:             Help Commands.       (line  52)
* calc-describe-variable:                Help Commands.       (line  74)
* calc-diag:                             Building Vectors.    (line  32)
* calc-diff:                             Binary Functions.    (line  73)
* calc-display-strings:                  Strings.             (line  25)
* calc-divide:                           Basic Arithmetic.    (line  90)
* calc-dots:                             Incomplete Objects.  (line  32)
* calc-double-factorial:                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  35)
* calc-edit:                             Editing Stack Entries.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-edit-finish:                      Editing Stack Entries.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-edit-selection:                   Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  53)
* calc-edit-user-syntax:                 Syntax Tables.       (line  13)
* calc-edit-variable:                    Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-embedded:                         Basic Embedded Mode. (line   6)
* calc-embedded-activate:                Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  93)
* calc-embedded-duplicate:               More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  84)
* calc-embedded-edit:                    More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 134)
* calc-embedded-new-formula:             More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 115)
* calc-embedded-next:                    More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 123)
* calc-embedded-preserve-modes:          Mode Settings in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-embedded-previous:                More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 123)
* calc-embedded-select:                  Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  51)
* calc-embedded-update-formula:          Assignments in Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-embedded-word:                    Basic Embedded Mode. (line  49)
* calc-enable-selections:                Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-eng-notation:                     Float Formats.       (line  33)
* calc-enter:                            Stack Manipulation.  (line   6)
* calc-enter-selection:                  Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-enter-units-table:                The Units Table.     (line   6)
* calc-eqn-language:                     Eqn Language Mode.   (line   6)
* calc-equal-to:                         Logical Operations.  (line  22)
* calc-erf:                              Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* calc-euler-number:                     Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  61)
* calc-eval-num:                         Symbolic Mode.       (line  17)
* calc-evalto:                           Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  22)
* calc-evaluate:                         Variables.           (line  30)
* calc-execute-extended-command:         Basic Commands.      (line  23)
* calc-exp:                              Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-expand:                           Polynomials.         (line  84)
* calc-expand-formula:                   Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  59)
* calc-expand-vector:                    Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 125)
* calc-explain-units:                    The Units Table.     (line  46)
* calc-expm1:                            Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  37)
* calc-ext-simplify-mode:                Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  53)
* calc-extended-gcd:                     Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* calc-extract-units:                    Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 138)
* calc-factor:                           Polynomials.         (line  13)
* calc-factorial:                        Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-fdiv:                             Basic Arithmetic.    (line 154)
* calc-fin-ddb:                          Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* calc-fin-fv:                           Future Value.        (line   6)
* calc-fin-irr:                          Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* calc-fin-nper:                         Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* calc-fin-npv:                          Present Value.       (line  45)
* calc-fin-pmt:                          Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-fin-pv:                           Present Value.       (line   6)
* calc-fin-rate:                         Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* calc-fin-sln:                          Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* calc-fin-syd:                          Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* calc-find-maximum:                     Minimization.        (line   6)
* calc-find-minimum:                     Minimization.        (line   6)
* calc-find-root:                        Root Finding.        (line   6)
* calc-fix-notation:                     Float Formats.       (line  19)
* calc-flat-language:                    Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-float:                            Conversions.         (line   9)
* calc-floor:                            Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* calc-flush-caches:                     Caches.              (line  18)
* calc-fortran-language:                 C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  40)
* calc-frac-mode:                        Fraction Mode.       (line  13)
* calc-fraction:                         Conversions.         (line  40)
* calc-freq:                             Musical Notes.       (line  33)
* calc-from-hms:                         Conversions.         (line  70)
* calc-full-help:                        Help Commands.       (line  12)
* calc-full-trail-vectors:               Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  78)
* calc-full-vectors:                     Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  71)
* calc-gamma:                            Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* calc-gcd:                              Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-get-modes:                        Modes Variable.      (line   6)
* calc-get-unit-definition:              The Units Table.     (line  36)
* calc-get-user-defn:                    Algebraic Definitions.
                                                              (line  73)
* calc-giac-language:                    Giac Language Mode.  (line   6)
* calc-grab-rectangle:                   Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  37)
* calc-grab-region:                      Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-grab-selection:                   Operating on Selections.
                                                              (line  82)
* calc-grab-sum-across:                  Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  77)
* calc-grab-sum-down:                    Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  77)
* calc-grade:                            Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* calc-graph-add:                        Managing Curves.     (line  10)
* calc-graph-add-3d:                     Managing Curves.     (line  61)
* calc-graph-border:                     Graphics Options.    (line  13)
* calc-graph-clear:                      Basic Graphics.      (line  68)
* calc-graph-command:                    Devices.             (line 111)
* calc-graph-delete:                     Managing Curves.     (line  77)
* calc-graph-device:                     Devices.             (line   6)
* calc-graph-display:                    Devices.             (line  92)
* calc-graph-fast:                       Basic Graphics.      (line   6)
* calc-graph-fast-3d:                    Three Dimensional Graphics.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-graph-geometry:                   Devices.             (line  97)
* calc-graph-grid:                       Graphics Options.    (line   6)
* calc-graph-header:                     Graphics Options.    (line  44)
* calc-graph-hide:                       Managing Curves.     (line  82)
* calc-graph-juggle:                     Managing Curves.     (line  87)
* calc-graph-key:                        Graphics Options.    (line  17)
* calc-graph-kill:                       Devices.             (line 150)
* calc-graph-line-style:                 Graphics Options.    (line  87)
* calc-graph-log-x:                      Graphics Options.    (line  72)
* calc-graph-log-y:                      Graphics Options.    (line  72)
* calc-graph-log-z:                      Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* calc-graph-name:                       Graphics Options.    (line  48)
* calc-graph-num-points:                 Graphics Options.    (line  22)
* calc-graph-output:                     Devices.             (line  45)
* calc-graph-plot:                       Managing Curves.     (line  94)
* calc-graph-point-style:                Graphics Options.    (line  96)
* calc-graph-print:                      Managing Curves.     (line 124)
* calc-graph-quit:                       Devices.             (line 143)
* calc-graph-range-x:                    Graphics Options.    (line  63)
* calc-graph-range-y:                    Graphics Options.    (line  63)
* calc-graph-range-z:                    Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* calc-graph-title-x:                    Graphics Options.    (line  56)
* calc-graph-title-y:                    Graphics Options.    (line  56)
* calc-graph-title-z:                    Graphics Options.    (line  76)
* calc-graph-view-commands:              Devices.             (line 117)
* calc-graph-view-trail:                 Devices.             (line 117)
* calc-graph-zero-x:                     Graphics Options.    (line  80)
* calc-graph-zero-y:                     Graphics Options.    (line  80)
* calc-greater-equal:                    Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* calc-greater-than:                     Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* calc-group-char:                       Grouping Digits.     (line  20)
* calc-group-digits:                     Grouping Digits.     (line   6)
* calc-head:                             Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* calc-help:                             Help Commands.       (line   6)
* calc-histogram:                        Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  77)
* calc-hms-mode:                         Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* calc-hms-notation:                     HMS Formats.         (line   6)
* calc-hyperbolic:                       Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-hypot:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line 193)
* calc-i-notation:                       Complex Formats.     (line  11)
* calc-ident:                            Building Vectors.    (line  45)
* calc-idiv:                             Basic Arithmetic.    (line 140)
* calc-ilog:                             Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* calc-im:                               Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* calc-imaginary:                        Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  19)
* calc-in-set:                           Logical Operations.  (line 111)
* calc-inc-beta:                         Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  47)
* calc-inc-gamma:                        Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-inc-month:                        Date Functions.      (line  96)
* calc-increment:                        Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* calc-index:                            Building Vectors.    (line  61)
* calc-infinite-mode:                    Infinite Mode.       (line  10)
* calc-info:                             Help Commands.       (line  20)
* calc-info-summary:                     Help Commands.       (line  37)
* calc-inner-product:                    Generalized Products.
                                                              (line  14)
* calc-insert-register:                  Inserting From Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-insert-variables:                 Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  75)
* calc-integral:                         Integration.         (line   6)
* calc-inv:                              Basic Arithmetic.    (line 185)
* calc-inv (matrices):                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  42)
* calc-inverse:                          Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-isqrt:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line 198)
* calc-j-notation:                       Complex Formats.     (line  11)
* calc-julian:                           Date Conversions.    (line  35)
* calc-kbd-else:                         Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-kbd-else-if:                      Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-kbd-end-for:                      Loops in Macros.     (line  33)
* calc-kbd-end-if:                       Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-kbd-end-loop:                     Loops in Macros.     (line  56)
* calc-kbd-end-repeat:                   Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* calc-kbd-for:                          Loops in Macros.     (line  33)
* calc-kbd-if:                           Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-kbd-loop:                         Loops in Macros.     (line  56)
* calc-kbd-pop:                          Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-kbd-push:                         Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-kbd-query:                        Queries in Macros.   (line   6)
* calc-kbd-repeat:                       Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* calc-keep-args:                        Keep Arguments.      (line   6)
* calc-keypad:                           Keypad Mode.         (line   6)
* calc-kill:                             Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* calc-kill-region:                      Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* calc-kron:                             Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  66)
* calc-last-args:                        Undo.                (line  31)
* calc-latex-language:                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-lcm:                              Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* calc-leading-zeros:                    Radix Modes.         (line  23)
* calc-left-justify:                     Justification.       (line   6)
* calc-left-label:                       Labels.              (line   6)
* calc-less-equal:                       Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* calc-less-recursion-depth:             Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* calc-less-than:                        Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* calc-let:                              Let Command.         (line   6)
* calc-line-breaking:                    Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  16)
* calc-line-numbering:                   Stack Basics.        (line  24)
* calc-ln:                               Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-lnp1:                             Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* calc-load-everything:                  Autoloading Problems.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-log:                              Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* calc-log10:                            Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* calc-logical-and:                      Logical Operations.  (line  77)
* calc-logical-if:                       Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* calc-logical-not:                      Logical Operations.  (line  88)
* calc-logical-or:                       Logical Operations.  (line  83)
* calc-lshift-arith:                     Binary Functions.    (line  98)
* calc-lshift-binary:                    Binary Functions.    (line  80)
* calc-ltpt:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-lu-divide:                        Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* calc-lu-minus:                         Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* calc-lu-plus:                          Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* calc-lu-quant:                         Logarithmic Units.   (line  53)
* calc-lu-times:                         Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* calc-mant-part:                        Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* calc-map:                              Mapping.             (line   6)
* calc-map-equation:                     Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  73)
* calc-maple-language:                   Maple Language Mode. (line   6)
* calc-mask-vector:                      Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 117)
* calc-match:                            Matching Commands.   (line   6)
* calc-mathematica-language:             Mathematica Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-matrix-brackets:                  Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  28)
* calc-matrix-center-justify:            Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-matrix-left-justify:              Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-matrix-mode:                      Matrix Mode.         (line  11)
* calc-matrix-right-justify:             Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-max:                              Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* calc-maxima-language:                  Maxima Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-mcol:                             Extracting Elements. (line  43)
* calc-mdet:                             Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  52)
* calc-midi:                             Musical Notes.       (line  29)
* calc-min:                              Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* calc-minus:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line  66)
* calc-mlud:                             Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  55)
* calc-mod:                              Basic Arithmetic.    (line 147)
* calc-mode:                             Basic Commands.      (line   6)
* calc-mode-record-mode:                 General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  17)
* calc-moebius:                          Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 124)
* calc-more-recursion-depth:             Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* calc-mrow:                             Extracting Elements. (line   6)
* calc-mtrace:                           Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  62)
* calc-new-month:                        Date Functions.      (line  51)
* calc-new-week:                         Date Functions.      (line  68)
* calc-new-year:                         Date Functions.      (line  59)
* calc-next-prime:                       Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 105)
* calc-no-simplify-mode:                 Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  21)
* calc-normal-language:                  Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-normal-notation:                  Float Formats.       (line  12)
* calc-normalize-rat:                    Polynomials.         (line 113)
* calc-not:                              Binary Functions.    (line  77)
* calc-not-equal-to:                     Logical Operations.  (line  47)
* calc-now:                              Date Functions.      (line   6)
* calc-np:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* calc-num-integral:                     Numerical Integration.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-num-prefix:                       Prefix Arguments.    (line  39)
* calc-num-simplify-mode:                Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  28)
* calc-option:                           Inverse and Hyperbolic.
                                                              (line  23)
* calc-or:                               Binary Functions.    (line  65)
* calc-other-window:                     Basic Commands.      (line  61)
* calc-outer-product:                    Generalized Products.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-over:                             Stack Manipulation.  (line  16)
* calc-over-notation:                    Fraction Formats.    (line   6)
* calc-pack:                             Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* calc-pack <1>:                         Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-pack-bits:                        Set Operations.      (line 111)
* calc-pascal-language:                  C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  30)
* calc-percent:                          Percentages.         (line   6)
* calc-percent-change:                   Percentages.         (line  43)
* calc-perm:                             Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* calc-permanent-units:                  User-Defined Units.  (line  62)
* calc-permanent-variable:               Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-pi:                               Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-plus:                             Basic Arithmetic.    (line   6)
* calc-point-char:                       Float Formats.       (line  49)
* calc-polar:                            Conversions.         (line  73)
* calc-polar-mode:                       Polar Mode.          (line  12)
* calc-poly-div:                         Polynomials.         (line 120)
* calc-poly-div-rem:                     Polynomials.         (line 140)
* calc-poly-gcd:                         Polynomials.         (line 146)
* calc-poly-interp:                      Interpolation.       (line   6)
* calc-poly-rem:                         Polynomials.         (line 134)
* calc-poly-roots:                       Multiple Solutions.  (line  62)
* calc-pop:                              Stack Manipulation.  (line  23)
* calc-pop-above:                        Stack Manipulation.  (line  33)
* calc-power:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line 129)
* calc-precision:                        Precision.           (line   6)
* calc-prepend-to-register:              Saving Into Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-prev-prime:                       Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 117)
* calc-prime-factors:                    Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* calc-prime-test:                       Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  73)
* calc-product:                          Summations.          (line 117)
* calc-quick-units:                      User-Defined Units.  (line   9)
* calc-quit:                             Basic Commands.      (line  77)
* calc-radians-mode:                     Angular Modes.       (line  20)
* calc-radix:                            Radix Modes.         (line  19)
* calc-random:                           Random Numbers.      (line   6)
* calc-random-again:                     Random Numbers.      (line  62)
* calc-re:                               Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* calc-realign:                          Stack Basics.        (line  30)
* calc-recall:                           Recalling Variables. (line   6)
* calc-redo:                             Undo.                (line  23)
* calc-reduce:                           Reducing.            (line   6)
* calc-refresh:                          Basic Commands.      (line  88)
* calc-refresh-top:                      Display Modes.       (line  19)
* calc-remove-duplicates:                Set Operations.      (line  34)
* calc-remove-equal:                     Logical Operations.  (line  67)
* calc-remove-units:                     Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 138)
* calc-reset:                            Basic Commands.      (line 105)
* calc-reverse-vector:                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 112)
* calc-rewrite:                          Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* calc-rewrite-selection:                Selections with Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-right-justify:                    Justification.       (line   6)
* calc-right-label:                      Labels.              (line  16)
* calc-rnorm:                            Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-roll-down:                        Stack Manipulation.  (line  50)
* calc-roll-up:                          Stack Manipulation.  (line  60)
* calc-rotate-binary:                    Binary Functions.    (line 116)
* calc-round:                            Integer Truncation.  (line  23)
* calc-rrandom:                          Random Numbers.      (line  59)
* calc-rshift-arith:                     Binary Functions.    (line 103)
* calc-rshift-binary:                    Binary Functions.    (line  94)
* calc-save-modes:                       General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-scale-float:                      Basic Arithmetic.    (line 222)
* calc-sci-notation:                     Float Formats.       (line  27)
* calc-scroll-down:                      Basic Commands.      (line 101)
* calc-scroll-left:                      Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* calc-scroll-right:                     Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* calc-scroll-up:                        Basic Commands.      (line 101)
* calc-sec:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-sech:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* calc-sel-add-both-sides:               Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 160)
* calc-sel-commute:                      Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  74)
* calc-sel-distribute:                   Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  41)
* calc-sel-div-both-sides:               Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 116)
* calc-sel-evaluate:                     Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 172)
* calc-sel-expand-formula:               Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 188)
* calc-sel-invert:                       Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  98)
* calc-sel-isolate:                      Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 109)
* calc-sel-jump-equals:                  Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 103)
* calc-sel-merge:                        Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  68)
* calc-sel-mult-both-sides:              Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 116)
* calc-sel-negate:                       Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  90)
* calc-sel-sub-both-sides:               Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 160)
* calc-sel-unpack:                       Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 166)
* calc-select-additional:                Making Selections.   (line  71)
* calc-select-here:                      Making Selections.   (line   6)
* calc-select-here-maybe:                Making Selections.   (line  88)
* calc-select-less:                      Changing Selections. (line  29)
* calc-select-more:                      Changing Selections. (line   6)
* calc-select-next:                      Changing Selections. (line  50)
* calc-select-once:                      Making Selections.   (line  78)
* calc-select-once-maybe:                Making Selections.   (line  88)
* calc-select-part:                      Changing Selections. (line  35)
* calc-select-previous:                  Changing Selections. (line  50)
* calc-set-cardinality:                  Set Operations.      (line  96)
* calc-set-complement:                   Set Operations.      (line  70)
* calc-set-difference:                   Set Operations.      (line  55)
* calc-set-enumerate:                    Set Operations.      (line  84)
* calc-set-floor:                        Set Operations.      (line  75)
* calc-set-intersect:                    Set Operations.      (line  47)
* calc-set-span:                         Set Operations.      (line  89)
* calc-set-union:                        Set Operations.      (line  42)
* calc-set-xor:                          Set Operations.      (line  65)
* calc-settings-file-name:               General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  26)
* calc-shift-prefix:                     General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line  56)
* calc-show-plain:                       More About Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  19)
* calc-show-selections:                  Displaying Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-shuffle:                          Random Numbers.      (line  66)
* calc-sign:                             Basic Arithmetic.    (line 179)
* calc-simplify:                         Simplifying Formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-simplify-extended:                Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-simplify-units:                   Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  29)
* calc-sin:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-sincos:                           Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-sinh:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* calc-solve-for:                        Solving Equations.   (line   6)
* calc-sort:                             Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* calc-spn:                              Musical Notes.       (line  25)
* calc-sqrt:                             Basic Arithmetic.    (line 189)
* calc-stirling-number:                  Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  66)
* calc-store:                            Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* calc-store-AlgSimpRules:               Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-concat:                     Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-Decls:                      Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-decr:                       Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-div:                        Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-EvalRules:                  Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-exchange:                   Storing Variables.   (line 102)
* calc-store-ExtSimpRules:               Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-FitRules:                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-GenCount:                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-Holidays:                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-incr:                       Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-IntegLimit:                 Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-into:                       Storing Variables.   (line  12)
* calc-store-inv:                        Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-LineStyles:                 Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-map:                        Storing Variables.   (line  84)
* calc-store-minus:                      Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-neg:                        Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-PlotRejects:                Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-plus:                       Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-PointStyles:                Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-power:                      Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-times:                      Storing Variables.   (line  40)
* calc-store-TimeZone:                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-store-Units:                      Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-subscript:                        Extracting Elements. (line  24)
* calc-substitute:                       Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line 110)
* calc-subvector:                        Extracting Elements. (line  55)
* calc-summation:                        Summations.          (line   6)
* calc-symbolic-mode:                    Symbolic Mode.       (line  12)
* calc-tabulate:                         Summations.          (line 123)
* calc-tail:                             Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* calc-tan:                              Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-tanh:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-taylor:                           Taylor Series.       (line   6)
* calc-tex-language:                     TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-time:                             HMS Forms.           (line  29)
* calc-time-zone:                        Time Zones.          (line  30)
* calc-times:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line  71)
* calc-timing:                           Debugging Calc.      (line  10)
* calc-to-degrees:                       Conversions.         (line  56)
* calc-to-hms:                           Conversions.         (line  64)
* calc-to-radians:                       Conversions.         (line  61)
* calc-total-algebraic-mode:             Algebraic Entry.     (line  42)
* calc-totient:                          Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 120)
* calc-trail-backward:                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* calc-trail-display:                    Trail Commands.      (line   9)
* calc-trail-first:                      Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* calc-trail-forward:                    Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* calc-trail-here:                       Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* calc-trail-in:                         Trail Commands.      (line  19)
* calc-trail-isearch-backward:           Trail Commands.      (line  52)
* calc-trail-isearch-forward:            Trail Commands.      (line  52)
* calc-trail-kill:                       Trail Commands.      (line  65)
* calc-trail-last:                       Trail Commands.      (line  46)
* calc-trail-marker:                     Trail Commands.      (line  59)
* calc-trail-next:                       Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* calc-trail-out:                        Trail Commands.      (line  19)
* calc-trail-previous:                   Trail Commands.      (line  39)
* calc-trail-scroll-left:                Trail Commands.      (line  35)
* calc-trail-scroll-right:               Trail Commands.      (line  35)
* calc-trail-yank:                       Trail Commands.      (line  30)
* calc-transpose:                        Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 107)
* calc-transpose-lines:                  Stack Manipulation.  (line  83)
* calc-trunc:                            Integer Truncation.  (line  29)
* calc-truncate-down:                    Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-truncate-stack:                   Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-truncate-up:                      Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-tutorial:                         Help Commands.       (line  29)
* calc-undefine-unit:                    User-Defined Units.  (line  40)
* calc-undo:                             Undo.                (line   6)
* calc-unformatted-language:             Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  67)
* calc-units-simplify-mode:              Simplification Modes.
                                                              (line  56)
* calc-unix-time:                        Date Conversions.    (line  50)
* calc-unpack:                           Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* calc-unpack <1>:                       Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 125)
* calc-unpack-bits:                      Set Operations.      (line 111)
* calc-unselect:                         Making Selections.   (line 117)
* calc-unstore:                          Storing Variables.   (line 110)
* calc-user-define:                      Creating User Keys.  (line   6)
* calc-user-define-composition:          User-Defined Compositions.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-user-define-edit:                 Creating User Keys.  (line  59)
* calc-user-define-formula:              Algebraic Definitions.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-user-define-invocation:           Invocation Macros.   (line   6)
* calc-user-define-kbd-macro:            Naming Keyboard Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-user-define-permanent:            Creating User Keys.  (line  36)
* calc-user-invocation:                  Invocation Macros.   (line   6)
* calc-user-undefine:                    Creating User Keys.  (line  32)
* calc-utpb:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* calc-utpc:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* calc-utpf:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  45)
* calc-utpn:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* calc-utpp:                             Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* calc-vector-braces:                    Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* calc-vector-brackets:                  Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* calc-vector-commas:                    Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  59)
* calc-vector-correlation:               Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  28)
* calc-vector-count:                     Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  36)
* calc-vector-covariance:                Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  13)
* calc-vector-find:                      Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  15)
* calc-vector-geometric-mean:            Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 102)
* calc-vector-harmonic-mean:             Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  98)
* calc-vector-max:                       Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* calc-vector-mean:                      Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  55)
* calc-vector-mean-error:                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  73)
* calc-vector-median:                    Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  84)
* calc-vector-min:                       Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* calc-vector-parens:                    Vector and Matrix Formats.
                                                              (line  17)
* calc-vector-pop-covariance:            Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  24)
* calc-vector-pop-sdev:                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 130)
* calc-vector-pop-variance:              Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* calc-vector-prod:                      Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* calc-vector-sdev:                      Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 116)
* calc-vector-sum:                       Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* calc-vector-variance:                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* calc-view-units-table:                 The Units Table.     (line  27)
* calc-vlength:                          Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-why:                              Error Messages.      (line   6)
* calc-word-size:                        Binary Functions.    (line  37)
* calc-working:                          Working Message.     (line  14)
* calc-xor:                              Binary Functions.    (line  69)
* calc-xpon-part:                        Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* calc-yacas-language:                   Yacas Language Mode. (line   6)
* calc-yank:                             Yanking Into Stack.  (line   6)
* describe-bindings:                     Help Commands.       (line  77)
* full-calc:                             Basic Commands.      (line  53)
* full-calc-keypad:                      Keypad Mode.         (line  13)
* quick-calc:                            Quick Calculator.    (line   6)
* read-kbd-macro:                        Naming Keyboard Macros.
                                                              (line  39)


File: calc.info,  Node: Function Index,  Next: Concept Index,  Prev: Command Index,  Up: Top

Index of Algebraic Functions
****************************

This is a list of built-in functions and operators usable in algebraic
expressions.  Their full Lisp names are derived by adding the prefix
‘calcFunc-’, as in ‘calcFunc-sqrt’.

[index]
* Menu:

* !:                                     Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* ! <1>:                                 Logical Operations.  (line  88)
* !!:                                    Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  35)
* !!!:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  80)
* !=:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  47)
* %:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 147)
* % <1>:                                 Percentages.         (line   6)
* &&:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  77)
* &&&:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  71)
* *:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  71)
* +:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line   6)
* +/-:                                   Error Forms.         (line  47)
* -:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  66)
* /:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line  90)
* ::                                     Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* :::                                    Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  67)
* :=:                                    Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  89)
* <:                                     Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* <=:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* =:                                     Logical Operations.  (line  22)
* ==:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  22)
* =>:                                    Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line   6)
* >:                                     Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* >=:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* ?:                                     Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* \:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 140)
* ^:                                     Basic Arithmetic.    (line 129)
* _:                                     Extracting Elements. (line  24)
* |:                                     Building Vectors.    (line   9)
* ||:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  83)
* |||:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  76)
* abs:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 166)
* abs (vectors):                         Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  19)
* abssqr:                                Basic Arithmetic.    (line 176)
* accum:                                 Reducing.            (line  21)
* acute:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Acute:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* add:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* afixp:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  22)
* agmean:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 107)
* alog:                                  Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* an:                                    Multiple Solutions.  (line  35)
* and:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  59)
* anest:                                 Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  13)
* apart:                                 Polynomials.         (line 106)
* append:                                Building Vectors.    (line  22)
* apply:                                 Reducing and Mapping.
                                                              (line   9)
* apply (rewrites):                      Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  95)
* arccos:                                Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* arccosh:                               Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* arcsin:                                Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  34)
* arcsincos:                             Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* arcsinh:                               Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* arctan:                                Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* arctan2:                               Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* arctanh:                               Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* arg:                                   Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* arrange:                               Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* as:                                    Multiple Solutions.  (line  35)
* ash:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  98)
* assign:                                Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line  89)
* asum:                                  Summations.          (line 105)
* badd:                                  Business Days.       (line  13)
* bar:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Bar:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* bcount:                                Bit Counting Example.
                                                              (line   6)
* bern:                                  Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* besJ:                                  Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* besY:                                  Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* beta:                                  Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  42)
* betaB:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  47)
* betaI:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  47)
* breve:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Breve:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* bstring:                               Strings.             (line  54)
* bsub:                                  Business Days.       (line  13)
* call:                                  Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line 102)
* cascent:                               Information about Compositions.
                                                              (line  19)
* cbase:                                 Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  16)
* cbbase:                                Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  29)
* cbspace:                               Other Compositions.  (line  40)
* cdescent:                              Information about Compositions.
                                                              (line  19)
* ceil:                                  Integer Truncation.  (line  19)
* cflat:                                 Other Compositions.  (line  16)
* check:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Check:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* cheight:                               Information about Compositions.
                                                              (line  16)
* choose:                                Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* choriz:                                Horizontal Compositions.
                                                              (line   6)
* clean:                                 Conversions.         (line 126)
* clip:                                  Binary Functions.    (line  28)
* clvert:                                Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  59)
* cnorm:                                 Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  31)
* collect:                               Polynomials.         (line  69)
* condition:                             Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  67)
* conj:                                  Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* cons:                                  Building Vectors.    (line  92)
* cons (rewrites):                       Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  84)
* constant:                              Logical Operations.  (line 143)
* cos:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* cosh:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* cot:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* coth:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* cprec:                                 Composition Basics.  (line  70)
* cross:                                 Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  38)
* crule:                                 Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  46)
* crvert:                                Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  59)
* csc:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* csch:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* cspace:                                Other Compositions.  (line  21)
* csub:                                  Other Compositions.  (line  11)
* csup:                                  Other Compositions.  (line   6)
* ctbase:                                Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line  29)
* ctrn:                                  Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  16)
* ctspace:                               Other Compositions.  (line  40)
* curve:                                 Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  42)
* cvec:                                  Building Vectors.    (line  80)
* cvert:                                 Vertical Compositions.
                                                              (line   6)
* cvspace:                               Other Compositions.  (line  34)
* cwidth:                                Information about Compositions.
                                                              (line  10)
* date:                                  Date Conversions.    (line   6)
* day:                                   Date Functions.      (line  25)
* dbfield:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* dbpower:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* ddb:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* ddddot:                                TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* dddot:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* decr:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* deg:                                   Conversions.         (line  56)
* deriv:                                 Differentiation.     (line   6)
* det:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  52)
* deven:                                 Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  57)
* dfact:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  35)
* diag:                                  Building Vectors.    (line  32)
* diff:                                  Binary Functions.    (line  73)
* dimag:                                 Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  38)
* dint:                                  Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  22)
* div:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* dnatnum:                               Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  22)
* dneg:                                  Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  41)
* dnonneg:                               Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  41)
* dnonzero:                              Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  49)
* dnumint:                               Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  22)
* dodd:                                  Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  57)
* dot:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Dot:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* dotdot:                                TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* DotDot:                                TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* dpos:                                  Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  41)
* drange:                                Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  63)
* drat:                                  Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  31)
* dreal:                                 Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  35)
* dsadj:                                 Time Zones.          (line 177)
* dscalar:                               Functions for Declarations.
                                                              (line  72)
* dyad:                                  TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* efit:                                  Error Estimates for Fits.
                                                              (line   6)
* egcd:                                  Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* Ei:                                    Customizing the Integrator.
                                                              (line  22)
* elim:                                  Solving Systems of Equations.
                                                              (line  29)
* ends:                                  Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  25)
* eq:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  22)
* erf:                                   Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* erfc:                                  Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* esimplify:                             Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* euler:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  61)
* eval:                                  Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 177)
* evalextsimp:                           Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 190)
* evalsimp:                              Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 186)
* evalto:                                Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line   6)
* evalv:                                 Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  40)
* evalvn:                                Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  40)
* exp:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  11)
* exp10:                                 Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* expand:                                Polynomials.         (line  84)
* expm1:                                 Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  37)
* fact:                                  Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* factor:                                Polynomials.         (line  13)
* factors:                               Polynomials.         (line  57)
* fceil:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  19)
* fdiv:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 154)
* ffinv:                                 Multiple Solutions.  (line  55)
* ffloor:                                Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* fib:                                   Rewrites Tutorial.   (line 174)
* find:                                  Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  15)
* finv:                                  Multiple Solutions.  (line  55)
* fit:                                   Linear Fits.         (line   6)
* fitdummy:                              Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 158)
* fitmodel:                              Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 158)
* fitparam:                              Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 158)
* fitsystem:                             Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 158)
* fitvar:                                Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 158)
* fixp:                                  Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  18)
* float:                                 Conversions.         (line  30)
* floor:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* frac:                                  Conversions.         (line  52)
* freq:                                  Musical Notes.       (line  33)
* fround:                                Integer Truncation.  (line  23)
* frounde:                               Integer Truncation.  (line  40)
* froundu:                               Integer Truncation.  (line  40)
* fsolve:                                Multiple Solutions.  (line   6)
* ftrunc:                                Integer Truncation.  (line  29)
* fv:                                    Future Value.        (line   6)
* fvb:                                   Future Value.        (line  15)
* fvl:                                   Future Value.        (line  24)
* gamma:                                 Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* gammag:                                Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* gammaG:                                Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* gammaP:                                Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* gammaQ:                                Advanced Math Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* gcd:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* geq:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* getdiag:                               Extracting Elements. (line  39)
* gpoly:                                 Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  24)
* grade:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* grave:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Grave:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* gt:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* hasfitparams:                          Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 234)
* hasfitvars:                            Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 234)
* hat:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Hat:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* head:                                  Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* histogram:                             Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  77)
* hms:                                   Conversions.         (line  64)
* holiday:                               Business Days.       (line 114)
* hour:                                  Date Functions.      (line  28)
* hypot:                                 Basic Arithmetic.    (line 193)
* idiv:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 140)
* idn:                                   Building Vectors.    (line  45)
* ierf:                                  Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 241)
* if:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* ilog:                                  Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* im:                                    Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* import:                                Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  11)
* in:                                    Logical Operations.  (line 111)
* incmonth:                              Date Functions.      (line  96)
* incr:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 228)
* incyear:                               Date Functions.      (line 105)
* index:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  61)
* inner:                                 Generalized Products.
                                                              (line  14)
* integ:                                 Integration.         (line   6)
* integer:                               Logical Operations.  (line 143)
* intv:                                  Interval Forms.      (line  67)
* inv:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 185)
* inv (matrices):                        Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  42)
* irr:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* irrb:                                  Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  55)
* islin:                                 Logical Operations.  (line 184)
* islinnt:                               Logical Operations.  (line 184)
* isqrt:                                 Basic Arithmetic.    (line 198)
* istrue:                                Logical Operations.  (line 214)
* iterations:                            Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  44)
* julian:                                Date Conversions.    (line  35)
* kron:                                  Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  66)
* lambda:                                Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  82)
* land:                                  Logical Operations.  (line  77)
* lcm:                                   Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* leq:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* let:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 199)
* lin:                                   Logical Operations.  (line 184)
* linnt:                                 Logical Operations.  (line 184)
* ln:                                    Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* lnot:                                  Logical Operations.  (line  88)
* lnp1:                                  Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* log:                                   Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* log10:                                 Logarithmic Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* lor:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  83)
* lsh:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  80)
* lt:                                    Logical Operations.  (line  52)
* ltpb:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* ltpc:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* ltpf:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  45)
* ltpn:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* ltpp:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* ltpt:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* lud:                                   Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  55)
* lufadd:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lufdiv:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lufmul:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lufquant:                              Logarithmic Units.   (line  53)
* lufsub:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lupadd:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lupdiv:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lupmul:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* lupquant:                              Logarithmic Units.   (line  53)
* lupsub:                                Logarithmic Units.   (line  71)
* makemod:                               Modulo Forms.        (line  61)
* mant:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* map:                                   Mapping.             (line   6)
* mapa:                                  Mapping.             (line  73)
* mapc:                                  Mapping.             (line  39)
* mapd:                                  Mapping.             (line  73)
* mapeq:                                 Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  73)
* mapeqp:                                Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line  99)
* mapeqr:                                Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line 105)
* mapr:                                  Mapping.             (line  24)
* match:                                 Matching Commands.   (line   6)
* matches:                               Matching Commands.   (line  29)
* matchnot:                              Matching Commands.   (line  26)
* max:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* maximize:                              Minimization.        (line   6)
* mcol:                                  Extracting Elements. (line  43)
* mdims:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  10)
* midi:                                  Musical Notes.       (line  29)
* min:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 205)
* minimize:                              Minimization.        (line   6)
* minute:                                Date Functions.      (line  33)
* mod:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* mod (operator):                        Modulo Forms.        (line  12)
* moebius:                               Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 124)
* month:                                 Date Functions.      (line  22)
* mrcol:                                 Extracting Elements. (line  43)
* mrow:                                  Extracting Elements. (line   6)
* mrrow:                                 Extracting Elements. (line  33)
* mul:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* mysin:                                 Sine Example.        (line   6)
* neg:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* negative:                              Logical Operations.  (line 165)
* neq:                                   Logical Operations.  (line  47)
* nest:                                  Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line   6)
* newmonth:                              Date Functions.      (line  51)
* newweek:                               Date Functions.      (line  68)
* newyear:                               Date Functions.      (line  59)
* nextprime:                             Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 105)
* ninteg:                                Numerical Integration.
                                                              (line   6)
* nonvar:                                Logical Operations.  (line 179)
* not:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  77)
* now:                                   Date Functions.      (line   6)
* nper:                                  Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  21)
* nperb:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  27)
* nperl:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  32)
* npfield:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* nppower:                               Logarithmic Units.   (line  63)
* npv:                                   Present Value.       (line  45)
* npvb:                                  Present Value.       (line  64)
* nrat:                                  Polynomials.         (line 113)
* nroot:                                 Basic Arithmetic.    (line 136)
* nterms:                                Rewrites Answer 5.   (line   6)
* opt:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  47)
* or:                                    Binary Functions.    (line  65)
* outer:                                 Generalized Products.
                                                              (line   6)
* pack:                                  Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 116)
* pand:                                  Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  71)
* pclean:                                Conversions.         (line  81)
* pcont:                                 Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  82)
* pdeg:                                  Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  65)
* pdiv:                                  Polynomials.         (line 120)
* pdivide:                               Polynomials.         (line 140)
* pdivrem:                               Polynomials.         (line 140)
* percent:                               Percentages.         (line   6)
* perm:                                  Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* pfloat:                                Conversions.         (line   9)
* pfrac:                                 Conversions.         (line  40)
* pgcd:                                  Polynomials.         (line 146)
* phase:                                 Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  11)
* plain:                                 Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  38)
* plead:                                 Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  76)
* pmt:                                   Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* pmtb:                                  Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  14)
* pnot:                                  Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  80)
* polar:                                 Conversions.         (line  73)
* polint:                                Interpolation.       (line   6)
* poly:                                  Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line   6)
* por:                                   Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  76)
* pow:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* pprim:                                 Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line 101)
* prem:                                  Polynomials.         (line 134)
* prevprime:                             Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 117)
* prfac:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* Prime:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* prime:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  88)
* prod:                                  Summations.          (line 117)
* pv:                                    Present Value.       (line   6)
* pvb:                                   Present Value.       (line  27)
* pvl:                                   Present Value.       (line  33)
* pwday:                                 Date Functions.      (line  86)
* quote:                                 Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  29)
* raccum:                                Reducing.            (line  27)
* rad:                                   Conversions.         (line  61)
* random:                                Random Numbers.      (line   6)
* rash:                                  Binary Functions.    (line 103)
* rate:                                  Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* rateb:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* ratel:                                 Related Financial Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* ratint:                                Interpolation.       (line  35)
* rcons:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* rcons (rewrites):                      Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  91)
* rdup:                                  Set Operations.      (line  34)
* re:                                    Complex Number Functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* real:                                  Logical Operations.  (line 143)
* rect:                                  Conversions.         (line  73)
* reduce:                                Reducing.            (line   6)
* reducea:                               Reducing.            (line  31)
* reducec:                               Reducing.            (line  51)
* reduced:                               Reducing.            (line  31)
* reducer:                               Reducing.            (line  40)
* refers:                                Logical Operations.  (line 158)
* relch:                                 Percentages.         (line  43)
* remember:                              Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 287)
* rev:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 112)
* rewrite:                               Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* rgrade:                                Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* rhead:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* rmeq:                                  Logical Operations.  (line  67)
* rms:                                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 112)
* rnorm:                                 Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  25)
* root:                                  Root Finding.        (line   6)
* roots:                                 Multiple Solutions.  (line  62)
* rot:                                   Binary Functions.    (line 116)
* round:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  23)
* rounde:                                Integer Truncation.  (line  40)
* roundu:                                Integer Truncation.  (line  40)
* rreduce:                               Reducing.            (line  15)
* rreducea:                              Reducing.            (line  31)
* rreducec:                              Reducing.            (line  51)
* rreduced:                              Reducing.            (line  31)
* rreducer:                              Reducing.            (line  40)
* rsh:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  94)
* rsort:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* rsubvec:                               Extracting Elements. (line  71)
* rtail:                                 Building Vectors.    (line  98)
* scf:                                   Basic Arithmetic.    (line 222)
* schedule:                              Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  53)
* sdev:                                  Error Forms.         (line  65)
* sec:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* sech:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  64)
* second:                                Date Functions.      (line  36)
* select:                                Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 135)
* seq:                                   Rewrites Answer 4.   (line   6)
* shuffle:                               Random Numbers.      (line  66)
* Si:                                    Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line  46)
* sign:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 179)
* simplify:                              Simplifying Formulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* sin:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line   6)
* sincos:                                Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* sinh:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  39)
* sln:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  16)
* solve:                                 Solving Equations.   (line   6)
* sort:                                  Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* spn:                                   Musical Notes.       (line  25)
* sqr:                                   Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* sqrt:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 189)
* stir1:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  66)
* stir2:                                 Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  66)
* string:                                Strings.             (line  40)
* sub:                                   Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* subscr:                                Extracting Elements. (line  24)
* subst:                                 Algebraic Manipulation.
                                                              (line 110)
* subvec:                                Extracting Elements. (line  55)
* sum:                                   Summations.          (line   6)
* syd:                                   Depreciation Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* table:                                 Summations.          (line 123)
* tail:                                  Building Vectors.    (line  87)
* tan:                                   Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* tanh:                                  Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* taylor:                                Taylor Series.       (line   6)
* tderiv:                                Differentiation.     (line   6)
* thecoefs:                              Polynomials.         (line  39)
* thefactors:                            Polynomials.         (line  39)
* tilde:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* Tilde:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* time:                                  Date Functions.      (line  48)
* totient:                               Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line 120)
* tr:                                    Vector and Matrix Arithmetic.
                                                              (line  62)
* trn:                                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 107)
* trunc:                                 Integer Truncation.  (line  29)
* typeof:                                Logical Operations.  (line 120)
* tzconv:                                Date Conversions.    (line  60)
* tzone:                                 Time Zones.          (line  30)
* under:                                 TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* unixtime:                              Date Conversions.    (line  50)
* unpack:                                Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 167)
* unpackt:                               Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 173)
* usimplify:                             Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  29)
* utpb:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  23)
* utpc:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  41)
* utpf:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  45)
* utpn:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* utpp:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* utpt:                                  Probability Distribution Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* variable:                              Logical Operations.  (line 174)
* vcard:                                 Set Operations.      (line  96)
* vcompl:                                Set Operations.      (line  70)
* vconcat:                               Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  94)
* vcorr:                                 Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  28)
* vcount:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  36)
* vcov:                                  Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  13)
* vdiff:                                 Set Operations.      (line  55)
* vec:                                   Vectors and Matrices.
                                                              (line  28)
* Vec:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* VEC:                                   TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line  95)
* venum:                                 Set Operations.      (line  84)
* vexp:                                  Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 125)
* vflat:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 150)
* vfloor:                                Set Operations.      (line  75)
* vgmean:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 102)
* vhmean:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  98)
* vint:                                  Set Operations.      (line  47)
* vlen:                                  Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line   6)
* vmask:                                 Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line 117)
* vmatches:                              Matching Commands.   (line  34)
* vmax:                                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* vmean:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  55)
* vmeane:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  73)
* vmedian:                               Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  84)
* vmin:                                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  48)
* vpack:                                 Set Operations.      (line 111)
* vpcov:                                 Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  24)
* vprod:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* vpsdev:                                Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 130)
* vpvar:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* vsdev:                                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 116)
* vspan:                                 Set Operations.      (line  89)
* vsum:                                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* vunion:                                Set Operations.      (line  42)
* vunpack:                               Set Operations.      (line 111)
* vvar:                                  Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* vxor:                                  Set Operations.      (line  65)
* weekday:                               Date Functions.      (line  41)
* wmaximize:                             Minimization.        (line  37)
* wminimize:                             Minimization.        (line  37)
* wroot:                                 Root Finding.        (line  52)
* xfit:                                  Error Estimates for Fits.
                                                              (line  49)
* xor:                                   Binary Functions.    (line  69)
* xpon:                                  Basic Arithmetic.    (line 211)
* xy:                                    Basic Graphics.      (line  33)
* xyz:                                   Three Dimensional Graphics.
                                                              (line  38)
* year:                                  Date Functions.      (line  16)
* yearday:                               Date Functions.      (line  44)


File: calc.info,  Node: Concept Index,  Next: Variable Index,  Prev: Function Index,  Up: Top

Concept Index
*************

[index]
* Menu:

* “Computation got stuck” message:       Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* => operator:                           Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line   6)
* Accuracy of calculations:              Floats.              (line  41)
* Accuracy of calculations <1>:          Precision.           (line  25)
* Algebraic Mode:                        Algebraic Entry.     (line  28)
* Algebraic notation:                    Algebraic Entry.     (line   6)
* Algebraic simplifications:             Algebraic Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* AlgSimpRules variable:                 Automatic Rewrites.  (line 134)
* Alternating sums:                      Summations.          (line 105)
* Angle and slope of a line:             Types Tutorial.      (line 180)
* Angular mode:                          Angular Modes.       (line   6)
* Area under a curve:                    Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line 225)
* Arguments, not evaluated:              Logical Operations.  (line  92)
* Arguments, restoring:                  Undo.                (line  31)
* Arranging a matrix:                    Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* Basic simplifications:                 Basic Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* Beatles:                               Types Tutorial.      (line 142)
* Bernoulli numbers, approximate:        Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 237)
* Bibliography:                          History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line  77)
* Binary numbers:                        Binary Functions.    (line   9)
* Binary operators:                      Arithmetic Tutorial. (line  19)
* Branch cuts:                           Branch Cuts.         (line   6)
* Breaking up long lines:                Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  16)
* C language:                            C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line   6)
* Caches:                                Caches.              (line   6)
* Calc init file, mode settings:         General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* Calc init file, user-defined commands: Creating User Keys.  (line  36)
* Calc init file, user-defined units:    User-Defined Units.  (line  62)
* Calc init file, variables:             Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  58)
* calc-ext module:                       Basic Commands.      (line  35)
* Character strings:                     Strings.             (line   6)
* Clearing the stack:                    RPN Tutorial.        (line 298)
* Coefficients of polynomial:            Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  18)
* Columns of data, extracting:           List Tutorial.       (line 111)
* Common logarithm:                      Arithmetic Tutorial. (line 175)
* Complex numbers:                       Complex Numbers.     (line   6)
* Composite units:                       Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line 108)
* Compositions:                          Compositions.        (line   6)
* Conditional structures:                Conditionals in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Continued fractions:                   Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 162)
* Continuous memory:                     General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* Correlation coefficient:               Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  28)
* Covariance:                            Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  13)
* Cross product:                         Vector Analysis Tutorial.
                                                              (line  49)
* Data, extracting from buffers:         List Tutorial.       (line 111)
* Date arithmetic, additional functions: Date Arithmetic.     (line   6)
* Date forms:                            Date Forms.          (line   6)
* Daylight saving time:                  Time Zones.          (line   6)
* Decimal and non-decimal numbers:       Radix Modes.         (line   6)
* Declaring scalar variables:            Matrix Mode.         (line  46)
* Decls variable:                        Declaration Basics.  (line  23)
* Degree of polynomial:                  Decomposing Polynomials.
                                                              (line  18)
* Degrees-minutes-seconds forms:         HMS Forms.           (line   6)
* Deleting stack entries:                Stack Manipulation.  (line  23)
* Demonstration of Calc:                 Demonstration of Calc.
                                                              (line   6)
* Digamma function:                      Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 374)
* Digit grouping:                        Grouping Digits.     (line   6)
* Digits, vectors of:                    List Tutorial.       (line 433)
* Division of integers:                  Fraction Mode.       (line   6)
* Divisor functions:                     List Tutorial.       (line 388)
* Dot product:                           Vector Analysis Tutorial.
                                                              (line  30)
* Duplicate values in a list:            List Tutorial.       (line 394)
* Duplicating a stack entry:             RPN Tutorial.        (line 118)
* Duplicating stack entries:             Stack Manipulation.  (line   6)
* e variable:                            Variables.           (line  39)
* e variable <1>:                        Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* Editing the stack with Emacs:          Editing Stack Entries.
                                                              (line   6)
* Editing user definitions:              Creating User Keys.  (line  59)
* Emptying the stack:                    RPN Tutorial.        (line 298)
* Engineering notation, display of:      Float Formats.       (line  33)
* Entering numbers:                      Numeric Entry.       (line   6)
* Equations, solving:                    Solving Equations.   (line   6)
* Error forms:                           Error Forms.         (line   6)
* Errors, messages:                      Error Messages.      (line   6)
* Errors, undoing:                       Undo.                (line   6)
* Euler’s gamma constant:                Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 374)
* Euler’s gamma constant <1>:            Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* EvalRules variable:                    Automatic Rewrites.  (line   6)
* Evaluates-to operator:                 Evaluates-To Operator.
                                                              (line   6)
* Evaluation of variables in a formula:  Variables.           (line  30)
* Exchanging stack entries:              RPN Tutorial.        (line 134)
* Exiting the Calculator:                Basic Commands.      (line  77)
* Exponential integral Ei(x):            Customizing the Integrator.
                                                              (line  22)
* Expressions:                           Formulas.            (line   6)
* Extended simplification:               Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* Extensions module:                     Basic Commands.      (line  35)
* ExtSimpRules variable:                 Automatic Rewrites.  (line 147)
* Fermat, primality test of:             Types Tutorial.      (line 273)
* Fibonacci numbers:                     Rewrites Tutorial.   (line 174)
* Fibonacci numbers <1>:                 Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 137)
* Fitting data to a line:                List Tutorial.       (line 111)
* Fixed points:                          Nesting and Fixed Points.
                                                              (line  18)
* Flattening a matrix:                   Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* Floating-point numbers:                Floats.              (line   6)
* Floats vs. fractions:                  Modes Tutorial.      (line 343)
* Flushing caches:                       Caches.              (line   6)
* Formulas:                              Formulas.            (line   6)
* Formulas, entering:                    Algebraic Entry.     (line   6)
* Formulas, evaluation:                  Variables.           (line  30)
* Formulas, referring to stack:          Algebraic Entry.     (line  58)
* FORTRAN language:                      C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  40)
* Fraction mode:                         Fraction Mode.       (line   6)
* Fractional part of a number:           Integer Truncation.  (line  62)
* Fractions:                             Fractions.           (line   6)
* Fractions vs. floats:                  Modes Tutorial.      (line 343)
* Function call notation:                Formulas.            (line 103)
* Gamma constant, Euler’s:               Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 374)
* Gamma constant, Euler’s <1>:           Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* gamma variable:                        Variables.           (line  39)
* gamma variable <1>:                    Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* Garbled displays, refreshing:          Basic Commands.      (line  88)
* GenCount variable:                     Multiple Solutions.  (line  35)
* Generic functions:                     Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  54)
* Geometric mean:                        List Tutorial.       (line 315)
* Geometric mean <1>:                    Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 102)
* Giac language:                         Giac Language Mode.  (line   6)
* Golden ratio:                          Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 151)
* Golden ratio <1>:                      Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* Gregorian calendar:                    Date Forms.          (line  51)
* Grouping digits:                       Grouping Digits.     (line   6)
* Guard digits:                          Modes Tutorial.      (line 104)
* Guard digits <1>:                      Modes Tutorial.      (line 110)
* Harmonic mean:                         Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  98)
* Harmonic numbers:                      Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 176)
* Hash tables:                           Arithmetic Tutorial. (line 263)
* Help commands:                         Help Commands.       (line   6)
* Hexadecimal integers:                  Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* Histograms:                            Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  77)
* Holidays variable:                     Business Days.       (line  25)
* Horizontal scrolling:                  Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* Hours-minutes-seconds forms:           HMS Forms.           (line   6)
* i variable:                            Variables.           (line  39)
* i variable <1>:                        Complex Formats.     (line  15)
* Identity matrix:                       Matrix Tutorial.     (line  75)
* Implicit comma in vectors:             Formulas.            (line  75)
* Implicit multiplication:               Formulas.            (line  64)
* Incomplete Algebraic Mode:             Algebraic Entry.     (line  37)
* Incomplete complex numbers:            Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* Incomplete interval forms:             Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* Incomplete vectors:                    Incomplete Objects.  (line   6)
* Index tables:                          Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* Inexact results:                       Symbolic Mode.       (line   6)
* inf variable:                          Infinities.          (line   6)
* Infinite mode:                         Infinite Mode.       (line   6)
* Infinity:                              Infinities.          (line   6)
* Integer part of a number:              Integer Truncation.  (line  15)
* Integers:                              Integers.            (line   6)
* Integration by Simpson’s rule:         Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line 312)
* Integration, numerical:                Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line 253)
* Interval forms:                        Interval Forms.      (line   6)
* Inverse of permutation:                Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* ISO 8601:                              ISO 8601.            (line   6)
* Iterative structures:                  Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* Julian calendar:                       Date Forms.          (line  51)
* Julian day counting:                   Date Forms.          (line  94)
* Julian day counts, conversions:        Date Conversions.    (line  35)
* Keyboard macros:                       Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* Keyboard macros, editing:              Naming Keyboard Macros.
                                                              (line  26)
* Kill ring:                             Killing From Stack.  (line   6)
* Knuth, Art of Computer Programming:    History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line  77)
* Lambda expressions:                    Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  82)
* Large numbers, readability:            Modes Tutorial.      (line 173)
* Last-arguments feature:                Undo.                (line  31)
* LaTeX language:                        TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* Leading zeros:                         Radix Modes.         (line  23)
* Least-squares fits:                    Linear Fits.         (line   6)
* Least-squares for fitting a straight line: List Tutorial.   (line 111)
* Least-squares for over-determined systems: Matrix Tutorial. (line 170)
* Levels of stack:                       RPN Tutorial.        (line  44)
* Line breaking:                         Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  16)
* Line, fitting data to:                 List Tutorial.       (line 111)
* Linear correlation:                    Paired-Sample Statistics.
                                                              (line  28)
* Linear equations, systems of:          Matrix Tutorial.     (line 115)
* Linear regression:                     Linear Fits.         (line   6)
* Linearity testing:                     Logical Operations.  (line 184)
* LineStyles variable:                   Graphics Options.    (line 103)
* Lists:                                 List Tutorial.       (line   6)
* Local variables:                       Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Looping structures:                    Loops in Macros.     (line   6)
* Maple language:                        Maple Language Mode. (line   6)
* Matchstick problem:                    List Tutorial.       (line 456)
* Mathematica language:                  Mathematica Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* Matrices:                              Vectors and Matrices.
                                                              (line   6)
* Matrix display:                        Normal Language Modes.
                                                              (line  11)
* Matrix mode:                           Matrix Mode.         (line   6)
* max-lisp-eval-depth:                   Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* max-specpdl-size:                      Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* Maxima language:                       Maxima Language Mode.
                                                              (line   6)
* Maximizing a function over a list of values: List Tutorial. (line 425)
* Maximum of a function using Calculus:  Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line  48)
* Mean of data values:                   Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  55)
* Median of data values:                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  84)
* Minimization, numerical:               Minimization.        (line   6)
* Minus signs:                           Numeric Entry.       (line  12)
* Mistakes, undoing:                     Undo.                (line   6)
* Mode line indicators:                  Calc Mode Line.      (line   6)
* Modes variable:                        Modes Variable.      (line  12)
* Modulo division:                       Modulo Forms.        (line  35)
* Modulo forms:                          Modulo Forms.        (line   6)
* Moving stack entries:                  Stack Manipulation.  (line  83)
* Multiplication, implicit:              Formulas.            (line  64)
* Nameless functions:                    Specifying Operators.
                                                              (line  54)
* nan variable:                          Infinities.          (line   6)
* Narrowing the stack:                   Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line   6)
* Negative numbers, entering:            Numeric Entry.       (line  12)
* Newton’s method:                       Root Finding.        (line   6)
* Non-decimal numbers:                   Radix Modes.         (line   6)
* Normalizing a vector:                  Vector Analysis Tutorial.
                                                              (line  84)
* Numerator of a fraction, extracting:   Packing and Unpacking.
                                                              (line 181)
* Numeric entry:                         Numeric Entry.       (line   6)
* Numerical integration:                 Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line 253)
* Numerical Recipes:                     History and Acknowledgments.
                                                              (line  77)
* Numerical root-finding:                Root Finding.        (line   6)
* Octal integers:                        Radix Modes.         (line  12)
* Operands:                              RPN Tutorial.        (line  16)
* Operators:                             RPN Tutorial.        (line  16)
* Operators in formulas:                 Formulas.            (line   6)
* Over-determined systems of equations:  Matrix Tutorial.     (line 170)
* Parsing formulas, customized:          Syntax Tables.       (line   6)
* Parts of formulas:                     Selecting Subformulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* Pascal language:                       C FORTRAN Pascal.    (line  30)
* Pattern matching:                      Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* Performance:                           Working Message.     (line   6)
* Permanent mode settings:               General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* Permanent user definitions:            Creating User Keys.  (line  36)
* Permanent variables:                   Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  58)
* Permutation, inverse of:               Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* Permutations, applying:                Extracting Elements. (line  13)
* Perpendicular vectors:                 Vector Analysis Tutorial.
                                                              (line  49)
* phi variable:                          Variables.           (line  39)
* phi variable <1>:                      Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* Phi, golden ratio:                     Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 151)
* Phi, golden ratio <1>:                 Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* pi variable:                           Variables.           (line  39)
* pi variable <1>:                       Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* Plain vectors:                         Vectors and Matrices.
                                                              (line   6)
* PlotRejects variable:                  Basic Graphics.      (line  58)
* PointStyles variable:                  Graphics Options.    (line 103)
* Polar mode:                            Polar Mode.          (line   6)
* Polynomial, list of coefficients:      Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 395)
* Population statistics:                 Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 130)
* Positive Infinite mode:                Infinite Mode.       (line  25)
* Precedence of operators:               Formulas.            (line   6)
* Precision of calculations:             Precision.           (line   6)
* Primes:                                Combinatorial Functions.
                                                              (line  73)
* Principal values:                      Branch Cuts.         (line   6)
* Product of a sequence:                 Summations.          (line 117)
* Programming with algebraic formulas:   Algebraic Definitions.
                                                              (line   6)
* Programming with keyboard macros:      Keyboard Macros.     (line   6)
* Pythagorean Theorem:                   RPN Tutorial.        (line 183)
* Quaternions:                           Examples of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  41)
* Quick Calculator:                      Quick Calculator.    (line   6)
* Quick units:                           User-Defined Units.  (line   9)
* Quick variables:                       Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* Quitting the Calculator:               Basic Commands.      (line  77)
* Radix display:                         Radix Modes.         (line   6)
* Rank tables:                           Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  51)
* Recalling variables:                   Recalling Variables. (line   6)
* Reciprocal:                            Basic Arithmetic.    (line 185)
* Recursion:                             Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line 403)
* Recursion depth:                       Recursion Depth.     (line   6)
* Redoing after an Undo:                 Undo.                (line  23)
* Refreshing a garbled display:          Basic Commands.      (line  88)
* Registers:                             Saving Into Registers.
                                                              (line   6)
* Removing stack entries:                Stack Manipulation.  (line  23)
* Reshaping a matrix:                    Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  22)
* Restoring saved modes:                 Local Values in Macros.
                                                              (line   6)
* Retrieving previous results:           Trail Commands.      (line  30)
* Rewrite rules:                         Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* Root-mean-square:                      Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 112)
* Roots of equations:                    Root Finding.        (line   6)
* Round-off errors:                      Modes Tutorial.      (line  89)
* Roundoff errors, correcting:           Conversions.         (line  96)
* Roundoff errors, examples:             Modes Tutorial.      (line 289)
* Roundoff errors, examples <1>:         Arithmetic Tutorial. (line 162)
* Roundoff errors, in non-decimal numbers: Modes Tutorial.    (line 251)
* RPN notation:                          RPN Tutorial.        (line   6)
* Running the Calculator:                Basic Commands.      (line   6)
* Sample statistics:                     Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 116)
* Saving mode settings:                  General Mode Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* Scalar mode:                           Matrix Mode.         (line   6)
* Scientific notation, display of:       Float Formats.       (line  27)
* Scientific notation, entry of:         Modes Tutorial.      (line  78)
* Scientific notation, in non-decimal numbers: Modes Tutorial.
                                                              (line 259)
* Scrolling:                             Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* Selections:                            Selecting Subformulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* Sets, as binary numbers:               Set Operations.      (line 101)
* Sets, as vectors:                      Set Operations.      (line   6)
* Simpson’s rule:                        Basic Algebra Tutorial.
                                                              (line 312)
* Sine integral Si(x):                   Programming Tutorial.
                                                              (line  46)
* Slope and angle of a line:             Types Tutorial.      (line 180)
* Solving equations:                     Solving Equations.   (line   6)
* Sorting data:                          Manipulating Vectors.
                                                              (line  37)
* Speed of light:                        Types Tutorial.      (line 383)
* Square-free numbers:                   List Tutorial.       (line 394)
* Stack basics:                          Stack Basics.        (line   6)
* Stack levels:                          RPN Tutorial.        (line  44)
* Standalone Operation:                  Standalone Operation.
                                                              (line   6)
* Standard deviation:                    Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 116)
* Standard deviations:                   Error Forms.         (line   6)
* Standard user interface:               The Standard Interface.
                                                              (line   6)
* Starting the Calculator:               Basic Commands.      (line   6)
* Statistical functions:                 Statistical Operations.
                                                              (line   6)
* Storing user definitions:              Creating User Keys.  (line  36)
* Storing variables:                     Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* Storing variables <1>:                 Operations on Variables.
                                                              (line  58)
* Strings:                               Strings.             (line   6)
* Sub-formulas:                          Selecting Subformulas.
                                                              (line   6)
* Subscript notation:                    Extracting Elements. (line  24)
* Summation of a series:                 Summations.          (line   6)
* Summations (by keyboard macros):       Loops in Macros.     (line  42)
* Summations (statistical):              Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line  42)
* Summing rows and columns of data:      Grabbing From Buffers.
                                                              (line  77)
* Symbolic mode:                         Symbolic Mode.       (line   6)
* Syntax tables:                         Syntax Tables.       (line   6)
* Systems of equations, numerical:       Numerical Systems of Equations.
                                                              (line   6)
* Systems of equations, symbolic:        Solving Systems of Equations.
                                                              (line   6)
* Systems of linear equations:           Matrix Tutorial.     (line 115)
* Temperature conversion:                Basic Operations on Units.
                                                              (line  58)
* Temporary assignment to variables:     Let Command.         (line   6)
* TeX language:                          TeX and LaTeX Language Modes.
                                                              (line   6)
* Time of day:                           HMS Forms.           (line  29)
* Time travel:                           Undo Tutorial.       (line  39)
* Time zones:                            Time Zones.          (line   6)
* Time Zones, converting between:        Date Conversions.    (line  60)
* TimeZone variable:                     Time Zones.          (line  72)
* Torus, volume of:                      Types Tutorial.      (line 197)
* Total Algebraic Mode:                  Algebraic Entry.     (line  42)
* Trail buffer:                          Trail Commands.      (line   6)
* Trail pointer:                         Trail Commands.      (line  25)
* Transformations:                       Rewrite Rules.       (line   6)
* Triangular lists:                      List Tutorial.       (line 401)
* Truncating the stack:                  Truncating the Stack.
                                                              (line   6)
* Two’s complements:                     Radix Modes.         (line  32)
* uinf variable:                         Infinities.          (line   6)
* Un-storing variables:                  Storing Variables.   (line 110)
* Unary operators:                       Arithmetic Tutorial. (line  32)
* Undoing mistakes:                      Undo.                (line   6)
* Unit vectors:                          Vector Analysis Tutorial.
                                                              (line  84)
* Units variable:                        User-Defined Units.  (line   9)
* UnitSimpRules variable:                Automatic Rewrites.  (line 147)
* Unix time format:                      Date Forms.          (line 133)
* Unix time format, conversions:         Date Conversions.    (line  50)
* Unsafe simplifications:                Unsafe Simplifications.
                                                              (line   6)
* User-defined units:                    User-Defined Units.  (line  27)
* Variables, evaluation:                 Variables.           (line  30)
* Variables, in formulas:                Variables.           (line   6)
* Variables, temporary assignment:       Let Command.         (line   6)
* Variance of data values:               Single-Variable Statistics.
                                                              (line 143)
* Vectors:                               Vectors and Matrices.
                                                              (line   6)
* Vertical scrolling:                    Basic Commands.      (line 101)
* Void variables:                        Storing Variables.   (line 110)
* Why did an error occur?:               Error Messages.      (line   6)
* Wide text, scrolling:                  Basic Commands.      (line  95)
* Word size for binary operations:       Binary Functions.    (line  15)
* Working messages:                      Working Message.     (line   6)
* Yacas language:                        Yacas Language Mode. (line   6)


File: calc.info,  Node: Variable Index,  Next: Lisp Function Index,  Prev: Concept Index,  Up: Top

Index of Variables
******************

The variables in this list that do not contain dashes are accessible as
Calc variables.  Add a ‘var-’ prefix to get the name of the
corresponding Lisp variable.

   The remaining variables are Lisp variables suitable for ‘setq’ing in
your Calc init file or ‘.emacs’ file.

[index]
* Menu:

* AlgSimpRules:                          Automatic Rewrites.  (line 134)
* All:                                   Declaration Basics.  (line  48)
* all:                                   Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line  11)
* calc-alg-ent-map:                      Hooks.               (line 104)
* calc-context-sensitive-enter:          Customizing Calc.    (line 317)
* calc-define:                           Defining Functions.  (line 144)
* calc-digit-map:                        Hooks.               (line  98)
* calc-edit-mode-hook:                   Hooks.               (line  66)
* calc-edit-mode-map:                    Hooks.               (line 113)
* calc-embedded-announce-formula:        Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 106)
* calc-embedded-announce-formula <1>:    Customizing Calc.    (line  94)
* calc-embedded-announce-formula-alist:  Customizing Calc.    (line  95)
* calc-embedded-close-formula:           Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  67)
* calc-embedded-close-formula <1>:       Customizing Calc.    (line 129)
* calc-embedded-close-mode:              Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 127)
* calc-embedded-close-mode <1>:          Customizing Calc.    (line 235)
* calc-embedded-close-new-formula:       Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  99)
* calc-embedded-close-new-formula <1>:   Customizing Calc.    (line 210)
* calc-embedded-close-plain:             Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  86)
* calc-embedded-close-plain <1>:         Customizing Calc.    (line 174)
* calc-embedded-mode-hook:               Hooks.               (line  55)
* calc-embedded-new-buffer-hook:         Hooks.               (line  58)
* calc-embedded-new-formula-hook:        Hooks.               (line  62)
* calc-embedded-open-close-formula-alist: Customizing Calc.   (line 130)
* calc-embedded-open-close-mode-alist:   Customizing Calc.    (line 236)
* calc-embedded-open-close-new-formula-alist: Customizing Calc.
                                                              (line 211)
* calc-embedded-open-close-plain-alist:  Customizing Calc.    (line 175)
* calc-embedded-open-formula:            Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  15)
* calc-embedded-open-formula <1>:        Customizing Calc.    (line 128)
* calc-embedded-open-mode:               Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line 120)
* calc-embedded-open-mode <1>:           Customizing Calc.    (line 234)
* calc-embedded-open-new-formula:        Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  92)
* calc-embedded-open-new-formula <1>:    Customizing Calc.    (line 209)
* calc-embedded-open-plain:              Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  79)
* calc-embedded-open-plain <1>:          Customizing Calc.    (line 173)
* calc-embedded-word-regexp:             Customizing Embedded Mode.
                                                              (line  75)
* calc-embedded-word-regexp <1>:         Customizing Calc.    (line 157)
* calc-embedded-word-regexp-alist:       Customizing Calc.    (line 158)
* calc-end-hook:                         Hooks.               (line  35)
* calc-gnuplot-default-device:           Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gnuplot-default-output:           Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gnuplot-name:                     Graphics.            (line  12)
* calc-gnuplot-name <1>:                 Customizing Calc.    (line  46)
* calc-gnuplot-plot-command:             Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gnuplot-plot-command <1>:         Customizing Calc.    (line  55)
* calc-gnuplot-print-command:            Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gnuplot-print-command <1>:        Customizing Calc.    (line  56)
* calc-gnuplot-print-device:             Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gnuplot-print-output:             Devices.             (line  77)
* calc-gregorian-switch:                 Customizing Calc.    (line 333)
* calc-highlight-selections-with-faces:  Displaying Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-highlight-selections-with-faces <1>: Customizing Calc. (line 289)
* calc-language-alist:                   Customizing Calc.    (line  69)
* calc-local-var-list:                   Hooks.               (line 125)
* calc-lu-field-reference:               Logarithmic Units.   (line  42)
* calc-lu-field-reference <1>:           Customizing Calc.    (line 272)
* calc-lu-power-reference:               Logarithmic Units.   (line  42)
* calc-lu-power-reference <1>:           Customizing Calc.    (line 271)
* calc-mode-hook:                        Hooks.               (line  19)
* calc-mode-map:                         Hooks.               (line  89)
* calc-mode-save-hook:                   Hooks.               (line  73)
* calc-mode-var-list:                    Hooks.               (line 118)
* calc-multiplication-has-precedence:    Customizing Calc.    (line 304)
* calc-nonselected-face:                 Displaying Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-nonselected-face <1>:             Customizing Calc.    (line 291)
* calc-note-threshold:                   Customizing Calc.    (line 281)
* calc-other-modes:                      Hooks.               (line  82)
* calc-reset-hook:                       Hooks.               (line  78)
* calc-selected-face:                    Displaying Selections.
                                                              (line   6)
* calc-selected-face <1>:                Customizing Calc.    (line 290)
* calc-settings-file:                    Customizing Calc.    (line  34)
* calc-start-hook:                       Hooks.               (line  13)
* calc-store-var-map:                    Hooks.               (line 108)
* calc-trail-mode-hook:                  Hooks.               (line  29)
* calc-trail-window-hook:                Hooks.               (line  49)
* calc-undo-length:                      Customizing Calc.    (line 325)
* calc-window-hook:                      Hooks.               (line  41)
* calc-Y-help-msgs:                      Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  87)
* CommuteRules:                          Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  74)
* Decls:                                 Declaration Basics.  (line  23)
* DistribRules:                          Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  55)
* e:                                     Variables.           (line  39)
* e <1>:                                 Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* EvalRules:                             Automatic Rewrites.  (line   6)
* ExtSimpRules:                          Automatic Rewrites.  (line 147)
* FactorRules:                           Polynomials.         (line  39)
* FitRules:                              Curve Fitting Details.
                                                              (line 149)
* gamma:                                 Variables.           (line  39)
* gamma <1>:                             Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* GenCount:                              Multiple Solutions.  (line  35)
* Holidays:                              Business Days.       (line  25)
* i:                                     Variables.           (line  39)
* i <1>:                                 Complex Formats.     (line  15)
* inf:                                   Infinities.          (line   6)
* IntegAfterRules:                       Customizing the Integrator.
                                                              (line  90)
* IntegLimit:                            Integration.         (line  47)
* IntegRules:                            Customizing the Integrator.
                                                              (line   6)
* IntegSimpRules:                        Customizing the Integrator.
                                                              (line  77)
* InvertRules:                           Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  98)
* JumpRules:                             Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line 103)
* LineStyles:                            Graphics Options.    (line 103)
* math-daylight-savings-hook:            Time Zones.          (line  92)
* math-tzone-names:                      Time Zones.          (line  62)
* MergeRules:                            Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  68)
* Model1:                                Standard Nonlinear Models.
                                                              (line 124)
* Model2:                                Standard Nonlinear Models.
                                                              (line 124)
* Modes:                                 Modes Variable.      (line  12)
* nan:                                   Infinities.          (line   6)
* NegateRules:                           Rearranging with Selections.
                                                              (line  90)
* phi:                                   Variables.           (line  39)
* pi:                                    Variables.           (line  39)
* pi <1>:                                Scientific Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* PlotData1:                             Managing Curves.     (line  29)
* PlotData2:                             Managing Curves.     (line  29)
* PlotRejects:                           Basic Graphics.      (line  58)
* PointStyles:                           Graphics Options.    (line 103)
* q0:                                    Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* q9:                                    Storing Variables.   (line   6)
* RandSeed:                              Random Numbers.      (line  48)
* remember:                              Other Features of Rewrite Rules.
                                                              (line 264)
* TimeZone:                              Time Zones.          (line  72)
* uinf:                                  Infinities.          (line   6)
* Units:                                 User-Defined Units.  (line   9)
* UnitSimpRules:                         Automatic Rewrites.  (line 147)


File: calc.info,  Node: Lisp Function Index,  Prev: Variable Index,  Up: Top

Index of Lisp Math Functions
****************************

The following functions are meant to be used with ‘defmath’, not ‘defun’
definitions.  For names that do not start with ‘calc-’, the
corresponding full Lisp name is derived by adding a prefix of ‘math-’.

[index]
* Menu:

* abs-approx:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 155)
* anglep:                                Predicates.          (line  81)
* apply-rewrites:                        Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 225)
* beforep:                               Predicates.          (line 150)
* build-polynomial-expr:                 Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 454)
* build-vector:                          Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  33)
* calc-binary-op:                        Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 131)
* calc-change-current-selection:         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  49)
* calc-check-defines:                    Defining Functions.  (line 175)
* calc-clear-command-flag:               Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* calc-cursor-stack-index:               Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 149)
* calc-do-alg-entry:                     Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  29)
* calc-encase-atoms:                     Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* calc-enter-result:                     Defining Stack Commands.
                                                              (line  59)
* calc-enter-result <1>:                 Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* calc-eval:                             Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-find-assoc-parent-formula:        Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  71)
* calc-find-nth-part:                    Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  56)
* calc-find-parent-formula:              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  63)
* calc-find-selected-part:               Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* calc-find-sub-formula:                 Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  84)
* calc-grow-assoc-formula:               Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  78)
* calc-is-hyperbolic:                    Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  54)
* calc-is-inverse:                       Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  50)
* calc-normalize:                        Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  69)
* calc-pop-stack:                        Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  52)
* calc-prepare-selection:                Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-push-list:                        Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* calc-record-list:                      Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  63)
* calc-record-undo:                      Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  22)
* calc-record-why:                       Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  36)
* calc-refresh:                          Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 164)
* calc-replace-sub-formula:              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  91)
* calc-select-buffer:                    Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  52)
* calc-set-command-flag:                 Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  56)
* calc-set-command-flag <1>:             Interactive Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  12)
* calc-slow-wrapper:                     Defining Stack Commands.
                                                              (line  49)
* calc-stack-size:                       Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 144)
* calc-substack-height:                  Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 156)
* calc-top-list:                         Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  25)
* calc-top-list-n:                       Defining Stack Commands.
                                                              (line  54)
* calc-top-list-n <1>:                   Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  78)
* calc-top-n:                            Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  89)
* calc-unary-op:                         Stack Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 120)
* calc-wrapper:                          Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line  38)
* cancel-common-factor:                  Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 181)
* check-unit-name:                       Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 461)
* col-matrix:                            Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* common-constant-factor:                Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 175)
* comp-ascent:                           Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 106)
* comp-descent:                          Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 110)
* comp-first-char:                       Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 114)
* comp-height:                           Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 103)
* comp-last-char:                        Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 119)
* comp-width:                            Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 100)
* compare:                               Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 104)
* compile-rewrites:                      Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 217)
* complete:                              Argument Qualifiers. (line  21)
* complexp:                              Predicates.          (line  89)
* compose-expr:                          Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  79)
* composition-to-string:                 Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  93)
* constp:                                Predicates.          (line 136)
* convert-temp:                          Calling Calc from Your Programs.
                                                              (line 304)
* copy-matrix:                           Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 102)
* defmath:                               Defining Functions.  (line   6)
* deriv:                                 Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 251)
* dimension-error:                       Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  28)
* div-mod:                               Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 199)
* e:                                     Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* equal:                                 Predicates.          (line 160)
* equal-int:                             Predicates.          (line 172)
* evaluate-expr:                         Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  44)
* evenp:                                 Predicates.          (line  63)
* expr-contains:                         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 355)
* expr-contains-count:                   Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 364)
* expr-contains-vars:                    Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 373)
* expr-depends:                          Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 368)
* expr-height:                           Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 394)
* expr-subst:                            Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 377)
* expr-weight:                           Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 389)
* extract-units:                         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 493)
* fixnatnump:                            Predicates.          (line  47)
* fixnum:                                Argument Qualifiers. (line  36)
* fixnum <1>:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 122)
* fixnump:                               Predicates.          (line  41)
* flatten-vector:                        Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  98)
* float:                                 Argument Qualifiers. (line  42)
* float <1>:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  97)
* floatp:                                Predicates.          (line  84)
* format-flat-expr:                      Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  51)
* format-nice-expr:                      Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  62)
* format-number:                         Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  48)
* format-value:                          Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  69)
* frac-gcd:                              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 197)
* from-hms:                              Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 219)
* from-radians:                          Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 229)
* from-radians-2:                        Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 237)
* full-circle:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 182)
* gamma-const:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* half-circle:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 182)
* idiv:                                  Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 135)
* idivmod:                               Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 147)
* imod:                                  Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 141)
* inexact-value:                         Predicates.          (line 210)
* integ:                                 Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 285)
* integer:                               Argument Qualifiers. (line  28)
* integer-log2:                          Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 194)
* integerp:                              Predicates.          (line  38)
* interactive:                           Defining Simple Commands.
                                                              (line   6)
* is-polynomial:                         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 409)
* is-true:                               Predicates.          (line 199)
* isqrt:                                 Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 208)
* lessp:                                 Predicates.          (line 141)
* ln-10:                                 Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* ln-2:                                  Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* looks-evenp:                           Predicates.          (line  66)
* looks-negp:                            Predicates.          (line  32)
* make-float:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  67)
* make-frac:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  63)
* make-intv:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  80)
* make-mod:                              Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  91)
* make-sdev:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  73)
* make-vec:                              Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  38)
* map-tree:                              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 204)
* map-vec:                               Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  53)
* map-vec-2:                             Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  58)
* mat-col:                               Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  84)
* mat-dimens:                            Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* mat-less-col:                          Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  92)
* mat-less-row:                          Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  88)
* mat-row:                               Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  79)
* match-patterns:                        Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 245)
* math-concat:                           Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line   9)
* math-defcache:                         Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 168)
* math-defintegral:                      Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 289)
* math-defintegral-2:                    Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 317)
* math-defsimplify:                      Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 128)
* math-equal:                            Predicates.          (line 166)
* math-prev-weekday-in-month:            Time Zones.          (line 119)
* math-std-daylight-savings:             Time Zones.          (line  92)
* matrixp:                               Predicates.          (line 112)
* messy-integerp:                        Predicates.          (line  55)
* multi-subst:                           Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 383)
* natnum:                                Argument Qualifiers. (line  33)
* natnump:                               Predicates.          (line  44)
* nearly-equal:                          Predicates.          (line 178)
* nearly-zerop:                          Predicates.          (line 192)
* negp:                                  Predicates.          (line  21)
* normalize:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  19)
* num-integerp:                          Predicates.          (line  50)
* num-natnump:                           Predicates.          (line  60)
* numberp:                               Predicates.          (line  99)
* numdigs:                               Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 109)
* numvecp:                               Predicates.          (line 109)
* objectp:                               Predicates.          (line 119)
* objvecp:                               Predicates.          (line 125)
* oddp:                                  Predicates.          (line  70)
* overflow:                              Predicates.          (line 220)
* phi:                                   Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* pi:                                    Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* pi-over-180:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* pi-over-2:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* pi-over-4:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* polar-complexp:                        Predicates.          (line  96)
* poly-mix:                              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 444)
* poly-mul:                              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 450)
* poly-simplify:                         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 440)
* polynomial-base:                       Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 429)
* polynomial-p:                          Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 399)
* posp:                                  Predicates.          (line  28)
* pow:                                   Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 151)
* pow-mod:                               Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 203)
* power-of-2:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 189)
* prime-test:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 251)
* primp:                                 Predicates.          (line 130)
* quarter-circle:                        Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 182)
* quarter-integer:                       Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 277)
* quotient:                              Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 130)
* random-digit:                          Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 241)
* random-digits:                         Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 244)
* random-float:                          Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 248)
* ratp:                                  Predicates.          (line  73)
* read-expr:                             Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  18)
* read-exprs:                            Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  24)
* read-number:                           Formatting Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  13)
* realp:                                 Predicates.          (line  77)
* rect-complexp:                         Predicates.          (line  93)
* reduce-cols:                           Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  74)
* reduce-vec:                            Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  69)
* reject-arg:                            Predicates.          (line 204)
* remove-units:                          Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 489)
* rewrite:                               Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 240)
* rewrite-heads:                         Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 236)
* row-matrix:                            Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  43)
* scalarp:                               Predicates.          (line 102)
* scale-int:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 114)
* scale-rounding:                        Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 118)
* simplify:                              Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* simplify-extended:                     Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 113)
* simplify-units:                        Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 123)
* single-units-in-expr-p:                Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 476)
* solve-eqn:                             Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 344)
* solve-for:                             Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 323)
* solve-system:                          Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 350)
* sort-intv:                             Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  86)
* sqr:                                   Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 127)
* sqrt-e:                                Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* sqrt-two-pi:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* square-matrixp:                        Predicates.          (line 116)
* swap-rows:                             Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 109)
* tderiv:                                Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 280)
* to-fraction:                           Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 272)
* to-hms:                                Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 213)
* to-radians:                            Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 225)
* to-radians-2:                          Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 233)
* to-simple-fraction:                    Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 266)
* to-standard-units:                     Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 482)
* transpose:                             Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  95)
* two-pi:                                Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 160)
* underflow:                             Predicates.          (line 224)
* units-in-expr-p:                       Symbolic Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line 470)
* vec-length:                            Vector Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  13)
* vectorp:                               Predicates.          (line 105)
* with-extra-prec:                       Computational Lisp Functions.
                                                              (line  49)
* zerop:                                 Predicates.          (line  13)



Tag Table:
Node: Top974
Node: Getting Started4284
Node: What is Calc4752
Node: About This Manual6842
Node: Notations Used in This Manual10151
Node: Demonstration of Calc12161
Node: Using Calc17333
Node: Starting Calc17851
Node: The Standard Interface19339
Node: Quick Mode Overview24071
Node: Keypad Mode Overview25169
Node: Standalone Operation28063
Node: Embedded Mode Overview28728
Node: Other C-x * Commands32679
Node: History and Acknowledgments37367
Node: Interactive Tutorial42446
Node: Tutorial43525
Node: Basic Tutorial45315
Node: RPN Tutorial45889
Node: Algebraic Tutorial60472
Node: Undo Tutorial71436
Node: Modes Tutorial77530
Node: Arithmetic Tutorial94370
Node: Vector/Matrix Tutorial107021
Node: Vector Analysis Tutorial107502
Node: Matrix Tutorial111639
Node: List Tutorial119014
Node: Types Tutorial140758
Node: Algebra Tutorial159216
Node: Basic Algebra Tutorial159598
Node: Rewrites Tutorial174122
Node: Programming Tutorial189888
Node: Answers to Exercises211824
Node: RPN Answer 1215384
Node: RPN Answer 2215650
Node: RPN Answer 3217299
Node: RPN Answer 4218383
Node: Algebraic Answer 1219755
Node: Algebraic Answer 2220289
Node: Algebraic Answer 3220759
Node: Modes Answer 1221616
Node: Modes Answer 2225206
Node: Modes Answer 3226380
Node: Modes Answer 4227771
Node: Arithmetic Answer 1228829
Node: Arithmetic Answer 2229787
Node: Vector Answer 1230386
Node: Vector Answer 2231006
Node: Matrix Answer 1231444
Node: Matrix Answer 2231780
Node: Matrix Answer 3232564
Node: List Answer 1234769
Node: List Answer 2235586
Node: List Answer 3237300
Node: List Answer 4238406
Node: List Answer 5239594
Node: List Answer 6240919
Node: List Answer 7241207
Node: List Answer 8242965
Node: List Answer 9245601
Node: List Answer 10248355
Node: List Answer 11249133
Node: List Answer 12250996
Node: List Answer 13254106
Node: List Answer 14257538
Node: Types Answer 1259771
Node: Types Answer 2261083
Node: Types Answer 3262781
Node: Types Answer 4263925
Node: Types Answer 5264571
Node: Types Answer 6266014
Node: Types Answer 7267624
Node: Types Answer 8268683
Node: Types Answer 9270334
Node: Types Answer 10271179
Node: Types Answer 11272834
Node: Types Answer 12273985
Node: Types Answer 13274541
Node: Types Answer 14274799
Node: Types Answer 15275562
Node: Algebra Answer 1276484
Node: Algebra Answer 2277032
Node: Algebra Answer 3278083
Node: Algebra Answer 4278899
Node: Rewrites Answer 1280398
Node: Rewrites Answer 2281556
Node: Rewrites Answer 3283009
Node: Rewrites Answer 4284284
Node: Rewrites Answer 5286056
Node: Rewrites Answer 6286659
Node: Programming Answer 1290083
Node: Programming Answer 2290742
Node: Programming Answer 3291505
Node: Programming Answer 4292515
Node: Programming Answer 5292789
Node: Programming Answer 6293289
Node: Programming Answer 7294170
Node: Programming Answer 8295451
Node: Programming Answer 9298407
Node: Programming Answer 10301936
Node: Programming Answer 11304619
Node: Programming Answer 12308044
Node: Introduction309056
Node: Basic Commands309571
Node: Help Commands316038
Node: Stack Basics320809
Node: Numeric Entry323132
Node: Algebraic Entry324667
Node: Quick Calculator330016
Node: Prefix Arguments333386
Node: Undo335927
Node: Error Messages338228
Node: Multiple Calculators339559
Node: Troubleshooting Commands340834
Node: Autoloading Problems341297
Node: Recursion Depth342101
Node: Caches343141
Node: Debugging Calc344426
Node: Data Types347046
Node: Integers348332
Node: Fractions349530
Node: Floats350429
Node: Complex Numbers354267
Node: Infinities355636
Node: Vectors and Matrices359827
Node: Strings361567
Node: HMS Forms364320
Node: Date Forms365902
Node: Modulo Forms374440
Node: Error Forms377813
Node: Interval Forms381756
Node: Incomplete Objects386417
Node: Variables388493
Node: Formulas391417
Node: Stack and Trail398053
Node: Stack Manipulation398514
Node: Editing Stack Entries404185
Node: Trail Commands406935
Node: Keep Arguments410787
Node: Mode Settings412994
Node: General Mode Commands413540
Node: Precision417560
Node: Inverse and Hyperbolic420416
Node: Calculation Modes422256
Node: Angular Modes422827
Node: Polar Mode424051
Node: Fraction Mode424728
Node: Infinite Mode425759
Node: Symbolic Mode427641
Node: Matrix Mode428937
Node: Automatic Recomputation432679
Node: Working Message433755
Node: Simplification Modes434905
Node: Declarations438505
Node: Declaration Basics438992
Node: Kinds of Declarations441805
Node: Functions for Declarations450120
Node: Display Modes454657
Node: Radix Modes456452
Node: Grouping Digits459271
Node: Float Formats461022
Node: Complex Formats463991
Node: Fraction Formats465142
Node: HMS Formats467025
Node: Date Formats468474
Node: ISO 8601469628
Node: Date Formatting Codes472853
Node: Free-Form Dates478572
Node: Standard Date Formats481680
Node: Truncating the Stack483057
Node: Justification484555
Node: Labels487343
Node: Language Modes488617
Node: Normal Language Modes491071
Node: C FORTRAN Pascal494573
Node: TeX and LaTeX Language Modes498328
Node: Eqn Language Mode506130
Node: Yacas Language Mode510065
Node: Maxima Language Mode511414
Node: Giac Language Mode512549
Node: Mathematica Language Mode513717
Node: Maple Language Mode514759
Node: Compositions516194
Node: Composition Basics517763
Node: Horizontal Compositions522796
Node: Vertical Compositions524328
Node: Other Compositions526991
Node: Information about Compositions529313
Node: User-Defined Compositions530693
Node: Syntax Tables535836
Node: Syntax Table Basics536821
Node: Precedence in Syntax Tables543158
Node: Advanced Syntax Patterns544425
Node: Conditional Syntax Rules548996
Node: Modes Variable552155
Node: Calc Mode Line556007
Node: Arithmetic561505
Node: Basic Arithmetic562673
Node: Integer Truncation576954
Node: Complex Number Functions580798
Node: Conversions582851
Node: Date Arithmetic589808
Node: Date Conversions590861
Node: Date Functions594439
Node: Business Days600999
Node: Time Zones607745
Node: Financial Functions617800
Node: Percentages618828
Node: Future Value621738
Node: Present Value624622
Node: Related Financial Functions628355
Node: Depreciation Functions631409
Node: Definitions of Financial Functions634143
Node: Binary Functions639654
Node: Scientific Functions646694
Node: Logarithmic Functions648396
Node: Trigonometric and Hyperbolic Functions650643
Node: Advanced Math Functions654619
Node: Branch Cuts658242
Node: Random Numbers664708
Node: Random Number Generator670230
Node: Combinatorial Functions675052
Node: Probability Distribution Functions682249
Node: Matrix Functions686055
Node: Packing and Unpacking687091
Node: Building Vectors695958
Node: Extracting Elements701687
Node: Manipulating Vectors706157
Node: Vector and Matrix Arithmetic715146
Node: Set Operations718706
Node: Statistical Operations726141
Node: Single-Variable Statistics727157
Node: Paired-Sample Statistics735716
Node: Reducing and Mapping737513
Node: Specifying Operators738549
Node: Mapping745107
Node: Reducing749997
Node: Nesting and Fixed Points753294
Node: Generalized Products756989
Node: Vector and Matrix Formats758676
Node: Algebra763442
Node: Selecting Subformulas764809
Node: Making Selections765657
Node: Changing Selections771810
Node: Displaying Selections775872
Node: Operating on Selections776952
Node: Rearranging with Selections783092
Node: Algebraic Manipulation793922
Node: Simplifying Formulas801980
Node: Basic Simplifications804132
Node: Algebraic Simplifications817689
Node: Unsafe Simplifications827426
Node: Simplification of Units831151
Node: Polynomials835020
Node: Calculus845137
Node: Differentiation845671
Node: Integration848309
Node: Customizing the Integrator852095
Node: Numerical Integration858688
Node: Taylor Series860712
Node: Solving Equations861595
Node: Multiple Solutions863049
Node: Solving Systems of Equations868496
Node: Decomposing Polynomials871671
Node: Numerical Solutions877858
Node: Root Finding878526
Node: Minimization882180
Node: Numerical Systems of Equations884855
Node: Curve Fitting886231
Node: Linear Fits887247
Node: Polynomial and Multilinear Fits892689
Node: Error Estimates for Fits897011
Node: Standard Nonlinear Models901856
Node: Curve Fitting Details909295
Node: Interpolation923853
Node: Summations926729
Node: Logical Operations934250
Node: Rewrite Rules946839
Node: Entering Rewrite Rules948284
Node: Basic Rewrite Rules951218
Node: Conditional Rewrite Rules953501
Node: Algebraic Properties of Rewrite Rules958154
Node: Other Features of Rewrite Rules969446
Node: Composing Patterns in Rewrite Rules985165
Node: Nested Formulas with Rewrite Rules990206
Node: Multi-Phase Rewrite Rules993968
Node: Selections with Rewrite Rules999512
Node: Matching Commands1003248
Node: Automatic Rewrites1005083
Node: Debugging Rewrites1013974
Node: Examples of Rewrite Rules1014925
Node: Units1019689
Node: Basic Operations on Units1020270
Node: The Units Table1030439
Node: Predefined Units1033240
Node: User-Defined Units1038338
Node: Logarithmic Units1042248
Node: Musical Notes1047926
Node: Store and Recall1050599
Node: Storing Variables1051120
Node: Recalling Variables1059350
Node: Operations on Variables1060288
Node: Let Command1064313
Node: Evaluates-To Operator1066129
Node: Graphics1071859
Node: Basic Graphics1073096
Node: Three Dimensional Graphics1077244
Node: Managing Curves1080440
Node: Graphics Options1088171
Node: Devices1094972
Ref: Devices-Footnote-11103879
Node: Kill and Yank1104179
Node: Killing From Stack1104746
Node: Yanking Into Stack1106717
Node: Saving Into Registers1108514
Node: Inserting From Registers1110040
Node: Grabbing From Buffers1110626
Node: Yanking Into Buffers1116355
Node: X Cut and Paste1119449
Node: Keypad Mode1120963
Node: Keypad Main Menu1123082
Node: Keypad Functions Menu1127869
Node: Keypad Binary Menu1129154
Node: Keypad Vectors Menu1130369
Node: Keypad Modes Menu1133708
Node: Embedded Mode1135803
Node: Basic Embedded Mode1136356
Node: More About Embedded Mode1143394
Node: Assignments in Embedded Mode1150035
Node: Mode Settings in Embedded Mode1158938
Node: Customizing Embedded Mode1165128
Node: Programming1172580
Node: Creating User Keys1174514
Node: Keyboard Macros1177932
Node: Naming Keyboard Macros1179923
Node: Conditionals in Macros1182498
Node: Loops in Macros1186090
Node: Local Values in Macros1190242
Node: Queries in Macros1193280
Node: Invocation Macros1194833
Node: Algebraic Definitions1196447
Node: Lisp Definitions1202550
Node: Defining Functions1204081
Node: Defining Simple Commands1213323
Node: Defining Stack Commands1219181
Node: Argument Qualifiers1223242
Node: Example Definitions1225618
Node: Bit Counting Example1226029
Node: Sine Example1228855
Node: Calling Calc from Your Programs1232475
Node: Internals1247574
Node: Data Type Formats1249381
Node: Interactive Lisp Functions1257105
Node: Stack Lisp Functions1260065
Node: Predicates1269464
Node: Computational Lisp Functions1279127
Node: Vector Lisp Functions1292354
Node: Symbolic Lisp Functions1297511
Node: Formatting Lisp Functions1323931
Node: Hooks1330110
Node: Copying1336583
Node: GNU Free Documentation License1374369
Node: Customizing Calc1399725
Node: Reporting Bugs1417812
Node: Summary1418941
Node: Key Index1469464
Node: Command Index1551874
Node: Function Index1612431
Node: Concept Index1669891
Node: Variable Index1703360
Node: Lisp Function Index1715021

End Tag Table


Local Variables:
coding: utf-8
End:
